Trailing whitespaces

Signed-off-by: Gabriel Caruso <carusogabriel34@gmail.com>

1 files changed, 6633 insertions, 6633 deletions

diff --git a/ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c b/ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c
index 320d6355e3..0dd969fed7 100644
--- a/ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c
+++ b/ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
 #define CTIMEOPT_VAL(opt) CTIMEOPT_VAL_(opt)
 
 /*
-** An array of names of all compile-time options.  This array should 
+** An array of names of all compile-time options.  This array should
 ** be sorted A-Z.
 **
 ** This array looks large, but in a typical installation actually uses
@@ -65,8 +65,8 @@
 */
 static const char * const sqlite3azCompileOpt[] = {
 
-/* 
-** BEGIN CODE GENERATED BY tool/mkctime.tcl 
+/*
+** BEGIN CODE GENERATED BY tool/mkctime.tcl
 */
 #if SQLITE_32BIT_ROWID
   "32BIT_ROWID",
@@ -764,8 +764,8 @@ static const char * const sqlite3azCompileOpt[] = {
 #if SQLITE_ZERO_MALLOC
   "ZERO_MALLOC",
 #endif
-/* 
-** END CODE GENERATED BY tool/mkctime.tcl 
+/*
+** END CODE GENERATED BY tool/mkctime.tcl
 */
 };
 
@@ -815,10 +815,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char **sqlite3CompileOptions(int *pnOpt){
 **
 **    PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD  - This branch prevents a buffer overread
 **                                  that would be harmless and undetectable
-**                                  if it did occur.  
+**                                  if it did occur.
 **
 ** In all cases, the special comment must be enclosed in the usual
-** slash-asterisk...asterisk-slash comment marks, with no spaces between the 
+** slash-asterisk...asterisk-slash comment marks, with no spaces between the
 ** asterisks and the comment text.
 */
 
@@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ extern "C" {
 ** be held constant and Z will be incremented or else Y will be incremented
 ** and Z will be reset to zero.
 **
-** Since [version 3.6.18] ([dateof:3.6.18]), 
+** Since [version 3.6.18] ([dateof:3.6.18]),
 ** SQLite source code has been stored in the
 ** <a href="http://www.fossil-scm.org/">Fossil configuration management
 ** system</a>.  ^The SQLITE_SOURCE_ID macro evaluates to
@@ -1175,8 +1175,8 @@ extern "C" {
 ** function is provided for use in DLLs since DLL users usually do not have
 ** direct access to string constants within the DLL.  ^The
 ** sqlite3_libversion_number() function returns an integer equal to
-** [SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER].  ^(The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns 
-** a pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the 
+** [SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER].  ^(The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns
+** a pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the
 ** [SQLITE_SOURCE_ID] C preprocessor macro.  Except if SQLite is built
 ** using an edited copy of [the amalgamation], then the last four characters
 ** of the hash might be different from [SQLITE_SOURCE_ID].)^
@@ -1191,20 +1191,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_libversion_number(void);
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Run-Time Library Compilation Options Diagnostics
 **
-** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_used() function returns 0 or 1 
-** indicating whether the specified option was defined at 
-** compile time.  ^The SQLITE_ prefix may be omitted from the 
-** option name passed to sqlite3_compileoption_used().  
+** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_used() function returns 0 or 1
+** indicating whether the specified option was defined at
+** compile time.  ^The SQLITE_ prefix may be omitted from the
+** option name passed to sqlite3_compileoption_used().
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_get() function allows iterating
 ** over the list of options that were defined at compile time by
 ** returning the N-th compile time option string.  ^If N is out of range,
-** sqlite3_compileoption_get() returns a NULL pointer.  ^The SQLITE_ 
-** prefix is omitted from any strings returned by 
+** sqlite3_compileoption_get() returns a NULL pointer.  ^The SQLITE_
+** prefix is omitted from any strings returned by
 ** sqlite3_compileoption_get().
 **
 ** ^Support for the diagnostic functions sqlite3_compileoption_used()
-** and sqlite3_compileoption_get() may be omitted by specifying the 
+** and sqlite3_compileoption_get() may be omitted by specifying the
 ** [SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS] option at compile time.
 **
 ** See also: SQL functions [sqlite_compileoption_used()] and
@@ -1225,7 +1225,7 @@ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_compileoption_get(int N);
 ** SQLite can be compiled with or without mutexes.  When
 ** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] C preprocessor macro is 1 or 2, mutexes
 ** are enabled and SQLite is threadsafe.  When the
-** [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] macro is 0, 
+** [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] macro is 0,
 ** the mutexes are omitted.  Without the mutexes, it is not safe
 ** to use SQLite concurrently from more than one thread.
 **
@@ -1282,14 +1282,14 @@ typedef struct sqlite3 sqlite3;
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_int64 and sqlite_int64 types can store integer values
 ** between -9223372036854775808 and +9223372036854775807 inclusive.  ^The
-** sqlite3_uint64 and sqlite_uint64 types can store integer values 
+** sqlite3_uint64 and sqlite_uint64 types can store integer values
 ** between 0 and +18446744073709551615 inclusive.
 */
 #ifdef SQLITE_INT64_TYPE
   typedef SQLITE_INT64_TYPE sqlite_int64;
 # ifdef SQLITE_UINT64_TYPE
     typedef SQLITE_UINT64_TYPE sqlite_uint64;
-# else  
+# else
     typedef unsigned SQLITE_INT64_TYPE sqlite_uint64;
 # endif
 #elif defined(_MSC_VER) || defined(__BORLANDC__)
@@ -1332,7 +1332,7 @@ typedef sqlite_uint64 sqlite3_uint64;
 ** destructors are called is arbitrary.
 **
 ** Applications should [sqlite3_finalize | finalize] all [prepared statements],
-** [sqlite3_blob_close | close] all [BLOB handles], and 
+** [sqlite3_blob_close | close] all [BLOB handles], and
 ** [sqlite3_backup_finish | finish] all [sqlite3_backup] objects associated
 ** with the [sqlite3] object prior to attempting to close the object.  ^If
 ** sqlite3_close_v2() is called on a [database connection] that still has
@@ -1369,7 +1369,7 @@ typedef int (*sqlite3_callback)(void*,int,char**, char**);
 ** The sqlite3_exec() interface is a convenience wrapper around
 ** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()], [sqlite3_step()], and [sqlite3_finalize()],
 ** that allows an application to run multiple statements of SQL
-** without having to use a lot of C code. 
+** without having to use a lot of C code.
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_exec() interface runs zero or more UTF-8 encoded,
 ** semicolon-separate SQL statements passed into its 2nd argument,
@@ -1409,7 +1409,7 @@ typedef int (*sqlite3_callback)(void*,int,char**, char**);
 ** from [sqlite3_column_name()].
 **
 ** ^If the 2nd parameter to sqlite3_exec() is a NULL pointer, a pointer
-** to an empty string, or a pointer that contains only whitespace and/or 
+** to an empty string, or a pointer that contains only whitespace and/or
 ** SQL comments, then no SQL statements are evaluated and the database
 ** is not changed.
 **
@@ -1679,7 +1679,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_exec(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: OS Interface Open File Handle
 **
-** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the 
+** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the
 ** [sqlite3_vfs | OS interface layer].  Individual OS interface
 ** implementations will
 ** want to subclass this object by appending additional fields
@@ -1701,7 +1701,7 @@ struct sqlite3_file {
 ** This object defines the methods used to perform various operations
 ** against the open file represented by the [sqlite3_file] object.
 **
-** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element 
+** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element
 ** to a non-NULL pointer, then the sqlite3_io_methods.xClose method
 ** may be invoked even if the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] reported that it failed.  The
 ** only way to prevent a call to xClose following a failed [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen]
@@ -1842,7 +1842,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_CHUNK_SIZE]]
 ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CHUNK_SIZE] opcode is used to request that the VFS
 ** extends and truncates the database file in chunks of a size specified
-** by the user. The fourth argument to [sqlite3_file_control()] should 
+** by the user. The fourth argument to [sqlite3_file_control()] should
 ** point to an integer (type int) containing the new chunk-size to use
 ** for the nominated database. Allocating database file space in large
 ** chunks (say 1MB at a time), may reduce file-system fragmentation and
@@ -1865,24 +1865,24 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_SYNC]]
 ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_SYNC] opcode is generated internally by SQLite and
 ** sent to the VFS immediately before the xSync method is invoked on a
-** database file descriptor. Or, if the xSync method is not invoked 
-** because the user has configured SQLite with 
-** [PRAGMA synchronous | PRAGMA synchronous=OFF] it is invoked in place 
+** database file descriptor. Or, if the xSync method is not invoked
+** because the user has configured SQLite with
+** [PRAGMA synchronous | PRAGMA synchronous=OFF] it is invoked in place
 ** of the xSync method. In most cases, the pointer argument passed with
 ** this file-control is NULL. However, if the database file is being synced
 ** as part of a multi-database commit, the argument points to a nul-terminated
-** string containing the transactions master-journal file name. VFSes that 
-** do not need this signal should silently ignore this opcode. Applications 
-** should not call [sqlite3_file_control()] with this opcode as doing so may 
-** disrupt the operation of the specialized VFSes that do require it.  
+** string containing the transactions master-journal file name. VFSes that
+** do not need this signal should silently ignore this opcode. Applications
+** should not call [sqlite3_file_control()] with this opcode as doing so may
+** disrupt the operation of the specialized VFSes that do require it.
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_COMMIT_PHASETWO]]
 ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_COMMIT_PHASETWO] opcode is generated internally by SQLite
 ** and sent to the VFS after a transaction has been committed immediately
 ** but before the database is unlocked. VFSes that do not need this signal
 ** should silently ignore this opcode. Applications should not call
-** [sqlite3_file_control()] with this opcode as doing so may disrupt the 
-** operation of the specialized VFSes that do require it.  
+** [sqlite3_file_control()] with this opcode as doing so may disrupt the
+** operation of the specialized VFSes that do require it.
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_WIN32_AV_RETRY]]
 ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_WIN32_AV_RETRY] opcode is used to configure automatic
@@ -1929,13 +1929,13 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE]]
 ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE] opcode is invoked by SQLite after opening
 ** a write transaction to indicate that, unless it is rolled back for some
-** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current 
+** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current
 ** transaction. This is used by VACUUM operations.
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME]]
 ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME] opcode can be used to obtain the names of
 ** all [VFSes] in the VFS stack.  The names are of all VFS shims and the
-** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from 
+** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from
 ** [sqlite3_malloc()] and the result is stored in the char* variable
 ** that the fourth parameter of [sqlite3_file_control()] points to.
 ** The caller is responsible for freeing the memory when done.  As with
@@ -1954,7 +1954,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 ** upper-most shim only.
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA]]
-** ^Whenever a [PRAGMA] statement is parsed, an [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] 
+** ^Whenever a [PRAGMA] statement is parsed, an [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA]
 ** file control is sent to the open [sqlite3_file] object corresponding
 ** to the database file to which the pragma statement refers. ^The argument
 ** to the [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] file control is an array of
@@ -1965,7 +1965,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 ** of the char** argument point to a string obtained from [sqlite3_mprintf()]
 ** or the equivalent and that string will become the result of the pragma or
 ** the error message if the pragma fails. ^If the
-** [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] file control returns [SQLITE_NOTFOUND], then normal 
+** [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] file control returns [SQLITE_NOTFOUND], then normal
 ** [PRAGMA] processing continues.  ^If the [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA]
 ** file control returns [SQLITE_OK], then the parser assumes that the
 ** VFS has handled the PRAGMA itself and the parser generates a no-op
@@ -2005,7 +2005,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 ** The argument is a pointer to a value of type sqlite3_int64 that
 ** is an advisory maximum number of bytes in the file to memory map.  The
 ** pointer is overwritten with the old value.  The limit is not changed if
-** the value originally pointed to is negative, and so the current limit 
+** the value originally pointed to is negative, and so the current limit
 ** can be queried by passing in a pointer to a negative number.  This
 ** file-control is used internally to implement [PRAGMA mmap_size].
 **
@@ -2049,7 +2049,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_RBU]]
 ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_RBU] opcode is implemented by the special VFS used by
 ** the RBU extension only.  All other VFS should return SQLITE_NOTFOUND for
-** this opcode.  
+** this opcode.
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_BEGIN_ATOMIC_WRITE]]
 ** If the [SQLITE_FCNTL_BEGIN_ATOMIC_WRITE] opcode returns SQLITE_OK, then
@@ -2066,7 +2066,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_COMMIT_ATOMIC_WRITE]]
 ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_COMMIT_ATOMIC_WRITE] opcode causes all write
-** operations since the previous successful call to 
+** operations since the previous successful call to
 ** [SQLITE_FCNTL_BEGIN_ATOMIC_WRITE] to be performed atomically.
 ** This file control returns [SQLITE_OK] if and only if the writes were
 ** all performed successfully and have been committed to persistent storage.
@@ -2078,7 +2078,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_ROLLBACK_ATOMIC_WRITE]]
 ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_ROLLBACK_ATOMIC_WRITE] opcode causes all write
-** operations since the previous successful call to 
+** operations since the previous successful call to
 ** [SQLITE_FCNTL_BEGIN_ATOMIC_WRITE] to be rolled back.
 ** ^This file control takes the file descriptor out of batch write mode
 ** so that all subsequent write operations are independent.
@@ -2195,14 +2195,14 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3_api_routines;
 ** the [sqlite3_file] can safely store a pointer to the
 ** filename if it needs to remember the filename for some reason.
 ** If the zFilename parameter to xOpen is a NULL pointer then xOpen
-** must invent its own temporary name for the file.  ^Whenever the 
+** must invent its own temporary name for the file.  ^Whenever the
 ** xFilename parameter is NULL it will also be the case that the
 ** flags parameter will include [SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE].
 **
 ** The flags argument to xOpen() includes all bits set in
 ** the flags argument to [sqlite3_open_v2()].  Or if [sqlite3_open()]
 ** or [sqlite3_open16()] is used, then flags includes at least
-** [SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE] | [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE]. 
+** [SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE] | [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE].
 ** If xOpen() opens a file read-only then it sets *pOutFlags to
 ** include [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY].  Other bits in *pOutFlags may be set.
 **
@@ -2244,10 +2244,10 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3_api_routines;
 ** ^The [SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE] flag is always used in conjunction
 ** with the [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE] flag, which are both directly
 ** analogous to the O_EXCL and O_CREAT flags of the POSIX open()
-** API.  The SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE flag, when paired with the 
+** API.  The SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE flag, when paired with the
 ** SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, is used to indicate that file should always
 ** be created, and that it is an error if it already exists.
-** It is <i>not</i> used to indicate the file should be opened 
+** It is <i>not</i> used to indicate the file should be opened
 ** for exclusive access.
 **
 ** ^At least szOsFile bytes of memory are allocated by SQLite
@@ -2285,16 +2285,16 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3_api_routines;
 ** method returns a Julian Day Number for the current date and time as
 ** a floating point value.
 ** ^The xCurrentTimeInt64() method returns, as an integer, the Julian
-** Day Number multiplied by 86400000 (the number of milliseconds in 
-** a 24-hour day).  
+** Day Number multiplied by 86400000 (the number of milliseconds in
+** a 24-hour day).
 ** ^SQLite will use the xCurrentTimeInt64() method to get the current
-** date and time if that method is available (if iVersion is 2 or 
+** date and time if that method is available (if iVersion is 2 or
 ** greater and the function pointer is not NULL) and will fall back
 ** to xCurrentTime() if xCurrentTimeInt64() is unavailable.
 **
 ** ^The xSetSystemCall(), xGetSystemCall(), and xNestSystemCall() interfaces
 ** are not used by the SQLite core.  These optional interfaces are provided
-** by some VFSes to facilitate testing of the VFS code. By overriding 
+** by some VFSes to facilitate testing of the VFS code. By overriding
 ** system calls with functions under its control, a test program can
 ** simulate faults and error conditions that would otherwise be difficult
 ** or impossible to induce.  The set of system calls that can be overridden
@@ -2341,7 +2341,7 @@ struct sqlite3_vfs {
   /*
   ** The methods above are in versions 1 through 3 of the sqlite_vfs object.
   ** New fields may be appended in future versions.  The iVersion
-  ** value will increment whenever this happens. 
+  ** value will increment whenever this happens.
   */
 };
 
@@ -2385,7 +2385,7 @@ struct sqlite3_vfs {
 ** </ul>
 **
 ** When unlocking, the same SHARED or EXCLUSIVE flag must be supplied as
-** was given on the corresponding lock.  
+** was given on the corresponding lock.
 **
 ** The xShmLock method can transition between unlocked and SHARED or
 ** between unlocked and EXCLUSIVE.  It cannot transition between SHARED
@@ -2530,7 +2530,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int, ...);
 ** [database connection] (specified in the first argument).
 **
 ** The second argument to sqlite3_db_config(D,V,...)  is the
-** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code 
+** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code
 ** that indicates what aspect of the [database connection] is being configured.
 ** Subsequent arguments vary depending on the configuration verb.
 **
@@ -2548,7 +2548,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...);
 ** This object is used in only one place in the SQLite interface.
 ** A pointer to an instance of this object is the argument to
 ** [sqlite3_config()] when the configuration option is
-** [SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMALLOC].  
+** [SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMALLOC].
 ** By creating an instance of this object
 ** and passing it to [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC])
 ** during configuration, an application can specify an alternative
@@ -2578,7 +2578,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...);
 ** allocators round up memory allocations at least to the next multiple
 ** of 8.  Some allocators round up to a larger multiple or to a power of 2.
 ** Every memory allocation request coming in through [sqlite3_malloc()]
-** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup.  If xRoundup returns 0, 
+** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup.  If xRoundup returns 0,
 ** that causes the corresponding memory allocation to fail.
 **
 ** The xInit method initializes the memory allocator.  For example,
@@ -2636,7 +2636,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** by a single thread.   ^If SQLite is compiled with
 ** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE | SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] compile-time option then
 ** it is not possible to change the [threading mode] from its default
-** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return 
+** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return
 ** [SQLITE_ERROR] if called with the SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD
 ** configuration option.</dd>
 **
@@ -2671,7 +2671,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** SQLITE_CONFIG_SERIALIZED configuration option.</dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC</dt>
-** <dd> ^(The SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC option takes a single argument which is 
+** <dd> ^(The SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC option takes a single argument which is
 ** a pointer to an instance of the [sqlite3_mem_methods] structure.
 ** The argument specifies
 ** alternative low-level memory allocation routines to be used in place of
@@ -2721,7 +2721,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE</dt>
 ** <dd> ^The SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE option specifies a memory pool
 ** that SQLite can use for the database page cache with the default page
-** cache implementation.  
+** cache implementation.
 ** This configuration option is a no-op if an application-define page
 ** cache implementation is loaded using the [SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2].
 ** ^There are three arguments to SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE: A pointer to
@@ -2749,7 +2749,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** additional cache line. </dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_HEAP]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_HEAP</dt>
-** <dd> ^The SQLITE_CONFIG_HEAP option specifies a static memory buffer 
+** <dd> ^The SQLITE_CONFIG_HEAP option specifies a static memory buffer
 ** that SQLite will use for all of its dynamic memory allocation needs
 ** beyond those provided for by [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE].
 ** ^The SQLITE_CONFIG_HEAP option is only available if SQLite is compiled
@@ -2804,7 +2804,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** configuration on individual connections.)^ </dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2</dt>
-** <dd> ^(The SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2 option takes a single argument which is 
+** <dd> ^(The SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2 option takes a single argument which is
 ** a pointer to an [sqlite3_pcache_methods2] object.  This object specifies
 ** the interface to a custom page cache implementation.)^
 ** ^SQLite makes a copy of the [sqlite3_pcache_methods2] object.</dd>
@@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** <dd> The SQLITE_CONFIG_LOG option is used to configure the SQLite
 ** global [error log].
 ** (^The SQLITE_CONFIG_LOG option takes two arguments: a pointer to a
-** function with a call signature of void(*)(void*,int,const char*), 
+** function with a call signature of void(*)(void*,int,const char*),
 ** and a pointer to void. ^If the function pointer is not NULL, it is
 ** invoked by [sqlite3_log()] to process each logging event.  ^If the
 ** function pointer is NULL, the [sqlite3_log()] interface becomes a no-op.
@@ -2927,7 +2927,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_STMTJRNL_SPILL]]
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_STMTJRNL_SPILL
 ** <dd>^The SQLITE_CONFIG_STMTJRNL_SPILL option takes a single parameter which
-** becomes the [statement journal] spill-to-disk threshold.  
+** becomes the [statement journal] spill-to-disk threshold.
 ** [Statement journals] are held in memory until their size (in bytes)
 ** exceeds this threshold, at which point they are written to disk.
 ** Or if the threshold is -1, statement journals are always held
@@ -2950,7 +2950,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 #define SQLITE_CONFIG_MEMSTATUS     9  /* boolean */
 #define SQLITE_CONFIG_MUTEX        10  /* sqlite3_mutex_methods* */
 #define SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMUTEX     11  /* sqlite3_mutex_methods* */
-/* previously SQLITE_CONFIG_CHUNKALLOC 12 which is now unused. */ 
+/* previously SQLITE_CONFIG_CHUNKALLOC 12 which is now unused. */
 #define SQLITE_CONFIG_LOOKASIDE    13  /* int int */
 #define SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE       14  /* no-op */
 #define SQLITE_CONFIG_GETPCACHE    15  /* no-op */
@@ -2982,7 +2982,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 **
 ** <dl>
 ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE</dt>
-** <dd> ^This option takes three additional arguments that determine the 
+** <dd> ^This option takes three additional arguments that determine the
 ** [lookaside memory allocator] configuration for the [database connection].
 ** ^The first argument (the third parameter to [sqlite3_db_config()] is a
 ** pointer to a memory buffer to use for lookaside memory.
@@ -3000,7 +3000,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** when the "current value" returned by
 ** [sqlite3_db_status](D,[SQLITE_CONFIG_LOOKASIDE],...) is zero.
 ** Any attempt to change the lookaside memory configuration when lookaside
-** memory is in use leaves the configuration unchanged and returns 
+** memory is in use leaves the configuration unchanged and returns
 ** [SQLITE_BUSY].)^</dd>
 **
 ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_FKEY</dt>
@@ -3063,9 +3063,9 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** </dd>
 **
 ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE</dt>
-** <dd> Usually, when a database in wal mode is closed or detached from a 
-** database handle, SQLite checks if this will mean that there are now no 
-** connections at all to the database. If so, it performs a checkpoint 
+** <dd> Usually, when a database in wal mode is closed or detached from a
+** database handle, SQLite checks if this will mean that there are now no
+** connections at all to the database. If so, it performs a checkpoint
 ** operation before closing the connection. This option may be used to
 ** override this behaviour. The first parameter passed to this operation
 ** is an integer - non-zero to disable checkpoints-on-close, or zero (the
@@ -3122,8 +3122,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_extended_result_codes(sqlite3*, int onoff);
 ** ^The sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) interface usually returns the [rowid] of
 ** the most recent successful [INSERT] into a rowid table or [virtual table]
 ** on database connection D. ^Inserts into [WITHOUT ROWID] tables are not
-** recorded. ^If no successful [INSERT]s into rowid tables have ever occurred 
-** on the database connection D, then sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) returns 
+** recorded. ^If no successful [INSERT]s into rowid tables have ever occurred
+** on the database connection D, then sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) returns
 ** zero.
 **
 ** As well as being set automatically as rows are inserted into database
@@ -3133,15 +3133,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_extended_result_codes(sqlite3*, int onoff);
 ** Some virtual table implementations may INSERT rows into rowid tables as
 ** part of committing a transaction (e.g. to flush data accumulated in memory
 ** to disk). In this case subsequent calls to this function return the rowid
-** associated with these internal INSERT operations, which leads to 
+** associated with these internal INSERT operations, which leads to
 ** unintuitive results. Virtual table implementations that do write to rowid
-** tables in this way can avoid this problem by restoring the original 
-** rowid value using [sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid()] before returning 
+** tables in this way can avoid this problem by restoring the original
+** rowid value using [sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid()] before returning
 ** control to the user.
 **
-** ^(If an [INSERT] occurs within a trigger then this routine will 
-** return the [rowid] of the inserted row as long as the trigger is 
-** running. Once the trigger program ends, the value returned 
+** ^(If an [INSERT] occurs within a trigger then this routine will
+** return the [rowid] of the inserted row as long as the trigger is
+** running. Once the trigger program ends, the value returned
 ** by this routine reverts to what it was before the trigger was fired.)^
 **
 ** ^An [INSERT] that fails due to a constraint violation is not a
@@ -3174,7 +3174,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
 ** The sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(D, R) method allows the application to
-** set the value returned by calling sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) to R 
+** set the value returned by calling sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) to R
 ** without inserting a row into the database.
 */
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*,sqlite3_int64);
@@ -3190,37 +3190,37 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*,sqlite3_int64);
 ** returned by this function.
 **
 ** ^Only changes made directly by the INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement are
-** considered - auxiliary changes caused by [CREATE TRIGGER | triggers], 
+** considered - auxiliary changes caused by [CREATE TRIGGER | triggers],
 ** [foreign key actions] or [REPLACE] constraint resolution are not counted.
-** 
-** Changes to a view that are intercepted by 
-** [INSTEAD OF trigger | INSTEAD OF triggers] are not counted. ^The value 
-** returned by sqlite3_changes() immediately after an INSERT, UPDATE or 
-** DELETE statement run on a view is always zero. Only changes made to real 
+**
+** Changes to a view that are intercepted by
+** [INSTEAD OF trigger | INSTEAD OF triggers] are not counted. ^The value
+** returned by sqlite3_changes() immediately after an INSERT, UPDATE or
+** DELETE statement run on a view is always zero. Only changes made to real
 ** tables are counted.
 **
 ** Things are more complicated if the sqlite3_changes() function is
 ** executed while a trigger program is running. This may happen if the
 ** program uses the [changes() SQL function], or if some other callback
 ** function invokes sqlite3_changes() directly. Essentially:
-** 
+**
 ** <ul>
 **   <li> ^(Before entering a trigger program the value returned by
-**        sqlite3_changes() function is saved. After the trigger program 
+**        sqlite3_changes() function is saved. After the trigger program
 **        has finished, the original value is restored.)^
-** 
-**   <li> ^(Within a trigger program each INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE 
-**        statement sets the value returned by sqlite3_changes() 
-**        upon completion as normal. Of course, this value will not include 
-**        any changes performed by sub-triggers, as the sqlite3_changes() 
+**
+**   <li> ^(Within a trigger program each INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE
+**        statement sets the value returned by sqlite3_changes()
+**        upon completion as normal. Of course, this value will not include
+**        any changes performed by sub-triggers, as the sqlite3_changes()
 **        value will be saved and restored after each sub-trigger has run.)^
 ** </ul>
-** 
+**
 ** ^This means that if the changes() SQL function (or similar) is used
-** by the first INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within a trigger, it 
+** by the first INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within a trigger, it
 ** returns the value as set when the calling statement began executing.
-** ^If it is used by the second or subsequent such statement within a trigger 
-** program, the value returned reflects the number of rows modified by the 
+** ^If it is used by the second or subsequent such statement within a trigger
+** program, the value returned reflects the number of rows modified by the
 ** previous INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within the same trigger.
 **
 ** See also the [sqlite3_total_changes()] interface, the
@@ -3241,12 +3241,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_changes(sqlite3*);
 ** since the database connection was opened, including those executed as
 ** part of trigger programs. ^Executing any other type of SQL statement
 ** does not affect the value returned by sqlite3_total_changes().
-** 
+**
 ** ^Changes made as part of [foreign key actions] are included in the
 ** count, but those made as part of REPLACE constraint resolution are
-** not. ^Changes to a view that are intercepted by INSTEAD OF triggers 
+** not. ^Changes to a view that are intercepted by INSTEAD OF triggers
 ** are not counted.
-** 
+**
 ** See also the [sqlite3_changes()] interface, the
 ** [count_changes pragma], and the [total_changes() SQL function].
 **
@@ -3282,7 +3282,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_total_changes(sqlite3*);
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_interrupt(D) call is in effect until all currently running
 ** SQL statements on [database connection] D complete.  ^Any new SQL statements
-** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the 
+** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the
 ** running statements reaches zero are interrupted as if they had been
 ** running prior to the sqlite3_interrupt() call.  ^New SQL statements
 ** that are started after the running statement count reaches zero are
@@ -3314,7 +3314,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_interrupt(sqlite3*);
 ** ^These routines do not parse the SQL statements thus
 ** will not detect syntactically incorrect SQL.
 **
-** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior 
+** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior
 ** to invoking sqlite3_complete16() then sqlite3_initialize() is invoked
 ** automatically by sqlite3_complete16().  If that initialization fails,
 ** then the return value from sqlite3_complete16() will be non-zero
@@ -3359,7 +3359,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_complete16(const void *sql);
 ** The presence of a busy handler does not guarantee that it will be invoked
 ** when there is lock contention. ^If SQLite determines that invoking the busy
 ** handler could result in a deadlock, it will go ahead and return [SQLITE_BUSY]
-** to the application instead of invoking the 
+** to the application instead of invoking the
 ** busy handler.
 ** Consider a scenario where one process is holding a read lock that
 ** it is trying to promote to a reserved lock and
@@ -3384,7 +3384,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_complete16(const void *sql);
 ** database connection that invoked the busy handler.  In other words,
 ** the busy handler is not reentrant.  Any such actions
 ** result in undefined behavior.
-** 
+**
 ** A busy handler must not close the database connection
 ** or [prepared statement] that invoked the busy handler.
 */
@@ -3775,7 +3775,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_randomness(int N, void *P);
 ** requested is ok.  ^When the callback returns [SQLITE_DENY], the
 ** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered the
 ** authorizer will fail with an error message explaining that
-** access is denied. 
+** access is denied.
 **
 ** ^The first parameter to the authorizer callback is a copy of the third
 ** parameter to the sqlite3_set_authorizer() interface. ^The second parameter
@@ -3828,7 +3828,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_randomness(int N, void *P);
 ** database connections for the meaning of "modify" in this paragraph.
 **
 ** ^When [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] is used to prepare a statement, the
-** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a 
+** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a
 ** schema change.  Hence, the application should ensure that the
 ** correct authorizer callback remains in place during the [sqlite3_step()].
 **
@@ -3976,7 +3976,7 @@ SQLITE_API SQLITE_DEPRECATED void *sqlite3_profile(sqlite3*,
 ** execution of the prepared statement, such as at the start of each
 ** trigger subprogram. ^The P argument is a pointer to the
 ** [prepared statement]. ^The X argument is a pointer to a string which
-** is the unexpanded SQL text of the prepared statement or an SQL comment 
+** is the unexpanded SQL text of the prepared statement or an SQL comment
 ** that indicates the invocation of a trigger.  ^The callback can compute
 ** the same text that would have been returned by the legacy [sqlite3_trace()]
 ** interface by using the X argument when X begins with "--" and invoking
@@ -3992,7 +3992,7 @@ SQLITE_API SQLITE_DEPRECATED void *sqlite3_profile(sqlite3*,
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_TRACE_ROW]] <dt>SQLITE_TRACE_ROW</dt>
 ** <dd>^An SQLITE_TRACE_ROW callback is invoked whenever a prepared
-** statement generates a single row of result.  
+** statement generates a single row of result.
 ** ^The P argument is a pointer to the [prepared statement] and the
 ** X argument is unused.
 **
@@ -4019,10 +4019,10 @@ SQLITE_API SQLITE_DEPRECATED void *sqlite3_profile(sqlite3*,
 ** M argument should be the bitwise OR-ed combination of
 ** zero or more [SQLITE_TRACE] constants.
 **
-** ^Each call to either sqlite3_trace() or sqlite3_trace_v2() overrides 
+** ^Each call to either sqlite3_trace() or sqlite3_trace_v2() overrides
 ** (cancels) any prior calls to sqlite3_trace() or sqlite3_trace_v2().
 **
-** ^The X callback is invoked whenever any of the events identified by 
+** ^The X callback is invoked whenever any of the events identified by
 ** mask M occur.  ^The integer return value from the callback is currently
 ** ignored, though this may change in future releases.  Callback
 ** implementations should return zero to ensure future compatibility.
@@ -4054,8 +4054,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_trace_v2(
 ** database connection D.  An example use for this
 ** interface is to keep a GUI updated during a large query.
 **
-** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the 
-** callback function X.  ^The parameter N is the approximate number of 
+** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the
+** callback function X.  ^The parameter N is the approximate number of
 ** [virtual machine instructions] that are evaluated between successive
 ** invocations of the callback X.  ^If N is less than one then the progress
 ** handler is disabled.
@@ -4082,7 +4082,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 ** CAPI3REF: Opening A New Database Connection
 ** CONSTRUCTOR: sqlite3
 **
-** ^These routines open an SQLite database file as specified by the 
+** ^These routines open an SQLite database file as specified by the
 ** filename argument. ^The filename argument is interpreted as UTF-8 for
 ** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open_v2() and as UTF-16 in the native byte
 ** order for sqlite3_open16(). ^(A [database connection] handle is usually
@@ -4107,7 +4107,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 ** except that it accepts two additional parameters for additional control
 ** over the new database connection.  ^(The flags parameter to
 ** sqlite3_open_v2() can take one of
-** the following three values, optionally combined with the 
+** the following three values, optionally combined with the
 ** [SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX], [SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX], [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE],
 ** [SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE], and/or [SQLITE_OPEN_URI] flags:)^
 **
@@ -4175,17 +4175,17 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 ** information.
 **
 ** URI filenames are parsed according to RFC 3986. ^If the URI contains an
-** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string 
-** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an 
-** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if 
+** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string
+** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an
+** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if
 ** present, is ignored.
 **
 ** ^SQLite uses the path component of the URI as the name of the disk file
-** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character, 
-** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin 
+** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character,
+** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin
 ** with a '/' (meaning that the authority section is omitted from the URI)
-** then the path is interpreted as a relative path. 
-** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path 
+** then the path is interpreted as a relative path.
+** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path
 ** is a drive specification (e.g. "C:").)^
 **
 ** [[core URI query parameters]]
@@ -4205,13 +4205,13 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 **
 **   <li> <b>mode</b>: ^(The mode parameter may be set to either "ro", "rw",
 **     "rwc", or "memory". Attempting to set it to any other value is
-**     an error)^. 
-**     ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only 
-**     access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the 
-**     third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to 
-**     "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create) 
-**     access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had 
-**     been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both 
+**     an error)^.
+**     ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only
+**     access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the
+**     third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to
+**     "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create)
+**     access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had
+**     been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both
 **     SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE and SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE.  ^If the mode option is
 **     set to "memory" then a pure [in-memory database] that never reads
 **     or writes from disk is used. ^It is an error to specify a value for
@@ -4221,7 +4221,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 **   <li> <b>cache</b>: ^The cache parameter may be set to either "shared" or
 **     "private". ^Setting it to "shared" is equivalent to setting the
 **     SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE bit in the flags argument passed to
-**     sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is 
+**     sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is
 **     equivalent to setting the SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE bit.
 **     ^If sqlite3_open_v2() is used and the "cache" parameter is present in
 **     a URI filename, its value overrides any behavior requested by setting
@@ -4247,7 +4247,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 **     property on a database file that does in fact change can result
 **     in incorrect query results and/or [SQLITE_CORRUPT] errors.
 **     See also: [SQLITE_IOCAP_IMMUTABLE].
-**       
+**
 ** </ul>
 **
 ** ^Specifying an unknown parameter in the query component of a URI is not an
@@ -4259,36 +4259,36 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 **
 ** <table border="1" align=center cellpadding=5>
 ** <tr><th> URI filenames <th> Results
-** <tr><td> file:data.db <td> 
+** <tr><td> file:data.db <td>
 **          Open the file "data.db" in the current directory.
 ** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db<br>
-**          file:///home/fred/data.db <br> 
-**          file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td> 
+**          file:///home/fred/data.db <br>
+**          file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td>
 **          Open the database file "/home/fred/data.db".
-** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td> 
+** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td>
 **          An error. "darkstar" is not a recognized authority.
-** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap"> 
+** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap">
 **          file:///C:/Documents%20and%20Settings/fred/Desktop/data.db
 **     <td> Windows only: Open the file "data.db" on fred's desktop on drive
-**          C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly 
+**          C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly
 **          necessary - space characters can be used literally
 **          in URI filenames.
-** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td> 
+** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td>
 **          Open file "data.db" in the current directory for read-only access.
 **          Regardless of whether or not shared-cache mode is enabled by
 **          default, use a private cache.
 ** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db?vfs=unix-dotfile <td>
 **          Open file "/home/fred/data.db". Use the special VFS "unix-dotfile"
 **          that uses dot-files in place of posix advisory locking.
-** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td> 
+** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td>
 **          An error. "readonly" is not a valid option for the "mode" parameter.
 ** </table>
 **
 ** ^URI hexadecimal escape sequences (%HH) are supported within the path and
 ** query components of a URI. A hexadecimal escape sequence consists of a
-** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits 
+** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits
 ** specifying an octet value. ^Before the path or query components of a
-** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all 
+** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all
 ** hexadecimal escape sequences replaced by a single byte containing the
 ** corresponding octet. If this process generates an invalid UTF-8 encoding,
 ** the results are undefined.
@@ -4324,15 +4324,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** CAPI3REF: Obtain Values For URI Parameters
 **
 ** These are utility routines, useful to VFS implementations, that check
-** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query 
+** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
 ** parameter, and if so obtains the value of that query parameter.
 **
-** If F is the database filename pointer passed into the xOpen() method of 
-** a VFS implementation when the flags parameter to xOpen() has one or 
+** If F is the database filename pointer passed into the xOpen() method of
+** a VFS implementation when the flags parameter to xOpen() has one or
 ** more of the [SQLITE_OPEN_URI] or [SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB] bits set and
 ** P is the name of the query parameter, then
 ** sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns the value of the P
-** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a 
+** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a
 ** query parameter on F.  If P is a query parameter of F
 ** has no explicit value, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns
 ** a pointer to an empty string.
@@ -4341,7 +4341,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** parameter and returns true (1) or false (0) according to the value
 ** of P.  The sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routine returns true (1) if the
 ** value of query parameter P is one of "yes", "true", or "on" in any
-** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number.  The 
+** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number.  The
 ** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routines returns false (0) if the value of
 ** query parameter P is one of "no", "false", or "off" in any case or
 ** if the value begins with a numeric zero.  If P is not a query
@@ -4352,7 +4352,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** 64-bit signed integer and returns that integer, or D if P does not
 ** exist.  If the value of P is something other than an integer, then
 ** zero is returned.
-** 
+**
 ** If F is a NULL pointer, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns NULL and
 ** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) returns B.  If F is not a NULL pointer and
 ** is not a database file pathname pointer that SQLite passed into the xOpen
@@ -4368,14 +4368,14 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_uri_int64(const char*, const char*, sqlite3_int
 ** CAPI3REF: Error Codes And Messages
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
-** ^If the most recent sqlite3_* API call associated with 
+** ^If the most recent sqlite3_* API call associated with
 ** [database connection] D failed, then the sqlite3_errcode(D) interface
 ** returns the numeric [result code] or [extended result code] for that
 ** API call.
 ** If the most recent API call was successful,
 ** then the return value from sqlite3_errcode() is undefined.
 ** ^The sqlite3_extended_errcode()
-** interface is the same except that it always returns the 
+** interface is the same except that it always returns the
 ** [extended result code] even when extended result codes are
 ** disabled.
 **
@@ -4419,7 +4419,7 @@ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_errstr(int);
 ** has been compiled into binary form and is ready to be evaluated.
 **
 ** Think of each SQL statement as a separate computer program.  The
-** original SQL text is source code.  A prepared statement object 
+** original SQL text is source code.  A prepared statement object
 ** is the compiled object code.  All SQL must be converted into a
 ** prepared statement before it can be run.
 **
@@ -4449,7 +4449,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_stmt sqlite3_stmt;
 ** new limit for that construct.)^
 **
 ** ^If the new limit is a negative number, the limit is unchanged.
-** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a 
+** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a
 ** [limits | hard upper bound]
 ** set at compile-time by a C preprocessor macro called
 ** [limits | SQLITE_MAX_<i>NAME</i>].
@@ -4457,7 +4457,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_stmt sqlite3_stmt;
 ** ^Attempts to increase a limit above its hard upper bound are
 ** silently truncated to the hard upper bound.
 **
-** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the 
+** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the
 ** [sqlite3_limit()] interface returns the prior value of the limit.
 ** ^Hence, to find the current value of a limit without changing it,
 ** simply invoke this interface with the third parameter set to -1.
@@ -4562,7 +4562,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3*, int id, int newVal);
 ** <dd>The SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT flag is a hint to the query planner
 ** that the prepared statement will be retained for a long time and
 ** probably reused many times.)^ ^Without this flag, [sqlite3_prepare_v3()]
-** and [sqlite3_prepare16_v3()] assume that the prepared statement will 
+** and [sqlite3_prepare16_v3()] assume that the prepared statement will
 ** be used just once or at most a few times and then destroyed using
 ** [sqlite3_finalize()] relatively soon. The current implementation acts
 ** on this hint by avoiding the use of [lookaside memory] so as not to
@@ -4654,12 +4654,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3*, int id, int newVal);
 ** </li>
 **
 ** <li>
-** ^If the specific value bound to [parameter | host parameter] in the 
+** ^If the specific value bound to [parameter | host parameter] in the
 ** WHERE clause might influence the choice of query plan for a statement,
-** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been 
+** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been
 ** a schema change, on the first  [sqlite3_step()] call following any change
-** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter]. 
-** ^The specific value of WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the 
+** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter].
+** ^The specific value of WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the
 ** choice of query plan if the parameter is the left-hand side of a [LIKE]
 ** or [GLOB] operator or if the parameter is compared to an indexed column
 ** and the [SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3] compile-time option is enabled.
@@ -4761,8 +4761,8 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_expanded_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** the content of the database file.
 **
 ** Note that [application-defined SQL functions] or
-** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect.  
-** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that 
+** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect.
+** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that
 ** calls [sqlite3_exec()], then the following SQL statement would
 ** change the database file through side-effects:
 **
@@ -4776,10 +4776,10 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_expanded_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** ^Transaction control statements such as [BEGIN], [COMMIT], [ROLLBACK],
 ** [SAVEPOINT], and [RELEASE] cause sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true,
 ** since the statements themselves do not actually modify the database but
-** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the 
+** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the
 ** database.  ^The [ATTACH] and [DETACH] statements also cause
 ** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true since, while those statements
-** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make 
+** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make
 ** changes to the content of the database files on disk.
 ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_readonly() interface returns true for [BEGIN] since
 ** [BEGIN] merely sets internal flags, but the [BEGIN|BEGIN IMMEDIATE] and
@@ -4793,18 +4793,18 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_readonly(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S) interface returns true (non-zero) if the
-** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using 
+** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using
 ** [sqlite3_step(S)] but has neither run to completion (returned
 ** [SQLITE_DONE] from [sqlite3_step(S)]) nor
 ** been reset using [sqlite3_reset(S)].  ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S)
-** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer.  If S is not a 
+** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer.  If S is not a
 ** NULL pointer and is not a pointer to a valid [prepared statement]
 ** object, then the behavior is undefined and probably undesirable.
 **
 ** This interface can be used in combination [sqlite3_next_stmt()]
-** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database 
+** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database
 ** connection that are in need of being reset.  This can be used,
-** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared 
+** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared
 ** statements that are holding a transaction open.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*);
@@ -4823,7 +4823,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*);
 ** will accept either a protected or an unprotected sqlite3_value.
 ** Every interface that accepts sqlite3_value arguments specifies
 ** whether or not it requires a protected sqlite3_value.  The
-** [sqlite3_value_dup()] interface can be used to construct a new 
+** [sqlite3_value_dup()] interface can be used to construct a new
 ** protected sqlite3_value from an unprotected sqlite3_value.
 **
 ** The terms "protected" and "unprotected" refer to whether or not
@@ -4831,7 +4831,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*);
 ** sqlite3_value object but no mutex is held for an unprotected
 ** sqlite3_value object.  If SQLite is compiled to be single-threaded
 ** (with [SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] and with [sqlite3_threadsafe()] returning 0)
-** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes 
+** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes
 ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_MULTITHREAD]
 ** then there is no distinction between protected and unprotected
 ** sqlite3_value objects and they can be used interchangeably.  However,
@@ -4919,7 +4919,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_context sqlite3_context;
 ** or sqlite3_bind_text16() or sqlite3_bind_text64() then
 ** that parameter must be the byte offset
 ** where the NUL terminator would occur assuming the string were NUL
-** terminated.  If any NUL characters occur at byte offsets less than 
+** terminated.  If any NUL characters occur at byte offsets less than
 ** the value of the fourth parameter then the resulting string value will
 ** contain embedded NULs.  The result of expressions involving strings
 ** with embedded NULs is undefined.
@@ -5079,7 +5079,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_clear_bindings(sqlite3_stmt*);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt
 **
 ** ^Return the number of columns in the result set returned by the
-** [prepared statement]. ^If this routine returns 0, that means the 
+** [prepared statement]. ^If this routine returns 0, that means the
 ** [prepared statement] returns no data (for example an [UPDATE]).
 ** ^However, just because this routine returns a positive number does not
 ** mean that one or more rows of data will be returned.  ^A SELECT statement
@@ -5265,7 +5265,7 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_column_decltype16(sqlite3_stmt*,int);
 ** For all versions of SQLite up to and including 3.6.23.1, a call to
 ** [sqlite3_reset()] was required after sqlite3_step() returned anything
 ** other than [SQLITE_ROW] before any subsequent invocation of
-** sqlite3_step().  Failure to reset the prepared statement using 
+** sqlite3_step().  Failure to reset the prepared statement using
 ** [sqlite3_reset()] would result in an [SQLITE_MISUSE] return from
 ** sqlite3_step().  But after [version 3.6.23.1] ([dateof:3.6.23.1],
 ** sqlite3_step() began
@@ -5356,7 +5356,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_int64</b><td>&rarr;<td>64-bit INTEGER result
 ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text</b><td>&rarr;<td>UTF-8 TEXT result
 ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text16</b><td>&rarr;<td>UTF-16 TEXT result
-** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_value</b><td>&rarr;<td>The result as an 
+** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_value</b><td>&rarr;<td>The result as an
 ** [sqlite3_value|unprotected sqlite3_value] object.
 ** <tr><td>&nbsp;<td>&nbsp;<td>&nbsp;
 ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_bytes</b><td>&rarr;<td>Size of a BLOB
@@ -5404,7 +5404,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** The return value of sqlite3_column_type() can be used to decide which
 ** of the first six interface should be used to extract the column value.
 ** The value returned by sqlite3_column_type() is only meaningful if no
-** automatic type conversions have occurred for the value in question.  
+** automatic type conversions have occurred for the value in question.
 ** After a type conversion, the result of calling sqlite3_column_type()
 ** is undefined, though harmless.  Future
 ** versions of SQLite may change the behavior of sqlite3_column_type()
@@ -5432,7 +5432,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** the number of bytes in that string.
 ** ^If the result is NULL, then sqlite3_column_bytes16() returns zero.
 **
-** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and 
+** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and
 ** [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] do not include the zero terminators at the end
 ** of the string.  ^For clarity: the values returned by
 ** [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] are the number of
@@ -5451,7 +5451,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** to routines like [sqlite3_value_int()], [sqlite3_value_text()],
 ** or [sqlite3_value_bytes()], the behavior is not threadsafe.
 ** Hence, the sqlite3_column_value() interface
-** is normally only useful within the implementation of 
+** is normally only useful within the implementation of
 ** [application-defined SQL functions] or [virtual tables], not within
 ** top-level application code.
 **
@@ -5627,7 +5627,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** ^The second parameter is the name of the SQL function to be created or
 ** redefined.  ^The length of the name is limited to 255 bytes in a UTF-8
 ** representation, exclusive of the zero-terminator.  ^Note that the name
-** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes.  
+** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes.
 ** ^Any attempt to create a function with a longer name
 ** will result in [SQLITE_MISUSE] being returned.
 **
@@ -5642,7 +5642,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** ^The fourth parameter, eTextRep, specifies what
 ** [SQLITE_UTF8 | text encoding] this SQL function prefers for
 ** its parameters.  The application should set this parameter to
-** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes 
+** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes
 ** [sqlite3_value_text16le()] on an input, or [SQLITE_UTF16BE] if the
 ** implementation invokes [sqlite3_value_text16be()] on an input, or
 ** [SQLITE_UTF16] if [sqlite3_value_text16()] is used, or [SQLITE_UTF8]
@@ -5673,13 +5673,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** callbacks.
 **
 ** ^(If the ninth parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2() is not NULL,
-** then it is destructor for the application data pointer. 
+** then it is destructor for the application data pointer.
 ** The destructor is invoked when the function is deleted, either by being
 ** overloaded or when the database connection closes.)^
 ** ^The destructor is also invoked if the call to
 ** sqlite3_create_function_v2() fails.
 ** ^When the destructor callback of the tenth parameter is invoked, it
-** is passed a single argument which is a copy of the application data 
+** is passed a single argument which is a copy of the application data
 ** pointer which was the fifth parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2().
 **
 ** ^It is permitted to register multiple implementations of the same
@@ -5690,7 +5690,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** nArg parameter is a better match than a function implementation with
 ** a negative nArg.  ^A function where the preferred text encoding
 ** matches the database encoding is a better
-** match than a function where the encoding is different.  
+** match than a function where the encoding is different.
 ** ^A function where the encoding difference is between UTF16le and UTF16be
 ** is a closer match than a function where the encoding difference is
 ** between UTF8 and UTF16.
@@ -5750,7 +5750,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_function_v2(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Function Flags
 **
-** These constants may be ORed together with the 
+** These constants may be ORed together with the
 ** [SQLITE_UTF8 | preferred text encoding] as the fourth argument
 ** to [sqlite3_create_function()], [sqlite3_create_function16()], or
 ** [sqlite3_create_function_v2()].
@@ -5762,7 +5762,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_function_v2(
 ** DEPRECATED
 **
 ** These functions are [deprecated].  In order to maintain
-** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue 
+** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue
 ** to be supported.  However, new applications should avoid
 ** the use of these functions.  To encourage programmers to avoid
 ** these functions, we will not explain what they do.
@@ -5825,11 +5825,11 @@ SQLITE_API SQLITE_DEPRECATED int sqlite3_memory_alarm(void(*)(void*,sqlite3_int6
 ** sqlite3_value_text16be() and sqlite3_value_text16le() interfaces
 ** extract UTF-16 strings as big-endian and little-endian respectively.
 **
-** ^If [sqlite3_value] object V was initialized 
+** ^If [sqlite3_value] object V was initialized
 ** using [sqlite3_bind_pointer(S,I,P,X,D)] or [sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,X,D)]
 ** and if X and Y are strings that compare equal according to strcmp(X,Y),
 ** then sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) will return the pointer P.  ^Otherwise,
-** sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) returns a NULL. The sqlite3_bind_pointer() 
+** sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) returns a NULL. The sqlite3_bind_pointer()
 ** routine is part of the [pointer passing interface] added for SQLite 3.20.0.
 **
 ** ^(The sqlite3_value_type(V) interface returns the
@@ -5910,7 +5910,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value*);
 ** Implementations of aggregate SQL functions use this
 ** routine to allocate memory for storing their state.
 **
-** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called 
+** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called
 ** for a particular aggregate function, SQLite
 ** allocates N of memory, zeroes out that memory, and returns a pointer
 ** to the new memory. ^On second and subsequent calls to
@@ -5923,7 +5923,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value*);
 ** In those cases, sqlite3_aggregate_context() might be called for the
 ** first time from within xFinal().)^
 **
-** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer 
+** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer
 ** when first called if N is less than or equal to zero or if a memory
 ** allocate error occurs.
 **
@@ -5932,10 +5932,10 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value*);
 ** value of N in subsequent call to sqlite3_aggregate_context() within
 ** the same aggregate function instance will not resize the memory
 ** allocation.)^  Within the xFinal callback, it is customary to set
-** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no 
+** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no
 ** pointless memory allocations occur.
 **
-** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by 
+** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by
 ** sqlite3_aggregate_context() when the aggregate query concludes.
 **
 ** The first parameter must be a copy of the
@@ -5985,7 +5985,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3 *sqlite3_context_db_handle(sqlite3_context*);
 ** some circumstances the associated metadata may be preserved.  An example
 ** of where this might be useful is in a regular-expression matching
 ** function. The compiled version of the regular expression can be stored as
-** metadata associated with the pattern string.  
+** metadata associated with the pattern string.
 ** Then as long as the pattern string remains the same,
 ** the compiled regular expression can be reused on multiple
 ** invocations of the same function.
@@ -6011,10 +6011,10 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3 *sqlite3_context_db_handle(sqlite3_context*);
 **      SQL statement)^, or
 ** <li> ^(when sqlite3_set_auxdata() is invoked again on the same
 **       parameter)^, or
-** <li> ^(during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory 
+** <li> ^(during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory
 **      allocation error occurs.)^ </ul>
 **
-** Note the last bullet in particular.  The destructor X in 
+** Note the last bullet in particular.  The destructor X in
 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata(C,N,P,X) might be called immediately, before the
 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() interface even returns.  Hence sqlite3_set_auxdata()
 ** should be called near the end of the function implementation and the
@@ -6167,7 +6167,7 @@ typedef void (*sqlite3_destructor_type)(void*);
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,T,D) interface sets the result to an
 ** SQL NULL value, just like [sqlite3_result_null(C)], except that it
-** also associates the host-language pointer P or type T with that 
+** also associates the host-language pointer P or type T with that
 ** NULL value such that the pointer can be retrieved within an
 ** [application-defined SQL function] using [sqlite3_value_pointer()].
 ** ^If the D parameter is not NULL, then it is a pointer to a destructor
@@ -6209,8 +6209,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_result_zeroblob64(sqlite3_context*, sqlite3_uint64 n);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_context
 **
 ** The sqlite3_result_subtype(C,T) function causes the subtype of
-** the result from the [application-defined SQL function] with 
-** [sqlite3_context] C to be the value T.  Only the lower 8 bits 
+** the result from the [application-defined SQL function] with
+** [sqlite3_context] C to be the value T.  Only the lower 8 bits
 ** of the subtype T are preserved in current versions of SQLite;
 ** higher order bits are discarded.
 ** The number of subtype bytes preserved by SQLite might increase
@@ -6257,7 +6257,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context*,unsigned int);
 ** deleted.  ^When all collating functions having the same name are deleted,
 ** that collation is no longer usable.
 **
-** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg 
+** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg
 ** application data pointer and with two strings in the encoding specified
 ** by the eTextRep argument.  The collating function must return an
 ** integer that is negative, zero, or positive
@@ -6287,36 +6287,36 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context*,unsigned int);
 ** calls to the collation creation functions or when the
 ** [database connection] is closed using [sqlite3_close()].
 **
-** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the 
+** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the
 ** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() function fails.  Applications that invoke
-** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should 
+** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should
 ** check the return code and dispose of the application data pointer
 ** themselves rather than expecting SQLite to deal with it for them.
-** This is different from every other SQLite interface.  The inconsistency 
-** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards 
+** This is different from every other SQLite interface.  The inconsistency
+** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards
 ** compatibility.
 **
 ** See also:  [sqlite3_collation_needed()] and [sqlite3_collation_needed16()].
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation(
-  sqlite3*, 
-  const char *zName, 
-  int eTextRep, 
+  sqlite3*,
+  const char *zName,
+  int eTextRep,
   void *pArg,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
 );
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
-  sqlite3*, 
-  const char *zName, 
-  int eTextRep, 
+  sqlite3*,
+  const char *zName,
+  int eTextRep,
   void *pArg,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
   void(*xDestroy)(void*)
 );
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16(
-  sqlite3*, 
+  sqlite3*,
   const void *zName,
-  int eTextRep, 
+  int eTextRep,
   void *pArg,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
 );
@@ -6349,12 +6349,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16(
 ** [sqlite3_create_collation_v2()].
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed(
-  sqlite3*, 
-  void*, 
+  sqlite3*,
+  void*,
   void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
 );
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
-  sqlite3*, 
+  sqlite3*,
   void*,
   void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
 );
@@ -6396,7 +6396,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rekey_v2(
 );
 
 /*
-** Specify the activation key for a SEE database.  Unless 
+** Specify the activation key for a SEE database.  Unless
 ** activated, none of the SEE routines will work.
 */
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_activate_see(
@@ -6406,7 +6406,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_activate_see(
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CEROD
 /*
-** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database.  Unless 
+** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database.  Unless
 ** activated, none of the CEROD routines will work.
 */
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_activate_cerod(
@@ -6462,7 +6462,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_sleep(int);
 ** ^The [temp_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause
 ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc].  ^Furthermore,
 ** the [temp_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string
-** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from 
+** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
 ** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory
 ** using [sqlite3_free].
 ** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be
@@ -6519,7 +6519,7 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_temp_directory;
 ** ^The [data_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause
 ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc].  ^Furthermore,
 ** the [data_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string
-** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from 
+** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
 ** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory
 ** using [sqlite3_free].
 ** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be
@@ -6708,7 +6708,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_rollback_hook(sqlite3*, void(*)(void *), void*);
 ** and [sqlite3_preupdate_hook()] interfaces.
 */
 SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_update_hook(
-  sqlite3*, 
+  sqlite3*,
   void(*)(void *,int ,char const *,char const *,sqlite3_int64),
   void*
 );
@@ -6722,7 +6722,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_update_hook(
 ** and disabled if the argument is false.)^
 **
 ** ^Cache sharing is enabled and disabled for an entire process.
-** This is a change as of SQLite [version 3.5.0] ([dateof:3.5.0]). 
+** This is a change as of SQLite [version 3.5.0] ([dateof:3.5.0]).
 ** In prior versions of SQLite,
 ** sharing was enabled or disabled for each thread separately.
 **
@@ -6739,8 +6739,8 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_update_hook(
 ** cache setting should set it explicitly.
 **
 ** Note: This method is disabled on MacOS X 10.7 and iOS version 5.0
-** and will always return SQLITE_MISUSE. On those systems, 
-** shared cache mode should be enabled per-database connection via 
+** and will always return SQLITE_MISUSE. On those systems,
+** shared cache mode should be enabled per-database connection via
 ** [sqlite3_open_v2()] with [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE].
 **
 ** This interface is threadsafe on processors where writing a
@@ -6790,7 +6790,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_release_memory(sqlite3*);
 ** as heap memory usages approaches the limit.
 ** ^The soft heap limit is "soft" because even though SQLite strives to stay
 ** below the limit, it will exceed the limit rather than generate
-** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error.  In other words, the soft heap limit 
+** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error.  In other words, the soft heap limit
 ** is advisory only.
 **
 ** ^The return value from sqlite3_soft_heap_limit64() is the size of
@@ -6817,7 +6817,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_release_memory(sqlite3*);
 **      from the heap.
 ** </ul>)^
 **
-** Beginning with SQLite [version 3.7.3] ([dateof:3.7.3]), 
+** Beginning with SQLite [version 3.7.3] ([dateof:3.7.3]),
 ** the soft heap limit is enforced
 ** regardless of whether or not the [SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT]
 ** compile-time option is invoked.  With [SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT],
@@ -6895,7 +6895,7 @@ SQLITE_API SQLITE_DEPRECATED void sqlite3_soft_heap_limit(int N);
 **
 ** ^If the specified table is actually a view, an [error code] is returned.
 **
-** ^If the specified column is "rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" and the table 
+** ^If the specified column is "rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" and the table
 ** is not a [WITHOUT ROWID] table and an
 ** [INTEGER PRIMARY KEY] column has been explicitly declared, then the output
 ** parameters are set for the explicitly declared column. ^(If there is no
@@ -6961,7 +6961,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_table_column_metadata(
 ** prior to calling this API,
 ** otherwise an error will be returned.
 **
-** <b>Security warning:</b> It is recommended that the 
+** <b>Security warning:</b> It is recommended that the
 ** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_LOAD_EXTENSION] method be used to enable only this
 ** interface.  The use of the [sqlite3_enable_load_extension()] interface
 ** should be avoided.  This will keep the SQL function [load_extension()]
@@ -7048,7 +7048,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_auto_extension(void(*xEntryPoint)(void));
 ** ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] interface unregisters the
 ** initialization routine X that was registered using a prior call to
 ** [sqlite3_auto_extension(X)].  ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)]
-** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully 
+** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully
 ** unregistered and it returns 0 if X was not on the list of initialization
 ** routines.
 */
@@ -7083,8 +7083,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_module sqlite3_module;
 ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Object
 ** KEYWORDS: sqlite3_module {virtual table module}
 **
-** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module", 
-** defines the implementation of a [virtual tables].  
+** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module",
+** defines the implementation of a [virtual tables].
 ** This structure consists mostly of methods for the module.
 **
 ** ^A virtual table module is created by filling in a persistent
@@ -7123,7 +7123,7 @@ struct sqlite3_module {
                        void (**pxFunc)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value**),
                        void **ppArg);
   int (*xRename)(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNew);
-  /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those 
+  /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those
   ** below are for version 2 and greater. */
   int (*xSavepoint)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int);
   int (*xRelease)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int);
@@ -7170,7 +7170,7 @@ struct sqlite3_module {
 ** required by SQLite. If the table has at least 64 columns and any column
 ** to the right of the first 63 is required, then bit 63 of colUsed is also
 ** set. In other words, column iCol may be required if the expression
-** (colUsed & ((sqlite3_uint64)1 << (iCol>=63 ? 63 : iCol))) evaluates to 
+** (colUsed & ((sqlite3_uint64)1 << (iCol>=63 ? 63 : iCol))) evaluates to
 ** non-zero.
 **
 ** The [xBestIndex] method must fill aConstraintUsage[] with information
@@ -7191,17 +7191,17 @@ struct sqlite3_module {
 **
 ** ^The estimatedCost value is an estimate of the cost of a particular
 ** strategy. A cost of N indicates that the cost of the strategy is similar
-** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N) 
+** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N)
 ** indicates that the expense of the operation is similar to that of a
 ** binary search on a unique indexed field of an SQLite table with N rows.
 **
 ** ^The estimatedRows value is an estimate of the number of rows that
 ** will be returned by the strategy.
 **
-** The xBestIndex method may optionally populate the idxFlags field with a 
+** The xBestIndex method may optionally populate the idxFlags field with a
 ** mask of SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_* flags. Currently there is only one such flag -
 ** SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE. If the xBestIndex method sets this flag, SQLite
-** assumes that the strategy may visit at most one row. 
+** assumes that the strategy may visit at most one row.
 **
 ** Additionally, if xBestIndex sets the SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE flag, then
 ** SQLite also assumes that if a call to the xUpdate() method is made as
@@ -7214,14 +7214,14 @@ struct sqlite3_module {
 ** the xUpdate method are automatically rolled back by SQLite.
 **
 ** IMPORTANT: The estimatedRows field was added to the sqlite3_index_info
-** structure for SQLite [version 3.8.2] ([dateof:3.8.2]). 
+** structure for SQLite [version 3.8.2] ([dateof:3.8.2]).
 ** If a virtual table extension is
-** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting 
-** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely 
+** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting
+** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely
 ** to included crashing the application). The estimatedRows field should
 ** therefore only be used if [sqlite3_libversion_number()] returns a
 ** value greater than or equal to 3008002. Similarly, the idxFlags field
-** was added for [version 3.9.0] ([dateof:3.9.0]). 
+** was added for [version 3.9.0] ([dateof:3.9.0]).
 ** It may therefore only be used if
 ** sqlite3_libversion_number() returns a value greater than or equal to
 ** 3009000.
@@ -7296,7 +7296,7 @@ struct sqlite3_index_info {
 ** preexisting [virtual table] for the module.
 **
 ** ^The module name is registered on the [database connection] specified
-** by the first parameter.  ^The name of the module is given by the 
+** by the first parameter.  ^The name of the module is given by the
 ** second parameter.  ^The third parameter is a pointer to
 ** the implementation of the [virtual table module].   ^The fourth
 ** parameter is an arbitrary client data pointer that is passed through
@@ -7388,7 +7388,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3*, const char *zSQL);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
 ** ^(Virtual tables can provide alternative implementations of functions
-** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module].  
+** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module].
 ** But global versions of those functions
 ** must exist in order to be overloaded.)^
 **
@@ -7439,7 +7439,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_blob sqlite3_blob;
 **     SELECT zColumn FROM zDb.zTable WHERE [rowid] = iRow;
 ** </pre>)^
 **
-** ^(Parameter zDb is not the filename that contains the database, but 
+** ^(Parameter zDb is not the filename that contains the database, but
 ** rather the symbolic name of the database. For attached databases, this is
 ** the name that appears after the AS keyword in the [ATTACH] statement.
 ** For the main database file, the database name is "main". For TEMP
@@ -7452,28 +7452,28 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_blob sqlite3_blob;
 ** ^(On success, [SQLITE_OK] is returned and the new [BLOB handle] is stored
 ** in *ppBlob. Otherwise an [error code] is returned and, unless the error
 ** code is SQLITE_MISUSE, *ppBlob is set to NULL.)^ ^This means that, provided
-** the API is not misused, it is always safe to call [sqlite3_blob_close()] 
+** the API is not misused, it is always safe to call [sqlite3_blob_close()]
 ** on *ppBlob after this function it returns.
 **
 ** This function fails with SQLITE_ERROR if any of the following are true:
 ** <ul>
-**   <li> ^(Database zDb does not exist)^, 
-**   <li> ^(Table zTable does not exist within database zDb)^, 
-**   <li> ^(Table zTable is a WITHOUT ROWID table)^, 
+**   <li> ^(Database zDb does not exist)^,
+**   <li> ^(Table zTable does not exist within database zDb)^,
+**   <li> ^(Table zTable is a WITHOUT ROWID table)^,
 **   <li> ^(Column zColumn does not exist)^,
 **   <li> ^(Row iRow is not present in the table)^,
 **   <li> ^(The specified column of row iRow contains a value that is not
 **         a TEXT or BLOB value)^,
-**   <li> ^(Column zColumn is part of an index, PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE 
+**   <li> ^(Column zColumn is part of an index, PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE
 **         constraint and the blob is being opened for read/write access)^,
-**   <li> ^([foreign key constraints | Foreign key constraints] are enabled, 
+**   <li> ^([foreign key constraints | Foreign key constraints] are enabled,
 **         column zColumn is part of a [child key] definition and the blob is
 **         being opened for read/write access)^.
 ** </ul>
 **
-** ^Unless it returns SQLITE_MISUSE, this function sets the 
-** [database connection] error code and message accessible via 
-** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions. 
+** ^Unless it returns SQLITE_MISUSE, this function sets the
+** [database connection] error code and message accessible via
+** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions.
 **
 ** A BLOB referenced by sqlite3_blob_open() may be read using the
 ** [sqlite3_blob_read()] interface and modified by using
@@ -7499,7 +7499,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_blob sqlite3_blob;
 ** blob.
 **
 ** ^The [sqlite3_bind_zeroblob()] and [sqlite3_result_zeroblob()] interfaces
-** and the built-in [zeroblob] SQL function may be used to create a 
+** and the built-in [zeroblob] SQL function may be used to create a
 ** zero-filled blob to read or write using the incremental-blob interface.
 **
 ** To avoid a resource leak, every open [BLOB handle] should eventually
@@ -7549,7 +7549,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *, sqlite3_int64);
 ** DESTRUCTOR: sqlite3_blob
 **
 ** ^This function closes an open [BLOB handle]. ^(The BLOB handle is closed
-** unconditionally.  Even if this routine returns an error code, the 
+** unconditionally.  Even if this routine returns an error code, the
 ** handle is still closed.)^
 **
 ** ^If the blob handle being closed was opened for read-write access, and if
@@ -7559,10 +7559,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *, sqlite3_int64);
 ** code is returned and the transaction rolled back.
 **
 ** Calling this function with an argument that is not a NULL pointer or an
-** open blob handle results in undefined behaviour. ^Calling this routine 
-** with a null pointer (such as would be returned by a failed call to 
+** open blob handle results in undefined behaviour. ^Calling this routine
+** with a null pointer (such as would be returned by a failed call to
 ** [sqlite3_blob_open()]) is a harmless no-op. ^Otherwise, if this function
-** is passed a valid open blob handle, the values returned by the 
+** is passed a valid open blob handle, the values returned by the
 ** sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg() functions are set before returning.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *);
@@ -7571,7 +7571,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *);
 ** CAPI3REF: Return The Size Of An Open BLOB
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_blob
 **
-** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the 
+** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the
 ** successfully opened [BLOB handle] in its only argument.  ^The
 ** incremental blob I/O routines can only read or overwriting existing
 ** blob content; they cannot change the size of a blob.
@@ -7622,9 +7622,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_read(sqlite3_blob *, void *Z, int N, int iOffset);
 **
 ** ^(On success, sqlite3_blob_write() returns SQLITE_OK.
 ** Otherwise, an  [error code] or an [extended error code] is returned.)^
-** ^Unless SQLITE_MISUSE is returned, this function sets the 
-** [database connection] error code and message accessible via 
-** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions. 
+** ^Unless SQLITE_MISUSE is returned, this function sets the
+** [database connection] error code and message accessible via
+** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions.
 **
 ** ^If the [BLOB handle] passed as the first argument was not opened for
 ** writing (the flags parameter to [sqlite3_blob_open()] was zero),
@@ -7633,9 +7633,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_read(sqlite3_blob *, void *Z, int N, int iOffset);
 ** This function may only modify the contents of the BLOB; it is
 ** not possible to increase the size of a BLOB using this API.
 ** ^If offset iOffset is less than N bytes from the end of the BLOB,
-** [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written. The size of the 
-** BLOB (and hence the maximum value of N+iOffset) can be determined 
-** using the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface. ^If N or iOffset are less 
+** [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written. The size of the
+** BLOB (and hence the maximum value of N+iOffset) can be determined
+** using the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface. ^If N or iOffset are less
 ** than zero [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written.
 **
 ** ^An attempt to write to an expired [BLOB handle] fails with an
@@ -7787,7 +7787,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vfs_unregister(sqlite3_vfs*);
 ** ^(Some systems (for example, Windows 95) do not support the operation
 ** implemented by sqlite3_mutex_try().  On those systems, sqlite3_mutex_try()
 ** will always return SQLITE_BUSY. The SQLite core only ever uses
-** sqlite3_mutex_try() as an optimization so this is acceptable 
+** sqlite3_mutex_try() as an optimization so this is acceptable
 ** behavior.)^
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_mutex_leave() routine exits a mutex that was
@@ -7950,7 +7950,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_mutex_notheld(sqlite3_mutex*);
 ** CAPI3REF: Retrieve the mutex for a database connection
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
-** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that 
+** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that
 ** serializes access to the [database connection] given in the argument
 ** when the [threading mode] is Serialized.
 ** ^If the [threading mode] is Single-thread or Multi-thread then this
@@ -8104,7 +8104,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status64(
 ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
 ** handed to [sqlite3_malloc()] or [sqlite3_realloc()] (or their
 ** internal equivalents).  Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.  
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
 ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT</dt>
@@ -8113,11 +8113,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status64(
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pages used out of the
-** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using 
+** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using
 ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE].  The
 ** value returned is in pages, not in bytes.</dd>)^
 **
-** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]] 
+** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]]
 ** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of bytes of page cache
 ** allocation which could not be satisfied by the [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]
@@ -8130,7 +8130,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status64(
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
 ** handed to [pagecache memory allocator].  Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.  
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
 ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED]] <dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED</dt>
@@ -8143,7 +8143,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status64(
 ** <dd>No longer used.</dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK</dt>
-** <dd>The *pHighwater parameter records the deepest parser stack. 
+** <dd>The *pHighwater parameter records the deepest parser stack.
 ** The *pCurrent value is undefined.  The *pHighwater value is only
 ** meaningful if SQLite is compiled with [YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH].</dd>)^
 ** </dl>
@@ -8165,12 +8165,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status64(
 ** CAPI3REF: Database Connection Status
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
-** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information 
+** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information
 ** about a single [database connection].  ^The first argument is the
 ** database connection object to be interrogated.  ^The second argument
 ** is an integer constant, taken from the set of
 ** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options], that
-** determines the parameter to interrogate.  The set of 
+** determines the parameter to interrogate.  The set of
 ** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options] is likely
 ** to grow in future releases of SQLite.
 **
@@ -8205,7 +8205,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r
 ** checked out.</dd>)^
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT</dt>
-** <dd>This parameter returns the number malloc attempts that were 
+** <dd>This parameter returns the number malloc attempts that were
 ** satisfied using lookaside memory. Only the high-water value is meaningful;
 ** the current value is always zero.)^
 **
@@ -8230,7 +8230,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r
 ** memory used by all pager caches associated with the database connection.)^
 ** ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED is always 0.
 **
-** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED]] 
+** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED]]
 ** ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter is similar to DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED, except that if a
 ** pager cache is shared between two or more connections the bytes of heap
@@ -8245,7 +8245,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r
 ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the approximate number of bytes of heap
 ** memory used to store the schema for all databases associated
-** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^ 
+** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^
 ** ^The full amount of memory used by the schemas is reported, even if the
 ** schema memory is shared with other database connections due to
 ** [shared cache mode] being enabled.
@@ -8260,13 +8260,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache hits that have
-** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT 
+** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT
 ** is always 0.
 ** </dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache misses that have
-** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS 
+** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS
 ** is always 0.
 ** </dd>
 **
@@ -8314,7 +8314,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r
 ** statements.  For example, if the number of table steps greatly exceeds
 ** the number of table searches or result rows, that would tend to indicate
 ** that the prepared statement is using a full table scan rather than
-** an index.  
+** an index.
 **
 ** ^(This interface is used to retrieve and reset counter values from
 ** a [prepared statement].  The first argument is the prepared statement
@@ -8341,7 +8341,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt*, int op,int resetFlg);
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP</dt>
 ** <dd>^This is the number of times that SQLite has stepped forward in
 ** a table as part of a full table scan.  Large numbers for this counter
-** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through 
+** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through
 ** careful use of indices.</dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT</dt>
@@ -8359,14 +8359,14 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt*, int op,int resetFlg);
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP</dt>
 ** <dd>^This is the number of virtual machine operations executed
 ** by the prepared statement if that number is less than or equal
-** to 2147483647.  The number of virtual machine operations can be 
+** to 2147483647.  The number of virtual machine operations can be
 ** used as a proxy for the total work done by the prepared statement.
 ** If the number of virtual machine operations exceeds 2147483647
 ** then the value returned by this statement status code is undefined.
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE</dt>
 ** <dd>^This is the number of times that the prepare statement has been
-** automatically regenerated due to schema changes or change to 
+** automatically regenerated due to schema changes or change to
 ** [bound parameters] that might affect the query plan.
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN</dt>
@@ -8426,15 +8426,15 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** KEYWORDS: {page cache}
 **
 ** ^(The [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2], ...) interface can
-** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an 
+** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an
 ** instance of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2 structure.)^
-** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by 
+** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by
 ** SQLite is used for the page cache.
-** By implementing a 
+** By implementing a
 ** custom page cache using this API, an application can better control
-** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which 
-** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to 
-** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for 
+** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which
+** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to
+** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for
 ** how long.
 **
 ** The alternative page cache mechanism is an
@@ -8447,19 +8447,19 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** [sqlite3_config()] returns.)^
 **
 ** [[the xInit() page cache method]]
-** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective 
+** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective
 ** call to [sqlite3_initialize()])^
 ** (usually only once during the lifetime of the process). ^(The xInit()
 ** method is passed a copy of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2.pArg value.)^
-** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures 
-** required by the custom page cache implementation. 
-** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the 
+** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures
+** required by the custom page cache implementation.
+** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the
 ** built-in default page cache is used instead of the application defined
 ** page cache.)^
 **
 ** [[the xShutdown() page cache method]]
 ** ^The xShutdown() method is called by [sqlite3_shutdown()].
-** It can be used to clean up 
+** It can be used to clean up
 ** any outstanding resources before process shutdown, if required.
 ** ^The xShutdown() method may be NULL.
 **
@@ -8478,7 +8478,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** though this is not guaranteed. ^The
 ** first parameter, szPage, is the size in bytes of the pages that must
 ** be allocated by the cache.  ^szPage will always a power of two.  ^The
-** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage 
+** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage
 ** associated with each page cache entry.  ^The szExtra parameter will
 ** a number less than 250.  SQLite will use the
 ** extra szExtra bytes on each page to store metadata about the underlying
@@ -8491,7 +8491,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** it is purely advisory.  ^On a cache where bPurgeable is false, SQLite will
 ** never invoke xUnpin() except to deliberately delete a page.
 ** ^In other words, calls to xUnpin() on a cache with bPurgeable set to
-** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true.  
+** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true.
 ** ^Hence, a cache created with bPurgeable false will
 ** never contain any unpinned pages.
 **
@@ -8506,12 +8506,12 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** [[the xPagecount() page cache methods]]
 ** The xPagecount() method must return the number of pages currently
 ** stored in the cache, both pinned and unpinned.
-** 
+**
 ** [[the xFetch() page cache methods]]
-** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to 
+** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to
 ** an sqlite3_pcache_page object associated with that page, or a NULL pointer.
 ** The pBuf element of the returned sqlite3_pcache_page object will be a
-** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a 
+** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a
 ** single database page.  The pExtra element of sqlite3_pcache_page will be
 ** a pointer to the szExtra bytes of extra storage that SQLite has requested
 ** for each entry in the page cache.
@@ -8550,8 +8550,8 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** page cache implementation. ^The page cache implementation
 ** may choose to evict unpinned pages at any time.
 **
-** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single 
-** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls 
+** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single
+** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls
 ** to xFetch().
 **
 ** [[the xRekey() page cache methods]]
@@ -8591,7 +8591,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_methods2 {
   int (*xPagecount)(sqlite3_pcache*);
   sqlite3_pcache_page *(*xFetch)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned key, int createFlag);
   void (*xUnpin)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, int discard);
-  void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, 
+  void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*,
       unsigned oldKey, unsigned newKey);
   void (*xTruncate)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned iLimit);
   void (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_pcache*);
@@ -8636,7 +8636,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 **
 ** The backup API copies the content of one database into another.
 ** It is useful either for creating backups of databases or
-** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files. 
+** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files.
 **
 ** See Also: [Using the SQLite Online Backup API]
 **
@@ -8647,36 +8647,36 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** ^Thus, the backup may be performed on a live source database without
 ** preventing other database connections from
 ** reading or writing to the source database while the backup is underway.
-** 
-** ^(To perform a backup operation: 
+**
+** ^(To perform a backup operation:
 **   <ol>
 **     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b> is called once to initialize the
-**         backup, 
-**     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer 
+**         backup,
+**     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer
 **         the data between the two databases, and finally
-**     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources 
-**         associated with the backup operation. 
+**     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources
+**         associated with the backup operation.
 **   </ol>)^
 ** There should be exactly one call to sqlite3_backup_finish() for each
 ** successful call to sqlite3_backup_init().
 **
 ** [[sqlite3_backup_init()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b>
 **
-** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the 
-** [database connection] associated with the destination database 
+** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the
+** [database connection] associated with the destination database
 ** and the database name, respectively.
 ** ^The database name is "main" for the main database, "temp" for the
 ** temporary database, or the name specified after the AS keyword in
 ** an [ATTACH] statement for an attached database.
-** ^The S and M arguments passed to 
+** ^The S and M arguments passed to
 ** sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) identify the [database connection]
 ** and database name of the source database, respectively.
 ** ^The source and destination [database connections] (parameters S and D)
 ** must be different or else sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) will fail with
 ** an error.
 **
-** ^A call to sqlite3_backup_init() will fail, returning NULL, if 
-** there is already a read or read-write transaction open on the 
+** ^A call to sqlite3_backup_init() will fail, returning NULL, if
+** there is already a read or read-write transaction open on the
 ** destination database.
 **
 ** ^If an error occurs within sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M), then NULL is
@@ -8688,14 +8688,14 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** ^A successful call to sqlite3_backup_init() returns a pointer to an
 ** [sqlite3_backup] object.
 ** ^The [sqlite3_backup] object may be used with the sqlite3_backup_step() and
-** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup 
+** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup
 ** operation.
 **
 ** [[sqlite3_backup_step()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b>
 **
-** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between 
+** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between
 ** the source and destination databases specified by [sqlite3_backup] object B.
-** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied. 
+** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied.
 ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully copies N pages and there
 ** are still more pages to be copied, then the function returns [SQLITE_OK].
 ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully finishes copying all pages
@@ -8717,8 +8717,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 **
 ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() cannot obtain a required file-system lock, then
 ** the [sqlite3_busy_handler | busy-handler function]
-** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the 
-** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then 
+** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the
+** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then
 ** [SQLITE_BUSY] is returned to the caller. ^In this case the call to
 ** sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later. ^If the source
 ** [database connection]
@@ -8726,15 +8726,15 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** is called, then [SQLITE_LOCKED] is returned immediately. ^Again, in this
 ** case the call to sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later on. ^(If
 ** [SQLITE_IOERR_ACCESS | SQLITE_IOERR_XXX], [SQLITE_NOMEM], or
-** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then 
-** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These 
-** errors are considered fatal.)^  The application must accept 
-** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle 
+** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then
+** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These
+** errors are considered fatal.)^  The application must accept
+** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle
 ** to the sqlite3_backup_finish() to release associated resources.
 **
 ** ^The first call to sqlite3_backup_step() obtains an exclusive lock
-** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either 
-** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete 
+** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either
+** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete
 ** and sqlite3_backup_step() returns [SQLITE_DONE].  ^Every call to
 ** sqlite3_backup_step() obtains a [shared lock] on the source database that
 ** lasts for the duration of the sqlite3_backup_step() call.
@@ -8743,18 +8743,18 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** through the backup process.  ^If the source database is modified by an
 ** external process or via a database connection other than the one being
 ** used by the backup operation, then the backup will be automatically
-** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source 
+** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source
 ** database is modified by the using the same database connection as is used
 ** by the backup operation, then the backup database is automatically
 ** updated at the same time.
 **
 ** [[sqlite3_backup_finish()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b>
 **
-** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the 
+** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the
 ** application wishes to abandon the backup operation, the application
 ** should destroy the [sqlite3_backup] by passing it to sqlite3_backup_finish().
 ** ^The sqlite3_backup_finish() interfaces releases all
-** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object. 
+** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object.
 ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() has not yet returned [SQLITE_DONE], then any
 ** active write-transaction on the destination database is rolled back.
 ** The [sqlite3_backup] object is invalid
@@ -8794,8 +8794,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** connections, then the source database connection may be used concurrently
 ** from within other threads.
 **
-** However, the application must guarantee that the destination 
-** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after 
+** However, the application must guarantee that the destination
+** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after
 ** sqlite3_backup_init() is called and before the corresponding call to
 ** sqlite3_backup_finish().  SQLite does not currently check to see
 ** if the application incorrectly accesses the destination [database connection]
@@ -8806,11 +8806,11 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** If running in [shared cache mode], the application must
 ** guarantee that the shared cache used by the destination database
 ** is not accessed while the backup is running. In practice this means
-** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being 
+** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being
 ** backed up to is not accessed by any connection within the process,
 ** not just the specific connection that was passed to sqlite3_backup_init().
 **
-** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple 
+** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple
 ** threads may safely make multiple concurrent calls to sqlite3_backup_step().
 ** However, the sqlite3_backup_remaining() and sqlite3_backup_pagecount()
 ** APIs are not strictly speaking threadsafe. If they are invoked at the
@@ -8835,8 +8835,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 ** ^When running in shared-cache mode, a database operation may fail with
 ** an [SQLITE_LOCKED] error if the required locks on the shared-cache or
 ** individual tables within the shared-cache cannot be obtained. See
-** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking. 
-** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke 
+** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking.
+** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke
 ** when the connection currently holding the required lock relinquishes it.
 ** ^This API is only available if the library was compiled with the
 ** [SQLITE_ENABLE_UNLOCK_NOTIFY] C-preprocessor symbol defined.
@@ -8844,14 +8844,14 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 ** See Also: [Using the SQLite Unlock Notification Feature].
 **
 ** ^Shared-cache locks are released when a database connection concludes
-** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back. 
+** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back.
 **
 ** ^When a connection (known as the blocked connection) fails to obtain a
 ** shared-cache lock and SQLITE_LOCKED is returned to the caller, the
 ** identity of the database connection (the blocking connection) that
-** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an 
+** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an
 ** application receives an SQLITE_LOCKED error, it may call the
-** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as 
+** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as
 ** the first argument to register for a callback that will be invoked
 ** when the blocking connections current transaction is concluded. ^The
 ** callback is invoked from within the [sqlite3_step] or [sqlite3_close]
@@ -8865,15 +8865,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 **
 ** ^If the blocked connection is attempting to obtain a write-lock on a
 ** shared-cache table, and more than one other connection currently holds
-** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of 
+** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of
 ** the other connections to use as the blocking connection.
 **
-** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a 
+** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a
 ** blocked connection. If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is called when the
 ** blocked connection already has a registered unlock-notify callback,
 ** then the new callback replaces the old.)^ ^If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is
 ** called with a NULL pointer as its second argument, then any existing
-** unlock-notify callback is canceled. ^The blocked connections 
+** unlock-notify callback is canceled. ^The blocked connections
 ** unlock-notify callback may also be canceled by closing the blocked
 ** connection using [sqlite3_close()].
 **
@@ -8886,7 +8886,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 **
 ** <b>Callback Invocation Details</b>
 **
-** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a 
+** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a
 ** single void* pointer that is passed to the callback when it is invoked.
 ** However, the signature of the callback function allows SQLite to pass
 ** it an array of void* context pointers. The first argument passed to
@@ -8899,12 +8899,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 ** same callback function, then instead of invoking the callback function
 ** multiple times, it is invoked once with the set of void* context pointers
 ** specified by the blocked connections bundled together into an array.
-** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions 
+** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions
 ** related to the set of unblocked database connections.
 **
 ** <b>Deadlock Detection</b>
 **
-** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a 
+** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a
 ** database waits for the callback to be issued before taking any further
 ** action (a reasonable assumption), then using this API may cause the
 ** application to deadlock. For example, if connection X is waiting for
@@ -8927,7 +8927,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 **
 ** <b>The "DROP TABLE" Exception</b>
 **
-** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost 
+** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost
 ** always appropriate to call sqlite3_unlock_notify(). There is however,
 ** one exception. When executing a "DROP TABLE" or "DROP INDEX" statement,
 ** SQLite checks if there are any currently executing SELECT statements
@@ -8940,7 +8940,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 ** One way around this problem is to check the extended error code returned
 ** by an sqlite3_step() call. ^(If there is a blocking connection, then the
 ** extended error code is set to SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. Otherwise, in
-** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just 
+** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just
 ** SQLITE_LOCKED.)^
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify(
@@ -9031,8 +9031,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...);
 ** ^The [sqlite3_wal_hook()] function is used to register a callback that
 ** is invoked each time data is committed to a database in wal mode.
 **
-** ^(The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and 
-** the associated write-lock on the database released)^, so the implementation 
+** ^(The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and
+** the associated write-lock on the database released)^, so the implementation
 ** may read, write or [checkpoint] the database as required.
 **
 ** ^The first parameter passed to the callback function when it is invoked
@@ -9051,7 +9051,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...);
 ** that does not correspond to any valid SQLite error code, the results
 ** are undefined.
 **
-** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback 
+** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback
 ** registered at one time. ^Calling [sqlite3_wal_hook()] replaces any
 ** previously registered write-ahead log callback. ^Note that the
 ** [sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint()] interface and the
@@ -9059,7 +9059,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...);
 ** overwrite any prior [sqlite3_wal_hook()] settings.
 */
 SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_wal_hook(
-  sqlite3*, 
+  sqlite3*,
   int(*)(void *,sqlite3*,const char*,int),
   void*
 );
@@ -9072,7 +9072,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_wal_hook(
 ** [sqlite3_wal_hook()] that causes any database on [database connection] D
 ** to automatically [checkpoint]
 ** after committing a transaction if there are N or
-** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file.  ^Passing zero or 
+** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file.  ^Passing zero or
 ** a negative value as the nFrame parameter disables automatic
 ** checkpoints entirely.
 **
@@ -9102,7 +9102,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(sqlite3 *db, int N);
 ** ^(The sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) is equivalent to
 ** [sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2](D,X,[SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE],0,0).)^
 **
-** In brief, sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) causes the content in the 
+** In brief, sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) causes the content in the
 ** [write-ahead log] for database X on [database connection] D to be
 ** transferred into the database file and for the write-ahead log to
 ** be reset.  See the [checkpointing] documentation for addition
@@ -9128,10 +9128,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb);
 **
 ** <dl>
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE<dd>
-**   ^Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database 
-**   readers or writers to finish, then sync the database file if all frames 
+**   ^Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database
+**   readers or writers to finish, then sync the database file if all frames
 **   in the log were checkpointed. ^The [busy-handler callback]
-**   is never invoked in the SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE mode.  
+**   is never invoked in the SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE mode.
 **   ^On the other hand, passive mode might leave the checkpoint unfinished
 **   if there are concurrent readers or writers.
 **
@@ -9145,9 +9145,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb);
 **
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART<dd>
 **   ^This mode works the same way as SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL with the addition
-**   that after checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the 
+**   that after checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the
 **   [busy-handler callback])
-**   until all readers are reading from the database file only. ^This ensures 
+**   until all readers are reading from the database file only. ^This ensures
 **   that the next writer will restart the log file from the beginning.
 **   ^Like SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, this mode blocks new
 **   database writer attempts while it is pending, but does not impede readers.
@@ -9169,31 +9169,31 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb);
 ** truncated to zero bytes and so both *pnLog and *pnCkpt will be set to zero.
 **
 ** ^All calls obtain an exclusive "checkpoint" lock on the database file. ^If
-** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the 
-** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. ^Even if there is a 
+** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the
+** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. ^Even if there is a
 ** busy-handler configured, it will not be invoked in this case.
 **
-** ^The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, RESTART and TRUNCATE modes also obtain the 
+** ^The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, RESTART and TRUNCATE modes also obtain the
 ** exclusive "writer" lock on the database file. ^If the writer lock cannot be
 ** obtained immediately, and a busy-handler is configured, it is invoked and
 ** the writer lock retried until either the busy-handler returns 0 or the lock
 ** is successfully obtained. ^The busy-handler is also invoked while waiting for
 ** database readers as described above. ^If the busy-handler returns 0 before
 ** the writer lock is obtained or while waiting for database readers, the
-** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as 
-** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible 
+** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as
+** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible
 ** without blocking any further. ^SQLITE_BUSY is returned in this case.
 **
 ** ^If parameter zDb is NULL or points to a zero length string, then the
-** specified operation is attempted on all WAL databases [attached] to 
+** specified operation is attempted on all WAL databases [attached] to
 ** [database connection] db.  In this case the
-** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. ^If 
-** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the 
-** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining 
-** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned at the end. ^If any other 
-** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned 
-** and the error code is returned to the caller immediately. ^If no error 
-** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached 
+** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. ^If
+** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the
+** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining
+** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned at the end. ^If any other
+** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned
+** and the error code is returned to the caller immediately. ^If no error
+** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached
 ** databases, SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** ^If database zDb is the name of an attached database that is not in WAL
@@ -9269,20 +9269,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vtab_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...);
 ** If X is non-zero, then the virtual table implementation guarantees
 ** that if [xUpdate] returns [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], it will do so before
 ** any modifications to internal or persistent data structures have been made.
-** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite 
+** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite
 ** is able to roll back a statement or database transaction, and abandon
-** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate. 
+** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate.
 ** If the ON CONFLICT mode is REPLACE and the [xUpdate] method returns
 ** [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], SQLite handles this as if the ON CONFLICT mode
 ** had been ABORT.
 **
 ** Virtual table implementations that are required to handle OR REPLACE
-** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the 
-** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON 
-** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should 
+** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the
+** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON
+** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should
 ** silently replace the appropriate rows within the xUpdate callback and
 ** return SQLITE_OK. Or, if this is not possible, it may return
-** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT 
+** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT
 ** constraint handling.
 ** </dl>
 */
@@ -9408,7 +9408,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus(
   int idx,                  /* Index of loop to report on */
   int iScanStatusOp,        /* Information desired.  SQLITE_SCANSTAT_* */
   void *pOut                /* Result written here */
-);     
+);
 
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Zero Scan-Status Counters
@@ -9426,15 +9426,15 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_reset(sqlite3_stmt*);
 **
 ** ^If a write-transaction is open on [database connection] D when the
 ** [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)] interface invoked, any dirty
-** pages in the pager-cache that are not currently in use are written out 
+** pages in the pager-cache that are not currently in use are written out
 ** to disk. A dirty page may be in use if a database cursor created by an
 ** active SQL statement is reading from it, or if it is page 1 of a database
 ** file (page 1 is always "in use").  ^The [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)]
 ** interface flushes caches for all schemas - "main", "temp", and
 ** any [attached] databases.
 **
-** ^If this function needs to obtain extra database locks before dirty pages 
-** can be flushed to disk, it does so. ^If those locks cannot be obtained 
+** ^If this function needs to obtain extra database locks before dirty pages
+** can be flushed to disk, it does so. ^If those locks cannot be obtained
 ** immediately and there is a busy-handler callback configured, it is invoked
 ** in the usual manner. ^If the required lock still cannot be obtained, then
 ** the database is skipped and an attempt made to flush any dirty pages
@@ -9481,16 +9481,16 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_cacheflush(sqlite3*);
 ** kind of update operation that is about to occur.
 ** ^(The fourth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the
 ** database within the database connection that is being modified.  This
-** will be "main" for the main database or "temp" for TEMP tables or 
+** will be "main" for the main database or "temp" for TEMP tables or
 ** the name given after the AS keyword in the [ATTACH] statement for attached
 ** databases.)^
 ** ^The fifth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the
 ** table that is being modified.
 **
 ** For an UPDATE or DELETE operation on a [rowid table], the sixth
-** parameter passed to the preupdate callback is the initial [rowid] of the 
+** parameter passed to the preupdate callback is the initial [rowid] of the
 ** row being modified or deleted. For an INSERT operation on a rowid table,
-** or any operation on a WITHOUT ROWID table, the value of the sixth 
+** or any operation on a WITHOUT ROWID table, the value of the sixth
 ** parameter is undefined. For an INSERT or UPDATE on a rowid table the
 ** seventh parameter is the final rowid value of the row being inserted
 ** or updated. The value of the seventh parameter passed to the callback
@@ -9529,7 +9529,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_cacheflush(sqlite3*);
 **
 ** ^The [sqlite3_preupdate_depth(D)] interface returns 0 if the preupdate
 ** callback was invoked as a result of a direct insert, update, or delete
-** operation; or 1 for inserts, updates, or deletes invoked by top-level 
+** operation; or 1 for inserts, updates, or deletes invoked by top-level
 ** triggers; or 2 for changes resulting from triggers called by top-level
 ** triggers; and so forth.
 **
@@ -9563,7 +9563,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_preupdate_new(sqlite3 *, int, sqlite3_value **);
 ** The return value is OS-dependent.  For example, on unix systems, after
 ** [sqlite3_open_v2()] returns [SQLITE_CANTOPEN], this interface could be
 ** called to get back the underlying "errno" that caused the problem, such
-** as ENOSPC, EAUTH, EISDIR, and so forth.  
+** as ENOSPC, EAUTH, EISDIR, and so forth.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3*);
 
@@ -9590,7 +9590,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3*);
 **
 ** The constructor for this object is [sqlite3_snapshot_get()].  The
 ** [sqlite3_snapshot_open()] method causes a fresh read transaction to refer
-** to an historical snapshot (if possible).  The destructor for 
+** to an historical snapshot (if possible).  The destructor for
 ** sqlite3_snapshot objects is [sqlite3_snapshot_free()].
 */
 typedef struct sqlite3_snapshot {
@@ -9607,12 +9607,12 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_snapshot {
 ** [sqlite3_snapshot_get(D,S,P)] interface writes a pointer to the newly
 ** created [sqlite3_snapshot] object into *P and returns SQLITE_OK.
 ** If there is not already a read-transaction open on schema S when
-** this function is called, one is opened automatically. 
+** this function is called, one is opened automatically.
 **
 ** The following must be true for this function to succeed. If any of
 ** the following statements are false when sqlite3_snapshot_get() is
 ** called, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. The final value of *P is undefined
-** in this case. 
+** in this case.
 **
 ** <ul>
 **   <li> The database handle must be in [autocommit mode].
@@ -9624,13 +9624,13 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_snapshot {
 **
 **   <li> One or more transactions must have been written to the current wal
 **        file since it was created on disk (by any connection). This means
-**        that a snapshot cannot be taken on a wal mode database with no wal 
+**        that a snapshot cannot be taken on a wal mode database with no wal
 **        file immediately after it is first opened. At least one transaction
 **        must be written to it first.
 ** </ul>
 **
 ** This function may also return SQLITE_NOMEM.  If it is called with the
-** database handle in autocommit mode but fails for some other reason, 
+** database handle in autocommit mode but fails for some other reason,
 ** whether or not a read transaction is opened on schema S is undefined.
 **
 ** The [sqlite3_snapshot] object returned from a successful call to
@@ -9670,7 +9670,7 @@ SQLITE_API SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
 ** database connection D does not know that the database file for
 ** schema S is in [WAL mode].  A database connection might not know
 ** that the database file is in [WAL mode] if there has been no prior
-** I/O on that database connection, or if the database entered [WAL mode] 
+** I/O on that database connection, or if the database entered [WAL mode]
 ** after the most recent I/O on the database connection.)^
 ** (Hint: Run "[PRAGMA application_id]" against a newly opened
 ** database connection in order to make it ready to use snapshots.)
@@ -9702,17 +9702,17 @@ SQLITE_API SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL void sqlite3_snapshot_free(sqlite3_snapshot*);
 ** EXPERIMENTAL
 **
 ** The sqlite3_snapshot_cmp(P1, P2) interface is used to compare the ages
-** of two valid snapshot handles. 
+** of two valid snapshot handles.
 **
-** If the two snapshot handles are not associated with the same database 
-** file, the result of the comparison is undefined. 
+** If the two snapshot handles are not associated with the same database
+** file, the result of the comparison is undefined.
 **
 ** Additionally, the result of the comparison is only valid if both of the
 ** snapshot handles were obtained by calling sqlite3_snapshot_get() since the
 ** last time the wal file was deleted. The wal file is deleted when the
 ** database is changed back to rollback mode or when the number of database
-** clients drops to zero. If either snapshot handle was obtained before the 
-** wal file was last deleted, the value returned by this function 
+** clients drops to zero. If either snapshot handle was obtained before the
+** wal file was last deleted, the value returned by this function
 ** is undefined.
 **
 ** Otherwise, this API returns a negative value if P1 refers to an older
@@ -9820,7 +9820,7 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_geometry {
 };
 
 /*
-** Register a 2nd-generation geometry callback named zScore that can be 
+** Register a 2nd-generation geometry callback named zScore that can be
 ** used as part of an R-Tree geometry query as follows:
 **
 **   SELECT ... FROM <rtree> WHERE <rtree col> MATCH $zQueryFunc(... params ...)
@@ -9835,7 +9835,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_query_callback(
 
 
 /*
-** A pointer to a structure of the following type is passed as the 
+** A pointer to a structure of the following type is passed as the
 ** argument to scored geometry callback registered using
 ** sqlite3_rtree_query_callback().
 **
@@ -9923,7 +9923,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_changeset_iter sqlite3_changeset_iter;
 ** is not possible for an application to register a pre-update hook on a
 ** database handle that has one or more session objects attached. Nor is
 ** it possible to create a session object attached to a database handle for
-** which a pre-update hook is already defined. The results of attempting 
+** which a pre-update hook is already defined. The results of attempting
 ** either of these things are undefined.
 **
 ** The session object will be used to create changesets for tables in
@@ -9940,13 +9940,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_create(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Delete A Session Object
 **
-** Delete a session object previously allocated using 
+** Delete a session object previously allocated using
 ** [sqlite3session_create()]. Once a session object has been deleted, the
 ** results of attempting to use pSession with any other session module
 ** function are undefined.
 **
 ** Session objects must be deleted before the database handle to which they
-** are attached is closed. Refer to the documentation for 
+** are attached is closed. Refer to the documentation for
 ** [sqlite3session_create()] for details.
 */
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_delete(sqlite3_session *pSession);
@@ -9963,10 +9963,10 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_delete(sqlite3_session *pSession);
 ** the eventual changesets.
 **
 ** Passing zero to this function disables the session. Passing a value
-** greater than zero enables it. Passing a value less than zero is a 
+** greater than zero enables it. Passing a value less than zero is a
 ** no-op, and may be used to query the current state of the session.
 **
-** The return value indicates the final state of the session object: 0 if 
+** The return value indicates the final state of the session object: 0 if
 ** the session is disabled, or 1 if it is enabled.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_enable(sqlite3_session *pSession, int bEnable);
@@ -9980,7 +9980,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_enable(sqlite3_session *pSession, int bEnable);
 ** <ul>
 **   <li> The session object "indirect" flag is set when the change is
 **        made, or
-**   <li> The change is made by an SQL trigger or foreign key action 
+**   <li> The change is made by an SQL trigger or foreign key action
 **        instead of directly as a result of a users SQL statement.
 ** </ul>
 **
@@ -9992,10 +9992,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_enable(sqlite3_session *pSession, int bEnable);
 ** flag.  If the second argument passed to this function is zero, then the
 ** indirect flag is cleared. If it is greater than zero, the indirect flag
 ** is set. Passing a value less than zero does not modify the current value
-** of the indirect flag, and may be used to query the current state of the 
+** of the indirect flag, and may be used to query the current state of the
 ** indirect flag for the specified session object.
 **
-** The return value indicates the final state of the indirect flag: 0 if 
+** The return value indicates the final state of the indirect flag: 0 if
 ** it is clear, or 1 if it is set.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_indirect(sqlite3_session *pSession, int bIndirect);
@@ -10004,20 +10004,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_indirect(sqlite3_session *pSession, int bIndirect)
 ** CAPI3REF: Attach A Table To A Session Object
 **
 ** If argument zTab is not NULL, then it is the name of a table to attach
-** to the session object passed as the first argument. All subsequent changes 
-** made to the table while the session object is enabled will be recorded. See 
+** to the session object passed as the first argument. All subsequent changes
+** made to the table while the session object is enabled will be recorded. See
 ** documentation for [sqlite3session_changeset()] for further details.
 **
 ** Or, if argument zTab is NULL, then changes are recorded for all tables
-** in the database. If additional tables are added to the database (by 
-** executing "CREATE TABLE" statements) after this call is made, changes for 
+** in the database. If additional tables are added to the database (by
+** executing "CREATE TABLE" statements) after this call is made, changes for
 ** the new tables are also recorded.
 **
 ** Changes can only be recorded for tables that have a PRIMARY KEY explicitly
-** defined as part of their CREATE TABLE statement. It does not matter if the 
+** defined as part of their CREATE TABLE statement. It does not matter if the
 ** PRIMARY KEY is an "INTEGER PRIMARY KEY" (rowid alias) or not. The PRIMARY
 ** KEY may consist of a single column, or may be a composite key.
-** 
+**
 ** It is not an error if the named table does not exist in the database. Nor
 ** is it an error if the named table does not have a PRIMARY KEY. However,
 ** no changes will be recorded in either of these scenarios.
@@ -10025,7 +10025,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_indirect(sqlite3_session *pSession, int bIndirect)
 ** Changes are not recorded for individual rows that have NULL values stored
 ** in one or more of their PRIMARY KEY columns.
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the call completes without error. Or, if an error 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the call completes without error. Or, if an error
 ** occurs, an SQLite error code (e.g. SQLITE_NOMEM) is returned.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_attach(
@@ -10036,10 +10036,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_attach(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Set a table filter on a Session Object.
 **
-** The second argument (xFilter) is the "filter callback". For changes to rows 
+** The second argument (xFilter) is the "filter callback". For changes to rows
 ** in tables that are not attached to the Session object, the filter is called
-** to determine whether changes to the table's rows should be tracked or not. 
-** If xFilter returns 0, changes is not tracked. Note that once a table is 
+** to determine whether changes to the table's rows should be tracked or not.
+** If xFilter returns 0, changes is not tracked. Note that once a table is
 ** attached, xFilter will not be called again.
 */
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_table_filter(
@@ -10054,9 +10054,9 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_table_filter(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Generate A Changeset From A Session Object
 **
-** Obtain a changeset containing changes to the tables attached to the 
-** session object passed as the first argument. If successful, 
-** set *ppChangeset to point to a buffer containing the changeset 
+** Obtain a changeset containing changes to the tables attached to the
+** session object passed as the first argument. If successful,
+** set *ppChangeset to point to a buffer containing the changeset
 ** and *pnChangeset to the size of the changeset in bytes before returning
 ** SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs, set both *ppChangeset and *pnChangeset to
 ** zero and return an SQLite error code.
@@ -10071,7 +10071,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_table_filter(
 ** modifies the values of primary key columns. If such a change is made, it
 ** is represented in a changeset as a DELETE followed by an INSERT.
 **
-** Changes are not recorded for rows that have NULL values stored in one or 
+** Changes are not recorded for rows that have NULL values stored in one or
 ** more of their PRIMARY KEY columns. If such a row is inserted or deleted,
 ** no corresponding change is present in the changesets returned by this
 ** function. If an existing row with one or more NULL values stored in
@@ -10124,14 +10124,14 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_table_filter(
 ** <ul>
 **   <li> For each record generated by an insert, the database is queried
 **        for a row with a matching primary key. If one is found, an INSERT
-**        change is added to the changeset. If no such row is found, no change 
+**        change is added to the changeset. If no such row is found, no change
 **        is added to the changeset.
 **
-**   <li> For each record generated by an update or delete, the database is 
+**   <li> For each record generated by an update or delete, the database is
 **        queried for a row with a matching primary key. If such a row is
 **        found and one or more of the non-primary key fields have been
-**        modified from their original values, an UPDATE change is added to 
-**        the changeset. Or, if no such row is found in the table, a DELETE 
+**        modified from their original values, an UPDATE change is added to
+**        the changeset. Or, if no such row is found in the table, a DELETE
 **        change is added to the changeset. If there is a row with a matching
 **        primary key in the database, but all fields contain their original
 **        values, no change is added to the changeset.
@@ -10139,7 +10139,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_table_filter(
 **
 ** This means, amongst other things, that if a row is inserted and then later
 ** deleted while a session object is active, neither the insert nor the delete
-** will be present in the changeset. Or if a row is deleted and then later a 
+** will be present in the changeset. Or if a row is deleted and then later a
 ** row with the same primary key values inserted while a session object is
 ** active, the resulting changeset will contain an UPDATE change instead of
 ** a DELETE and an INSERT.
@@ -10148,10 +10148,10 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_table_filter(
 ** it does not accumulate records when rows are inserted, updated or deleted.
 ** This may appear to have some counter-intuitive effects if a single row
 ** is written to more than once during a session. For example, if a row
-** is inserted while a session object is enabled, then later deleted while 
+** is inserted while a session object is enabled, then later deleted while
 ** the same session object is disabled, no INSERT record will appear in the
 ** changeset, even though the delete took place while the session was disabled.
-** Or, if one field of a row is updated while a session is disabled, and 
+** Or, if one field of a row is updated while a session is disabled, and
 ** another field of the same row is updated while the session is enabled, the
 ** resulting changeset will contain an UPDATE change that updates both fields.
 */
@@ -10162,7 +10162,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_changeset(
 );
 
 /*
-** CAPI3REF: Load The Difference Between Tables Into A Session 
+** CAPI3REF: Load The Difference Between Tables Into A Session
 **
 ** If it is not already attached to the session object passed as the first
 ** argument, this function attaches table zTbl in the same manner as the
@@ -10171,7 +10171,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_changeset(
 ** an error).
 **
 ** Argument zFromDb must be the name of a database ("main", "temp" etc.)
-** attached to the same database handle as the session object that contains 
+** attached to the same database handle as the session object that contains
 ** a table compatible with the table attached to the session by this function.
 ** A table is considered compatible if it:
 **
@@ -10187,25 +10187,25 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_changeset(
 ** APIs, tables without PRIMARY KEYs are simply ignored.
 **
 ** This function adds a set of changes to the session object that could be
-** used to update the table in database zFrom (call this the "from-table") 
-** so that its content is the same as the table attached to the session 
+** used to update the table in database zFrom (call this the "from-table")
+** so that its content is the same as the table attached to the session
 ** object (call this the "to-table"). Specifically:
 **
 ** <ul>
-**   <li> For each row (primary key) that exists in the to-table but not in 
+**   <li> For each row (primary key) that exists in the to-table but not in
 **     the from-table, an INSERT record is added to the session object.
 **
-**   <li> For each row (primary key) that exists in the to-table but not in 
+**   <li> For each row (primary key) that exists in the to-table but not in
 **     the from-table, a DELETE record is added to the session object.
 **
-**   <li> For each row (primary key) that exists in both tables, but features 
+**   <li> For each row (primary key) that exists in both tables, but features
 **     different non-PK values in each, an UPDATE record is added to the
-**     session.  
+**     session.
 ** </ul>
 **
 ** To clarify, if this function is called and then a changeset constructed
-** using [sqlite3session_changeset()], then after applying that changeset to 
-** database zFrom the contents of the two compatible tables would be 
+** using [sqlite3session_changeset()], then after applying that changeset to
+** database zFrom the contents of the two compatible tables would be
 ** identical.
 **
 ** It an error if database zFrom does not exist or does not contain the
@@ -10213,7 +10213,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_changeset(
 **
 ** If the operation successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, an SQLite
 ** error code. In this case, if argument pzErrMsg is not NULL, *pzErrMsg
-** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error 
+** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error
 ** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to free this buffer using
 ** sqlite3_free().
 */
@@ -10231,19 +10231,19 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_diff(
 ** The differences between a patchset and a changeset are that:
 **
 ** <ul>
-**   <li> DELETE records consist of the primary key fields only. The 
+**   <li> DELETE records consist of the primary key fields only. The
 **        original values of other fields are omitted.
-**   <li> The original values of any modified fields are omitted from 
+**   <li> The original values of any modified fields are omitted from
 **        UPDATE records.
 ** </ul>
 **
-** A patchset blob may be used with up to date versions of all 
-** sqlite3changeset_xxx API functions except for sqlite3changeset_invert(), 
+** A patchset blob may be used with up to date versions of all
+** sqlite3changeset_xxx API functions except for sqlite3changeset_invert(),
 ** which returns SQLITE_CORRUPT if it is passed a patchset. Similarly,
 ** attempting to use a patchset blob with old versions of the
-** sqlite3changeset_xxx APIs also provokes an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. 
+** sqlite3changeset_xxx APIs also provokes an SQLITE_CORRUPT error.
 **
-** Because the non-primary key "old.*" fields are omitted, no 
+** Because the non-primary key "old.*" fields are omitted, no
 ** SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA conflicts can be detected or reported if a patchset
 ** is passed to the sqlite3changeset_apply() API. Other conflict types work
 ** in the same way as for changesets.
@@ -10262,29 +10262,29 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_patchset(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Test if a changeset has recorded any changes.
 **
-** Return non-zero if no changes to attached tables have been recorded by 
-** the session object passed as the first argument. Otherwise, if one or 
+** Return non-zero if no changes to attached tables have been recorded by
+** the session object passed as the first argument. Otherwise, if one or
 ** more changes have been recorded, return zero.
 **
 ** Even if this function returns zero, it is possible that calling
 ** [sqlite3session_changeset()] on the session handle may still return a
-** changeset that contains no changes. This can happen when a row in 
-** an attached table is modified and then later on the original values 
+** changeset that contains no changes. This can happen when a row in
+** an attached table is modified and then later on the original values
 ** are restored. However, if this function returns non-zero, then it is
-** guaranteed that a call to sqlite3session_changeset() will return a 
+** guaranteed that a call to sqlite3session_changeset() will return a
 ** changeset containing zero changes.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_isempty(sqlite3_session *pSession);
 
 /*
-** CAPI3REF: Create An Iterator To Traverse A Changeset 
+** CAPI3REF: Create An Iterator To Traverse A Changeset
 **
 ** Create an iterator used to iterate through the contents of a changeset.
 ** If successful, *pp is set to point to the iterator handle and SQLITE_OK
 ** is returned. Otherwise, if an error occurs, *pp is set to zero and an
 ** SQLite error code is returned.
 **
-** The following functions can be used to advance and query a changeset 
+** The following functions can be used to advance and query a changeset
 ** iterator created by this function:
 **
 ** <ul>
@@ -10301,12 +10301,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_isempty(sqlite3_session *pSession);
 **
 ** Assuming the changeset blob was created by one of the
 ** [sqlite3session_changeset()], [sqlite3changeset_concat()] or
-** [sqlite3changeset_invert()] functions, all changes within the changeset 
-** that apply to a single table are grouped together. This means that when 
-** an application iterates through a changeset using an iterator created by 
-** this function, all changes that relate to a single table are visited 
-** consecutively. There is no chance that the iterator will visit a change 
-** the applies to table X, then one for table Y, and then later on visit 
+** [sqlite3changeset_invert()] functions, all changes within the changeset
+** that apply to a single table are grouped together. This means that when
+** an application iterates through a changeset using an iterator created by
+** this function, all changes that relate to a single table are visited
+** consecutively. There is no chance that the iterator will visit a change
+** the applies to table X, then one for table Y, and then later on visit
 ** another change for table X.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_start(
@@ -10330,12 +10330,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_start(
 ** point to the first change in the changeset. Each subsequent call advances
 ** the iterator to point to the next change in the changeset (if any). If
 ** no error occurs and the iterator points to a valid change after a call
-** to sqlite3changeset_next() has advanced it, SQLITE_ROW is returned. 
+** to sqlite3changeset_next() has advanced it, SQLITE_ROW is returned.
 ** Otherwise, if all changes in the changeset have already been visited,
 ** SQLITE_DONE is returned.
 **
-** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Possible error 
-** codes include SQLITE_CORRUPT (if the changeset buffer is corrupt) or 
+** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Possible error
+** codes include SQLITE_CORRUPT (if the changeset buffer is corrupt) or
 ** SQLITE_NOMEM.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_next(sqlite3_changeset_iter *pIter);
@@ -10352,14 +10352,14 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_next(sqlite3_changeset_iter *pIter);
 ** If argument pzTab is not NULL, then *pzTab is set to point to a
 ** nul-terminated utf-8 encoded string containing the name of the table
 ** affected by the current change. The buffer remains valid until either
-** sqlite3changeset_next() is called on the iterator or until the 
-** conflict-handler function returns. If pnCol is not NULL, then *pnCol is 
+** sqlite3changeset_next() is called on the iterator or until the
+** conflict-handler function returns. If pnCol is not NULL, then *pnCol is
 ** set to the number of columns in the table affected by the change. If
 ** pbIncorrect is not NULL, then *pbIndirect is set to true (1) if the change
 ** is an indirect change, or false (0) otherwise. See the documentation for
 ** [sqlite3session_indirect()] for a description of direct and indirect
-** changes. Finally, if pOp is not NULL, then *pOp is set to one of 
-** [SQLITE_INSERT], [SQLITE_DELETE] or [SQLITE_UPDATE], depending on the 
+** changes. Finally, if pOp is not NULL, then *pOp is set to one of
+** [SQLITE_INSERT], [SQLITE_DELETE] or [SQLITE_UPDATE], depending on the
 ** type of change that the iterator currently points to.
 **
 ** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error does occur, an
@@ -10411,7 +10411,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_pk(
 ** The pIter argument passed to this function may either be an iterator
 ** passed to a conflict-handler by [sqlite3changeset_apply()], or an iterator
 ** created by [sqlite3changeset_start()]. In the latter case, the most recent
-** call to [sqlite3changeset_next()] must have returned SQLITE_ROW. 
+** call to [sqlite3changeset_next()] must have returned SQLITE_ROW.
 ** Furthermore, it may only be called if the type of change that the iterator
 ** currently points to is either [SQLITE_DELETE] or [SQLITE_UPDATE]. Otherwise,
 ** this function returns [SQLITE_MISUSE] and sets *ppValue to NULL.
@@ -10421,9 +10421,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_pk(
 ** [SQLITE_RANGE] is returned and *ppValue is set to NULL.
 **
 ** If successful, this function sets *ppValue to point to a protected
-** sqlite3_value object containing the iVal'th value from the vector of 
+** sqlite3_value object containing the iVal'th value from the vector of
 ** original row values stored as part of the UPDATE or DELETE change and
-** returns SQLITE_OK. The name of the function comes from the fact that this 
+** returns SQLITE_OK. The name of the function comes from the fact that this
 ** is similar to the "old.*" columns available to update or delete triggers.
 **
 ** If some other error occurs (e.g. an OOM condition), an SQLite error code
@@ -10441,7 +10441,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_old(
 ** The pIter argument passed to this function may either be an iterator
 ** passed to a conflict-handler by [sqlite3changeset_apply()], or an iterator
 ** created by [sqlite3changeset_start()]. In the latter case, the most recent
-** call to [sqlite3changeset_next()] must have returned SQLITE_ROW. 
+** call to [sqlite3changeset_next()] must have returned SQLITE_ROW.
 ** Furthermore, it may only be called if the type of change that the iterator
 ** currently points to is either [SQLITE_UPDATE] or [SQLITE_INSERT]. Otherwise,
 ** this function returns [SQLITE_MISUSE] and sets *ppValue to NULL.
@@ -10451,12 +10451,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_old(
 ** [SQLITE_RANGE] is returned and *ppValue is set to NULL.
 **
 ** If successful, this function sets *ppValue to point to a protected
-** sqlite3_value object containing the iVal'th value from the vector of 
+** sqlite3_value object containing the iVal'th value from the vector of
 ** new row values stored as part of the UPDATE or INSERT change and
 ** returns SQLITE_OK. If the change is an UPDATE and does not include
-** a new value for the requested column, *ppValue is set to NULL and 
-** SQLITE_OK returned. The name of the function comes from the fact that 
-** this is similar to the "new.*" columns available to update or delete 
+** a new value for the requested column, *ppValue is set to NULL and
+** SQLITE_OK returned. The name of the function comes from the fact that
+** this is similar to the "new.*" columns available to update or delete
 ** triggers.
 **
 ** If some other error occurs (e.g. an OOM condition), an SQLite error code
@@ -10482,7 +10482,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_new(
 ** [SQLITE_RANGE] is returned and *ppValue is set to NULL.
 **
 ** If successful, this function sets *ppValue to point to a protected
-** sqlite3_value object containing the iVal'th value from the 
+** sqlite3_value object containing the iVal'th value from the
 ** "conflicting row" associated with the current conflict-handler callback
 ** and returns SQLITE_OK.
 **
@@ -10524,7 +10524,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_fk_conflicts(
 ** call has no effect.
 **
 ** If an error was encountered within a call to an sqlite3changeset_xxx()
-** function (for example an [SQLITE_CORRUPT] in [sqlite3changeset_next()] or an 
+** function (for example an [SQLITE_CORRUPT] in [sqlite3changeset_next()] or an
 ** [SQLITE_NOMEM] in [sqlite3changeset_new()]) then an error code corresponding
 ** to that error is returned by this function. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK is
 ** returned. This is to allow the following pattern (pseudo-code):
@@ -10535,7 +10535,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_fk_conflicts(
 **   }
 **   rc = sqlite3changeset_finalize();
 **   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
-**     // An error has occurred 
+**     // An error has occurred
 **   }
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_finalize(sqlite3_changeset_iter *pIter);
@@ -10562,7 +10562,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_finalize(sqlite3_changeset_iter *pIter);
 ** zeroed and an SQLite error code returned.
 **
 ** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually call sqlite3_free()
-** on the *ppOut pointer to free the buffer allocation following a successful 
+** on the *ppOut pointer to free the buffer allocation following a successful
 ** call to this function.
 **
 ** WARNING/TODO: This function currently assumes that the input is a valid
@@ -10576,11 +10576,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_invert(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Concatenate Two Changeset Objects
 **
-** This function is used to concatenate two changesets, A and B, into a 
+** This function is used to concatenate two changesets, A and B, into a
 ** single changeset. The result is a changeset equivalent to applying
-** changeset A followed by changeset B. 
+** changeset A followed by changeset B.
 **
-** This function combines the two input changesets using an 
+** This function combines the two input changesets using an
 ** sqlite3_changegroup object. Calling it produces similar results as the
 ** following code fragment:
 **
@@ -10622,7 +10622,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_changegroup sqlite3_changegroup;
 **
 ** If successful, this function returns SQLITE_OK and populates (*pp) with
 ** a pointer to a new sqlite3_changegroup object before returning. The caller
-** should eventually free the returned object using a call to 
+** should eventually free the returned object using a call to
 ** sqlite3changegroup_delete(). If an error occurs, an SQLite error code
 ** (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) is returned and *pp is set to NULL.
 **
@@ -10634,7 +10634,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_changegroup sqlite3_changegroup;
 **   <li> Zero or more changesets (or patchsets) are added to the object
 **        by calling sqlite3changegroup_add().
 **
-**   <li> The result of combining all input changesets together is obtained 
+**   <li> The result of combining all input changesets together is obtained
 **        by the application via a call to sqlite3changegroup_output().
 **
 **   <li> The object is deleted using a call to sqlite3changegroup_delete().
@@ -10643,7 +10643,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_changegroup sqlite3_changegroup;
 ** Any number of calls to add() and output() may be made between the calls to
 ** new() and delete(), and in any order.
 **
-** As well as the regular sqlite3changegroup_add() and 
+** As well as the regular sqlite3changegroup_add() and
 ** sqlite3changegroup_output() functions, also available are the streaming
 ** versions sqlite3changegroup_add_strm() and sqlite3changegroup_output_strm().
 */
@@ -10653,7 +10653,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_new(sqlite3_changegroup **pp);
 ** CAPI3REF: Add A Changeset To A Changegroup
 **
 ** Add all changes within the changeset (or patchset) in buffer pData (size
-** nData bytes) to the changegroup. 
+** nData bytes) to the changegroup.
 **
 ** If the buffer contains a patchset, then all prior calls to this function
 ** on the same changegroup object must also have specified patchsets. Or, if
@@ -10680,7 +10680,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_new(sqlite3_changegroup **pp);
 **       changeset was recorded immediately after the changesets already
 **       added to the changegroup.
 **   <tr><td>INSERT <td>UPDATE <td>
-**       The INSERT change remains in the changegroup. The values in the 
+**       The INSERT change remains in the changegroup. The values in the
 **       INSERT change are modified as if the row was inserted by the
 **       existing change and then updated according to the new change.
 **   <tr><td>INSERT <td>DELETE <td>
@@ -10691,17 +10691,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_new(sqlite3_changegroup **pp);
 **       changeset was recorded immediately after the changesets already
 **       added to the changegroup.
 **   <tr><td>UPDATE <td>UPDATE <td>
-**       The existing UPDATE remains within the changegroup. It is amended 
-**       so that the accompanying values are as if the row was updated once 
+**       The existing UPDATE remains within the changegroup. It is amended
+**       so that the accompanying values are as if the row was updated once
 **       by the existing change and then again by the new change.
 **   <tr><td>UPDATE <td>DELETE <td>
 **       The existing UPDATE is replaced by the new DELETE within the
 **       changegroup.
 **   <tr><td>DELETE <td>INSERT <td>
 **       If one or more of the column values in the row inserted by the
-**       new change differ from those in the row deleted by the existing 
+**       new change differ from those in the row deleted by the existing
 **       change, the existing DELETE is replaced by an UPDATE within the
-**       changegroup. Otherwise, if the inserted row is exactly the same 
+**       changegroup. Otherwise, if the inserted row is exactly the same
 **       as the deleted row, the existing DELETE is simply discarded.
 **   <tr><td>DELETE <td>UPDATE <td>
 **       The new change is ignored. This case does not occur if the new
@@ -10745,7 +10745,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_add(sqlite3_changegroup*, int nData, void *pDa
 **
 ** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the output
 ** variables (*pnData) and (*ppData) are set to 0. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK
-** is returned and the output variables are set to the size of and a 
+** is returned and the output variables are set to the size of and a
 ** pointer to the output buffer, respectively. In this case it is the
 ** responsibility of the caller to eventually free the buffer using a
 ** call to sqlite3_free().
@@ -10773,21 +10773,21 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
 ** change in the changeset, the filter callback is invoked with
 ** the table name as the second argument, and a copy of the context pointer
 ** passed as the sixth argument to this function as the first. If the "filter
-** callback" returns zero, then no attempt is made to apply any changes to 
+** callback" returns zero, then no attempt is made to apply any changes to
 ** the table. Otherwise, if the return value is non-zero or the xFilter
 ** argument to this function is NULL, all changes related to the table are
 ** attempted.
 **
-** For each table that is not excluded by the filter callback, this function 
-** tests that the target database contains a compatible table. A table is 
+** For each table that is not excluded by the filter callback, this function
+** tests that the target database contains a compatible table. A table is
 ** considered compatible if all of the following are true:
 **
 ** <ul>
-**   <li> The table has the same name as the name recorded in the 
+**   <li> The table has the same name as the name recorded in the
 **        changeset, and
-**   <li> The table has at least as many columns as recorded in the 
+**   <li> The table has at least as many columns as recorded in the
 **        changeset, and
-**   <li> The table has primary key columns in the same position as 
+**   <li> The table has primary key columns in the same position as
 **        recorded in the changeset.
 ** </ul>
 **
@@ -10796,11 +10796,11 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
 ** via the sqlite3_log() mechanism with the error code SQLITE_SCHEMA. At most
 ** one such warning is issued for each table in the changeset.
 **
-** For each change for which there is a compatible table, an attempt is made 
-** to modify the table contents according to the UPDATE, INSERT or DELETE 
-** change. If a change cannot be applied cleanly, the conflict handler 
-** function passed as the fifth argument to sqlite3changeset_apply() may be 
-** invoked. A description of exactly when the conflict handler is invoked for 
+** For each change for which there is a compatible table, an attempt is made
+** to modify the table contents according to the UPDATE, INSERT or DELETE
+** change. If a change cannot be applied cleanly, the conflict handler
+** function passed as the fifth argument to sqlite3changeset_apply() may be
+** invoked. A description of exactly when the conflict handler is invoked for
 ** each type of change is below.
 **
 ** Unlike the xFilter argument, xConflict may not be passed NULL. The results
@@ -10808,23 +10808,23 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
 ** argument are undefined.
 **
 ** Each time the conflict handler function is invoked, it must return one
-** of [SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT], [SQLITE_CHANGESET_ABORT] or 
+** of [SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT], [SQLITE_CHANGESET_ABORT] or
 ** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE]. SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE may only be returned
 ** if the second argument passed to the conflict handler is either
 ** SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA or SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT. If the conflict-handler
 ** returns an illegal value, any changes already made are rolled back and
-** the call to sqlite3changeset_apply() returns SQLITE_MISUSE. Different 
+** the call to sqlite3changeset_apply() returns SQLITE_MISUSE. Different
 ** actions are taken by sqlite3changeset_apply() depending on the value
 ** returned by each invocation of the conflict-handler function. Refer to
-** the documentation for the three 
+** the documentation for the three
 ** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT|available return values] for details.
 **
 ** <dl>
 ** <dt>DELETE Changes<dd>
-**   For each DELETE change, this function checks if the target database 
-**   contains a row with the same primary key value (or values) as the 
-**   original row values stored in the changeset. If it does, and the values 
-**   stored in all non-primary key columns also match the values stored in 
+**   For each DELETE change, this function checks if the target database
+**   contains a row with the same primary key value (or values) as the
+**   original row values stored in the changeset. If it does, and the values
+**   stored in all non-primary key columns also match the values stored in
 **   the changeset the row is deleted from the target database.
 **
 **   If a row with matching primary key values is found, but one or more of
@@ -10853,22 +10853,22 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
 **   database table, the trailing fields are populated with their default
 **   values.
 **
-**   If the attempt to insert the row fails because the database already 
+**   If the attempt to insert the row fails because the database already
 **   contains a row with the same primary key values, the conflict handler
-**   function is invoked with the second argument set to 
+**   function is invoked with the second argument set to
 **   [SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT].
 **
 **   If the attempt to insert the row fails because of some other constraint
-**   violation (e.g. NOT NULL or UNIQUE), the conflict handler function is 
+**   violation (e.g. NOT NULL or UNIQUE), the conflict handler function is
 **   invoked with the second argument set to [SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT].
-**   This includes the case where the INSERT operation is re-attempted because 
-**   an earlier call to the conflict handler function returned 
+**   This includes the case where the INSERT operation is re-attempted because
+**   an earlier call to the conflict handler function returned
 **   [SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE].
 **
 ** <dt>UPDATE Changes<dd>
-**   For each UPDATE change, this function checks if the target database 
-**   contains a row with the same primary key value (or values) as the 
-**   original row values stored in the changeset. If it does, and the values 
+**   For each UPDATE change, this function checks if the target database
+**   contains a row with the same primary key value (or values) as the
+**   original row values stored in the changeset. If it does, and the values
 **   stored in all modified non-primary key columns also match the values
 **   stored in the changeset the row is updated within the target database.
 **
@@ -10884,12 +10884,12 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
 **   the conflict-handler function is invoked with [SQLITE_CHANGESET_NOTFOUND]
 **   passed as the second argument.
 **
-**   If the UPDATE operation is attempted, but SQLite returns 
-**   SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, the conflict-handler function is invoked with 
+**   If the UPDATE operation is attempted, but SQLite returns
+**   SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, the conflict-handler function is invoked with
 **   [SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT] passed as the second argument.
-**   This includes the case where the UPDATE operation is attempted after 
+**   This includes the case where the UPDATE operation is attempted after
 **   an earlier call to the conflict handler function returned
-**   [SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE].  
+**   [SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE].
 ** </dl>
 **
 ** It is safe to execute SQL statements, including those that write to the
@@ -10900,7 +10900,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
 ** All changes made by this function are enclosed in a savepoint transaction.
 ** If any other error (aside from a constraint failure when attempting to
 ** write to the target database) occurs, then the savepoint transaction is
-** rolled back, restoring the target database to its original state, and an 
+** rolled back, restoring the target database to its original state, and an
 ** SQLite error code returned.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
@@ -10919,7 +10919,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
   void *pCtx                      /* First argument passed to xConflict */
 );
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** CAPI3REF: Constants Passed To The Conflict Handler
 **
 ** Values that may be passed as the second argument to a conflict-handler.
@@ -10928,32 +10928,32 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA<dd>
 **   The conflict handler is invoked with CHANGESET_DATA as the second argument
 **   when processing a DELETE or UPDATE change if a row with the required
-**   PRIMARY KEY fields is present in the database, but one or more other 
-**   (non primary-key) fields modified by the update do not contain the 
+**   PRIMARY KEY fields is present in the database, but one or more other
+**   (non primary-key) fields modified by the update do not contain the
 **   expected "before" values.
-** 
+**
 **   The conflicting row, in this case, is the database row with the matching
 **   primary key.
-** 
+**
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHANGESET_NOTFOUND<dd>
 **   The conflict handler is invoked with CHANGESET_NOTFOUND as the second
 **   argument when processing a DELETE or UPDATE change if a row with the
 **   required PRIMARY KEY fields is not present in the database.
-** 
+**
 **   There is no conflicting row in this case. The results of invoking the
 **   sqlite3changeset_conflict() API are undefined.
-** 
+**
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT<dd>
 **   CHANGESET_CONFLICT is passed as the second argument to the conflict
-**   handler while processing an INSERT change if the operation would result 
+**   handler while processing an INSERT change if the operation would result
 **   in duplicate primary key values.
-** 
+**
 **   The conflicting row in this case is the database row with the matching
 **   primary key.
 **
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHANGESET_FOREIGN_KEY<dd>
 **   If foreign key handling is enabled, and applying a changeset leaves the
-**   database in a state containing foreign key violations, the conflict 
+**   database in a state containing foreign key violations, the conflict
 **   handler is invoked with CHANGESET_FOREIGN_KEY as the second argument
 **   exactly once before the changeset is committed. If the conflict handler
 **   returns CHANGESET_OMIT, the changes, including those that caused the
@@ -10963,12 +10963,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 **   No current or conflicting row information is provided. The only function
 **   it is possible to call on the supplied sqlite3_changeset_iter handle
 **   is sqlite3changeset_fk_conflicts().
-** 
+**
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT<dd>
-**   If any other constraint violation occurs while applying a change (i.e. 
-**   a UNIQUE, CHECK or NOT NULL constraint), the conflict handler is 
+**   If any other constraint violation occurs while applying a change (i.e.
+**   a UNIQUE, CHECK or NOT NULL constraint), the conflict handler is
 **   invoked with CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT as the second argument.
-** 
+**
 **   There is no conflicting row in this case. The results of invoking the
 **   sqlite3changeset_conflict() API are undefined.
 **
@@ -10980,7 +10980,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 #define SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT  4
 #define SQLITE_CHANGESET_FOREIGN_KEY 5
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** CAPI3REF: Constants Returned By The Conflict Handler
 **
 ** A conflict handler callback must return one of the following three values.
@@ -10988,13 +10988,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 ** <dl>
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT<dd>
 **   If a conflict handler returns this value no special action is taken. The
-**   change that caused the conflict is not applied. The session module 
+**   change that caused the conflict is not applied. The session module
 **   continues to the next change in the changeset.
 **
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE<dd>
 **   This value may only be returned if the second argument to the conflict
 **   handler was SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA or SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT. If this
-**   is not the case, any changes applied so far are rolled back and the 
+**   is not the case, any changes applied so far are rolled back and the
 **   call to sqlite3changeset_apply() returns SQLITE_MISUSE.
 **
 **   If CHANGESET_REPLACE is returned by an SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA conflict
@@ -11007,7 +11007,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 **   the original row is restored to the database before continuing.
 **
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHANGESET_ABORT<dd>
-**   If this value is returned, any changes applied so far are rolled back 
+**   If this value is returned, any changes applied so far are rolled back
 **   and the call to sqlite3changeset_apply() returns SQLITE_ABORT.
 ** </dl>
 */
@@ -11018,24 +11018,24 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Streaming Versions of API functions.
 **
-** The six streaming API xxx_strm() functions serve similar purposes to the 
+** The six streaming API xxx_strm() functions serve similar purposes to the
 ** corresponding non-streaming API functions:
 **
 ** <table border=1 style="margin-left:8ex;margin-right:8ex">
 **   <tr><th>Streaming function<th>Non-streaming equivalent</th>
-**   <tr><td>sqlite3changeset_apply_strm<td>[sqlite3changeset_apply] 
-**   <tr><td>sqlite3changeset_concat_strm<td>[sqlite3changeset_concat] 
-**   <tr><td>sqlite3changeset_invert_strm<td>[sqlite3changeset_invert] 
-**   <tr><td>sqlite3changeset_start_strm<td>[sqlite3changeset_start] 
-**   <tr><td>sqlite3session_changeset_strm<td>[sqlite3session_changeset] 
-**   <tr><td>sqlite3session_patchset_strm<td>[sqlite3session_patchset] 
+**   <tr><td>sqlite3changeset_apply_strm<td>[sqlite3changeset_apply]
+**   <tr><td>sqlite3changeset_concat_strm<td>[sqlite3changeset_concat]
+**   <tr><td>sqlite3changeset_invert_strm<td>[sqlite3changeset_invert]
+**   <tr><td>sqlite3changeset_start_strm<td>[sqlite3changeset_start]
+**   <tr><td>sqlite3session_changeset_strm<td>[sqlite3session_changeset]
+**   <tr><td>sqlite3session_patchset_strm<td>[sqlite3session_patchset]
 ** </table>
 **
 ** Non-streaming functions that accept changesets (or patchsets) as input
-** require that the entire changeset be stored in a single buffer in memory. 
-** Similarly, those that return a changeset or patchset do so by returning 
-** a pointer to a single large buffer allocated using sqlite3_malloc(). 
-** Normally this is convenient. However, if an application running in a 
+** require that the entire changeset be stored in a single buffer in memory.
+** Similarly, those that return a changeset or patchset do so by returning
+** a pointer to a single large buffer allocated using sqlite3_malloc().
+** Normally this is convenient. However, if an application running in a
 ** low-memory environment is required to handle very large changesets, the
 ** large contiguous memory allocations required can become onerous.
 **
@@ -11057,12 +11057,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 **  </pre>
 **
 ** Each time the xInput callback is invoked by the sessions module, the first
-** argument passed is a copy of the supplied pIn context pointer. The second 
-** argument, pData, points to a buffer (*pnData) bytes in size. Assuming no 
-** error occurs the xInput method should copy up to (*pnData) bytes of data 
-** into the buffer and set (*pnData) to the actual number of bytes copied 
-** before returning SQLITE_OK. If the input is completely exhausted, (*pnData) 
-** should be set to zero to indicate this. Or, if an error occurs, an SQLite 
+** argument passed is a copy of the supplied pIn context pointer. The second
+** argument, pData, points to a buffer (*pnData) bytes in size. Assuming no
+** error occurs the xInput method should copy up to (*pnData) bytes of data
+** into the buffer and set (*pnData) to the actual number of bytes copied
+** before returning SQLITE_OK. If the input is completely exhausted, (*pnData)
+** should be set to zero to indicate this. Or, if an error occurs, an SQLite
 ** error code should be returned. In all cases, if an xInput callback returns
 ** an error, all processing is abandoned and the streaming API function
 ** returns a copy of the error code to the caller.
@@ -11070,7 +11070,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 ** In the case of sqlite3changeset_start_strm(), the xInput callback may be
 ** invoked by the sessions module at any point during the lifetime of the
 ** iterator. If such an xInput callback returns an error, the iterator enters
-** an error state, whereby all subsequent calls to iterator functions 
+** an error state, whereby all subsequent calls to iterator functions
 ** immediately fail with the same error code as returned by xInput.
 **
 ** Similarly, streaming API functions that return changesets (or patchsets)
@@ -11100,7 +11100,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
 ** is immediately abandoned and the streaming API function returns a copy
 ** of the xOutput error code to the application.
 **
-** The sessions module never invokes an xOutput callback with the third 
+** The sessions module never invokes an xOutput callback with the third
 ** parameter set to a value less than or equal to zero. Other than this,
 ** no guarantees are made as to the size of the chunks of data returned.
 */
@@ -11148,12 +11148,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_patchset_strm(
   int (*xOutput)(void *pOut, const void *pData, int nData),
   void *pOut
 );
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_add_strm(sqlite3_changegroup*, 
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_add_strm(sqlite3_changegroup*,
     int (*xInput)(void *pIn, void *pData, int *pnData),
     void *pIn
 );
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_output_strm(sqlite3_changegroup*,
-    int (*xOutput)(void *pOut, const void *pData, int nData), 
+    int (*xOutput)(void *pOut, const void *pData, int nData),
     void *pOut
 );
 
@@ -11181,7 +11181,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_output_strm(sqlite3_changegroup*,
 **
 ******************************************************************************
 **
-** Interfaces to extend FTS5. Using the interfaces defined in this file, 
+** Interfaces to extend FTS5. Using the interfaces defined in this file,
 ** FTS5 may be extended with:
 **
 **     * custom tokenizers, and
@@ -11225,19 +11225,19 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 ** EXTENSION API FUNCTIONS
 **
 ** xUserData(pFts):
-**   Return a copy of the context pointer the extension function was 
+**   Return a copy of the context pointer the extension function was
 **   registered with.
 **
 ** xColumnTotalSize(pFts, iCol, pnToken):
 **   If parameter iCol is less than zero, set output variable *pnToken
 **   to the total number of tokens in the FTS5 table. Or, if iCol is
 **   non-negative but less than the number of columns in the table, return
-**   the total number of tokens in column iCol, considering all rows in 
+**   the total number of tokens in column iCol, considering all rows in
 **   the FTS5 table.
 **
 **   If parameter iCol is greater than or equal to the number of columns
 **   in the table, SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Or, if an error occurs (e.g.
-**   an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is 
+**   an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
 **   returned.
 **
 ** xColumnCount(pFts):
@@ -11251,7 +11251,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **
 **   If parameter iCol is greater than or equal to the number of columns
 **   in the table, SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Or, if an error occurs (e.g.
-**   an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is 
+**   an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
 **   returned.
 **
 **   This function may be quite inefficient if used with an FTS5 table
@@ -11278,8 +11278,8 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **   an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if an error occurs.
 **
 **   This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created 
-**   with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option 
+**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
+**   with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
 **   (i.e. if it is a contentless table), then this API always returns 0.
 **
 ** xInst:
@@ -11294,11 +11294,11 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **   with the offsets=0 option specified. In this case *piOff is always
 **   set to -1.
 **
-**   Returns SQLITE_OK if successful, or an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) 
+**   Returns SQLITE_OK if successful, or an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM)
 **   if an error occurs.
 **
 **   This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. 
+**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option.
 **
 ** xRowid:
 **   Returns the rowid of the current row.
@@ -11314,11 +11314,11 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **
 **   with $p set to a phrase equivalent to the phrase iPhrase of the
 **   current query is executed. Any column filter that applies to
-**   phrase iPhrase of the current query is included in $p. For each 
-**   row visited, the callback function passed as the fourth argument 
-**   is invoked. The context and API objects passed to the callback 
+**   phrase iPhrase of the current query is included in $p. For each
+**   row visited, the callback function passed as the fourth argument
+**   is invoked. The context and API objects passed to the callback
 **   function may be used to access the properties of each matched row.
-**   Invoking Api.xUserData() returns a copy of the pointer passed as 
+**   Invoking Api.xUserData() returns a copy of the pointer passed as
 **   the third argument to pUserData.
 **
 **   If the callback function returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, the
@@ -11333,14 +11333,14 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **
 ** xSetAuxdata(pFts5, pAux, xDelete)
 **
-**   Save the pointer passed as the second argument as the extension functions 
+**   Save the pointer passed as the second argument as the extension functions
 **   "auxiliary data". The pointer may then be retrieved by the current or any
 **   future invocation of the same fts5 extension function made as part of
 **   of the same MATCH query using the xGetAuxdata() API.
 **
 **   Each extension function is allocated a single auxiliary data slot for
-**   each FTS query (MATCH expression). If the extension function is invoked 
-**   more than once for a single FTS query, then all invocations share a 
+**   each FTS query (MATCH expression). If the extension function is invoked
+**   more than once for a single FTS query, then all invocations share a
 **   single auxiliary data context.
 **
 **   If there is already an auxiliary data pointer when this function is
@@ -11359,7 +11359,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **
 ** xGetAuxdata(pFts5, bClear)
 **
-**   Returns the current auxiliary data pointer for the fts5 extension 
+**   Returns the current auxiliary data pointer for the fts5 extension
 **   function. See the xSetAuxdata() method for details.
 **
 **   If the bClear argument is non-zero, then the auxiliary data is cleared
@@ -11379,7 +11379,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **   method, to iterate through all instances of a single query phrase within
 **   the current row. This is the same information as is accessible via the
 **   xInstCount/xInst APIs. While the xInstCount/xInst APIs are more convenient
-**   to use, this API may be faster under some circumstances. To iterate 
+**   to use, this API may be faster under some circumstances. To iterate
 **   through instances of phrase iPhrase, use the following code:
 **
 **       Fts5PhraseIter iter;
@@ -11397,8 +11397,8 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **   xPhraseFirstColumn() and xPhraseNextColumn() as illustrated below).
 **
 **   This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created 
-**   with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option 
+**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
+**   with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
 **   (i.e. if it is a contentless table), then this API always iterates
 **   through an empty set (all calls to xPhraseFirst() set iCol to -1).
 **
@@ -11422,16 +11422,16 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **       }
 **
 **   This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-**   "detail=none" option. If the FTS5 table is created with either 
-**   "detail=none" "content=" option (i.e. if it is a contentless table), 
-**   then this API always iterates through an empty set (all calls to 
+**   "detail=none" option. If the FTS5 table is created with either
+**   "detail=none" "content=" option (i.e. if it is a contentless table),
+**   then this API always iterates through an empty set (all calls to
 **   xPhraseFirstColumn() set iCol to -1).
 **
 **   The information accessed using this API and its companion
 **   xPhraseFirstColumn() may also be obtained using xPhraseFirst/xPhraseNext
 **   (or xInst/xInstCount). The chief advantage of this API is that it is
 **   significantly more efficient than those alternatives when used with
-**   "detail=column" tables.  
+**   "detail=column" tables.
 **
 ** xPhraseNextColumn()
 **   See xPhraseFirstColumn above.
@@ -11445,7 +11445,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
   int (*xRowCount)(Fts5Context*, sqlite3_int64 *pnRow);
   int (*xColumnTotalSize)(Fts5Context*, int iCol, sqlite3_int64 *pnToken);
 
-  int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Context*, 
+  int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Context*,
     const char *pText, int nText, /* Text to tokenize */
     void *pCtx,                   /* Context passed to xToken() */
     int (*xToken)(void*, int, const char*, int, int, int)       /* Callback */
@@ -11474,15 +11474,15 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
   void (*xPhraseNextColumn)(Fts5Context*, Fts5PhraseIter*, int *piCol);
 };
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
 *************************************************************************/
 
 /*************************************************************************
 ** CUSTOM TOKENIZERS
 **
-** Applications may also register custom tokenizer types. A tokenizer 
-** is registered by providing fts5 with a populated instance of the 
+** Applications may also register custom tokenizer types. A tokenizer
+** is registered by providing fts5 with a populated instance of the
 ** following structure. All structure methods must be defined, setting
 ** any member of the fts5_tokenizer struct to NULL leads to undefined
 ** behaviour. The structure methods are expected to function as follows:
@@ -11493,16 +11493,16 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **
 **   The first argument passed to this function is a copy of the (void*)
 **   pointer provided by the application when the fts5_tokenizer object
-**   was registered with FTS5 (the third argument to xCreateTokenizer()). 
+**   was registered with FTS5 (the third argument to xCreateTokenizer()).
 **   The second and third arguments are an array of nul-terminated strings
 **   containing the tokenizer arguments, if any, specified following the
 **   tokenizer name as part of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement used
 **   to create the FTS5 table.
 **
-**   The final argument is an output variable. If successful, (*ppOut) 
+**   The final argument is an output variable. If successful, (*ppOut)
 **   should be set to point to the new tokenizer handle and SQLITE_OK
 **   returned. If an error occurs, some value other than SQLITE_OK should
-**   be returned. In this case, fts5 assumes that the final value of *ppOut 
+**   be returned. In this case, fts5 assumes that the final value of *ppOut
 **   is undefined.
 **
 ** xDelete:
@@ -11511,7 +11511,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **   be invoked exactly once for each successful call to xCreate().
 **
 ** xTokenize:
-**   This function is expected to tokenize the nText byte string indicated 
+**   This function is expected to tokenize the nText byte string indicated
 **   by argument pText. pText may or may not be nul-terminated. The first
 **   argument passed to this function is a pointer to an Fts5Tokenizer object
 **   returned by an earlier call to xCreate().
@@ -11525,8 +11525,8 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **            determine the set of tokens to add to (or delete from) the
 **            FTS index.
 **
-**       <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY</b> - A MATCH query is being executed 
-**            against the FTS index. The tokenizer is being called to tokenize 
+**       <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY</b> - A MATCH query is being executed
+**            against the FTS index. The tokenizer is being called to tokenize
 **            a bareword or quoted string specified as part of the query.
 **
 **       <li> <b>(FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY | FTS5_TOKENIZE_PREFIX)</b> - Same as
@@ -11534,10 +11534,10 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **            followed by a "*" character, indicating that the last token
 **            returned by the tokenizer will be treated as a token prefix.
 **
-**       <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_AUX</b> - The tokenizer is being invoked to 
+**       <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_AUX</b> - The tokenizer is being invoked to
 **            satisfy an fts5_api.xTokenize() request made by an auxiliary
 **            function. Or an fts5_api.xColumnSize() request made by the same
-**            on a columnsize=0 database.  
+**            on a columnsize=0 database.
 **   </ul>
 **
 **   For each token in the input string, the supplied callback xToken() must
@@ -11549,10 +11549,10 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **   which the token is derived within the input.
 **
 **   The second argument passed to the xToken() callback ("tflags") should
-**   normally be set to 0. The exception is if the tokenizer supports 
+**   normally be set to 0. The exception is if the tokenizer supports
 **   synonyms. In this case see the discussion below for details.
 **
-**   FTS5 assumes the xToken() callback is invoked for each token in the 
+**   FTS5 assumes the xToken() callback is invoked for each token in the
 **   order that they occur within the input text.
 **
 **   If an xToken() callback returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, then
@@ -11566,7 +11566,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 ** SYNONYM SUPPORT
 **
 **   Custom tokenizers may also support synonyms. Consider a case in which a
-**   user wishes to query for a phrase such as "first place". Using the 
+**   user wishes to query for a phrase such as "first place". Using the
 **   built-in tokenizers, the FTS5 query 'first + place' will match instances
 **   of "first place" within the document set, but not alternative forms
 **   such as "1st place". In some applications, it would be better to match
@@ -11575,7 +11575,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **
 **   There are several ways to approach this in FTS5:
 **
-**   <ol><li> By mapping all synonyms to a single token. In this case, the 
+**   <ol><li> By mapping all synonyms to a single token. In this case, the
 **            In the above example, this means that the tokenizer returns the
 **            same token for inputs "first" and "1st". Say that token is in
 **            fact "first", so that when the user inserts the document "I won
@@ -11585,7 +11585,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **            as expected.
 **
 **       <li> By adding multiple synonyms for a single term to the FTS index.
-**            In this case, when tokenizing query text, the tokenizer may 
+**            In this case, when tokenizing query text, the tokenizer may
 **            provide multiple synonyms for a single term within the document.
 **            FTS5 then queries the index for each synonym individually. For
 **            example, faced with the query:
@@ -11594,26 +11594,26 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **     ... MATCH 'first place'</codeblock>
 **
 **            the tokenizer offers both "1st" and "first" as synonyms for the
-**            first token in the MATCH query and FTS5 effectively runs a query 
+**            first token in the MATCH query and FTS5 effectively runs a query
 **            similar to:
 **
 **   <codeblock>
 **     ... MATCH '(first OR 1st) place'</codeblock>
 **
 **            except that, for the purposes of auxiliary functions, the query
-**            still appears to contain just two phrases - "(first OR 1st)" 
+**            still appears to contain just two phrases - "(first OR 1st)"
 **            being treated as a single phrase.
 **
 **       <li> By adding multiple synonyms for a single term to the FTS index.
 **            Using this method, when tokenizing document text, the tokenizer
-**            provides multiple synonyms for each token. So that when a 
+**            provides multiple synonyms for each token. So that when a
 **            document such as "I won first place" is tokenized, entries are
 **            added to the FTS index for "i", "won", "first", "1st" and
 **            "place".
 **
 **            This way, even if the tokenizer does not provide synonyms
 **            when tokenizing query text (it should not - to do would be
-**            inefficient), it doesn't matter if the user queries for 
+**            inefficient), it doesn't matter if the user queries for
 **            'first + place' or '1st + place', as there are entires in the
 **            FTS index corresponding to both forms of the first token.
 **   </ol>
@@ -11634,11 +11634,11 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **
 **   It is an error to specify the FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED flag the first time
 **   xToken() is called. Multiple synonyms may be specified for a single token
-**   by making multiple calls to xToken(FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED) in sequence. 
+**   by making multiple calls to xToken(FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED) in sequence.
 **   There is no limit to the number of synonyms that may be provided for a
 **   single token.
 **
-**   In many cases, method (1) above is the best approach. It does not add 
+**   In many cases, method (1) above is the best approach. It does not add
 **   extra data to the FTS index or require FTS5 to query for multiple terms,
 **   so it is efficient in terms of disk space and query speed. However, it
 **   does not support prefix queries very well. If, as suggested above, the
@@ -11650,18 +11650,18 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **   will not match documents that contain the token "1st" (as the tokenizer
 **   will probably not map "1s" to any prefix of "first").
 **
-**   For full prefix support, method (3) may be preferred. In this case, 
+**   For full prefix support, method (3) may be preferred. In this case,
 **   because the index contains entries for both "first" and "1st", prefix
 **   queries such as 'fi*' or '1s*' will match correctly. However, because
 **   extra entries are added to the FTS index, this method uses more space
 **   within the database.
 **
 **   Method (2) offers a midpoint between (1) and (3). Using this method,
-**   a query such as '1s*' will match documents that contain the literal 
+**   a query such as '1s*' will match documents that contain the literal
 **   token "1st", but not "first" (assuming the tokenizer is not able to
 **   provide synonyms for prefixes). However, a non-prefix query like '1st'
 **   will match against "1st" and "first". This method does not require
-**   extra disk space, as no extra entries are added to the FTS index. 
+**   extra disk space, as no extra entries are added to the FTS index.
 **   On the other hand, it may require more CPU cycles to run MATCH queries,
 **   as separate queries of the FTS index are required for each synonym.
 **
@@ -11675,10 +11675,10 @@ typedef struct fts5_tokenizer fts5_tokenizer;
 struct fts5_tokenizer {
   int (*xCreate)(void*, const char **azArg, int nArg, Fts5Tokenizer **ppOut);
   void (*xDelete)(Fts5Tokenizer*);
-  int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Tokenizer*, 
+  int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Tokenizer*,
       void *pCtx,
       int flags,            /* Mask of FTS5_TOKENIZE_* flags */
-      const char *pText, int nText, 
+      const char *pText, int nText,
       int (*xToken)(
         void *pCtx,         /* Copy of 2nd argument to xTokenize() */
         int tflags,         /* Mask of FTS5_TOKEN_* flags */
@@ -11775,7 +11775,7 @@ struct fts5_api {
 **    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
 **
 *************************************************************************
-** 
+**
 ** This file defines various limits of what SQLite can process.
 */
 
@@ -11823,9 +11823,9 @@ struct fts5_api {
 #endif
 
 /*
-** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to 
-** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might 
-** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an 
+** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to
+** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might
+** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an
 ** expression.
 **
 ** A value of 0 used to mean that the limit was not enforced.
@@ -11907,10 +11907,10 @@ struct fts5_api {
 **
 ** Earlier versions of SQLite allowed the user to change this value at
 ** compile time. This is no longer permitted, on the grounds that it creates
-** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library 
-** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database 
-** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite 
-** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback 
+** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library
+** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database
+** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite
+** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback
 ** the aborted transaction. This could lead to database corruption.
 */
 #ifdef SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
@@ -11969,7 +11969,7 @@ struct fts5_api {
 ** Maximum depth of recursion for triggers.
 **
 ** A value of 1 means that a trigger program will not be able to itself
-** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all 
+** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all
 ** may be executed.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH
@@ -12367,7 +12367,7 @@ typedef struct HashElem HashElem;
 ** element pointed to plus the next _ht.count-1 elements in the list.
 **
 ** Hash.htsize and Hash.ht may be zero.  In that case lookup is done
-** by a linear search of the global list.  For small tables, the 
+** by a linear search of the global list.  For small tables, the
 ** Hash.ht table is never allocated because if there are few elements
 ** in the table, it is faster to do a linear search than to manage
 ** the hash table.
@@ -12382,7 +12382,7 @@ struct Hash {
   } *ht;
 };
 
-/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following 
+/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
 ** structure.  All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
 **
 ** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
@@ -12592,7 +12592,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3HashClear(Hash*);
 #define TK_ILLEGAL                        159
 
 /* The token codes above must all fit in 8 bits */
-#define TKFLG_MASK           0xff  
+#define TKFLG_MASK           0xff
 
 /* Flags that can be added to a token code when it is not
 ** being stored in a u8: */
@@ -12710,7 +12710,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3HashClear(Hash*);
 #endif
 
 /*
-** The compile-time options SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE and 
+** The compile-time options SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE and
 ** SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE are not compatible with one another.
 ** You must choose one or the other (or neither) but not both.
 */
@@ -13316,7 +13316,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p);
 
 /*
 ** The second parameter to sqlite3BtreeGetMeta or sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta
-** should be one of the following values. The integer values are assigned 
+** should be one of the following values. The integer values are assigned
 ** to constants so that the offset of the corresponding field in an
 ** SQLite database header may be found using the following formula:
 **
@@ -13387,7 +13387,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p);
 #define BTREE_BULKLOAD 0x00000001  /* Used to full index in sorted order */
 #define BTREE_SEEK_EQ  0x00000002  /* EQ seeks only - no range seeks */
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Flags passed as the third argument to sqlite3BtreeCursor().
 **
 ** For read-only cursors the wrFlag argument is always zero. For read-write
@@ -13453,13 +13453,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor*, u8 flags);
 ** key and pData,nData,nZero set to zero.
 **
 ** Table btrees (used for rowid tables) contain an integer rowid used as
-** the key and passed in the nKey field.  The pKey field is zero.  
+** the key and passed in the nKey field.  The pKey field is zero.
 ** pData,nData hold the content of the new entry.  nZero extra zero bytes
 ** are appended to the end of the content when constructing the entry.
 **
 ** This object is used to pass information into sqlite3BtreeInsert().  The
 ** same information used to be passed as five separate parameters.  But placing
-** the information into this object helps to keep the interface more 
+** the information into this object helps to keep the interface more
 ** organized and understandable, and it also helps the resulting code to
 ** run a little faster by using fewer registers for parameter passing.
 */
@@ -13530,7 +13530,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE   int sqlite3BtreeSharable(Btree*);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE   void sqlite3BtreeEnterCursor(BtCursor*);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE   int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree*);
 #else
-# define sqlite3BtreeEnter(X) 
+# define sqlite3BtreeEnter(X)
 # define sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(X)
 # define sqlite3BtreeSharable(X) 0
 # define sqlite3BtreeEnterCursor(X)
@@ -13702,7 +13702,7 @@ typedef struct VdbeOpList VdbeOpList;
 #define P5_ConstraintFK      4
 
 /*
-** The Vdbe.aColName array contains 5n Mem structures, where n is the 
+** The Vdbe.aColName array contains 5n Mem structures, where n is the
 ** number of columns of data returned by the statement.
 */
 #define COLNAME_NAME     0
@@ -13722,7 +13722,7 @@ typedef struct VdbeOpList VdbeOpList;
 
 /*
 ** The following macro converts a relative address in the p2 field
-** of a VdbeOp structure into a negative number so that 
+** of a VdbeOp structure into a negative number so that
 ** sqlite3VdbeAddOpList() knows that the address is relative.  Calling
 ** the macro again restores the address.
 */
@@ -14130,8 +14130,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus(Vdbe*, int, int, int, LogEst, const ch
 #define SQLITE_PAGER_H
 
 /*
-** Default maximum size for persistent journal files. A negative 
-** value means no limit. This value may be overridden using the 
+** Default maximum size for persistent journal files. A negative
+** value means no limit. This value may be overridden using the
 ** sqlite3PagerJournalSizeLimit() API. See also "PRAGMA journal_size_limit".
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_DEFAULT_JOURNAL_SIZE_LIMIT
@@ -14157,9 +14157,9 @@ typedef struct PgHdr DbPage;
 /*
 ** Page number PAGER_MJ_PGNO is never used in an SQLite database (it is
 ** reserved for working around a windows/posix incompatibility). It is
-** used in the journal to signify that the remainder of the journal file 
+** used in the journal to signify that the remainder of the journal file
 ** is devoted to storing a master journal name - there are no more pages to
-** roll back. See comments for function writeMasterJournal() in pager.c 
+** roll back. See comments for function writeMasterJournal() in pager.c
 ** for details.
 */
 #define PAGER_MJ_PGNO(x) ((Pgno)((PENDING_BYTE/((x)->pageSize))+1))
@@ -14220,11 +14220,11 @@ typedef struct PgHdr DbPage;
 
 /*
 ** The remainder of this file contains the declarations of the functions
-** that make up the Pager sub-system API. See source code comments for 
+** that make up the Pager sub-system API. See source code comments for
 ** a detailed description of each routine.
 */
 
-/* Open and close a Pager connection. */ 
+/* Open and close a Pager connection. */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
   sqlite3_vfs*,
   Pager **ppPager,
@@ -14257,7 +14257,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE i64 sqlite3PagerJournalSizeLimit(Pager *, i64);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_backup **sqlite3PagerBackupPtr(Pager*);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager*);
 
-/* Functions used to obtain and release page references. */ 
+/* Functions used to obtain and release page references. */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerGet(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno, DbPage **ppPage, int clrFlag);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage*);
@@ -14270,8 +14270,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWrite(DbPage*);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(DbPage*);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager*,DbPage*,Pgno,int);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(DbPage*);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *); 
-SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *); 
+SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *);
+SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *);
 
 /* Functions used to manage pager transactions and savepoints. */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager*, int*);
@@ -14367,7 +14367,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE   void sqlite3PagerRefdump(Pager*);
 **
 *************************************************************************
 ** This header file defines the interface that the sqlite page cache
-** subsystem. 
+** subsystem.
 */
 
 #ifndef _PCACHE_H_
@@ -14393,7 +14393,7 @@ struct PgHdr {
   u16 flags;                     /* PGHDR flags defined below */
 
   /**********************************************************************
-  ** Elements above, except pCache, are public.  All that follow are 
+  ** Elements above, except pCache, are public.  All that follow are
   ** private to pcache.c and should not be accessed by other modules.
   ** pCache is grouped with the public elements for efficiency.
   */
@@ -14446,7 +14446,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSetPageSize(PCache *, int);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSize(void);
 
 /* One release per successful fetch.  Page is pinned until released.
-** Reference counted. 
+** Reference counted.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_pcache_page *sqlite3PcacheFetch(PCache*, Pgno, int createFlag);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress(PCache*, Pgno, sqlite3_pcache_page**);
@@ -14490,7 +14490,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePagecount(PCache*);
 
 #if defined(SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
 /* Iterate through all dirty pages currently stored in the cache. This
-** interface is only available if SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES is defined when the 
+** interface is only available if SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES is defined when the
 ** library is built.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheIterateDirty(PCache *pCache, void (*xIter)(PgHdr *));
@@ -14661,10 +14661,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
 ** 2006-10-31:  The default prefix used to be "sqlite_".  But then
 ** Mcafee started using SQLite in their anti-virus product and it
 ** started putting files with the "sqlite" name in the c:/temp folder.
-** This annoyed many windows users.  Those users would then do a 
+** This annoyed many windows users.  Those users would then do a
 ** Google search for "sqlite", find the telephone numbers of the
 ** developers and call to wake them up at night and complain.
-** For this reason, the default name prefix is changed to be "sqlite" 
+** For this reason, the default name prefix is changed to be "sqlite"
 ** spelled backwards.  So the temp files are still identified, but
 ** anybody smart enough to figure out the code is also likely smart
 ** enough to know that calling the developer will not help get rid
@@ -14705,9 +14705,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
 ** UnlockFile().
 **
 ** LockFile() prevents not just writing but also reading by other processes.
-** A SHARED_LOCK is obtained by locking a single randomly-chosen 
-** byte out of a specific range of bytes. The lock byte is obtained at 
-** random so two separate readers can probably access the file at the 
+** A SHARED_LOCK is obtained by locking a single randomly-chosen
+** byte out of a specific range of bytes. The lock byte is obtained at
+** random so two separate readers can probably access the file at the
 ** same time, unless they are unlucky and choose the same lock byte.
 ** An EXCLUSIVE_LOCK is obtained by locking all bytes in the range.
 ** There can only be one writer.  A RESERVED_LOCK is obtained by locking
@@ -14726,7 +14726,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
 ** The following #defines specify the range of bytes used for locking.
 ** SHARED_SIZE is the number of bytes available in the pool from which
 ** a random byte is selected for a shared lock.  The pool of bytes for
-** shared locks begins at SHARED_FIRST. 
+** shared locks begins at SHARED_FIRST.
 **
 ** The same locking strategy and
 ** byte ranges are used for Unix.  This leaves open the possibility of having
@@ -14742,7 +14742,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
 ** that all locks will fit on a single page even at the minimum page size.
 ** PENDING_BYTE defines the beginning of the locks.  By default PENDING_BYTE
 ** is set high so that we don't have to allocate an unused page except
-** for very large databases.  But one should test the page skipping logic 
+** for very large databases.  But one should test the page skipping logic
 ** by setting PENDING_BYTE low and running the entire regression suite.
 **
 ** Changing the value of PENDING_BYTE results in a subtly incompatible
@@ -14766,8 +14766,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsInit(void);
 
-/* 
-** Functions for accessing sqlite3_file methods 
+/*
+** Functions for accessing sqlite3_file methods
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OsClose(sqlite3_file*);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsRead(sqlite3_file*, void*, int amt, i64 offset);
@@ -14793,8 +14793,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsFetch(sqlite3_file *id, i64, int, void **);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsUnfetch(sqlite3_file *, i64, void *);
 
 
-/* 
-** Functions for accessing sqlite3_vfs methods 
+/*
+** Functions for accessing sqlite3_vfs methods
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpen(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, sqlite3_file*, int, int *);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsDelete(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, int);
@@ -14812,7 +14812,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs*);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *, sqlite3_int64*);
 
 /*
-** Convenience functions for opening and closing files using 
+** Convenience functions for opening and closing files using
 ** sqlite3_malloc() to obtain space for the file-handle structure.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, sqlite3_file **, int,int*);
@@ -14882,9 +14882,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OsCloseFree(sqlite3_file *);
 */
 #define sqlite3_mutex_alloc(X)    ((sqlite3_mutex*)8)
 #define sqlite3_mutex_free(X)
-#define sqlite3_mutex_enter(X)    
+#define sqlite3_mutex_enter(X)
 #define sqlite3_mutex_try(X)      SQLITE_OK
-#define sqlite3_mutex_leave(X)    
+#define sqlite3_mutex_leave(X)
 #define sqlite3_mutex_held(X)     ((void)(X),1)
 #define sqlite3_mutex_notheld(X)  ((void)(X),1)
 #define sqlite3MutexAlloc(X)      ((sqlite3_mutex*)8)
@@ -15430,7 +15430,7 @@ struct FuncDestructor {
 **   PURE_DATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xFunc)
 **     Used for "pure" date/time functions, this macro is like DFUNCTION
 **     except that it does set the SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT flags.  iArg is
-**     ignored and the user-data for these functions is set to an 
+**     ignored and the user-data for these functions is set to an
 **     arbitrary non-NULL pointer.  The bNC parameter is not used.
 **
 **   AGGREGATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xStep, xFinal)
@@ -18215,7 +18215,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char **sqlite3CompileOptions(int *pnOpt);
 /* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
 
 /* An array to map all upper-case characters into their corresponding
-** lower-case character. 
+** lower-case character.
 **
 ** SQLite only considers US-ASCII (or EBCDIC) characters.  We do not
 ** handle case conversions for the UTF character set since the tables
@@ -18282,7 +18282,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3UpperToLower[] = {
 ** The equivalent of tolower() is implemented using the sqlite3UpperToLower[]
 ** array. tolower() is used more often than toupper() by SQLite.
 **
-** Bit 0x40 is set if the character is non-alphanumeric and can be used in an 
+** Bit 0x40 is set if the character is non-alphanumeric and can be used in an
 ** SQLite identifier.  Identifiers are alphanumerics, "_", "$", and any
 ** non-ASCII UTF character. Hence the test for whether or not a character is
 ** part of an identifier is 0x46.
@@ -18372,7 +18372,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3CtypeMap[256] = {
 ** if journal_mode=MEMORY or if temp_store=MEMORY, regardless of this
 ** setting.)
 */
-#ifndef SQLITE_STMTJRNL_SPILL 
+#ifndef SQLITE_STMTJRNL_SPILL
 # define SQLITE_STMTJRNL_SPILL (64*1024)
 #endif
 
@@ -18486,7 +18486,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PendingByte = 0x40000000;
 ** Properties of opcodes.  The OPFLG_INITIALIZER macro is
 ** created by mkopcodeh.awk during compilation.  Data is obtained
 ** from the comments following the "case OP_xxxx:" statements in
-** the vdbe.c file.  
+** the vdbe.c file.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3OpcodeProperty[] = OPFLG_INITIALIZER;
 
@@ -18656,7 +18656,7 @@ struct VdbeCursor {
 ** When a sub-program is executed (OP_Program), a structure of this type
 ** is allocated to store the current value of the program counter, as
 ** well as the current memory cell array and various other frame specific
-** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished, 
+** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished,
 ** these values are copied back to the Vdbe from the VdbeFrame structure,
 ** restoring the state of the VM to as it was before the sub-program
 ** began executing.
@@ -18745,7 +18745,7 @@ struct sqlite3_value {
 ** If the MEM_Str flag is set then Mem.z points at a string representation.
 ** Usually this is encoded in the same unicode encoding as the main
 ** database (see below for exceptions). If the MEM_Term flag is also
-** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real 
+** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real
 ** flags may coexist with the MEM_Str flag.
 */
 #define MEM_Null      0x0001   /* Value is NULL (or a pointer) */
@@ -18799,7 +18799,7 @@ struct sqlite3_value {
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function 
+** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function
 ** implementation calling sqlite3_set_auxdata() is stored in an instance
 ** of this structure. All such structures associated with a single VM
 ** are stored in a linked list headed at Vdbe.pAuxData. All are destroyed
@@ -18938,7 +18938,7 @@ struct Vdbe {
 #define VDBE_MAGIC_DEAD     0x5606c3c8    /* The VDBE has been deallocated */
 
 /*
-** Structure used to store the context required by the 
+** Structure used to store the context required by the
 ** sqlite3_preupdate_*() API functions.
 */
 struct PreUpdate {
@@ -18953,7 +18953,7 @@ struct PreUpdate {
   i64 iKey1;                      /* First key value passed to hook */
   i64 iKey2;                      /* Second key value passed to hook */
   Mem *aNew;                      /* Array of new.* values */
-  Table *pTab;                    /* Schema object being upated */          
+  Table *pTab;                    /* Schema object being upated */
   Index *pPk;                     /* PK index if pTab is WITHOUT ROWID */
 };
 
@@ -19031,7 +19031,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *, int *);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(const VdbeCursor *, Mem *);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterCompare(const VdbeCursor *, Mem *, int, int *);
 
-#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) 
+#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE)
 SQLITE_PRIVATE   void sqlite3VdbeEnter(Vdbe*);
 #else
 # define sqlite3VdbeEnter(X)
@@ -19300,7 +19300,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
       break;
     }
 
-    /* 
+    /*
     ** Return an approximation for the amount of memory currently used
     ** by all pagers associated with the given database connection.  The
     ** highwater mark is meaningless and is returned as zero.
@@ -19344,7 +19344,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
           HashElem *p;
 
           nByte += sqlite3GlobalConfig.m.xRoundup(sizeof(HashElem)) * (
-              pSchema->tblHash.count 
+              pSchema->tblHash.count
             + pSchema->trigHash.count
             + pSchema->idxHash.count
             + pSchema->fkeyHash.count
@@ -19394,7 +19394,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
 
     /*
     ** Set *pCurrent to the total cache hits or misses encountered by all
-    ** pagers the database handle is connected to. *pHighwater is always set 
+    ** pagers the database handle is connected to. *pHighwater is always set
     ** to zero.
     */
     case SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT:
@@ -19450,7 +19450,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
 **
 *************************************************************************
 ** This file contains the C functions that implement date and time
-** functions for SQLite.  
+** functions for SQLite.
 **
 ** There is only one exported symbol in this file - the function
 ** sqlite3RegisterDateTimeFunctions() found at the bottom of the file.
@@ -19459,7 +19459,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
 ** SQLite processes all times and dates as julian day numbers.  The
 ** dates and times are stored as the number of days since noon
 ** in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C. according to the Gregorian
-** calendar system. 
+** calendar system.
 **
 ** 1970-01-01 00:00:00 is JD 2440587.5
 ** 2000-01-01 00:00:00 is JD 2451544.5
@@ -19807,7 +19807,7 @@ static void setRawDateNumber(DateTime *p, double r){
 ** The following are acceptable forms for the input string:
 **
 **      YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.FFF  +/-HH:MM
-**      DDDD.DD 
+**      DDDD.DD
 **      now
 **
 ** In the first form, the +/-HH:MM is always optional.  The fractional
@@ -19817,8 +19817,8 @@ static void setRawDateNumber(DateTime *p, double r){
 ** as there is a year and date.
 */
 static int parseDateOrTime(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  const char *zDate, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  const char *zDate,
   DateTime *p
 ){
   double r;
@@ -19839,7 +19839,7 @@ static int parseDateOrTime(
 ** Multiplying this by 86400000 gives 464269060799999 as the maximum value
 ** for DateTime.iJD.
 **
-** But some older compilers (ex: gcc 4.2.1 on older Macs) cannot deal with 
+** But some older compilers (ex: gcc 4.2.1 on older Macs) cannot deal with
 ** such a large integer literal, so we have to encode it.
 */
 #define INT_464269060799999  ((((i64)0x1a640)<<32)|0x1072fdff)
@@ -19921,14 +19921,14 @@ static void clearYMD_HMS_TZ(DateTime *p){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_LOCALTIME
 /*
 ** On recent Windows platforms, the localtime_s() function is available
-** as part of the "Secure CRT". It is essentially equivalent to 
-** localtime_r() available under most POSIX platforms, except that the 
+** as part of the "Secure CRT". It is essentially equivalent to
+** localtime_r() available under most POSIX platforms, except that the
 ** order of the parameters is reversed.
 **
 ** See http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/a442x3ye(VS.80).aspx.
 **
 ** If the user has not indicated to use localtime_r() or localtime_s()
-** already, check for an MSVC build environment that provides 
+** already, check for an MSVC build environment that provides
 ** localtime_s().
 */
 #if !HAVE_LOCALTIME_R && !HAVE_LOCALTIME_S \
@@ -19984,7 +19984,7 @@ static int osLocaltime(time_t *t, struct tm *pTm){
 /*
 ** Compute the difference (in milliseconds) between localtime and UTC
 ** (a.k.a. GMT) for the time value p where p is in UTC. If no error occurs,
-** return this value and set *pRc to SQLITE_OK. 
+** return this value and set *pRc to SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** Or, if an error does occur, set *pRc to SQLITE_ERROR. The returned value
 ** is undefined in this case.
@@ -20311,9 +20311,9 @@ static int parseModifier(
 ** then assume a default value of "now" for argv[0].
 */
 static int isDate(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  int argc, 
-  sqlite3_value **argv, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  int argc,
+  sqlite3_value **argv,
   DateTime *p
 ){
   int i, n;
@@ -21122,17 +21122,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vfs_unregister(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs){
 **
 *************************************************************************
 **
-** This file contains code to support the concept of "benign" 
+** This file contains code to support the concept of "benign"
 ** malloc failures (when the xMalloc() or xRealloc() method of the
 ** sqlite3_mem_methods structure fails to allocate a block of memory
-** and returns 0). 
+** and returns 0).
 **
 ** Most malloc failures are non-benign. After they occur, SQLite
 ** abandons the current operation and returns an error code (usually
 ** SQLITE_NOMEM) to the user. However, sometimes a fault is not necessarily
-** fatal. For example, if a malloc fails while resizing a hash table, this 
-** is completely recoverable simply by not carrying out the resize. The 
-** hash table will continue to function normally.  So a malloc failure 
+** fatal. For example, if a malloc fails while resizing a hash table, this
+** is completely recoverable simply by not carrying out the resize. The
+** hash table will continue to function normally.  So a malloc failure
 ** during a hash table resize is a benign fault.
 */
 
@@ -21334,7 +21334,7 @@ static malloc_zone_t* _sqliteZone_;
 #else /* if not __APPLE__ */
 
 /*
-** Use standard C library malloc and free on non-Apple systems.  
+** Use standard C library malloc and free on non-Apple systems.
 ** Also used by Apple systems if SQLITE_WITHOUT_ZONEMALLOC is defined.
 */
 #define SQLITE_MALLOC(x)             malloc(x)
@@ -21514,7 +21514,7 @@ static int sqlite3MemInit(void *NotUsed){
     /* defer MT decisions to system malloc */
     _sqliteZone_ = malloc_default_zone();
   }else{
-    /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks, 
+    /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks,
     ** e.g. we have our own dedicated locks */
     _sqliteZone_ = malloc_create_zone(4096, 0);
     malloc_set_zone_name(_sqliteZone_, "Sqlite_Heap");
@@ -21638,7 +21638,7 @@ struct MemBlockHdr {
 ** when this module is combined with other in the amalgamation.
 */
 static struct {
-  
+
   /*
   ** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem.
   */
@@ -21649,7 +21649,7 @@ static struct {
   */
   struct MemBlockHdr *pFirst;
   struct MemBlockHdr *pLast;
-  
+
   /*
   ** The number of levels of backtrace to save in new allocations.
   */
@@ -21662,7 +21662,7 @@ static struct {
   int nTitle;        /* Bytes of zTitle to save.  Includes '\0' and padding */
   char zTitle[100];  /* The title text */
 
-  /* 
+  /*
   ** sqlite3MallocDisallow() increments the following counter.
   ** sqlite3MallocAllow() decrements it.
   */
@@ -21721,7 +21721,7 @@ static struct MemBlockHdr *sqlite3MemsysGetHeader(void *pAllocation){
   pU8 = (u8*)pAllocation;
   assert( pInt[nReserve/sizeof(int)]==(int)REARGUARD );
   /* This checks any of the "extra" bytes allocated due
-  ** to rounding up to an 8 byte boundary to ensure 
+  ** to rounding up to an 8 byte boundary to ensure
   ** they haven't been overwritten.
   */
   while( nReserve-- > p->iSize ) assert( pU8[nReserve]==0x65 );
@@ -21850,7 +21850,7 @@ static void *sqlite3MemMalloc(int nByte){
     p = (void*)pInt;
   }
   sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);
-  return p; 
+  return p;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -21860,7 +21860,7 @@ static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){
   struct MemBlockHdr *pHdr;
   void **pBt;
   char *z;
-  assert( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0 
+  assert( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0
        || mem.mutex!=0 );
   pHdr = sqlite3MemsysGetHeader(pPrior);
   pBt = (void**)pHdr;
@@ -21886,15 +21886,15 @@ static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){
   randomFill(z, sizeof(void*)*pHdr->nBacktraceSlots + sizeof(*pHdr) +
                 (int)pHdr->iSize + sizeof(int) + pHdr->nTitle);
   free(z);
-  sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);  
+  sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);
 }
 
 /*
 ** Change the size of an existing memory allocation.
 **
 ** For this debugging implementation, we *always* make a copy of the
-** allocation into a new place in memory.  In this way, if the 
-** higher level code is using pointer to the old allocation, it is 
+** allocation into a new place in memory.  In this way, if the
+** higher level code is using pointer to the old allocation, it is
 ** much more likely to break and we are much more liking to find
 ** the error.
 */
@@ -22028,7 +22028,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugSync(){
 }
 
 /*
-** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory 
+** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
 ** allocations into that log.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){
@@ -22045,7 +22045,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){
   for(pHdr=mem.pFirst; pHdr; pHdr=pHdr->pNext){
     char *z = (char*)pHdr;
     z -= pHdr->nBacktraceSlots*sizeof(void*) + pHdr->nTitle;
-    fprintf(out, "**** %lld bytes at %p from %s ****\n", 
+    fprintf(out, "**** %lld bytes at %p from %s ****\n",
             pHdr->iSize, &pHdr[1], pHdr->nTitle ? z : "???");
     if( pHdr->nBacktrace ){
       fflush(out);
@@ -22058,7 +22058,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){
   fprintf(out, "COUNTS:\n");
   for(i=0; i<NCSIZE-1; i++){
     if( mem.nAlloc[i] ){
-      fprintf(out, "   %5d: %10d %10d %10d\n", 
+      fprintf(out, "   %5d: %10d %10d %10d\n",
             i*8, mem.nAlloc[i], mem.nCurrent[i], mem.mxCurrent[i]);
     }
   }
@@ -22099,12 +22099,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemdebugMallocCount(){
 **
 *************************************************************************
 ** This file contains the C functions that implement a memory
-** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite. 
+** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite.
 **
 ** This version of the memory allocation subsystem omits all
 ** use of malloc(). The SQLite user supplies a block of memory
 ** before calling sqlite3_initialize() from which allocations
-** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc() 
+** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc()
 ** implementations. Once sqlite3_initialize() has been called,
 ** the amount of memory available to SQLite is fixed and cannot
 ** be changed.
@@ -22135,8 +22135,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemdebugMallocCount(){
 #define N_HASH  61
 
 /*
-** A memory allocation (also called a "chunk") consists of two or 
-** more blocks where each block is 8 bytes.  The first 8 bytes are 
+** A memory allocation (also called a "chunk") consists of two or
+** more blocks where each block is 8 bytes.  The first 8 bytes are
 ** a header that is not returned to the user.
 **
 ** A chunk is two or more blocks that is either checked out or
@@ -22159,10 +22159,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemdebugMallocCount(){
 **
 ** The second block of free chunks is of the form u.list.  The
 ** two fields form a double-linked list of chunks of related sizes.
-** Pointers to the head of the list are stored in mem3.aiSmall[] 
+** Pointers to the head of the list are stored in mem3.aiSmall[]
 ** for smaller chunks and mem3.aiHash[] for larger chunks.
 **
-** The second block of a chunk is user data if the chunk is checked 
+** The second block of a chunk is user data if the chunk is checked
 ** out.  If a chunk is checked out, the user data may extend into
 ** the u.hdr.prevSize value of the following chunk.
 */
@@ -22198,12 +22198,12 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem3Global {
   ** True if we are evaluating an out-of-memory callback.
   */
   int alarmBusy;
-  
+
   /*
   ** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem.
   */
   sqlite3_mutex *mutex;
-  
+
   /*
   ** The minimum amount of free space that we have seen.
   */
@@ -22219,7 +22219,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem3Global {
   u32 szMaster;
 
   /*
-  ** Array of lists of free blocks according to the block size 
+  ** Array of lists of free blocks according to the block size
   ** for smaller chunks, or a hash on the block size for larger
   ** chunks.
   */
@@ -22250,7 +22250,7 @@ static void memsys3UnlinkFromList(u32 i, u32 *pRoot){
 }
 
 /*
-** Unlink the chunk at index i from 
+** Unlink the chunk at index i from
 ** whatever list is currently a member of.
 */
 static void memsys3Unlink(u32 i){
@@ -22334,8 +22334,8 @@ static void memsys3OutOfMemory(int nByte){
 
 
 /*
-** Chunk i is a free chunk that has been unlinked.  Adjust its 
-** size parameters for check-out and return a pointer to the 
+** Chunk i is a free chunk that has been unlinked.  Adjust its
+** size parameters for check-out and return a pointer to the
 ** user portion of the chunk.
 */
 static void *memsys3Checkout(u32 i, u32 nBlock){
@@ -22388,12 +22388,12 @@ static void *memsys3FromMaster(u32 nBlock){
 /*
 ** *pRoot is the head of a list of free chunks of the same size
 ** or same size hash.  In other words, *pRoot is an entry in either
-** mem3.aiSmall[] or mem3.aiHash[].  
+** mem3.aiSmall[] or mem3.aiHash[].
 **
 ** This routine examines all entries on the given list and tries
-** to coalesce each entries with adjacent free chunks.  
+** to coalesce each entries with adjacent free chunks.
 **
-** If it sees a chunk that is larger than mem3.iMaster, it replaces 
+** If it sees a chunk that is larger than mem3.iMaster, it replaces
 ** the current mem3.iMaster with the new larger chunk.  In order for
 ** this mem3.iMaster replacement to work, the master chunk must be
 ** linked into the hash tables.  That is not the normal state of
@@ -22484,7 +22484,7 @@ static void *memsys3MallocUnsafe(int nByte){
   }
 
 
-  /* STEP 3:  
+  /* STEP 3:
   ** Loop through the entire memory pool.  Coalesce adjacent free
   ** chunks.  Recompute the master chunk as the largest free chunk.
   ** Then try again to satisfy the allocation by carving a piece off
@@ -22591,7 +22591,7 @@ static void *memsys3Malloc(int nBytes){
   memsys3Enter();
   p = memsys3MallocUnsafe(nBytes);
   memsys3Leave();
-  return (void*)p; 
+  return (void*)p;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -22672,7 +22672,7 @@ static void memsys3Shutdown(void *NotUsed){
 
 
 /*
-** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory 
+** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
 ** allocations into that log.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){
@@ -22723,7 +22723,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){
       fprintf(out, " %p(%d)", &mem3.aPool[j],
               (mem3.aPool[j-1].u.hdr.size4x/4)*8-8);
     }
-    fprintf(out, "\n"); 
+    fprintf(out, "\n");
   }
   for(i=0; i<N_HASH; i++){
     if( mem3.aiHash[i]==0 ) continue;
@@ -22732,7 +22732,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){
       fprintf(out, " %p(%d)", &mem3.aPool[j],
               (mem3.aPool[j-1].u.hdr.size4x/4)*8-8);
     }
-    fprintf(out, "\n"); 
+    fprintf(out, "\n");
   }
   fprintf(out, "master=%d\n", mem3.iMaster);
   fprintf(out, "nowUsed=%d\n", mem3.nPool*8 - mem3.szMaster*8);
@@ -22749,7 +22749,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){
 }
 
 /*
-** This routine is the only routine in this file with external 
+** This routine is the only routine in this file with external
 ** linkage.
 **
 ** Populate the low-level memory allocation function pointers in
@@ -22789,12 +22789,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const sqlite3_mem_methods *sqlite3MemGetMemsys3(void){
 **
 *************************************************************************
 ** This file contains the C functions that implement a memory
-** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite. 
+** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite.
 **
 ** This version of the memory allocation subsystem omits all
 ** use of malloc(). The application gives SQLite a block of memory
 ** before calling sqlite3_initialize() from which allocations
-** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc() 
+** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc()
 ** implementations. Once sqlite3_initialize() has been called,
 ** the amount of memory available to SQLite is fixed and cannot
 ** be changed.
@@ -22814,12 +22814,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const sqlite3_mem_methods *sqlite3MemGetMemsys3(void){
 ** This algorithm is described in: J. M. Robson. "Bounds for Some Functions
 ** Concerning Dynamic Storage Allocation". Journal of the Association for
 ** Computing Machinery, Volume 21, Number 8, July 1974, pages 491-499.
-** 
+**
 ** Let n be the size of the largest allocation divided by the minimum
 ** allocation size (after rounding all sizes up to a power of 2.)  Let M
 ** be the maximum amount of memory ever outstanding at one time.  Let
 ** N be the total amount of memory available for allocation.  Robson
-** proved that this memory allocator will never breakdown due to 
+** proved that this memory allocator will never breakdown due to
 ** fragmentation as long as the following constraint holds:
 **
 **      N >=  M*(1 + log2(n)/2) - n + 1
@@ -22830,7 +22830,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const sqlite3_mem_methods *sqlite3MemGetMemsys3(void){
 /* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
 
 /*
-** This version of the memory allocator is used only when 
+** This version of the memory allocator is used only when
 ** SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMSYS5 is defined.
 */
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMSYS5
@@ -22875,7 +22875,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem5Global {
   int szAtom;      /* Smallest possible allocation in bytes */
   int nBlock;      /* Number of szAtom sized blocks in zPool */
   u8 *zPool;       /* Memory available to be allocated */
-  
+
   /*
   ** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem.
   */
@@ -22894,7 +22894,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem5Global {
   u32 maxCount;       /* Maximum instantaneous currentCount */
   u32 maxRequest;     /* Largest allocation (exclusive of internal frag) */
 #endif
-  
+
   /*
   ** Lists of free blocks.  aiFreelist[0] is a list of free blocks of
   ** size mem5.szAtom.  aiFreelist[1] holds blocks of size szAtom*2.
@@ -23070,7 +23070,7 @@ static void memsys5FreeUnsafe(void *pOld){
   u32 size, iLogsize;
   int iBlock;
 
-  /* Set iBlock to the index of the block pointed to by pOld in 
+  /* Set iBlock to the index of the block pointed to by pOld in
   ** the array of mem5.szAtom byte blocks pointed to by mem5.zPool.
   */
   iBlock = (int)(((u8 *)pOld-mem5.zPool)/mem5.szAtom);
@@ -23139,7 +23139,7 @@ static void *memsys5Malloc(int nBytes){
     p = memsys5MallocUnsafe(nBytes);
     memsys5Leave();
   }
-  return (void*)p; 
+  return (void*)p;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -23152,14 +23152,14 @@ static void memsys5Free(void *pPrior){
   assert( pPrior!=0 );
   memsys5Enter();
   memsys5FreeUnsafe(pPrior);
-  memsys5Leave();  
+  memsys5Leave();
 }
 
 /*
 ** Change the size of an existing memory allocation.
 **
 ** The outer layer memory allocator prevents this routine from
-** being called with pPrior==0.  
+** being called with pPrior==0.
 **
 ** nBytes is always a value obtained from a prior call to
 ** memsys5Round().  Hence nBytes is always a non-negative power
@@ -23292,7 +23292,7 @@ static void memsys5Shutdown(void *NotUsed){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
 /*
-** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory 
+** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
 ** allocations into that log.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys5Dump(const char *zFilename){
@@ -23334,7 +23334,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys5Dump(const char *zFilename){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** This routine is the only routine in this file with external 
+** This routine is the only routine in this file with external
 ** linkage. It returns a pointer to a static sqlite3_mem_methods
 ** struct populated with the memsys5 methods.
 */
@@ -23387,11 +23387,11 @@ static SQLITE_WSD int mutexIsInit = 0;
 /*
 ** Initialize the mutex system.
 */
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MutexInit(void){ 
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MutexInit(void){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   if( !sqlite3GlobalConfig.mutex.xMutexAlloc ){
     /* If the xMutexAlloc method has not been set, then the user did not
-    ** install a mutex implementation via sqlite3_config() prior to 
+    ** install a mutex implementation via sqlite3_config() prior to
     ** sqlite3_initialize() being called. This block copies pointers to
     ** the default implementation into the sqlite3GlobalConfig structure.
     */
@@ -23498,7 +23498,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_mutex_try(sqlite3_mutex *p){
 
 /*
 ** The sqlite3_mutex_leave() routine exits a mutex that was previously
-** entered by the same thread.  The behavior is undefined if the mutex 
+** entered by the same thread.  The behavior is undefined if the mutex
 ** is not currently entered. If a NULL pointer is passed as an argument
 ** this function is a no-op.
 */
@@ -23567,9 +23567,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_mutex_notheld(sqlite3_mutex *p){
 */
 static int noopMutexInit(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
 static int noopMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
-static sqlite3_mutex *noopMutexAlloc(int id){ 
+static sqlite3_mutex *noopMutexAlloc(int id){
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(id);
-  return (sqlite3_mutex*)8; 
+  return (sqlite3_mutex*)8;
 }
 static void noopMutexFree(sqlite3_mutex *p){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(p); return; }
 static void noopMutexEnter(sqlite3_mutex *p){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(p); return; }
@@ -23634,7 +23634,7 @@ static int debugMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
 /*
 ** The sqlite3_mutex_alloc() routine allocates a new
 ** mutex and returns a pointer to it.  If it returns NULL
-** that means that a mutex could not be allocated. 
+** that means that a mutex could not be allocated.
 */
 static sqlite3_mutex *debugMutexAlloc(int id){
   static sqlite3_debug_mutex aStatic[SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_VFS3 - 1];
@@ -23811,7 +23811,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mutex {
 ** there might be race conditions that can cause these routines to
 ** deliver incorrect results.  In particular, if pthread_equal() is
 ** not an atomic operation, then these routines might delivery
-** incorrect results.  On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a 
+** incorrect results.  On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a
 ** comparison of two integers and is therefore atomic.  But we are
 ** told that HPUX is not such a platform.  If so, then these routines
 ** will not always work correctly on HPUX.
@@ -23893,7 +23893,7 @@ static int pthreadMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
 **
 ** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST
 ** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc()
-** returns a different mutex on every call.  But for the static 
+** returns a different mutex on every call.  But for the static
 ** mutex types, the same mutex is returned on every call that has
 ** the same type number.
 */
@@ -23998,7 +23998,7 @@ static void pthreadMutexEnter(sqlite3_mutex *p){
   ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
   ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
   ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
-  ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that 
+  ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
   ** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
   ** address at the same time.  If either of these two conditions
   ** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
@@ -24041,7 +24041,7 @@ static int pthreadMutexTry(sqlite3_mutex *p){
   ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
   ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
   ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
-  ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that 
+  ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
   ** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
   ** address at the same time.  If either of these two conditions
   ** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
@@ -24253,7 +24253,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_mutex_methods const *sqlite3DefaultMutex(void){
       __asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
       return val;
   }
- 
+
 #elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
 
   __inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
@@ -24904,7 +24904,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_memory_alarm(
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Set the soft heap-size limit for the library. Passing a zero or 
+** Set the soft heap-size limit for the library. Passing a zero or
 ** negative value indicates no limit.
 */
 SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_soft_heap_limit64(sqlite3_int64 n){
@@ -24994,7 +24994,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_memory_highwater(int resetFlag){
 }
 
 /*
-** Trigger the alarm 
+** Trigger the alarm
 */
 static void sqlite3MallocAlarm(int nByte){
   if( mem0.alarmThreshold<=0 ) return;
@@ -25228,7 +25228,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3Realloc(void *pOld, u64 nBytes){
     sqlite3_mutex_enter(mem0.mutex);
     sqlite3StatusHighwater(SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_SIZE, (int)nBytes);
     nDiff = nNew - nOld;
-    if( nDiff>0 && sqlite3StatusValue(SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED) >= 
+    if( nDiff>0 && sqlite3StatusValue(SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED) >=
           mem0.alarmThreshold-nDiff ){
       sqlite3MallocAlarm(nDiff);
     }
@@ -25270,7 +25270,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_realloc64(void *pOld, sqlite3_uint64 n){
 
 /*
 ** Allocate and zero memory.
-*/ 
+*/
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3MallocZero(u64 n){
   void *p = sqlite3Malloc(n);
   if( p ){
@@ -25300,13 +25300,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE void *dbMallocRawFinish(sqlite3 *db, u64 n){
   assert( db!=0 );
   p = sqlite3Malloc(n);
   if( !p ) sqlite3OomFault(db);
-  sqlite3MemdebugSetType(p, 
+  sqlite3MemdebugSetType(p,
          (db->lookaside.bDisable==0) ? MEMTYPE_LOOKASIDE : MEMTYPE_HEAP);
   return p;
 }
 
 /*
-** Allocate memory, either lookaside (if possible) or heap.  
+** Allocate memory, either lookaside (if possible) or heap.
 ** If the allocation fails, set the mallocFailed flag in
 ** the connection pointer.
 **
@@ -25423,9 +25423,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(sqlite3 *db, void *p, u64 n){
 }
 
 /*
-** Make a copy of a string in memory obtained from sqliteMalloc(). These 
+** Make a copy of a string in memory obtained from sqliteMalloc(). These
 ** functions call sqlite3MallocRaw() directly instead of sqliteMalloc(). This
-** is because when memory debugging is turned on, these two functions are 
+** is because when memory debugging is turned on, these two functions are
 ** called via macros that record the current file and line number in the
 ** ThreadData structure.
 */
@@ -25507,20 +25507,20 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int apiOomError(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function must be called before exiting any API function (i.e. 
+** This function must be called before exiting any API function (i.e.
 ** returning control to the user) that has called sqlite3_malloc or
 ** sqlite3_realloc.
 **
 ** The returned value is normally a copy of the second argument to this
 ** function. However, if a malloc() failure has occurred since the previous
-** invocation SQLITE_NOMEM is returned instead. 
+** invocation SQLITE_NOMEM is returned instead.
 **
 ** If an OOM as occurred, then the connection error-code (the value
 ** returned by sqlite3_errcode()) is set to SQLITE_NOMEM.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ApiExit(sqlite3* db, int rc){
   /* If the db handle must hold the connection handle mutex here.
-  ** Otherwise the read (and possible write) of db->mallocFailed 
+  ** Otherwise the read (and possible write) of db->mallocFailed
   ** is unsafe, as is the call to sqlite3Error().
   */
   assert( db!=0 );
@@ -25535,7 +25535,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ApiExit(sqlite3* db, int rc){
 /************** Begin file printf.c ******************************************/
 /*
 ** The "printf" code that follows dates from the 1980's.  It is in
-** the public domain. 
+** the public domain.
 **
 **************************************************************************
 **
@@ -25885,7 +25885,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VXPrintf(
                      sizeof(char*)==sizeof(long int) ? 1 : 0;
         /* Fall through into the next case */
       case etORDINAL:
-      case etRADIX:      
+      case etRADIX:
         cThousand = 0;
         /* Fall through into the next case */
       case etDECIMAL:
@@ -26060,7 +26060,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VXPrintf(
           e2 = exp;
         }
         if( MAX(e2,0)+(i64)precision+(i64)width > etBUFSIZE - 15 ){
-          bufpt = zExtra 
+          bufpt = zExtra
               = sqlite3Malloc( MAX(e2,0)+(i64)precision+(i64)width+15 );
           if( bufpt==0 ){
             setStrAccumError(pAccum, STRACCUM_NOMEM);
@@ -26508,7 +26508,7 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_vmprintf(const char *zFormat, va_list ap){
   char zBase[SQLITE_PRINT_BUF_SIZE];
   StrAccum acc;
 
-#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR  
+#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
   if( zFormat==0 ){
     (void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
     return 0;
@@ -26660,7 +26660,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3XPrintf(StrAccum *p, const char *zFormat, ...){
 **
 ** This file contains C code to implement the TreeView debugging routines.
 ** These routines print a parse tree to standard output for debugging and
-** analysis. 
+** analysis.
 **
 ** The interfaces in this file is only available when compiling
 ** with SQLITE_DEBUG.
@@ -26777,7 +26777,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TreeViewSelect(TreeView *pView, const Select *p, u8 m
   if( p==0 ){
     sqlite3TreeViewLine(pView, "nil-SELECT");
     return;
-  } 
+  }
   pView = sqlite3TreeViewPush(pView, moreToFollow);
   if( p->pWith ){
     sqlite3TreeViewWith(pView, p->pWith, 1);
@@ -26829,7 +26829,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TreeViewSelect(TreeView *pView, const Select *p, u8 m
           sqlite3XPrintf(&x, " LEFT-JOIN");
         }
         sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&x);
-        sqlite3TreeViewItem(pView, zLine, i<p->pSrc->nSrc-1); 
+        sqlite3TreeViewItem(pView, zLine, i<p->pSrc->nSrc-1);
         if( pItem->pSelect ){
           sqlite3TreeViewSelect(pView, pItem->pSelect, 0);
         }
@@ -27080,7 +27080,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TreeViewExpr(TreeView *pView, const Expr *pExpr, u8 m
       ** is set to the column of the pseudo-table to read, or to -1 to
       ** read the rowid field.
       */
-      sqlite3TreeViewLine(pView, "%s(%d)", 
+      sqlite3TreeViewLine(pView, "%s(%d)",
           pExpr->iTable ? "NEW" : "OLD", pExpr->iColumn);
       break;
     }
@@ -27386,13 +27386,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadCreate(
   memset(p, 0, sizeof(*p));
   p->xTask = xTask;
   p->pIn = pIn;
-  /* If the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL callback is registered to a 
+  /* If the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL callback is registered to a
   ** function that returns SQLITE_ERROR when passed the argument 200, that
-  ** forces worker threads to run sequentially and deterministically 
+  ** forces worker threads to run sequentially and deterministically
   ** for testing purposes. */
   if( sqlite3FaultSim(200) ){
     rc = 1;
-  }else{    
+  }else{
     rc = pthread_create(&p->tid, 0, xTask, pIn);
   }
   if( rc ){
@@ -27474,9 +27474,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadCreate(
   *ppThread = 0;
   p = sqlite3Malloc(sizeof(*p));
   if( p==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
-  /* If the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL callback is registered to a 
+  /* If the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL callback is registered to a
   ** function that returns SQLITE_ERROR when passed the argument 200, that
-  ** forces worker threads to run sequentially and deterministically 
+  ** forces worker threads to run sequentially and deterministically
   ** (via the sqlite3FaultSim() term of the conditional) for testing
   ** purposes. */
   if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0 || sqlite3FaultSim(200) ){
@@ -27605,7 +27605,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadJoin(SQLiteThread *p, void **ppOut){
 **    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
 **
 *************************************************************************
-** This file contains routines used to translate between UTF-8, 
+** This file contains routines used to translate between UTF-8,
 ** UTF-16, UTF-16BE, and UTF-16LE.
 **
 ** Notes on UTF-8:
@@ -27786,7 +27786,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3Utf8Read(
 /*
 ** If the TRANSLATE_TRACE macro is defined, the value of each Mem is
 ** printed on stderr on the way into and out of sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate().
-*/ 
+*/
 /* #define TRANSLATE_TRACE 1 */
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
@@ -27817,7 +27817,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SQLITE_NOINLINE int sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate(Mem *pMem, u8 desired
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* If the translation is between UTF-16 little and big endian, then 
+  /* If the translation is between UTF-16 little and big endian, then
   ** all that is required is to swap the byte order. This case is handled
   ** differently from the others.
   */
@@ -27895,13 +27895,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SQLITE_NOINLINE int sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate(Mem *pMem, u8 desired
     if( pMem->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE ){
       /* UTF-16 Little-endian -> UTF-8 */
       while( zIn<zTerm ){
-        READ_UTF16LE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c); 
+        READ_UTF16LE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c);
         WRITE_UTF8(z, c);
       }
     }else{
       /* UTF-16 Big-endian -> UTF-8 */
       while( zIn<zTerm ){
-        READ_UTF16BE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c); 
+        READ_UTF16BE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c);
         WRITE_UTF8(z, c);
       }
     }
@@ -27932,7 +27932,7 @@ translate_out:
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
 /*
-** This routine checks for a byte-order mark at the beginning of the 
+** This routine checks for a byte-order mark at the beginning of the
 ** UTF-16 string stored in *pMem. If one is present, it is removed and
 ** the encoding of the Mem adjusted. This routine does not do any
 ** byte-swapping, it just sets Mem.enc appropriately.
@@ -27955,7 +27955,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemHandleBom(Mem *pMem){
       bom = SQLITE_UTF16LE;
     }
   }
-  
+
   if( bom ){
     rc = sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(pMem);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -27975,7 +27975,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemHandleBom(Mem *pMem){
 ** pZ is a UTF-8 encoded unicode string. If nByte is less than zero,
 ** return the number of unicode characters in pZ up to (but not including)
 ** the first 0x00 byte. If nByte is not less than zero, return the
-** number of unicode characters in the first nByte of pZ (or up to 
+** number of unicode characters in the first nByte of pZ (or up to
 ** the first 0x00, whichever comes first).
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Utf8CharLen(const char *zIn, int nByte){
@@ -27995,7 +27995,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Utf8CharLen(const char *zIn, int nByte){
   return r;
 }
 
-/* This test function is not currently used by the automated test-suite. 
+/* This test function is not currently used by the automated test-suite.
 ** Hence it is only available in debug builds.
 */
 #if defined(SQLITE_TEST) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
@@ -28057,7 +28057,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Utf16ByteLen(const void *zIn, int nChar){
   int c;
   unsigned char const *z = zIn;
   int n = 0;
-  
+
   if( SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE==SQLITE_UTF16BE ){
     while( n<nChar ){
       READ_UTF16BE(z, 1, c);
@@ -28202,15 +28202,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsNaN(double x){
   **
   **      This option [-ffast-math] should never be turned on by any
   **      -O option since it can result in incorrect output for programs
-  **      which depend on an exact implementation of IEEE or ISO 
+  **      which depend on an exact implementation of IEEE or ISO
   **      rules/specifications for math functions.
   **
   ** Under MSVC, this NaN test may fail if compiled with a floating-
-  ** point precision mode other than /fp:precise.  From the MSDN 
+  ** point precision mode other than /fp:precise.  From the MSDN
   ** documentation:
   **
-  **      The compiler [with /fp:precise] will properly handle comparisons 
-  **      involving NaN. For example, x != x evaluates to true if x is NaN 
+  **      The compiler [with /fp:precise] will properly handle comparisons
+  **      involving NaN. For example, x != x evaluates to true if x is NaN
   **      ...
   */
 #ifdef __FAST_MATH__
@@ -28241,7 +28241,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Strlen30(const char *z){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the declared type of a column.  Or return zDflt if the column 
+** Return the declared type of a column.  Or return zDflt if the column
 ** has no declared type.
 **
 ** The column type is an extra string stored after the zero-terminator on
@@ -28546,7 +28546,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AtoF(const char *z, double *pResult, int length, u8 en
     z+=incr;
     eValid = 0;
 
-    /* This branch is needed to avoid a (harmless) buffer overread.  The 
+    /* This branch is needed to avoid a (harmless) buffer overread.  The
     ** special comment alerts the mutation tester that the correct answer
     ** is obtained even if the branch is omitted */
     if( z>=zEnd ) goto do_atof_calc;              /*PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD*/
@@ -28630,7 +28630,7 @@ do_atof_calc:
           }
         }
       }else{
-        /* 1.0e+22 is the largest power of 10 than can be 
+        /* 1.0e+22 is the largest power of 10 than can be
         ** represented exactly. */
         while( e%22 ) { scale *= 1.0e+1; e -= 1; }
         while( e>0 ) { scale *= 1.0e+22; e -= 22; }
@@ -28926,7 +28926,7 @@ static int SQLITE_NOINLINE putVarint64(unsigned char *p, u64 v){
       v >>= 7;
     }
     return 9;
-  }    
+  }
   n = 0;
   do{
     buf[n++] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80);
@@ -29136,8 +29136,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3GetVarint(const unsigned char *p, u64 *v){
 ** If the varint stored in p[0] is larger than can fit in a 32-bit unsigned
 ** integer, then set *v to 0xffffffff.
 **
-** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the 
-** single-byte case.  All code should use the MACRO version as 
+** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the
+** single-byte case.  All code should use the MACRO version as
 ** this function assumes the single-byte case has already been handled.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v){
@@ -29355,7 +29355,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3HexToBlob(sqlite3 *db, const char *z, int n){
 ** argument.  The zType is a word like "NULL" or "closed" or "invalid".
 */
 static void logBadConnection(const char *zType){
-  sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, 
+  sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
      "API call with %s database connection pointer",
      zType
   );
@@ -29429,7 +29429,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AddInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
     if( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) > iB + 1 ) return 1;
   }
   *pA += iB;
-  return 0; 
+  return 0;
 #endif
 }
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SubInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
@@ -29470,7 +29470,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MulInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
 }
 
 /*
-** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible.  Or 
+** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible.  Or
 ** if the integer has a value of -2147483648, return +2147483647
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AbsInt32(int x){
@@ -29510,11 +29510,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FileSuffix3(const char *zBaseFilename, char *z){
 }
 #endif
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Find (an approximate) sum of two LogEst values.  This computation is
 ** not a simple "+" operator because LogEst is stored as a logarithmic
 ** value.
-** 
+**
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE LogEst sqlite3LogEstAdd(LogEst a, LogEst b){
   static const unsigned char x[] = {
@@ -29628,8 +29628,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u64 sqlite3LogEstToInt(LogEst x){
 ** Conceptually:
 **
 **    struct VList {
-**      int nAlloc;   // Number of allocated slots 
-**      int nUsed;    // Number of used slots 
+**      int nAlloc;   // Number of allocated slots
+**      int nUsed;    // Number of used slots
 **      struct VListEntry {
 **        int iValue;    // Value for this entry
 **        int nSlot;     // Slots used by this entry
@@ -29638,7 +29638,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u64 sqlite3LogEstToInt(LogEst x){
 **    }
 **
 ** During code generation, pointers to the variable names within the
-** VList are taken.  When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an 
+** VList are taken.  When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an
 ** indication that the VList may never again be enlarged, since the
 ** accompanying realloc() would invalidate the pointers.
 */
@@ -29829,7 +29829,7 @@ static int rehash(Hash *pH, unsigned int new_size){
 
   /* The inability to allocates space for a larger hash table is
   ** a performance hit but it is not a fatal error.  So mark the
-  ** allocation as a benign. Use sqlite3Malloc()/memset(0) instead of 
+  ** allocation as a benign. Use sqlite3Malloc()/memset(0) instead of
   ** sqlite3MallocZero() to make the allocation, as sqlite3MallocZero()
   ** only zeroes the requested number of bytes whereas this module will
   ** use the actual amount of space allocated for the hash table (which
@@ -29881,7 +29881,7 @@ static HashElem *findElementWithHash(
   if( pHash ) *pHash = h;
   while( count-- ){
     assert( elem!=0 );
-    if( sqlite3StrICmp(elem->pKey,pKey)==0 ){ 
+    if( sqlite3StrICmp(elem->pKey,pKey)==0 ){
       return elem;
     }
     elem = elem->next;
@@ -29899,7 +29899,7 @@ static void removeElementGivenHash(
 ){
   struct _ht *pEntry;
   if( elem->prev ){
-    elem->prev->next = elem->next; 
+    elem->prev->next = elem->next;
   }else{
     pH->first = elem->next;
   }
@@ -30233,7 +30233,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3OpcodeName(int i){
 ** Styles 4, 5, and 7 are only available of SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
 ** is defined to 1.  The SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE also enables automatic
 ** selection of the appropriate locking style based on the filesystem
-** where the database is located.  
+** where the database is located.
 */
 #if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE)
 #  if defined(__APPLE__)
@@ -30345,7 +30345,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3OpcodeName(int i){
 #define osGetpid(X) (pid_t)getpid()
 
 /*
-** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not 
+** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not
 ** a normal expected return code of SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_OK
 */
 #define IS_LOCK_ERROR(x)  ((x != SQLITE_OK) && (x != SQLITE_BUSY))
@@ -30410,7 +30410,7 @@ struct unixFile {
   ** whenever any part of the database changes.  An assertion fault will
   ** occur if a file is updated without also updating the transaction
   ** counter.  This test is made to avoid new problems similar to the
-  ** one described by ticket #3584. 
+  ** one described by ticket #3584.
   */
   unsigned char transCntrChng;   /* True if the transaction counter changed */
   unsigned char dbUpdate;        /* True if any part of database file changed */
@@ -30419,7 +30419,7 @@ struct unixFile {
 #endif
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
-  /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that 
+  /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that
   ** it is larger than the struct CrashFile defined in test6.c.
   */
   char aPadding[32];
@@ -30549,7 +30549,7 @@ static pid_t randomnessPid = 0;
       __asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
       return val;
   }
- 
+
 #elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
 
   __inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
@@ -30762,7 +30762,7 @@ static struct unix_syscall {
 #ifdef __DJGPP__
   { "fstat",        0,                 0  },
 #define osFstat(a,b,c)    0
-#else     
+#else
   { "fstat",        (sqlite3_syscall_ptr)fstat,      0  },
 #define osFstat     ((int(*)(int,struct stat*))aSyscall[5].pCurrent)
 #endif
@@ -30987,7 +30987,7 @@ static const char *unixNextSystemCall(sqlite3_vfs *p, const char *zName){
 
 /*
 ** Do not accept any file descriptor less than this value, in order to avoid
-** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for 
+** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for
 ** standard input, output, and error.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR
@@ -31026,7 +31026,7 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
     }
     if( fd>=SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR ) break;
     osClose(fd);
-    sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING, 
+    sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING,
                 "attempt to open \"%s\" as file descriptor %d", z, fd);
     fd = -1;
     if( osOpen("/dev/null", f, m)<0 ) break;
@@ -31034,9 +31034,9 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
   if( fd>=0 ){
     if( m!=0 ){
       struct stat statbuf;
-      if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0 
+      if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0
        && statbuf.st_size==0
-       && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m 
+       && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m
       ){
         osFchmod(fd, m);
       }
@@ -31051,11 +31051,11 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
 /*
 ** Helper functions to obtain and relinquish the global mutex. The
 ** global mutex is used to protect the unixInodeInfo and
-** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be 
+** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be
 ** shared by multiple threads.
 **
-** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex 
-** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert() 
+** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex
+** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert()
 ** statements. e.g.
 **
 **   unixEnterMutex()
@@ -31163,7 +31163,7 @@ static int lockTrace(int fd, int op, struct flock *p){
 static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){
   int rc;
 #ifdef __ANDROID__
-  /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if 
+  /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if
   ** _FILE_OFFSET_BITS=64 is defined. This means it is unsafe to attempt to
   ** truncate a file to any size larger than 2GiB. Silently ignore any
   ** such attempts.  */
@@ -31179,32 +31179,32 @@ static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){
 ** This routine translates a standard POSIX errno code into something
 ** useful to the clients of the sqlite3 functions.  Specifically, it is
 ** intended to translate a variety of "try again" errors into SQLITE_BUSY
-** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into 
+** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into
 ** SQLITE_IOERR
-** 
+**
 ** Errors during initialization of locks, or file system support for locks,
 ** should handle ENOLCK, ENOTSUP, EOPNOTSUPP separately.
 */
 static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) {
-  assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) || 
-          (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) || 
+  assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) ||
+          (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) ||
           (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK) ||
           (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK) );
   switch (posixError) {
-  case EACCES: 
+  case EACCES:
   case EAGAIN:
   case ETIMEDOUT:
   case EBUSY:
   case EINTR:
-  case ENOLCK:  
-    /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support 
+  case ENOLCK:
+    /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support
      * introspection, in which it actually means what it says */
     return SQLITE_BUSY;
-    
-  case EPERM: 
+
+  case EPERM:
     return SQLITE_PERM;
-    
-  default: 
+
+  default:
     return sqliteIOErr;
   }
 }
@@ -31219,7 +31219,7 @@ static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) {
 **
 ** A pointer to an instance of the following structure can be used as a
 ** unique file ID in VxWorks.  Each instance of this structure contains
-** a copy of the canonical filename.  There is also a reference count.  
+** a copy of the canonical filename.  There is also a reference count.
 ** The structure is reclaimed when the number of pointers to it drops to
 ** zero.
 **
@@ -31235,7 +31235,7 @@ struct vxworksFileId {
 };
 
 #if OS_VXWORKS
-/* 
+/*
 ** All unique filenames are held on a linked list headed by this
 ** variable:
 */
@@ -31307,7 +31307,7 @@ static struct vxworksFileId *vxworksFindFileId(const char *zAbsoluteName){
   */
   unixEnterMutex();
   for(pCandidate=vxworksFileList; pCandidate; pCandidate=pCandidate->pNext){
-    if( pCandidate->nName==n 
+    if( pCandidate->nName==n
      && memcmp(pCandidate->zCanonicalName, pNew->zCanonicalName, n)==0
     ){
        sqlite3_free(pNew);
@@ -31400,7 +31400,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){
 ** cnt>0 means there are cnt shared locks on the file.
 **
 ** Any attempt to lock or unlock a file first checks the locking
-** structure.  The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a 
+** structure.  The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a
 ** POSIX lock if the internal lock structure transitions between
 ** a locked and an unlocked state.
 **
@@ -31433,7 +31433,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){
 **
 ** SQLite used to support LinuxThreads.  But support for LinuxThreads
 ** was dropped beginning with version 3.7.0.  SQLite will still work with
-** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection 
+** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection
 ** per database file in the same process and (2) database connections
 ** do not move across threads.
 */
@@ -31450,7 +31450,7 @@ struct unixFileId {
   /* We are told that some versions of Android contain a bug that
   ** sizes ino_t at only 32-bits instead of 64-bits. (See
   ** https://android-review.googlesource.com/#/c/115351/3/dist/sqlite3.c)
-  ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number.  
+  ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number.
   ** On small machines that only have 32-bit inodes, this wastes 4 bytes,
   ** but that should not be a big deal. */
   /* WAS:  ino_t ino;   */
@@ -31504,7 +31504,7 @@ static unsigned int nUnusedFd = 0;    /* Total unused file descriptors */
 ** strerror_r().
 **
 ** The first argument passed to the macro should be the error code that
-** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN). 
+** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN).
 ** The two subsequent arguments should be the name of the OS function that
 ** failed (e.g. "unlink", "open") and the associated file-system path,
 ** if any.
@@ -31522,7 +31522,7 @@ static int unixLogErrorAtLine(
   /* If this is not a threadsafe build (SQLITE_THREADSAFE==0), then use
   ** the strerror() function to obtain the human-readable error message
   ** equivalent to errno. Otherwise, use strerror_r().
-  */ 
+  */
 #if SQLITE_THREADSAFE && defined(HAVE_STRERROR_R)
   char aErr[80];
   memset(aErr, 0, sizeof(aErr));
@@ -31530,18 +31530,18 @@ static int unixLogErrorAtLine(
 
   /* If STRERROR_R_CHAR_P (set by autoconf scripts) or __USE_GNU is defined,
   ** assume that the system provides the GNU version of strerror_r() that
-  ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer 
-  ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere. 
-  ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of 
+  ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer
+  ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere.
+  ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of
   ** strerror_r(), which always writes an error message into aErr[].
   **
   ** If the code incorrectly assumes that it is the POSIX version that is
   ** available, the error message will often be an empty string. Not a
-  ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available 
+  ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available
   ** could lead to a segfault though.
   */
 #if defined(STRERROR_R_CHAR_P) || defined(__USE_GNU)
-  zErr = 
+  zErr =
 # endif
   strerror_r(iErrno, aErr, sizeof(aErr)-1);
 
@@ -31592,7 +31592,7 @@ static void storeLastErrno(unixFile *pFile, int error){
 
 /*
 ** Close all file descriptors accumuated in the unixInodeInfo->pUnused list.
-*/ 
+*/
 static void closePendingFds(unixFile *pFile){
   unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode;
   UnixUnusedFd *p;
@@ -31737,7 +31737,7 @@ static int fileHasMoved(unixFile *pFile){
 #else
   struct stat buf;
   return pFile->pInode!=0 &&
-      (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0 
+      (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0
          || (u64)buf.st_ino!=pFile->pInode->fileId.ino);
 #endif
 }
@@ -31818,7 +31818,7 @@ static int unixCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
     }
   }
 #endif
-  
+
   unixLeaveMutex();
   OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (unix)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
 
@@ -31827,7 +31827,7 @@ static int unixCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile.  The lock is 
+** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile.  The lock is
 ** described by pLock.
 **
 ** If the pFile was opened read/write from unix-excl, then the only lock
@@ -31919,7 +31919,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   **
   ** A process may only obtain a RESERVED lock after it has a SHARED lock.
   ** A RESERVED lock is implemented by grabbing a write-lock on the
-  ** 'reserved byte'. 
+  ** 'reserved byte'.
   **
   ** A process may only obtain a PENDING lock after it has obtained a
   ** SHARED lock. A PENDING lock is implemented by obtaining a write-lock
@@ -31933,7 +31933,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   ** implemented by obtaining a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte
   ** range'. Since all other locks require a read-lock on one of the bytes
   ** within this range, this ensures that no other locks are held on the
-  ** database. 
+  ** database.
   */
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
@@ -31974,7 +31974,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   /* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
   ** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
   */
-  if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && 
+  if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
           (pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK))
   ){
     rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -31985,7 +31985,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   ** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
   ** return SQLITE_OK.
   */
-  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && 
+  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
       (pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
     assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
     assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 );
@@ -32003,7 +32003,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   */
   lock.l_len = 1L;
   lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
-  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK 
+  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
       || (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock<PENDING_LOCK)
   ){
     lock.l_type = (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK?F_RDLCK:F_WRLCK);
@@ -32042,7 +32042,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
     if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       /* This could happen with a network mount */
       tErrno = errno;
-      rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; 
+      rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
     }
 
     if( rc ){
@@ -32084,7 +32084,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
       }
     }
   }
-  
+
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
   /* Set up the transaction-counter change checking flags when
@@ -32113,7 +32113,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 
 end_lock:
   unixLeaveMutex();
-  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), 
+  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
       rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
   return rc;
 }
@@ -32138,11 +32138,11 @@ static void setPendingFd(unixFile *pFile){
 **
 ** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below
 ** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op.
-** 
+**
 ** If handleNFSUnlock is true, then on downgrading an EXCLUSIVE_LOCK to SHARED
 ** the byte range is divided into 2 parts and the first part is unlocked then
-** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked.  This works 
-** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to 
+** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked.  This works
+** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to
 ** remove the write lock on a region when a read lock is set.
 */
 static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
@@ -32180,7 +32180,7 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
 
     /* downgrading to a shared lock on NFS involves clearing the write lock
     ** before establishing the readlock - to avoid a race condition we downgrade
-    ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a 
+    ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a
     ** write lock until the rest is covered by a read lock:
     **  1:   [WWWWW]
     **  2:   [....W]
@@ -32196,7 +32196,7 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
       if( handleNFSUnlock ){
         int tErrno;               /* Error code from system call errors */
         off_t divSize = SHARED_SIZE - 1;
-        
+
         lock.l_type = F_UNLCK;
         lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
         lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST;
@@ -32238,11 +32238,11 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
         lock.l_len = SHARED_SIZE;
         if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) ){
           /* In theory, the call to unixFileLock() cannot fail because another
-          ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this 
+          ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this
           ** indicates that the other process is not following the locking
           ** protocol. If this happens, return SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK. Returning
-          ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes 
-          ** an assert to fail). */ 
+          ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes
+          ** an assert to fail). */
           rc = SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK;
           storeLastErrno(pFile, errno);
           goto end_unlock;
@@ -32318,7 +32318,7 @@ static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd);
 #endif
 
 /*
-** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation 
+** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation
 ** common to all locking schemes. It closes the directory and file
 ** handles, if they are valid, and sets all fields of the unixFile
 ** structure to 0.
@@ -32376,7 +32376,7 @@ static int unixClose(sqlite3_file *id){
   if( ALWAYS(pFile->pInode) && pFile->pInode->nLock ){
     /* If there are outstanding locks, do not actually close the file just
     ** yet because that would clear those locks.  Instead, add the file
-    ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list.  It will be automatically closed 
+    ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list.  It will be automatically closed
     ** when the last lock is cleared.
     */
     setPendingFd(pFile);
@@ -32475,7 +32475,7 @@ static int dotlockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) {
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
 
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
   reserved = osAccess((const char*)pFile->lockingContext, 0)==0;
   OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
@@ -32529,7 +32529,7 @@ static int dotlockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
 #endif
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* grab an exclusive lock */
   rc = osMkdir(zLockFile, 0777);
   if( rc<0 ){
@@ -32544,8 +32544,8 @@ static int dotlockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
       }
     }
     return rc;
-  } 
-  
+  }
+
   /* got it, set the type and return ok */
   pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
   return rc;
@@ -32569,7 +32569,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
   OSTRACE(("UNLOCK  %d %d was %d pid=%d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
            pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
   assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-  
+
   /* no-op if possible */
   if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -32582,7 +32582,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     pFile->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* To fully unlock the database, delete the lock file */
   assert( eFileLock==NO_LOCK );
   rc = osRmdir(zLockFile);
@@ -32594,7 +32594,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
       rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
       storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
     }
-    return rc; 
+    return rc;
   }
   pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK;
   return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -32641,7 +32641,7 @@ static int robust_flock(int fd, int op){
 #else
 # define robust_flock(a,b) flock(a,b)
 #endif
-     
+
 
 /*
 ** This routine checks if there is a RESERVED lock held on the specified
@@ -32653,16 +32653,16 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   int reserved = 0;
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-  
+
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
-  
+
   /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
   if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
     reserved = 1;
   }
-  
+
   /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
   if( !reserved ){
     /* attempt to get the lock */
@@ -32673,7 +32673,7 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
       if ( lrc ) {
         int tErrno = errno;
         /* unlock failed with an error */
-        lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; 
+        lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
         storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
         rc = lrc;
       }
@@ -32681,7 +32681,7 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
       int tErrno = errno;
       reserved = 1;
       /* someone else might have it reserved */
-      lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); 
+      lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK);
       if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){
         storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
         rc = lrc;
@@ -32735,15 +32735,15 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
 
   assert( pFile );
 
-  /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.  
+  /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
   ** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
   if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) {
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* grab an exclusive lock */
-  
+
   if (robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_EX | LOCK_NB)) {
     int tErrno = errno;
     /* didn't get, must be busy */
@@ -32755,7 +32755,7 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     /* got it, set the type and return ok */
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
   }
-  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), 
+  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
            rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
 #ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
   if( (rc & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR ){
@@ -32775,23 +32775,23 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
 */
 static int flockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
   OSTRACE(("UNLOCK  %d %d was %d pid=%d (flock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
            pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
   assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-  
+
   /* no-op if possible */
   if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
   if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) {
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* no, really, unlock. */
   if( robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_UN) ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
@@ -32842,14 +32842,14 @@ static int semXCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) {
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
 
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
 
   /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
   if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
     reserved = 1;
   }
-  
+
   /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
   if( !reserved ){
     sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem;
@@ -32908,14 +32908,14 @@ static int semXLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
   sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
-  /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.  
+  /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
   ** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
   if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) {
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     rc = SQLITE_OK;
     goto sem_end_lock;
   }
-  
+
   /* lock semaphore now but bail out when already locked. */
   if( sem_trywait(pSem)==-1 ){
     rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -32945,18 +32945,18 @@ static int semXUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
   OSTRACE(("UNLOCK  %d %d was %d pid=%d (sem)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
            pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
   assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-  
+
   /* no-op if possible */
   if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
   if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) {
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* no, really unlock. */
   if ( sem_post(pSem)==-1 ) {
     int rc, tErrno = errno;
@@ -32964,7 +32964,7 @@ static int semXUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){
       storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
     }
-    return rc; 
+    return rc;
   }
   pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK;
   return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -33029,7 +33029,7 @@ struct ByteRangeLockPB2
 /*
 ** This is a utility for setting or clearing a bit-range lock on an
 ** AFP filesystem.
-** 
+**
 ** Return SQLITE_OK on success, SQLITE_BUSY on failure.
 */
 static int afpSetLock(
@@ -33041,14 +33041,14 @@ static int afpSetLock(
 ){
   struct ByteRangeLockPB2 pb;
   int err;
-  
+
   pb.unLockFlag = setLockFlag ? 0 : 1;
   pb.startEndFlag = 0;
   pb.offset = offset;
-  pb.length = length; 
+  pb.length = length;
   pb.fd = pFile->h;
-  
-  OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n", 
+
+  OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n",
     (setLockFlag?"ON":"OFF"), pFile->h, (pb.fd==-1?"[testval-1]":""),
     offset, length));
   err = fsctl(path, afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL, &pb, 0);
@@ -33083,9 +33083,9 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
   int reserved = 0;
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
   afpLockingContext *context;
-  
+
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
   context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
   if( context->reserved ){
@@ -33093,17 +33093,17 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
   unixEnterMutex(); /* Because pFile->pInode is shared across threads */
-  
+
   /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
   if( pFile->pInode->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
     reserved = 1;
   }
-  
+
   /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it.
    */
   if( !reserved ){
     /* lock the RESERVED byte */
-    int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);  
+    int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);
     if( SQLITE_OK==lrc ){
       /* if we succeeded in taking the reserved lock, unlock it to restore
       ** the original state */
@@ -33116,10 +33116,10 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
       rc=lrc;
     }
   }
-  
+
   unixLeaveMutex();
   OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (afp)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
-  
+
   *pResOut = reserved;
   return rc;
 }
@@ -33153,7 +33153,7 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
   unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode;
   afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
   OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s was %s(%s,%d) pid=%d (afp)\n", pFile->h,
            azFileLock(eFileLock), azFileLock(pFile->eFileLock),
@@ -33177,7 +33177,7 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
   assert( eFileLock!=PENDING_LOCK );
   assert( eFileLock!=RESERVED_LOCK || pFile->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
-  
+
   /* This mutex is needed because pFile->pInode is shared across threads
   */
   unixEnterMutex();
@@ -33186,18 +33186,18 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   /* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
   ** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
   */
-  if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && 
+  if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
        (pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK))
      ){
     rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
     goto afp_end_lock;
   }
-  
+
   /* If a SHARED lock is requested, and some thread using this PID already
   ** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
   ** return SQLITE_OK.
   */
-  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && 
+  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
      (pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
     assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
     assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 );
@@ -33207,12 +33207,12 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
     pInode->nLock++;
     goto afp_end_lock;
   }
-    
+
   /* A PENDING lock is needed before acquiring a SHARED lock and before
   ** acquiring an EXCLUSIVE lock.  For the SHARED lock, the PENDING will
   ** be released.
   */
-  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK 
+  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
       || (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock<PENDING_LOCK)
   ){
     int failed;
@@ -33222,30 +33222,30 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
       goto afp_end_lock;
     }
   }
-  
+
   /* If control gets to this point, then actually go ahead and make
   ** operating system calls for the specified lock.
   */
   if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ){
     int lrc1, lrc2, lrc1Errno = 0;
     long lk, mask;
-    
+
     assert( pInode->nShared==0 );
     assert( pInode->eFileLock==0 );
-        
+
     mask = (sizeof(long)==8) ? LARGEST_INT64 : 0x7fffffff;
     /* Now get the read-lock SHARED_LOCK */
     /* note that the quality of the randomness doesn't matter that much */
-    lk = random(); 
+    lk = random();
     pInode->sharedByte = (lk & mask)%(SHARED_SIZE - 1);
-    lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, 
+    lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
           SHARED_FIRST+pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1);
     if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ){
       lrc1Errno = pFile->lastErrno;
     }
     /* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */
     lrc2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
-    
+
     if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ) {
       storeLastErrno(pFile, lrc1Errno);
       rc = lrc1;
@@ -33280,34 +33280,34 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
     }
     if (!failed && eFileLock == EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) {
       /* Acquire an EXCLUSIVE lock */
-        
-      /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range.  we'll need to 
+
+      /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range.  we'll need to
       ** reestablish the shared lock if we can't get the  afpUnlock
       */
       if( !(failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST +
                          pInode->sharedByte, 1, 0)) ){
         int failed2 = SQLITE_OK;
         /* now attemmpt to get the exclusive lock range */
-        failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, 
+        failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST,
                                SHARED_SIZE, 1);
-        if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, 
+        if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
                        SHARED_FIRST + pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1)) ){
           /* Can't reestablish the shared lock.  Sqlite can't deal, this is
           ** a critical I/O error
           */
-          rc = ((failed & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 : 
+          rc = ((failed & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 :
                SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
           goto afp_end_lock;
-        } 
+        }
       }else{
-        rc = failed; 
+        rc = failed;
       }
     }
     if( failed ){
       rc = failed;
     }
   }
-  
+
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     pInode->eFileLock = eFileLock;
@@ -33315,10 +33315,10 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
     pFile->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK;
     pInode->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK;
   }
-  
+
 afp_end_lock:
   unixLeaveMutex();
-  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), 
+  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
          rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
   return rc;
 }
@@ -33357,7 +33357,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     SimulateIOErrorBenign(1);
     SimulateIOError( h=(-1) )
     SimulateIOErrorBenign(0);
-    
+
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
     /* When reducing a lock such that other processes can start
     ** reading the database file again, make sure that the
@@ -33372,7 +33372,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
            || pFile->transCntrChng==1 );
     pFile->inNormalWrite = 0;
 #endif
-    
+
     if( pFile->eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){
       rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 0);
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1) ){
@@ -33385,11 +33385,11 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK ){
       rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
-    } 
+    }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=RESERVED_LOCK && context->reserved ){
       rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1, 0);
-      if( !rc ){ 
-        context->reserved = 0; 
+      if( !rc ){
+        context->reserved = 0;
       }
     }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1)){
@@ -33424,14 +33424,14 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
       }
     }
   }
-  
+
   unixLeaveMutex();
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
   return rc;
 }
 
 /*
-** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context 
+** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context
 */
 static int afpClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -33483,7 +33483,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 /*
 ** The code above is the NFS lock implementation.  The code is specific
 ** to MacOSX and does not work on other unix platforms.  No alternative
-** is available.  
+** is available.
 **
 ********************* End of the NFS lock implementation **********************
 ******************************************************************************/
@@ -33491,7 +33491,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 /******************************************************************************
 **************** Non-locking sqlite3_file methods *****************************
 **
-** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the 
+** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the
 ** sqlite3_file object other than the locking methods.  The locking
 ** methods were defined in divisions above (one locking method per
 ** division).  Those methods that are common to all locking modes
@@ -33499,7 +33499,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 */
 
 /*
-** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt 
+** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt
 ** bytes into pBuf. Return the number of bytes actually read.
 **
 ** NB:  If you define USE_PREAD or USE_PREAD64, then it might also
@@ -33561,8 +33561,8 @@ static int seekAndRead(unixFile *id, sqlite3_int64 offset, void *pBuf, int cnt){
 ** wrong.
 */
 static int unixRead(
-  sqlite3_file *id, 
-  void *pBuf, 
+  sqlite3_file *id,
+  void *pBuf,
   int amt,
   sqlite3_int64 offset
 ){
@@ -33577,7 +33577,7 @@ static int unixRead(
 #if 0
   assert( pFile->pPreallocatedUnused==0
        || offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
-       || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE 
+       || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
   );
 #endif
 
@@ -33615,7 +33615,7 @@ static int unixRead(
 /*
 ** Attempt to seek the file-descriptor passed as the first argument to
 ** absolute offset iOff, then attempt to write nBuf bytes of data from
-** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise, 
+** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise,
 ** return the actual number of bytes written (which may be less than
 ** nBuf).
 */
@@ -33675,10 +33675,10 @@ static int seekAndWrite(unixFile *id, i64 offset, const void *pBuf, int cnt){
 ** or some other error code on failure.
 */
 static int unixWrite(
-  sqlite3_file *id, 
-  const void *pBuf, 
+  sqlite3_file *id,
+  const void *pBuf,
   int amt,
-  sqlite3_int64 offset 
+  sqlite3_int64 offset
 ){
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
   int wrote = 0;
@@ -33690,7 +33690,7 @@ static int unixWrite(
 #if 0
   assert( pFile->pPreallocatedUnused==0
        || offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
-       || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE 
+       || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
   );
 #endif
 
@@ -33732,7 +33732,7 @@ static int unixWrite(
     }
   }
 #endif
- 
+
   while( (wrote = seekAndWrite(pFile, offset, pBuf, amt))<amt && wrote>0 ){
     amt -= wrote;
     offset += wrote;
@@ -33798,8 +33798,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fullsync_count = 0;
 **
 ** SQLite sets the dataOnly flag if the size of the file is unchanged.
 ** The idea behind dataOnly is that it should only write the file content
-** to disk, not the inode.  We only set dataOnly if the file size is 
-** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode.  However, 
+** to disk, not the inode.  We only set dataOnly if the file size is
+** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode.  However,
 ** Ted Ts'o tells us that fdatasync() will also write the inode if the
 ** file size has changed.  The only real difference between fdatasync()
 ** and fsync(), Ted tells us, is that fdatasync() will not flush the
@@ -33813,7 +33813,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
   int rc;
 
   /* The following "ifdef/elif/else/" block has the same structure as
-  ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering 
+  ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering
   ** up the real code with the UNUSED_PARAMETER() macros.
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC
@@ -33827,7 +33827,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly);
 #endif
 
-  /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and 
+  /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and
   ** FULLSYNC.  This is used during testing to verify that this procedure
   ** gets called with the correct arguments.
   */
@@ -33853,11 +33853,11 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
     rc = 1;
   }
   /* If the FULLFSYNC failed, fall back to attempting an fsync().
-  ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local 
+  ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local
   ** file system (on OSX), so failure indicates that FULLFSYNC
-  ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync 
-  ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.  
-  ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid 
+  ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync
+  ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.
+  ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid
   ** the fcntl call every time sync is called.
   */
   if( rc ) rc = fsync(fd);
@@ -33867,7 +33867,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
   ** so currently we default to the macro that redefines fdatasync to fsync
   */
   rc = fsync(fd);
-#else 
+#else
   rc = fdatasync(fd);
 #if OS_VXWORKS
   if( rc==-1 && errno==ENOTSUP ){
@@ -34028,7 +34028,7 @@ static int unixTruncate(sqlite3_file *id, i64 nByte){
 #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
     /* If the file was just truncated to a size smaller than the currently
     ** mapped region, reduce the effective mapping size as well. SQLite will
-    ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on.  
+    ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on.
     */
     if( nByte<pFile->mmapSize ){
       pFile->mmapSize = nByte;
@@ -34074,8 +34074,8 @@ static int unixFileSize(sqlite3_file *id, i64 *pSize){
 static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file*,int,void*);
 #endif
 
-/* 
-** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT 
+/*
+** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT
 ** file-control operation.  Enlarge the database to nBytes in size
 ** (rounded up to the next chunk-size).  If the database is already
 ** nBytes or larger, this routine is a no-op.
@@ -34084,7 +34084,7 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
   if( pFile->szChunk>0 ){
     i64 nSize;                    /* Required file size */
     struct stat buf;              /* Used to hold return values of fstat() */
-   
+
     if( osFstat(pFile->h, &buf) ){
       return SQLITE_IOERR_FSTAT;
     }
@@ -34093,8 +34093,8 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
     if( nSize>(i64)buf.st_size ){
 
 #if defined(HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE) && HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE
-      /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate() 
-      ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success, 
+      /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate()
+      ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success,
       ** or an error number on  failure". See the manpage for details. */
       int err;
       do{
@@ -34102,7 +34102,7 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
       }while( err==EINTR );
       if( err ) return SQLITE_IOERR_WRITE;
 #else
-      /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a 
+      /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a
       ** single byte to the last byte in each block that falls entirely
       ** within the extended region. Then, if required, a single byte
       ** at offset (nSize-1), to set the size of the file correctly.
@@ -34275,9 +34275,9 @@ static int unixFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
 
 /*
 ** If pFd->sectorSize is non-zero when this function is called, it is a
-** no-op. Otherwise, the values of pFd->sectorSize and 
-** pFd->deviceCharacteristics are set according to the file-system 
-** characteristics. 
+** no-op. Otherwise, the values of pFd->sectorSize and
+** pFd->deviceCharacteristics are set according to the file-system
+** characteristics.
 **
 ** There are two versions of this function. One for QNX and one for all
 ** other systems.
@@ -34311,7 +34311,7 @@ static void setDeviceCharacteristics(unixFile *pFd){
 static void setDeviceCharacteristics(unixFile *pFile){
   if( pFile->sectorSize == 0 ){
     struct statvfs fsInfo;
-       
+
     /* Set defaults for non-supported filesystems */
     pFile->sectorSize = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE;
     pFile->deviceCharacteristics = 0;
@@ -34420,7 +34420,7 @@ static int unixDeviceCharacteristics(sqlite3_file *id){
 /*
 ** Return the system page size.
 **
-** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file. 
+** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file.
 ** Instead, it should be called via macro osGetpagesize().
 */
 static int unixGetpagesize(void){
@@ -34438,7 +34438,7 @@ static int unixGetpagesize(void){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
 
 /*
-** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer.  
+** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer.
 **
 ** When multiple threads all reference the same wal-index, each thread
 ** has its own unixShm object, but they all point to a single instance
@@ -34458,7 +34458,7 @@ static int unixGetpagesize(void){
 **      nRef
 **
 ** The following fields are read-only after the object is created:
-** 
+**
 **      fid
 **      zFilename
 **
@@ -34585,7 +34585,7 @@ static int unixShmSystemLock(
   }
 #endif
 
-  return rc;        
+  return rc;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -34637,20 +34637,20 @@ static void unixShmPurge(unixFile *pFd){
 }
 
 /*
-** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd.  
+** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd.
 ** This particular implementation uses mmapped files.
 **
 ** The file used to implement shared-memory is in the same directory
 ** as the open database file and has the same name as the open database
 ** file with the "-shm" suffix added.  For example, if the database file
 ** is "/home/user1/config.db" then the file that is created and mmapped
-** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm".  
+** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm".
 **
 ** Another approach to is to use files in /dev/shm or /dev/tmp or an
 ** some other tmpfs mount. But if a file in a different directory
 ** from the database file is used, then differing access permissions
 ** or a chroot() might cause two different processes on the same
-** database to end up using different files for shared memory - 
+** database to end up using different files for shared memory -
 ** meaning that their memory would not really be shared - resulting
 ** in database corruption.  Nevertheless, this tmpfs file usage
 ** can be enabled at compile-time using -DSQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY="/dev/shm"
@@ -34719,7 +34719,7 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){
     memset(pShmNode, 0, sizeof(*pShmNode)+nShmFilename);
     zShmFilename = pShmNode->zFilename = (char*)&pShmNode[1];
 #ifdef SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY
-    sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShmFilename, 
+    sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShmFilename,
                      SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY "/sqlite-shm-%x-%x",
                      (u32)sStat.st_ino, (u32)sStat.st_dev);
 #else
@@ -34754,9 +34754,9 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){
       ** the original owner will not be able to connect.
       */
       robustFchown(pShmNode->h, sStat.st_uid, sStat.st_gid);
-  
+
       /* Check to see if another process is holding the dead-man switch.
-      ** If not, truncate the file to zero length. 
+      ** If not, truncate the file to zero length.
       */
       rc = SQLITE_OK;
       if( unixShmSystemLock(pDbFd, F_WRLCK, UNIX_SHM_DMS, 1)==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -34784,7 +34784,7 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){
   ** the cover of the unixEnterMutex() mutex and the pointer from the
   ** new (struct unixShm) object to the pShmNode has been set. All that is
   ** left to do is to link the new object into the linked list starting
-  ** at pShmNode->pFirst. This must be done while holding the pShmNode->mutex 
+  ** at pShmNode->pFirst. This must be done while holding the pShmNode->mutex
   ** mutex.
   */
   sqlite3_mutex_enter(pShmNode->mutex);
@@ -34802,22 +34802,22 @@ shm_open_err:
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the 
-** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions 
-** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion 
+** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the
+** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions
+** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion
 ** bytes in size.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, an error code is returned and *pp is set to NULL.
 **
 ** Otherwise, if the bExtend parameter is 0 and the requested shared-memory
 ** region has not been allocated (by any client, including one running in a
-** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If 
-** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet 
+** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If
+** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet
 ** been allocated, it is allocated by this function.
 **
 ** If the shared-memory region has already been allocated or is allocated by
-** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes 
-** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped 
+** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes
+** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped
 ** memory and SQLITE_OK returned.
 */
 static int unixShmMap(
@@ -34867,7 +34867,7 @@ static int unixShmMap(
         rc = SQLITE_IOERR_SHMSIZE;
         goto shmpage_out;
       }
-  
+
       if( sStat.st_size<nByte ){
         /* The requested memory region does not exist. If bExtend is set to
         ** false, exit early. *pp will be set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned.
@@ -34916,7 +34916,7 @@ static int unixShmMap(
       void *pMem;
       if( pShmNode->h>=0 ){
         pMem = osMmap(0, nMap,
-            pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, 
+            pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE,
             MAP_SHARED, pShmNode->h, szRegion*(i64)pShmNode->nRegion
         );
         if( pMem==MAP_FAILED ){
@@ -35007,7 +35007,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       p->exclMask &= ~mask;
       p->sharedMask &= ~mask;
-    } 
+    }
   }else if( flags & SQLITE_SHM_SHARED ){
     u16 allShared = 0;  /* Union of locks held by connections other than "p" */
 
@@ -35046,7 +35046,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
         break;
       }
     }
-  
+
     /* Get the exclusive locks at the system level.  Then if successful
     ** also mark the local connection as being locked.
     */
@@ -35065,7 +35065,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory.  
+** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory.
 **
 ** All loads and stores begun before the barrier must complete before
 ** any load or store begun after the barrier.
@@ -35080,7 +35080,7 @@ static void unixShmBarrier(
 }
 
 /*
-** Close a connection to shared-memory.  Delete the underlying 
+** Close a connection to shared-memory.  Delete the underlying
 ** storage if deleteFlag is true.
 **
 ** If there is no shared memory associated with the connection then this
@@ -35153,7 +35153,7 @@ static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd){
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file 
+** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file
 ** descriptor pFd to nNew bytes. Any existing mapping is discarded.
 **
 ** If successful, this function sets the following variables:
@@ -35245,14 +35245,14 @@ static void unixRemapfile(
 
 /*
 ** Memory map or remap the file opened by file-descriptor pFd (if the file
-** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if 
-** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still 
+** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if
+** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still
 ** outstanding xFetch() references to it, this function is a no-op.
 **
-** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of 
-** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the 
+** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of
+** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the
 ** requested size is the size of the file on disk. The actual size of the
-** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured 
+** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured
 ** using SQLITE_FCNTL_MMAP_LIMIT, whichever is smaller.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs (even if the mapping is not
@@ -35293,7 +35293,7 @@ static int unixMapfile(unixFile *pFd, i64 nMap){
 ** Finally, if an error does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final
 ** value of *pp is undefined in this case.
 **
-** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually 
+** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually
 ** release the reference by calling unixUnfetch().
 */
 static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){
@@ -35318,13 +35318,13 @@ static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){
 }
 
 /*
-** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a 
+** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a
 ** reference obtained by an earlier call to unixFetch(). The second
 ** argument passed to this function must be the same as the corresponding
-** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation. 
+** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation.
 **
-** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called 
-** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping 
+** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called
+** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping
 ** may now be invalid and should be unmapped.
 */
 static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){
@@ -35332,7 +35332,7 @@ static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){
   unixFile *pFd = (unixFile *)fd;   /* The underlying database file */
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(iOff);
 
-  /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding 
+  /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding
   ** xFetch references. Or, if p!=0 (meaning it is an xFetch reference),
   ** then there must be at least one outstanding.  */
   assert( (p==0)==(pFd->nFetchOut==0) );
@@ -35540,8 +35540,8 @@ IOMETHODS(
 #endif
 
 #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
-/* 
-** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy 
+/*
+** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
 ** for the database file "filePath".  It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods
 ** object that implements that strategy.
 **
@@ -35583,8 +35583,8 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl(
   }
 
   /* Default case. Handles, amongst others, "nfs".
-  ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds, 
-  ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks. 
+  ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds,
+  ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks.
   */
   lockInfo.l_len = 1;
   lockInfo.l_start = 0;
@@ -35600,7 +35600,7 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl(
     return &dotlockIoMethods;
   }
 }
-static const sqlite3_io_methods 
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
   *(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl;
 
 #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
@@ -35636,7 +35636,7 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *vxworksIoFinderImpl(
     return &semIoMethods;
   }
 }
-static const sqlite3_io_methods 
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
   *(*const vxworksIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = vxworksIoFinderImpl;
 
 #endif /* OS_VXWORKS */
@@ -35764,14 +35764,14 @@ static int fillInUnixFile(
         robust_close(pNew, h, __LINE__);
         h = -1;
       }
-      unixLeaveMutex();        
+      unixLeaveMutex();
     }
   }
 #endif
 
   else if( pLockingStyle == &dotlockIoMethods ){
     /* Dotfile locking uses the file path so it needs to be included in
-    ** the dotlockLockingContext 
+    ** the dotlockLockingContext
     */
     char *zLockFile;
     int nFilename;
@@ -35809,7 +35809,7 @@ static int fillInUnixFile(
     unixLeaveMutex();
   }
 #endif
-  
+
   storeLastErrno(pNew, 0);
 #if OS_VXWORKS
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -35873,7 +35873,7 @@ static int unixGetTempname(int nBuf, char *zBuf){
 
   /* It's odd to simulate an io-error here, but really this is just
   ** using the io-error infrastructure to test that SQLite handles this
-  ** function failing. 
+  ** function failing.
   */
   zBuf[0] = 0;
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR );
@@ -35902,7 +35902,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*);
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database 
+** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database
 ** file (not a journal or master-journal file) identified by pathname
 ** zPath with SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags matching those passed as the second
 ** argument to this function.
@@ -35911,7 +35911,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*);
 ** but the associated file descriptor could not be closed because some
 ** other file descriptor open on the same file is holding a file-lock.
 ** Refer to comments in the unixClose() function and the lengthy comment
-** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for 
+** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for
 ** further details. Also, ticket #4018.
 **
 ** If a suitable file descriptor is found, then it is returned. If no
@@ -35922,8 +35922,8 @@ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){
 
   /* Do not search for an unused file descriptor on vxworks. Not because
   ** vxworks would not benefit from the change (it might, we're not sure),
-  ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better 
-  ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure 
+  ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better
+  ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure
   ** feature.  */
 #if !OS_VXWORKS
   struct stat sStat;                   /* Results of stat() call */
@@ -35962,7 +35962,7 @@ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){
 }
 
 /*
-** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile. 
+** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile.
 */
 static int getFileMode(
   const char *zFile,              /* File name */
@@ -35986,16 +35986,16 @@ static int getFileMode(
 ** This function is called by unixOpen() to determine the unix permissions
 ** to create new files with. If no error occurs, then SQLITE_OK is returned
 ** and a value suitable for passing as the third argument to open(2) is
-** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is 
+** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is
 ** returned and the value of *pMode is not modified.
 **
 ** In most cases, this routine sets *pMode to 0, which will become
 ** an indication to robust_open() to create the file using
 ** SQLITE_DEFAULT_FILE_PERMISSIONS adjusted by the umask.
-** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then 
-** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the 
-** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever 
-** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions 
+** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then
+** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the
+** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever
+** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions
 ** as the associated database file.
 **
 ** If the SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES option is enabled, then the
@@ -36027,10 +36027,10 @@ static int findCreateFileMode(
     **   "<path to db>-journalNN"
     **   "<path to db>-walNN"
     **
-    ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are 
+    ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are
     ** used by the test_multiplex.c module.
     */
-    nDb = sqlite3Strlen30(zPath) - 1; 
+    nDb = sqlite3Strlen30(zPath) - 1;
     while( zPath[nDb]!='-' ){
       /* In normal operation, the journal file name will always contain
       ** a '-' character.  However in 8+3 filename mode, or if a corrupt
@@ -36060,7 +36060,7 @@ static int findCreateFileMode(
 
 /*
 ** Open the file zPath.
-** 
+**
 ** Previously, the SQLite OS layer used three functions in place of this
 ** one:
 **
@@ -36071,13 +36071,13 @@ static int findCreateFileMode(
 ** These calls correspond to the following combinations of flags:
 **
 **     ReadWrite() ->     (READWRITE | CREATE)
-**     ReadOnly()  ->     (READONLY) 
+**     ReadOnly()  ->     (READONLY)
 **     OpenExclusive() -> (READWRITE | CREATE | EXCLUSIVE)
 **
 ** The old OpenExclusive() accepted a boolean argument - "delFlag". If
 ** true, the file was configured to be automatically deleted when the
-** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new 
-** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for 
+** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new
+** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for
 ** OpenExclusive().
 */
 static int unixOpen(
@@ -36112,8 +36112,8 @@ static int unixOpen(
   ** is called the directory file descriptor will be fsync()ed and close()d.
   */
   int syncDir = (isCreate && (
-        eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL 
-     || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL 
+        eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL
+     || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL
   ));
 
@@ -36123,9 +36123,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
   char zTmpname[MAX_PATHNAME+2];
   const char *zName = zPath;
 
-  /* Check the following statements are true: 
+  /* Check the following statements are true:
   **
-  **   (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and 
+  **   (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and
   **   (b) if CREATE is set, then READWRITE must also be set, and
   **   (c) if EXCLUSIVE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
   **   (d) if DELETEONCLOSE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
@@ -36135,7 +36135,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
   assert(isExclusive==0 || isCreate);
   assert(isDelete==0 || isCreate);
 
-  /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and master journal are never 
+  /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and master journal are never
   ** automatically deleted. Nor are they ever temporary files.  */
   assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB );
   assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL );
@@ -36143,9 +36143,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
   assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_WAL );
 
   /* Assert that the upper layer has set one of the "file-type" flags. */
-  assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB 
-       || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL 
-       || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL   || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL 
+  assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB
+       || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL
+       || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL   || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL
        || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL
   );
 
@@ -36195,7 +36195,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
 
   /* Determine the value of the flags parameter passed to POSIX function
   ** open(). These must be calculated even if open() is not called, as
-  ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the 
+  ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the
   ** 'conch file' locking functions later on.  */
   if( isReadonly )  openFlags |= O_RDONLY;
   if( isReadWrite ) openFlags |= O_RDWR;
@@ -36266,7 +36266,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
     p->openFlags = openFlags;
   }
 #endif
-  
+
 #if defined(__APPLE__) || SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
   if( fstatfs(fd, &fsInfo) == -1 ){
     storeLastErrno(p, errno);
@@ -36297,7 +36297,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
     char *envforce = getenv("SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING");
     int useProxy = 0;
 
-    /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means 
+    /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means
     ** never use proxy, NULL means use proxy for non-local files only.  */
     if( envforce!=NULL ){
       useProxy = atoi(envforce)>0;
@@ -36309,9 +36309,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         rc = proxyTransformUnixFile((unixFile*)pFile, ":auto:");
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
-          /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile 
-          ** and clear all the structure's references.  Specifically, 
-          ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op 
+          /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile
+          ** and clear all the structure's references.  Specifically,
+          ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op
           */
           unixClose(pFile);
           return rc;
@@ -36321,9 +36321,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
     }
   }
 #endif
-  
-  assert( zPath==0 || zPath[0]=='/' 
-      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL 
+
+  assert( zPath==0 || zPath[0]=='/'
+      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
   );
   rc = fillInUnixFile(pVfs, fd, pFile, zPath, ctrlFlags);
 
@@ -36440,9 +36440,9 @@ static int mkFullPathname(
 /*
 ** Turn a relative pathname into a full pathname. The relative path
 ** is stored as a nul-terminated string in the buffer pointed to by
-** zPath. 
+** zPath.
 **
-** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes 
+** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes
 ** (in this case, MAX_PATHNAME bytes). The full-path is written to
 ** this buffer before returning.
 */
@@ -36559,7 +36559,7 @@ static void unixDlError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int nBuf, char *zBufOut){
   unixLeaveMutex();
 }
 static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){
-  /* 
+  /*
   ** GCC with -pedantic-errors says that C90 does not allow a void* to be
   ** cast into a pointer to a function.  And yet the library dlsym() routine
   ** returns a void* which is really a pointer to a function.  So how do we
@@ -36569,7 +36569,7 @@ static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){
   ** parameters void* and const char* and returning a pointer to a function.
   ** We initialize x by assigning it a pointer to the dlsym() function.
   ** (That assignment requires a cast.)  Then we call the function that
-  ** x points to.  
+  ** x points to.
   **
   ** This work-around is unlikely to work correctly on any system where
   ** you really cannot cast a function pointer into void*.  But then, on the
@@ -36612,7 +36612,7 @@ static int unixRandomness(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int nBuf, char *zBuf){
   ** tests repeatable.
   */
   memset(zBuf, 0, nBuf);
-  randomnessPid = osGetpid(0);  
+  randomnessPid = osGetpid(0);
 #if !defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_RANDOMNESS)
   {
     int fd, got;
@@ -36679,7 +36679,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_current_time = 0;  /* Fake system time in seconds since 1
 ** epoch of noon in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C according to the
 ** proleptic Gregorian calendar.
 **
-** On success, return SQLITE_OK.  Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date 
+** On success, return SQLITE_OK.  Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date
 ** cannot be found.
 */
 static int unixCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, sqlite3_int64 *piNow){
@@ -36786,7 +36786,7 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 ** To address the performance and cache coherency issues, proxy file locking
 ** changes the way database access is controlled by limiting access to a
 ** single host at a time and moving file locks off of the database file
-** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.  
+** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.
 **
 **
 ** Using proxy locks
@@ -36812,19 +36812,19 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 ** actual proxy file name is generated from the name and path of the
 ** database file.  For example:
 **
-**       For database path "/Users/me/foo.db" 
+**       For database path "/Users/me/foo.db"
 **       The lock path will be "<tmpdir>/sqliteplocks/_Users_me_foo.db:auto:")
 **
 ** Once a lock proxy is configured for a database connection, it can not
 ** be removed, however it may be switched to a different proxy path via
 ** the above APIs (assuming the conch file is not being held by another
-** connection or process). 
+** connection or process).
 **
 **
 ** How proxy locking works
 ** -----------------------
 **
-** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files: 
+** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files:
 **
 **   *  conch file to limit access to the database file to a single host
 **      at a time
@@ -36851,11 +36851,11 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 ** host (the conch ensures that they all use the same local lock file).
 **
 ** Requesting the lock proxy does not immediately take the conch, it is
-** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.  
+** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.
 ** This matches the semantics of the traditional locking behavior, where
 ** opening a connection to a database file does not take a lock on it.
-** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until 
-** the connection to the database is closed. 
+** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until
+** the connection to the database is closed.
 **
 ** The proxy file and the lock file are never deleted so they only need
 ** to be created the first time they are used.
@@ -36869,7 +36869,7 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 **       automatically configured for proxy locking, lock files are
 **       named automatically using the same logic as
 **       PRAGMA lock_proxy_file=":auto:"
-**    
+**
 **  SQLITE_PROXY_DEBUG
 **
 **       Enables the logging of error messages during host id file
@@ -36884,8 +36884,8 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 **
 **       Permissions to use when creating a directory for storing the
 **       lock proxy files, only used when LOCKPROXYDIR is not set.
-**    
-**    
+**
+**
 ** As mentioned above, when compiled with SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING,
 ** setting the environment variable SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING to 1 will
 ** force proxy locking to be used for every database file opened, and 0
@@ -36895,12 +36895,12 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 */
 
 /*
-** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX 
+** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX
 */
 #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
 
 /*
-** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote 
+** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote
 ** and local proxy files in it
 */
 typedef struct proxyLockingContext proxyLockingContext;
@@ -36916,10 +36916,10 @@ struct proxyLockingContext {
   sqlite3_io_methods const *pOldMethod;     /* Original I/O methods for close */
 };
 
-/* 
-** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath, 
+/*
+** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath,
 ** which must point to valid, writable memory large enough for a maxLen length
-** file path. 
+** file path.
 */
 static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
   int len;
@@ -36936,7 +36936,7 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
                lPath, errno, osGetpid(0)));
       return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
     }
-    len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);    
+    len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);
   }
 # else
   len = strlcpy(lPath, "/tmp/", maxLen);
@@ -36946,7 +36946,7 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
   if( lPath[len-1]!='/' ){
     len = strlcat(lPath, "/", maxLen);
   }
-  
+
   /* transform the db path to a unique cache name */
   dbLen = (int)strlen(dbPath);
   for( i=0; i<dbLen && (i+len+7)<(int)maxLen; i++){
@@ -36959,14 +36959,14 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
  ** Creates the lock file and any missing directories in lockPath
  */
 static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){
   int i, len;
   char buf[MAXPATHLEN];
   int start = 0;
-  
+
   assert(lockPath!=NULL);
   /* try to create all the intermediate directories */
   len = (int)strlen(lockPath);
@@ -36974,7 +36974,7 @@ static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){
   for( i=1; i<len; i++ ){
     if( lockPath[i] == '/' && (i - start > 0) ){
       /* only mkdir if leaf dir != "." or "/" or ".." */
-      if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/') 
+      if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/')
          || (i-start==2 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start+1] != '.') ){
         buf[i]='\0';
         if( osMkdir(buf, SQLITE_DEFAULT_PROXYDIR_PERMISSIONS) ){
@@ -37051,13 +37051,13 @@ static int proxyCreateUnixFile(
     switch (terrno) {
       case EACCES:
         return SQLITE_PERM;
-      case EIO: 
+      case EIO:
         return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; /* even though it is the conch */
       default:
         return SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT;
     }
   }
-  
+
   pNew = (unixFile *)sqlite3_malloc64(sizeof(*pNew));
   if( pNew==NULL ){
     rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
@@ -37071,13 +37071,13 @@ static int proxyCreateUnixFile(
   pUnused->fd = fd;
   pUnused->flags = openFlags;
   pNew->pPreallocatedUnused = pUnused;
-  
+
   rc = fillInUnixFile(&dummyVfs, fd, (sqlite3_file*)pNew, path, 0);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     *ppFile = pNew;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-end_create_proxy:    
+end_create_proxy:
   robust_close(pNew, fd, __LINE__);
   sqlite3_free(pNew);
   sqlite3_free(pUnused);
@@ -37096,7 +37096,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_hostid_num = 0;
 extern int gethostuuid(uuid_t id, const struct timespec *wait);
 #endif
 
-/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN 
+/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN
 ** bytes of writable memory.
 */
 static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
@@ -37122,7 +37122,7 @@ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
     pHostID[0] = (char)(pHostID[0] + (char)(sqlite3_hostid_num & 0xFF));
   }
 #endif
-  
+
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
@@ -37133,14 +37133,14 @@ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
 #define PROXY_PATHINDEX    (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN)
 #define PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN  (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN+MAXPATHLEN)
 
-/* 
-** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves 
+/*
+** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves
 ** it back.  The newly created file's file descriptor is assigned to the
-** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is 
+** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is
 ** closed.  Returns zero if successful.
 */
 static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){
-  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; 
+  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
   unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
   char tPath[MAXPATHLEN];
   char buf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
@@ -37154,7 +37154,7 @@ static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){
 
   /* create a new path by replace the trailing '-conch' with '-break' */
   pathLen = strlcpy(tPath, cPath, MAXPATHLEN);
-  if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 || 
+  if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 ||
      (strlcpy(&tPath[pathLen-5], "break", 6) != 5) ){
     sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(errmsg),errmsg,"path error (len %d)",(int)pathLen);
     goto end_breaklock;
@@ -37196,24 +37196,24 @@ end_breaklock:
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the 
+/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the
 ** host id matches.
 */
 static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
-  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; 
+  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
   unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   int nTries = 0;
   struct timespec conchModTime;
-  
+
   memset(&conchModTime, 0, sizeof(conchModTime));
   do {
     rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType);
     nTries ++;
     if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
       /* If the lock failed (busy):
-       * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again. 
-       * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait 
+       * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again.
+       * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait
        *           10 sec and try again
        * 3rd try: break the lock unless the mod time has changed.
        */
@@ -37222,20 +37222,20 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
         storeLastErrno(pFile, errno);
         return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
       }
-      
+
       if( nTries==1 ){
         conchModTime = buf.st_mtimespec;
         usleep(500000); /* wait 0.5 sec and try the lock again*/
-        continue;  
+        continue;
       }
 
       assert( nTries>1 );
-      if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec || 
+      if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec ||
          conchModTime.tv_nsec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_nsec ){
         return SQLITE_BUSY;
       }
-      
-      if( nTries==2 ){  
+
+      if( nTries==2 ){
         char tBuf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
         int len = osPread(conchFile->h, tBuf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN, 0);
         if( len<0 ){
@@ -37252,9 +37252,9 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
           return SQLITE_BUSY;
         }
         usleep(10000000); /* wait 10 sec and try the lock again */
-        continue; 
+        continue;
       }
-      
+
       assert( nTries==3 );
       if( 0==proxyBreakConchLock(pFile, myHostID) ){
         rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -37267,19 +37267,19 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
       }
     }
   } while( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && nTries<3 );
-  
+
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if 
-** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match.  A NULL 
-** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the 
-** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically 
+/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if
+** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match.  A NULL
+** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the
+** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically
 ** and written to the conch file.
 */
 static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
-  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; 
-  
+  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+
   if( pCtx->conchHeld!=0 ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }else{
@@ -37295,7 +37295,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
     int readLen = 0;
     int tryOldLockPath = 0;
     int forceNewLockPath = 0;
-    
+
     OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH  %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
              (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
              osGetpid(0)));
@@ -37316,21 +37316,21 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
       storeLastErrno(pFile, conchFile->lastErrno);
       rc = SQLITE_IOERR_READ;
       goto end_takeconch;
-    }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) || 
+    }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ||
              readBuf[0]!=(char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION ){
-      /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new 
-      ** conch file. 
+      /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new
+      ** conch file.
       */
       createConch = 1;
     }
     /* if the host id matches and the lock path already exists in the conch
-    ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll 
-    ** retry with a new auto-generated path 
+    ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll
+    ** retry with a new auto-generated path
     */
     do { /* in case we need to try again for an :auto: named lock file */
 
       if( !createConch && !forceNewLockPath ){
-        hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, 
+        hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID,
                                   PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
         /* if the conch has data compare the contents */
         if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
@@ -37339,7 +37339,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
            */
           if( hostIdMatch ){
             size_t pathLen = (readLen - PROXY_PATHINDEX);
-            
+
             if( pathLen>=MAXPATHLEN ){
               pathLen=MAXPATHLEN-1;
             }
@@ -37355,23 +37355,23 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
                            readLen-PROXY_PATHINDEX)
         ){
           /* conch host and lock path match */
-          goto end_takeconch; 
+          goto end_takeconch;
         }
       }
-      
+
       /* if the conch isn't writable and doesn't match, we can't take it */
       if( (conchFile->openFlags&O_RDWR) == 0 ){
         rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
         goto end_takeconch;
       }
-      
+
       /* either the conch didn't match or we need to create a new one */
       if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
         proxyGetLockPath(pCtx->dbPath, lockPath, MAXPATHLEN);
         tempLockPath = lockPath;
         /* create a copy of the lock path _only_ if the conch is taken */
       }
-      
+
       /* update conch with host and path (this will fail if other process
       ** has a shared lock already), if the host id matches, use the big
       ** stick.
@@ -37382,7 +37382,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
           /* We are trying for an exclusive lock but another thread in this
            ** same process is still holding a shared lock. */
           rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
-        } else {          
+        } else {
           rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
         }
       }else{
@@ -37391,7 +37391,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         char writeBuffer[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
         int writeSize = 0;
-        
+
         writeBuffer[0] = (char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION;
         memcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
         if( pCtx->lockProxyPath!=NULL ){
@@ -37404,8 +37404,8 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
         robust_ftruncate(conchFile->h, writeSize);
         rc = unixWrite((sqlite3_file *)conchFile, writeBuffer, writeSize, 0);
         full_fsync(conchFile->h,0,0);
-        /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a 
-         ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database 
+        /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a
+         ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database
          */
         if( rc==SQLITE_OK && createConch ){
           struct stat buf;
@@ -37429,14 +37429,14 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
             }
           }else{
             int code = errno;
-            fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n", 
+            fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n",
                     err, code, strerror(code));
 #endif
           }
         }
       }
       conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK);
-      
+
     end_takeconch:
       OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY: CLOSE  %d\n", pFile->h));
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->openFlags ){
@@ -37459,7 +37459,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
         rc = proxyCreateUnixFile(path, &pCtx->lockProxy, 1);
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_NOMEM && tryOldLockPath ){
           /* we couldn't create the proxy lock file with the old lock file path
-           ** so try again via auto-naming 
+           ** so try again via auto-naming
            */
           forceNewLockPath = 1;
           tryOldLockPath = 0;
@@ -37479,7 +37479,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
       }
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         pCtx->conchHeld = 1;
-        
+
         if( pCtx->lockProxy->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
           afpLockingContext *afpCtx;
           afpCtx = (afpLockingContext *)pCtx->lockProxy->lockingContext;
@@ -37491,7 +37491,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
       OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH  %d %s\n", conchFile->h,
                rc==SQLITE_OK?"ok":"failed"));
       return rc;
-    } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file - 
+    } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file -
                  ** we should never get here except via the 'continue' call. */
   }
 }
@@ -37507,7 +37507,7 @@ static int proxyReleaseConch(unixFile *pFile){
   pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
   conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
   OSTRACE(("RELEASECONCH  %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
-           (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"), 
+           (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
            osGetpid(0)));
   if( pCtx->conchHeld>0 ){
     rc = conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, NO_LOCK);
@@ -37535,13 +37535,13 @@ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){
   char *conchPath;              /* buffer in which to construct conch name */
 
   /* Allocate space for the conch filename and initialize the name to
-  ** the name of the original database file. */  
+  ** the name of the original database file. */
   *pConchPath = conchPath = (char *)sqlite3_malloc64(len + 8);
   if( conchPath==0 ){
     return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
   }
   memcpy(conchPath, dbPath, len+1);
-  
+
   /* now insert a "." before the last / character */
   for( i=(len-1); i>=0; i-- ){
     if( conchPath[i]=='/' ){
@@ -37564,7 +37564,7 @@ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){
 
 
 /* Takes a fully configured proxy locking-style unix file and switches
-** the local lock file path 
+** the local lock file path
 */
 static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
   proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
@@ -37573,7 +37573,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
 
   if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){
     return SQLITE_BUSY;
-  }  
+  }
 
   /* nothing to do if the path is NULL, :auto: or matches the existing path */
   if( !path || path[0]=='\0' || !strcmp(path, ":auto:") ||
@@ -37591,7 +37591,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
     sqlite3_free(oldPath);
     pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, path);
   }
-  
+
   return rc;
 }
 
@@ -37605,7 +37605,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
 static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){
 #if defined(__APPLE__)
   if( pFile->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
-    /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field 
+    /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field
     ** of the struct */
     assert( (int)strlen((char*)pFile->lockingContext)<=MAXPATHLEN );
     strlcpy(dbPath, ((afpLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext)->dbPath,
@@ -37626,9 +37626,9 @@ static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){
 }
 
 /*
-** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking 
+** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking
 ** will be performed on the local proxy lock file.  The following fields
-** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and 
+** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and
 ** the unix structure properly cleaned up at close time:
 **  ->lockingContext
 **  ->pMethod
@@ -37638,7 +37638,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
   char dbPath[MAXPATHLEN+1];       /* Name of the database file */
   char *lockPath=NULL;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  
+
   if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){
     return SQLITE_BUSY;
   }
@@ -37648,7 +37648,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
   }else{
     lockPath=(char *)path;
   }
-  
+
   OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY  %d for %s pid=%d\n", pFile->h,
            (lockPath ? lockPath : ":auto:"), osGetpid(0)));
 
@@ -37682,7 +37682,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
         rc = SQLITE_OK;
       }
     }
-  }  
+  }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && lockPath ){
     pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, lockPath);
   }
@@ -37694,7 +37694,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
     }
   }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned, 
+    /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned,
     ** switch the locking context and pMethod then return.
     */
     pCtx->oldLockingContext = pFile->lockingContext;
@@ -37702,12 +37702,12 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
     pCtx->pOldMethod = pFile->pMethod;
     pFile->pMethod = &proxyIoMethods;
   }else{
-    if( pCtx->conchFile ){ 
+    if( pCtx->conchFile ){
       pCtx->conchFile->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file *)pCtx->conchFile);
       sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFile);
     }
     sqlite3DbFree(0, pCtx->lockProxyPath);
-    sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath); 
+    sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath);
     sqlite3_free(pCtx);
   }
   OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY  %d %s\n", pFile->h,
@@ -37745,7 +37745,7 @@ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
         if( isProxyStyle ){
           /* turn off proxy locking - not supported.  If support is added for
           ** switching proxy locking mode off then it will need to fail if
-          ** the journal mode is WAL mode. 
+          ** the journal mode is WAL mode.
           */
           rc = SQLITE_ERROR /*SQLITE_PROTOCOL? SQLITE_MISUSE?*/;
         }else{
@@ -37755,9 +37755,9 @@ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
       }else{
         const char *proxyPath = (const char *)pArg;
         if( isProxyStyle ){
-          proxyLockingContext *pCtx = 
+          proxyLockingContext *pCtx =
             (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
-          if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:") 
+          if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:")
            || (pCtx->lockProxyPath &&
                !strncmp(pCtx->lockProxyPath, proxyPath, MAXPATHLEN))
           ){
@@ -37882,7 +37882,7 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
     unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy;
     unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
     int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-    
+
     if( lockProxy ){
       rc = lockProxy->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)lockProxy, NO_LOCK);
       if( rc ) return rc;
@@ -37919,7 +37919,7 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
 ** The proxy locking style is intended for use with AFP filesystems.
 ** And since AFP is only supported on MacOSX, the proxy locking is also
 ** restricted to MacOSX.
-** 
+**
 **
 ******************* End of the proxy lock implementation **********************
 ******************************************************************************/
@@ -37937,8 +37937,8 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
 ** necessarily been initialized when this routine is called, and so they
 ** should not be used.
 */
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){ 
-  /* 
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
+  /*
   ** The following macro defines an initializer for an sqlite3_vfs object.
   ** The name of the VFS is NAME.  The pAppData is a pointer to a pointer
   ** to the "finder" function.  (pAppData is a pointer to a pointer because
@@ -37954,7 +37954,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
   **
   ** Most finders simply return a pointer to a fixed sqlite3_io_methods
   ** object.  But the "autolockIoFinder" available on MacOSX does a little
-  ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the 
+  ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the
   ** database file and tries to choose an locking method appropriate for
   ** that filesystem time.
   */
@@ -38026,7 +38026,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
   for(i=0; i<(sizeof(aVfs)/sizeof(sqlite3_vfs)); i++){
     sqlite3_vfs_register(&aVfs[i], i==0);
   }
-  return SQLITE_OK; 
+  return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -38036,10 +38036,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
 ** to release dynamically allocated objects.  But not on unix.
 ** This routine is a no-op for unix.
 */
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){ 
-  return SQLITE_OK; 
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
+  return SQLITE_OK;
 }
- 
+
 #endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX */
 
 /************** End of os_unix.c *********************************************/
@@ -38162,7 +38162,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
       __asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
       return val;
   }
- 
+
 #elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
 
   __inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
@@ -44293,8 +44293,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
 ** property.  Usually only a few pages are meet either condition.
 ** So the bitmap is usually sparse and has low cardinality.
 ** But sometimes (for example when during a DROP of a large table) most
-** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled.  In those cases, 
-** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality.  The algorithm needs 
+** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled.  In those cases,
+** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality.  The algorithm needs
 ** to handle both cases well.
 **
 ** The size of the bitmap is fixed when the object is created.
@@ -44315,13 +44315,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
 /* Size of the Bitvec structure in bytes. */
 #define BITVEC_SZ        512
 
-/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how 
+/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how
 ** it will be aligned within the Bitvec struct. */
 #define BITVEC_USIZE \
     (((BITVEC_SZ-(3*sizeof(u32)))/sizeof(Bitvec*))*sizeof(Bitvec*))
 
-/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation. 
-** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE. 
+/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation.
+** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE.
 ** Setting this to the "natural word" size of your CPU may improve
 ** performance. */
 #define BITVEC_TELEM     u8
@@ -44334,12 +44334,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
 
 /* Number of u32 values in hash table. */
 #define BITVEC_NINT      (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(u32))
-/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before 
+/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before
 ** sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
 #define BITVEC_MXHASH    (BITVEC_NINT/2)
 /* Hashing function for the aHash representation.
-** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier 
-** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided 
+** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier
+** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided
 ** no fewer collisions than the no-op *1. */
 #define BITVEC_HASH(X)   (((X)*1)%BITVEC_NINT)
 
@@ -44385,7 +44385,7 @@ struct Bitvec {
 
 /*
 ** Create a new bitmap object able to handle bits between 0 and iSize,
-** inclusive.  Return a pointer to the new object.  Return NULL if 
+** inclusive.  Return a pointer to the new object.  Return NULL if
 ** malloc fails.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitvec *sqlite3BitvecCreate(u32 iSize){
@@ -44641,7 +44641,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BitvecBuiltinTest(int sz, int *aOp){
         break;
       }
       case 3:
-      case 4: 
+      case 4:
       default: {
         nx = 2;
         sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(i), &i);
@@ -44721,7 +44721,7 @@ bitvec_end:
 **
 **   The PCache.pSynced variable is used to optimize searching for a dirty
 **   page to eject from the cache mid-transaction. It is better to eject
-**   a page that does not require a journal sync than one that does. 
+**   a page that does not require a journal sync than one that does.
 **   Therefore, pSynced is maintained to that it *almost* always points
 **   to either the oldest page in the pDirty/pDirtyTail list that has a
 **   clear PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag or to a page that is older than this one
@@ -44762,7 +44762,7 @@ struct PCache {
     sqlite3_pcache_page *pLower;
     PgHdr *pPg;
     unsigned char *a;
-  
+
     if( sqlite3PcacheTrace<2 ) return;
     if( pCache->pCache==0 ) return;
     N = sqlite3PcachePagecount(pCache);
@@ -44854,12 +44854,12 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){
   if( addRemove & PCACHE_DIRTYLIST_REMOVE ){
     assert( pPage->pDirtyNext || pPage==p->pDirtyTail );
     assert( pPage->pDirtyPrev || pPage==p->pDirty );
-  
+
     /* Update the PCache1.pSynced variable if necessary. */
     if( p->pSynced==pPage ){
       p->pSynced = pPage->pDirtyPrev;
     }
-  
+
     if( pPage->pDirtyNext ){
       pPage->pDirtyNext->pDirtyPrev = pPage->pDirtyPrev;
     }else{
@@ -44869,7 +44869,7 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){
     if( pPage->pDirtyPrev ){
       pPage->pDirtyPrev->pDirtyNext = pPage->pDirtyNext;
     }else{
-      /* If there are now no dirty pages in the cache, set eCreate to 2. 
+      /* If there are now no dirty pages in the cache, set eCreate to 2.
       ** This is an optimization that allows sqlite3PcacheFetch() to skip
       ** searching for a dirty page to eject from the cache when it might
       ** otherwise have to.  */
@@ -44898,11 +44898,11 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){
     p->pDirty = pPage;
 
     /* If pSynced is NULL and this page has a clear NEED_SYNC flag, set
-    ** pSynced to point to it. Checking the NEED_SYNC flag is an 
+    ** pSynced to point to it. Checking the NEED_SYNC flag is an
     ** optimization, as if pSynced points to a page with the NEED_SYNC
-    ** flag set sqlite3PcacheFetchStress() searches through all newer 
+    ** flag set sqlite3PcacheFetchStress() searches through all newer
     ** entries of the dirty-list for a page with NEED_SYNC clear anyway.  */
-    if( !p->pSynced 
+    if( !p->pSynced
      && 0==(pPage->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)   /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
     ){
       p->pSynced = pPage;
@@ -44942,7 +44942,7 @@ static int numberOfCachePages(PCache *p){
 
 /*************************************************** General Interfaces ******
 **
-** Initialize and shutdown the page cache subsystem. Neither of these 
+** Initialize and shutdown the page cache subsystem. Neither of these
 ** functions are threadsafe.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheInitialize(void){
@@ -44968,8 +44968,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSize(void){ return sizeof(PCache); }
 
 /*
 ** Create a new PCache object. Storage space to hold the object
-** has already been allocated and is passed in as the p pointer. 
-** The caller discovers how much space needs to be allocated by 
+** has already been allocated and is passed in as the p pointer.
+** The caller discovers how much space needs to be allocated by
 ** calling sqlite3PcacheSize().
 **
 ** szExtra is some extra space allocated for each page.  The first
@@ -45081,7 +45081,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_pcache_page *sqlite3PcacheFetch(
 /*
 ** If the sqlite3PcacheFetch() routine is unable to allocate a new
 ** page because no clean pages are available for reuse and the cache
-** size limit has been reached, then this routine can be invoked to 
+** size limit has been reached, then this routine can be invoked to
 ** try harder to allocate a page.  This routine might invoke the stress
 ** callback to spill dirty pages to the journal.  It will then try to
 ** allocate the new page and will only fail to allocate a new page on
@@ -45098,17 +45098,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress(
   if( pCache->eCreate==2 ) return 0;
 
   if( sqlite3PcachePagecount(pCache)>pCache->szSpill ){
-    /* Find a dirty page to write-out and recycle. First try to find a 
+    /* Find a dirty page to write-out and recycle. First try to find a
     ** page that does not require a journal-sync (one with PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
-    ** cleared), but if that is not possible settle for any other 
+    ** cleared), but if that is not possible settle for any other
     ** unreferenced dirty page.
     **
     ** If the LRU page in the dirty list that has a clear PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
     ** flag is currently referenced, then the following may leave pSynced
     ** set incorrectly (pointing to other than the LRU page with NEED_SYNC
     ** cleared). This is Ok, as pSynced is just an optimization.  */
-    for(pPg=pCache->pSynced; 
-        pPg && (pPg->nRef || (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)); 
+    for(pPg=pCache->pSynced;
+        pPg && (pPg->nRef || (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC));
         pPg=pPg->pDirtyPrev
     );
     pCache->pSynced = pPg;
@@ -45118,7 +45118,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress(
     if( pPg ){
       int rc;
 #ifdef SQLITE_LOG_CACHE_SPILL
-      sqlite3_log(SQLITE_FULL, 
+      sqlite3_log(SQLITE_FULL,
                   "spill page %d making room for %d - cache used: %d/%d",
                   pPg->pgno, pgno,
                   sqlite3GlobalConfig.pcache.xPagecount(pCache->pCache),
@@ -45304,7 +45304,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(PCache *pCache){
 }
 
 /*
-** Change the page number of page p to newPgno. 
+** Change the page number of page p to newPgno.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheMove(PgHdr *p, Pgno newPgno){
   PCache *pCache = p->pCache;
@@ -45367,7 +45367,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClose(PCache *pCache){
   sqlite3GlobalConfig.pcache2.xDestroy(pCache->pCache);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Discard the contents of the cache.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClear(PCache *pCache){
@@ -45458,7 +45458,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE PgHdr *sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(PCache *pCache){
   return pcacheSortDirtyList(pCache->pDirty);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return the total number of references to all pages held by the cache.
 **
 ** This is not the total number of pages referenced, but the sum of the
@@ -45475,7 +45475,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePageRefcount(PgHdr *p){
   return p->nRef;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return the total number of pages in the cache.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePagecount(PCache *pCache){
@@ -45517,7 +45517,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSetSpillsize(PCache *p, int mxPage){
     p->szSpill = mxPage;
   }
   res = numberOfCachePages(p);
-  if( res<p->szSpill ) res = p->szSpill; 
+  if( res<p->szSpill ) res = p->szSpill;
   return res;
 }
 
@@ -45628,7 +45628,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheIterateDirty(PCache *pCache, void (*xIter)(PgHd
 **
 ** The third case is a chunk of heap memory (defaulting to 100 pages worth)
 ** that is allocated when the page cache is created.  The size of the local
-** bulk allocation can be adjusted using 
+** bulk allocation can be adjusted using
 **
 **     sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, (void*)0, 0, N).
 **
@@ -45653,9 +45653,9 @@ typedef struct PgFreeslot PgFreeslot;
 typedef struct PGroup PGroup;
 
 /*
-** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following 
+** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following
 ** structure. Unless SQLITE_PCACHE_SEPARATE_HEADER is defined, a buffer of
-** PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated directly before this structure 
+** PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated directly before this structure
 ** in memory.
 */
 struct PgHdr1 {
@@ -45675,7 +45675,7 @@ struct PgHdr1 {
 #define PAGE_IS_PINNED(p)    ((p)->pLruNext==0)
 #define PAGE_IS_UNPINNED(p)  ((p)->pLruNext!=0)
 
-/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup.  A PGroup is a set 
+/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup.  A PGroup is a set
 ** of one or more PCaches that are able to recycle each other's unpinned
 ** pages when they are under memory pressure.  A PGroup is an instance of
 ** the following object.
@@ -45711,13 +45711,13 @@ struct PGroup {
 ** temporary or transient database) has a single page cache which
 ** is an instance of this object.
 **
-** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as 
+** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as
 ** opaque sqlite3_pcache* handles.
 */
 struct PCache1 {
   /* Cache configuration parameters. Page size (szPage) and the purgeable
   ** flag (bPurgeable) and the pnPurgeable pointer are all set when the
-  ** cache is created and are never changed thereafter. nMax may be 
+  ** cache is created and are never changed thereafter. nMax may be
   ** modified at any time by a call to the pcache1Cachesize() method.
   ** The PGroup mutex must be held when accessing nMax.
   */
@@ -45764,7 +45764,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct PCacheGlobal {
   */
   int isInit;                    /* True if initialized */
   int separateCache;             /* Use a new PGroup for each PCache */
-  int nInitPage;                 /* Initial bulk allocation size */   
+  int nInitPage;                 /* Initial bulk allocation size */
   int szSlot;                    /* Size of each free slot */
   int nSlot;                     /* The number of pcache slots */
   int nReserve;                  /* Try to keep nFreeSlot above this */
@@ -45805,7 +45805,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct PCacheGlobal {
 
 
 /*
-** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is 
+** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is
 ** supplied to use for the page-cache by passing the SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE
 ** verb to sqlite3_config(). Parameter pBuf points to an allocation large
 ** enough to contain 'n' buffers of 'sz' bytes each.
@@ -45874,8 +45874,8 @@ static int pcache1InitBulk(PCache1 *pCache){
 
 /*
 ** Malloc function used within this file to allocate space from the buffer
-** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no 
-** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls 
+** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no
+** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls
 ** back to sqlite3Malloc().
 **
 ** Multiple threads can run this routine at the same time.  Global variables
@@ -45981,7 +45981,7 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1AllocPage(PCache1 *pCache, int benignMalloc){
   }else{
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT
     /* The group mutex must be released before pcache1Alloc() is called. This
-    ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that 
+    ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that
     ** this mutex is not held. */
     assert( pcache1.separateCache==0 );
     assert( pCache->pGroup==&pcache1.grp );
@@ -46119,7 +46119,7 @@ static void pcache1ResizeHash(PCache1 *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the 
+** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the
 ** PGroup LRU list, if is part of it. If pPage is not part of the PGroup
 ** LRU list, then this function is a no-op.
 **
@@ -46143,7 +46143,7 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1PinPage(PgHdr1 *pPage){
 
 
 /*
-** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table 
+** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table
 ** (PCache1.apHash structure) that it is currently stored in.
 ** Also free the page if freePage is true.
 **
@@ -46186,8 +46186,8 @@ static void pcache1EnforceMaxPage(PCache1 *pCache){
 }
 
 /*
-** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value) 
-** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this 
+** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value)
+** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this
 ** criteria are unpinned before they are discarded.
 **
 ** The PCache mutex must be held when this function is called.
@@ -46219,7 +46219,7 @@ static void pcache1TruncateUnsafe(
     PgHdr1 **pp;
     PgHdr1 *pPage;
     assert( h<pCache->nHash );
-    pp = &pCache->apHash[h]; 
+    pp = &pCache->apHash[h];
     while( (pPage = *pp)!=0 ){
       if( pPage->iKey>=iLimit ){
         pCache->nPage--;
@@ -46258,7 +46258,7 @@ static int pcache1Init(void *NotUsed){
   **
   **   *  Use a unified cache in single-threaded applications that have
   **      configured a start-time buffer for use as page-cache memory using
-  **      sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL 
+  **      sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL
   **      pBuf argument.
   **
   **   *  Otherwise use separate caches (mode-1)
@@ -46293,7 +46293,7 @@ static int pcache1Init(void *NotUsed){
 
 /*
 ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShutdown method.
-** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does 
+** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does
 ** not need to be freed.
 */
 static void pcache1Shutdown(void *NotUsed){
@@ -46357,7 +46357,7 @@ static sqlite3_pcache *pcache1Create(int szPage, int szExtra, int bPurgeable){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method.
 **
 ** Configure the cache_size limit for a cache.
 */
@@ -46376,7 +46376,7 @@ static void pcache1Cachesize(sqlite3_pcache *p, int nMax){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method.
 **
 ** Free up as much memory as possible.
 */
@@ -46395,7 +46395,7 @@ static void pcache1Shrink(sqlite3_pcache *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method.
 */
 static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){
   int n;
@@ -46416,8 +46416,8 @@ static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){
 ** for these steps, the main pcache1Fetch() procedure can run faster.
 */
 static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
-  PCache1 *pCache, 
-  unsigned int iKey, 
+  PCache1 *pCache,
+  unsigned int iKey,
   int createFlag
 ){
   unsigned int nPinned;
@@ -46459,8 +46459,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
     }
   }
 
-  /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found, 
-  ** attempt to allocate a new one. 
+  /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found,
+  ** attempt to allocate a new one.
   */
   if( !pPage ){
     pPage = pcache1AllocPage(pCache, createFlag==1);
@@ -46484,13 +46484,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method.
 **
 ** Fetch a page by key value.
 **
 ** Whether or not a new page may be allocated by this function depends on
 ** the value of the createFlag argument.  0 means do not allocate a new
-** page.  1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available.  2 
+** page.  1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available.  2
 ** means to try really hard to allocate a new page.
 **
 ** For a non-purgeable cache (a cache used as the storage for an in-memory
@@ -46501,7 +46501,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 ** There are three different approaches to obtaining space for a page,
 ** depending on the value of parameter createFlag (which may be 0, 1 or 2).
 **
-**   1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a 
+**   1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a
 **      copy of the requested page. If one is found, it is returned.
 **
 **   2. If createFlag==0 and the page is not already in the cache, NULL is
@@ -46515,13 +46515,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 **           PCache1.nMax, or
 **
 **       (b) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than
-**           the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of 
+**           the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of
 **           nMin for all other purgeable caches, or
 **
 **   4. If none of the first three conditions apply and the cache is marked
 **      as purgeable, and if one of the following is true:
 **
-**       (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already 
+**       (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already
 **           PCache1.nMax, or
 **
 **       (b) The number of pages allocated for all purgeable caches is
@@ -46533,7 +46533,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 **
 **      then attempt to recycle a page from the LRU list. If it is the right
 **      size, return the recycled buffer. Otherwise, free the buffer and
-**      proceed to step 5. 
+**      proceed to step 5.
 **
 **   5. Otherwise, allocate and return a new page buffer.
 **
@@ -46543,8 +46543,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 ** invokes the appropriate routine.
 */
 static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchNoMutex(
-  sqlite3_pcache *p, 
-  unsigned int iKey, 
+  sqlite3_pcache *p,
+  unsigned int iKey,
   int createFlag
 ){
   PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
@@ -46573,8 +46573,8 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchNoMutex(
 }
 #if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX
 static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex(
-  sqlite3_pcache *p, 
-  unsigned int iKey, 
+  sqlite3_pcache *p,
+  unsigned int iKey,
   int createFlag
 ){
   PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
@@ -46588,8 +46588,8 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex(
 }
 #endif
 static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch(
-  sqlite3_pcache *p, 
-  unsigned int iKey, 
+  sqlite3_pcache *p,
+  unsigned int iKey,
   int createFlag
 ){
 #if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
@@ -46619,18 +46619,18 @@ static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch(
 ** Mark a page as unpinned (eligible for asynchronous recycling).
 */
 static void pcache1Unpin(
-  sqlite3_pcache *p, 
-  sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg, 
+  sqlite3_pcache *p,
+  sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg,
   int reuseUnlikely
 ){
   PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
   PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg;
   PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup;
- 
+
   assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
   pcache1EnterMutex(pGroup);
 
-  /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already 
+  /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already
   ** part of the PGroup LRU list.
   */
   assert( pPage->pLruPrev==0 && pPage->pLruNext==0 );
@@ -46651,7 +46651,7 @@ static void pcache1Unpin(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method.
 */
 static void pcache1Rekey(
   sqlite3_pcache *p,
@@ -46662,7 +46662,7 @@ static void pcache1Rekey(
   PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
   PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg;
   PgHdr1 **pp;
-  unsigned int h; 
+  unsigned int h;
   assert( pPage->iKey==iOld );
   assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
 
@@ -46687,7 +46687,7 @@ static void pcache1Rekey(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method.
 **
 ** Discard all unpinned pages in the cache with a page number equal to
 ** or greater than parameter iLimit. Any pinned pages with a page number
@@ -46704,7 +46704,7 @@ static void pcache1Truncate(sqlite3_pcache *p, unsigned int iLimit){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method.
 **
 ** Destroy a cache allocated using pcache1Create().
 */
@@ -46770,7 +46770,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_mutex *sqlite3Pcache1Mutex(void){
 ** by the current thread may be sqlite3_free()ed.
 **
 ** nReq is the number of bytes of memory required. Once this much has
-** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number 
+** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number
 ** of bytes of memory released.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheReleaseMemory(int nReq){
@@ -46861,7 +46861,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheStats(
 ** extracts the least value from the RowSet.
 **
 ** The INSERT primitive might allocate additional memory.  Memory is
-** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation.  There is an 
+** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation.  There is an
 ** upper bound on the size of allocated memory.  No memory is freed
 ** until DESTROY.
 **
@@ -46909,7 +46909,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheStats(
 ** in the list, pLeft points to the tree, and v is unused.  The
 ** RowSet.pForest value points to the head of this forest list.
 */
-struct RowSetEntry {            
+struct RowSetEntry {
   i64 v;                        /* ROWID value for this entry */
   struct RowSetEntry *pRight;   /* Right subtree (larger entries) or list */
   struct RowSetEntry *pLeft;    /* Left subtree (smaller entries) */
@@ -46957,7 +46957,7 @@ struct RowSet {
 **
 ** It must be the case that N is sufficient to make a Rowset.  If not
 ** an assertion fault occurs.
-** 
+**
 ** If N is larger than the minimum, use the surplus as an initial
 ** allocation of entries available to be filled.
 */
@@ -47057,7 +47057,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RowSetInsert(RowSet *p, i64 rowid){
 /*
 ** Merge two lists of RowSetEntry objects.  Remove duplicates.
 **
-** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are 
+** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are
 ** assumed to each already be in sorted order.
 */
 static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge(
@@ -47094,7 +47094,7 @@ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge(
 /*
 ** Sort all elements on the list of RowSetEntry objects into order of
 ** increasing v.
-*/ 
+*/
 static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntrySort(struct RowSetEntry *pIn){
   unsigned int i;
   struct RowSetEntry *pNext, *aBucket[40];
@@ -47167,7 +47167,7 @@ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetNDeepTree(
   struct RowSetEntry *pLeft;     /* Left subtree */
   if( *ppList==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
     /* Prevent unnecessary deep recursion when we run out of entries */
-    return 0; 
+    return 0;
   }
   if( iDepth>1 ){   /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
     /* This branch causes a *balanced* tree to be generated.  A valid tree
@@ -47337,7 +47337,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64
 **
 *************************************************************************
 ** This is the implementation of the page cache subsystem or "pager".
-** 
+**
 ** The pager is used to access a database disk file.  It implements
 ** atomic commit and rollback through the use of a journal file that
 ** is separate from the database file.  The pager also implements file
@@ -47360,8 +47360,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64
 **    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
 **
 *************************************************************************
-** This header file defines the interface to the write-ahead logging 
-** system. Refer to the comments below and the header comment attached to 
+** This header file defines the interface to the write-ahead logging
+** system. Refer to the comments below and the header comment attached to
 ** the implementation of each function in log.c for further details.
 */
 
@@ -47400,8 +47400,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64
 
 #define WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA 4
 
-/* Connection to a write-ahead log (WAL) file. 
-** There is one object of this type for each pager. 
+/* Connection to a write-ahead log (WAL) file.
+** There is one object of this type for each pager.
 */
 typedef struct Wal Wal;
 
@@ -47412,7 +47412,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalClose(Wal *pWal, sqlite3*, int sync_flags, int, u8
 /* Set the limiting size of a WAL file. */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalLimit(Wal*, i64);
 
-/* Used by readers to open (lock) and close (unlock) a snapshot.  A 
+/* Used by readers to open (lock) and close (unlock) a snapshot.  A
 ** snapshot is like a read-transaction.  It is the state of the database
 ** at an instant in time.  sqlite3WalOpenSnapshot gets a read lock and
 ** preserves the current state even if the other threads or processes
@@ -47447,7 +47447,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalSavepointUndo(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData);
 /* Write a frame or frames to the log. */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(Wal *pWal, int, PgHdr *, Pgno, int, int);
 
-/* Copy pages from the log to the database file */ 
+/* Copy pages from the log to the database file */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint(
   Wal *pWal,                      /* Write-ahead log connection */
   sqlite3 *db,                    /* Check this handle's interrupt flag */
@@ -47475,7 +47475,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op);
 
 /* Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using
 ** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the
-** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false. 
+** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal);
 
@@ -47515,60 +47515,60 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_file *sqlite3WalFile(Wal *pWal);
 **
 ** Definition:  A page of the database file is said to be "overwriteable" if
 ** one or more of the following are true about the page:
-** 
+**
 **     (a)  The original content of the page as it was at the beginning of
 **          the transaction has been written into the rollback journal and
 **          synced.
-** 
+**
 **     (b)  The page was a freelist leaf page at the start of the transaction.
-** 
+**
 **     (c)  The page number is greater than the largest page that existed in
 **          the database file at the start of the transaction.
-** 
+**
 ** (1) A page of the database file is never overwritten unless one of the
 **     following are true:
-** 
+**
 **     (a) The page and all other pages on the same sector are overwriteable.
-** 
+**
 **     (b) The atomic page write optimization is enabled, and the entire
 **         transaction other than the update of the transaction sequence
 **         number consists of a single page change.
-** 
+**
 ** (2) The content of a page written into the rollback journal exactly matches
 **     both the content in the database when the rollback journal was written
 **     and the content in the database at the beginning of the current
 **     transaction.
-** 
+**
 ** (3) Writes to the database file are an integer multiple of the page size
 **     in length and are aligned on a page boundary.
-** 
+**
 ** (4) Reads from the database file are either aligned on a page boundary and
 **     an integer multiple of the page size in length or are taken from the
 **     first 100 bytes of the database file.
-** 
+**
 ** (5) All writes to the database file are synced prior to the rollback journal
 **     being deleted, truncated, or zeroed.
-** 
+**
 ** (6) If a master journal file is used, then all writes to the database file
 **     are synced prior to the master journal being deleted.
-** 
+**
 ** Definition: Two databases (or the same database at two points it time)
 ** are said to be "logically equivalent" if they give the same answer to
 ** all queries.  Note in particular the content of freelist leaf
 ** pages can be changed arbitrarily without affecting the logical equivalence
 ** of the database.
-** 
+**
 ** (7) At any time, if any subset, including the empty set and the total set,
-**     of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the 
+**     of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the
 **     journal is rolled back, the resulting database file will be logically
 **     equivalent to the database file at the beginning of the transaction.
-** 
+**
 ** (8) When a transaction is rolled back, the xTruncate method of the VFS
 **     is called to restore the database file to the same size it was at
 **     the beginning of the transaction.  (In some VFSes, the xTruncate
 **     method is a no-op, but that does not change the fact the SQLite will
 **     invoke it.)
-** 
+**
 ** (9) Whenever the database file is modified, at least one bit in the range
 **     of bytes from 24 through 39 inclusive will be changed prior to releasing
 **     the EXCLUSIVE lock, thus signaling other connections on the same
@@ -47601,7 +47601,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 
 /*
 ** The following two macros are used within the PAGERTRACE() macros above
-** to print out file-descriptors. 
+** to print out file-descriptors.
 **
 ** PAGERID() takes a pointer to a Pager struct as its argument. The
 ** associated file-descriptor is returned. FILEHANDLEID() takes an sqlite3_file
@@ -47622,7 +47622,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **               |              |                |
 **               |              V                |
 **               |<-------WRITER_LOCKED------> ERROR
-**               |              |                ^  
+**               |              |                ^
 **               |              V                |
 **               |<------WRITER_CACHEMOD-------->|
 **               |              |                |
@@ -47634,7 +47634,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **
 ** List of state transitions and the C [function] that performs each:
-** 
+**
 **   OPEN              -> READER              [sqlite3PagerSharedLock]
 **   READER            -> OPEN                [pager_unlock]
 **
@@ -47646,7 +47646,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **   WRITER_***        -> ERROR               [pager_error]
 **   ERROR             -> OPEN                [pager_unlock]
-** 
+**
 **
 **  OPEN:
 **
@@ -47660,9 +47660,9 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **  READER:
 **
-**    In this state all the requirements for reading the database in 
+**    In this state all the requirements for reading the database in
 **    rollback (non-WAL) mode are met. Unless the pager is (or recently
-**    was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is 
+**    was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is
 **    open. The database size is known in this state.
 **
 **    A connection running with locking_mode=normal enters this state when
@@ -47672,28 +47672,28 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    this state even after the read-transaction is closed. The only way
 **    a locking_mode=exclusive connection can transition from READER to OPEN
 **    is via the ERROR state (see below).
-** 
+**
 **    * A read transaction may be active (but a write-transaction cannot).
 **    * A SHARED or greater lock is held on the database file.
-**    * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read 
+**    * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read
 **      transaction is not active). The dbOrigSize and dbFileSize variables
 **      may not be trusted at this point.
 **    * If the database is a WAL database, then the WAL connection is open.
-**    * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that 
+**    * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that
 **      there is no hot-journal in the file-system.
 **
 **  WRITER_LOCKED:
 **
 **    The pager moves to this state from READER when a write-transaction
-**    is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks 
-**    required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual 
+**    is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks
+**    required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual
 **    modifications to the cache or database have taken place.
 **
-**    In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with 
+**    In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with
 **    BEGIN EXCLUSIVE) EXCLUSIVE lock is obtained on the database file when
-**    moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened 
-**    to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while 
-**    in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database 
+**    moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened
+**    to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while
+**    in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database
 **    file.
 **
 **    IN WAL mode, WalBeginWriteTransaction() is called to lock the log file.
@@ -47701,7 +47701,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    is made to obtain an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file.
 **
 **    * A write transaction is active.
-**    * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater 
+**    * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater
 **      lock is held on the database file.
 **    * If the connection is open in WAL-mode, a WAL write transaction
 **      is open (i.e. sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction() has been successfully
@@ -47720,7 +47720,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **    * A write transaction is active.
 **    * A RESERVED or greater lock is held on the database file.
-**    * The journal file is open and the first header has been written 
+**    * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
 **      to it, but the header has not been synced to disk.
 **    * The contents of the page cache have been modified.
 **
@@ -47733,7 +47733,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **    * A write transaction is active.
 **    * An EXCLUSIVE or greater lock is held on the database file.
-**    * The journal file is open and the first header has been written 
+**    * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
 **      and synced to disk.
 **    * The contents of the page cache have been modified (and possibly
 **      written to disk).
@@ -47745,8 +47745,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    A rollback-mode pager changes to WRITER_FINISHED state from WRITER_DBMOD
 **    state after the entire transaction has been successfully written into the
 **    database file. In this state the transaction may be committed simply
-**    by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is 
-**    not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper 
+**    by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is
+**    not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper
 **    layer must either commit or rollback the transaction.
 **
 **    * A write transaction is active.
@@ -47754,19 +47754,19 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    * All writing and syncing of journal and database data has finished.
 **      If no error occurred, all that remains is to finalize the journal to
 **      commit the transaction. If an error did occur, the caller will need
-**      to rollback the transaction. 
+**      to rollback the transaction.
 **
 **  ERROR:
 **
 **    The ERROR state is entered when an IO or disk-full error (including
-**    SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it 
-**    difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents, 
+**    SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it
+**    difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents,
 **    db size etc.) are consistent with the contents of the file-system.
 **
 **    Temporary pager files may enter the ERROR state, but in-memory pagers
 **    cannot.
 **
-**    For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback, 
+**    For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback,
 **    the contents of the page-cache may be left in an inconsistent state.
 **    At this point it would be dangerous to change back to READER state
 **    (as usually happens after a rollback). Any subsequent readers might
@@ -47776,13 +47776,13 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    instead of READER following such an error.
 **
 **    Once it has entered the ERROR state, any attempt to use the pager
-**    to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all 
+**    to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all
 **    outstanding transactions have been abandoned, the pager is able to
-**    transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the 
+**    transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the
 **    page-cache and any other in-memory state at the same time. Everything
 **    is reloaded from disk (and, if necessary, hot-journal rollback peformed)
 **    when a read-transaction is next opened on the pager (transitioning
-**    the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered 
+**    the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered
 **    from the error.
 **
 **    Specifically, the pager jumps into the ERROR state if:
@@ -47798,21 +47798,21 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **         memory.
 **
 **    In other cases, the error is returned to the b-tree layer. The b-tree
-**    layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition 
+**    layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition
 **    persists, the pager enters the ERROR state via condition (1) above.
 **
 **    Condition (3) is necessary because it can be triggered by a read-only
 **    statement executed within a transaction. In this case, if the error
 **    code were simply returned to the user, the b-tree layer would not
 **    automatically attempt a rollback, as it assumes that an error in a
-**    read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent 
+**    read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent
 **    state.
 **
 **    * The Pager.errCode variable is set to something other than SQLITE_OK.
 **    * There are one or more outstanding references to pages (after the
 **      last reference is dropped the pager should move back to OPEN state).
 **    * The pager is not an in-memory pager.
-**    
+**
 **
 ** Notes:
 **
@@ -47822,7 +47822,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **   * Normally, a connection open in exclusive mode is never in PAGER_OPEN
 **     state. There are two exceptions: immediately after exclusive-mode has
-**     been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are 
+**     been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are
 **     executed), and when the pager is leaving the "error state".
 **
 **   * See also: assert_pager_state().
@@ -47836,7 +47836,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 #define PAGER_ERROR                 6
 
 /*
-** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the 
+** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the
 ** following locking-states, according to the lock currently held on
 ** the database file: NO_LOCK, SHARED_LOCK, RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
 ** This variable is kept up to date as locks are taken and released by
@@ -47851,20 +47851,20 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 ** to a less exclusive (lower) value than the lock that is actually held
 ** at the system level, but it is never set to a more exclusive value.
 **
-** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may 
+** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may
 ** be a few redundant xLock() calls or a lock may be held for longer than
 ** required, but nothing really goes wrong.
 **
 ** The exception is when the database file is unlocked as the pager moves
-** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file 
+** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file
 ** in the file-system that needs to be rolled back (as part of an OPEN->SHARED
 ** transition, by the same pager or any other). If the call to xUnlock()
 ** fails at this point and the pager is left holding an EXCLUSIVE lock, this
 ** can confuse the call to xCheckReservedLock() call made later as part
 ** of hot-journal detection.
 **
-** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED 
-** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may 
+** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED
+** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may
 ** return true because the caller itself is holding an EXCLUSIVE lock (but
 ** doesn't know it because of a previous error in xUnlock). If this happens
 ** a hot-journal may be mistaken for a journal being created by an active
@@ -47875,12 +47875,12 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 ** database in the ERROR state, Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK. It
 ** is only changed back to a real locking state after a successful call
 ** to xLock(EXCLUSIVE). Also, the code to do the OPEN->SHARED state transition
-** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK 
+** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK
 ** lock. Instead, it assumes a hot-journal exists and obtains an EXCLUSIVE
 ** lock on the database file before attempting to roll it back. See function
 ** PagerSharedLock() for more detail.
 **
-** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in 
+** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in
 ** PAGER_OPEN state.
 */
 #define UNKNOWN_LOCK                (EXCLUSIVE_LOCK+1)
@@ -47900,7 +47900,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 #endif
 
 /*
-** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method 
+** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method
 ** returns a value larger than this, then MAX_SECTOR_SIZE is used instead.
 ** This could conceivably cause corruption following a power failure on
 ** such a system. This is currently an undocumented limit.
@@ -47916,7 +47916,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 ** When a savepoint is created, the PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset field is
 ** set to 0. If a journal-header is written into the main journal while
-** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset 
+** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset
 ** immediately following the last journal record written into the main
 ** journal before the journal-header. This is required during savepoint
 ** rollback (see pagerPlaybackSavepoint()).
@@ -47966,34 +47966,34 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **
 ** changeCountDone
 **
-**   This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter 
-**   (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is 
-**   not updated more often than necessary. 
+**   This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter
+**   (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is
+**   not updated more often than necessary.
 **
-**   It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which 
+**   It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which
 **   can only happen if an exclusive lock is held on the database file.
-**   It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is 
+**   It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is
 **   relinquished on the database file. Each time a transaction is committed,
 **   The changeCountDone flag is inspected. If it is true, the work of
 **   updating the change-counter is omitted for the current transaction.
 **
-**   This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection 
+**   This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection
 **   need only update the change-counter once, for the first transaction
 **   committed.
 **
 ** setMaster
 **
 **   When PagerCommitPhaseOne() is called to commit a transaction, it may
-**   (or may not) specify a master-journal name to be written into the 
+**   (or may not) specify a master-journal name to be written into the
 **   journal file before it is synced to disk.
 **
-**   Whether or not a journal file contains a master-journal pointer affects 
-**   the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is 
+**   Whether or not a journal file contains a master-journal pointer affects
+**   the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is
 **   committed or rolled back when running in "journal_mode=PERSIST" mode.
 **   If a journal file does not contain a master-journal pointer, it is
 **   finalized by overwriting the first journal header with zeroes. If
-**   it does contain a master-journal pointer the journal file is finalized 
-**   by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were 
+**   it does contain a master-journal pointer the journal file is finalized
+**   by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were
 **   running in "journal_mode=truncate" mode.
 **
 **   Journal files that contain master journal pointers cannot be finalized
@@ -48019,12 +48019,12 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **   to allocate a new page to prevent the journal file from being written
 **   while it is being traversed by code in pager_playback().  The SPILLFLAG_OFF
 **   case is a user preference.
-** 
+**
 **   If the SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC bit is set, writing to the database from
 **   pagerStress() is permitted, but syncing the journal file is not.
 **   This flag is set by sqlite3PagerWrite() when the file-system sector-size
 **   is larger than the database page-size in order to prevent a journal sync
-**   from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector. 
+**   from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector.
 **
 ** subjInMemory
 **
@@ -48032,16 +48032,16 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **   is opened as an in-memory journal file. If false, then in-memory
 **   sub-journals are only used for in-memory pager files.
 **
-**   This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new 
+**   This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new
 **   write-transaction is opened.
 **
 ** dbSize, dbOrigSize, dbFileSize
 **
 **   Variable dbSize is set to the number of pages in the database file.
 **   It is valid in PAGER_READER and higher states (all states except for
-**   OPEN and ERROR). 
+**   OPEN and ERROR).
 **
-**   dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be 
+**   dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be
 **   larger than the size of the database (the value stored at offset
 **   28 of the database header by the btree). If the size of the file
 **   is not an integer multiple of the page-size, the value stored in
@@ -48052,10 +48052,10 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **
 **   During a write-transaction, if pages with page-numbers greater than
 **   dbSize are modified in the cache, dbSize is updated accordingly.
-**   Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(), 
+**   Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(),
 **   dbSize is updated.
 **
-**   Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states 
+**   Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states
 **   PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED and higher. dbOrigSize is a copy of the dbSize
 **   variable at the start of the transaction. It is used during rollback,
 **   and to determine whether or not pages need to be journalled before
@@ -48064,12 +48064,12 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **   Throughout a write-transaction, dbFileSize contains the size of
 **   the file on disk in pages. It is set to a copy of dbSize when the
 **   write-transaction is first opened, and updated when VFS calls are made
-**   to write or truncate the database file on disk. 
+**   to write or truncate the database file on disk.
 **
-**   The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress 
-**   unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If, 
-**   when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates 
-**   that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize), 
+**   The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress
+**   unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If,
+**   when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates
+**   that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize),
 **   pager_truncate() is called. The pager_truncate() call uses xFilesize()
 **   to measure the database file on disk, and then truncates it if required.
 **   dbFileSize is not used when rolling back a transaction. In this case
@@ -48080,20 +48080,20 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 ** dbHintSize
 **
 **   The dbHintSize variable is used to limit the number of calls made to
-**   the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method. 
+**   the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method.
 **
 **   dbHintSize is set to a copy of the dbSize variable when a
 **   write-transaction is opened (at the same time as dbFileSize and
 **   dbOrigSize). If the xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method is called,
 **   dbHintSize is increased to the number of pages that correspond to the
-**   size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for 
+**   size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for
 **   details.
 **
 ** errCode
 **
 **   The Pager.errCode variable is only ever used in PAGER_ERROR state. It
-**   is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode 
-**   is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX 
+**   is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode
+**   is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX
 **   sub-codes.
 **
 ** syncFlags, walSyncFlags
@@ -48200,7 +48200,7 @@ struct Pager {
 
 /*
 ** Indexes for use with Pager.aStat[]. The Pager.aStat[] array contains
-** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS 
+** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS
 ** or CACHE_WRITE to sqlite3_db_status().
 */
 #define PAGER_STAT_HIT   0
@@ -48257,7 +48257,7 @@ static const unsigned char aJournalMagic[] = {
 #define JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager)  ((pPager->pageSize) + 8)
 
 /*
-** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same 
+** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same
 ** size as a single disk sector. See also setSectorSize().
 */
 #define JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) (pPager->sectorSize)
@@ -48326,7 +48326,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerUseWal(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
 # define pagerBeginReadTransaction(z) SQLITE_OK
 #endif
 
-#ifndef NDEBUG 
+#ifndef NDEBUG
 /*
 ** Usage:
 **
@@ -48355,25 +48355,25 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
   assert( p->tempFile==0 || p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
   assert( p->tempFile==0 || pPager->changeCountDone );
 
-  /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF". 
+  /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF".
   ** And if the journal-mode is "OFF", the journal file must not be open.
   */
   assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->useJournal );
   assert( p->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || !isOpen(p->jfd) );
 
-  /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since 
-  ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter 
-  ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing 
-  ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may 
-  ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It 
-  ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR 
+  /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since
+  ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter
+  ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing
+  ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may
+  ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It
+  ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR
   ** state.
   */
   if( MEMDB ){
     assert( !isOpen(p->fd) );
     assert( p->noSync );
-    assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-         || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY 
+    assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+         || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
     );
     assert( p->eState!=PAGER_ERROR && p->eState!=PAGER_OPEN );
     assert( pagerUseWal(p)==0 );
@@ -48420,9 +48420,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
         ** to journal_mode=wal.
         */
         assert( p->eLock>=RESERVED_LOCK );
-        assert( isOpen(p->jfd) 
-             || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-             || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+        assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+             || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+             || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
         );
       }
       assert( pPager->dbOrigSize==pPager->dbFileSize );
@@ -48434,9 +48434,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
       assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK );
       assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
       assert( p->eLock>=EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
-      assert( isOpen(p->jfd) 
-           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+      assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
            || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(p->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
       );
       assert( pPager->dbOrigSize<=pPager->dbHintSize );
@@ -48446,9 +48446,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
       assert( p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
       assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK );
       assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
-      assert( isOpen(p->jfd) 
-           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+      assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
            || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(p->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
       );
       break;
@@ -48467,7 +48467,7 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
 }
 #endif /* ifndef NDEBUG */
 
-#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 
+#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to a human readable string in a static buffer
 ** containing the state of the Pager object passed as an argument. This
@@ -48615,7 +48615,7 @@ static int write32bits(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 offset, u32 val){
 ** succeeds, set the Pager.eLock variable to match the (attempted) new lock.
 **
 ** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
-** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of 
+** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of
 ** UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation of this.
 */
 static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
@@ -48638,11 +48638,11 @@ static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
 /*
 ** Lock the database file to level eLock, which must be either SHARED_LOCK,
 ** RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. If the caller is successful, set the
-** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state. 
+** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state.
 **
-** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is 
-** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. 
-** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation 
+** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
+** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
+** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation
 ** of this.
 */
 static int pagerLockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
@@ -48669,7 +48669,7 @@ static int pagerLockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
 **  (b) the value returned by OsSectorSize() is less than or equal
 **      to the page size.
 **
-** If it can be used, then the value returned is the size of the journal 
+** If it can be used, then the value returned is the size of the journal
 ** file when it contains rollback data for exactly one page.
 **
 ** The atomic-batch-write optimization can be used if OsDeviceCharacteristics()
@@ -48760,8 +48760,8 @@ static void checkPage(PgHdr *pPg){
 
 /*
 ** When this is called the journal file for pager pPager must be open.
-** This function attempts to read a master journal file name from the 
-** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied 
+** This function attempts to read a master journal file name from the
+** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied
 ** by the caller. See comments above writeMasterJournal() for the format
 ** used to store a master journal file name at the end of a journal file.
 **
@@ -48777,7 +48777,7 @@ static void checkPage(PgHdr *pPg){
 ** nul-terminator byte is appended to the buffer following the master
 ** journal file name.
 **
-** If it is determined that no master journal file name is present 
+** If it is determined that no master journal file name is present
 ** zMaster[0] is set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned.
 **
 ** If an error occurs while reading from the journal file, an SQLite
@@ -48795,9 +48795,9 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){
   if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pJrnl, &szJ))
    || szJ<16
    || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-16, &len))
-   || len>=nMaster 
+   || len>=nMaster
    || len>szJ-16
-   || len==0 
+   || len==0
    || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-12, &cksum))
    || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsRead(pJrnl, aMagic, 8, szJ-8))
    || memcmp(aMagic, aJournalMagic, 8)
@@ -48819,13 +48819,13 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){
     len = 0;
   }
   zMaster[len] = '\0';
-   
+
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately 
-** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector 
+** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately
+** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector
 ** size of pPager->sectorSize bytes.
 **
 ** i.e for a sector size of 512:
@@ -48836,7 +48836,7 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){
 **   512                       512
 **   100                       512
 **   2000                      2048
-** 
+**
 */
 static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){
   i64 offset = 0;
@@ -48858,12 +48858,12 @@ static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){
 **
 ** If doTruncate is non-zero or the Pager.journalSizeLimit variable is
 ** set to 0, then truncate the journal file to zero bytes in size. Otherwise,
-** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case, 
-** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately 
+** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case,
+** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately
 ** after writing or truncating it.
 **
 ** If Pager.journalSizeLimit is set to a positive, non-zero value, and
-** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the 
+** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the
 ** journal file in bytes is larger than this value, then truncate the
 ** journal file to Pager.journalSizeLimit bytes. The journal file does
 ** not need to be synced following this operation.
@@ -48889,8 +48889,8 @@ static int zeroJournalHdr(Pager *pPager, int doTruncate){
       rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY|pPager->syncFlags);
     }
 
-    /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock 
-    ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for 
+    /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock
+    ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for
     ** the persistent journal and the journal file currently consumes more
     ** space than that limit allows for, truncate it now. There is no need
     ** to sync the file following this operation.
@@ -48918,7 +48918,7 @@ static int zeroJournalHdr(Pager *pPager, int doTruncate){
 ** - 4 bytes: Initial database page count.
 ** - 4 bytes: Sector size used by the process that wrote this journal.
 ** - 4 bytes: Database page size.
-** 
+**
 ** Followed by (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes of unused space.
 */
 static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
@@ -48934,8 +48934,8 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
     nHeader = JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager);
   }
 
-  /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created 
-  ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the 
+  /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created
+  ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the
   ** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset fields now.
   */
   for(ii=0; ii<pPager->nSavepoint; ii++){
@@ -48946,10 +48946,10 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
 
   pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff = journalHdrOffset(pPager);
 
-  /* 
+  /*
   ** Write the nRec Field - the number of page records that follow this
   ** journal header. Normally, zero is written to this value at this time.
-  ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced, 
+  ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced,
   ** if in full-sync mode), the zero is overwritten with the true number
   ** of records (see syncJournal()).
   **
@@ -48968,7 +48968,7 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
   */
   assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->noSync );
   if( pPager->noSync || (pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY)
-   || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND) 
+   || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
   ){
     memcpy(zHeader, aJournalMagic, sizeof(aJournalMagic));
     put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)], 0xffffffff);
@@ -48976,7 +48976,7 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
     memset(zHeader, 0, sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4);
   }
 
-  /* The random check-hash initializer */ 
+  /* The random check-hash initializer */
   sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(pPager->cksumInit), &pPager->cksumInit);
   put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4], pPager->cksumInit);
   /* The initial database size */
@@ -48995,23 +48995,23 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
   memset(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20], 0,
          nHeader-(sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20));
 
-  /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the 
-  ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the 
-  ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next 
+  /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the
+  ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the
+  ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next
   ** record is written to the following sector (leaving a gap in the file
   ** that will be implicitly filled in by the OS).
   **
-  ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can 
+  ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can
   ** be significantly slower than contiguously writing data to the file,
-  ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of 
+  ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of
   ** (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes that will not be used. So that is what
-  ** is done. 
+  ** is done.
   **
-  ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the 
+  ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the
   ** database page size. Since the zHeader buffer is only Pager.pageSize
   ** bytes in size, more than one call to sqlite3OsWrite() may be required
   ** to populate the entire journal header sector.
-  */ 
+  */
   for(nWrite=0; rc==SQLITE_OK&&nWrite<JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); nWrite+=nHeader){
     IOTRACE(("JHDR %p %lld %d\n", pPager, pPager->journalHdr, nHeader))
     rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zHeader, nHeader, pPager->journalOff);
@@ -49109,29 +49109,29 @@ static int readJournalHdr(
 
     /* Check that the values read from the page-size and sector-size fields
     ** are within range. To be 'in range', both values need to be a power
-    ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their 
+    ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their
     ** respective compile time maximum limits.
     */
     if( iPageSize<512                  || iSectorSize<32
      || iPageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || iSectorSize>MAX_SECTOR_SIZE
-     || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0   || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0 
+     || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0   || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0
     ){
-      /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is 
-      ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have 
-      ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading 
+      /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is
+      ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have
+      ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading
       ** the journal file here.
       */
       return SQLITE_DONE;
     }
 
-    /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal. 
-    ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within 
+    /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal.
+    ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within
     ** PagerSetPagesize() is tested.
     */
     rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pPager, &iPageSize, -1);
     testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
 
-    /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by 
+    /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by
     ** the process that created this journal. If this journal was
     ** created by a process other than this one, then this routine
     ** is being called from within pager_playback(). The local value
@@ -49161,7 +49161,7 @@ static int readJournalHdr(
 ** The master journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in the master
 ** journal name, where each byte is interpreted as a signed 8-bit integer.
 **
-** If zMaster is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction), 
+** If zMaster is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction),
 ** this call is a no-op.
 */
 static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
@@ -49174,8 +49174,8 @@ static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
   assert( pPager->setMaster==0 );
   assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
 
-  if( !zMaster 
-   || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY 
+  if( !zMaster
+   || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
    || !isOpen(pPager->jfd)
   ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -49211,16 +49211,16 @@ static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
   }
   pPager->journalOff += (nMaster+20);
 
-  /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical 
+  /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical
   ** journal-file may extend past the end of the master-journal name
-  ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is 
+  ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is
   ** dangerous because the code to rollback a hot-journal file
-  ** will not be able to find the master-journal name to determine 
-  ** whether or not the journal is hot. 
+  ** will not be able to find the master-journal name to determine
+  ** whether or not the journal is hot.
   **
-  ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal 
+  ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal
   ** file to the required size.
-  */ 
+  */
   if( SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &jrnlSize))
    && jrnlSize>pPager->journalOff
   ){
@@ -49266,7 +49266,7 @@ static void releaseAllSavepoints(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint 
+** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint
 ** bitvecs of all open savepoints. Return SQLITE_OK if successful
 ** or SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc failure occurs.
 */
@@ -49295,8 +49295,8 @@ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
 ** not exhibit the UNDELETABLE_WHEN_OPEN property, the journal file is
 ** closed (if it is open).
 **
-** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the 
-** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to 
+** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the
+** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to
 ** the OPEN state. Regardless of whether the pager is in exclusive-mode
 ** or not, any journal file left in the file-system will be treated
 ** as a hot-journal and rolled back the next time a read-transaction
@@ -49304,9 +49304,9 @@ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
 */
 static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){
 
-  assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER 
-       || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN 
-       || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR 
+  assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER
+       || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN
+       || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR
   );
 
   sqlite3BitvecDestroy(pPager->pInJournal);
@@ -49384,17 +49384,17 @@ static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){
 /*
 ** This function is called whenever an IOERR or FULL error that requires
 ** the pager to transition into the ERROR state may ahve occurred.
-** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second 
-** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The 
-** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function. 
+** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second
+** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The
+** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function.
 **
 ** If the second argument is SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the
 ** IOERR sub-codes, the pager enters the ERROR state and the error code
 ** is stored in Pager.errCode. While the pager remains in the ERROR state,
 ** all major API calls on the Pager will immediately return Pager.errCode.
 **
-** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache 
-** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding 
+** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache
+** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding
 ** the contents of the pager-cache. If a transaction was active when
 ** the persistent error occurred, then the rollback journal may need
 ** to be replayed to restore the contents of the database file (as if
@@ -49442,27 +49442,27 @@ static int pagerFlushOnCommit(Pager *pPager, int bCommit){
 }
 
 /*
-** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by 
-** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called 
+** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by
+** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called
 ** after rollback of a hot-journal, or if an error occurs while opening
 ** the journal file or writing the very first journal-header of a
 ** database transaction.
-** 
+**
 ** This routine is never called in PAGER_ERROR state. If it is called
 ** in PAGER_NONE or PAGER_SHARED state and the lock held is less
 ** exclusive than a RESERVED lock, it is a no-op.
 **
 ** Otherwise, any active savepoints are released.
 **
-** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal 
-** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a 
+** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal
+** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a
 ** transaction. Nor will it be considered to be a hot-journal by this
 ** or any other database connection. Exactly how a journal is finalized
 ** depends on whether or not the pager is running in exclusive mode and
 ** the current journal-mode (Pager.journalMode value), as follows:
 **
 **   journalMode==MEMORY
-**     Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an 
+**     Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an
 **     in-memory journal.
 **
 **   journalMode==TRUNCATE
@@ -49482,12 +49482,12 @@ static int pagerFlushOnCommit(Pager *pPager, int bCommit){
 **     journalMode==PERSIST is used instead.
 **
 ** After the journal is finalized, the pager moves to PAGER_READER state.
-** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is 
+** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is
 ** downgraded to a SHARED_LOCK.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs. If an error occurs during
 ** any of the IO operations to finalize the journal file or unlock the
-** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the 
+** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the
 ** operation to finalize the journal file fails, then the code still
 ** tries to unlock the database file if not in exclusive mode. If the
 ** unlock operation fails as well, then the first error code related
@@ -49506,9 +49506,9 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
   **   1. After a successful hot-journal rollback, it is called with
   **      eState==PAGER_NONE and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
   **
-  **   2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE 
+  **   2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE
   **      lock switches back to locking_mode=normal and then executes a
-  **      read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER 
+  **      read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER
   **      and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK when the read-transaction is closed.
   */
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -49518,7 +49518,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
   }
 
   releaseAllSavepoints(pPager);
-  assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->pInJournal==0 
+  assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->pInJournal==0
       || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
   );
   if( isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){
@@ -49556,9 +49556,9 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
       */
       int bDelete = !pPager->tempFile;
       assert( sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(pPager->jfd)==0 );
-      assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE 
-           || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY 
-           || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+      assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+           || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+           || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
       );
       sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd);
       if( bDelete ){
@@ -49591,8 +49591,8 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
   }
 
   if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
-    /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in 
-    ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE 
+    /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in
+    ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE
     ** lock held on the database file.
     */
     rc2 = sqlite3WalEndWriteTransaction(pPager->pWal);
@@ -49600,7 +49600,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
   }else if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bCommit && pPager->dbFileSize>pPager->dbSize ){
     /* This branch is taken when committing a transaction in rollback-journal
     ** mode if the database file on disk is larger than the database image.
-    ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction 
+    ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction
     ** successfully committed, but the EXCLUSIVE lock is still held on the
     ** file. So it is safe to truncate the database file to its minimum
     ** required size.  */
@@ -49613,7 +49613,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
     if( rc==SQLITE_NOTFOUND ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
   }
 
-  if( !pPager->exclusiveMode 
+  if( !pPager->exclusiveMode
    && (!pagerUseWal(pPager) || sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(pPager->pWal, 0))
   ){
     rc2 = pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK);
@@ -49626,19 +49626,19 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
 }
 
 /*
-** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the 
-** database file. 
+** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the
+** database file.
 **
-** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt 
+** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt
 ** the rollback at this time. Instead, pager_unlock() is called. The
 ** call to pager_unlock() will discard all in-memory pages, unlock
-** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this 
-** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next 
-** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one) 
+** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this
+** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next
+** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one)
 ** will roll it back.
 **
 ** If the pager has not already entered the ERROR state, but an IO or
-** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause 
+** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause
 ** the pager to enter the ERROR state. Which will be cleared by the
 ** call to pager_unlock(), as described above.
 */
@@ -49659,10 +49659,10 @@ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** Parameter aData must point to a buffer of pPager->pageSize bytes
-** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the 
+** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the
 ** page of data and the current value of pPager->cksumInit.
 **
-** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the 
+** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the
 ** random initial value (pPager->cksumInit) and every 200th byte
 ** of the page data, starting with byte offset (pPager->pageSize%200).
 ** Each byte is interpreted as an 8-bit unsigned integer.
@@ -49670,8 +49670,8 @@ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){
 ** Changing the formula used to compute this checksum results in an
 ** incompatible journal file format.
 **
-** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely 
-** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed. 
+** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely
+** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed.
 ** It is much less likely that the two ends of the journal record will be
 ** correct and the middle be corrupt.  Thus, this "checksum" scheme,
 ** though fast and simple, catches the mostly likely kind of corruption.
@@ -49721,7 +49721,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerAlignReserve(Pager *pDest, Pager *pSrc){
 ** The page begins at offset *pOffset into the file. The *pOffset
 ** value is increased to the start of the next page in the journal.
 **
-** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does 
+** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does
 ** not.
 **
 ** If the page number of the page record read from the (sub-)journal file
@@ -49741,7 +49741,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerAlignReserve(Pager *pDest, Pager *pSrc){
 ** is successfully read from the (sub-)journal file but appears to be
 ** corrupted, SQLITE_DONE is returned. Data is considered corrupted in
 ** two circumstances:
-** 
+**
 **   * If the record page-number is illegal (0 or PAGER_MJ_PGNO), or
 **   * If the record is being rolled back from the main journal file
 **     and the checksum field does not match the record content.
@@ -49781,7 +49781,7 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
   assert( aData );         /* Temp storage must have already been allocated */
   assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)==0 || (!isMainJrnl && isSavepnt) );
 
-  /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction 
+  /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction
   ** or savepoint rollback done at the request of the caller) or this is
   ** a hot-journal rollback. If it is a hot-journal rollback, the pager
   ** is in state OPEN and holds an EXCLUSIVE lock. Hot-journal rollback
@@ -49848,7 +49848,7 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
   ** assert()able.
   **
   ** If in WRITER_DBMOD, WRITER_FINISHED or OPEN state, then we update the
-  ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked 
+  ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked
   ** not dirty. Since this code is only executed in PAGER_OPEN state for
   ** a hot-journal rollback, it is guaranteed that the page-cache is empty
   ** if the pager is in OPEN state.
@@ -49926,18 +49926,18 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
   }else if( !isMainJrnl && pPg==0 ){
     /* If this is a rollback of a savepoint and data was not written to
     ** the database and the page is not in-memory, there is a potential
-    ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it 
-    ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be 
-    ** current. 
+    ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it
+    ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be
+    ** current.
     **
     ** There are a couple of different ways this can happen. All are quite
-    ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen 
+    ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen
     ** if the page is on the free-list at the start of the transaction, then
     ** populated, then moved using sqlite3PagerMovepage().
     **
     ** The solution is to add an in-memory page to the cache containing
-    ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty 
-    ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as 
+    ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty
+    ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as
     ** requiring a journal-sync before it is written.
     */
     assert( isSavepnt );
@@ -49987,26 +49987,26 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
 ** This routine checks if it is possible to delete the master journal file,
 ** and does so if it is.
 **
-** Argument zMaster may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not 
+** Argument zMaster may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not
 ** available for use within this function.
 **
-** When a master journal file is created, it is populated with the names 
-** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8 
-** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a 
+** When a master journal file is created, it is populated with the names
+** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8
+** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a
 ** nul-terminator byte (0x00). i.e. the entire contents of a master journal
 ** file for a transaction involving two databases might be:
 **
 **   "/home/bill/a.db-journal\x00/home/bill/b.db-journal\x00"
 **
-** A master journal file may only be deleted once all of its child 
+** A master journal file may only be deleted once all of its child
 ** journals have been rolled back.
 **
-** This function reads the contents of the master-journal file into 
+** This function reads the contents of the master-journal file into
 ** memory and loops through each of the child journal names. For
 ** each child journal, it checks if:
 **
 **   * if the child journal exists, and if so
-**   * if the child journal contains a reference to master journal 
+**   * if the child journal contains a reference to master journal
 **     file zMaster
 **
 ** If a child journal can be found that matches both of the criteria
@@ -50016,12 +50016,12 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
 **
 ** If an IO error within this function, an error code is returned. This
 ** function allocates memory by calling sqlite3Malloc(). If an allocation
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors 
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors
 ** occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** TODO: This function allocates a single block of memory to load
 ** the entire contents of the master journal file. This could be
-** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page 
+** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page
 ** size.
 */
 static int pager_delmaster(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
@@ -50099,7 +50099,7 @@ static int pager_delmaster(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
     }
     zJournal += (sqlite3Strlen30(zJournal)+1);
   }
- 
+
   sqlite3OsClose(pMaster);
   rc = sqlite3OsDelete(pVfs, zMaster, 0);
 
@@ -50115,20 +50115,20 @@ delmaster_out:
 
 
 /*
-** This function is used to change the actual size of the database 
+** This function is used to change the actual size of the database
 ** file in the file-system. This only happens when committing a transaction,
 ** or rolling back a transaction (including rolling back a hot-journal).
 **
 ** If the main database file is not open, or the pager is not in either
-** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size 
-** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes). 
+** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size
+** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes).
 ** If the file on disk is currently larger than nPage pages, then use the VFS
 ** xTruncate() method to truncate it.
 **
-** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than 
-** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if 
-** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it 
-** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to 
+** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than
+** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if
+** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it
+** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to
 ** the end of the new file instead.
 **
 ** If successful, return SQLITE_OK. If an IO error occurs while modifying
@@ -50138,9 +50138,9 @@ static int pager_truncate(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR );
   assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_READER );
-  
-  if( isOpen(pPager->fd) 
-   && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN) 
+
+  if( isOpen(pPager->fd)
+   && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN)
   ){
     i64 currentSize, newSize;
     int szPage = pPager->pageSize;
@@ -50184,8 +50184,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SectorSize(sqlite3_file *pFile){
 /*
 ** Set the value of the Pager.sectorSize variable for the given
 ** pager based on the value returned by the xSectorSize method
-** of the open database file. The sector size will be used 
-** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and 
+** of the open database file. The sector size will be used
+** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and
 ** master journal pointers within created journal files.
 **
 ** For temporary files the effective sector size is always 512 bytes.
@@ -50208,7 +50208,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
   assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->tempFile );
 
   if( pPager->tempFile
-   || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) & 
+   || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) &
               SQLITE_IOCAP_POWERSAFE_OVERWRITE)!=0
   ){
     /* Sector size doesn't matter for temporary files. Also, the file
@@ -50222,15 +50222,15 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** Playback the journal and thus restore the database file to
-** the state it was in before we started making changes.  
+** the state it was in before we started making changes.
 **
-** The journal file format is as follows: 
+** The journal file format is as follows:
 **
 **  (1)  8 byte prefix.  A copy of aJournalMagic[].
 **  (2)  4 byte big-endian integer which is the number of valid page records
 **       in the journal.  If this value is 0xffffffff, then compute the
 **       number of page records from the journal size.
-**  (3)  4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the 
+**  (3)  4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the
 **       sanity checksum.
 **  (4)  4 byte integer which is the number of pages to truncate the
 **       database to during a rollback.
@@ -50259,7 +50259,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
 ** from the file size.  This value is used when the user selects the
 ** no-sync option for the journal.  A power failure could lead to corruption
 ** in this case.  But for things like temporary table (which will be
-** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.  
+** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.
 **
 ** If the file opened as the journal file is not a well-formed
 ** journal file then all pages up to the first corrupted page are rolled
@@ -50271,7 +50271,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
 ** and an error code is returned.
 **
 ** The isHot parameter indicates that we are trying to rollback a journal
-** that might be a hot journal.  Or, it could be that the journal is 
+** that might be a hot journal.  Or, it could be that the journal is
 ** preserved because of JOURNALMODE_PERSIST or JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE.
 ** If the journal really is hot, reset the pager cache prior rolling
 ** back any content.  If the journal is merely persistent, no reset is
@@ -50322,9 +50322,9 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
   pPager->journalOff = 0;
   needPagerReset = isHot;
 
-  /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or 
-  ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error 
-  ** occurs. 
+  /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or
+  ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error
+  ** occurs.
   */
   while( 1 ){
     /* Read the next journal header from the journal file.  If there are
@@ -50333,7 +50333,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
     ** This indicates nothing more needs to be rolled back.
     */
     rc = readJournalHdr(pPager, isHot, szJ, &nRec, &mxPg);
-    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 
+    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
       if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
         rc = SQLITE_OK;
       }
@@ -50361,7 +50361,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
     ** chunk of the journal contains zero pages to be rolled back.  But
     ** when doing a ROLLBACK and the nRec==0 chunk is the last chunk in
     ** the journal, it means that the journal might contain additional
-    ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages 
+    ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages
     ** should be computed based on the journal file size.
     */
     if( nRec==0 && !isHot &&
@@ -50380,7 +50380,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
       pPager->dbSize = mxPg;
     }
 
-    /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the 
+    /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the
     ** database file and/or page cache.
     */
     for(u=0; u<nRec; u++){
@@ -50432,10 +50432,10 @@ end_playback:
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or 
-  ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but 
-  ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter 
-  ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive 
+  /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or
+  ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but
+  ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter
+  ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive
   ** mode, then subsequent transactions performed by the connection will not
   ** update the change-counter at all. This may lead to cache inconsistency
   ** problems for other processes at some point in the future. So, just
@@ -50480,7 +50480,7 @@ end_playback:
 
 /*
 ** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file (or out of
-** the WAL if that is where the most recent copy if found) into 
+** the WAL if that is where the most recent copy if found) into
 ** pPg->pData. A shared lock or greater must be held on the database
 ** file before this function is called.
 **
@@ -50571,15 +50571,15 @@ static void pager_write_changecounter(PgHdr *pPg){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
 /*
-** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been 
+** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been
 ** written into the log file when a WAL transaction is rolled back.
-** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument 
+** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument
 ** is actually a pointer to the Pager structure.
 **
 ** If page iPg is present in the cache, and has no outstanding references,
 ** it is discarded. Otherwise, if there are one or more outstanding
 ** references, the page content is reloaded from the database. If the
-** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails, 
+** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails,
 ** return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
 */
 static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){
@@ -50605,7 +50605,7 @@ static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){
   ** updated as data is copied out of the rollback journal and into the
   ** database. This is not generally possible with a WAL database, as
   ** rollback involves simply truncating the log file. Therefore, if one
-  ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore 
+  ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore
   ** also copied into the backup databases) as part of this transaction,
   ** the backups must be restarted.
   */
@@ -50622,7 +50622,7 @@ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){
   PgHdr *pList;                   /* List of dirty pages to revert */
 
   /* For all pages in the cache that are currently dirty or have already
-  ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the 
+  ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the
   ** following:
   **
   **   + Discard the cached page (if refcount==0), or
@@ -50644,11 +50644,11 @@ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){
 ** This function is a wrapper around sqlite3WalFrames(). As well as logging
 ** the contents of the list of pages headed by pList (connected by pDirty),
 ** this function notifies any active backup processes that the pages have
-** changed. 
+** changed.
 **
 ** The list of pages passed into this routine is always sorted by page number.
 ** Hence, if page 1 appears anywhere on the list, it will be the first page.
-*/ 
+*/
 static int pagerWalFrames(
   Pager *pPager,                  /* Pager object */
   PgHdr *pList,                   /* List of frames to log */
@@ -50689,7 +50689,7 @@ static int pagerWalFrames(
   pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_WRITE] += nList;
 
   if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList);
-  rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal, 
+  rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal,
       pPager->pageSize, pList, nTruncate, isCommit, pPager->walSyncFlags
   );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->pBackup ){
@@ -50804,9 +50804,9 @@ static int pagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, Pgno *pnPage){
 ** Return SQLITE_OK or an error code.
 **
 ** The caller must hold a SHARED lock on the database file to call this
-** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete 
-** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition 
-** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some 
+** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete
+** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition
+** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some
 ** other connection.
 */
 static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
@@ -50842,21 +50842,21 @@ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** Playback savepoint pSavepoint. Or, if pSavepoint==NULL, then playback
-** the entire master journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when 
-** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction 
+** the entire master journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when
+** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction
 ** savepoint.
 **
-** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is 
+** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is
 ** being rolled back), then the rollback consists of up to three stages,
 ** performed in the order specified:
 **
 **   * Pages are played back from the main journal starting at byte
-**     offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to 
+**     offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to
 **     PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset, or to the end of the main journal
 **     file if PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is zero.
 **
 **   * If PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is not zero, then pages are played
-**     back starting from the journal header immediately following 
+**     back starting from the journal header immediately following
 **     PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset to the end of the main journal file.
 **
 **   * Pages are then played back from the sub-journal file, starting
@@ -50872,7 +50872,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
 ** journal file. There is no need for a bitvec in this case.
 **
 ** In either case, before playback commences the Pager.dbSize variable
-** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint 
+** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint
 ** (or transaction). No page with a page-number greater than this value
 ** is played back. If one is encountered it is simply skipped.
 */
@@ -50893,7 +50893,7 @@ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){
     }
   }
 
-  /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint 
+  /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint
   ** being reverted was opened.
   */
   pPager->dbSize = pSavepoint ? pSavepoint->nOrig : pPager->dbOrigSize;
@@ -50946,7 +50946,7 @@ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){
     ** test is related to ticket #2565.  See the discussion in the
     ** pager_playback() function for additional information.
     */
-    if( nJRec==0 
+    if( nJRec==0
      && pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff
     ){
       nJRec = (u32)((szJ - pPager->journalOff)/JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager));
@@ -51122,7 +51122,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetFlags(
 /*
 ** The following global variable is incremented whenever the library
 ** attempts to open a temporary file.  This information is used for
-** testing and analysis only.  
+** testing and analysis only.
 */
 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0;
@@ -51131,8 +51131,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0;
 /*
 ** Open a temporary file.
 **
-** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success 
-** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically 
+** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success
+** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically
 ** delete the temporary file when it is closed.
 **
 ** The flags passed to the VFS layer xOpen() call are those specified
@@ -51164,9 +51164,9 @@ static int pagerOpentemp(
 /*
 ** Set the busy handler function.
 **
-** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns 
+** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns
 ** SQLITE_BUSY when trying to upgrade from no-lock to a SHARED lock,
-** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE 
+** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE
 ** lock. It does *not* invoke the busy handler when upgrading from
 ** SHARED to RESERVED, or when upgrading from SHARED to EXCLUSIVE
 ** (which occurs during hot-journal rollback). Summary:
@@ -51178,7 +51178,7 @@ static int pagerOpentemp(
 **   SHARED_LOCK   -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK   | No
 **   RESERVED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK   | Yes
 **
-** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is 
+** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is
 ** retried. If it returns zero, then the SQLITE_BUSY error is
 ** returned to the caller of the pager API function.
 */
@@ -51199,16 +51199,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(
 }
 
 /*
-** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size 
+** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size
 ** is passed in *pPageSize.
 **
 ** If the pager is in the error state when this function is called, it
-** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e. 
+** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e.
 ** one of SQLITE_IOERR, an SQLITE_IOERR_xxx sub-code or SQLITE_FULL).
 **
 ** Otherwise, if all of the following are true:
 **
-**   * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power 
+**   * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power
 **     of two between 512 and SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, inclusive), and
 **
 **   * there are no outstanding page references, and
@@ -51218,14 +51218,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(
 **
 ** then the pager object page size is set to *pPageSize.
 **
-** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc() 
-** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt 
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged. 
+** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc()
+** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged.
 ** In all other cases, SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** If the page size is not changed, either because one of the enumerated
 ** conditions above is not true, the pager was in error state when this
-** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed, 
+** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed,
 ** then *pPageSize is set to the old, retained page size before returning.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nReserve){
@@ -51235,7 +51235,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nR
   ** function may be called from within PagerOpen(), before the state
   ** of the Pager object is internally consistent.
   **
-  ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in 
+  ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in
   ** PAGER_ERROR state. But since PAGER_ERROR state guarantees that
   ** there is at least one outstanding page reference, this function
   ** is a no-op for that case anyhow.
@@ -51244,8 +51244,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nR
   u32 pageSize = *pPageSize;
   assert( pageSize==0 || (pageSize>=512 && pageSize<=SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE) );
   if( (pPager->memDb==0 || pPager->dbSize==0)
-   && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 
-   && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize 
+   && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0
+   && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize
   ){
     char *pNew = NULL;             /* New temp space */
     i64 nByte = 0;
@@ -51296,7 +51296,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerTempSpace(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive. 
+** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive.
 ** Make no changes if mxPage is zero or negative.  And never reduce the
 ** maximum page count below the current size of the database.
 **
@@ -51337,11 +51337,11 @@ void enable_simulated_io_errors(void){
 
 /*
 ** Read the first N bytes from the beginning of the file into memory
-** that pDest points to. 
+** that pDest points to.
 **
 ** If the pager was opened on a transient file (zFilename==""), or
 ** opened on a file less than N bytes in size, the output buffer is
-** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this 
+** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this
 ** function is used to read database headers, and a new transient or
 ** zero sized database has a header than consists entirely of zeroes.
 **
@@ -51374,7 +51374,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerReadFileheader(Pager *pPager, int N, unsigned cha
 ** This function may only be called when a read-transaction is open on
 ** the pager. It returns the total number of pages in the database.
 **
-** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then 
+** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then
 ** this is considered a 1 page file.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){
@@ -51389,19 +51389,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){
 ** a similar or greater lock is already held, this function is a no-op
 ** (returning SQLITE_OK immediately).
 **
-** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke 
-** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat 
-** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to 
+** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke
+** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat
+** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to
 ** obtain the lock succeeds.
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK on success and an error code if we cannot obtain
-** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state 
+** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state
 ** variable to locktype before returning.
 */
 static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
   int rc;                              /* Return code */
 
-  /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is 
+  /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is
   ** already held), or one of the transitions that the busy-handler
   ** may be invoked during, according to the comment above
   ** sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler().
@@ -51418,10 +51418,10 @@ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
 }
 
 /*
-** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the 
+** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the
 ** following is true for all dirty pages currently in the page-cache:
 **
-**   a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the 
+**   a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the
 **      current database image, in pages, OR
 **
 **   b) if the page content were written at this time, it would not
@@ -51434,9 +51434,9 @@ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
 ** the database file. If a savepoint transaction were rolled back after
 ** this happened, the correct behavior would be to restore the current
 ** content of the page. However, since this content is not present in either
-** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and 
+** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and
 ** sub-journal rolled back the content could not be restored and the
-** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that 
+** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that
 ** this circumstance cannot arise.
 */
 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
@@ -51452,9 +51452,9 @@ static void assertTruncateConstraint(Pager *pPager){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This 
-** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It 
-** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the 
+** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This
+** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It
+** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the
 ** truncation will be done when the current transaction is committed.
 **
 ** This function is only called right before committing a transaction.
@@ -51469,11 +51469,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
 
   /* At one point the code here called assertTruncateConstraint() to
   ** ensure that all pages being truncated away by this operation are,
-  ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint 
+  ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint
   ** journal so that they can be restored if the savepoint is rolled
   ** back. This is no longer necessary as this function is now only
-  ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the 
-  ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0), 
+  ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the
+  ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0),
   ** they cannot be rolled back. So the assertTruncateConstraint() call
   ** is no longer correct. */
 }
@@ -51485,12 +51485,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
 ** size of the journal file so that the pager_playback() routine knows
 ** that the entire journal file has been synced.
 **
-** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures 
+** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures
 ** that if a power-failure occurs during the rollback, the process that
 ** attempts rollback following system recovery sees the same journal
 ** content as this process.
 **
-** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, 
+** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise,
 ** an SQLite error code.
 */
 static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){
@@ -51506,7 +51506,7 @@ static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){
 
 #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
 /*
-** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno. 
+** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno.
 ** The new object will use the pointer pData, obtained from xFetch().
 ** If successful, set *ppPage to point to the new page reference
 ** and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and set
@@ -51522,7 +51522,7 @@ static int pagerAcquireMapPage(
   PgHdr **ppPage                  /* OUT: Acquired page object */
 ){
   PgHdr *p;                       /* Memory mapped page to return */
-  
+
   if( pPager->pMmapFreelist ){
     *ppPage = p = pPager->pMmapFreelist;
     pPager->pMmapFreelist = p->pDirty;
@@ -51556,7 +51556,7 @@ static int pagerAcquireMapPage(
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an 
+** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an
 ** earlier call to pagerAcquireMapPage().
 */
 static void pagerReleaseMapPage(PgHdr *pPg){
@@ -51592,7 +51592,7 @@ static void pagerFreeMapHdrs(Pager *pPager){
 ** result in a coredump.
 **
 ** This function always succeeds. If a transaction is active an attempt
-** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback 
+** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback
 ** a hot journal may be left in the filesystem but no error is returned
 ** to the caller.
 */
@@ -51618,8 +51618,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerClose(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
     pager_unlock(pPager);
   }else{
     /* If it is open, sync the journal file before calling UnlockAndRollback.
-    ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal 
-    ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs 
+    ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal
+    ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs
     ** while this is happening, the database could become corrupt.
     **
     ** If an error occurs while trying to sync the journal, shift the pager
@@ -51675,7 +51675,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
 ** disk and can be restored in the event of a hot-journal rollback.
 **
 ** If the Pager.noSync flag is set, then this function is a no-op.
-** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the 
+** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the
 ** device characteristics of the file-system, as follows:
 **
 **   * If the journal file is an in-memory journal file, no action need
@@ -51687,7 +51687,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
 **     been written following it. If the pager is operating in full-sync
 **     mode, then the journal file is synced before this field is updated.
 **
-**   * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then 
+**   * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then
 **     journal file is synced.
 **
 ** Or, in pseudo-code:
@@ -51696,11 +51696,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
 **     if( NOT SAFE_APPEND ){
 **       if( <full-sync mode> ) xSync(<journal file>);
 **       <update nRec field>
-**     } 
+**     }
 **     if( NOT SEQUENTIAL ) xSync(<journal file>);
 **   }
 **
-** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every 
+** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every
 ** page currently held in memory before returning SQLITE_OK. If an IO
 ** error is encountered, then the IO error code is returned to the caller.
 */
@@ -51728,10 +51728,10 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
         ** mode, then the journal file may at this point actually be larger
         ** than Pager.journalOff bytes. If the next thing in the journal
         ** file happens to be a journal-header (written as part of the
-        ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure 
-        ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes 
-        ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its 
-        ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the 
+        ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure
+        ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes
+        ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its
+        ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the
         ** hot-journal rollback following recovery. It may roll back all
         ** of this connections data, then proceed to rolling back the old,
         ** out-of-date data that follows it. Database corruption.
@@ -51741,7 +51741,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
         ** byte to the start of it to prevent it from being recognized.
         **
         ** Variable iNextHdrOffset is set to the offset at which this
-        ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used 
+        ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used
         ** as a temporary buffer to inspect the first couple of bytes of
         ** the potential journal header.
         */
@@ -51768,7 +51768,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
         ** it as a candidate for rollback.
         **
         ** This is not required if the persistent media supports the
-        ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible 
+        ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible
         ** for garbage data to be appended to the file, the nRec field
         ** is populated with 0xFFFFFFFF when the journal header is written
         ** and never needs to be updated.
@@ -51788,7 +51788,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
       if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){
         PAGERTRACE(("SYNC journal of %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
         IOTRACE(("JSYNC %p\n", pPager))
-        rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags| 
+        rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags|
           (pPager->syncFlags==SQLITE_SYNC_FULL?SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY:0)
         );
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -51805,8 +51805,8 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
     }
   }
 
-  /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just 
-  ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on 
+  /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just
+  ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on
   ** all pages.
   */
   sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(pPager->pPCache);
@@ -51826,9 +51826,9 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
 ** is called. Before writing anything to the database file, this lock
 ** is upgraded to an EXCLUSIVE lock. If the lock cannot be obtained,
 ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned and no data is written to the database file.
-** 
+**
 ** If the pager is a temp-file pager and the actual file-system file
-** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is 
+** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is
 ** written out.
 **
 ** Once the lock has been upgraded and, if necessary, the file opened,
@@ -51843,7 +51843,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
 ** in Pager.dbFileVers[] is updated to match the new value stored in
 ** the database file.
 **
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error 
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
 ** occurs, an IO error code is returned. Or, if the EXCLUSIVE lock cannot
 ** be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY is returned.
 */
@@ -51869,7 +51869,7 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
   ** file size will be.
   */
   assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->fd) );
-  if( rc==SQLITE_OK 
+  if( rc==SQLITE_OK
    && pPager->dbHintSize<pPager->dbSize
    && (pList->pDirty || pList->pgno>pPager->dbHintSize)
   ){
@@ -51891,7 +51891,7 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
     */
     if( pgno<=pPager->dbSize && 0==(pList->flags&PGHDR_DONT_WRITE) ){
       i64 offset = (pgno-1)*(i64)pPager->pageSize;   /* Offset to write */
-      char *pData;                                   /* Data to write */    
+      char *pData;                                   /* Data to write */
 
       assert( (pList->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 );
       if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList);
@@ -51903,8 +51903,8 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
       rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->fd, pData, pPager->pageSize, offset);
 
       /* If page 1 was just written, update Pager.dbFileVers to match
-      ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this 
-      ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize. 
+      ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this
+      ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize.
       */
       if( pgno==1 ){
         memcpy(&pPager->dbFileVers, &pData[24], sizeof(pPager->dbFileVers));
@@ -51932,18 +51932,18 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
 }
 
 /*
-** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this 
+** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this
 ** function is a no-op.
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An 
-** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen() 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An
+** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen()
 ** fails.
 */
 static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   if( !isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){
-    const int flags =  SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE 
-      | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE 
+    const int flags =  SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE
+      | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE
       | SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE;
     int nStmtSpill = sqlite3Config.nStmtSpill;
     if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || pPager->subjInMemory ){
@@ -51955,13 +51955,13 @@ static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal. 
+** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal.
 **
 ** If successful, set the bit corresponding to pPg->pgno in the bitvecs
 ** for all open savepoints before returning.
 **
 ** This function returns SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, an IO
-** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or 
+** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or
 ** SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc fails while setting a bit in a savepoint
 ** bitvec.
 */
@@ -51974,9 +51974,9 @@ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){
     assert( pPager->useJournal );
     assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pagerUseWal(pPager) );
     assert( isOpen(pPager->sjfd) || pPager->nSubRec==0 );
-    assert( pagerUseWal(pPager) 
-         || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg) 
-         || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize 
+    assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)
+         || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg)
+         || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize
     );
     rc = openSubJournal(pPager);
 
@@ -51987,7 +51987,7 @@ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){
       i64 offset = (i64)pPager->nSubRec*(4+pPager->pageSize);
       char *pData2;
 
-#if SQLITE_HAS_CODEC   
+#if SQLITE_HAS_CODEC
       if( !pPager->subjInMemory ){
         CODEC2(pPager, pData, pPg->pgno, 7, return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT, pData2);
       }else
@@ -52019,14 +52019,14 @@ static int subjournalPageIfRequired(PgHdr *pPg){
 ** This function is called by the pcache layer when it has reached some
 ** soft memory limit. The first argument is a pointer to a Pager object
 ** (cast as a void*). The pager is always 'purgeable' (not an in-memory
-** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is 
+** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is
 ** currently dirty but has no outstanding references. The page
-** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first 
+** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first
 ** argument.
 **
 ** The job of this function is to make pPg clean by writing its contents
 ** out to the database file, if possible. This may involve syncing the
-** journal file. 
+** journal file.
 **
 ** If successful, sqlite3PcacheMakeClean() is called on the page and
 ** SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying to make the
@@ -52051,7 +52051,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
   ** a rollback or by user request, respectively.
   **
   ** Spilling is also prohibited when in an error state since that could
-  ** lead to database corruption.   In the current implementation it 
+  ** lead to database corruption.   In the current implementation it
   ** is impossible for sqlite3PcacheFetch() to be called with createFlag==3
   ** while in the error state, hence it is impossible for this routine to
   ** be called in the error state.  Nevertheless, we include a NEVER()
@@ -52071,26 +52071,26 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
   pPg->pDirty = 0;
   if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
     /* Write a single frame for this page to the log. */
-    rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg); 
+    rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       rc = pagerWalFrames(pPager, pPg, 0, 0);
     }
   }else{
-    
+
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE
     if( pPager->tempFile==0 ){
       rc = sqlite3JournalCreate(pPager->jfd);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return pager_error(pPager, rc);
     }
 #endif
-  
+
     /* Sync the journal file if required. */
-    if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC 
+    if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
      || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
     ){
       rc = syncJournal(pPager, 1);
     }
-  
+
     /* Write the contents of the page out to the database file. */
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       assert( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 );
@@ -52104,7 +52104,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
     sqlite3PcacheMakeClean(pPg);
   }
 
-  return pager_error(pPager, rc); 
+  return pager_error(pPager, rc);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -52135,8 +52135,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager *pPager){
 ** The zFilename argument is the path to the database file to open.
 ** If zFilename is NULL then a randomly-named temporary file is created
 ** and used as the file to be cached. Temporary files are be deleted
-** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then 
-** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk. 
+** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then
+** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk.
 ** This can be used to implement an in-memory database.
 **
 ** The nExtra parameter specifies the number of bytes of space allocated
@@ -52150,13 +52150,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager *pPager){
 ** of the PAGER_* flags.
 **
 ** The vfsFlags parameter is a bitmask to pass to the flags parameter
-** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files. 
+** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files.
 **
-** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened 
+** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened
 ** successfully, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppPager set to point to
 ** the new pager object. If an error occurs, *ppPager is set to NULL
 ** and error code returned. This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM
-** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or 
+** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or
 ** various SQLITE_IO_XXX errors.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
@@ -52239,7 +52239,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
   }
 
   /* Allocate memory for the Pager structure, PCache object, the
-  ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal 
+  ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal
   ** file name. The layout in memory is as follows:
   **
   **     Pager object                    (sizeof(Pager) bytes)
@@ -52254,7 +52254,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
     ROUND8(sizeof(*pPager)) +      /* Pager structure */
     ROUND8(pcacheSize) +           /* PCache object */
     ROUND8(pVfs->szOsFile) +       /* The main db file */
-    journalFileSize * 2 +          /* The two journal files */ 
+    journalFileSize * 2 +          /* The two journal files */
     nPathname + 1 + nUri +         /* zFilename */
     nPathname + 8 + 2              /* zJournal */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
@@ -52353,7 +52353,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
     ** disk and uses an in-memory rollback journal.
     **
     ** This branch also runs for files marked as immutable.
-    */ 
+    */
 act_like_temp_file:
     tempFile = 1;
     pPager->eState = PAGER_READER;     /* Pretend we already have a lock */
@@ -52362,7 +52362,7 @@ act_like_temp_file:
     readOnly = (vfsFlags&SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY);
   }
 
-  /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of 
+  /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of
   ** Pager.pageSize and to allocate the Pager.pTmpSpace buffer.
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -52402,10 +52402,10 @@ act_like_temp_file:
   /* pPager->state = PAGER_UNLOCK; */
   /* pPager->errMask = 0; */
   pPager->tempFile = (u8)tempFile;
-  assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL 
+  assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL
           || tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE );
   assert( PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE==1 );
-  pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile; 
+  pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile;
   pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile;
   pPager->memDb = (u8)memDb;
   pPager->readOnly = (u8)readOnly;
@@ -52474,7 +52474,7 @@ static int databaseIsUnmoved(Pager *pPager){
 /*
 ** This function is called after transitioning from PAGER_UNLOCK to
 ** PAGER_SHARED state. It tests if there is a hot journal present in
-** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that 
+** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that
 ** needs to be played back. According to this function, a hot-journal
 ** file exists if the following criteria are met:
 **
@@ -52493,10 +52493,10 @@ static int databaseIsUnmoved(Pager *pPager){
 ** at the end of the file. If there is, and that master journal file
 ** does not exist, then the journal file is not really hot. In this
 ** case this routine will return a false-positive. The pager_playback()
-** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and 
-** will not roll it back. 
+** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and
+** will not roll it back.
 **
-** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and 
+** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and
 ** SQLITE_OK returned. If no hot-journal file is present, *pExists is
 ** set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying
 ** to determine whether or not a hot-journal file exists, the IO error
@@ -52524,7 +52524,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
     int locked = 0;             /* True if some process holds a RESERVED lock */
 
     /* Race condition here:  Another process might have been holding the
-    ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess() 
+    ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess()
     ** call above, but then delete the journal and drop the lock before
     ** we get to the following sqlite3OsCheckReservedLock() call.  If that
     ** is the case, this routine might think there is a hot journal when
@@ -52557,7 +52557,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
           /* The journal file exists and no other connection has a reserved
           ** or greater lock on the database file. Now check that there is
           ** at least one non-zero bytes at the start of the journal file.
-          ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not, 
+          ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not,
           ** it can be ignored.
           */
           if( !jrnlOpen ){
@@ -52607,7 +52607,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
 **      on the database file), then an attempt is made to obtain a
 **      SHARED lock on the database file. Immediately after obtaining
 **      the SHARED lock, the file-system is checked for a hot-journal,
-**      which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal 
+**      which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal
 **      rollback, the contents of the cache are validated by checking
 **      the 'change-counter' field of the database file header and
 **      discarded if they are found to be invalid.
@@ -52618,8 +52618,8 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
 **      the contents of the page cache and rolling back any open journal
 **      file.
 **
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error 
-** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or 
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
+** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or
 ** rolling back a journal file, the IO error code is returned.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
@@ -52627,7 +52627,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
 
   /* This routine is only called from b-tree and only when there are no
   ** outstanding pages. This implies that the pager state should either
-  ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in 
+  ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in
   ** exclusive access mode.  */
   assert( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 );
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -52665,12 +52665,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
       ** important that a RESERVED lock is not obtained on the way to the
       ** EXCLUSIVE lock. If it were, another process might open the
       ** database file, detect the RESERVED lock, and conclude that the
-      ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the 
+      ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the
       ** hot-journal back.
-      ** 
+      **
       ** Because the intermediate RESERVED lock is not requested, any
-      ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to 
-      ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock 
+      ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to
+      ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock
       ** on the database file.
       **
       ** Unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode, the lock is
@@ -52680,17 +52680,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
         goto failed;
       }
- 
-      /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the 
-      ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because 
-      ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open 
-      ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access 
-      ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist 
+
+      /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the
+      ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because
+      ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open
+      ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access
+      ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist
       ** mode (and also for journal_mode=truncate on some systems).
       **
-      ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some 
-      ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before 
-      ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it 
+      ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some
+      ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before
+      ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it
       ** may mean that the pager was in the error-state when this
       ** function was called and the journal file does not exist.
       */
@@ -52711,7 +52711,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
           }
         }
       }
- 
+
       /* Playback and delete the journal.  Drop the database write
       ** lock and reacquire the read lock. Purge the cache before
       ** playing back the hot-journal so that we don't end up with
@@ -52736,8 +52736,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
         ** or roll back a hot-journal while holding an EXCLUSIVE lock. The
         ** pager_unlock() routine will be called before returning to unlock
         ** the file. If the unlock attempt fails, then Pager.eLock must be
-        ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for 
-        ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation). 
+        ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for
+        ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation).
         **
         ** In order to get pager_unlock() to do this, set Pager.eState to
         ** PAGER_ERROR now. This is not actually counted as a transition
@@ -52745,7 +52745,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
         ** since we know that the same call to pager_unlock() will very
         ** shortly transition the pager object to the OPEN state. Calling
         ** assert_pager_state() would fail now, as it should not be possible
-        ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page 
+        ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page
         ** references.
         */
         pager_error(pPager, rc);
@@ -52770,8 +52770,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
       ** a 32-bit counter that is incremented with each change.  The
       ** other bytes change randomly with each file change when
       ** a codec is in use.
-      ** 
-      ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be 
+      **
+      ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be
       ** detected.  The chance of an undetected change is so small that
       ** it can be neglected.
       */
@@ -52838,7 +52838,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
 ** Except, in locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE when there is nothing to in
 ** the rollback journal, the unlock is not performed and there is
 ** nothing to rollback, so this routine is a no-op.
-*/ 
+*/
 static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
   if( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 ){
     assert( pPager->nMmapOut==0 ); /* because page1 is never memory mapped */
@@ -52848,7 +52848,7 @@ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** The page getter methods each try to acquire a reference to a
-** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is 
+** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is
 ** successfully obtained, it is copied to *ppPage and SQLITE_OK returned.
 **
 ** There are different implementations of the getter method depending
@@ -52858,22 +52858,22 @@ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
 **     getPageError()          --  Used if the pager is in an error state
 **     getPageMmap()           --  Used if memory-mapped I/O is enabled
 **
-** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned. 
+** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned.
 ** Otherwise, a new page object is allocated and populated with data
 ** read from the database file. In some cases, the pcache module may
 ** choose not to allocate a new page object and may reuse an existing
 ** object with no outstanding references.
 **
-** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the 
-** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is 
+** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the
+** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is
 ** already in the cache when this function is called, then the extra
 ** data is left as it was when the page object was last used.
 **
-** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if 
-** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the 
-** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no 
-** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the 
-** page is initialized to all zeros. 
+** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if
+** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the
+** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no
+** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the
+** page is initialized to all zeros.
 **
 ** If PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT is true, it means that we do not care about
 ** the contents of the page. This occurs in two scenarios:
@@ -52944,7 +52944,7 @@ static int getPageNormal(
     return SQLITE_OK;
 
   }else{
-    /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to 
+    /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to
     ** be initialized. But first some error checks:
     **
     ** (1) The maximum page number is 2^31
@@ -52965,9 +52965,9 @@ static int getPageNormal(
       }
       if( noContent ){
         /* Failure to set the bits in the InJournal bit-vectors is benign.
-        ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a 
-        ** page that does not need to be journaled.  Nevertheless, be sure 
-        ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set 
+        ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a
+        ** page that does not need to be journaled.  Nevertheless, be sure
+        ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set
         ** a bit in a bit vector.
         */
         sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
@@ -53017,7 +53017,7 @@ static int getPageMMap(
 
   /* It is acceptable to use a read-only (mmap) page for any page except
   ** page 1 if there is no write-transaction open or the ACQUIRE_READONLY
-  ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a 
+  ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a
   ** temporary or in-memory database.  */
   const int bMmapOk = (pgno>1
    && (pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || (flags & PAGER_GET_READONLY))
@@ -53049,7 +53049,7 @@ static int getPageMMap(
   }
   if( bMmapOk && iFrame==0 ){
     void *pData = 0;
-    rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd, 
+    rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd,
         (i64)(pgno-1) * pPager->pageSize, pPager->pageSize, &pData
     );
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pData ){
@@ -53105,12 +53105,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerGet(
 /*
 ** Acquire a page if it is already in the in-memory cache.  Do
 ** not read the page from disk.  Return a pointer to the page,
-** or 0 if the page is not in cache. 
+** or 0 if the page is not in cache.
 **
 ** See also sqlite3PagerGet().  The difference between this routine
 ** and sqlite3PagerGet() is that _get() will go to the disk and read
 ** in the page if the page is not already in cache.  This routine
-** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error 
+** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error
 ** has ever happened.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
@@ -53163,24 +53163,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerUnrefPageOne(DbPage *pPg){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called at the start of every write transaction.
-** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database 
+** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database
 ** file when this routine is called.
 **
 ** Open the journal file for pager pPager and write a journal header
 ** to the start of it. If there are active savepoints, open the sub-journal
-** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being 
-** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used 
+** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being
+** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used
 ** when opening a hot journal file to roll it back.
 **
 ** If the journal file is already open (as it may be in exclusive mode),
 ** then this function just writes a journal header to the start of the
-** already open file. 
+** already open file.
 **
 ** Whether or not the journal file is opened by this function, the
 ** Pager.pInJournal bitvec structure is allocated.
 **
-** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return 
-** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or 
+** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return
+** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or
 ** an IO error code if opening or writing the journal file fails.
 */
 static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
@@ -53190,7 +53190,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
   assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED );
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
   assert( pPager->pInJournal==0 );
-  
+
   /* If already in the error state, this function is a no-op.  But on
   ** the other hand, this routine is never called if we are already in
   ** an error state. */
@@ -53201,7 +53201,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
     if( pPager->pInJournal==0 ){
       return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
     }
-  
+
     /* Open the journal file if it is not already open. */
     if( !isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){
       if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){
@@ -53217,7 +53217,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
           flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL;
           nSpill = jrnlBufferSize(pPager);
         }
-          
+
         /* Verify that the database still has the same name as it did when
         ** it was originally opened. */
         rc = databaseIsUnmoved(pPager);
@@ -53229,9 +53229,9 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
       }
       assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->jfd) );
     }
-  
-  
-    /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open 
+
+
+    /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open
     ** the sub-journal if necessary.
     */
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -53256,12 +53256,12 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a 
+** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a
 ** write-transaction has already been opened, this function is a no-op.
 **
 ** If the exFlag argument is false, then acquire at least a RESERVED
 ** lock on the database file. If exFlag is true, then acquire at least
-** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking 
+** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking
 ** functions need be called.
 **
 ** If the subjInMemory argument is non-zero, then any sub-journal opened
@@ -53269,7 +53269,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
 ** has no effect if the sub-journal is already opened (as it may be when
 ** running in exclusive mode) or if the transaction does not require a
 ** sub-journal. If the subjInMemory argument is zero, then any required
-** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database, 
+** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database,
 ** or using a temporary file otherwise.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory){
@@ -53317,9 +53317,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory
       **
       ** WAL mode sets Pager.eState to PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED or CACHEMOD
       ** when it has an open transaction, but never to DBMOD or FINISHED.
-      ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint 
-      ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database 
-      ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in 
+      ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint
+      ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database
+      ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in
       ** WAL mode.
       */
       pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED;
@@ -53373,11 +53373,11 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerAddPageToRollbackJournal(PgHdr *pPg){
   rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff+pPager->pageSize+4, cksum);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
 
-  IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, 
+  IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno,
            pPager->journalOff, pPager->pageSize));
   PAGER_INCR(sqlite3_pager_writej_count);
   PAGERTRACE(("JOURNAL %d page %d needSync=%d hash(%08x)\n",
-       PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, 
+       PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno,
        ((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0), pager_pagehash(pPg)));
 
   pPager->journalOff += 8 + pPager->pageSize;
@@ -53392,9 +53392,9 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerAddPageToRollbackJournal(PgHdr *pPg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the 
+** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the
 ** main journal or sub-journal as required. If the page is written into
-** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the 
+** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the
 ** Pager.pInJournal bitvec and the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint bitvecs
 ** of any open savepoints as appropriate.
 */
@@ -53402,7 +53402,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
   Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
-  /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already 
+  /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already
   ** been started. The journal file may or may not be open at this point.
   ** It is never called in the ERROR state.
   */
@@ -53419,7 +53419,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
   ** obtained the necessary locks to begin the write-transaction, but the
   ** rollback journal might not yet be open. Open it now if this is the case.
   **
-  ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page. 
+  ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page.
   ** Otherwise, if it were done after calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty(), then
   ** an error might occur and the pager would end up in WRITER_LOCKED state
   ** with pages marked as dirty in the cache.
@@ -53464,7 +53464,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
   ** PGHDR_WRITEABLE bit that indicates that the page can be safely modified.
   */
   pPg->flags |= PGHDR_WRITEABLE;
-  
+
   /* If the statement journal is open and the page is not in it,
   ** then write the page into the statement journal.
   */
@@ -53548,7 +53548,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerWriteLargeSector(PgHdr *pPg){
     }
   }
 
-  /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages 
+  /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages
   ** starting at pg1, then it needs to be set for all of them. Because
   ** writing to any of these nPage pages may damage the others, the
   ** journal file must contain sync()ed copies of all of them
@@ -53571,9 +53571,9 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerWriteLargeSector(PgHdr *pPg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before 
-** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value 
-** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless 
+** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before
+** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value
+** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless
 ** this routine returns SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** The difference between this function and pager_write() is that this
@@ -53624,13 +53624,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerIswriteable(DbPage *pPg){
 ** on the given page is unused. The pager marks the page as clean so
 ** that it does not get written to disk.
 **
-** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large 
+** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large
 ** DELETE operations.
 **
 ** This optimization cannot be used with a temp-file, as the page may
 ** have been dirty at the start of the transaction. In that case, if
-** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need 
-** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the 
+** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need
+** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the
 ** current transaction is rolled back.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
@@ -53646,17 +53646,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
 }
 
 /*
-** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file 
-** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at 
+** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file
+** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at
 ** byte offset 24 of the pager file.  The secondary change counter at
 ** 92 is also updated, as is the SQLite version number at offset 96.
 **
 ** But this only happens if the pPager->changeCountDone flag is false.
 ** To avoid excess churning of page 1, the update only happens once.
-** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an 
+** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an
 ** unconditional update of the change counters.
 **
-** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling 
+** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling
 ** sqlite3PagerWrite() on page 1, then modifying the contents of the
 ** page data. In this case the file will be updated when the current
 ** transaction is committed.
@@ -53664,7 +53664,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
 ** The isDirectMode flag may only be non-zero if the library was compiled
 ** with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE macro defined. In this case,
 ** if isDirect is non-zero, then the database file is updated directly
-** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the 
+** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the
 ** sqlite3OsWrite() function.
 */
 static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){
@@ -53703,7 +53703,7 @@ static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){
     assert( pPgHdr==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
 
     /* If page one was fetched successfully, and this function is not
-    ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable.  When not in 
+    ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable.  When not in
     ** direct mode, page 1 is always held in cache and hence the PagerGet()
     ** above is always successful - hence the ALWAYS on rc==SQLITE_OK.
     */
@@ -53767,22 +53767,22 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSync(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
 
 /*
 ** This function may only be called while a write-transaction is active in
-** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op. 
-** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on 
+** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op.
+** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on
 ** the database file, an attempt is made to obtain one.
 **
 ** If the EXCLUSIVE lock is already held or the attempt to obtain it is
 ** successful, or the connection is in WAL mode, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is 
+** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is
 ** returned.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
   int rc = pPager->errCode;
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD 
-         || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD 
-         || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED 
+    assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
+         || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD
+         || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
     );
     assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
     if( 0==pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
@@ -53802,12 +53802,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
 **
 **   * The database file change-counter is updated,
 **   * the journal is synced (unless the atomic-write optimization is used),
-**   * all dirty pages are written to the database file, 
+**   * all dirty pages are written to the database file,
 **   * the database file is truncated (if required), and
-**   * the database file synced. 
+**   * the database file synced.
 **
-** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize 
-** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or 
+** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize
+** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or
 ** delete the master journal file if specified).
 **
 ** Note that if zMaster==NULL, this does not overwrite a previous value
@@ -53838,7 +53838,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
   /* Provide the ability to easily simulate an I/O error during testing */
   if( sqlite3FaultSim(400) ) return SQLITE_IOERR;
 
-  PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zMaster=%s nSize=%d\n", 
+  PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zMaster=%s nSize=%d\n",
       pPager->zFilename, zMaster, pPager->dbSize));
 
   /* If no database changes have been made, return early. */
@@ -53888,11 +53888,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE
       /* The following block updates the change-counter. Exactly how it
       ** does this depends on whether or not the atomic-update optimization
-      ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the 
-      ** runtime criteria to use the operation: 
+      ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the
+      ** runtime criteria to use the operation:
       **
       **    * The file-system supports the atomic-write property for
-      **      blocks of size page-size, and 
+      **      blocks of size page-size, and
       **    * This commit is not part of a multi-file transaction, and
       **    * Exactly one page has been modified and store in the journal file.
       **
@@ -53902,7 +53902,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
       ** is not applicable to this transaction, call sqlite3JournalCreate()
       ** to make sure the journal file has actually been created, then call
       ** pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter in indirect
-      ** mode. 
+      ** mode.
       **
       ** Otherwise, if the optimization is both enabled and applicable,
       ** then call pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter
@@ -53911,19 +53911,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
       */
       if( bBatch==0 ){
         PgHdr *pPg;
-        assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) 
-            || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-            || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+        assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+            || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+            || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
             );
-        if( !zMaster && isOpen(pPager->jfd) 
-         && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager) 
+        if( !zMaster && isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+         && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager)
          && pPager->dbSize>=pPager->dbOrigSize
          && (!(pPg = sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache)) || 0==pPg->pDirty)
         ){
-          /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The 
-          ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1 
-          ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1 
-          ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write 
+          /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The
+          ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1
+          ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1
+          ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write
           ** property of the host file-system, this is safe.
           */
           rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 1);
@@ -53934,7 +53934,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
           }
         }
       }
-#else 
+#else
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE
       if( zMaster ){
         rc = sqlite3JournalCreate(pPager->jfd);
@@ -53944,24 +53944,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
       rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 0);
 #endif
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-  
-      /* Write the master journal name into the journal file. If a master 
-      ** journal file name has already been written to the journal file, 
+
+      /* Write the master journal name into the journal file. If a master
+      ** journal file name has already been written to the journal file,
       ** or if zMaster is NULL (no master journal), then this call is a no-op.
       */
       rc = writeMasterJournal(pPager, zMaster);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-  
+
       /* Sync the journal file and write all dirty pages to the database.
-      ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not 
+      ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not
       ** create the journal file or perform any real IO.
       **
       ** Because the change-counter page was just modified, unless the
       ** atomic-update optimization is used it is almost certain that the
       ** journal requires a sync here. However, in locking_mode=exclusive
-      ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is 
+      ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is
       ** not the case. In this case it is likely enough that the redundant
-      ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow. 
+      ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow.
       */
       rc = syncJournal(pPager, 0);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
@@ -53989,7 +53989,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
       }
       sqlite3PcacheCleanAll(pPager->pPCache);
 
-      /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use 
+      /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use
       ** pager_truncate to grow the file here. This can happen if the database
       ** image was extended as part of the current transaction and then the
       ** last page in the db image moved to the free-list. In this case the
@@ -54001,7 +54001,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
         rc = pager_truncate(pPager, nNew);
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
       }
-  
+
       /* Finally, sync the database file. */
       if( !noSync ){
         rc = sqlite3PagerSync(pPager, zMaster);
@@ -54021,12 +54021,12 @@ commit_phase_one_exit:
 /*
 ** When this function is called, the database file has been completely
 ** updated to reflect the changes made by the current transaction and
-** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system 
+** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system
 ** though, and if a failure occurs at this point it will eventually
 ** be used as a hot-journal and the current transaction rolled back.
 **
-** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting, 
-** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used 
+** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting,
+** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used
 ** for hot-journal rollback. Once this is done the transaction is
 ** irrevocably committed.
 **
@@ -54051,15 +54051,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
   ** this transaction, the pager is running in exclusive-mode and is
   ** using persistent journals, then this function is a no-op.
   **
-  ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal 
+  ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal
   ** header with the nRec field set to 0. If such a journal is used as
   ** a hot-journal during hot-journal rollback, 0 changes will be made
-  ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal 
+  ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal
   ** header. Since the pager is in exclusive mode, there is no need
   ** to drop any locks either.
   */
-  if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED 
-   && pPager->exclusiveMode 
+  if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
+   && pPager->exclusiveMode
    && pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
   ){
     assert( pPager->journalOff==JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) || !pPager->journalOff );
@@ -54074,7 +54074,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the 
+** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the
 ** transaction are reverted and the current write-transaction is closed.
 ** The pager falls back to PAGER_READER state if successful, or PAGER_ERROR
 ** state if an error occurs.
@@ -54084,14 +54084,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
 **
 ** Otherwise, in rollback mode, this function performs two functions:
 **
-**   1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and 
+**   1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and
 **      in-memory cache pages to the state they were in when the transaction
 **      was opened, and
 **
 **   2) It finalizes the journal file, so that it is not used for hot
 **      rollback at any point in the future.
 **
-** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the 
+** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the
 ** rollback is successful.
 **
 ** In WAL mode, all cache-entries containing data modified within the
@@ -54104,7 +54104,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
   PAGERTRACE(("ROLLBACK %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
 
   /* PagerRollback() is a no-op if called in READER or OPEN state. If
-  ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not 
+  ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not
   ** attempted here. Instead, the error code is returned to the caller.
   */
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -54120,7 +54120,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
     int eState = pPager->eState;
     rc = pager_end_transaction(pPager, 0, 0);
     if( !MEMDB && eState>PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){
-      /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error 
+      /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error
       ** state to indicate that the contents of the cache may not be trusted.
       ** Any active readers will get SQLITE_ABORT.
       */
@@ -54135,7 +54135,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
 
   assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || rc!=SQLITE_OK );
   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_FULL || rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT
-          || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR 
+          || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR
           || rc==SQLITE_CANTOPEN
   );
 
@@ -54205,8 +54205,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int *sqlite3PagerStats(Pager *pPager){
 /*
 ** Parameter eStat must be either SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT or
 ** SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS. Before returning, *pnVal is incremented by the
-** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the 
-** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before 
+** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the
+** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before
 ** returning.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerCacheStat(Pager *pPager, int eStat, int reset, int *pnVal){
@@ -54239,7 +54239,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(Pager *pPager){
 ** to make up the difference. If the number of savepoints is already
 ** equal to nSavepoint, then this function is a no-op.
 **
-** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error 
+** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error
 ** occurs while opening the sub-journal file, then an IO error code is
 ** returned. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
 */
@@ -54254,7 +54254,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
   assert( nSavepoint>nCurrent && pPager->useJournal );
 
   /* Grow the Pager.aSavepoint array using realloc(). Return SQLITE_NOMEM
-  ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a 
+  ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a
   ** malloc failure occurs while populating it in the for(...) loop below.
   */
   aNew = (PagerSavepoint *)sqlite3Realloc(
@@ -54302,7 +54302,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called to rollback or release (commit) a savepoint.
-** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently 
+** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently
 ** created savepoint.
 **
 ** Parameter op is always either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE.
@@ -54310,29 +54310,29 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
 ** index iSavepoint. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then rollback all changes
 ** that have occurred since the specified savepoint was created.
 **
-** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter 
+** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter
 ** iSavepoint. A value of 0 means to operate on the outermost savepoint
 ** (the first created). A value of (Pager.nSavepoint-1) means operate
 ** on the most recently created savepoint. If iSavepoint is greater than
 ** (Pager.nSavepoint-1), then this function is a no-op.
 **
 ** If a negative value is passed to this function, then the current
-** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling 
+** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling
 ** sqlite3PagerRollback() because this function does not terminate
-** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the 
-** contents of the database to its original state. 
+** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the
+** contents of the database to its original state.
 **
-** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint 
+** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint
 ** are destroyed. If this is a release operation (op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE),
 ** then savepoint iSavepoint is also destroyed.
 **
 ** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation fails,
-** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a 
+** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a
 ** savepoint. If no errors occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-*/ 
+*/
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
   int rc = pPager->errCode;
-  
+
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS
   if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
 #endif
@@ -54345,7 +54345,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
     int nNew;          /* Number of remaining savepoints after this op. */
 
     /* Figure out how many savepoints will still be active after this
-    ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated 
+    ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated
     ** with any savepoints that are destroyed by this operation.
     */
     nNew = iSavepoint + (( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) ? 0 : 1);
@@ -54354,7 +54354,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
     }
     pPager->nSavepoint = nNew;
 
-    /* If this is a release of the outermost savepoint, truncate 
+    /* If this is a release of the outermost savepoint, truncate
     ** the sub-journal to zero bytes in size. */
     if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
       if( nNew==0 && isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){
@@ -54376,14 +54376,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
       rc = pagerPlaybackSavepoint(pPager, pSavepoint);
       assert(rc!=SQLITE_DONE);
     }
-    
+
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS
-    /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled 
+    /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled
     ** back journal_mode=off, put the pager in the error state. This way,
     ** if the VFS used by this pager includes ZipVFS, the entire transaction
     ** can be rolled back at the ZipVFS level.  */
-    else if( 
-        pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
+    else if(
+        pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
      && pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
     ){
       pPager->errCode = SQLITE_ABORT;
@@ -54508,8 +54508,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerState(Pager *pPager){
 ** transaction is active).
 **
 ** If the fourth argument, isCommit, is non-zero, then this page is being
-** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction 
-** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page 
+** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction
+** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page
 ** pPg refers to will not be written to again within this transaction.
 **
 ** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM or an IO error code if an error
@@ -54537,7 +54537,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
   }
 
   /* If the page being moved is dirty and has not been saved by the latest
-  ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the 
+  ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the
   ** sub-journal now. This is required to handle the following scenario:
   **
   **   BEGIN;
@@ -54560,7 +54560,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
     return rc;
   }
 
-  PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n", 
+  PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n",
       PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0, pgno));
   IOTRACE(("MOVE %p %d %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pgno))
 
@@ -54568,7 +54568,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
   ** be written to, store pPg->pgno in local variable needSyncPgno.
   **
   ** If the isCommit flag is set, there is no need to remember that
-  ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno 
+  ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno
   ** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to it.
   */
   if( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC) && !isCommit ){
@@ -54579,8 +54579,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
   }
 
   /* If the cache contains a page with page-number pgno, remove it
-  ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for 
-  ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained 
+  ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for
+  ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained
   ** for the page moved there.
   */
   pPg->flags &= ~PGHDR_NEED_SYNC;
@@ -54611,9 +54611,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
   }
 
   if( needSyncPgno ){
-    /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be 
+    /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be
     ** sync()ed before any data is written to database file page needSyncPgno.
-    ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the 
+    ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the
     ** "is journaled" bitvec flag has been set. This needs to be remedied by
     ** loading the page into the pager-cache and setting the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
     ** flag.
@@ -54644,9 +54644,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
 #endif
 
 /*
-** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page 
-** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's 
-** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to 
+** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page
+** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's
+** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to
 ** the value passed as the third parameter.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRekey(DbPage *pPg, Pgno iNew, u16 flags){
@@ -54664,7 +54664,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *pPg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space 
+** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space
 ** allocated along with the specified page.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){
@@ -54673,7 +54673,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){
 
 /*
 ** Get/set the locking-mode for this pager. Parameter eMode must be one
-** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or 
+** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or
 ** PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE. If the parameter is not _QUERY, then
 ** the locking-mode is set to the value specified.
 **
@@ -54728,8 +54728,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(Pager *pPager, int eMode){
   assert(      eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
             || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
             || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
-            || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-            || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+            || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+            || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
             || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY );
 
   /* This routine is only called from the OP_JournalMode opcode, and
@@ -54914,7 +54914,7 @@ static int pagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
   assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
   rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
-    /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the 
+    /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the
     ** pending lock that may have been obtained instead.  */
     pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK);
   }
@@ -54923,7 +54923,7 @@ static int pagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in 
+** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in
 ** exclusive-locking mode when this function is called, take an EXCLUSIVE
 ** lock on the database file and use heap-memory to store the wal-index
 ** in. Otherwise, use the normal shared-memory.
@@ -54934,8 +54934,8 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
   assert( pPager->pWal==0 && pPager->tempFile==0 );
   assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
 
-  /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use 
-  ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory 
+  /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use
+  ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory
   ** implementation. Take the exclusive lock now, before opening the WAL
   ** file, to make sure this is safe.
   */
@@ -54943,7 +54943,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
     rc = pagerExclusiveLock(pPager);
   }
 
-  /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails, 
+  /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails,
   ** (e.g. due to malloc() failure), return an error code.
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -54965,7 +54965,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
 ** If the pager passed as the first argument is open on a real database
 ** file (not a temp file or an in-memory database), and the WAL file
 ** is not already open, make an attempt to open it now. If successful,
-** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does 
+** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does
 ** not support the xShmXXX() methods, return an error code. *pbOpen is
 ** not modified in either case.
 **
@@ -55007,7 +55007,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenWal(
 ** This function is called to close the connection to the log file prior
 ** to switching from WAL to rollback mode.
 **
-** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an 
+** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an
 ** EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. If this cannot be obtained, an
 ** error (SQLITE_BUSY) is returned and the log connection is not closed.
 ** If successful, the EXCLUSIVE lock is not released before returning.
@@ -55033,7 +55033,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCloseWal(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
       rc = pagerOpenWal(pPager);
     }
   }
-    
+
   /* Checkpoint and close the log. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock is held on
   ** the database file, the log and log-summary files will be deleted.
   */
@@ -55065,7 +55065,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSnapshotGet(Pager *pPager, sqlite3_snapshot **ppS
 
 /*
 ** If this is a WAL database, store a pointer to pSnapshot. Next time a
-** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it 
+** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it
 ** identifies. If this is not a WAL database, return an error.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSnapshotOpen(Pager *pPager, sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot){
@@ -55079,7 +55079,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSnapshotOpen(Pager *pPager, sqlite3_snapshot *pSn
 }
 
 /*
-** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this 
+** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this
 ** is not a WAL database, return an error.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSnapshotRecover(Pager *pPager){
@@ -55124,7 +55124,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 **
 *************************************************************************
 **
-** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in 
+** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in
 ** "journal_mode=WAL" mode.
 **
 ** WRITE-AHEAD LOG (WAL) FILE FORMAT
@@ -55133,7 +55133,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 ** Each frame records the revised content of a single page from the
 ** database file.  All changes to the database are recorded by writing
 ** frames into the WAL.  Transactions commit when a frame is written that
-** contains a commit marker.  A single WAL can and usually does record 
+** contains a commit marker.  A single WAL can and usually does record
 ** multiple transactions.  Periodically, the content of the WAL is
 ** transferred back into the database file in an operation called a
 ** "checkpoint".
@@ -55159,11 +55159,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 **
 ** Immediately following the wal-header are zero or more frames. Each
 ** frame consists of a 24-byte frame-header followed by a <page-size> bytes
-** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned 
+** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned
 ** integer values, as follows:
 **
 **     0: Page number.
-**     4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages 
+**     4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
 **        after the commit. For all other records, zero.
 **     8: Salt-1 (copied from the header)
 **    12: Salt-2 (copied from the header)
@@ -55189,7 +55189,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 ** the checksum.  The checksum is computed by interpreting the input as
 ** an even number of unsigned 32-bit integers: x[0] through x[N].  The
 ** algorithm used for the checksum is as follows:
-** 
+**
 **   for i from 0 to n-1 step 2:
 **     s0 += x[i] + s1;
 **     s1 += x[i+1] + s0;
@@ -55197,7 +55197,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 **
 ** Note that s0 and s1 are both weighted checksums using fibonacci weights
 ** in reverse order (the largest fibonacci weight occurs on the first element
-** of the sequence being summed.)  The s1 value spans all 32-bit 
+** of the sequence being summed.)  The s1 value spans all 32-bit
 ** terms of the sequence whereas s0 omits the final term.
 **
 ** On a checkpoint, the WAL is first VFS.xSync-ed, then valid content of the
@@ -55230,19 +55230,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 ** multiple concurrent readers to view different versions of the database
 ** content simultaneously.
 **
-** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but 
+** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but
 ** because frames for page P can appear anywhere within the WAL, the
 ** reader has to scan the entire WAL looking for page P frames.  If the
 ** WAL is large (multiple megabytes is typical) that scan can be slow,
 ** and read performance suffers.  To overcome this problem, a separate
 ** data structure called the wal-index is maintained to expedite the
 ** search for frames of a particular page.
-** 
+**
 ** WAL-INDEX FORMAT
 **
 ** Conceptually, the wal-index is shared memory, though VFS implementations
 ** might choose to implement the wal-index using a mmapped file.  Because
-** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL 
+** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL
 ** on a network filesystem.  All users of the database must be able to
 ** share memory.
 **
@@ -55256,28 +55256,28 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 ** byte order of the host computer.
 **
 ** The purpose of the wal-index is to answer this question quickly:  Given
-** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the 
+** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the
 ** last frame in the wal before frame M for page P in the WAL, or return
 ** NULL if there are no frames for page P in the WAL prior to M.
 **
 ** The wal-index consists of a header region, followed by an one or
-** more index blocks.  
+** more index blocks.
 **
 ** The wal-index header contains the total number of frames within the WAL
 ** in the mxFrame field.
 **
-** Each index block except for the first contains information on 
+** Each index block except for the first contains information on
 ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames. The first index block contains information on
-** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and 
+** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and
 ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE are selected so that together the wal-index header and
 ** first index block are the same size as all other index blocks in the
 ** wal-index.
 **
 ** Each index block contains two sections, a page-mapping that contains the
-** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table 
+** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table
 ** that allows readers to query an index block for a specific page number.
 ** The page-mapping is an array of HASHTABLE_NPAGE (or HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE
-** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the 
+** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the
 ** first index-block contains the database page number corresponding to the
 ** first frame in the WAL file. The first entry in the second index block
 ** in the WAL file corresponds to the (HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+1)th frame in
@@ -55298,8 +55298,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 **
 ** The hash table consists of HASHTABLE_NSLOT 16-bit unsigned integers.
 ** HASHTABLE_NSLOT = 2*HASHTABLE_NPAGE, and there is one entry in the
-** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash 
-** table is never more than half full.  The expected number of collisions 
+** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash
+** table is never more than half full.  The expected number of collisions
 ** prior to finding a match is 1.  Each entry of the hash table is an
 ** 1-based index of an entry in the mapping section of the same
 ** index block.   Let K be the 1-based index of the largest entry in
@@ -55318,12 +55318,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 ** reached) until an unused hash slot is found. Let the first unused slot
 ** be at index iUnused.  (iUnused might be less than iKey if there was
 ** wrap-around.) Because the hash table is never more than half full,
-** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry.  Let 
+** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry.  Let
 ** iMax be the value between iKey and iUnused, closest to iUnused,
 ** where aHash[iMax]==P.  If there is no iMax entry (if there exists
 ** no hash slot such that aHash[i]==p) then page P is not in the
 ** current index block.  Otherwise the iMax-th mapping entry of the
-** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references 
+** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references
 ** page P.
 **
 ** A hash search begins with the last index block and moves toward the
@@ -55348,7 +55348,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
 ** if no values greater than K0 had ever been inserted into the hash table
 ** in the first place - which is what reader one wants.  Meanwhile, the
 ** second reader using K1 will see additional values that were inserted
-** later, which is exactly what reader two wants.  
+** later, which is exactly what reader two wants.
 **
 ** When a rollback occurs, the value of K is decreased. Hash table entries
 ** that correspond to frames greater than the new K value are removed
@@ -55376,7 +55376,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalTrace = 0;
 ** values in the wal-header are correct and (b) the version field is not
 ** WAL_MAX_VERSION, recovery fails and SQLite returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN.
 **
-** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the 
+** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the
 ** checksum test is successful) and finds that the version field is not
 ** WALINDEX_MAX_VERSION, then no read-transaction is opened and SQLite
 ** returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN.
@@ -55414,7 +55414,7 @@ typedef struct WalCkptInfo WalCkptInfo;
 **
 ** The szPage value can be any power of 2 between 512 and 32768, inclusive.
 ** Or it can be 1 to represent a 65536-byte page.  The latter case was
-** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added.  
+** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added.
 */
 struct WalIndexHdr {
   u32 iVersion;                   /* Wal-index version */
@@ -55456,7 +55456,7 @@ struct WalIndexHdr {
 ** There is one entry in aReadMark[] for each reader lock.  If a reader
 ** holds read-lock K, then the value in aReadMark[K] is no greater than
 ** the mxFrame for that reader.  The value READMARK_NOT_USED (0xffffffff)
-** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused.  aReadMark[0] is 
+** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused.  aReadMark[0] is
 ** a special case; its value is never used and it exists as a place-holder
 ** to avoid having to offset aReadMark[] indexs by one.  Readers holding
 ** WAL_READ_LOCK(0) always ignore the entire WAL and read all content
@@ -55476,7 +55476,7 @@ struct WalIndexHdr {
 ** previous sentence is when nBackfill equals mxFrame (meaning that everything
 ** in the WAL has been backfilled into the database) then new readers
 ** will choose aReadMark[0] which has value 0 and hence such reader will
-** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore 
+** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore
 ** the WAL.
 **
 ** Writers normally append new frames to the end of the WAL.  However,
@@ -55519,14 +55519,14 @@ struct WalCkptInfo {
 ** big-endian format in the first 4 bytes of a WAL file.
 **
 ** If the LSB is set, then the checksums for each frame within the WAL
-** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit 
-** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting 
+** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit
+** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting
 ** all data as 32-bit little-endian words.
 */
 #define WAL_MAGIC 0x377f0682
 
 /*
-** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file, 
+** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file,
 ** assuming a database page size of szPage bytes. The offset returned
 ** is to the start of the write-ahead log frame-header.
 */
@@ -55574,7 +55574,7 @@ struct Wal {
 ** Candidate values for Wal.exclusiveMode.
 */
 #define WAL_NORMAL_MODE     0
-#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE  1     
+#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE  1
 #define WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE 2
 
 /*
@@ -55593,7 +55593,7 @@ typedef u16 ht_slot;
 /*
 ** This structure is used to implement an iterator that loops through
 ** all frames in the WAL in database page order. Where two or more frames
-** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the 
+** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the
 ** frame most recently written to the WAL (in other words, the frame with
 ** the largest index).
 **
@@ -55629,7 +55629,7 @@ struct WalIterator {
 #define HASHTABLE_HASH_1     383                  /* Should be prime */
 #define HASHTABLE_NSLOT      (HASHTABLE_NPAGE*2)  /* Must be a power of 2 */
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** The block of page numbers associated with the first hash-table in a
 ** wal-index is smaller than usual. This is so that there is a complete
 ** hash-table on each aligned 32KB page of the wal-index.
@@ -55674,7 +55674,7 @@ static int walIndexPage(Wal *pWal, int iPage, volatile u32 **ppPage){
       pWal->apWiData[iPage] = (u32 volatile *)sqlite3MallocZero(WALINDEX_PGSZ);
       if( !pWal->apWiData[iPage] ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
     }else{
-      rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ, 
+      rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ,
           pWal->writeLock, (void volatile **)&pWal->apWiData[iPage]
       );
       if( rc==SQLITE_READONLY ){
@@ -55718,7 +55718,7 @@ static volatile WalIndexHdr *walIndexHdr(Wal *pWal){
 )
 
 /*
-** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in 
+** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in
 ** array aByte[] and the initial values of aIn[0] and aIn[1] (or
 ** initial values of 0 and 0 if aIn==NULL).
 **
@@ -55790,11 +55790,11 @@ static void walIndexWriteHdr(Wal *pWal){
 
 /*
 ** This function encodes a single frame header and writes it to a buffer
-** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of 
+** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of
 ** 4-byte big-endian integers, as follows:
 **
 **     0: Page number.
-**     4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages 
+**     4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
 **        after the commit. For all other records, zero.
 **     8: Salt-1 (copied from the wal-header)
 **    12: Salt-2 (copied from the wal-header)
@@ -55845,7 +55845,7 @@ static int walDecodeFrame(
   assert( WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE==24 );
 
   /* A frame is only valid if the salt values in the frame-header
-  ** match the salt values in the wal-header. 
+  ** match the salt values in the wal-header.
   */
   if( memcmp(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aFrame[8], 8)!=0 ){
     return 0;
@@ -55859,15 +55859,15 @@ static int walDecodeFrame(
   }
 
   /* A frame is only valid if a checksum of the WAL header,
-  ** all prior frams, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header, 
-  ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8 
+  ** all prior frams, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header,
+  ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8
   ** bytes of this frame-header.
   */
   nativeCksum = (pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN);
   walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aFrame, 8, aCksum, aCksum);
   walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aData, pWal->szPage, aCksum, aCksum);
-  if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16]) 
-   || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20]) 
+  if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16])
+   || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20])
   ){
     /* Checksum failed. */
     return 0;
@@ -55902,7 +55902,7 @@ static const char *walLockName(int lockIdx){
   }
 }
 #endif /*defined(SQLITE_TEST) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) */
-    
+
 
 /*
 ** Set or release locks on the WAL.  Locks are either shared or exclusive.
@@ -55959,15 +55959,15 @@ static int walNextHash(int iPriorHash){
   return (iPriorHash+1)&(HASHTABLE_NSLOT-1);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return pointers to the hash table and page number array stored on
 ** page iHash of the wal-index. The wal-index is broken into 32KB pages
 ** numbered starting from 0.
 **
 ** Set output variable *paHash to point to the start of the hash table
-** in the wal-index file. Set *piZero to one less than the frame 
+** in the wal-index file. Set *piZero to one less than the frame
 ** number of the first frame indexed by this hash table. If a
-** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number 
+** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number
 ** (*piZero+N) in the log.
 **
 ** Finally, set *paPgno so that *paPgno[1] is the page number of the
@@ -55997,7 +55997,7 @@ static int walHashGet(
     }else{
       iZero = HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE + (iHash-1)*HASHTABLE_NPAGE;
     }
-  
+
     *paPgno = &aPgno[-1];
     *paHash = aHash;
     *piZero = iZero;
@@ -56008,7 +56008,7 @@ static int walHashGet(
 /*
 ** Return the number of the wal-index page that contains the hash-table
 ** and page-number array that contain entries corresponding to WAL frame
-** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages 
+** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages
 ** are numbered starting from 0.
 */
 static int walFramePage(u32 iFrame){
@@ -56060,7 +56060,7 @@ static void walCleanupHash(Wal *pWal){
 
   if( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 ) return;
 
-  /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing 
+  /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing
   ** the entry that corresponds to frame pWal->hdr.mxFrame. It is guaranteed
   ** that the page said hash-table and array reside on is already mapped.
   */
@@ -56078,9 +56078,9 @@ static void walCleanupHash(Wal *pWal){
       aHash[i] = 0;
     }
   }
-  
+
   /* Zero the entries in the aPgno array that correspond to frames with
-  ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame. 
+  ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame.
   */
   nByte = (int)((char *)aHash - (char *)&aPgno[iLimit+1]);
   memset((void *)&aPgno[iLimit+1], 0, nByte);
@@ -56125,9 +56125,9 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
 
     idx = iFrame - iZero;
     assert( idx <= HASHTABLE_NSLOT/2 + 1 );
-    
+
     /* If this is the first entry to be added to this hash-table, zero the
-    ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding. 
+    ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding.
     */
     if( idx==1 ){
       int nByte = (int)((u8 *)&aHash[HASHTABLE_NSLOT] - (u8 *)&aPgno[1]);
@@ -56136,8 +56136,8 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
 
     /* If the entry in aPgno[] is already set, then the previous writer
     ** must have exited unexpectedly in the middle of a transaction (after
-    ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory). 
-    ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from 
+    ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory).
+    ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from
     ** the hash-table before writing any new entries.
     */
     if( aPgno[idx] ){
@@ -56187,7 +56187,7 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
 
 
 /*
-** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file. 
+** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file.
 **
 ** This routine first tries to establish an exclusive lock on the
 ** wal-index to prevent other threads/processes from doing anything
@@ -56247,16 +56247,16 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){
     }
 
     /* If the database page size is not a power of two, or is greater than
-    ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid 
+    ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid
     ** data. Similarly, if the 'magic' value is invalid, ignore the whole
     ** WAL file.
     */
     magic = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[0]);
     szPage = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[8]);
-    if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC 
-     || szPage&(szPage-1) 
-     || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE 
-     || szPage<512 
+    if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC
+     || szPage&(szPage-1)
+     || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+     || szPage<512
     ){
       goto finished;
     }
@@ -56266,7 +56266,7 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){
     memcpy(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aBuf[16], 8);
 
     /* Verify that the WAL header checksum is correct */
-    walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN, 
+    walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN,
         aBuf, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum
     );
     if( pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[24])
@@ -56330,7 +56330,7 @@ finished:
     pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1] = aFrameCksum[1];
     walIndexWriteHdr(pWal);
 
-    /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is 
+    /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is
     ** currently holding locks that exclude all other readers, writers and
     ** checkpointers.
     */
@@ -56375,8 +56375,8 @@ static void walIndexClose(Wal *pWal, int isDelete){
   }
 }
 
-/* 
-** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must 
+/*
+** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must
 ** already be opened on connection pDbFd. The buffer that zWalName points
 ** to must remain valid for the lifetime of the returned Wal* handle.
 **
@@ -56386,7 +56386,7 @@ static void walIndexClose(Wal *pWal, int isDelete){
 ** were to do this just after this client opened one of these files, the
 ** system would be badly broken.
 **
-** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and 
+** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and
 ** *ppWal is set to point to a new WAL handle. If an error occurs,
 ** an SQLite error code is returned and *ppWal is left unmodified.
 */
@@ -56550,7 +56550,7 @@ static void walMerge(
     ht_slot logpage;
     Pgno dbpage;
 
-    if( (iLeft<nLeft) 
+    if( (iLeft<nLeft)
      && (iRight>=nRight || aContent[aLeft[iLeft]]<aContent[aRight[iRight]])
     ){
       logpage = aLeft[iLeft++];
@@ -56648,7 +56648,7 @@ static void walMergesort(
 #endif
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Free an iterator allocated by walIteratorInit().
 */
 static void walIteratorFree(WalIterator *p){
@@ -56656,7 +56656,7 @@ static void walIteratorFree(WalIterator *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all 
+** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all
 ** pages in the WAL in ascending order. The caller must hold the checkpoint
 ** lock.
 **
@@ -56684,7 +56684,7 @@ static int walIteratorInit(Wal *pWal, WalIterator **pp){
 
   /* Allocate space for the WalIterator object. */
   nSegment = walFramePage(iLast) + 1;
-  nByte = sizeof(WalIterator) 
+  nByte = sizeof(WalIterator)
         + (nSegment-1)*sizeof(struct WalSegment)
         + iLast*sizeof(ht_slot);
   p = (WalIterator *)sqlite3_malloc64(nByte);
@@ -56723,7 +56723,7 @@ static int walIteratorInit(Wal *pWal, WalIterator **pp){
       }
       aIndex = &((ht_slot *)&p->aSegment[p->nSegment])[iZero];
       iZero++;
-  
+
       for(j=0; j<nEntry; j++){
         aIndex[j] = (ht_slot)j;
       }
@@ -56784,8 +56784,8 @@ static int walPagesize(Wal *pWal){
 ** client to write to the database (which may be this one) does so by
 ** writing frames into the start of the log file.
 **
-** The value of parameter salt1 is used as the aSalt[1] value in the 
-** new wal-index header. It should be passed a pseudo-random value (i.e. 
+** The value of parameter salt1 is used as the aSalt[1] value in the
+** new wal-index header. It should be passed a pseudo-random value (i.e.
 ** one obtained from sqlite3_randomness()).
 */
 static void walRestartHdr(Wal *pWal, u32 salt1){
@@ -56813,8 +56813,8 @@ static void walRestartHdr(Wal *pWal, u32 salt1){
 ** that a concurrent reader might be using.
 **
 ** All I/O barrier operations (a.k.a fsyncs) occur in this routine when
-** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL.  That means that if 
-** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background 
+** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL.  That means that if
+** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background
 ** process, foreground threads will never block on a lengthy fsync call.
 **
 ** Fsync is called on the WAL before writing content out of the WAL and
@@ -56827,7 +56827,7 @@ static void walRestartHdr(Wal *pWal, u32 salt1){
 ** database file.
 **
 ** This routine uses and updates the nBackfill field of the wal-index header.
-** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill.  
+** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill.
 ** (A WAL reset or recovery will revert nBackfill to zero, but not increase
 ** its value.)
 **
@@ -56885,7 +56885,7 @@ static int walCheckpoint(
       ** happening, the other client may only be increasing the value,
       ** not decreasing it. So assuming either that either the "old" or
       ** "new" version of the value is read, and not some arbitrary value
-      ** that would never be written by a real client, things are still 
+      ** that would never be written by a real client, things are still
       ** safe.  */
       u32 y = pInfo->aReadMark[i];
       if( mxSafeFrame>y ){
@@ -56974,8 +56974,8 @@ static int walCheckpoint(
   }
 
   /* If this is an SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART or TRUNCATE operation, and the
-  ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block 
-  ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that 
+  ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block
+  ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that
   ** the next process to write to the database restarts the wal file.
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && eMode!=SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE ){
@@ -56999,7 +56999,7 @@ static int walCheckpoint(
           ** writer clients should see that the entire log file has been
           ** checkpointed and behave accordingly. This seems unsafe though,
           ** as it would leave the system in a state where the contents of
-          ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the 
+          ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the
           ** file-system. To avoid this, update the wal-index header to
           ** indicate that the log file contains zero valid frames.  */
           walRestartHdr(pWal, salt1);
@@ -57061,7 +57061,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalClose(
       if( pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_NORMAL_MODE ){
         pWal->exclusiveMode = WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE;
       }
-      rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db, 
+      rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db,
           SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, 0, 0, sync_flags, nBuf, zBuf, 0, 0
       );
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -57142,7 +57142,7 @@ static int walIndexTryHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 
   if( memcmp(&h1, &h2, sizeof(h1))!=0 ){
     return 1;   /* Dirty read */
-  }  
+  }
   if( h1.isInit==0 ){
     return 1;   /* Malformed header - probably all zeros */
   }
@@ -57172,7 +57172,7 @@ static int walIndexTryHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 ** changed by this operation.  If pWal->hdr is unchanged, set *pChanged
 ** to 0.
 **
-** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK. 
+** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK.
 ** Otherwise an SQLite error code.
 */
 static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
@@ -57180,7 +57180,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
   int badHdr;                     /* True if a header read failed */
   volatile u32 *page0;            /* Chunk of wal-index containing header */
 
-  /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the 
+  /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the
   ** wal-index header) is mapped. Return early if an error occurs here.
   */
   assert( pChanged );
@@ -57192,7 +57192,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 
   /* If the first page of the wal-index has been mapped, try to read the
   ** wal-index header immediately, without holding any lock. This usually
-  ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently 
+  ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently
   ** being modified by another thread or process.
   */
   badHdr = (page0 ? walIndexTryHdr(pWal, pChanged) : 1);
@@ -57253,10 +57253,10 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 **
 ** The useWal parameter is true to force the use of the WAL and disable
 ** the case where the WAL is bypassed because it has been completely
-** checkpointed.  If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr() 
-** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr.  If the 
-** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication 
-** to the caller that the local paget cache is obsolete and needs to be 
+** checkpointed.  If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr()
+** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr.  If the
+** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication
+** to the caller that the local paget cache is obsolete and needs to be
 ** flushed.)  When useWal==1, the wal-index header is assumed to already
 ** be loaded and the pChanged parameter is unused.
 **
@@ -57271,7 +57271,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 ** bad luck when there is lots of contention for the wal-index, but that
 ** possibility is so small that it can be safely neglected, we believe.
 **
-** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on 
+** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on
 ** WAL_READ_LOCK(pWal->readLock).  The pWal->readLock integer is
 ** in the range 0 <= pWal->readLock < WAL_NREADER.  If pWal->readLock==(-1)
 ** that means the Wal does not hold any read lock.  The reader must not
@@ -57306,16 +57306,16 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
   **
   ** Circumstances that cause a RETRY should only last for the briefest
   ** instances of time.  No I/O or other system calls are done while the
-  ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But 
+  ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But
   ** if we are unlucky, another process that is holding a lock might get
-  ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve, 
+  ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve,
   ** during the few nanoseconds that it is holding the lock.  In that case,
   ** it might take longer than normal for the lock to free.
   **
   ** After 5 RETRYs, we begin calling sqlite3OsSleep().  The first few
   ** calls to sqlite3OsSleep() have a delay of 1 microsecond.  Really this
   ** is more of a scheduler yield than an actual delay.  But on the 10th
-  ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer, 
+  ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer,
   ** so that on the 100th (and last) RETRY we delay for 323 milliseconds.
   ** The total delay time before giving up is less than 10 seconds.
   */
@@ -57343,9 +57343,9 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
       if( pWal->apWiData[0]==0 ){
         /* This branch is taken when the xShmMap() method returns SQLITE_BUSY.
         ** We assume this is a transient condition, so return WAL_RETRY. The
-        ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS 
-        ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the 
-        ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region 
+        ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS
+        ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the
+        ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region
         ** must be zeroed before the requested page is returned.
         */
         rc = WAL_RETRY;
@@ -57362,7 +57362,7 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
   }
 
   pInfo = walCkptInfo(pWal);
-  if( !useWal && pInfo->nBackfill==pWal->hdr.mxFrame 
+  if( !useWal && pInfo->nBackfill==pWal->hdr.mxFrame
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
    && (pWal->pSnapshot==0 || pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0
      || 0==memcmp(&pWal->hdr, pWal->pSnapshot, sizeof(WalIndexHdr)))
@@ -57382,7 +57382,7 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
         ** snapshot. Since holding READ_LOCK(0) prevents a checkpoint from
         ** happening, this is usually correct.
         **
-        ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log 
+        ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log
         ** is wrapped and written for that matter) before the READ_LOCK(0)
         ** is obtained, that is not necessarily true. A checkpointer may
         ** have started to backfill the appended frames but crashed before
@@ -57463,9 +57463,9 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
   ** to read any frames earlier than minFrame from the wal file - they
   ** can be safely read directly from the database file.
   **
-  ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of 
+  ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of
   ** nBackfill and checking that the wal-header in shared-memory still
-  ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the 
+  ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the
   ** checkpointer that set nBackfill was not working with a wal-index
   ** header newer than that cached in pWal->hdr. If it were, that could
   ** cause a problem. The checkpointer could omit to checkpoint
@@ -57493,15 +57493,15 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
 /*
-** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted 
+** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted
 ** variable so that older snapshots can be accessed. To do this, loop
-** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1), 
+** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1),
 ** comparing their content to the corresponding page with the database
 ** file, if any. Set nBackfillAttempted to the frame number of the
 ** first frame for which the wal file content matches the db file.
 **
-** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page 
-** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which 
+** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page
+** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which
 ** is not always true. It is also possible that nBackfillAttempted
 ** may be left set to a value larger than expected, if a wal frame
 ** contains content that duplicate of an earlier version of the same
@@ -57624,14 +57624,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalBeginReadTransaction(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
       assert( pWal->readLock>0 || pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 );
       assert( pInfo->aReadMark[pWal->readLock]<=pSnapshot->mxFrame );
 
-      /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running 
+      /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running
       ** concurrent with this code. If this is the case, it may be that the
-      ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint 
-      ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but 
-      ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate 
+      ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint
+      ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but
+      ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate
       ** its intent. To avoid the race condition this leads to, ensure that
-      ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock 
-      ** before checking pInfo->nBackfillAttempted.  
+      ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock
+      ** before checking pInfo->nBackfillAttempted.
       **
       ** TODO: Does the aReadMark[] lock prevent a checkpointer from doing
       **       this already?
@@ -57704,8 +57704,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
 
   /* If the "last page" field of the wal-index header snapshot is 0, then
   ** no data will be read from the wal under any circumstances. Return early
-  ** in this case as an optimization.  Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0, 
-  ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the 
+  ** in this case as an optimization.  Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0,
+  ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the
   ** WAL were empty.
   */
   if( iLast==0 || pWal->readLock==0 ){
@@ -57718,9 +57718,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
   ** hash table (each hash table indexes up to HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames).
   **
   ** This code might run concurrently to the code in walIndexAppend()
-  ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash 
-  ** table). This means the value just read from the hash 
-  ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the 
+  ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash
+  ** table). This means the value just read from the hash
+  ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the
   ** current read transaction was opened. Values added after the
   ** read transaction was opened may have been written incorrectly -
   ** i.e. these slots may contain garbage data. However, we assume
@@ -57728,13 +57728,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
   ** opened remain unmodified.
   **
   ** For the reasons above, the if(...) condition featured in the inner
-  ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required 
+  ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required
   ** if we had exclusive access to the hash-table:
   **
-  **   (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno): 
+  **   (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno):
   **     This condition filters out normal hash-table collisions.
   **
-  **   (iFrame<=iLast): 
+  **   (iFrame<=iLast):
   **     This condition filters out entries that were added to the hash
   **     table after the current read-transaction had started.
   */
@@ -57808,7 +57808,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalReadFrame(
   return sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, pOut, (nOut>sz ? sz : nOut), iOffset);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return the size of the database in pages (or zero, if unknown).
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){
@@ -57819,7 +57819,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){
 }
 
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This function starts a write transaction on the WAL.
 **
 ** A read transaction must have already been started by a prior call
@@ -57897,18 +57897,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *p
   if( ALWAYS(pWal->writeLock) ){
     Pgno iMax = pWal->hdr.mxFrame;
     Pgno iFrame;
-  
+
     /* Restore the clients cache of the wal-index header to the state it
-    ** was in before the client began writing to the database. 
+    ** was in before the client began writing to the database.
     */
     memcpy(&pWal->hdr, (void *)walIndexHdr(pWal), sizeof(WalIndexHdr));
 
-    for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1; 
-        ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax; 
+    for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1;
+        ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax;
         iFrame++
     ){
       /* This call cannot fail. Unless the page for which the page number
-      ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and 
+      ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and
       ** (b) has an outstanding reference, then xUndo is either a no-op
       ** (if (a) is false) or simply expels the page from the cache (if (b)
       ** is false).
@@ -57926,10 +57926,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *p
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
-** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 
-** values. This function populates the array with values required to 
-** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current 
+/*
+** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32
+** values. This function populates the array with values required to
+** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current
 ** point in the event of a savepoint rollback (via WalSavepointUndo()).
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){
@@ -57940,7 +57940,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){
   aWalData[3] = pWal->nCkpt;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Move the write position of the WAL back to the point identified by
 ** the values in the aWalData[] array. aWalData must point to an array
 ** of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 values that has been previously populated
@@ -58146,7 +58146,7 @@ static int walRewriteChecksums(Wal *pWal, u32 iLast){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Write a set of frames to the log. The caller must hold the write-lock
 ** on the log file (obtained using sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction()).
 */
@@ -58213,7 +58213,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(
     walChecksumBytes(1, aWalHdr, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, aCksum);
     sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[24], aCksum[0]);
     sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[28], aCksum[1]);
-    
+
     pWal->szPage = szPage;
     pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum = SQLITE_BIGENDIAN;
     pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0] = aCksum[0];
@@ -58255,7 +58255,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(
 
     /* Check if this page has already been written into the wal file by
     ** the current transaction. If so, overwrite the existing frame and
-    ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that 
+    ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that
     ** checksums must be recomputed when the transaction is committed.  */
     if( iFirst && (p->pDirty || isCommit==0) ){
       u32 iWrite = 0;
@@ -58342,7 +58342,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(
     pWal->truncateOnCommit = 0;
   }
 
-  /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the 
+  /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the
   ** wal-index to do this as the SQLITE_SHM_WRITE lock held on the wal-index
   ** guarantees that there are no other writers, and no data that may
   ** be in use by existing readers is being overwritten.
@@ -58380,7 +58380,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This routine is called to implement sqlite3_wal_checkpoint() and
 ** related interfaces.
 **
@@ -58417,7 +58417,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint(
   if( pWal->readOnly ) return SQLITE_READONLY;
   WALTRACE(("WAL%p: checkpoint begins\n", pWal));
 
-  /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive 
+  /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive
   ** "checkpoint" lock on the database file. */
   rc = walLockExclusive(pWal, WAL_CKPT_LOCK, 1);
   if( rc ){
@@ -58478,7 +58478,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint(
   }
 
   if( isChanged ){
-    /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was 
+    /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was
     ** performed, then the pager-cache associated with pWal is now
     ** out of date. So zero the cached wal-index header to ensure that
     ** next time the pager opens a snapshot on this database it knows that
@@ -58521,7 +58521,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCallback(Wal *pWal){
 ** operation must occur while the pager is still holding the exclusive
 ** lock on the main database file.
 **
-** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into 
+** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into
 ** locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE.  This means that the pWal->readLock must
 ** be released.  Return 1 if the transition is made and 0 if the
 ** WAL is already in exclusive-locking mode - meaning that this
@@ -58538,8 +58538,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){
   assert( pWal->writeLock==0 );
   assert( pWal->exclusiveMode!=WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE || op==-1 );
 
-  /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a 
-  ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot 
+  /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a
+  ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot
   ** happen if the connection is actually in exclusive mode (as no xShmLock
   ** locks are taken in this case). Nor should the pager attempt to
   ** upgrade to exclusive-mode following such an error.
@@ -58570,10 +58570,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using
 ** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the
-** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false. 
+** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal){
   return (pWal && pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE );
@@ -58612,7 +58612,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalSnapshotOpen(Wal *pWal, sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapsho
   pWal->pSnapshot = (WalIndexHdr*)pSnapshot;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return a +ve value if snapshot p1 is newer than p2. A -ve value if
 ** p1 is older than p2 and zero if p1 and p2 are the same snapshot.
 */
@@ -58702,16 +58702,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_file *sqlite3WalFile(Wal *pWal){
 ** on Ptr(N) and its subpages have values greater than Key(N-1).  And
 ** so forth.
 **
-** Finding a particular key requires reading O(log(M)) pages from the 
+** Finding a particular key requires reading O(log(M)) pages from the
 ** disk where M is the number of entries in the tree.
 **
-** In this implementation, a single file can hold one or more separate 
+** In this implementation, a single file can hold one or more separate
 ** BTrees.  Each BTree is identified by the index of its root page.  The
 ** key and data for any entry are combined to form the "payload".  A
 ** fixed amount of payload can be carried directly on the database
 ** page.  If the payload is larger than the preset amount then surplus
 ** bytes are stored on overflow pages.  The payload for an entry
-** and the preceding pointer are combined to form a "Cell".  Each 
+** and the preceding pointer are combined to form a "Cell".  Each
 ** page has a small header which contains the Ptr(N) pointer and other
 ** information such as the size of key and data.
 **
@@ -58841,7 +58841,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_file *sqlite3WalFile(Wal *pWal){
 ** contiguous or in order, but cell pointers are contiguous and in order.
 **
 ** Cell content makes use of variable length integers.  A variable
-** length integer is 1 to 9 bytes where the lower 7 bits of each 
+** length integer is 1 to 9 bytes where the lower 7 bits of each
 ** byte are used.  The integer consists of all bytes that have bit 8 set and
 ** the first byte with bit 8 clear.  The most significant byte of the integer
 ** appears first.  A variable-length integer may not be more than 9 bytes long.
@@ -58914,7 +58914,7 @@ typedef struct CellInfo CellInfo;
 ** -DSQLITE_FILE_HEADER="..." on the compiler command-line.  The
 ** header must be exactly 16 bytes including the zero-terminator so
 ** the string itself should be 15 characters long.  If you change
-** the header, then your custom library will not be able to read 
+** the header, then your custom library will not be able to read
 ** databases generated by the standard tools and the standard tools
 ** will not be able to read databases created by your custom library.
 */
@@ -58977,7 +58977,7 @@ struct MemPage {
 
 /*
 ** A linked list of the following structures is stored at BtShared.pLock.
-** Locks are added (or upgraded from READ_LOCK to WRITE_LOCK) when a cursor 
+** Locks are added (or upgraded from READ_LOCK to WRITE_LOCK) when a cursor
 ** is opened on the table with root page BtShared.iTable. Locks are removed
 ** from this list when a transaction is committed or rolled back, or when
 ** a btree handle is closed.
@@ -59001,7 +59001,7 @@ struct BtLock {
 ** see the internals of this structure and only deals with pointers to
 ** this structure.
 **
-** For some database files, the same underlying database cache might be 
+** For some database files, the same underlying database cache might be
 ** shared between multiple connections.  In that case, each connection
 ** has it own instance of this object.  But each instance of this object
 ** points to the same BtShared object.  The database cache and the
@@ -59009,7 +59009,7 @@ struct BtLock {
 ** the BtShared object.
 **
 ** All fields in this structure are accessed under sqlite3.mutex.
-** The pBt pointer itself may not be changed while there exists cursors 
+** The pBt pointer itself may not be changed while there exists cursors
 ** in the referenced BtShared that point back to this Btree since those
 ** cursors have to go through this Btree to find their BtShared and
 ** they often do so without holding sqlite3.mutex.
@@ -59044,7 +59044,7 @@ struct Btree {
 
 /*
 ** An instance of this object represents a single database file.
-** 
+**
 ** A single database file can be in use at the same time by two
 ** or more database connections.  When two or more connections are
 ** sharing the same database file, each connection has it own
@@ -59164,7 +59164,7 @@ struct CellInfo {
 ** particular database connection identified BtCursor.pBtree.db.
 **
 ** Fields in this structure are accessed under the BtShared.mutex
-** found at self->pBt->mutex. 
+** found at self->pBt->mutex.
 **
 ** skipNext meaning:
 **    eState==SKIPNEXT && skipNext>0:  Next sqlite3BtreeNext() is no-op.
@@ -59213,7 +59213,7 @@ struct BtCursor {
 ** Potential values for BtCursor.eState.
 **
 ** CURSOR_INVALID:
-**   Cursor does not point to a valid entry. This can happen (for example) 
+**   Cursor does not point to a valid entry. This can happen (for example)
 **   because the table is empty or because BtreeCursorFirst() has not been
 **   called.
 **
@@ -59226,9 +59226,9 @@ struct BtCursor {
 **   operation should be a no-op.
 **
 ** CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK:
-**   The table that this cursor was opened on still exists, but has been 
+**   The table that this cursor was opened on still exists, but has been
 **   modified since the cursor was last used. The cursor position is saved
-**   in variables BtCursor.pKey and BtCursor.nKey. When a cursor is in 
+**   in variables BtCursor.pKey and BtCursor.nKey. When a cursor is in
 **   this state, restoreCursorPosition() can be called to attempt to
 **   seek the cursor to the saved position.
 **
@@ -59245,13 +59245,13 @@ struct BtCursor {
 #define CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK       3
 #define CURSOR_FAULT             4
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** The database page the PENDING_BYTE occupies. This page is never used.
 */
 # define PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) PAGER_MJ_PGNO(pBt)
 
 /*
-** These macros define the location of the pointer-map entry for a 
+** These macros define the location of the pointer-map entry for a
 ** database page. The first argument to each is the number of usable
 ** bytes on each page of the database (often 1024). The second is the
 ** page number to look up in the pointer map.
@@ -59286,10 +59286,10 @@ struct BtCursor {
 ** PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE: The database page is a root-page. The page-number is not
 **                  used in this case.
 **
-** PTRMAP_FREEPAGE: The database page is an unused (free) page. The page-number 
+** PTRMAP_FREEPAGE: The database page is an unused (free) page. The page-number
 **                  is not used in this case.
 **
-** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: The database page is the first page in a list of 
+** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: The database page is the first page in a list of
 **                   overflow pages. The page number identifies the page that
 **                   contains the cell with a pointer to this overflow page.
 **
@@ -59311,13 +59311,13 @@ struct BtCursor {
 */
 #define btreeIntegrity(p) \
   assert( p->pBt->inTransaction!=TRANS_NONE || p->pBt->nTransaction==0 ); \
-  assert( p->pBt->inTransaction>=p->inTrans ); 
+  assert( p->pBt->inTransaction>=p->inTrans );
 
 
 /*
 ** The ISAUTOVACUUM macro is used within balance_nonroot() to determine
 ** if the database supports auto-vacuum or not. Because it is used
-** within an expression that is an argument to another macro 
+** within an expression that is an argument to another macro
 ** (sqliteMallocRaw), it is not possible to use conditional compilation.
 ** So, this macro is defined instead.
 */
@@ -59334,8 +59334,8 @@ struct BtCursor {
 **
 ** The aRef[] array is allocated so that there is 1 bit for each page in
 ** the database. As the integrity-check proceeds, for each page used in
-** the database the corresponding bit is set. This allows integrity-check to 
-** detect pages that are used twice and orphaned pages (both of which 
+** the database the corresponding bit is set. This allows integrity-check to
+** detect pages that are used twice and orphaned pages (both of which
 ** indicate corruption).
 */
 typedef struct IntegrityCk IntegrityCk;
@@ -59651,10 +59651,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(sqlite3 *db){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB
 /*
-** Enter a mutex on a Btree given a cursor owned by that Btree. 
+** Enter a mutex on a Btree given a cursor owned by that Btree.
 **
-** These entry points are used by incremental I/O only. Enter() is required 
-** any time OMIT_SHARED_CACHE is not defined, regardless of whether or not 
+** These entry points are used by incremental I/O only. Enter() is required
+** any time OMIT_SHARED_CACHE is not defined, regardless of whether or not
 ** the build is threadsafe. Leave() is only required by threadsafe builds.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnterCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -59724,7 +59724,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 #define BTALLOC_LE    2           /* Allocate any page <= the parameter */
 
 /*
-** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not 
+** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not
 ** defined, or 0 if it is. For example:
 **
 **   bIncrVacuum = IfNotOmitAV(pBtShared->incrVacuum);
@@ -59739,7 +59739,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 /*
 ** A list of BtShared objects that are eligible for participation
 ** in shared cache.  This variable has file scope during normal builds,
-** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for 
+** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for
 ** test builds.
 **
 ** Access to this variable is protected by SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MASTER.
@@ -59774,7 +59774,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_enable_shared_cache(int enable){
   ** manipulate entries in the BtShared.pLock linked list used to store
   ** shared-cache table level locks. If the library is compiled with the
   ** shared-cache feature disabled, then there is only ever one user
-  ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary. 
+  ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary.
   ** So define the lock related functions as no-ops.
   */
   #define querySharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c) SQLITE_OK
@@ -59791,15 +59791,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_enable_shared_cache(int enable){
 /*
 **** This function is only used as part of an assert() statement. ***
 **
-** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the 
+** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the
 ** table with root page iRoot.   Return 1 if it does and 0 if not.
 **
-** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via 
+** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via
 ** Btree connection pBtree:
 **
 **    assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(pBtree, iRoot, 0, WRITE_LOCK) );
 **
-** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the 
+** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the
 ** caller should have first obtained a lock specifying the root page of
 ** the corresponding table. This makes things a bit more complicated,
 ** as this module treats each table as a separate structure. To determine
@@ -59821,7 +59821,7 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
   BtLock *pLock;
 
   /* If this database is not shareable, or if the client is reading
-  ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required. 
+  ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required.
   ** Return true immediately.
   */
   if( (pBtree->sharable==0)
@@ -59861,13 +59861,13 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
     iTab = iRoot;
   }
 
-  /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a 
+  /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a
   ** write-lock on the schema table, or (if the client is reading) a
   ** read-lock on iTab will suffice. Return 1 if any of these are found.  */
   for(pLock=pBtree->pBt->pLock; pLock; pLock=pLock->pNext){
-    if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree 
+    if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree
      && (pLock->iTable==iTab || (pLock->eLock==WRITE_LOCK && pLock->iTable==1))
-     && pLock->eLock>=eLockType 
+     && pLock->eLock>=eLockType
     ){
       return 1;
     }
@@ -59900,7 +59900,7 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
 static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){
   BtCursor *p;
   for(p=pBtree->pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){
-    if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot 
+    if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot
      && p->pBtree!=pBtree
      && 0==(p->pBtree->db->flags & SQLITE_ReadUncommit)
     ){
@@ -59912,7 +59912,7 @@ static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){
 #endif    /* #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG */
 
 /*
-** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock 
+** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock
 ** (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) on the table with root-page iTab. Return
 ** SQLITE_OK if the lock may be obtained (by calling
 ** setSharedCacheTableLock()), or SQLITE_LOCKED if not.
@@ -59925,14 +59925,14 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
   assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
   assert( p->db!=0 );
   assert( !(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit)||eLock==WRITE_LOCK||iTab==1 );
-  
+
   /* If requesting a write-lock, then the Btree must have an open write
-  ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there 
+  ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there
   ** must be an open write transaction on the file itself.
   */
   assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || (p==pBt->pWriter && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE) );
   assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE );
-  
+
   /* This routine is a no-op if the shared-cache is not enabled */
   if( !p->sharable ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -59947,7 +59947,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
   }
 
   for(pIter=pBt->pLock; pIter; pIter=pIter->pNext){
-    /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...) 
+    /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...)
     ** statement is a simplification of:
     **
     **   (eLock==WRITE_LOCK || pIter->eLock==WRITE_LOCK)
@@ -59974,7 +59974,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
 /*
 ** Add a lock on the table with root-page iTable to the shared-btree used
-** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or 
+** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or
 ** WRITE_LOCK.
 **
 ** This function assumes the following:
@@ -59986,7 +59986,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
 **       with the requested lock (i.e. querySharedCacheTableLock() has
 **       already been called and returned SQLITE_OK).
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM
 ** is returned if a malloc attempt fails.
 */
 static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
@@ -60000,11 +60000,11 @@ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
 
   /* A connection with the read-uncommitted flag set will never try to
   ** obtain a read-lock using this function. The only read-lock obtained
-  ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_master 
+  ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_master
   ** table, and that lock is obtained in BtreeBeginTrans().  */
   assert( 0==(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
 
-  /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it 
+  /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it
   ** has been determined that no other b-tree holds a conflicting lock.  */
   assert( p->sharable );
   assert( SQLITE_OK==querySharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, eLock) );
@@ -60049,7 +60049,7 @@ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
 ** Release all the table locks (locks obtained via calls to
 ** the setSharedCacheTableLock() procedure) held by Btree object p.
 **
-** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write 
+** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write
 ** transaction. If it does not, then the BTS_PENDING flag
 ** may be incorrectly cleared.
 */
@@ -60081,7 +60081,7 @@ static void clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks(Btree *p){
     pBt->pWriter = 0;
     pBt->btsFlags &= ~(BTS_EXCLUSIVE|BTS_PENDING);
   }else if( pBt->nTransaction==2 ){
-    /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its 
+    /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its
     ** transaction. If there currently exists a writer, and p is not
     ** that writer, then the number of locks held by connections other
     ** than the writer must be about to drop to zero. In this case
@@ -60127,7 +60127,7 @@ static int cursorHoldsMutex(BtCursor *p){
 }
 
 /* Verify that the cursor and the BtShared agree about what is the current
-** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database 
+** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database
 ** connection pointers get out-of-sync, it is possible for routines like
 ** btreeInitPage() to reference an stale connection pointer that references a
 ** a connection that has already closed.  This routine is used inside assert()
@@ -60198,8 +60198,8 @@ static void invalidateIncrblobCursors(
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
 
 /*
-** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called 
-** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf 
+** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called
+** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf
 ** page.
 **
 ** The BtShared.pHasContent bitvec exists to work around an obscure
@@ -60225,7 +60225,7 @@ static void invalidateIncrblobCursors(
 ** may be lost. In the event of a rollback, it may not be possible
 ** to restore the database to its original configuration.
 **
-** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is 
+** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is
 ** moved to become a free-list leaf page, the corresponding bit is
 ** set in the bitvec. Whenever a leaf page is extracted from the free-list,
 ** optimization 2 above is omitted if the corresponding bit is already
@@ -60286,13 +60286,13 @@ static void btreeReleaseAllCursorPages(BtCursor *pCur){
 ** The cursor passed as the only argument must point to a valid entry
 ** when this function is called (i.e. have eState==CURSOR_VALID). This
 ** function saves the current cursor key in variables pCur->nKey and
-** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error 
+** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error
 ** code otherwise.
 **
 ** If the cursor is open on an intkey table, then the integer key
 ** (the rowid) is stored in pCur->nKey and pCur->pKey is left set to
-** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is 
-** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing 
+** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is
+** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing
 ** the key.
 */
 static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -60325,11 +60325,11 @@ static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){
 }
 
 /*
-** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey 
+** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey
 ** and BtCursor.pKey. The cursor's state is set to CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK.
 **
 ** The caller must ensure that the cursor is valid (has eState==CURSOR_VALID)
-** prior to calling this routine.  
+** prior to calling this routine.
 */
 static int saveCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
   int rc;
@@ -60365,7 +60365,7 @@ static int SQLITE_NOINLINE saveCursorsOnList(BtCursor*,Pgno,BtCursor*);
 ** routine is called just before cursor pExcept is used to modify the
 ** table, for example in BtreeDelete() or BtreeInsert().
 **
-** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such 
+** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such
 ** cursors should have their BTCF_Multiple flag set.  The btreeCursor()
 ** routine enforces that rule.  This routine only needs to be called in
 ** the uncommon case when pExpect has the BTCF_Multiple flag set.
@@ -60464,9 +60464,9 @@ moveto_done:
 
 /*
 ** Restore the cursor to the position it was in (or as close to as possible)
-** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the 
+** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the
 ** saved position info stored by saveCursorPosition(), so there can be
-** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each 
+** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each
 ** saveCursorPosition().
 */
 static int btreeRestoreCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -60526,7 +60526,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE BtCursor *sqlite3BtreeFakeValidCursor(void){
 /*
 ** This routine restores a cursor back to its original position after it
 ** has been moved by some outside activity (such as a btree rebalance or
-** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor).  
+** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor).
 **
 ** On success, the *pDifferentRow parameter is false if the cursor is left
 ** pointing at exactly the same row.  *pDifferntRow is the row the cursor
@@ -60592,7 +60592,7 @@ static Pgno ptrmapPageno(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno){
   if( pgno<2 ) return 0;
   nPagesPerMapPage = (pBt->usableSize/5)+1;
   iPtrMap = (pgno-2)/nPagesPerMapPage;
-  ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2; 
+  ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2;
   if( ret==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ){
     ret++;
   }
@@ -60931,7 +60931,7 @@ static u16 cellSizePtr(MemPage *pPage, u8 *pCell){
   }
   pIter++;
   if( pPage->intKey ){
-    /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length 
+    /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length
     ** integer. The following block moves pIter to point at the first byte
     ** past the end of the key value. */
     pEnd = &pIter[9];
@@ -61049,7 +61049,7 @@ static int defragmentPage(MemPage *pPage, int nMaxFrag){
   /* This block handles pages with two or fewer free blocks and nMaxFrag
   ** or fewer fragmented bytes. In this case it is faster to move the
   ** two (or one) blocks of cells using memmove() and add the required
-  ** offsets to each pointer in the cell-pointer array than it is to 
+  ** offsets to each pointer in the cell-pointer array than it is to
   ** reconstruct the entire page.  */
   if( (int)data[hdr+7]<=nMaxFrag ){
     int iFree = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]);
@@ -61058,7 +61058,7 @@ static int defragmentPage(MemPage *pPage, int nMaxFrag){
 
       /* pageFindSlot() has already verified that free blocks are sorted
       ** in order of offset within the page, and that no block extends
-      ** past the end of the page. Provided the two free slots do not 
+      ** past the end of the page. Provided the two free slots do not
       ** overlap, this guarantees that the memmove() calls below will not
       ** overwrite the usableSize byte buffer, even if the database page
       ** is corrupt.  */
@@ -61225,7 +61225,7 @@ static int allocateSpace(MemPage *pPage, int nByte, int *pIdx){
   int top;                             /* First byte of cell content area */
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;                  /* Integer return code */
   int gap;        /* First byte of gap between cell pointers and cell content */
-  
+
   assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) );
   assert( pPage->pBt );
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) );
@@ -61327,7 +61327,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
   assert( iSize>=4 );   /* Minimum cell size is 4 */
   assert( iStart<=pPage->pBt->usableSize-4 );
 
-  /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order.  Find the 
+  /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order.  Find the
   ** spot on the list where iStart should be inserted.
   */
   hdr = pPage->hdrOffset;
@@ -61346,7 +61346,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
       return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(pPage->pgno);
     }
     assert( iFreeBlk>iPtr || iFreeBlk==0 );
-  
+
     /* At this point:
     **    iFreeBlk:   First freeblock after iStart, or zero if none
     **    iPtr:       The address of a pointer to iFreeBlk
@@ -61363,7 +61363,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
       iSize = iEnd - iStart;
       iFreeBlk = get2byte(&data[iFreeBlk]);
     }
-  
+
     /* If iPtr is another freeblock (that is, if iPtr is not the freelist
     ** pointer in the page header) then check to see if iStart should be
     ** coalesced onto the end of iPtr.
@@ -61468,7 +61468,7 @@ static int decodeFlags(MemPage *pPage, int flagByte){
 ** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block.
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK on success.  If we see that the page does
-** not contain a well-formed database page, then return 
+** not contain a well-formed database page, then return
 ** SQLITE_CORRUPT.  Note that a return of SQLITE_OK does not
 ** guarantee that the page is well-formed.  It only shows that
 ** we failed to detect any corruption.
@@ -61528,10 +61528,10 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){
   assert( pPage->nCell>0 || top==usableSize || CORRUPT_DB );
 
   /* A malformed database page might cause us to read past the end
-  ** of page when parsing a cell.  
+  ** of page when parsing a cell.
   **
   ** The following block of code checks early to see if a cell extends
-  ** past the end of a page boundary and causes SQLITE_CORRUPT to be 
+  ** past the end of a page boundary and causes SQLITE_CORRUPT to be
   ** returned if it does.
   */
   iCellFirst = cellOffset + 2*pPage->nCell;
@@ -61555,7 +61555,7 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){
       }
     }
     if( !pPage->leaf ) iCellLast++;
-  }  
+  }
 
   /* Compute the total free space on the page
   ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-23588-34450 The two-byte integer at offset 1 gives the
@@ -61569,7 +61569,7 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){
       /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-55530-52930 In a well-formed b-tree page, there will
       ** always be at least one cell before the first freeblock.
       */
-      return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(pPage->pgno); 
+      return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(pPage->pgno);
     }
     while( 1 ){
       if( pc>iCellLast ){
@@ -61658,7 +61658,7 @@ static MemPage *btreePageFromDbPage(DbPage *pDbPage, Pgno pgno, BtShared *pBt){
     pPage->hdrOffset = pgno==1 ? 100 : 0;
   }
   assert( pPage->aData==sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage) );
-  return pPage; 
+  return pPage;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -61881,11 +61881,11 @@ static int btreeInvokeBusyHandler(void *pArg){
 
 /*
 ** Open a database file.
-** 
+**
 ** zFilename is the name of the database file.  If zFilename is NULL
 ** then an ephemeral database is created.  The ephemeral database might
 ** be exclusively in memory, or it might use a disk-based memory cache.
-** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted 
+** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted
 ** when sqlite3BtreeClose() is called.
 **
 ** If zFilename is ":memory:" then an in-memory database is created
@@ -61918,7 +61918,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
   /* True if opening an ephemeral, temporary database */
   const int isTempDb = zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]==0;
 
-  /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or 
+  /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or
   ** false for a file-based database.
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_MEMORYDB
@@ -62037,7 +62037,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
     assert( sizeof(u32)==4 );
     assert( sizeof(u16)==2 );
     assert( sizeof(Pgno)==4 );
-  
+
     pBt = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*pBt) );
     if( pBt==0 ){
       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
@@ -62056,7 +62056,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
     pBt->db = db;
     sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(pBt->pPager, btreeInvokeBusyHandler, pBt);
     p->pBt = pBt;
-  
+
     pBt->pCursor = 0;
     pBt->pPage1 = 0;
     if( sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pBt->pPager) ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_READ_ONLY;
@@ -62100,7 +62100,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
     if( rc ) goto btree_open_out;
     pBt->usableSize = pBt->pageSize - nReserve;
     assert( (pBt->pageSize & 7)==0 );  /* 8-byte alignment of pageSize */
-   
+
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DISKIO)
     /* Add the new BtShared object to the linked list sharable BtShareds.
     */
@@ -62229,7 +62229,7 @@ static int removeFromSharingList(BtShared *pBt){
 }
 
 /*
-** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of 
+** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of
 ** MX_CELL_SIZE(pBt) bytes with a 4-byte prefix for a left-child
 ** pointer.
 */
@@ -62244,7 +62244,7 @@ static void allocateTempSpace(BtShared *pBt){
     ** can mean that fillInCell() only initializes the first 2 or 3
     ** bytes of pTmpSpace, but that the first 4 bytes are copied from
     ** it into a database page. This is not actually a problem, but it
-    ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of unitialized 
+    ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of unitialized
     ** data is passed to system call write(). So to avoid this error,
     ** zero the first 4 bytes of temp space here.
     **
@@ -62297,7 +62297,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeClose(Btree *p){
   sqlite3BtreeLeave(p);
 
   /* If there are still other outstanding references to the shared-btree
-  ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans 
+  ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans
   ** up the shared-btree.
   */
   assert( p->wantToLock==0 && p->locked==0 );
@@ -62403,7 +62403,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetPagerFlags(
 
 /*
 ** Change the default pages size and the number of reserved bytes per page.
-** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY 
+** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY
 ** without changing anything.
 **
 ** The page size must be a power of 2 between 512 and 65536.  If the page
@@ -62464,7 +62464,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetPageSize(Btree *p){
 ** held.
 **
 ** This is useful in one special case in the backup API code where it is
-** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the 
+** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the
 ** database handle that owns *p is not. In this case if sqlite3BtreeEnter()
 ** were to be called, it might collide with some other operation on the
 ** database handle that owns *p, causing undefined behavior.
@@ -62546,7 +62546,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSecureDelete(Btree *p, int newFlag){
 /*
 ** Change the 'auto-vacuum' property of the database. If the 'autoVacuum'
 ** parameter is non-zero, then auto-vacuum mode is enabled. If zero, it
-** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is 
+** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is
 ** determined by the SQLITE_DEFAULT_AUTOVACUUM macro.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){
@@ -62570,7 +62570,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is 
+** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is
 ** enabled 1 is returned. Otherwise 0.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuum(Btree *p){
@@ -62602,9 +62602,9 @@ static void setDefaultSyncFlag(BtShared *pBt, u8 safety_level){
   Db *pDb;
   if( (db=pBt->db)!=0 && (pDb=db->aDb)!=0 ){
     while( pDb->pBt==0 || pDb->pBt->pBt!=pBt ){ pDb++; }
-    if( pDb->bSyncSet==0 
-     && pDb->safety_level!=safety_level 
-     && pDb!=&db->aDb[1] 
+    if( pDb->bSyncSet==0
+     && pDb->safety_level!=safety_level
+     && pDb!=&db->aDb[1]
     ){
       pDb->safety_level = safety_level;
       sqlite3PagerSetFlags(pBt->pPager,
@@ -62623,7 +62623,7 @@ static void setDefaultSyncFlag(BtShared *pBt, u8 safety_level){
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success.  If the file is not a
 ** well-formed database file, then SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
 ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned if the database is locked.  SQLITE_NOMEM
-** is returned if we run out of memory. 
+** is returned if we run out of memory.
 */
 static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
   int rc;              /* Result code from subfunctions */
@@ -62640,7 +62640,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
 
   /* Do some checking to help insure the file we opened really is
-  ** a valid database file. 
+  ** a valid database file.
   */
   nPage = nPageHeader = get4byte(28+(u8*)pPage1->aData);
   sqlite3PagerPagecount(pBt->pPager, &nPageFile);
@@ -62675,7 +62675,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
     }
 
     /* If the write version is set to 2, this database should be accessed
-    ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then 
+    ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then
     ** return SQLITE_OK and return without populating BtShared.pPage1.
     ** The caller detects this and calls this function again. This is
     ** required as the version of page 1 currently in the page1 buffer
@@ -62716,15 +62716,15 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
     /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-25008-21688 The size of a page is a power of two
     ** between 512 and 65536 inclusive. */
     if( ((pageSize-1)&pageSize)!=0
-     || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE 
-     || pageSize<=256 
+     || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+     || pageSize<=256
     ){
       goto page1_init_failed;
     }
     assert( (pageSize & 7)==0 );
     /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-59310-51205 The "reserved space" size in the 1-byte
     ** integer at offset 20 is the number of bytes of space at the end of
-    ** each page to reserve for extensions. 
+    ** each page to reserve for extensions.
     **
     ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-37497-42412 The size of the reserved region is
     ** determined by the one-byte unsigned integer found at an offset of 20
@@ -62814,7 +62814,7 @@ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){
   int r = 0;
   for(pCur=pBt->pCursor; pCur; pCur=pCur->pNext){
     if( (wrOnly==0 || (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag)!=0)
-     && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++; 
+     && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++;
   }
   return r;
 }
@@ -62823,7 +62823,7 @@ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){
 /*
 ** If there are no outstanding cursors and we are not in the middle
 ** of a transaction but there is a read lock on the database, then
-** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which 
+** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which
 ** has the effect of releasing the read lock.
 **
 ** If there is a transaction in progress, this routine is a no-op.
@@ -62907,8 +62907,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){
 ** upgraded to exclusive by calling this routine a second time - the
 ** exclusivity flag only works for a new transaction.
 **
-** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any 
-** changes to the database.  None of the following routines 
+** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any
+** changes to the database.  None of the following routines
 ** will work unless a transaction is started first:
 **
 **      sqlite3BtreeCreateTable()
@@ -62922,7 +62922,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){
 ** If an initial attempt to acquire the lock fails because of lock contention
 ** and the database was previously unlocked, then invoke the busy handler
 ** if there is one.  But if there was previously a read-lock, do not
-** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY.  SQLITE_BUSY is 
+** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY.  SQLITE_BUSY is
 ** returned when there is already a read-lock in order to avoid a deadlock.
 **
 ** Suppose there are two processes A and B.  A has a read lock and B has
@@ -62958,7 +62958,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
   {
     sqlite3 *pBlock = 0;
-    /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction 
+    /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction
     ** on this shared-btree structure and a second write transaction is
     ** requested, return SQLITE_LOCKED.
     */
@@ -62983,8 +62983,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on 
-  ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock 
+  /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on
+  ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock
   ** on page 1, the transaction cannot be opened. */
   rc = querySharedCacheTableLock(p, MASTER_ROOT, READ_LOCK);
   if( SQLITE_OK!=rc ) goto trans_begun;
@@ -62995,7 +62995,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
     /* Call lockBtree() until either pBt->pPage1 is populated or
     ** lockBtree() returns something other than SQLITE_OK. lockBtree()
     ** may return SQLITE_OK but leave pBt->pPage1 set to 0 if after
-    ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database 
+    ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database
     ** file is not pBt->pageSize. In this case lockBtree() will update
     ** pBt->pageSize to the page-size of the file on disk.
     */
@@ -63011,7 +63011,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
         }
       }
     }
-  
+
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
       unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
     }
@@ -63045,7 +63045,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
 
       /* If the db-size header field is incorrect (as it may be if an old
       ** client has been writing the database file), update it now. Doing
-      ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely 
+      ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely
       ** re-read the database size from page 1 if a savepoint or transaction
       ** rollback occurs within the transaction.
       */
@@ -63116,7 +63116,7 @@ static int setChildPtrmaps(MemPage *pPage){
 ** that it points to iTo. Parameter eType describes the type of pointer to
 ** be modified, as  follows:
 **
-** PTRMAP_BTREE:     pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child 
+** PTRMAP_BTREE:     pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child
 **                   page of pPage.
 **
 ** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at an overflow
@@ -63164,9 +63164,9 @@ static int modifyPagePointer(MemPage *pPage, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo, u8 eType){
         }
       }
     }
-  
+
     if( i==nCell ){
-      if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE || 
+      if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE ||
           get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8])!=iFrom ){
         return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(pPage->pgno);
       }
@@ -63178,11 +63178,11 @@ static int modifyPagePointer(MemPage *pPage, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo, u8 eType){
 
 
 /*
-** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the 
+** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the
 ** database. The pDbPage reference remains valid.
 **
 ** The isCommit flag indicates that there is no need to remember that
-** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno 
+** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno
 ** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to that
 ** page.
 */
@@ -63199,13 +63199,13 @@ static int relocatePage(
   Pager *pPager = pBt->pPager;
   int rc;
 
-  assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 || 
+  assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ||
       eType==PTRMAP_BTREE || eType==PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE );
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
   assert( pDbPage->pBt==pBt );
 
   /* Move page iDbPage from its current location to page number iFreePage */
-  TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %d to free page %d (ptr page %d type %d)\n", 
+  TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %d to free page %d (ptr page %d type %d)\n",
       iDbPage, iFreePage, iPtrPage, eType));
   rc = sqlite3PagerMovepage(pPager, pDbPage->pDbPage, iFreePage, isCommit);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -63264,19 +63264,19 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(BtShared *, MemPage **, Pgno *, Pgno, u8);
 
 /*
 ** Perform a single step of an incremental-vacuum. If successful, return
-** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in 
-** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error 
+** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in
+** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error
 ** occurs, return some other error code.
 **
-** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so 
+** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so
 ** that the last page of the file currently in use is no longer in use.
 **
 ** Parameter nFin is the number of pages that this database would contain
 ** were this function called until it returns SQLITE_DONE.
 **
-** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the 
-** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE 
-** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit 
+** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the
+** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE
+** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit
 ** operation, or false for an incremental vacuum.
 */
 static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
@@ -63307,7 +63307,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
       if( bCommit==0 ){
         /* Remove the page from the files free-list. This is not required
         ** if bCommit is non-zero. In that case, the free-list will be
-        ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't 
+        ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't
         ** matter if it still contains some garbage entries.
         */
         Pgno iFreePg;
@@ -63351,7 +63351,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
         releasePage(pFreePg);
       }while( bCommit && iFreePg>nFin );
       assert( iFreePg<iLastPg );
-      
+
       rc = relocatePage(pBt, pLastPg, eType, iPtrPage, iFreePg, bCommit);
       releasePage(pLastPg);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -63372,7 +63372,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
 
 /*
 ** The database opened by the first argument is an auto-vacuum database
-** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected 
+** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected
 ** size of the database in pages following an auto-vacuum operation.
 */
 static Pgno finalDbSize(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nOrig, Pgno nFree){
@@ -63399,7 +63399,7 @@ static Pgno finalDbSize(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nOrig, Pgno nFree){
 **
 ** If the incremental vacuum is finished after this function has run,
 ** SQLITE_DONE is returned. If it is not finished, but no error occurred,
-** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code. 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(Btree *p){
   int rc;
@@ -63439,7 +63439,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(Btree *p){
 ** is committed for an auto-vacuum database.
 **
 ** If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *pnTrunc is set to the number of pages
-** the database file should be truncated to during the commit process. 
+** the database file should be truncated to during the commit process.
 ** i.e. the database has been reorganized so that only the first *pnTrunc
 ** pages are in use.
 */
@@ -63513,7 +63513,7 @@ static int autoVacuumCommit(BtShared *pBt){
 **
 ** Otherwise, sync the database file for the btree pBt. zMaster points to
 ** the name of a master journal file that should be written into the
-** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no master journal file 
+** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no master journal file
 ** (single database transaction).
 **
 ** When this is called, the master journal should already have been
@@ -63564,8 +63564,8 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){
     downgradeAllSharedCacheTableLocks(p);
     p->inTrans = TRANS_READ;
   }else{
-    /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the 
-    ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count 
+    /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the
+    ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count
     ** reaches 0, set the shared state to TRANS_NONE. The unlockBtreeIfUnused()
     ** call below will unlock the pager.  */
     if( p->inTrans!=TRANS_NONE ){
@@ -63576,7 +63576,7 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){
       }
     }
 
-    /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the 
+    /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the
     ** pager if this call closed the only read or write transaction.  */
     p->inTrans = TRANS_NONE;
     unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
@@ -63597,12 +63597,12 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){
 ** the rollback journal (which causes the transaction to commit) and
 ** drop locks.
 **
-** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to 
+** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to
 ** finalize the underlying journal file, this function returns an error and
 ** the upper layer will attempt a rollback. However, if the second argument
-** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file 
-** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed 
-** (by deleting a master journal file) and the caller will ignore this 
+** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file
+** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed
+** (by deleting a master journal file) and the caller will ignore this
 ** functions return code. So, even if an error occurs in the pager layer,
 ** reset the b-tree objects internal state to indicate that the write
 ** transaction has been closed. This is quite safe, as the pager will have
@@ -63617,7 +63617,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(Btree *p, int bCleanup){
   sqlite3BtreeEnter(p);
   btreeIntegrity(p);
 
-  /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees 
+  /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees
   ** transaction and set the shared state to TRANS_READ.
   */
   if( p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ){
@@ -63666,15 +63666,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCommit(Btree *p){
 **
 ** This routine gets called when a rollback occurs. If the writeOnly
 ** flag is true, then only write-cursors need be tripped - read-only
-** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue 
-** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are 
+** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue
+** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are
 ** tripped. In general, writeOnly is false if the transaction being
 ** rolled back modified the database schema. In this case b-tree root
 ** pages may be moved or deleted from the database altogether, making
 ** it unsafe for read cursors to continue.
 **
-** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while 
-** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors, 
+** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while
+** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors,
 ** including all read-cursors are tripped.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or if an error occurs while
@@ -63772,8 +63772,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeRollback(Btree *p, int tripCode, int writeOnly){
 
 /*
 ** Start a statement subtransaction. The subtransaction can be rolled
-** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction 
-** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically 
+** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction
+** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically
 ** if the main transaction commits or rolls back.
 **
 ** Statement subtransactions are used around individual SQL statements
@@ -63810,11 +63810,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(Btree *p, int iStatement){
 /*
 ** The second argument to this function, op, is always SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK
 ** or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. This function either releases or rolls back the
-** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value 
+** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value
 ** of op.
 **
 ** Normally, iSavepoint is greater than or equal to zero. However, if op is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the 
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the
 ** contents of the entire transaction are rolled back. This is different
 ** from a normal transaction rollback, as no locks are released and the
 ** transaction remains open.
@@ -63878,10 +63878,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(Btree *p, int op, int iSavepoint){
 ** is set.  If FORDELETE is set, that is a hint to the implementation that
 ** this cursor will only be used to seek to and delete entries of an index
 ** as part of a larger DELETE statement.  The FORDELETE hint is not used by
-** this implementation.  But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine 
+** this implementation.  But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine
 ** in which index entries are automatically deleted when corresponding table
 ** rows are deleted, the FORDELETE flag is a hint that all SEEK and DELETE
-** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can 
+** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can
 ** return a null row (2-bytes: 0x01 0x00).
 **
 ** No checking is done to make sure that page iTable really is the
@@ -63902,14 +63902,14 @@ static int btreeCursor(
   BtCursor *pX;                          /* Looping over other all cursors */
 
   assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) );
-  assert( wrFlag==0 
-       || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR 
-       || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE) 
+  assert( wrFlag==0
+       || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR
+       || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE)
   );
 
-  /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable 
-  ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks, 
-  ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with 
+  /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable
+  ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks,
+  ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with
   ** this lock.  */
   assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, pKeyInfo!=0, (wrFlag?2:1)) );
   assert( wrFlag==0 || !hasReadConflicts(p, iTable) );
@@ -64098,15 +64098,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(BtCursor *pCur){
 
 /*
 ** Given the page number of an overflow page in the database (parameter
-** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the 
+** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the
 ** linked list of overflow pages. If possible, it uses the auto-vacuum
-** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so. 
+** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so.
 **
 ** If an error occurs an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise:
 **
-** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is 
-** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked 
-** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero. 
+** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is
+** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked
+** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero.
 **
 ** If ppPage is not NULL, and a reference to the MemPage object corresponding
 ** to page number pOvfl was obtained, then *ppPage is set to point to that
@@ -64130,9 +64130,9 @@ static int getOverflowPage(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
   /* Try to find the next page in the overflow list using the
-  ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in 
-  ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns 
-  ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page 
+  ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in
+  ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns
+  ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page
   ** number ovfl to determine the next page number.
   */
   if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
@@ -64220,8 +64220,8 @@ static int copyPayload(
 **
 ** If the current cursor entry uses one or more overflow pages
 ** this function may allocate space for and lazily populate
-** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow). 
-** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset 
+** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow).
+** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset
 ** more efficient.
 **
 ** Once an overflow page-list cache has been allocated, it must be
@@ -64237,7 +64237,7 @@ static int accessPayload(
   BtCursor *pCur,      /* Cursor pointing to entry to read from */
   u32 offset,          /* Begin reading this far into payload */
   u32 amt,             /* Read this many bytes */
-  unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */ 
+  unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */
   int eOp              /* zero to read. non-zero to write. */
 ){
   unsigned char *aPayload;
@@ -64362,12 +64362,12 @@ static int accessPayload(
 #ifdef SQLITE_DIRECT_OVERFLOW_READ
         /* If all the following are true:
         **
-        **   1) this is a read operation, and 
+        **   1) this is a read operation, and
         **   2) data is required from the start of this overflow page, and
         **   3) there is no open write-transaction, and
         **   4) the database is file-backed, and
         **   5) the page is not in the WAL file
-        **   6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer 
+        **   6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer
         **
         ** then data can be read directly from the database file into the
         ** output buffer, bypassing the page-cache altogether. This speeds
@@ -64475,7 +64475,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePayloadChecked(BtCursor *pCur, u32 offset, u32 am
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
 
 /*
-** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the 
+** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the
 ** pCur cursor is pointing to.  The pointer is to the beginning of
 ** the key if index btrees (pPage->intKey==0) and is the data for
 ** table btrees (pPage->intKey==1). The number of bytes of available
@@ -64567,7 +64567,7 @@ static int moveToChild(BtCursor *pCur, u32 newPgno){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
 /*
-** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function 
+** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function
 ** asserts that page number iChild is the left-child if the iIdx'th
 ** cell in page pParent. Or, if iIdx is equal to the total number of
 ** cells in pParent, that page number iChild is the right-child of
@@ -64584,7 +64584,7 @@ static void assertParentIndex(MemPage *pParent, int iIdx, Pgno iChild){
   }
 }
 #else
-#  define assertParentIndex(x,y,z) 
+#  define assertParentIndex(x,y,z)
 #endif
 
 /*
@@ -64602,8 +64602,8 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){
   assert( pCur->iPage>0 );
   assert( pCur->pPage );
   assertParentIndex(
-    pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1], 
-    pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1], 
+    pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1],
+    pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1],
     pCur->pPage->pgno
   );
   testcase( pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1] > pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1]->nCell );
@@ -64620,19 +64620,19 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){
 **
 ** If the table has a virtual root page, then the cursor is moved to point
 ** to the virtual root page instead of the actual root page. A table has a
-** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a 
+** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a
 ** single child page. This can only happen with the table rooted at page 1.
 **
-** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to 
+** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to
 ** CURSOR_INVALID and this routine returns SQLITE_EMPTY. Otherwise,
 ** the cursor is set to point to the first cell located on the root
 ** (or virtual root) page and the cursor state is set to CURSOR_VALID.
 **
 ** If this function returns successfully, it may be assumed that the
-** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected 
+** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected
 ** kind of b-tree page (i.e. if when opening the cursor the caller did not
 ** specify a KeyInfo structure the flags byte is set to 0x05 or 0x0D,
-** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo 
+** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo
 ** structure the flags byte is set to 0x02 or 0x0A, indicating an index
 ** b-tree).
 */
@@ -64683,19 +64683,19 @@ static int moveToRoot(BtCursor *pCur){
   /* If pCur->pKeyInfo is not NULL, then the caller that opened this cursor
   ** expected to open it on an index b-tree. Otherwise, if pKeyInfo is
   ** NULL, the caller expects a table b-tree. If this is not the case,
-  ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. 
+  ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error.
   **
   ** Earlier versions of SQLite assumed that this test could not fail
   ** if the root page was already loaded when this function was called (i.e.
-  ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted 
-  ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table 
+  ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted
+  ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table
   ** (or the freelist).  */
   assert( pRoot->intKey==1 || pRoot->intKey==0 );
   if( pRoot->isInit==0 || (pCur->pKeyInfo==0)!=pRoot->intKey ){
     return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(pCur->pPage->pgno);
   }
 
-skip_init:  
+skip_init:
   pCur->ix = 0;
   pCur->info.nSize = 0;
   pCur->curFlags &= ~(BTCF_AtLast|BTCF_ValidNKey|BTCF_ValidOvfl);
@@ -64795,14 +64795,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeFirst(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
   int rc;
- 
+
   assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) );
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCur->pBtree->db->mutex) );
 
   /* If the cursor already points to the last entry, this is a no-op. */
   if( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState && (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-    /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point 
+    /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point
     ** to the last entry in the b-tree. */
     int ii;
     for(ii=0; ii<pCur->iPage; ii++){
@@ -64832,10 +64832,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* Move the cursor so that it points to an entry near the key 
+/* Move the cursor so that it points to an entry near the key
 ** specified by pIdxKey or intKey.   Return a success code.
 **
-** For INTKEY tables, the intKey parameter is used.  pIdxKey 
+** For INTKEY tables, the intKey parameter is used.  pIdxKey
 ** must be NULL.  For index tables, pIdxKey is used and intKey
 ** is ignored.
 **
@@ -64845,7 +64845,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
 ** before or after the key.
 **
 ** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of
-** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is 
+** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
 ** pointing.  The meaning of the integer written into
 ** *pRes is as follows:
 **
@@ -64860,7 +64860,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
 **                  is larger than intKey/pIdxKey.
 **
 ** For index tables, the pIdxKey->eqSeen field is set to 1 if there
-** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey.  
+** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
   BtCursor *pCur,          /* The cursor to be moved */
@@ -64916,8 +64916,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
   if( pIdxKey ){
     xRecordCompare = sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(pIdxKey);
     pIdxKey->errCode = 0;
-    assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1 
-         || pIdxKey->default_rc==0 
+    assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1
+         || pIdxKey->default_rc==0
          || pIdxKey->default_rc==-1
     );
   }else{
@@ -65001,9 +65001,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
         /* The maximum supported page-size is 65536 bytes. This means that
         ** the maximum number of record bytes stored on an index B-Tree
         ** page is less than 16384 bytes and may be stored as a 2-byte
-        ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing 
-        ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is 
-        ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first 
+        ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing
+        ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is
+        ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first
         ** 2 bytes of the cell.
         */
         nCell = pCell[0];
@@ -65013,10 +65013,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
           ** b-tree page.  */
           testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd );
           c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey);
-        }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80) 
+        }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
           && (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal
         ){
-          /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record 
+          /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
           ** fits entirely on the main b-tree page.  */
           testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd );
           c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey);
@@ -65024,10 +65024,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
           /* The record flows over onto one or more overflow pages. In
           ** this case the whole cell needs to be parsed, a buffer allocated
           ** and accessPayload() used to retrieve the record into the
-          ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called. 
+          ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called.
           **
           ** If the record is corrupt, the xRecordCompare routine may read
-          ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18 
+          ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18
           ** bytes of padding is allocated at the end of the buffer in
           ** case this happens.  */
           void *pCellKey;
@@ -65057,7 +65057,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
           c = xRecordCompare(nCell, pCellKey, pIdxKey);
           sqlite3_free(pCellKey);
         }
-        assert( 
+        assert(
             (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_CORRUPT || c==0)
          && (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_NOMEM || pCur->pBtree->db->mallocFailed)
         );
@@ -65121,7 +65121,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeEof(BtCursor *pCur){
 
 /*
 ** Return an estimate for the number of rows in the table that pCur is
-** pointing to.  Return a negative number if no estimate is currently 
+** pointing to.  Return a negative number if no estimate is currently
 ** available.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE i64 sqlite3BtreeRowCountEst(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -65145,7 +65145,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE i64 sqlite3BtreeRowCountEst(BtCursor *pCur){
 }
 
 /*
-** Advance the cursor to the next entry in the database. 
+** Advance the cursor to the next entry in the database.
 ** Return value:
 **
 **    SQLITE_OK        success
@@ -65195,7 +65195,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeNext(BtCursor *pCur){
   idx = ++pCur->ix;
   assert( pPage->isInit );
 
-  /* If the database file is corrupt, it is possible for the value of idx 
+  /* If the database file is corrupt, it is possible for the value of idx
   ** to be invalid here. This can only occur if a second cursor modifies
   ** the page while cursor pCur is holding a reference to it. Which can
   ** only happen if the database is corrupt in such a way as to link the
@@ -65352,7 +65352,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePrevious(BtCursor *pCur, int flags){
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success.  Any other return value indicates
 ** an error.  *ppPage is set to NULL in the event of an error.
 **
-** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to 
+** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to
 ** locate a page close to the page number "nearby".  This can be used in an
 ** attempt to keep related pages close to each other in the database file,
 ** which in turn can make database access faster.
@@ -65394,7 +65394,7 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
     Pgno iTrunk;
     u8 searchList = 0; /* If the free-list must be searched for 'nearby' */
     u32 nSearch = 0;   /* Count of the number of search attempts */
-    
+
     /* If eMode==BTALLOC_EXACT and a query of the pointer-map
     ** shows that the page 'nearby' is somewhere on the free-list, then
     ** the entire-list will be searched for that page.
@@ -65457,8 +65457,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
       ** is the number of leaf page pointers to follow. */
       k = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[4]);
       if( k==0 && !searchList ){
-        /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched. 
-        ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly 
+        /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched.
+        ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly
         ** allocated page */
         assert( pPrevTrunk==0 );
         rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pTrunk->pDbPage);
@@ -65475,8 +65475,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
         rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk);
         goto end_allocate_page;
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
-      }else if( searchList 
-            && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) 
+      }else if( searchList
+            && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE))
       ){
         /* The list is being searched and this trunk page is the page
         ** to allocate, regardless of whether it has leaves.
@@ -65499,13 +65499,13 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
             memcpy(&pPrevTrunk->aData[0], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4);
           }
         }else{
-          /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains 
+          /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains
           ** pointers to free-list leaves. The first leaf becomes a trunk
           ** page in this case.
           */
           MemPage *pNewTrunk;
           Pgno iNewTrunk = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[8]);
-          if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){ 
+          if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){
             rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk);
             goto end_allocate_page;
           }
@@ -65575,8 +65575,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
           goto end_allocate_page;
         }
         testcase( iPage==mxPage );
-        if( !searchList 
-         || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) 
+        if( !searchList
+         || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE))
         ){
           int noContent;
           *pPgno = iPage;
@@ -65617,7 +65617,7 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
     ** not set the no-content flag. This causes the pager to load and journal
     ** the current page content before overwriting it.
     **
-    ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal 
+    ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal
     ** content for any page that really does lie past the end of the database
     ** file on disk. So the effects of disabling the no-content optimization
     ** here are confined to those pages that lie between the end of the
@@ -65674,12 +65674,12 @@ end_allocate_page:
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list. 
+** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list.
 ** It is assumed that the page is not already a part of the free-list.
 **
 ** The value passed as the second argument to this function is optional.
-** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object 
-** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value. 
+** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object
+** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value.
 ** Otherwise, it may pass NULL.
 **
 ** If a pointer to a MemPage object is passed as the second argument,
@@ -65687,7 +65687,7 @@ end_allocate_page:
 */
 static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){
   MemPage *pTrunk = 0;                /* Free-list trunk page */
-  Pgno iTrunk = 0;                    /* Page number of free-list trunk page */ 
+  Pgno iTrunk = 0;                    /* Page number of free-list trunk page */
   MemPage *pPage1 = pBt->pPage1;      /* Local reference to page 1 */
   MemPage *pPage;                     /* Page being freed. May be NULL. */
   int rc;                             /* Return Code */
@@ -65789,7 +65789,7 @@ static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){
 
   /* If control flows to this point, then it was not possible to add the
   ** the page being freed as a leaf page of the first trunk in the free-list.
-  ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the 
+  ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the
   ** first trunk in the free-list is full. Either way, the page being freed
   ** will become the new first trunk page in the free-list.
   */
@@ -65849,15 +65849,15 @@ static int clearCell(
   assert( pBt->usableSize > 4 );
   ovflPageSize = pBt->usableSize - 4;
   nOvfl = (pInfo->nPayload - pInfo->nLocal + ovflPageSize - 1)/ovflPageSize;
-  assert( nOvfl>0 || 
+  assert( nOvfl>0 ||
     (CORRUPT_DB && (pInfo->nPayload + ovflPageSize)<ovflPageSize)
   );
   while( nOvfl-- ){
     Pgno iNext = 0;
     MemPage *pOvfl = 0;
     if( ovflPgno<2 || ovflPgno>btreePagecount(pBt) ){
-      /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an 
-      ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the 
+      /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an
+      ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the
       ** file the database must be corrupt. */
       return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
     }
@@ -65869,11 +65869,11 @@ static int clearCell(
     if( ( pOvfl || ((pOvfl = btreePageLookup(pBt, ovflPgno))!=0) )
      && sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pOvfl->pDbPage)!=1
     ){
-      /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference 
+      /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference
       ** to an overflow page belonging to a cell that is being deleted/updated.
-      ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it 
-      ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt. 
-      ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as 
+      ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it
+      ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt.
+      ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as
       ** freePage2() may zero the page contents if secure-delete mode is
       ** enabled. If this 'overflow' page happens to be a page that the
       ** caller is iterating through or using in some other way, this
@@ -65944,7 +65944,7 @@ static int fillInCell(
     pSrc = pX->pKey;
     nHeader += putVarint32(&pCell[nHeader], nPayload);
   }
-  
+
   /* Fill in the payload */
   pPayload = &pCell[nHeader];
   if( nPayload<=pPage->maxLocal ){
@@ -66035,8 +66035,8 @@ static int fillInCell(
       if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
         do{
           pgnoOvfl++;
-        } while( 
-          PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) 
+        } while(
+          PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt)
         );
       }
 #endif
@@ -66044,9 +66044,9 @@ static int fillInCell(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
       /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, and the second or subsequent
       ** overflow page is being allocated, add an entry to the pointer-map
-      ** for that page now. 
+      ** for that page now.
       **
-      ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry 
+      ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry
       ** to the pointer-map. If we write nothing to this pointer-map slot,
       ** then the optimistic overflow chain processing in clearCell()
       ** may misinterpret the uninitialized values and delete the
@@ -66144,8 +66144,8 @@ static void dropCell(MemPage *pPage, int idx, int sz, int *pRC){
 ** will not fit, then make a copy of the cell content into pTemp if
 ** pTemp is not null.  Regardless of pTemp, allocate a new entry
 ** in pPage->apOvfl[] and make it point to the cell content (either
-** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index. 
-** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that 
+** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index.
+** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that
 ** pPage->nOverflow is incremented.
 **
 ** *pRC must be SQLITE_OK when this routine is called.
@@ -66286,16 +66286,16 @@ static u16 cachedCellSize(CellArray *p, int N){
 }
 
 /*
-** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The 
+** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The
 ** szCell[] array contains the size in bytes of each cell. This function
 ** replaces the current contents of page pPg with the contents of the cell
 ** array.
 **
 ** Some of the cells in apCell[] may currently be stored in pPg. This
-** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any 
+** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any
 ** such cells before overwriting the page data.
 **
-** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the 
+** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the
 ** responsibility of the caller to set it correctly.
 */
 static int rebuildPage(
@@ -66344,8 +66344,8 @@ static int rebuildPage(
 
 /*
 ** Array apCell[] contains nCell pointers to b-tree cells. Array szCell
-** contains the size in bytes of each such cell. This function attempts to 
-** add the cells stored in the array to page pPg. If it cannot (because 
+** contains the size in bytes of each such cell. This function attempts to
+** add the cells stored in the array to page pPg. If it cannot (because
 ** the page needs to be defragmented before the cells will fit), non-zero
 ** is returned. Otherwise, if the cells are added successfully, zero is
 ** returned.
@@ -66356,7 +66356,7 @@ static int rebuildPage(
 ** cell in the array. It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure
 ** that it is safe to overwrite this part of the cell-pointer array.
 **
-** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the 
+** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the
 ** content area on page pPg. If the size of the content area is extended,
 ** *ppData is updated to point to the new start of the content area
 ** before returning.
@@ -66405,9 +66405,9 @@ static int pageInsertArray(
 }
 
 /*
-** Array apCell[] contains nCell pointers to b-tree cells. Array szCell 
+** Array apCell[] contains nCell pointers to b-tree cells. Array szCell
 ** contains the size in bytes of each such cell. This function adds the
-** space associated with each cell in the array that is currently stored 
+** space associated with each cell in the array that is currently stored
 ** within the body of pPg to the pPg free-list. The cell-pointers and other
 ** fields of the page are not updated.
 **
@@ -66617,7 +66617,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
   /* This error condition is now caught prior to reaching this function */
   if( NEVER(pPage->nCell==0) ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
 
-  /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of 
+  /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of
   ** pPage. Make the parent page writable, so that the new divider cell
   ** may be inserted. If both these operations are successful, proceed.
   */
@@ -66638,7 +66638,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
     pNew->nFree = pBt->usableSize - pNew->cellOffset - 2 - szCell;
 
     /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer map
-    ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the 
+    ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the
     ** cell on the page to an overflow page. If either of these
     ** operations fails, the return code is set, but the contents
     ** of the parent page are still manipulated by thh code below.
@@ -66652,14 +66652,14 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
         ptrmapPutOvflPtr(pNew, pCell, &rc);
       }
     }
-  
+
     /* Create a divider cell to insert into pParent. The divider cell
     ** consists of a 4-byte page number (the page number of pPage) and
     ** a variable length key value (which must be the same value as the
     ** largest key on pPage).
     **
-    ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most 
-    ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the 
+    ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most
+    ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the
     ** record-length (a variable length integer at most 32-bits in size)
     ** and the key value (a variable length integer, may have any value).
     ** The first of the while(...) loops below skips over the record-length
@@ -66680,7 +66680,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
 
     /* Set the right-child pointer of pParent to point to the new page. */
     put4byte(&pParent->aData[pParent->hdrOffset+8], pgnoNew);
-  
+
     /* Release the reference to the new page. */
     releasePage(pNew);
   }
@@ -66692,7 +66692,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
 #if 0
 /*
 ** This function does not contribute anything to the operation of SQLite.
-** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible 
+** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible
 ** for setting pointer-map entries.
 */
 static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
@@ -66707,7 +66707,7 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
     for(j=0; j<pPage->nCell; j++){
       CellInfo info;
       u8 *z;
-     
+
       z = findCell(pPage, j);
       pPage->xParseCell(pPage, z, &info);
       if( info.nLocal<info.nPayload ){
@@ -66732,7 +66732,7 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored 
+** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored
 ** on page pFrom to page pTo. If page pFrom was not a leaf page, then
 ** the pointer-map entries for each child page are updated so that the
 ** parent page stored in the pointer map is page pTo. If pFrom contained
@@ -66740,11 +66740,11 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
 ** map entries are also updated so that the parent page is page pTo.
 **
 ** If pFrom is currently carrying any overflow cells (entries in the
-** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo. 
+** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo.
 **
 ** Before returning, page pTo is reinitialized using btreeInitPage().
 **
-** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by 
+** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by
 ** the balance_shallower() and balance_deeper() procedures, neither of
 ** which are called often under normal circumstances.
 */
@@ -66757,20 +66757,20 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
     int const iToHdr = ((pTo->pgno==1) ? 100 : 0);
     int rc;
     int iData;
-  
-  
+
+
     assert( pFrom->isInit );
     assert( pFrom->nFree>=iToHdr );
     assert( get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]) <= (int)pBt->usableSize );
-  
+
     /* Copy the b-tree node content from page pFrom to page pTo. */
     iData = get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]);
     memcpy(&aTo[iData], &aFrom[iData], pBt->usableSize-iData);
     memcpy(&aTo[iToHdr], &aFrom[iFromHdr], pFrom->cellOffset + 2*pFrom->nCell);
-  
+
     /* Reinitialize page pTo so that the contents of the MemPage structure
     ** match the new data. The initialization of pTo can actually fail under
-    ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized 
+    ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized
     ** page pFrom.
     */
     pTo->isInit = 0;
@@ -66779,7 +66779,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
       *pRC = rc;
       return;
     }
-  
+
     /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer-map entries
     ** for any b-tree or overflow pages that pTo now contains the pointers to.
     */
@@ -66794,13 +66794,13 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
 ** (hereafter "the page") and up to 2 siblings so that all pages have about the
 ** same amount of free space. Usually a single sibling on either side of the
 ** page are used in the balancing, though both siblings might come from one
-** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page 
+** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page
 ** has fewer than 2 siblings (something which can only happen if the page
 ** is a root page or a child of a root page) then all available siblings
 ** participate in the balancing.
 **
-** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by 
-** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full. 
+** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by
+** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full.
 **
 ** Note that when this routine is called, some of the cells on the page
 ** might not actually be stored in MemPage.aData[]. This can happen
@@ -66811,7 +66811,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
 ** inserted into or removed from the parent page (pParent). Doing so
 ** may cause the parent page to become overfull or underfull. If this
 ** happens, it is the responsibility of the caller to invoke the correct
-** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine). 
+** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine).
 **
 ** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database
 ** in a corrupted state. So if this routine fails, the database should
@@ -66826,7 +66826,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
 ** of the page-size, the aOvflSpace[] buffer is guaranteed to be large
 ** enough for all overflow cells.
 **
-** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns 
+** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns
 ** SQLITE_NOMEM.
 */
 static int balance_nonroot(
@@ -66877,7 +66877,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
 #endif
 
   /* At this point pParent may have at most one overflow cell. And if
-  ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with 
+  ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with
   ** index iParentIdx. This scenario comes about when this function
   ** is called (indirectly) from sqlite3BtreeDelete().
   */
@@ -66888,11 +66888,11 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
   }
 
-  /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent 
-  ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on 
-  ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however, 
+  /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent
+  ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on
+  ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however,
   ** if there are fewer than NN siblings on the other side. If pParent
-  ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.  
+  ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.
   **
   ** This loop also drops the divider cells from the parent page. This
   ** way, the remainder of the function does not have to deal with any
@@ -66904,7 +66904,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     nxDiv = 0;
   }else{
     assert( bBulk==0 || bBulk==1 );
-    if( iParentIdx==0 ){                 
+    if( iParentIdx==0 ){
       nxDiv = 0;
     }else if( iParentIdx==i ){
       nxDiv = i-2+bBulk;
@@ -66944,7 +66944,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
       ** This is safe because dropping a cell only overwrites the first
       ** four bytes of it, and this function does not need the first
       ** four bytes of the divider cell. So the pointer is safe to use
-      ** later on.  
+      ** later on.
       **
       ** But not if we are in secure-delete mode. In secure-delete mode,
       ** the dropCell() routine will overwrite the entire cell with zeroes.
@@ -67103,7 +67103,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   ** Figure out the number of pages needed to hold all b.nCell cells.
   ** Store this number in "k".  Also compute szNew[] which is the total
   ** size of all cells on the i-th page and cntNew[] which is the index
-  ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.  
+  ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.
   ** cntNew[k] should equal b.nCell.
   **
   ** Values computed by this block:
@@ -67113,7 +67113,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   **   cntNew[i]: Index in b.apCell[] and b.szCell[] for the first cell to
   **              the right of the i-th sibling page.
   ** usableSpace: Number of bytes of space available on each sibling.
-  ** 
+  **
   */
   usableSpace = pBt->usableSize - 12 + leafCorrection;
   for(i=0; i<nOld; i++){
@@ -67256,15 +67256,15 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   }
 
   /*
-  ** Reassign page numbers so that the new pages are in ascending order. 
+  ** Reassign page numbers so that the new pages are in ascending order.
   ** This helps to keep entries in the disk file in order so that a scan
-  ** of the table is closer to a linear scan through the file. That in turn 
+  ** of the table is closer to a linear scan through the file. That in turn
   ** helps the operating system to deliver pages from the disk more rapidly.
   **
-  ** An O(n^2) insertion sort algorithm is used, but since n is never more 
+  ** An O(n^2) insertion sort algorithm is used, but since n is never more
   ** than (NB+2) (a small constant), that should not be a problem.
   **
-  ** When NB==3, this one optimization makes the database about 25% faster 
+  ** When NB==3, this one optimization makes the database about 25% faster
   ** for large insertions and deletions.
   */
   for(i=0; i<nNew; i++){
@@ -67273,7 +67273,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     for(j=0; j<i; j++){
       if( aPgno[j]==aPgno[i] ){
         /* This branch is taken if the set of sibling pages somehow contains
-        ** duplicate entries. This can happen if the database is corrupt. 
+        ** duplicate entries. This can happen if the database is corrupt.
         ** It would be simpler to detect this as part of the loop below, but
         ** we do the detection here in order to avoid populating the pager
         ** cache with two separate objects associated with the same
@@ -67317,14 +67317,14 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   put4byte(pRight, apNew[nNew-1]->pgno);
 
   /* If the sibling pages are not leaves, ensure that the right-child pointer
-  ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was 
+  ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was
   ** originally in the same field of the right-most old sibling page. */
   if( (pageFlags & PTF_LEAF)==0 && nOld!=nNew ){
     MemPage *pOld = (nNew>nOld ? apNew : apOld)[nOld-1];
     memcpy(&apNew[nNew-1]->aData[8], &pOld->aData[8], 4);
   }
 
-  /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with 
+  /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with
   ** cells stored on sibling pages following the balance operation. Pointer
   ** map entries associated with divider cells are set by the insertCell()
   ** routine. The associated pointer map entries are:
@@ -67335,9 +67335,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   **   b) if the sibling pages are not leaves, the child page associated
   **      with the cell.
   **
-  ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry 
-  ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be 
-  ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been 
+  ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry
+  ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be
+  ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been
   ** populated, not here.
   */
   if( ISAUTOVACUUM ){
@@ -67361,7 +67361,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
       }
 
       /* Cell pCell is destined for new sibling page pNew. Originally, it
-      ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell), 
+      ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell),
       ** or else the divider cell to the left of sibling page iOld. So,
       ** if sibling page iOld had the same page number as pNew, and if
       ** pCell really was a part of sibling page iOld (not a divider or
@@ -67397,9 +67397,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     if( !pNew->leaf ){
       memcpy(&pNew->aData[8], pCell, 4);
     }else if( leafData ){
-      /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves, 
-      ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider 
-      ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of 
+      /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves,
+      ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider
+      ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of
       ** the sibling-page assembled above only.
       */
       CellInfo info;
@@ -67412,9 +67412,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
       pCell -= 4;
       /* Obscure case for non-leaf-data trees: If the cell at pCell was
       ** previously stored on a leaf node, and its reported size was 4
-      ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this 
+      ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this
       ** (see btreeParseCellPtr(), 4 bytes is the minimum size of
-      ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to 
+      ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to
       ** insertCell(), so reparse the cell now.
       **
       ** This can only happen for b-trees used to evaluate "IN (SELECT ...)"
@@ -67506,8 +67506,8 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     ** b-tree structure by one. This is described as the "balance-shallower"
     ** sub-algorithm in some documentation.
     **
-    ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent() 
-    ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages 
+    ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent()
+    ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages
     ** for which the pointer is stored within the content being copied.
     **
     ** It is critical that the child page be defragmented before being
@@ -67518,7 +67518,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     assert( nNew==1 || CORRUPT_DB );
     rc = defragmentPage(apNew[0], -1);
     testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
-    assert( apNew[0]->nFree == 
+    assert( apNew[0]->nFree ==
         (get2byte(&apNew[0]->aData[5])-apNew[0]->cellOffset-apNew[0]->nCell*2)
       || rc!=SQLITE_OK
     );
@@ -67547,7 +67547,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
 #if 0
   if( ISAUTOVACUUM && rc==SQLITE_OK && apNew[0]->isInit ){
     /* The ptrmapCheckPages() contains assert() statements that verify that
-    ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while 
+    ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while
     ** debugging. This is usually disabled because a corrupt database may
     ** cause an assert() statement to fail.  */
     ptrmapCheckPages(apNew, nNew);
@@ -67577,15 +67577,15 @@ balance_cleanup:
 **
 ** A new child page is allocated and the contents of the current root
 ** page, including overflow cells, are copied into the child. The root
-** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child 
+** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child
 ** pointer pointing to the new page.
 **
-** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages 
+** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages
 ** that the new child-page now contains pointers to are updated. The
 ** entry corresponding to the new right-child pointer of the root
 ** page is also updated.
 **
-** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child 
+** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child
 ** page and SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case the caller is required
 ** to call releasePage() on *ppChild exactly once. If an error occurs,
 ** an error code is returned and *ppChild is set to 0.
@@ -67599,7 +67599,7 @@ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pRoot, MemPage **ppChild){
   assert( pRoot->nOverflow>0 );
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
 
-  /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new 
+  /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new
   ** page that will become the new right-child of pPage. Copy the contents
   ** of the node stored on pRoot into the new child page.
   */
@@ -67640,7 +67640,7 @@ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pRoot, MemPage **ppChild){
 /*
 ** The page that pCur currently points to has just been modified in
 ** some way. This function figures out if this modification means the
-** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing 
+** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing
 ** routine. Balancing routines are:
 **
 **   balance_quick()
@@ -67666,7 +67666,7 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
         ** balance_deeper() function to create a new child for the root-page
         ** and copy the current contents of the root-page to it. The
         ** next iteration of the do-loop will balance the child page.
-        */ 
+        */
         assert( balance_deeper_called==0 );
         VVA_ONLY( balance_deeper_called++ );
         rc = balance_deeper(pPage, &pCur->apPage[1]);
@@ -67699,17 +67699,17 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
           /* Call balance_quick() to create a new sibling of pPage on which
           ** to store the overflow cell. balance_quick() inserts a new cell
           ** into pParent, which may cause pParent overflow. If this
-          ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent 
+          ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent
           ** use either balance_nonroot() or balance_deeper(). Until this
           ** happens, the overflow cell is stored in the aBalanceQuickSpace[]
-          ** buffer. 
+          ** buffer.
           **
           ** The purpose of the following assert() is to check that only a
           ** single call to balance_quick() is made for each call to this
           ** function. If this were not verified, a subtle bug involving reuse
           ** of the aBalanceQuickSpace[] might sneak in.
           */
-          assert( balance_quick_called==0 ); 
+          assert( balance_quick_called==0 );
           VVA_ONLY( balance_quick_called++ );
           rc = balance_quick(pParent, pPage, aBalanceQuickSpace);
         }else
@@ -67720,15 +67720,15 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
           ** modifying the contents of pParent, which may cause pParent to
           ** become overfull or underfull. The next iteration of the do-loop
           ** will balance the parent page to correct this.
-          ** 
+          **
           ** If the parent page becomes overfull, the overflow cell or cells
-          ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below. 
+          ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below.
           ** A subsequent iteration of the do-loop will deal with this by
           ** calling balance_nonroot() (balance_deeper() may be called first,
           ** but it doesn't deal with overflow cells - just moves them to a
-          ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot() 
+          ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot()
           ** has completed, it is safe to release the pSpace buffer used by
-          ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been 
+          ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been
           ** copied either into the body of a database page or into the new
           ** pSpace buffer passed to the latter call to balance_nonroot().
           */
@@ -67736,9 +67736,9 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
           rc = balance_nonroot(pParent, iIdx, pSpace, iPage==1,
                                pCur->hints&BTREE_BULKLOAD);
           if( pFree ){
-            /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used 
+            /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used
             ** by a previous call to balance_nonroot(). Its contents are
-            ** now stored either on real database pages or within the 
+            ** now stored either on real database pages or within the
             ** new pSpace buffer, so it may be safely freed here. */
             sqlite3PageFree(pFree);
           }
@@ -67779,7 +67779,7 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
 ** hold the content of the row.
 **
 ** For an index btree (used for indexes and WITHOUT ROWID tables), the
-** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey.  The 
+** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey.  The
 ** pX.pData,nData,nZero fields must be zero.
 **
 ** If the seekResult parameter is non-zero, then a successful call to
@@ -67837,8 +67837,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
   **
   ** In some cases, the call to btreeMoveto() below is a no-op. For
   ** example, when inserting data into a table with auto-generated integer
-  ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the 
-  ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the 
+  ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the
+  ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the
   ** data into the intkey B-Tree. In this case btreeMoveto() recognizes
   ** that the cursor is already where it needs to be and returns without
   ** doing any work. To avoid thwarting these optimizations, it is important
@@ -67851,13 +67851,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
 
   if( pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ){
     assert( pX->pKey==0 );
-    /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob 
+    /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob
     ** cursors open on the row being replaced */
     invalidateIncrblobCursors(p, pCur->pgnoRoot, pX->nKey, 0);
 
-    /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing 
+    /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
     ** to a row with the same key as the new entry being inserted.  */
-    assert( (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)==0 || 
+    assert( (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)==0 ||
             ((pCur->curFlags&BTCF_ValidNKey)!=0 && pX->nKey==pCur->info.nKey) );
 
     /* If the cursor is currently on the last row and we are appending a
@@ -67915,14 +67915,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
       memcpy(newCell, oldCell, 4);
     }
     rc = clearCell(pPage, oldCell, &info);
-    if( info.nSize==szNew && info.nLocal==info.nPayload 
+    if( info.nSize==szNew && info.nLocal==info.nPayload
      && (!ISAUTOVACUUM || szNew<pPage->minLocal)
     ){
       /* Overwrite the old cell with the new if they are the same size.
       ** We could also try to do this if the old cell is smaller, then add
       ** the leftover space to the free list.  But experiments show that
       ** doing that is no faster then skipping this optimization and just
-      ** calling dropCell() and insertCell(). 
+      ** calling dropCell() and insertCell().
       **
       ** This optimization cannot be used on an autovacuum database if the
       ** new entry uses overflow pages, as the insertCell() call below is
@@ -67945,7 +67945,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
   assert( pPage->nOverflow==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
   assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPage->nCell>0 || pPage->nOverflow>0 );
 
-  /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance() 
+  /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance()
   ** to redistribute the cells within the tree. Since balance() may move
   ** the cursor, zero the BtCursor.info.nSize and BTCF_ValidNKey
   ** variables.
@@ -67972,7 +67972,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
     rc = balance(pCur);
 
     /* Must make sure nOverflow is reset to zero even if the balance()
-    ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise. 
+    ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise.
     ** Also, set the cursor state to invalid. This stops saveCursorPosition()
     ** from trying to save the current position of the cursor.  */
     pCur->pPage->nOverflow = 0;
@@ -67999,7 +67999,7 @@ end_insert:
 }
 
 /*
-** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to. 
+** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to.
 **
 ** If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit of the flags parameter is zero, then
 ** the cursor is left pointing at an arbitrary location after the delete.
@@ -68017,12 +68017,12 @@ end_insert:
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
   Btree *p = pCur->pBtree;
-  BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;              
+  BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;
   int rc;                              /* Return code */
   MemPage *pPage;                      /* Page to delete cell from */
   unsigned char *pCell;                /* Pointer to cell to delete */
   int iCellIdx;                        /* Index of cell to delete */
-  int iCellDepth;                      /* Depth of node containing pCell */ 
+  int iCellDepth;                      /* Depth of node containing pCell */
   CellInfo info;                       /* Size of the cell being deleted */
   int bSkipnext = 0;                   /* Leaf cursor in SKIPNEXT state */
   u8 bPreserve = flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION;  /* Keep cursor valid */
@@ -68045,14 +68045,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
   /* If the bPreserve flag is set to true, then the cursor position must
   ** be preserved following this delete operation. If the current delete
   ** will cause a b-tree rebalance, then this is done by saving the cursor
-  ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before 
-  ** returning. 
+  ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before
+  ** returning.
   **
   ** Or, if the current delete will not cause a rebalance, then the cursor
   ** will be left in CURSOR_SKIPNEXT state pointing to the entry immediately
   ** before or after the deleted entry. In this case set bSkipnext to true.  */
   if( bPreserve ){
-    if( !pPage->leaf 
+    if( !pPage->leaf
      || (pPage->nFree+cellSizePtr(pPage,pCell)+2)>(int)(pBt->usableSize*2/3)
     ){
       /* A b-tree rebalance will be required after deleting this entry.
@@ -68142,7 +68142,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
   ** on the leaf node first. If the balance proceeds far enough up the
   ** tree that we can be sure that any problem in the internal node has
   ** been corrected, so be it. Otherwise, after balancing the leaf node,
-  ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as 
+  ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as
   ** well.  */
   rc = balance(pCur);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pCur->iPage>iCellDepth ){
@@ -68296,7 +68296,7 @@ static int btreeCreateTable(Btree *p, int *piTable, int createTabFlags){
       }
     }else{
       pRoot = pPageMove;
-    } 
+    }
 
     /* Update the pointer-map and meta-data with the new root-page number. */
     ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoRoot, PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE, 0, &rc);
@@ -68449,12 +68449,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeClearTableOfCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
 ** cursors on the table.
 **
 ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled and the page at iTable is not the last
-** root page in the database file, then the last root page 
+** root page in the database file, then the last root page
 ** in the database file is moved into the slot formerly occupied by
 ** iTable and that last slot formerly occupied by the last root page
 ** is added to the freelist instead of iTable.  In this say, all
 ** root pages are kept at the beginning of the database file, which
-** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right.  *piMoved is set to the 
+** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right.  *piMoved is set to the
 ** page number that used to be the last root page in the file before
 ** the move.  If no page gets moved, *piMoved is set to 0.
 ** The last root page is recorded in meta[3] and the value of
@@ -68489,7 +68489,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
 
     if( iTable==maxRootPgno ){
       /* If the table being dropped is the table with the largest root-page
-      ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list. 
+      ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list.
       */
       freePage(pPage, &rc);
       releasePage(pPage);
@@ -68498,7 +68498,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
       }
     }else{
       /* The table being dropped does not have the largest root-page
-      ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the 
+      ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the
       ** gap left by the deleted root-page.
       */
       MemPage *pMove;
@@ -68540,7 +68540,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
     releasePage(pPage);
   }
 #endif
-  return rc;  
+  return rc;
 }
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){
   int rc;
@@ -68559,7 +68559,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){
 ** is the number of free pages currently in the database.  Meta[1]
 ** through meta[15] are available for use by higher layers.  Meta[0]
 ** is read-only, the others are read/write.
-** 
+**
 ** The schema layer numbers meta values differently.  At the schema
 ** layer (and the SetCookie and ReadCookie opcodes) the number of
 ** free pages is not visible.  So Cookie[0] is the same as Meta[1].
@@ -68630,7 +68630,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(Btree *p, int idx, u32 iMeta){
 ** The first argument, pCur, is a cursor opened on some b-tree. Count the
 ** number of entries in the b-tree and write the result to *pnEntry.
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed. 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed.
 ** Otherwise, if an error is encountered (i.e. an IO error or database
 ** corruption) an SQLite error code is returned.
 */
@@ -68645,13 +68645,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
   }
 
   /* Unless an error occurs, the following loop runs one iteration for each
-  ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages). 
+  ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages).
   */
   while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     int iIdx;                          /* Index of child node in parent */
     MemPage *pPage;                    /* Current page of the b-tree */
 
-    /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then 
+    /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then
     ** this page contains countable entries. Increment the entry counter
     ** accordingly.
     */
@@ -68660,7 +68660,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
       nEntry += pPage->nCell;
     }
 
-    /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it 
+    /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it
     ** points to the first interior cell that it points to the parent of
     ** the next page in the tree that has not yet been visited. The
     ** pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage] value is set to the index of the parent cell
@@ -68684,7 +68684,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
       pPage = pCur->pPage;
     }
 
-    /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently 
+    /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently
     ** points at. This is the right-child if (iIdx==pPage->nCell).
     */
     iIdx = pCur->ix;
@@ -68780,7 +68780,7 @@ static int checkRef(IntegrityCk *pCheck, Pgno iPage){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
 /*
-** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to 
+** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to
 ** page iParent, pointer type ptrType. If not, append an error message
 ** to pCheck.
 */
@@ -68803,7 +68803,7 @@ static void checkPtrmap(
 
   if( ePtrmapType!=eType || iPtrmapParent!=iParent ){
     checkAppendMsg(pCheck,
-      "Bad ptr map entry key=%d expected=(%d,%d) got=(%d,%d)", 
+      "Bad ptr map entry key=%d expected=(%d,%d) got=(%d,%d)",
       iChild, eType, iParent, ePtrmapType, iPtrmapParent);
   }
 }
@@ -68901,7 +68901,7 @@ static void checkList(
 ** property.
 **
 ** This heap is used for cell overlap and coverage testing.  Each u32
-** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page.  
+** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page.
 ** The upper 16 bits are the index of the first byte of a range and the
 ** lower 16 bits are the index of the last byte of that range.
 */
@@ -68931,7 +68931,7 @@ static int btreeHeapPull(u32 *aHeap, u32 *pOut){
     aHeap[j] = x;
     i = j;
   }
-  return 1;  
+  return 1;
 }
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK
@@ -68939,7 +68939,7 @@ static int btreeHeapPull(u32 *aHeap, u32 *pOut){
 ** Do various sanity checks on a single page of a tree.  Return
 ** the tree depth.  Root pages return 0.  Parents of root pages
 ** return 1, and so forth.
-** 
+**
 ** These checks are done:
 **
 **      1.  Make sure that cells and freeblocks do not overlap
@@ -69132,7 +69132,7 @@ static int checkTreePage(
     **
     ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-20690-50594 The second field of the b-tree page header
     ** is the offset of the first freeblock, or zero if there are no
-    ** freeblocks on the page. 
+    ** freeblocks on the page.
     */
     i = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]);
     while( i>0 ){
@@ -69152,13 +69152,13 @@ static int checkTreePage(
       assert( (u32)j<=usableSize-4 );   /* Enforced by btreeInitPage() */
       i = j;
     }
-    /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or 
+    /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or
     ** freeblocks, and counting the number of untracked bytes in nFrag.
-    ** 
+    **
     ** Each min-heap entry is of the form:    (start_address<<16)|end_address.
     ** There is an implied first entry the covers the page header, the cell
     ** pointer index, and the gap between the cell pointer index and the start
-    ** of cell content.  
+    ** of cell content.
     **
     ** The loop below pulls entries from the min-heap in order and compares
     ** the start_address against the previous end_address.  If there is an
@@ -69297,11 +69297,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck(
     /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, make sure no tables contain
     ** references to pointer-map pages.
     */
-    if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 && 
+    if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 &&
        (PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)!=i || !pBt->autoVacuum) ){
       checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %d is never used", i);
     }
-    if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 && 
+    if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 &&
        (PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)==i && pBt->autoVacuum) ){
       checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Pointer map page %d is referenced", i);
     }
@@ -69363,7 +69363,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(Btree *p){
 /*
 ** Run a checkpoint on the Btree passed as the first argument.
 **
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open 
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open
 ** transaction on the shared-cache the argument Btree is connected to.
 **
 ** Parameter eMode is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL or RESTART.
@@ -69402,20 +69402,20 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIsInBackup(Btree *p){
 /*
 ** This function returns a pointer to a blob of memory associated with
 ** a single shared-btree. The memory is used by client code for its own
-** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with 
+** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with
 ** the shared-btree). The btree layer manages reference counting issues.
 **
 ** The first time this is called on a shared-btree, nBytes bytes of memory
-** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent 
+** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent
 ** call the nBytes parameter is ignored and a pointer to the same blob
-** of memory returned. 
+** of memory returned.
 **
 ** If the nBytes parameter is 0 and the blob of memory has not yet been
 ** allocated, a null pointer is returned. If the blob has already been
 ** allocated, it is returned as normal.
 **
-** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the 
-** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the 
+** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the
+** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the
 ** blob of allocated memory. The xFree function should not call sqlite3_free()
 ** on the memory, the btree layer does that.
 */
@@ -69431,8 +69431,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3BtreeSchema(Btree *p, int nBytes, void(*xFree)(void
 }
 
 /*
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared 
-** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the 
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared
+** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the
 ** sqlite_master table. Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSchemaLocked(Btree *p){
@@ -69473,11 +69473,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLockTable(Btree *p, int iTab, u8 isWriteLock){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB
 /*
-** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an 
-** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry. 
+** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an
+** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry.
 ** This function modifies the data stored as part of that entry.
 **
-** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to 
+** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to
 ** change the length of the data stored. If this function is called with
 ** parameters that attempt to write past the end of the existing data,
 ** no modifications are made and SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
@@ -69508,7 +69508,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void
   VVA_ONLY(rc =) saveAllCursors(pCsr->pBt, pCsr->pgnoRoot, pCsr);
   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
 
-  /* Check some assumptions: 
+  /* Check some assumptions:
   **   (a) the cursor is open for writing,
   **   (b) there is a read/write transaction open,
   **   (c) the connection holds a write-lock on the table (if required),
@@ -69527,7 +69527,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void
   return accessPayload(pCsr, offset, amt, (unsigned char *)z, 1);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Mark this cursor as an incremental blob cursor.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -69537,14 +69537,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and 
+** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and
 ** "write version" (single byte at byte offset 19) fields in the database
 ** header to iVersion.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(Btree *pBtree, int iVersion){
   BtShared *pBt = pBtree->pBt;
   int rc;                         /* Return code */
- 
+
   assert( iVersion==1 || iVersion==2 );
 
   /* If setting the version fields to 1, do not automatically open the
@@ -69602,7 +69602,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSharable(Btree *p){
 
 /*
 ** Return the number of connections to the BtShared object accessed by
-** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches 
+** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches
 ** this is always 1. For shared caches it may be 1 or greater.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree *p){
@@ -69624,7 +69624,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree *p){
 **    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
 **
 *************************************************************************
-** This file contains the implementation of the sqlite3_backup_XXX() 
+** This file contains the implementation of the sqlite3_backup_XXX()
 ** API functions and the related features.
 */
 /* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
@@ -69661,15 +69661,15 @@ struct sqlite3_backup {
 **   Once it has been created using backup_init(), a single sqlite3_backup
 **   structure may be accessed via two groups of thread-safe entry points:
 **
-**     * Via the sqlite3_backup_XXX() API function backup_step() and 
+**     * Via the sqlite3_backup_XXX() API function backup_step() and
 **       backup_finish(). Both these functions obtain the source database
-**       handle mutex and the mutex associated with the source BtShared 
+**       handle mutex and the mutex associated with the source BtShared
 **       structure, in that order.
 **
 **     * Via the BackupUpdate() and BackupRestart() functions, which are
 **       invoked by the pager layer to report various state changes in
 **       the page cache associated with the source database. The mutex
-**       associated with the source database BtShared structure will always 
+**       associated with the source database BtShared structure will always
 **       be held when either of these functions are invoked.
 **
 **   The other sqlite3_backup_XXX() API functions, backup_remaining() and
@@ -69690,8 +69690,8 @@ struct sqlite3_backup {
 ** in connection handle pDb. If such a database cannot be found, return
 ** a NULL pointer and write an error message to pErrorDb.
 **
-** If the "temp" database is requested, it may need to be opened by this 
-** function. If an error occurs while doing so, return 0 and write an 
+** If the "temp" database is requested, it may need to be opened by this
+** function. If an error occurs while doing so, return 0 and write an
 ** error message to pErrorDb.
 */
 static Btree *findBtree(sqlite3 *pErrorDb, sqlite3 *pDb, const char *zDb){
@@ -69734,7 +69734,7 @@ static int setDestPgsz(sqlite3_backup *p){
 /*
 ** Check that there is no open read-transaction on the b-tree passed as the
 ** second argument. If there is not, return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, if there
-** is an open read-transaction, return SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error 
+** is an open read-transaction, return SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error
 ** message in database handle db.
 */
 static int checkReadTransaction(sqlite3 *db, Btree *p){
@@ -69804,13 +69804,13 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_backup *sqlite3_backup_init(
     p->iNext = 1;
     p->isAttached = 0;
 
-    if( 0==p->pSrc || 0==p->pDest 
-     || checkReadTransaction(pDestDb, p->pDest)!=SQLITE_OK 
+    if( 0==p->pSrc || 0==p->pDest
+     || checkReadTransaction(pDestDb, p->pDest)!=SQLITE_OK
      ){
       /* One (or both) of the named databases did not exist or an OOM
       ** error was hit. Or there is a transaction open on the destination
-      ** database. The error has already been written into the pDestDb 
-      ** handle. All that is left to do here is free the sqlite3_backup 
+      ** database. The error has already been written into the pDestDb
+      ** handle. All that is left to do here is free the sqlite3_backup
       ** structure.  */
       sqlite3_free(p);
       p = 0;
@@ -69826,7 +69826,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_backup *sqlite3_backup_init(
 }
 
 /*
-** Argument rc is an SQLite error code. Return true if this error is 
+** Argument rc is an SQLite error code. Return true if this error is
 ** considered fatal if encountered during a backup operation. All errors
 ** are considered fatal except for SQLITE_BUSY and SQLITE_LOCKED.
 */
@@ -69835,8 +69835,8 @@ static int isFatalError(int rc){
 }
 
 /*
-** Parameter zSrcData points to a buffer containing the data for 
-** page iSrcPg from the source database. Copy this data into the 
+** Parameter zSrcData points to a buffer containing the data for
+** page iSrcPg from the source database. Copy this data into the
 ** destination database.
 */
 static int backupOnePage(
@@ -69867,7 +69867,7 @@ static int backupOnePage(
   assert( zSrcData );
 
   /* Catch the case where the destination is an in-memory database and the
-  ** page sizes of the source and destination differ. 
+  ** page sizes of the source and destination differ.
   */
   if( nSrcPgsz!=nDestPgsz && sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(pDestPager) ){
     rc = SQLITE_READONLY;
@@ -69893,7 +69893,7 @@ static int backupOnePage(
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* This loop runs once for each destination page spanned by the source 
+  /* This loop runs once for each destination page spanned by the source
   ** page. For each iteration, variable iOff is set to the byte offset
   ** of the destination page.
   */
@@ -69912,7 +69912,7 @@ static int backupOnePage(
       ** Then clear the Btree layer MemPage.isInit flag. Both this module
       ** and the pager code use this trick (clearing the first byte
       ** of the page 'extra' space to invalidate the Btree layers
-      ** cached parse of the page). MemPage.isInit is marked 
+      ** cached parse of the page). MemPage.isInit is marked
       ** "MUST BE FIRST" for this purpose.
       */
       memcpy(zOut, zIn, nCopy);
@@ -69932,7 +69932,7 @@ static int backupOnePage(
 ** exactly iSize bytes. If pFile is not larger than iSize bytes, then
 ** this function is a no-op.
 **
-** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, or an SQLite error 
+** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, or an SQLite error
 ** code if an error occurs.
 */
 static int backupTruncateFile(sqlite3_file *pFile, i64 iSize){
@@ -70013,7 +70013,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
 
     /* Lock the destination database, if it is not locked already. */
     if( SQLITE_OK==rc && p->bDestLocked==0
-     && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pDest, 2)) 
+     && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pDest, 2))
     ){
       p->bDestLocked = 1;
       sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(p->pDest, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, &p->iDestSchema);
@@ -70027,7 +70027,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
     if( SQLITE_OK==rc && destMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL && pgszSrc!=pgszDest ){
       rc = SQLITE_READONLY;
     }
-  
+
     /* Now that there is a read-lock on the source database, query the
     ** source pager for the number of pages in the database.
     */
@@ -70054,7 +70054,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
         attachBackupObject(p);
       }
     }
-  
+
     /* Update the schema version field in the destination database. This
     ** is to make sure that the schema-version really does change in
     ** the case where the source and destination databases have the
@@ -70080,12 +70080,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
         int nDestTruncate;
         /* Set nDestTruncate to the final number of pages in the destination
         ** database. The complication here is that the destination page
-        ** size may be different to the source page size. 
+        ** size may be different to the source page size.
         **
-        ** If the source page size is smaller than the destination page size, 
+        ** If the source page size is smaller than the destination page size,
         ** round up. In this case the call to sqlite3OsTruncate() below will
         ** fix the size of the file. However it is important to call
-        ** sqlite3PagerTruncateImage() here so that any pages in the 
+        ** sqlite3PagerTruncateImage() here so that any pages in the
         ** destination file that lie beyond the nDestTruncate page mark are
         ** journalled by PagerCommitPhaseOne() before they are destroyed
         ** by the file truncation.
@@ -70109,7 +70109,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
           **
           **   * The destination may need to be truncated, and
           **
-          **   * Data stored on the pages immediately following the 
+          **   * Data stored on the pages immediately following the
           **     pending-byte page in the source database may need to be
           **     copied into the destination database.
           */
@@ -70121,7 +70121,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
           i64 iEnd;
 
           assert( pFile );
-          assert( nDestTruncate==0 
+          assert( nDestTruncate==0
               || (i64)nDestTruncate*(i64)pgszDest >= iSize || (
                 nDestTruncate==(int)(PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(p->pDest->pBt)-1)
              && iSize>=PENDING_BYTE && iSize<=PENDING_BYTE+pgszDest
@@ -70131,7 +70131,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
           ** database has been stored in the journal for pDestPager and the
           ** journal synced to disk. So at this point we may safely modify
           ** the database file in any way, knowing that if a power failure
-          ** occurs, the original database will be reconstructed from the 
+          ** occurs, the original database will be reconstructed from the
           ** journal file.  */
           sqlite3PagerPagecount(pDestPager, &nDstPage);
           for(iPg=nDestTruncate; rc==SQLITE_OK && iPg<=(Pgno)nDstPage; iPg++){
@@ -70151,8 +70151,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
           /* Write the extra pages and truncate the database file as required */
           iEnd = MIN(PENDING_BYTE + pgszDest, iSize);
           for(
-            iOff=PENDING_BYTE+pgszSrc; 
-            rc==SQLITE_OK && iOff<iEnd; 
+            iOff=PENDING_BYTE+pgszSrc;
+            rc==SQLITE_OK && iOff<iEnd;
             iOff+=pgszSrc
           ){
             PgHdr *pSrcPg = 0;
@@ -70176,7 +70176,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
           sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(pDestPager, nDestTruncate);
           rc = sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(pDestPager, 0, 0);
         }
-    
+
         /* Finish committing the transaction to the destination database. */
         if( SQLITE_OK==rc
          && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(p->pDest, 0))
@@ -70185,7 +70185,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
         }
       }
     }
-  
+
     /* If bCloseTrans is true, then this function opened a read transaction
     ** on the source database. Close the read transaction here. There is
     ** no need to check the return values of the btree methods here, as
@@ -70197,7 +70197,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
       TESTONLY( rc2 |= ) sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(p->pSrc, 0);
       assert( rc2==SQLITE_OK );
     }
-  
+
     if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){
       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
     }
@@ -70277,7 +70277,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_remaining(sqlite3_backup *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the total number of pages in the source database as of the most 
+** Return the total number of pages in the source database as of the most
 ** recent call to sqlite3_backup_step().
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p){
@@ -70292,7 +70292,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called after the contents of page iPage of the
-** source database have been modified. If page iPage has already been 
+** source database have been modified. If page iPage has already been
 ** copied into the destination database, then the data written to the
 ** destination is now invalidated. The destination copy of iPage needs
 ** to be updated with the new data before the backup operation is
@@ -70335,7 +70335,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BackupUpdate(sqlite3_backup *pBackup, Pgno iPage, con
 ** Restart the backup process. This is called when the pager layer
 ** detects that the database has been modified by an external database
 ** connection. In this case there is no way of knowing which of the
-** pages that have been copied into the destination database are still 
+** pages that have been copied into the destination database are still
 ** valid and which are not, so the entire process needs to be restarted.
 **
 ** It is assumed that the mutex associated with the BtShared object
@@ -70355,8 +70355,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BackupRestart(sqlite3_backup *pBackup){
 ** Copy the complete content of pBtFrom into pBtTo.  A transaction
 ** must be active for both files.
 **
-** The size of file pTo may be reduced by this operation. If anything 
-** goes wrong, the transaction on pTo is rolled back. If successful, the 
+** The size of file pTo may be reduced by this operation. If anything
+** goes wrong, the transaction on pTo is rolled back. If successful, the
 ** transaction is committed before returning.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCopyFile(Btree *pTo, Btree *pFrom){
@@ -70392,9 +70392,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCopyFile(Btree *pTo, Btree *pFrom){
 
   /* 0x7FFFFFFF is the hard limit for the number of pages in a database
   ** file. By passing this as the number of pages to copy to
-  ** sqlite3_backup_step(), we can guarantee that the copy finishes 
+  ** sqlite3_backup_step(), we can guarantee that the copy finishes
   ** within a single call (unless an error occurs). The assert() statement
-  ** checks this assumption - (p->rc) should be set to either SQLITE_DONE 
+  ** checks this assumption - (p->rc) should be set to either SQLITE_DONE
   ** or an error code.  */
   sqlite3_backup_step(&b, 0x7FFFFFFF);
   assert( b.rc!=SQLITE_OK );
@@ -70444,7 +70444,7 @@ copy_finished:
 ** this:    assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(pMem) );
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(Mem *p){
-  /* If MEM_Dyn is set then Mem.xDel!=0.  
+  /* If MEM_Dyn is set then Mem.xDel!=0.
   ** Mem.xDel might not be initialized if MEM_Dyn is clear.
   */
   assert( (p->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 || p->xDel!=0 );
@@ -70500,7 +70500,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(Mem *p){
   **   (4) A static string or blob
   */
   if( (p->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob)) && p->n>0 ){
-    assert( 
+    assert(
       ((p->szMalloc>0 && p->z==p->zMalloc)? 1 : 0) +
       ((p->flags&MEM_Dyn)!=0 ? 1 : 0) +
       ((p->flags&MEM_Ephem)!=0 ? 1 : 0) +
@@ -70552,7 +70552,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(Mem *pMem, int desiredEnc){
 }
 
 /*
-** Make sure pMem->z points to a writable allocation of at least 
+** Make sure pMem->z points to a writable allocation of at least
 ** min(n,32) bytes.
 **
 ** If the bPreserve argument is true, then copy of the content of
@@ -70742,7 +70742,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(Mem *pMem, u8 enc, u8 bForce){
   /* For a Real or Integer, use sqlite3_snprintf() to produce the UTF-8
   ** string representation of the value. Then, if the required encoding
   ** is UTF-16le or UTF-16be do a translation.
-  ** 
+  **
   ** FIX ME: It would be better if sqlite3_snprintf() could do UTF-16.
   */
   if( fg & MEM_Int ){
@@ -71111,7 +71111,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(Mem *pMem){
   }
 }
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueSetNull(sqlite3_value *p){
-  sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull((Mem*)p); 
+  sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull((Mem*)p);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -71222,7 +71222,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(Mem *p){
     }
     return n>p->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH];
   }
-  return 0; 
+  return 0;
 }
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
@@ -71313,8 +71313,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMemMove(Mem *pTo, Mem *pFrom){
 ** Change the value of a Mem to be a string or a BLOB.
 **
 ** The memory management strategy depends on the value of the xDel
-** parameter. If the value passed is SQLITE_TRANSIENT, then the 
-** string is copied into a (possibly existing) buffer managed by the 
+** parameter. If the value passed is SQLITE_TRANSIENT, then the
+** string is copied into a (possibly existing) buffer managed by the
 ** Mem structure. Otherwise, any existing buffer is freed and the
 ** pointer copied.
 **
@@ -71456,7 +71456,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(
   assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) );
   assert( !VdbeMemDynamic(pMem) );
 
-  /* Note: the calls to BtreeKeyFetch() and DataFetch() below assert() 
+  /* Note: the calls to BtreeKeyFetch() and DataFetch() below assert()
   ** that both the BtShared and database handle mutexes are held. */
   assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 );
   zData = (char *)sqlite3BtreePayloadFetch(pCur, &available);
@@ -71547,7 +71547,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_value *sqlite3ValueNew(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 
 /*
-** Context object passed by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() through to 
+** Context object passed by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() through to
 ** valueNew(). See comments above valueNew() for details.
 */
 struct ValueNewStat4Ctx {
@@ -71562,9 +71562,9 @@ struct ValueNewStat4Ctx {
 ** the second argument to this function is NULL, the object is allocated
 ** by calling sqlite3ValueNew().
 **
-** Otherwise, if the second argument is non-zero, then this function is 
+** Otherwise, if the second argument is non-zero, then this function is
 ** being called indirectly by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue(). If it has not
-** already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord structure that 
+** already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord structure that
 ** that function will return to its caller here. Then return a pointer to
 ** an sqlite3_value within the UnpackedRecord.a[] array.
 */
@@ -71578,7 +71578,7 @@ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){
       int nByte;                  /* Bytes of space to allocate */
       int i;                      /* Counter variable */
       int nCol = pIdx->nColumn;   /* Number of index columns including rowid */
-  
+
       nByte = sizeof(Mem) * nCol + ROUND8(sizeof(UnpackedRecord));
       pRec = (UnpackedRecord*)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, nByte);
       if( pRec ){
@@ -71599,7 +71599,7 @@ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){
       if( pRec==0 ) return 0;
       p->ppRec[0] = pRec;
     }
-  
+
     pRec->nField = p->iVal+1;
     return &pRec->aMem[p->iVal];
   }
@@ -71618,11 +71618,11 @@ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){
 **   * the SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL function flag is not set,
 **
 ** then this routine attempts to invoke the SQL function. Assuming no
-** error occurs, output parameter (*ppVal) is set to point to a value 
+** error occurs, output parameter (*ppVal) is set to point to a value
 ** object containing the result before returning SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** Affinity aff is applied to the result of the function before returning.
-** If the result is a text value, the sqlite3_value object uses encoding 
+** If the result is a text value, the sqlite3_value object uses encoding
 ** enc.
 **
 ** If the conditions above are not met, this function returns SQLITE_OK
@@ -71653,7 +71653,7 @@ static int valueFromFunction(
   if( pList ) nVal = pList->nExpr;
   pFunc = sqlite3FindFunction(db, p->u.zToken, nVal, enc, 0);
   assert( pFunc );
-  if( (pFunc->funcFlags & (SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT|SQLITE_FUNC_SLOCHNG))==0 
+  if( (pFunc->funcFlags & (SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT|SQLITE_FUNC_SLOCHNG))==0
    || (pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL)
   ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -71792,7 +71792,7 @@ static int valueFromExpr(
     }
   }else if( op==TK_UMINUS ) {
     /* This branch happens for multiple negative signs.  Ex: -(-5) */
-    if( SQLITE_OK==valueFromExpr(db,pExpr->pLeft,enc,affinity,&pVal,pCtx) 
+    if( SQLITE_OK==valueFromExpr(db,pExpr->pLeft,enc,affinity,&pVal,pCtx)
      && pVal!=0
     ){
       sqlite3VdbeMemNumerify(pVal);
@@ -71870,7 +71870,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ValueFromExpr(
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
 /*
 ** The implementation of the sqlite_record() function. This function accepts
-** a single argument of any type. The return value is a formatted database 
+** a single argument of any type. The return value is a formatted database
 ** record (a blob) containing the argument value.
 **
 ** This is used to convert the value stored in the 'sample' column of the
@@ -71977,8 +71977,8 @@ static int stat4ValueFromExpr(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used to allocate and populate UnpackedRecord 
-** structures intended to be compared against sample index keys stored 
+** This function is used to allocate and populate UnpackedRecord
+** structures intended to be compared against sample index keys stored
 ** in the sqlite_stat4 table.
 **
 ** A single call to this function populates zero or more fields of the
@@ -71989,14 +71989,14 @@ static int stat4ValueFromExpr(
 **
 **  * The expression is a bound variable, and this is a reprepare, or
 **
-**  * The sqlite3ValueFromExpr() function is able to extract a value 
+**  * The sqlite3ValueFromExpr() function is able to extract a value
 **    from the expression (i.e. the expression is a literal value).
 **
 ** Or, if pExpr is a TK_VECTOR, one field is populated for each of the
 ** vector components that match either of the two latter criteria listed
 ** above.
 **
-** Before any value is appended to the record, the affinity of the 
+** Before any value is appended to the record, the affinity of the
 ** corresponding column within index pIdx is applied to it. Before
 ** this function returns, output parameter *pnExtract is set to the
 ** number of values appended to the record.
@@ -72047,9 +72047,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue(
 
 /*
 ** Attempt to extract a value from expression pExpr using the methods
-** as described for sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() above. 
+** as described for sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() above.
 **
-** If successful, set *ppVal to point to a new value object and return 
+** If successful, set *ppVal to point to a new value object and return
 ** SQLITE_OK. If no value can be extracted, but no other error occurs
 ** (e.g. OOM), return SQLITE_OK and set *ppVal to NULL. Or, if an error
 ** does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final value of *ppVal
@@ -72069,7 +72069,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4ValueFromExpr(
 ** the column value into *ppVal.  If *ppVal is initially NULL then a new
 ** sqlite3_value object is allocated.
 **
-** If *ppVal is initially NULL then the caller is responsible for 
+** If *ppVal is initially NULL then the caller is responsible for
 ** ensuring that the value written into *ppVal is eventually freed.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4Column(
@@ -72193,7 +72193,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ValueBytes(sqlite3_value *pVal, u8 enc){
 **
 *************************************************************************
 ** This file contains code used for creating, destroying, and populating
-** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.) 
+** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.)
 */
 /* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
 /* #include "vdbeInt.h" */
@@ -72275,13 +72275,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSwap(Vdbe *pA, Vdbe *pB){
 }
 
 /*
-** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger 
+** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger
 ** than its current size. nOp is guaranteed to be less than or equal
 ** to 1024/sizeof(Op).
 **
 ** If an out-of-memory error occurs while resizing the array, return
-** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Parse.nOpAlloc remain 
-** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be 
+** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Parse.nOpAlloc remain
+** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be
 ** correctly deallocated along with the rest of the Vdbe).
 */
 static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){
@@ -72289,7 +72289,7 @@ static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){
   Parse *p = v->pParse;
 
   /* The SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS compile-time option is designed to force
-  ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for 
+  ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for
   ** simulated OOM faults.  SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS is generally used
   ** during testing only.  With SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS grow the op array
   ** by the minimum* amount required until the size reaches 512.  Normal
@@ -72554,7 +72554,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(Vdbe *v){
   int i = p->nLabel++;
   assert( v->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_INIT );
   if( (i & (i-1))==0 ){
-    p->aLabel = sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(p->db, p->aLabel, 
+    p->aLabel = sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(p->db, p->aLabel,
                                        (i*2+1)*sizeof(p->aLabel[0]));
   }
   if( p->aLabel ){
@@ -72597,19 +72597,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeReusable(Vdbe *p){
 
 /*
 ** The following type and function are used to iterate through all opcodes
-** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may 
+** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may
 ** invoke directly or indirectly. It should be used as follows:
 **
 **   Op *pOp;
 **   VdbeOpIter sIter;
 **
 **   memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter));
-**   sIter.v = v;                            // v is of type Vdbe* 
+**   sIter.v = v;                            // v is of type Vdbe*
 **   while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter)) ){
 **     // Do something with pOp
 **   }
 **   sqlite3DbFree(v->db, sIter.apSub);
-** 
+**
 */
 typedef struct VdbeOpIter VdbeOpIter;
 struct VdbeOpIter {
@@ -72642,7 +72642,7 @@ static Op *opIterNext(VdbeOpIter *p){
       p->iSub++;
       p->iAddr = 0;
     }
-  
+
     if( pRet->p4type==P4_SUBPROGRAM ){
       int nByte = (p->nSub+1)*sizeof(SubProgram*);
       int j;
@@ -72675,7 +72675,7 @@ static Op *opIterNext(VdbeOpIter *p){
 **   *  OP_VUpdate
 **   *  OP_VRename
 **   *  OP_FkCounter with P2==0 (immediate foreign key constraint)
-**   *  OP_CreateBtree/BTREE_INTKEY and OP_InitCoroutine 
+**   *  OP_CreateBtree/BTREE_INTKEY and OP_InitCoroutine
 **      (for CREATE TABLE AS SELECT ...)
 **
 ** Then check that the value of Parse.mayAbort is true if an
@@ -72697,8 +72697,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(Vdbe *v, int mayAbort){
 
   while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter))!=0 ){
     int opcode = pOp->opcode;
-    if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename 
-     || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull) 
+    if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename
+     || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull)
       && ((pOp->p1&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT && pOp->p2==OE_Abort))
     ){
       hasAbort = 1;
@@ -72789,7 +72789,7 @@ static void resolveP2Values(Vdbe *p, int *pMaxFuncArgs){
           pOp->p4.xAdvance = sqlite3BtreeNext;
           pOp->p4type = P4_ADVANCE;
           /* The code generator never codes any of these opcodes as a jump
-          ** to a label.  They are always coded as a jump backwards to a 
+          ** to a label.  They are always coded as a jump backwards to a
           ** known address */
           assert( pOp->p2>=0 );
           break;
@@ -72799,7 +72799,7 @@ static void resolveP2Values(Vdbe *p, int *pMaxFuncArgs){
           pOp->p4.xAdvance = sqlite3BtreePrevious;
           pOp->p4type = P4_ADVANCE;
           /* The code generator never codes any of these opcodes as a jump
-          ** to a label.  They are always coded as a jump backwards to a 
+          ** to a label.  They are always coded as a jump backwards to a
           ** known address */
           assert( pOp->p2>=0 );
           break;
@@ -72886,12 +72886,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeVerifyNoResultRow(Vdbe *p){
 /*
 ** This function returns a pointer to the array of opcodes associated with
 ** the Vdbe passed as the first argument. It is the callers responsibility
-** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the 
+** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the
 ** vdbeFreeOpArray() function.
 **
 ** Before returning, *pnOp is set to the number of entries in the returned
-** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and 
-** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the 
+** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and
+** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the
 ** returned program.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeTakeOpArray(Vdbe *p, int *pnOp, int *pnMaxArg){
@@ -72965,7 +72965,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeAddOpList(
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus(
   Vdbe *p,                        /* VM to add scanstatus() to */
   int addrExplain,                /* Address of OP_Explain (or 0) */
-  int addrLoop,                   /* Address of loop counter */ 
+  int addrLoop,                   /* Address of loop counter */
   int addrVisit,                  /* Address of rows visited counter */
   LogEst nEst,                    /* Estimated number of output rows */
   const char *zName               /* Name of table or index being scanned */
@@ -73084,8 +73084,8 @@ static void freeP4(sqlite3 *db, int p4type, void *p4){
 
 /*
 ** Free the space allocated for aOp and any p4 values allocated for the
-** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain 
-** nOp entries. 
+** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain
+** nOp entries.
 */
 static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){
   if( aOp ){
@@ -73094,7 +73094,7 @@ static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){
       if( pOp->p4type <= P4_FREE_IF_LE ) freeP4(db, pOp->p4type, pOp->p4.p);
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS
       sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->zComment);
-#endif     
+#endif
     }
     sqlite3DbFreeNN(db, aOp);
   }
@@ -73147,7 +73147,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeDeletePriorOpcode(Vdbe *p, u8 op){
 ** the string is made into memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc().
 ** A value of n==0 means copy bytes of zP4 up to and including the
 ** first null byte.  If n>0 then copy n+1 bytes of zP4.
-** 
+**
 ** Other values of n (P4_STATIC, P4_COLLSEQ etc.) indicate that zP4 points
 ** to a string or structure that is guaranteed to exist for the lifetime of
 ** the Vdbe. In these cases we can just copy the pointer.
@@ -73208,7 +73208,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(Vdbe *p, int addr, const char *zP4, int
 }
 
 /*
-** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction 
+** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction
 ** to the value defined by the arguments.  This is a high-speed
 ** version of sqlite3VdbeChangeP4().
 **
@@ -73297,7 +73297,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSetLineNumber(Vdbe *v, int iLine){
 ** routine, then a pointer to a dummy VdbeOp will be returned.  That opcode
 ** is readable but not writable, though it is cast to a writable value.
 ** The return of a dummy opcode allows the call to continue functioning
-** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from 
+** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from
 ** this routine is a valid pointer.  But because the dummy.opcode is 0,
 ** dummy will never be written to.  This is verified by code inspection and
 ** by running with Valgrind.
@@ -73639,13 +73639,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(Vdbe *p, int i){
 **
 ** If SQLite is not threadsafe but does support shared-cache mode, then
 ** sqlite3BtreeEnter() is invoked to set the BtShared.db variables
-** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle 
+** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle
 ** associated with the VM.
 **
 ** If SQLite is not threadsafe and does not support shared-cache mode, this
 ** function is a no-op.
 **
-** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared 
+** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared
 ** statement p will ever use.  Let N be the number of bits in p->btreeMask
 ** corresponding to btrees that use shared cache.  Then the runtime of
 ** this routine is N*N.  But as N is rarely more than 1, this should not
@@ -73711,7 +73711,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbePrintOp(FILE *pOut, int pc, Op *pOp){
   /* NB:  The sqlite3OpcodeName() function is implemented by code created
   ** by the mkopcodeh.awk and mkopcodec.awk scripts which extract the
   ** information from the vdbe.c source text */
-  fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc, 
+  fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc,
       sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3, zP4, pOp->p5,
       zCom
   );
@@ -73752,15 +73752,15 @@ static void releaseMemArray(Mem *p, int N){
       assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(p) );
 
       /* This block is really an inlined version of sqlite3VdbeMemRelease()
-      ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is 
+      ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is
       ** being set to NULL after releasing any dynamic resources.
       **
-      ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to 
-      ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7 
-      ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if 
+      ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to
+      ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7
+      ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if
       ** sqlite3MemRelease() were called from here. With -O2, this jumps
-      ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table 
-      ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind() 
+      ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table
+      ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind()
       ** and reset(). Inserts are grouped into a transaction.
       */
       testcase( p->flags & MEM_Agg );
@@ -73898,7 +73898,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeList(
       pMem->flags = MEM_Int;
       pMem->u.i = i;                                /* Program counter */
       pMem++;
-  
+
       pMem->flags = MEM_Static|MEM_Str|MEM_Term;
       pMem->z = (char*)sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode); /* Opcode */
       assert( pMem->z!=0 );
@@ -73964,7 +73964,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeList(
       sqlite3_snprintf(3, pMem->z, "%.2x", pOp->p5);   /* P5 */
       pMem->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
       pMem++;
-  
+
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS
       if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pMem, 500) ){
         assert( p->db->mallocFailed );
@@ -74123,11 +74123,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRewind(Vdbe *p){
 ** creating the virtual machine.  This involves things such
 ** as allocating registers and initializing the program counter.
 ** After the VDBE has be prepped, it can be executed by one or more
-** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().  
+** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().
 **
 ** This function may be called exactly once on each virtual machine.
 ** After this routine is called the VM has been "packaged" and is ready
-** to run.  After this routine is called, further calls to 
+** to run.  After this routine is called, further calls to
 ** sqlite3VdbeAddOp() functions are prohibited.  This routine disconnects
 ** the Vdbe from the Parse object that helped generate it so that the
 ** the Vdbe becomes an independent entity and the Parse object can be
@@ -74159,7 +74159,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
   nMem = pParse->nMem;
   nCursor = pParse->nTab;
   nArg = pParse->nMaxArg;
-  
+
   /* Each cursor uses a memory cell.  The first cursor (cursor 0) can
   ** use aMem[0] which is not otherwise used by the VDBE program.  Allocate
   ** space at the end of aMem[] for cursors 1 and greater.
@@ -74187,10 +74187,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
   p->expired = 0;
 
   /* Memory for registers, parameters, cursor, etc, is allocated in one or two
-  ** passes.  On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the 
+  ** passes.  On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the
   ** end of the opcode array.  If we are unable to satisfy all memory
   ** requirements by reusing the opcode array tail, then the second
-  ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation.  
+  ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation.
   **
   ** This two-pass approach that reuses as much memory as possible from
   ** the leftover memory at the end of the opcode array.  This can significantly
@@ -74232,7 +74232,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
 }
 
 /*
-** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor 
+** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor
 ** happens to hold.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(Vdbe *p, VdbeCursor *pCx){
@@ -74314,7 +74314,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(VdbeFrame *pFrame){
 /*
 ** Close all cursors.
 **
-** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory 
+** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory
 ** cell array. This is necessary as the memory cell array may contain
 ** pointers to VdbeFrame objects, which may in turn contain pointers to
 ** open cursors.
@@ -74411,27 +74411,27 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
   int needXcommit = 0;
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
-  /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply 
-  ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used. 
+  /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply
+  ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used.
   */
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(p);
 #endif
 
   /* Before doing anything else, call the xSync() callback for any
   ** virtual module tables written in this transaction. This has to
-  ** be done before determining whether a master journal file is 
+  ** be done before determining whether a master journal file is
   ** required, as an xSync() callback may add an attached database
   ** to the transaction.
   */
   rc = sqlite3VtabSync(db, p);
 
   /* This loop determines (a) if the commit hook should be invoked and
-  ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not 
-  ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than 
+  ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not
+  ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than
   ** one database file has an open write transaction, a master journal
   ** file is required for an atomic commit.
-  */ 
-  for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ 
+  */
+  for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
     Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
     if( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) ){
       /* Whether or not a database might need a master journal depends upon
@@ -74451,7 +74451,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
       pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt);
       if( db->aDb[i].safety_level!=PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_OFF
        && aMJNeeded[sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager)]
-      ){ 
+      ){
         assert( i!=1 );
         nTrans++;
       }
@@ -74476,8 +74476,8 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
   ** master-journal.
   **
   ** If the return value of sqlite3BtreeGetFilename() is a zero length
-  ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file.  In 
-  ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the 
+  ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file.  In
+  ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the
   ** simple case then too.
   */
   if( 0==sqlite3Strlen30(sqlite3BtreeGetFilename(db->aDb[0].pBt))
@@ -74490,7 +74490,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
       }
     }
 
-    /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1. 
+    /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1.
     ** If one of the BtreeCommitPhaseOne() calls fails, this indicates an
     ** IO error while deleting or truncating a journal file. It is unlikely,
     ** but could happen. In this case abandon processing and return the error.
@@ -74548,7 +74548,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
     }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && res );
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       /* Open the master journal. */
-      rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zMaster, &pMaster, 
+      rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zMaster, &pMaster,
           SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE|
           SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE|SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL, 0
       );
@@ -74557,7 +74557,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
       sqlite3DbFree(db, zMaster);
       return rc;
     }
- 
+
     /* Write the name of each database file in the transaction into the new
     ** master journal file. If an error occurs at this point close
     ** and delete the master journal file. All the individual journal files
@@ -74605,7 +74605,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
     ** in case the master journal file name was written into the journal
     ** file before the failure occurred.
     */
-    for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ 
+    for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
       Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
       if( pBt ){
         rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(pBt, zMaster);
@@ -74638,7 +74638,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
     */
     disable_simulated_io_errors();
     sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
-    for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ 
+    for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
       Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
       if( pBt ){
         sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(pBt, 1);
@@ -74654,7 +74654,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This routine checks that the sqlite3.nVdbeActive count variable
 ** matches the number of vdbe's in the list sqlite3.pVdbe that are
 ** currently active. An assertion fails if the two counts do not match.
@@ -74690,10 +74690,10 @@ static void checkActiveVdbeCnt(sqlite3 *db){
 ** If the Vdbe passed as the first argument opened a statement-transaction,
 ** close it now. Argument eOp must be either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or
 ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then the statement
-** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the 
+** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the
 ** statement transaction is committed.
 **
-** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned. 
+** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned.
 ** Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
 */
 static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
@@ -74706,7 +74706,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
   assert( db->nStatement>0 );
   assert( p->iStatement==(db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint) );
 
-  for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ 
+  for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
     int rc2 = SQLITE_OK;
     Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
     if( pBt ){
@@ -74733,8 +74733,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
     }
   }
 
-  /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the 
-  ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when 
+  /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the
+  ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when
   ** the statement transaction was opened.  */
   if( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
     db->nDeferredCons = p->nStmtDefCons;
@@ -74751,20 +74751,20 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
 
 
 /*
-** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database 
-** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be 
+** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database
+** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be
 ** committed. If there are outstanding deferred foreign key constraint
 ** violations, return SQLITE_ERROR. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
 **
-** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns 
+** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns
 ** SQLITE_ERROR, set the result of the VM to SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY
 ** and write an error message to it. Then return SQLITE_ERROR.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(Vdbe *p, int deferred){
   sqlite3 *db = p->db;
-  if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0) 
-   || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0) 
+  if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0)
+   || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0)
   ){
     p->rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY;
     p->errorAction = OE_Abort;
@@ -74794,7 +74794,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
 
   /* This function contains the logic that determines if a statement or
   ** transaction will be committed or rolled back as a result of the
-  ** execution of this virtual machine. 
+  ** execution of this virtual machine.
   **
   ** If any of the following errors occur:
   **
@@ -74832,16 +74832,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
     isSpecialError = mrc==SQLITE_NOMEM || mrc==SQLITE_IOERR
                      || mrc==SQLITE_INTERRUPT || mrc==SQLITE_FULL;
     if( isSpecialError ){
-      /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT, 
-      ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint 
-      ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a 
+      /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT,
+      ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint
+      ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a
       ** consistent state.
       **
       ** Even if the statement is read-only, it is important to perform
-      ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error 
+      ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error
       ** occurred while writing to the journal, sub-journal or database
       ** file as part of an effort to free up cache space (see function
-      ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore 
+      ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore
       ** the pager to a consistent state.
       */
       if( !p->readOnly || mrc!=SQLITE_INTERRUPT ){
@@ -74863,16 +74863,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0);
     }
-  
-    /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer 
-    ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction. 
+
+    /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer
+    ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction.
     **
-    ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled 
-    ** above has occurred. 
+    ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled
+    ** above has occurred.
     */
-    if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db) 
-     && db->autoCommit 
-     && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0) 
+    if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db)
+     && db->autoCommit
+     && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0)
     ){
       if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){
         rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1);
@@ -74882,10 +74882,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
             return SQLITE_ERROR;
           }
           rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY;
-        }else{ 
-          /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful 
+        }else{
+          /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful
           ** or hit an 'OR FAIL' constraint and there are no deferred foreign
-          ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit 
+          ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit
           ** is required. */
           rc = vdbeCommit(db, p);
         }
@@ -74919,7 +74919,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
         p->nChange = 0;
       }
     }
-  
+
     /* If eStatementOp is non-zero, then a statement transaction needs to
     ** be committed or rolled back. Call sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement() to
     ** do so. If this operation returns an error, and the current statement
@@ -74940,9 +74940,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
         p->nChange = 0;
       }
     }
-  
+
     /* If this was an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE and no statement transaction
-    ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter. 
+    ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter.
     */
     if( p->changeCntOn ){
       if( eStatementOp!=SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
@@ -74973,7 +74973,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
   }
 
   /* If the auto-commit flag is set to true, then any locks that were held
-  ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked() 
+  ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked()
   ** to invoke any required unlock-notify callbacks.
   */
   if( db->autoCommit ){
@@ -74995,7 +74995,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeResetStepResult(Vdbe *p){
 
 /*
 ** Copy the error code and error message belonging to the VDBE passed
-** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be 
+** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be
 ** returned by calls to sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg()).
 **
 ** This function does not clear the VDBE error code or message, just
@@ -75020,7 +75020,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeTransferError(Vdbe *p){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SQLLOG
 /*
-** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run, 
+** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run,
 ** invoke it.
 */
 static void vdbeInvokeSqllog(Vdbe *v){
@@ -75084,7 +75084,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeReset(Vdbe *p){
   /* Reset register contents and reclaim error message memory.
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-  /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and 
+  /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and
   ** Vdbe.aMem[] arrays have already been cleaned up.  */
   if( p->apCsr ) for(i=0; i<p->nCursor; i++) assert( p->apCsr[i]==0 );
   if( p->aMem ){
@@ -75133,7 +75133,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeReset(Vdbe *p){
   p->magic = VDBE_MAGIC_RESET;
   return p->rc & db->errMask;
 }
- 
+
 /*
 ** Clean up and delete a VDBE after execution.  Return an integer which is
 ** the result code.  Write any error message text into *pzErrMsg.
@@ -75154,8 +75154,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeFinalize(Vdbe *p){
 ** the first argument.
 **
 ** Or, if iOp is greater than or equal to zero, then the destructor is
-** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user 
-** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of 
+** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user
+** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of
 ** VM pVdbe, and only then if:
 **
 **    * the associated function parameter is the 32nd or later (counting
@@ -75427,7 +75427,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialType(Mem *pMem, int file_format, u32 *pLen){
 ** The sizes for serial types less than 128
 */
 static const u8 sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[] = {
-        /*  0   1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9 */   
+        /*  0   1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9 */
 /*   0 */   0,  1,  2,  3,  4,  6,  8,  8,  0,  0,
 /*  10 */   0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  1,  2,  2,  3,  3,
 /*  20 */   4,  4,  5,  5,  6,  6,  7,  7,  8,  8,
@@ -75450,19 +75450,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(u32 serial_type){
   if( serial_type>=128 ){
     return (serial_type-12)/2;
   }else{
-    assert( serial_type<12 
+    assert( serial_type<12
             || sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]==(serial_type - 12)/2 );
     return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
   }
 }
 SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(u8 serial_type){
   assert( serial_type<128 );
-  return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];  
+  return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
 }
 
 /*
-** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating 
-** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the 
+** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating
+** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the
 ** upper 4 bytes.  Return the result.
 **
 ** For most architectures, this is a no-op.
@@ -75484,7 +75484,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(u8 serial_type){
 ** (2007-08-30)  Frank van Vugt has studied this problem closely
 ** and has send his findings to the SQLite developers.  Frank
 ** writes that some Linux kernels offer floating point hardware
-** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full 
+** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full
 ** 48-bits as required by the IEEE standard.  (This is the
 ** CONFIG_FPE_FASTFPE option.)  On such systems, floating point
 ** byte swapping becomes very complicated.  To avoid problems,
@@ -75514,7 +75514,7 @@ static u64 floatSwap(u64 in){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Write the serialized data blob for the value stored in pMem into 
+** Write the serialized data blob for the value stored in pMem into
 ** buf. It is assumed that the caller has allocated sufficient space.
 ** Return the number of bytes written.
 **
@@ -75525,7 +75525,7 @@ static u64 floatSwap(u64 in){
 ** Return the number of bytes actually written into buf[].  The number
 ** of bytes in the zero-filled tail is included in the return value only
 ** if those bytes were zeroed in buf[].
-*/ 
+*/
 SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(u8 *buf, Mem *pMem, u32 serial_type){
   u32 len;
 
@@ -75579,7 +75579,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(u8 *buf, Mem *pMem, u32 serial_type){
 ** The few cases that require local variables are broken out into a separate
 ** routine so that in most cases the overhead of moving the stack pointer
 ** is avoided.
-*/ 
+*/
 static u32 SQLITE_NOINLINE serialGet(
   const unsigned char *buf,     /* Buffer to deserialize from */
   u32 serial_type,              /* Serial type to deserialize */
@@ -75657,7 +75657,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(
       /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-01849-26079 Value is a big-endian 32-bit
       ** twos-complement integer. */
       pMem->u.i = FOUR_BYTE_INT(buf);
-#ifdef __HP_cc 
+#ifdef __HP_cc
       /* Work around a sign-extension bug in the HP compiler for HP/UX */
       if( buf[0]&0x80 ) pMem->u.i |= 0xffffffff80000000LL;
 #endif
@@ -75709,7 +75709,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(
 ** The space is either allocated using sqlite3DbMallocRaw() or from within
 ** the unaligned buffer passed via the second and third arguments (presumably
 ** stack space). If the former, then *ppFree is set to a pointer that should
-** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the 
+** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the
 ** allocation comes from the pSpace/szSpace buffer, *ppFree is set to NULL
 ** before returning.
 **
@@ -75731,10 +75731,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE UnpackedRecord *sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord(
 }
 
 /*
-** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the 
+** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the
 ** UnpackedRecord structure indicated by the fourth argument with the
 ** contents of the decoded record.
-*/ 
+*/
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
   KeyInfo *pKeyInfo,     /* Information about the record format */
   int nKey,              /* Size of the binary record */
@@ -75742,7 +75742,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
   UnpackedRecord *p      /* Populate this structure before returning. */
 ){
   const unsigned char *aKey = (const unsigned char *)pKey;
-  int d; 
+  int d;
   u32 idx;                        /* Offset in aKey[] to read from */
   u16 u;                          /* Unsigned loop counter */
   u32 szHdr;
@@ -75805,13 +75805,13 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug(
 
   /* Compilers may complain that mem1.u.i is potentially uninitialized.
   ** We could initialize it, as shown here, to silence those complaints.
-  ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing 
+  ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing
   ** the unnecessary initialization has a measurable negative performance
   ** impact, since this routine is a very high runner.  And so, we choose
   ** to ignore the compiler warnings and leave this variable uninitialized.
   */
   /*  mem1.u.i = 0;  // not needed, here to silence compiler warning */
-  
+
   idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1);
   if( szHdr1>98307 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT;
   d1 = szHdr1;
@@ -75832,7 +75832,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug(
     ** sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen() in the common case.
     */
     if( d1+serial_type1+2>(u32)nKey1
-     && d1+sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u32)nKey1 
+     && d1+sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u32)nKey1
     ){
       break;
     }
@@ -75888,7 +75888,7 @@ debugCompareEnd:
 ** incorrectly.
 */
 static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(
-  int nKey, const void *pKey,   /* The record to verify */ 
+  int nKey, const void *pKey,   /* The record to verify */
   const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo       /* Compare size with this KeyInfo */
 ){
   int nField = 0;
@@ -75914,7 +75914,7 @@ static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(
 /*
 ** Both *pMem1 and *pMem2 contain string values. Compare the two values
 ** using the collation sequence pColl. As usual, return a negative , zero
-** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than 
+** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than
 ** *pMem2, respectively. Similar in spirit to "rc = (*pMem1) - (*pMem2);".
 */
 static int vdbeCompareMemString(
@@ -76041,7 +76041,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C
   f2 = pMem2->flags;
   combined_flags = f1|f2;
   assert( (combined_flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 );
- 
+
   /* If one value is NULL, it is less than the other. If both values
   ** are NULL, return 0.
   */
@@ -76091,7 +76091,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C
     }
 
     assert( pMem1->enc==pMem2->enc || pMem1->db->mallocFailed );
-    assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 || 
+    assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ||
             pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE );
 
     /* The collation sequence must be defined at this point, even if
@@ -76106,7 +76106,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C
     /* If a NULL pointer was passed as the collate function, fall through
     ** to the blob case and use memcmp().  */
   }
- 
+
   /* Both values must be blobs.  Compare using memcmp().  */
   return sqlite3BlobCompare(pMem1, pMem2);
 }
@@ -76114,7 +76114,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C
 
 /*
 ** The first argument passed to this function is a serial-type that
-** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive 
+** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive
 ** except 7. The second points to a buffer containing an integer value
 ** serialized according to serial_type. This function deserializes
 ** and returns the value.
@@ -76156,7 +76156,7 @@ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){
 /*
 ** This function compares the two table rows or index records
 ** specified by {nKey1, pKey1} and pPKey2.  It returns a negative, zero
-** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or 
+** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or
 ** greater than key2.  The {nKey1, pKey1} key must be a blob
 ** created by the OP_MakeRecord opcode of the VDBE.  The pPKey2
 ** key must be a parsed key such as obtained from
@@ -76165,12 +76165,12 @@ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){
 ** If argument bSkip is non-zero, it is assumed that the caller has already
 ** determined that the first fields of the keys are equal.
 **
-** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all 
-** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is 
+** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all
+** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is
 ** returned.
 **
-** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to 
-** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered, 
+** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to
+** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered,
 ** pPKey2->errCode is set to SQLITE_NOMEM and, if it is not NULL, the
 ** malloc-failed flag set on database handle (pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db).
 */
@@ -76202,7 +76202,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
   }else{
     idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1);
     d1 = szHdr1;
-    if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){ 
+    if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){
       pPKey2->errCode = (u8)SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
       return 0;  /* Corruption */
     }
@@ -76210,7 +76210,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
   }
 
   VVA_ONLY( mem1.szMalloc = 0; ) /* Only needed by assert() statements */
-  assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nAllField>=pPKey2->nField 
+  assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nAllField>=pPKey2->nField
        || CORRUPT_DB );
   assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->aSortOrder!=0 );
   assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nKeyField>0 );
@@ -76245,7 +76245,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
       serial_type = aKey1[idx1];
       if( serial_type>=10 ){
         /* Serial types 12 or greater are strings and blobs (greater than
-        ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future 
+        ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future
         ** use", so it doesn't really matter what the results of comparing
         ** them to numberic values are.  */
         rc = +1;
@@ -76291,7 +76291,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
         }else{
           int nCmp = MIN(mem1.n, pRhs->n);
           rc = memcmp(&aKey1[d1], pRhs->z, nCmp);
-          if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n; 
+          if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n;
         }
       }
     }
@@ -76353,8 +76353,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
   /* rc==0 here means that one or both of the keys ran out of fields and
   ** all the fields up to that point were equal. Return the default_rc
   ** value.  */
-  assert( CORRUPT_DB 
-       || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc) 
+  assert( CORRUPT_DB
+       || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc)
        || pKeyInfo->db->mallocFailed
   );
   pPKey2->eqSeen = 1;
@@ -76369,8 +76369,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(
 
 
 /*
-** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() 
-** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the 
+** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
+** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the
 ** size-of-header varint at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single
 ** byte (i.e. is less than 128).
 **
@@ -76425,7 +76425,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
       testcase( lhs<0 );
       break;
     }
-    case 8: 
+    case 8:
       lhs = 0;
       break;
     case 9:
@@ -76433,11 +76433,11 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
       break;
 
     /* This case could be removed without changing the results of running
-    ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch 
+    ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch
     ** statement (since the range of switch targets now starts at zero and
     ** is contiguous) but does not cause any duplicate code to be generated
-    ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other 
-    ** compilers might be similar.  */ 
+    ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other
+    ** compilers might be similar.  */
     case 0: case 7:
       return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2);
 
@@ -76451,7 +76451,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
   }else if( v<lhs ){
     res = pPKey2->r2;
   }else if( pPKey2->nField>1 ){
-    /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing 
+    /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing
     ** fields.  */
     res = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, 1);
   }else{
@@ -76466,9 +76466,9 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() 
+** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
 ** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is a string, that (b) the first field
-** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint 
+** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint
 ** at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single byte.
 */
 static int vdbeRecordCompareString(
@@ -76484,7 +76484,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareString(
   getVarint32(&aKey1[1], serial_type);
   if( serial_type<12 ){
     res = pPKey2->r1;      /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a number or a null */
-  }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){ 
+  }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){
     res = pPKey2->r2;      /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a blob */
   }else{
     int nCmp;
@@ -76536,7 +76536,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE RecordCompare sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(UnpackedRecord *p){
   /* varintRecordCompareInt() and varintRecordCompareString() both assume
   ** that the size-of-header varint that occurs at the start of each record
   ** fits in a single byte (i.e. is 127 or less). varintRecordCompareInt()
-  ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the 
+  ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the
   ** maximum possible legal header size plus 8 bytes. Because there is
   ** guaranteed to be at least 74 (but not 136) bytes of padding following each
   ** buffer passed to varintRecordCompareInt() this makes it convenient to
@@ -76589,7 +76589,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(sqlite3 *db, BtCursor *pCur, i64 *rowid){
   /* Get the size of the index entry.  Only indices entries of less
   ** than 2GiB are support - anything large must be database corruption.
   ** Any corruption is detected in sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr(), though, so
-  ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits  
+  ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits
   */
   assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) );
   nCellKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur);
@@ -76652,7 +76652,7 @@ idx_rowid_corruption:
 **
 ** pUnpacked is either created without a rowid or is truncated so that it
 ** omits the rowid at the end.  The rowid at the end of the index entry
-** is ignored as well.  Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes 
+** is ignored as well.  Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes
 ** of the keys prior to the final rowid, not the entire key.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(
@@ -76688,7 +76688,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(
 
 /*
 ** This routine sets the value to be returned by subsequent calls to
-** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'. 
+** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(sqlite3 *db, int nChange){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
@@ -76737,7 +76737,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3VdbePrepareFlags(Vdbe *v){
 
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to an sqlite3_value structure containing the value bound
-** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return 
+** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return
 ** 0 instead. Unless it is NULL, apply affinity aff (one of the SQLITE_AFF_*
 ** constants) to the value before returning it.
 **
@@ -76789,7 +76789,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3NotPureFunc(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
   if( pCtx->pVdbe==0 ) return 1;
 #endif
   if( pCtx->pVdbe->aOp[pCtx->iOp].opcode==OP_PureFunc ){
-    sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, 
+    sqlite3_result_error(pCtx,
        "non-deterministic function in index expression or CHECK constraint",
        -1);
     return 0;
@@ -76817,7 +76817,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(Vdbe *p, sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
 
 /*
-** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated 
+** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated
 ** with the memory cells in the p->aMem[] array. Also free the UnpackedRecord
 ** structure itself, using sqlite3DbFree().
 **
@@ -76871,7 +76871,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(
     }
   }
 
-  assert( pCsr->nField==pTab->nCol 
+  assert( pCsr->nField==pTab->nCol
        || (pCsr->nField==pTab->nCol+1 && op==SQLITE_DELETE && iReg==-1)
   );
 
@@ -77203,7 +77203,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_value *sqlite3_value_dup(const sqlite3_value *pOrig){
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value *pOld){
   sqlite3ValueFree(pOld);
 }
-  
+
 
 /**************************** sqlite3_result_  *******************************
 ** The following routines are used by user-defined functions to specify
@@ -77244,9 +77244,9 @@ static int invokeValueDestructor(
   return SQLITE_TOOBIG;
 }
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
   assert( n>=0 );
@@ -77254,8 +77254,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob(
   setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, 0, xDel);
 }
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob64(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
   sqlite3_uint64 n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
@@ -77316,8 +77316,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context *pCtx, unsigned int eSubt
   pOut->flags |= MEM_Subtype;
 }
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const char *z, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const char *z,
   int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
@@ -77325,8 +77325,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text(
   setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF8, xDel);
 }
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text64(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const char *z, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const char *z,
   sqlite3_uint64 n,
   void (*xDel)(void *),
   unsigned char enc
@@ -77342,27 +77342,27 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text64(
 }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
   setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE, xDel);
 }
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16be(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
   setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF16BE, xDel);
 }
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16le(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
@@ -77393,7 +77393,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_code(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int errCode){
   if( pCtx->pVdbe ) pCtx->pVdbe->rcApp = errCode;
 #endif
   if( pCtx->pOut->flags & MEM_Null ){
-    sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, sqlite3ErrStr(errCode), -1, 
+    sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, sqlite3ErrStr(errCode), -1,
                          SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
   }
 }
@@ -77403,7 +77403,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_toobig(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
   pCtx->isError = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
   pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 1;
-  sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1, 
+  sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1,
                        SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
 }
 
@@ -77417,7 +77417,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_nomem(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It 
+** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It
 ** invokes callbacks registered with sqlite3_wal_hook() as required.
 */
 static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -77446,7 +77446,7 @@ static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){
 ** statement is completely executed or an error occurs.
 **
 ** This routine implements the bulk of the logic behind the sqlite_step()
-** API.  The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a 
+** API.  The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a
 ** schema change has occurred.  That detail is handled by the
 ** outer sqlite3_step() wrapper procedure.
 */
@@ -77460,15 +77460,15 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
     ** sqlite3_step() after any error or after SQLITE_DONE.  But beginning
     ** with version 3.7.0, we changed this so that sqlite3_reset() would
     ** be called automatically instead of throwing the SQLITE_MISUSE error.
-    ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility, 
+    ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility,
     ** since any application that receives an SQLITE_MISUSE is broken by
     ** definition.
     **
     ** Nevertheless, some published applications that were originally written
-    ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE 
+    ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE
     ** returns, and those were broken by the automatic-reset change.  As a
     ** a work-around, the SQLITE_OMIT_AUTORESET compile-time restores the
-    ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the 
+    ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the
     ** previous sqlite3_step() returned something other than a SQLITE_LOCKED
     ** or SQLITE_BUSY error.
     */
@@ -77504,7 +77504,7 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
       db->u1.isInterrupted = 0;
     }
 
-    assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0 
+    assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0
         || (db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0)
     );
 
@@ -77554,25 +77554,25 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
     p->rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
   }
 end_of_step:
-  /* At this point local variable rc holds the value that should be 
-  ** returned if this statement was compiled using the legacy 
+  /* At this point local variable rc holds the value that should be
+  ** returned if this statement was compiled using the legacy
   ** sqlite3_prepare() interface. According to the docs, this can only
-  ** be one of the values in the first assert() below. Variable p->rc 
-  ** contains the value that would be returned if sqlite3_finalize() 
+  ** be one of the values in the first assert() below. Variable p->rc
+  ** contains the value that would be returned if sqlite3_finalize()
   ** were called on statement p.
   */
-  assert( rc==SQLITE_ROW  || rc==SQLITE_DONE   || rc==SQLITE_ERROR 
+  assert( rc==SQLITE_ROW  || rc==SQLITE_DONE   || rc==SQLITE_ERROR
        || (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_MISUSE
   );
   assert( (p->rc!=SQLITE_ROW && p->rc!=SQLITE_DONE) || p->rc==p->rcApp );
-  if( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 
-   && rc!=SQLITE_ROW 
-   && rc!=SQLITE_DONE 
+  if( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0
+   && rc!=SQLITE_ROW
+   && rc!=SQLITE_DONE
   ){
-    /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an 
+    /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an
     ** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the
     ** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same value.
-    */ 
+    */
     rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p);
   }
   return (rc&db->errMask);
@@ -77600,15 +77600,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_step(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
     int savedPc = v->pc;
     rc = sqlite3Reprepare(v);
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
-      /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement. 
-      ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded 
-      ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message 
+      /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement.
+      ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded
+      ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message
       ** from the database handle into the statement and sets the statement
-      ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is 
+      ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is
       ** finalized or reset the parser error message is available via
       ** sqlite3_errmsg() and sqlite3_errcode().
       */
-      const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr); 
+      const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr);
       sqlite3DbFree(db, v->zErrMsg);
       if( !db->mallocFailed ){
         v->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, zErr);
@@ -77773,9 +77773,9 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_get_auxdata(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int iArg){
 ** access code.
 */
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_set_auxdata(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  int iArg, 
-  void *pAux, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  int iArg,
+  void *pAux,
   void (*xDelete)(void*)
 ){
   AuxData *pAuxData;
@@ -77820,7 +77820,7 @@ failed:
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
 /*
-** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been 
+** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been
 ** called.
 **
 ** This function is deprecated.  Do not use it for new code.  It is
@@ -77865,9 +77865,9 @@ static const Mem *columnNullValue(void){
   ** these assert()s from failing, when building with SQLITE_DEBUG defined
   ** using gcc, we force nullMem to be 8-byte aligned using the magical
   ** __attribute__((aligned(8))) macro.  */
-  static const Mem nullMem 
+  static const Mem nullMem
 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && defined(__GNUC__)
-    __attribute__((aligned(8))) 
+    __attribute__((aligned(8)))
 #endif
     = {
         /* .u          = */ {0},
@@ -77913,9 +77913,9 @@ static Mem *columnMem(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a 
+** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a
 ** column value (i.e. a value returned by evaluating an SQL expression in the
-** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If 
+** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If
 ** malloc() has failed, the threads mallocFailed flag is cleared and the result
 ** code of statement pStmt set to SQLITE_NOMEM.
 **
@@ -77954,8 +77954,8 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_column_blob(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){
   const void *val;
   val = sqlite3_value_blob( columnMem(pStmt,i) );
   /* Even though there is no encoding conversion, value_blob() might
-  ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob() 
-  ** expression. 
+  ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob()
+  ** expression.
   */
   columnMallocFailure(pStmt);
   return val;
@@ -78159,11 +78159,11 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_column_origin_name16(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int N){
 
 
 /******************************* sqlite3_bind_  ***************************
-** 
+**
 ** Routines used to attach values to wildcards in a compiled SQL statement.
 */
 /*
-** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the 
+** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the
 ** the same as binding a NULL value to the column. If the "i" parameter is
 ** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Othewise SQLITE_OK.
 **
@@ -78182,7 +78182,7 @@ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, int i){
   if( p->magic!=VDBE_MAGIC_RUN || p->pc>=0 ){
     sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_MISUSE);
     sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex);
-    sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, 
+    sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
         "bind on a busy prepared statement: [%s]", p->zSql);
     return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
   }
@@ -78197,7 +78197,7 @@ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, int i){
   pVar->flags = MEM_Null;
   sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_OK);
 
-  /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then 
+  /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then
   ** binding a new value to this variable invalidates the current query plan.
   **
   ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-48440-37595 If the specific value bound to host
@@ -78253,10 +78253,10 @@ static int bindText(
 ** Bind a blob value to an SQL statement variable.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob(
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const void *zData, 
-  int nData, 
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const void *zData,
+  int nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*)
 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -78265,10 +78265,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob(
   return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, 0);
 }
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob64(
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const void *zData, 
-  sqlite3_uint64 nData, 
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const void *zData,
+  sqlite3_uint64 nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*)
 ){
   assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC );
@@ -78328,20 +78328,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_pointer(
   }
   return rc;
 }
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text( 
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const char *zData, 
-  int nData, 
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text(
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const char *zData,
+  int nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*)
 ){
   return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF8);
 }
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64( 
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const char *zData, 
-  sqlite3_uint64 nData, 
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64(
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const char *zData,
+  sqlite3_uint64 nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*),
   unsigned char enc
 ){
@@ -78355,10 +78355,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64(
 }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text16(
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const void *zData, 
-  int nData, 
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const void *zData,
+  int nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*)
 ){
   return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE);
@@ -78422,7 +78422,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_zeroblob64(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, sqlite3_uint6
 
 /*
 ** Return the number of wildcards that can be potentially bound to.
-** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.  
+** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_parameter_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
   Vdbe *p = (Vdbe*)pStmt;
@@ -78620,8 +78620,8 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_expanded_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
 ** if successful, or a NULL pointer if an OOM error is encountered.
 */
 static UnpackedRecord *vdbeUnpackRecord(
-  KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, 
-  int nKey, 
+  KeyInfo *pKeyInfo,
+  int nKey,
   const void *pKey
 ){
   UnpackedRecord *pRet;           /* Return value */
@@ -78711,7 +78711,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_preupdate_count(sqlite3 *db){
 ** only. It returns zero if the change that caused the callback was made
 ** immediately by a user SQL statement. Or, if the change was made by a
 ** trigger program, it returns the number of trigger programs currently
-** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a 
+** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a
 ** top-level trigger etc.).
 **
 ** For the purposes of the previous paragraph, a foreign key CASCADE, SET NULL
@@ -78920,8 +78920,8 @@ static int findNextHostParameter(const char *zSql, int *pnToken){
 /*
 ** This function returns a pointer to a nul-terminated string in memory
 ** obtained from sqlite3DbMalloc(). If sqlite3.nVdbeExec is 1, then the
-** string contains a copy of zRawSql but with host parameters expanded to 
-** their current bindings. Or, if sqlite3.nVdbeExec is greater than 1, 
+** string contains a copy of zRawSql but with host parameters expanded to
+** their current bindings. Or, if sqlite3.nVdbeExec is greater than 1,
 ** then the returned string holds a copy of zRawSql with "-- " prepended
 ** to each line of text.
 **
@@ -78959,7 +78959,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(
   char zBase[100];         /* Initial working space */
 
   db = p->db;
-  sqlite3StrAccumInit(&out, 0, zBase, sizeof(zBase), 
+  sqlite3StrAccumInit(&out, 0, zBase, sizeof(zBase),
                       db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH]);
   if( db->nVdbeExec>1 ){
     while( *zRawSql ){
@@ -79027,7 +79027,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(
           nOut = SQLITE_TRACE_SIZE_LIMIT;
           while( nOut<pVar->n && (pVar->z[nOut]&0xc0)==0x80 ){ nOut++; }
         }
-#endif    
+#endif
         sqlite3XPrintf(&out, "'%.*q'", nOut, pVar->z);
 #ifdef SQLITE_TRACE_SIZE_LIMIT
         if( nOut<pVar->n ){
@@ -79209,7 +79209,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_found_count = 0;
   static void vdbeTakeBranch(int iSrcLine, u8 I, u8 M){
     if( iSrcLine<=2 && ALWAYS(iSrcLine>0) ){
       M = iSrcLine;
-      /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and 
+      /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and
       ** VdbeCoverageNeverTaken() */
       assert( (M & I)==I );
     }else{
@@ -79258,7 +79258,7 @@ static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor(
   u8 eCurType           /* Type of the new cursor */
 ){
   /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory
-  ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a 
+  ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
   ** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a
   ** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons:
   **
@@ -79279,8 +79279,8 @@ static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor(
 
   int nByte;
   VdbeCursor *pCx = 0;
-  nByte = 
-      ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField + 
+  nByte =
+      ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField +
       (eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0);
 
   assert( iCur>=0 && iCur<p->nCursor );
@@ -79341,7 +79341,7 @@ static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec, int bTryForInt){
 ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER:
 ** SQLITE_AFF_REAL:
 ** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC:
-**    Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a 
+**    Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
 **    floating-point representation if an integer representation
 **    is not possible.  Note that the integer representation is
 **    always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because
@@ -79371,7 +79371,7 @@ static void applyAffinity(
   }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){
     /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real
     ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string
-    ** representation.  It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if 
+    ** representation.  It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if
     ** there is already a string rep, but it is pointless to waste those
     ** CPU cycles. */
     if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
@@ -79400,12 +79400,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){
 }
 
 /*
-** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, 
+** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
 ** not the internal Mem* type.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity(
-  sqlite3_value *pVal, 
-  u8 affinity, 
+  sqlite3_value *pVal,
+  u8 affinity,
   u8 enc
 ){
   applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc);
@@ -79431,7 +79431,7 @@ static u16 SQLITE_NOINLINE computeNumericType(Mem *pMem){
 
 /*
 ** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or
-** none.  
+** none.
 **
 ** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags.
 ** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately.
@@ -79568,8 +79568,8 @@ static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){
 
 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
 
-/* 
-** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing 
+/*
+** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
 ** high-performance timing routines.
 */
 /************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of vdbe.c *********************/
@@ -79627,7 +79627,7 @@ static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){
       __asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
       return val;
   }
- 
+
 #elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
 
   __inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
@@ -79669,9 +79669,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE   sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){ return ((sqlite_uint64)0); }
 /*
 ** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It
 ** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to
-** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the 
+** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
 ** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint.
-** 
+**
 ** Usage:
 **
 **     assert( checkSavepointCount(db) );
@@ -79711,7 +79711,7 @@ static Mem *out2Prerelease(Vdbe *p, VdbeOp *pOp){
 
 /*
 ** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can.
-** This is the core of sqlite3_step().  
+** This is the core of sqlite3_step().
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec(
   Vdbe *p                    /* The VDBE */
@@ -79815,7 +79815,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec(
       sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, (int)(pOp - aOp), pOp);
     }
 #endif
-      
+
 
     /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt.  This only happens
     ** if we have a special test build.
@@ -79869,7 +79869,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec(
 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE)
     pOrigOp = pOp;
 #endif
-  
+
     switch( pOp->opcode ){
 
 /*****************************************************************************
@@ -79910,7 +79910,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec(
 /* Opcode:  Goto * P2 * * *
 **
 ** An unconditional jump to address P2.
-** The next instruction executed will be 
+** The next instruction executed will be
 ** the one at index P2 from the beginning of
 ** the program.
 **
@@ -79926,7 +79926,7 @@ jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt:
   /* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev,
   ** OP_VNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon
   ** completion.  Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called
-  ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked. 
+  ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked.
   **
   ** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean.
   ** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this
@@ -79951,7 +79951,7 @@ check_for_interrupt:
     }
   }
 #endif
-  
+
   break;
 }
 
@@ -80083,7 +80083,7 @@ case OP_HaltIfNull: {      /* in3 */
 ** whether or not to rollback the current transaction.  Do not rollback
 ** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback.  If P2==OE_Abort,
 ** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the
-** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. 
+** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
 **
 ** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string.
 **
@@ -80115,7 +80115,7 @@ case OP_Halt: {
     sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange);
     pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame);
     if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){
-      /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program 
+      /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
       ** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt
       ** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing
       ** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified
@@ -80203,7 +80203,7 @@ case OP_Real: {            /* same as TK_FLOAT, out2 */
 /* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 *
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4'
 **
-** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed 
+** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
 ** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time.  During
 ** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored
 ** as the P1 parameter.
@@ -80238,7 +80238,7 @@ case OP_String8: {         /* same as TK_STRING, out2 */
   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
   /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */
 }
-  
+
 /* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1)
 **
@@ -80484,7 +80484,7 @@ case OP_ResultRow: {
   /* Run the progress counter just before returning.
   */
   if( db->xProgress!=0
-   && nVmStep>=nProgressLimit 
+   && nVmStep>=nProgressLimit
    && db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg)!=0
   ){
     rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT;
@@ -80501,8 +80501,8 @@ case OP_ResultRow: {
     goto abort_due_to_error;
   }
 
-  /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then 
-  ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows 
+  /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then
+  ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows
   ** modified to the user. This is the only way that a VM that
   ** opens a statement transaction may invoke this opcode.
   **
@@ -80623,15 +80623,15 @@ case OP_Concat: {           /* same as TK_CONCAT, in1, in2, out3 */
 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1]
 **
 ** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2
-** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in 
-** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is 
+** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
+** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
 ** NULL, the result is NULL.
 */
 /* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * *
 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1]
 **
-** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by 
-** register P1 and store the result in register P3. 
+** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by
+** register P1 and store the result in register P3.
 ** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL.
 ** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
 */
@@ -80832,7 +80832,7 @@ case OP_ShiftRight: {           /* same as TK_RSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */
 
 /* Opcode: AddImm  P1 P2 * * *
 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2
-** 
+**
 ** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1.
 ** The result is always an integer.
 **
@@ -80847,7 +80847,7 @@ case OP_AddImm: {            /* in1 */
 }
 
 /* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * *
-** 
+**
 ** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer.  If the value
 ** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer
 ** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0
@@ -80895,7 +80895,7 @@ case OP_RealAffinity: {                  /* in1 */
 ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1])
 **
 ** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2.
-** 
+**
 ** <ul>
 ** <li> P2=='A' &rarr; BLOB
 ** <li> P2=='B' &rarr; TEXT
@@ -80931,14 +80931,14 @@ case OP_Cast: {                  /* in1 */
 ** store the result of comparison in register P2.
 **
 ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made 
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
 ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
 ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
 ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
 ** back into the input registers P1 and P3.  So this opcode can cause
 ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
 **
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, 
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
 ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
 ** used to determine the results of the comparison.  If both values
 ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
@@ -80977,18 +80977,18 @@ case OP_Cast: {                  /* in1 */
 ** the result of comparison (0 or 1 or NULL) into register P2.
 **
 ** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or
-** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump.  If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL 
+** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump.  If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
 ** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL.
 **
 ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made 
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
 ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
 ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
 ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
 ** back into the input registers P1 and P3.  So this opcode can cause
 ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
 **
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, 
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
 ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
 ** used to determine the results of the comparison.  If both values
 ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
@@ -81174,7 +81174,7 @@ compare_op:
 **
 ** This opcode must immediately follow an OP_Lt or OP_Gt comparison operator.
 ** If result of an OP_Eq comparison on the same two operands
-** would have be NULL or false (0), then then jump to P2. 
+** would have be NULL or false (0), then then jump to P2.
 ** If the result of an OP_Eq comparison on the two previous operands
 ** would have been true (1), then fall through.
 */
@@ -81194,7 +81194,7 @@ case OP_ElseNotEq: {       /* same as TK_ESCAPE, jump */
 ** instruction.  The permutation is stored in the P4 operand.
 **
 ** The permutation is only valid until the next OP_Compare that has
-** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should 
+** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should
 ** occur immediately prior to the OP_Compare.
 **
 ** The first integer in the P4 integer array is the length of the array
@@ -81358,7 +81358,7 @@ case OP_Or: {             /* same as TK_OR, in1, in2, out3 */
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1]
 **
 ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value.  Store the
-** boolean complement in register P2.  If the value in register P1 is 
+** boolean complement in register P2.  If the value in register P1 is
 ** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2.
 */
 case OP_Not: {                /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */
@@ -81478,7 +81478,7 @@ case OP_IsNull: {            /* same as TK_ISNULL, jump, in1 */
 /* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * *
 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2
 **
-** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.  
+** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.
 */
 case OP_NotNull: {            /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */
   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
@@ -81513,7 +81513,7 @@ case OP_IfNullRow: {         /* jump */
 ** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using
 ** the MakeRecord instruction.  (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional
 ** information about the format of the data.)  Extract the P2-th column
-** from this record.  If there are less that (P2+1) 
+** from this record.  If there are less that (P2+1)
 ** values in the record, extract a NULL.
 **
 ** The value extracted is stored in register P3.
@@ -81552,7 +81552,7 @@ case OP_Column: {
   p2 = pOp->p2;
 
   /* If the cursor cache is stale (meaning it is not currently point at
-  ** the correct row) then bring it up-to-date by doing the necessary 
+  ** the correct row) then bring it up-to-date by doing the necessary
   ** B-Tree seek. */
   rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(&pC, &p2);
   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
@@ -81647,7 +81647,7 @@ case OP_Column: {
   */
   if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){
     /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try
-    ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field 
+    ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field
     */
     if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){
       /* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */
@@ -81659,7 +81659,7 @@ case OP_Column: {
       }else{
         zData = pC->aRow;
       }
-  
+
       /* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */
     op_column_read_header:
       i = pC->nHdrParsed;
@@ -81767,7 +81767,7 @@ case OP_Column: {
       **    2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and
       **    3. if the content length is zero.
       ** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading
-      ** content from disk. 
+      ** content from disk.
       **
       ** Although sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() may read at most 8 bytes from the
       ** buffer passed to it, debugging function VdbeMemPrettyPrint() may
@@ -81862,13 +81862,13 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
   ** like this:
   **
   ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
-  ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | 
+  ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 |
   ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
   **
   ** Data(0) is taken from register P1.  Data(1) comes from register P1+1
   ** and so forth.
   **
-  ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the 
+  ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the
   ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The
   ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning
   ** of the record to data0.
@@ -81957,7 +81957,7 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
     goto too_big;
   }
 
-  /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store 
+  /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store
   ** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to
   ** be one of the input registers (because the following call to
   ** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used).
@@ -81999,7 +81999,7 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
 /* Opcode: Count P1 P2 * * *
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=count()
 **
-** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index 
+** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
 ** opened by cursor P1 in register P2
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT
@@ -82039,7 +82039,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
   zName = pOp->p4.z;
 
   /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open
-  ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints. 
+  ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints.
   */
   assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 );
   assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK );
@@ -82049,7 +82049,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
 
   if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){
     if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
-      /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write 
+      /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write
       ** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles).
       */
       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress");
@@ -82073,7 +82073,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
       if( pNew ){
         pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1];
         memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1);
-    
+
         /* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special
         ** "transaction savepoint". */
         if( db->autoCommit ){
@@ -82096,7 +82096,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
     /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an
     ** an error is returned to the user.  */
     for(
-      pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint; 
+      pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint;
       pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName);
       pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext
     ){
@@ -82106,7 +82106,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName);
       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
     }else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
-      /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are 
+      /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are
       ** active write statements.
       */
       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - "
@@ -82115,8 +82115,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
     }else{
 
       /* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so,
-      ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction 
-      ** is committed. 
+      ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction
+      ** is committed.
       */
       int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint;
       if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
@@ -82158,8 +82158,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
           db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_SchemaChange;
         }
       }
-  
-      /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all 
+
+      /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all
       ** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */
       while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){
         pTmp = db->pSavepoint;
@@ -82168,8 +82168,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
         db->nSavepoint--;
       }
 
-      /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on 
-      ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred 
+      /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on
+      ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred
       ** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored
       ** when the savepoint was created.  */
       if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
@@ -82222,7 +82222,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
       db->autoCommit = 1;
     }else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
       /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing
-      ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first. 
+      ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first.
       */
       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - "
                           "SQL statements in progress");
@@ -82252,7 +82252,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
         (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":(
         (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active":
                    "cannot commit - no transaction is active"));
-         
+
     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
     goto abort_due_to_error;
   }
@@ -82263,7 +82263,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
 **
 ** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already
 ** active.
-** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a 
+** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a
 ** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction.
 ** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started.
 **
@@ -82321,13 +82321,13 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
       goto abort_due_to_error;
     }
 
-    if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal 
-     && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1) 
+    if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal
+     && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1)
     ){
       assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) );
       if( p->iStatement==0 ){
         assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 );
-        db->nStatement++; 
+        db->nStatement++;
         p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement;
       }
 
@@ -82357,7 +82357,7 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
   if( pOp->p5 && (iMeta!=pOp->p3 || iGen!=pOp->p4.i) ){
     sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg);
     p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed");
-    /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie 
+    /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie
     ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do
     ** not reload the schema from the database file.
     **
@@ -82367,7 +82367,7 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
     ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to
     ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the
     ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself
-    ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within 
+    ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within
     ** a v-table method.
     */
     if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){
@@ -82415,8 +82415,8 @@ case OP_ReadCookie: {               /* out2 */
 **
 ** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1.
 ** P2==1 is the schema version.  P2==2 is the database format.
-** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache 
-** size, and so forth.  P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the 
+** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
+** size, and so forth.  P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
 ** database file used to store temporary tables.
 **
 ** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode.
@@ -82454,8 +82454,8 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3
 **
 ** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is
-** P2 in a database file.  The database file is determined by P3. 
-** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for 
+** P2 in a database file.  The database file is determined by P3.
+** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
 ** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached
 ** database.  Give the new cursor an identifier of P1.  The P1
 ** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers.
@@ -82474,9 +82474,9 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
 ** SQLITE_BUSY error code.
 **
 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo 
-** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating 
-** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer 
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
+** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
+** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
 ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table.
 **
 ** See also: OpenWrite, ReopenIdx
@@ -82503,9 +82503,9 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
 ** root page.
 **
 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo 
-** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating 
-** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer 
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
+** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
+** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
 ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table, or to the
 ** largest index of any column of the table that is actually used.
 **
@@ -82604,7 +82604,7 @@ case OP_OpenWrite:
   /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of
   ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point
   ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has
-  ** since moved into the btree layer.  */  
+  ** since moved into the btree layer.  */
   pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO;
 
 open_cursor_set_hints:
@@ -82655,7 +82655,7 @@ case OP_OpenDup: {
 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2
 **
 ** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table.
-** The cursor is always opened read/write even if 
+** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
 ** the main database is read-only.  The ephemeral
 ** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed.
 **
@@ -82677,12 +82677,12 @@ case OP_OpenDup: {
 ** by this opcode will be used for automatically created transient
 ** indices in joins.
 */
-case OP_OpenAutoindex: 
+case OP_OpenAutoindex:
 case OP_OpenEphemeral: {
   VdbeCursor *pCx;
   KeyInfo *pKeyInfo;
 
-  static const int vfsFlags = 
+  static const int vfsFlags =
       SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
       SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
       SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
@@ -82694,7 +82694,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: {
   if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
   pCx->nullRow = 1;
   pCx->isEphemeral = 1;
-  rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBtx, 
+  rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBtx,
                         BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5, vfsFlags);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->pBtx, 1);
@@ -82708,7 +82708,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: {
     if( (pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){
       int pgno;
       assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO );
-      rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBtx, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5); 
+      rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBtx, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5);
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         assert( pgno==MASTER_ROOT+1 );
         assert( pKeyInfo->db==db );
@@ -82776,7 +82776,7 @@ case OP_SequenceTest: {
 **
 ** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single
 ** row of data.  The content of that one row is the content of memory
-** register P2.  In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the 
+** register P2.  In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
 ** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2.
 **
 ** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single
@@ -82841,13 +82841,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 /* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 
-** use the value in register P3 as the key.  If cursor P1 refers 
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 
-** that are used as an unpacked index key. 
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as the key.  If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
 **
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the smallest entry that 
-** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records 
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
 ** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
 **
 ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this
@@ -82866,13 +82866,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 /* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 
-** that are used as an unpacked index key. 
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
 **
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the smallest entry that 
-** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than 
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
 **
 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
@@ -82881,16 +82881,16 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 **
 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe
 */
-/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * 
+/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 
-** that are used as an unpacked index key. 
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
 **
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the largest entry that 
-** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than 
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
 **
 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
@@ -82902,13 +82902,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 /* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 
-** that are used as an unpacked index key. 
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
 **
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that 
-** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records 
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
 ** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
 **
 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
@@ -82999,7 +82999,7 @@ case OP_SeekGT: {       /* jump, in3 */
         assert( (OP_SeekLT & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGE & 0x0001) );
         if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekLT & 0x0001) ) oc++;
       }
-    } 
+    }
     rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, (u64)iKey, 0, &res);
     pC->movetoTarget = iKey;  /* Used by OP_Delete */
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -83128,9 +83128,9 @@ seek_not_found:
 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  If
 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
 ** record.
-** 
+**
 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree.  If the record identified by P3 and P4
-** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2.  If P1 
+** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2.  If P1
 ** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control
 ** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the
 ** matching entry.
@@ -83147,7 +83147,7 @@ seek_not_found:
 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  If
 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
 ** record.
-** 
+**
 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree.  If the record identified by P3 and P4
 ** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2.  If all terms of the
 ** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the
@@ -83251,9 +83251,9 @@ case OP_Found: {        /* jump, in3 */
 **
 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
 ** keys).  If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not
-** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.  
+** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.
 ** Or, if P2 is 0, raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain
-** a record with rowid P3 then 
+** a record with rowid P3 then
 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
 ** instruction.
 **
@@ -83276,7 +83276,7 @@ case OP_Found: {        /* jump, in3 */
 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
 ** keys).  P3 is an integer rowid.  If P1 does not contain a record with
 ** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.  Or, if P2 is 0, raise an
-** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then 
+** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then
 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
 ** instruction.
 **
@@ -83346,7 +83346,7 @@ case OP_NotExists:          /* jump, in3 */
 ** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1.
 ** Write the sequence number into register P2.
 ** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this
-** instruction.  
+** instruction.
 */
 case OP_Sequence: {           /* out2 */
   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
@@ -83366,9 +83366,9 @@ case OP_Sequence: {           /* out2 */
 ** table that cursor P1 points to.  The new record number is written
 ** written to register P2.
 **
-** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds 
+** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
 ** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are
-** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum, 
+** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
 ** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the '
 ** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the
 ** AUTOINCREMENT feature.
@@ -83516,8 +83516,8 @@ case OP_NewRowid: {           /* out2 */
 ** is part of an INSERT operation.  The difference is only important to
 ** the update hook.
 **
-** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is 
-** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked 
+** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is
+** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked
 ** following a successful insert.
 **
 ** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically
@@ -83535,7 +83535,7 @@ case OP_NewRowid: {           /* out2 */
 ** This works exactly like OP_Insert except that the key is the
 ** integer value P3, not the value of the integer stored in register P3.
 */
-case OP_Insert: 
+case OP_Insert:
 case OP_InsertInt: {
   Mem *pData;       /* MEM cell holding data for the record to be inserted */
   Mem *pKey;        /* MEM cell holding key  for the record */
@@ -83582,7 +83582,7 @@ case OP_InsertInt: {
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
   /* Invoke the pre-update hook, if any */
-  if( db->xPreUpdateCallback 
+  if( db->xPreUpdateCallback
    && pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE
    && !(pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
   ){
@@ -83625,7 +83625,7 @@ case OP_InsertInt: {
 ** the cursor will be left pointing at  either the next or the previous
 ** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then
 ** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case
-** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If 
+** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If
 ** OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of P5 is clear, then the cursor will be
 ** left in an undefined state.
 **
@@ -83641,11 +83641,11 @@ case OP_InsertInt: {
 ** P1 must not be pseudo-table.  It has to be a real table with
 ** multiple rows.
 **
-** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either 
+** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either
 ** the update or pre-update hook, or both, may be invoked. The P1 cursor must
-** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in 
-** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is 
-** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured, 
+** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in
+** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is
+** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured,
 ** P4 is not NULL, and the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag is set in P2.
 **
 ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set in P2, then P3 contains the address
@@ -83679,7 +83679,7 @@ case OP_Delete: {
   /* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to
   ** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy
   ** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was
-  ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set 
+  ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set
   ** VdbeCursor.movetoTarget to the current rowid.  */
   if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){
     assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
@@ -83697,20 +83697,20 @@ case OP_Delete: {
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
   /* Invoke the pre-update-hook if required. */
   if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && pOp->p4.pTab ){
-    assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) 
-         || HasRowid(pTab)==0 
-         || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int) 
+    assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
+         || HasRowid(pTab)==0
+         || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int)
     );
     sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC,
-        (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE, 
+        (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE,
         zDb, pTab, pC->movetoTarget,
         pOp->p3
     );
   }
   if( opflags & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break;
 #endif
- 
-  /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */ 
+
+  /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */
   assert( (pOp->p5 & ~(OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_AUXDELETE))==0 );
   assert( OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION==BTREE_SAVEPOSITION );
   assert( OPFLAG_AUXDELETE==BTREE_AUXDELETE );
@@ -83763,7 +83763,7 @@ case OP_ResetCount: {
 ** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2
 **
 ** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the
-** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that 
+** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that
 ** the sorter cursor currently points to.  Only the first P4 fields
 ** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared.
 **
@@ -83821,10 +83821,10 @@ case OP_SorterData: {
 /* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 P3 * *
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data
 **
-** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at 
+** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at
 ** which cursor P1 is currently pointing.
-** There is no interpretation of the data.  
-** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as 
+** There is no interpretation of the data.
+** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
 ** it is found in the database file.
 **
 ** If cursor P1 is an index, then the content is the key of the row.
@@ -83974,7 +83974,7 @@ case OP_NullRow: {
 */
 /* Opcode: Last P1 P2 * * *
 **
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1 
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1
 ** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index.
 ** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
 ** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
@@ -84079,10 +84079,10 @@ case OP_Sort: {        /* jump */
 }
 /* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * *
 **
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
 ** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index.
 ** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2.
-** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following 
+** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following
 ** instruction.
 **
 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
@@ -84264,7 +84264,7 @@ next_tail:
 ** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1.  However,
 ** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior
 ** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equivalent
-** to P2. 
+** to P2.
 **
 ** This instruction only works for indices.  The equivalent instruction
 ** for tables is OP_Insert.
@@ -84300,7 +84300,7 @@ case OP_IdxInsert: {        /* in2 */
     x.aMem = aMem + pOp->p3;
     x.nMem = (u16)pOp->p4.i;
     rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x,
-         (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)), 
+         (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)),
         ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0)
         );
     assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
@@ -84314,7 +84314,7 @@ case OP_IdxInsert: {        /* in2 */
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3]
 **
 ** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form
-** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the 
+** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
 ** index opened by cursor P1.
 */
 case OP_IdxDelete: {
@@ -84361,8 +84361,8 @@ case OP_IdxDelete: {
 **
 ** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing
 ** one entry for each column in the P3 table.  If array entry a(i)
-** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is 
-** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i 
+** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is
+** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i
 ** from P1.  This information is stored in P3 and used to redirect
 ** reads against P3 over to P1, thus possibly avoiding the need to
 ** seek and read cursor P3.
@@ -84433,9 +84433,9 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: {           /* out2 */
 /* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 
-** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index 
-** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID 
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index
+** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
 ** fields at the end.
 **
 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value
@@ -84444,9 +84444,9 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: {           /* out2 */
 /* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 
-** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index 
-** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID 
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index
+** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
 ** fields at the end.
 **
 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value
@@ -84455,7 +84455,7 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: {           /* out2 */
 /* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID.  Compare this key value against
 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
 ** ROWID on the P1 index.
@@ -84466,7 +84466,7 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: {           /* out2 */
 /* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID.  Compare this key value against
 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
 ** ROWID on the P1 index.
@@ -84534,15 +84534,15 @@ case OP_IdxGE:  {       /* jump */
 ** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database.  The former
 ** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred -
 ** is stored in register P2. If no page movement was required (because the
-** table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then a 
-** zero is stored in register P2.  If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero 
+** table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then a
+** zero is stored in register P2.  If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero
 ** is stored in register P2.
 **
 ** This opcode throws an error if there are any active reader VMs when
-** it is invoked. This is done to avoid the difficulty associated with 
-** updating existing cursors when a root page is moved in an AUTOVACUUM 
-** database. This error is thrown even if the database is not an AUTOVACUUM 
-** db in order to avoid introducing an incompatibility between autovacuum 
+** it is invoked. This is done to avoid the difficulty associated with
+** updating existing cursors when a root page is moved in an AUTOVACUUM
+** database. This error is thrown even if the database is not an AUTOVACUUM
+** db in order to avoid introducing an incompatibility between autovacuum
 ** and non-autovacuum modes.
 **
 ** See also: Clear
@@ -84590,8 +84590,8 @@ case OP_Destroy: {     /* out2 */
 ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE.
 **
 ** If the P3 value is non-zero, then the table referred to must be an
-** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change 
-** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared. 
+** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change
+** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
 ** If P3 is greater than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is
 ** also incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
 **
@@ -84599,7 +84599,7 @@ case OP_Destroy: {     /* out2 */
 */
 case OP_Clear: {
   int nChange;
- 
+
   nChange = 0;
   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p2) );
@@ -84628,7 +84628,7 @@ case OP_Clear: {
 */
 case OP_ResetSorter: {
   VdbeCursor *pC;
- 
+
   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
   assert( pC!=0 );
@@ -84685,7 +84685,7 @@ case OP_SqlExec: {
 /* Opcode: ParseSchema P1 * * P4 *
 **
 ** Read and parse all entries from the SQLITE_MASTER table of database P1
-** that match the WHERE clause P4. 
+** that match the WHERE clause P4.
 **
 ** This opcode invokes the parser to create a new virtual machine,
 ** then runs the new virtual machine.  It is thus a re-entrant opcode.
@@ -84697,7 +84697,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: {
   InitData initData;
 
   /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes
-  ** on every btree.  This is a prerequisite for invoking 
+  ** on every btree.  This is a prerequisite for invoking
   ** sqlite3InitCallback().
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
@@ -84737,7 +84737,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: {
     }
     goto abort_due_to_error;
   }
-  break;  
+  break;
 }
 
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE)
@@ -84751,7 +84751,7 @@ case OP_LoadAnalysis: {
   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
   rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1);
   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
-  break;  
+  break;
 }
 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */
 
@@ -84759,7 +84759,7 @@ case OP_LoadAnalysis: {
 **
 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
 ** the table named P4 in database P1.  This is called after a table
-** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep 
+** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
 ** the internal representation of the
 ** schema consistent with what is on disk.
 */
@@ -84785,7 +84785,7 @@ case OP_DropIndex: {
 **
 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
 ** the trigger named P4 in database P1.  This is called after a trigger
-** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep 
+** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
 ** the internal representation of the
 ** schema consistent with what is on disk.
 */
@@ -84804,7 +84804,7 @@ case OP_DropTrigger: {
 **
 ** The register P3 contains one less than the maximum number of allowed errors.
 ** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported.
-** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are 
+** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
 ** seen.  Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining.
 **
 ** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integers
@@ -84883,7 +84883,7 @@ case OP_RowSetRead: {       /* jump, in1, out3 */
   i64 val;
 
   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
-  if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 
+  if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0
    || sqlite3RowSetNext(pIn1->u.pRowSet, &val)==0
   ){
     /* The boolean index is empty */
@@ -84956,13 +84956,13 @@ case OP_RowSetTest: {                     /* jump, in1, in3 */
 
 /* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
 **
-** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM). 
+** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
 **
-** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory 
-** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2 
-** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE 
-** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address 
-** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the 
+** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
+** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
+** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
+** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
+** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
 ** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime.
 **
 ** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program.
@@ -84982,17 +84982,17 @@ case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
   pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram;
   pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3];
   assert( pProgram->nOp>0 );
-  
-  /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is 
+
+  /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is
   ** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program
   ** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set
   ** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear).
-  ** 
-  ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is 
-  ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one 
-  ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different 
+  **
+  ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is
+  ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one
+  ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different
   ** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a
-  ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token 
+  ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token
   ** variable.  */
   if( pOp->p5 ){
     t = pProgram->token;
@@ -85008,10 +85008,10 @@ case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
 
   /* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state
   ** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute
-  ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt 
+  ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt
   ** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized.  */
   if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Frame)==0 ){
-    /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the 
+    /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the
     ** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory
     ** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local
     ** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value.
@@ -85053,7 +85053,7 @@ case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
     }
   }else{
     pFrame = pRt->u.pFrame;
-    assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem 
+    assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem
         || (pProgram->nCsr==0 && pProgram->nMem+1==pFrame->nChildMem) );
     assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr );
     assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc );
@@ -85087,10 +85087,10 @@ case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
 
 /* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * *
 **
-** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the 
-** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory 
-** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames 
-** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.* 
+** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
+** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
+** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
+** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
 ** and old.* values.
 **
 ** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding
@@ -85102,7 +85102,7 @@ case OP_Param: {           /* out2 */
   Mem *pIn;
   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
   pFrame = p->pFrame;
-  pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];   
+  pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];
   sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem);
   break;
 }
@@ -85114,8 +85114,8 @@ case OP_Param: {           /* out2 */
 ** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2
 **
 ** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive).
-** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented 
-** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the 
+** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
+** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
 ** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints).
 */
 case OP_FkCounter: {
@@ -85133,7 +85133,7 @@ case OP_FkCounter: {
 ** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2
 **
 ** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero.
-** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next 
+** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
 ** instruction.
 **
 ** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter
@@ -85159,7 +85159,7 @@ case OP_FkIfZero: {         /* jump */
 **
 ** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is
 ** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed
-** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of 
+** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
 ** its current value and the value in register P2.
 **
 ** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially
@@ -85219,7 +85219,7 @@ case OP_IfPos: {        /* jump, in1 */
 ** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1].
 **
 ** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT
-** and r[P2] is set to -1. 
+** and r[P2] is set to -1.
 **
 ** Otherwise, r[P2] is set to the sum of r[P1] and r[P3].
 */
@@ -85251,7 +85251,7 @@ case OP_OffsetLimit: {    /* in1, out2, in3 */
 **
 ** Register P1 must contain an integer.  If the content of register P1 is
 ** initially greater than zero, then decrement the value in register P1.
-** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2.  
+** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2.
 ** If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged and fall through.
 */
 case OP_IfNotZero: {        /* jump, in1 */
@@ -85444,9 +85444,9 @@ case OP_Checkpoint: {
   }
   for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){
     sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]);
-  }    
+  }
   break;
-};  
+};
 #endif
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA
@@ -85472,9 +85472,9 @@ case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
 
   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
   eNew = pOp->p3;
-  assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE 
-       || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE 
-       || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST 
+  assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+       || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
+       || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
@@ -85493,7 +85493,7 @@ case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
   zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1);
 
   /* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database
-  ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory 
+  ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory
   */
   if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
    && (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0           /* Temp file */
@@ -85513,12 +85513,12 @@ case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
       );
       goto abort_due_to_error;
     }else{
- 
+
       if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){
         /* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call
-        ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log 
-        ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file 
-        ** after a successful return. 
+        ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log
+        ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file
+        ** after a successful return.
         */
         rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager, db);
         if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -85529,7 +85529,7 @@ case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
         ** as an intermediate */
         sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF);
       }
-  
+
       /* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal
       ** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal.
       */
@@ -85599,7 +85599,7 @@ case OP_IncrVacuum: {        /* jump */
 ** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically
 ** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2())
 ** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA.
-** 
+**
 ** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero,
 ** then only the currently executing statement is expired.
 */
@@ -85617,7 +85617,7 @@ case OP_Expire: {
 ** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3
 **
 ** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when
-** the shared-cache feature is enabled. 
+** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
 **
 ** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database
 ** on which the lock is acquired.  A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or
@@ -85631,7 +85631,7 @@ case OP_Expire: {
 case OP_TableLock: {
   u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3;
   if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) ){
-    int p1 = pOp->p1; 
+    int p1 = pOp->p1;
     assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb );
     assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) );
     assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 );
@@ -85651,7 +85651,7 @@ case OP_TableLock: {
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
 /* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 *
 **
-** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the 
+** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
 ** xBegin method for that table.
 **
 ** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from
@@ -85671,7 +85671,7 @@ case OP_VBegin: {
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
 /* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * *
 **
-** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database 
+** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database
 ** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table.
 */
 case OP_VCreate: {
@@ -85825,7 +85825,7 @@ case OP_VFilter: {   /* jump */
 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=vcolumn(P2)
 **
 ** Store the value of the P2-th column of
-** the row of the virtual-table that the 
+** the row of the virtual-table that the
 ** P1 cursor is pointing to into register P3.
 */
 case OP_VColumn: {
@@ -85891,7 +85891,7 @@ case OP_VNext: {   /* jump */
 
   /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the
   ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during
-  ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that 
+  ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that
   ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or
   ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor.
   */
@@ -85945,23 +85945,23 @@ case OP_VRename: {
 **
 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
 ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values
-** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate 
-** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the 
+** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
+** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
 ** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate.
 **
 ** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both.
 ** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3)
-** is the rowid of a row to delete.  If argv[0] is NULL then no 
-** deletion occurs.  The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new 
-** row.  This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new 
-** rowid for itself.  The subsequent elements in the array are 
+** is the rowid of a row to delete.  If argv[0] is NULL then no
+** deletion occurs.  The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
+** row.  This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
+** rowid for itself.  The subsequent elements in the array are
 ** the values of columns in the new row.
 **
 ** If P2==1 then no insert is performed.  argv[0] is the rowid of
 ** a row to delete.
 **
 ** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call
-** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() 
+** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
 ** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted.
 **
 ** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to
@@ -85976,7 +85976,7 @@ case OP_VUpdate: {
   Mem **apArg;
   Mem *pX;
 
-  assert( pOp->p2==1        || pOp->p5==OE_Fail   || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback 
+  assert( pOp->p2==1        || pOp->p5==OE_Fail   || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback
        || pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace
   );
   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
@@ -86067,7 +86067,7 @@ case OP_MaxPgcnt: {            /* out2 */
 ** successors.  The result of the function is stored in register P3.
 ** Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
 **
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
@@ -86084,7 +86084,7 @@ case OP_MaxPgcnt: {            /* out2 */
 ** from register P2 and successors.  The result of the function is stored
 ** in register P3.  Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
 **
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
@@ -86350,7 +86350,7 @@ abort_due_to_error:
   p->rc = rc;
   sqlite3SystemError(db, rc);
   testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 );
-  sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s", 
+  sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
                    (int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg);
   sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
   if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) sqlite3OomFault(db);
@@ -86366,8 +86366,8 @@ vdbe_return:
   testcase( nVmStep>0 );
   p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP] += (int)nVmStep;
   sqlite3VdbeLeave(p);
-  assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0 
-       || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0 
+  assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0
+       || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0
   );
   return rc;
 
@@ -86451,7 +86451,7 @@ struct Incrblob {
 ** sqlite3DbFree().
 **
 ** If an error does occur, then the b-tree cursor is closed. All subsequent
-** calls to sqlite3_blob_read(), blob_write() or blob_reopen() will 
+** calls to sqlite3_blob_read(), blob_write() or blob_reopen() will
 ** immediately return SQLITE_ABORT.
 */
 static int blobSeekToRow(Incrblob *p, sqlite3_int64 iRow, char **pzErr){
@@ -86459,7 +86459,7 @@ static int blobSeekToRow(Incrblob *p, sqlite3_int64 iRow, char **pzErr){
   char *zErr = 0;                 /* Error message */
   Vdbe *v = (Vdbe *)p->pStmt;
 
-  /* Set the value of register r[1] in the SQL statement to integer iRow. 
+  /* Set the value of register r[1] in the SQL statement to integer iRow.
   ** This is done directly as a performance optimization
   */
   v->aMem[1].flags = MEM_Int;
@@ -86603,7 +86603,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
     }
 
     /* If the value is being opened for writing, check that the
-    ** column is not indexed, and that it is not part of a foreign key. 
+    ** column is not indexed, and that it is not part of a foreign key.
     */
     if( wrFlag ){
       const char *zFault = 0;
@@ -86612,7 +86612,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
       if( db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
         /* Check that the column is not part of an FK child key definition. It
         ** is not necessary to check if it is part of a parent key, as parent
-        ** key columns must be indexed. The check below will pick up this 
+        ** key columns must be indexed. The check below will pick up this
         ** case.  */
         FKey *pFKey;
         for(pFKey=pTab->pFKey; pFKey; pFKey=pFKey->pNextFrom){
@@ -86646,8 +86646,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
     pBlob->pStmt = (sqlite3_stmt *)sqlite3VdbeCreate(&sParse);
     assert( pBlob->pStmt || db->mallocFailed );
     if( pBlob->pStmt ){
-      
-      /* This VDBE program seeks a btree cursor to the identified 
+
+      /* This VDBE program seeks a btree cursor to the identified
       ** db/table/row entry. The reason for using a vdbe program instead
       ** of writing code to use the b-tree layer directly is that the
       ** vdbe program will take advantage of the various transaction,
@@ -86655,11 +86655,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
       **
       ** After seeking the cursor, the vdbe executes an OP_ResultRow.
       ** Code external to the Vdbe then "borrows" the b-tree cursor and
-      ** uses it to implement the blob_read(), blob_write() and 
+      ** uses it to implement the blob_read(), blob_write() and
       ** blob_bytes() functions.
       **
       ** The sqlite3_blob_close() function finalizes the vdbe program,
-      ** which closes the b-tree cursor and (possibly) commits the 
+      ** which closes the b-tree cursor and (possibly) commits the
       ** transaction.
       */
       static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(2);
@@ -86676,7 +86676,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
       int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
       VdbeOp *aOp;
 
-      sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Transaction, iDb, wrFlag, 
+      sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Transaction, iDb, wrFlag,
                            pTab->pSchema->schema_cookie,
                            pTab->pSchema->iGeneration);
       sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1);
@@ -86684,7 +86684,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
       aOp = sqlite3VdbeAddOpList(v, ArraySize(openBlob), openBlob, iLn);
 
       /* Make sure a mutex is held on the table to be accessed */
-      sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb); 
+      sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb);
 
       if( db->mallocFailed==0 ){
         assert( aOp!=0 );
@@ -86700,17 +86700,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
       if( db->mallocFailed==0 ){
 #endif
 
-        /* Remove either the OP_OpenWrite or OpenRead. Set the P2 
+        /* Remove either the OP_OpenWrite or OpenRead. Set the P2
         ** parameter of the other to pTab->tnum.  */
         if( wrFlag ) aOp[1].opcode = OP_OpenWrite;
         aOp[1].p2 = pTab->tnum;
-        aOp[1].p3 = iDb;   
+        aOp[1].p3 = iDb;
 
         /* Configure the number of columns. Configure the cursor to
         ** think that the table has one more column than it really
         ** does. An OP_Column to retrieve this imaginary column will
         ** always return an SQL NULL. This is useful because it means
-        ** we can invoke OP_Column to fill in the vdbe cursors type 
+        ** we can invoke OP_Column to fill in the vdbe cursors type
         ** and offset cache without causing any IO.
         */
         aOp[1].p4type = P4_INT32;
@@ -86723,7 +86723,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
         sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(v, &sParse);
       }
     }
-   
+
     pBlob->iCol = iCol;
     pBlob->db = db;
     sqlite3BtreeLeaveAll(db);
@@ -86773,10 +86773,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *pBlob){
 ** Perform a read or write operation on a blob
 */
 static int blobReadWrite(
-  sqlite3_blob *pBlob, 
-  void *z, 
-  int n, 
-  int iOffset, 
+  sqlite3_blob *pBlob,
+  void *z,
+  int n,
+  int iOffset,
   int (*xCall)(BtCursor*, u32, u32, void*)
 ){
   int rc;
@@ -86806,14 +86806,14 @@ static int blobReadWrite(
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
     if( xCall==sqlite3BtreePutData && db->xPreUpdateCallback ){
-      /* If a pre-update hook is registered and this is a write cursor, 
-      ** invoke it here. 
-      ** 
+      /* If a pre-update hook is registered and this is a write cursor,
+      ** invoke it here.
+      **
       ** TODO: The preupdate-hook is passed SQLITE_DELETE, even though this
       ** operation should really be an SQLITE_UPDATE. This is probably
-      ** incorrect, but is convenient because at this point the new.* values 
-      ** are not easily obtainable. And for the sessions module, an 
-      ** SQLITE_UPDATE where the PK columns do not change is handled in the 
+      ** incorrect, but is convenient because at this point the new.* values
+      ** are not easily obtainable. And for the sessions module, an
+      ** SQLITE_UPDATE where the PK columns do not change is handled in the
       ** same way as an SQLITE_DELETE (the SQLITE_DELETE code is actually
       ** slightly more efficient). Since you cannot write to a PK column
       ** using the incremental-blob API, this works. For the sessions module
@@ -86873,8 +86873,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_bytes(sqlite3_blob *pBlob){
 **
 ** If an error occurs, or if the specified row does not exist or does not
 ** contain a blob or text value, then an error code is returned and the
-** database handle error code and message set. If this happens, then all 
-** subsequent calls to sqlite3_blob_xxx() functions (except blob_close()) 
+** database handle error code and message set. If this happens, then all
+** subsequent calls to sqlite3_blob_xxx() functions (except blob_close())
 ** immediately return SQLITE_ABORT.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
@@ -86968,7 +86968,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
 **                                  is like Close() followed by Init() only
 **                                  much faster.
 **
-** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order.  Write() can 
+** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order.  Write() can
 ** only occur in between Init()/Reset() and Rewind().  Next(), Rowkey(), and
 ** Compare() can only occur in between Rewind() and Close()/Reset(). i.e.
 **
@@ -86976,16 +86976,16 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
 **   for each record: Write()
 **   Rewind()
 **     Rowkey()/Compare()
-**   Next() 
+**   Next()
 **   Close()
 **
 ** Algorithm:
 **
-** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held 
+** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held
 ** unsorted in main memory. Assuming the amount of memory used never exceeds
 ** a threshold, when Rewind() is called the set of records is sorted using
 ** an in-memory merge sort. In this case, no temporary files are required
-** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records 
+** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records
 ** directly from main memory.
 **
 ** If the amount of space used to store records in main memory exceeds the
@@ -86995,10 +86995,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
 ** of PMAs may be created by merging existing PMAs together - for example
 ** merging two or more level-0 PMAs together creates a level-1 PMA.
 **
-** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing 
+** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing
 ** records to a PMA is roughly the same as the limit configured for the
-** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to 
-** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by 
+** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to
+** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by
 ** that returned by "PRAGMA main.cache_size", in bytes.
 **
 ** If the sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then all PMAs generated
@@ -87015,7 +87015,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
 ** than zero, and (b) worker threads have been enabled at runtime by calling
 ** "PRAGMA threads=N" with some value of N greater than 0.
 **
-** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a 
+** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a
 ** final PMA. So at this point the data is stored in some number of sorted
 ** PMAs within temporary files on disk.
 **
@@ -87027,16 +87027,16 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
 **
 ** Or, if running in multi-threaded mode, then a background thread is
 ** launched to merge the existing PMAs. Once the background thread has
-** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread 
+** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread
 ** begins reading keys from that PMA while the background thread proceeds
 ** with merging the next T bytes of data. And so on.
 **
-** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used 
+** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used
 ** by Write() above to determine when to create a new PMA.
 **
-** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when 
-** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used. 
-** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on 
+** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when
+** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used.
+** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on
 ** disk are merged together. Then T bytes of data from the second set, and
 ** so on, such that no operation ever merges more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT
 ** PMAs at a time. This done is to improve locality.
@@ -87051,7 +87051,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
 /* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
 /* #include "vdbeInt.h" */
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** If SQLITE_DEBUG_SORTER_THREADS is defined, this module outputs various
 ** messages to stderr that may be helpful in understanding the performance
 ** characteristics of the sorter in multi-threaded mode.
@@ -87080,7 +87080,7 @@ typedef struct SorterList SorterList;       /* In-memory list of records */
 typedef struct IncrMerger IncrMerger;       /* Read & merge multiple PMAs */
 
 /*
-** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data 
+** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data
 ** stored in the file.
 */
 struct SorterFile {
@@ -87120,17 +87120,17 @@ struct SorterList {
 ** the MergeEngine.nTree variable.
 **
 ** The final (N/2) elements of aTree[] contain the results of comparing
-** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of 
+** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of
 ** comparing aReadr[2*i-N] and aReadr[2*i-N+1]. Whichever key is smaller, the
-** aTree element is set to the index of it. 
+** aTree element is set to the index of it.
 **
 ** For the purposes of this comparison, EOF is considered greater than any
 ** other key value. If the keys are equal (only possible with two EOF
 ** values), it doesn't matter which index is stored.
 **
-** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described 
+** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described
 ** above contains the index of the smallest of each block of 4 PmaReaders
-** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that 
+** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that
 ** currently points to the smallest key value. aTree[0] is unused.
 **
 ** Example:
@@ -87146,7 +87146,7 @@ struct SorterList {
 **
 **     aTree[] = { X, 5   0, 5    0, 3, 5, 6 }
 **
-** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by 
+** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by
 ** PmaReader 5). When the Next() operation is invoked, PmaReader 5 will
 ** be advanced to the next key in its segment. Say the next key is
 ** "Eggplant":
@@ -87187,8 +87187,8 @@ struct MergeEngine {
 ** each thread requries its own UnpackedRecord object to unpack records in
 ** as part of comparison operations.
 **
-** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then, 
-** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for 
+** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then,
+** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for
 ** two purposes:
 **
 **   1. When flushing the contents of memory to a level-0 PMA on disk, to
@@ -87219,7 +87219,7 @@ struct SortSubtask {
 
 
 /*
-** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each 
+** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each
 ** sorter cursor created by the VDBE.
 **
 ** mxKeysize:
@@ -87275,21 +87275,21 @@ struct PmaReader {
 };
 
 /*
-** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored 
+** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored
 ** within a temp file. However, if the PmaReader.pIncr variable points to
 ** an object of the following type, it may be used to iterate/merge through
 ** multiple PMAs simultaneously.
 **
-** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and 
-** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1). 
+** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and
+** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1).
 **
-** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0] 
-** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in 
-** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from 
-** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the 
-** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off 
-** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of 
-** sorted record data from pMerger. 
+** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0]
+** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in
+** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from
+** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the
+** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off
+** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of
+** sorted record data from pMerger.
 **
 ** When the PmaReader reaches the end of aFile[0], it blocks until the
 ** background thread has finished populating aFile[1]. It then exchanges
@@ -87300,7 +87300,7 @@ struct PmaReader {
 **
 ** A single-threaded IncrMerger does not open any temporary files of its
 ** own. Instead, it has exclusive access to mxSz bytes of space beginning
-** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a 
+** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a
 ** background thread to prepare data for the PmaReader, with a single
 ** threaded IncrMerger the allocate part of pTask->file2 is "refilled" with
 ** keys from pMerger by the calling thread whenever the PmaReader runs out
@@ -87412,7 +87412,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReadBlob(
 
   assert( p->aBuffer );
 
-  /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next 
+  /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next
   ** p->nBuffer bytes of data from the file into it. Or, if there are less
   ** than p->nBuffer bytes remaining in the PMA, read all remaining data.  */
   iBuf = p->iReadOff % p->nBuffer;
@@ -87433,11 +87433,11 @@ static int vdbePmaReadBlob(
     assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ );
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
   }
-  nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf; 
+  nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf;
 
   if( nByte<=nAvail ){
     /* The requested data is available in the in-memory buffer. In this
-    ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a 
+    ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a
     ** pointer into the buffer to the caller.  */
     *ppOut = &p->aBuffer[iBuf];
     p->iReadOff += nByte;
@@ -87516,7 +87516,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReadVarint(PmaReader *p, u64 *pnOut){
 
 /*
 ** Attempt to memory map file pFile. If successful, set *pp to point to the
-** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted 
+** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted
 ** (because the file is too large or the VFS layer is configured not to use
 ** mmap), return SQLITE_OK and set *pp to NULL.
 **
@@ -87537,7 +87537,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterMapFile(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterFile *pFile, u8 **pp){
 
 /*
 ** Attach PmaReader pReadr to file pFile (if it is not already attached to
-** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file.  Return SQLITE_OK 
+** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file.  Return SQLITE_OK
 ** if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs.
 */
 static int vdbePmaReaderSeek(
@@ -87627,11 +87627,11 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderNext(PmaReader *pReadr){
 
 /*
 ** Initialize PmaReader pReadr to scan through the PMA stored in file pFile
-** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function 
-** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the 
+** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function
+** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the
 ** PMA is empty).
 **
-** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file 
+** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file
 ** contains a single PMA, and that that PMA omits the initial length varint.
 */
 static int vdbePmaReaderInit(
@@ -87664,7 +87664,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderInit(
 
 /*
 ** A version of vdbeSorterCompare() that assumes that it has already been
-** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of 
+** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of
 ** key2.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterCompareTail(
@@ -87682,7 +87682,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCompareTail(
 }
 
 /*
-** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2, 
+** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2,
 ** size nKey2 bytes). Use (pTask->pKeyInfo) for the collation sequences
 ** used by the comparison. Return the result of the comparison.
 **
@@ -87826,7 +87826,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCompareInt(
 ** is non-zero and the sorter is able to guarantee a stable sort, nField
 ** is used instead. This is used when sorting records for a CREATE INDEX
 ** statement. In this case, keys are always delivered to the sorter in
-** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part 
+** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part
 ** of the records being sorted. So if the sort is stable, there is never
 ** any reason to compare PK fields and they can be ignored for a small
 ** performance boost.
@@ -87923,7 +87923,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterInit(
       }
     }
 
-    if( pKeyInfo->nAllField<13 
+    if( pKeyInfo->nAllField<13
      && (pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==0 || pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==db->pDfltColl)
     ){
       pSorter->typeMask = SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER | SORTER_TYPE_TEXT;
@@ -87947,7 +87947,7 @@ static void vdbeSorterRecordFree(sqlite3 *db, SorterRecord *pRecord){
 }
 
 /*
-** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All 
+** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All
 ** fields of *pTask are zeroed before returning.
 */
 static void vdbeSortSubtaskCleanup(sqlite3 *db, SortSubtask *pTask){
@@ -88046,7 +88046,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCreateThread(
 }
 
 /*
-** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create 
+** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create
 ** level-0 PMAs.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){
@@ -88055,10 +88055,10 @@ static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){
 
   /* This function is always called by the main user thread.
   **
-  ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called, 
+  ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called,
   ** it is possible that thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread
   ** is currently attempt to join one of the other threads. To avoid a race
-  ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join 
+  ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join
   ** thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread first. */
   for(i=pSorter->nTask-1; i>=0; i--){
     SortSubtask *pTask = &pSorter->aTask[i];
@@ -88230,8 +88230,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterOpenTempFile(
 }
 
 /*
-** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord 
-** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or 
+** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord
+** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or
 ** if no allocation was required), or SQLITE_NOMEM otherwise.
 */
 static int vdbeSortAllocUnpacked(SortSubtask *pTask){
@@ -88294,14 +88294,14 @@ static SorterCompare vdbeSorterGetCompare(VdbeSorter *p){
   if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER ){
     return vdbeSorterCompareInt;
   }else if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_TEXT ){
-    return vdbeSorterCompareText; 
+    return vdbeSorterCompareText;
   }
   return vdbeSorterCompare;
 }
 
 /*
-** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return 
-** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if 
+** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return
+** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if
 ** an error occurs.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
@@ -88351,8 +88351,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
   pList->pList = p;
 
   sqlite3_free(aSlot);
-  assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK 
-       || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM 
+  assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK
+       || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM
   );
   return pTask->pUnpacked->errCode;
 }
@@ -88393,8 +88393,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
     memcpy(&p->aBuffer[p->iBufEnd], &pData[nData-nRem], nCopy);
     p->iBufEnd += nCopy;
     if( p->iBufEnd==p->nBuffer ){
-      p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, 
-          &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, 
+      p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
+          &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
           p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart
       );
       p->iBufStart = p->iBufEnd = 0;
@@ -88409,7 +88409,7 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
 /*
 ** Flush any buffered data to disk and clean up the PMA-writer object.
 ** The results of using the PMA-writer after this call are undefined.
-** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not 
+** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not
 ** required. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code.
 **
 ** Before returning, set *piEof to the offset immediately following the
@@ -88418,8 +88418,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
 static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){
   int rc;
   if( p->eFWErr==0 && ALWAYS(p->aBuffer) && p->iBufEnd>p->iBufStart ){
-    p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, 
-        &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, 
+    p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
+        &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
         p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart
     );
   }
@@ -88431,11 +88431,11 @@ static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){
 }
 
 /*
-** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return 
+** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return
 ** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs.
 */
 static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
-  int nByte; 
+  int nByte;
   u8 aByte[10];
   nByte = sqlite3PutVarint(aByte, iVal);
   vdbePmaWriteBlob(p, aByte, nByte);
@@ -88443,7 +88443,7 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
 
 /*
 ** Write the current contents of in-memory linked-list pList to a level-0
-** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if 
+** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if
 ** successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
 **
 ** The format of a PMA is:
@@ -88451,8 +88451,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
 **     * A varint. This varint contains the total number of bytes of content
 **       in the PMA (not including the varint itself).
 **
-**     * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys. 
-**       Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the 
+**     * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys.
+**       Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the
 **       key). The varint is the number of bytes in the blob of data.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
@@ -88461,7 +88461,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
   PmaWriter writer;               /* Object used to write to the file */
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-  /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA. 
+  /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA.
   ** This is used by an assert() statement at the end of this function.  */
   i64 iSz = pList->szPMA + sqlite3VarintLen(pList->szPMA) + pTask->file.iEof;
 #endif
@@ -88614,7 +88614,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterFlushPMA(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
   SortSubtask *pTask = 0;    /* Thread context used to create new PMA */
   int nWorker = (pSorter->nTask-1);
 
-  /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written. 
+  /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written.
   ** Or will be, anyhow.  */
   pSorter->bUsePMA = 1;
 
@@ -88624,7 +88624,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterFlushPMA(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
   ** the background thread from a sub-tasks previous turn is still running,
   ** skip it. If the first (pSorter->nTask-1) sub-tasks are all still busy,
   ** fall back to using the final sub-task. The first (pSorter->nTask-1)
-  ** sub-tasks are prefered as they use background threads - the final 
+  ** sub-tasks are prefered as they use background threads - the final
   ** sub-task uses the main thread. */
   for(i=0; i<nWorker; i++){
     int iTest = (pSorter->iPrev + i + 1) % nWorker;
@@ -88702,14 +88702,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(
   ** If using the single large allocation mode (pSorter->aMemory!=0), then
   ** flush the contents of memory to a new PMA if (a) at least one value is
   ** already in memory and (b) the new value will not fit in memory.
-  ** 
+  **
   ** Or, if using separate allocations for each record, flush the contents
   ** of memory to a PMA if either of the following are true:
   **
-  **   * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater 
+  **   * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
   **     than (page-size * cache-size), or
   **
-  **   * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater 
+  **   * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
   **     than (page-size * 10) and sqlite3HeapNearlyFull() returns true.
   */
   nReq = pVal->n + sizeof(SorterRecord);
@@ -88844,11 +88844,11 @@ static int vdbeIncrBgPopulate(IncrMerger *pIncr){
 ** aFile[0] such that the PmaReader should start rereading it from the
 ** beginning.
 **
-** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading 
-** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0]. 
+** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading
+** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0].
 **
-** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the 
-** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap 
+** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the
+** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap
 ** aFile[0] and aFile[1] in place. If the contents of pMerger have not
 ** been exhausted, this function also launches a new background thread
 ** to populate the new aFile[1].
@@ -88988,7 +88988,7 @@ static void vdbeMergeEngineCompare(
 #define INCRINIT_TASK   1
 #define INCRINIT_ROOT   2
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Forward reference required as the vdbeIncrMergeInit() and
 ** vdbePmaReaderIncrInit() routines are called mutually recursively when
 ** building a merge tree.
@@ -88997,7 +88997,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode);
 
 /*
 ** Initialize the MergeEngine object passed as the second argument. Once this
-** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the 
+** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the
 ** MergeEngine object in the usual fashion.
 **
 ** If argument eMode is INCRINIT_ROOT, then it is assumed that any IncrMerge
@@ -89007,8 +89007,8 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode);
 ** required is to call vdbePmaReaderNext() on each PmaReader to point it at
 ** its first key.
 **
-** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use 
-** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data 
+** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use
+** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data
 ** to pMerger.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
@@ -89058,19 +89058,19 @@ static int vdbeMergeEngineInit(
 ** object at (pReadr->pIncr).
 **
 ** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_NORMAL, then all PmaReaders
-** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then 
-** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to 
+** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then
+** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to
 ** the first key in its range.
 **
 ** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_TASK, then pReadr is guaranteed
 ** to be a multi-threaded PmaReader and this function is being called in a
-** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are 
+** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are
 ** initialized as for INCRINIT_NORMAL and the aFile[1] buffer belonging to
 ** pReadr is populated. However, pReadr itself is not set up to point
 ** to its first key. A call to vdbePmaReaderNext() is still required to do
-** that. 
+** that.
 **
-** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately 
+** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately
 ** in the INCRINIT_TASK case is that vdbePmaReaderNext() assumes that it has
 ** to block on thread (pTask->thread) before accessing aFile[1]. But, since
 ** this entire function is being run by thread (pTask->thread), that will
@@ -89126,12 +89126,12 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIncr->bUseThread ){
     /* Use the current thread to populate aFile[1], even though this
     ** PmaReader is multi-threaded. If this is an INCRINIT_TASK object,
-    ** then this function is already running in background thread 
-    ** pIncr->pTask->thread. 
+    ** then this function is already running in background thread
+    ** pIncr->pTask->thread.
     **
-    ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the 
+    ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the
     ** main VDBE thread. But that is Ok, as that thread cannot return
-    ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the 
+    ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the
     ** first results are ready from this merger object anyway.
     */
     assert( eMode==INCRINIT_ROOT || eMode==INCRINIT_TASK );
@@ -89148,7 +89148,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
 
 #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0
 /*
-** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in 
+** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in
 ** background threads.
 */
 static void *vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(void *pCtx){
@@ -89166,8 +89166,8 @@ static void *vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(void *pCtx){
 ** (if pReadr->pIncr==0), then this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it invokes
 ** the vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() function with the parameters passed to
 ** this routine to initialize the incremental merge.
-** 
-** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1), 
+**
+** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1),
 ** then a background thread is launched to call vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit().
 ** Or, if the IncrMerger is single threaded, the same function is called
 ** using the current thread.
@@ -89197,7 +89197,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
 ** to NULL and return an SQLite error code.
 **
 ** When this function is called, *piOffset is set to the offset of the
-** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is 
+** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is
 ** set to the offset immediately following the last byte of the last
 ** PMA before returning. If an error does occur, then the final value of
 ** *piOffset is undefined.
@@ -89307,12 +89307,12 @@ static int vdbeSorterAddToTree(
 /*
 ** This function is called as part of a SorterRewind() operation on a sorter
 ** that has already written two or more level-0 PMAs to one or more temp
-** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that 
+** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that
 ** can be used to incrementally merge all PMAs on disk.
 **
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppOut set to point to the
 ** MergeEngine object at the root of the tree before returning. Or, if an
-** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value 
+** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value
 ** of *ppOut is undefined.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild(
@@ -89324,8 +89324,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild(
   int iTask;
 
 #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0
-  /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level 
-  ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly 
+  /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level
+  ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly
   ** one PmaReader per sub-task.  */
   assert( pSorter->bUseThreads || pSorter->nTask==1 );
   if( pSorter->nTask>1 ){
@@ -89434,7 +89434,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterSetupMerge(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
           }
           for(iTask=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && iTask<pSorter->nTask; iTask++){
             /* Check that:
-            **   
+            **
             **   a) The incremental merge object is configured to use the
             **      right task, and
             **   b) If it is using task (nTask-1), it is configured to run
@@ -89497,7 +89497,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *pCsr, int *pbEof){
     return rc;
   }
 
-  /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite() 
+  /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite()
   ** function flushes the contents of memory to disk, it immediately always
   ** creates a new list consisting of a single key immediately afterwards.
   ** So the list is never empty at this point.  */
@@ -89509,7 +89509,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *pCsr, int *pbEof){
 
   vdbeSorterRewindDebug("rewind");
 
-  /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to 
+  /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to
   ** incrementally read and merge all remaining PMAs.  */
   assert( pSorter->pReader==0 );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -89563,7 +89563,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterNext(sqlite3 *db, const VdbeCursor *pCsr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the 
+** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the
 ** current key.
 */
 static void *vdbeSorterRowkey(
@@ -89773,7 +89773,7 @@ static int memjrnlRead(
   assert( p->readpoint.iOffset==0 || p->readpoint.pChunk!=0 );
   if( p->readpoint.iOffset!=iOfst || iOfst==0 ){
     sqlite3_int64 iOff = 0;
-    for(pChunk=p->pFirst; 
+    for(pChunk=p->pFirst;
         ALWAYS(pChunk) && (iOff+p->nChunkSize)<=iOfst;
         pChunk=pChunk->pNext
     ){
@@ -89808,7 +89808,7 @@ static void memjrnlFreeChunks(MemJournal *p){
   for(pIter=p->pFirst; pIter; pIter=pNext){
     pNext = pIter->pNext;
     sqlite3_free(pIter);
-  } 
+  }
   p->pFirst = 0;
 }
 
@@ -89880,7 +89880,7 @@ static int memjrnlWrite(
     ** access writes are not required. The only exception to this is when
     ** the in-memory journal is being used by a connection using the
     ** atomic-write optimization. In this case the first 28 bytes of the
-    ** journal file may be written as part of committing the transaction. */ 
+    ** journal file may be written as part of committing the transaction. */
     assert( iOfst==p->endpoint.iOffset || iOfst==0 );
 #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE) \
  || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE)
@@ -89931,7 +89931,7 @@ static int memjrnlWrite(
 **
 ** If the journal file is already on disk, truncate it there. Or, if it
 ** is still in main memory but is being truncated to zero bytes in size,
-** ignore 
+** ignore
 */
 static int memjrnlTruncate(sqlite3_file *pJfd, sqlite_int64 size){
   MemJournal *p = (MemJournal *)pJfd;
@@ -89958,8 +89958,8 @@ static int memjrnlClose(sqlite3_file *pJfd){
 /*
 ** Sync the file.
 **
-** If the real file has been created, call its xSync method. Otherwise, 
-** syncing an in-memory journal is a no-op. 
+** If the real file has been created, call its xSync method. Otherwise,
+** syncing an in-memory journal is a no-op.
 */
 static int memjrnlSync(sqlite3_file *pJfd, int flags){
   UNUSED_PARAMETER2(pJfd, flags);
@@ -90000,11 +90000,11 @@ static const struct sqlite3_io_methods MemJournalMethods = {
   0                 /* xUnfetch */
 };
 
-/* 
-** Open a journal file. 
+/*
+** Open a journal file.
 **
-** The behaviour of the journal file depends on the value of parameter 
-** nSpill. If nSpill is 0, then the journal file is always create and 
+** The behaviour of the journal file depends on the value of parameter
+** nSpill. If nSpill is 0, then the journal file is always create and
 ** accessed using the underlying VFS. If nSpill is less than zero, then
 ** all content is always stored in main-memory. Finally, if nSpill is a
 ** positive value, then the journal file is initially created in-memory
@@ -90055,9 +90055,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemJournalOpen(sqlite3_file *pJfd){
 #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE) \
  || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE)
 /*
-** If the argument p points to a MemJournal structure that is not an 
+** If the argument p points to a MemJournal structure that is not an
 ** in-memory-only journal file (i.e. is one that was opened with a +ve
-** nSpill parameter or as SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL), and the underlying 
+** nSpill parameter or as SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL), and the underlying
 ** file has not yet been created, create it now.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JournalCreate(sqlite3_file *pJfd){
@@ -90091,7 +90091,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(sqlite3_file *p){
   return p->pMethods==&MemJournalMethods;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return the number of bytes required to store a JournalFile that uses vfs
 ** pVfs to create the underlying on-disk files.
 */
@@ -90202,7 +90202,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectExpr(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 ** Walk the parse trees associated with all subqueries in the
 ** FROM clause of SELECT statement p.  Do not invoke the select
 ** callback on p, but do invoke it on each FROM clause subquery
-** and on any subqueries further down in the tree.  Return 
+** and on any subqueries further down in the tree.  Return
 ** WRC_Abort or WRC_Continue;
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectFrom(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
@@ -90224,12 +90224,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectFrom(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
     }
   }
   return WRC_Continue;
-} 
+}
 
 /*
 ** Call sqlite3WalkExpr() for every expression in Select statement p.
 ** Invoke sqlite3WalkSelect() for subqueries in the FROM clause and
-** on the compound select chain, p->pPrior. 
+** on the compound select chain, p->pPrior.
 **
 ** If it is not NULL, the xSelectCallback() callback is invoked before
 ** the walk of the expressions and FROM clause. The xSelectCallback2()
@@ -90349,7 +90349,7 @@ static void resolveAlias(
   }
   ExprSetProperty(pDup, EP_Alias);
 
-  /* Before calling sqlite3ExprDelete(), set the EP_Static flag. This 
+  /* Before calling sqlite3ExprDelete(), set the EP_Static flag. This
   ** prevents ExprDelete() from deleting the Expr structure itself,
   ** allowing it to be repopulated by the memcpy() on the following line.
   ** The pExpr->u.zToken might point into memory that will be freed by the
@@ -90416,7 +90416,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MatchSpanName(
 
 /*
 ** Given the name of a column of the form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z, look up
-** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr 
+** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr
 ** expression node refer back to that source column.  The following changes
 ** are made to pExpr:
 **
@@ -90536,7 +90536,7 @@ static int lookupName(
         for(j=0, pCol=pTab->aCol; j<pTab->nCol; j++, pCol++){
           if( sqlite3StrICmp(pCol->zName, zCol)==0 ){
             /* If there has been exactly one prior match and this match
-            ** is for the right-hand table of a NATURAL JOIN or is in a 
+            ** is for the right-hand table of a NATURAL JOIN or is in a
             ** USING clause, then skip this match.
             */
             if( cnt==1 ){
@@ -90564,7 +90564,7 @@ static int lookupName(
     } /* if( pSrcList ) */
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
-    /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe 
+    /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe
     ** it is a new.* or old.* trigger argument reference
     */
     if( zDb==0 && zTab!=0 && cntTab==0 && pParse->pTriggerTab!=0 ){
@@ -90580,7 +90580,7 @@ static int lookupName(
         pTab = 0;
       }
 
-      if( pTab ){ 
+      if( pTab ){
         int iCol;
         pSchema = pTab->pSchema;
         cntTab++;
@@ -90676,7 +90676,7 @@ static int lookupName(
           assert( zTab==0 && zDb==0 );
           goto lookupname_end;
         }
-      } 
+      }
     }
 
     /* Advance to the next name context.  The loop will exit when either
@@ -90863,7 +90863,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
       SrcList *pSrcList = pNC->pSrcList;
       struct SrcList_item *pItem;
       assert( pSrcList && pSrcList->nSrc==1 );
-      pItem = pSrcList->a; 
+      pItem = pSrcList->a;
       pExpr->op = TK_COLUMN;
       pExpr->pTab = pItem->pTab;
       pExpr->iTable = pItem->iCursor;
@@ -90879,7 +90879,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
     ** Or a database, table and column:  ID.ID.ID
     **
     ** The TK_ID and TK_OUT cases are combined so that there will only
-    ** be one call to lookupName().  Then the compiler will in-line 
+    ** be one call to lookupName().  Then the compiler will in-line
     ** lookupName() for a size reduction and performance increase.
     */
     case TK_ID:
@@ -90957,7 +90957,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
             ** to likelihood(X,0.9375). */
             /* TUNING: unlikely() probability is 0.0625.  likely() is 0.9375 */
             pExpr->iTable = pDef->zName[0]=='u' ? 8388608 : 125829120;
-          }             
+          }
         }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
         {
@@ -91023,7 +91023,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
         pNC->ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg;
       }
       /* FIX ME:  Compute pExpr->affinity based on the expected return
-      ** type of the function 
+      ** type of the function
       */
       return WRC_Prune;
     }
@@ -91083,7 +91083,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
         testcase( pExpr->op==TK_BETWEEN );
         sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused");
       }
-      break; 
+      break;
     }
   }
   return (pParse->nErr || pParse->db->mallocFailed) ? WRC_Abort : WRC_Continue;
@@ -91193,7 +91193,7 @@ static void resolveOutOfRangeError(
   int i,                 /* The index (1-based) of the term out of range */
   int mx                 /* Largest permissible value of i */
 ){
-  sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+  sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
     "%r %s BY term out of range - should be "
     "between 1 and %d", i, zType, mx);
 }
@@ -91426,7 +91426,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
   ExprList *pGroupBy;     /* The GROUP BY clause */
   Select *pLeftmost;      /* Left-most of SELECT of a compound */
   sqlite3 *db;            /* Database connection */
-  
+
 
   assert( p!=0 );
   if( p->selFlags & SF_Resolved ){
@@ -91480,7 +91480,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
       pSub->pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
       p->pOrderBy = 0;
     }
-  
+
     /* Recursively resolve names in all subqueries
     */
     for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){
@@ -91507,18 +91507,18 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
         pItem->fg.isCorrelated = (nRef!=0);
       }
     }
-  
+
     /* Set up the local name-context to pass to sqlite3ResolveExprNames() to
     ** resolve the result-set expression list.
     */
     sNC.ncFlags = NC_AllowAgg;
     sNC.pSrcList = p->pSrc;
     sNC.pNext = pOuterNC;
-  
+
     /* Resolve names in the result set. */
     if( sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, p->pEList) ) return WRC_Abort;
-  
-    /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY 
+
+    /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY
     ** expression, do not allow aggregates in any of the other expressions.
     */
     assert( (p->selFlags & SF_Aggregate)==0 );
@@ -91529,14 +91529,14 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
     }else{
       sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowAgg;
     }
-  
+
     /* If a HAVING clause is present, then there must be a GROUP BY clause.
     */
     if( p->pHaving && !pGroupBy ){
       sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a GROUP BY clause is required before HAVING");
       return WRC_Abort;
     }
-  
+
     /* Add the output column list to the name-context before parsing the
     ** other expressions in the SELECT statement. This is so that
     ** expressions in the WHERE clause (etc.) can refer to expressions by
@@ -91553,19 +91553,19 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
     for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){
       struct SrcList_item *pItem = &p->pSrc->a[i];
       if( pItem->fg.isTabFunc
-       && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg) 
+       && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg)
       ){
         return WRC_Abort;
       }
     }
 
     /* The ORDER BY and GROUP BY clauses may not refer to terms in
-    ** outer queries 
+    ** outer queries
     */
     sNC.pNext = 0;
     sNC.ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg;
 
-    /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from 
+    /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from
     ** the sub-query back to the parent query. At this point each term
     ** within the ORDER BY clause has been transformed to an integer value.
     ** These integers will be replaced by copies of the corresponding result
@@ -91594,13 +91594,13 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
     if( db->mallocFailed ){
       return WRC_Abort;
     }
-  
-    /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause.  At the same time, make sure 
+
+    /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause.  At the same time, make sure
     ** the GROUP BY clause does not contain aggregate functions.
     */
     if( pGroupBy ){
       struct ExprList_item *pItem;
-    
+
       if( resolveOrderGroupBy(&sNC, p, pGroupBy, "GROUP") || db->mallocFailed ){
         return WRC_Abort;
       }
@@ -91642,7 +91642,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 ** checking on function usage and set a flag if any aggregate functions
 ** are seen.
 **
-** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the 
+** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the
 ** form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z where
 **
 **      X:   The name of a database.  Ex:  "main" or "temp" or
@@ -91674,7 +91674,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 **
 **      SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY a+b;
 **
-** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is 
+** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is
 ** defined and that the correct number of arguments are specified.
 ** If the function is an aggregate function, then the NC_HasAgg flag is
 ** set and the opcode is changed from TK_FUNCTION to TK_AGG_FUNCTION.
@@ -91684,7 +91684,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 ** An error message is left in pParse if anything is amiss.  The number
 ** if errors is returned.
 */
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames( 
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
   NameContext *pNC,       /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
   Expr *pExpr             /* The expression to be analyzed. */
 ){
@@ -91721,7 +91721,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
 ** just like sqlite3ResolveExprNames() except that it works for an expression
 ** list rather than a single expression.
 */
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames( 
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(
   NameContext *pNC,       /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
   ExprList *pList         /* The expression list to be analyzed. */
 ){
@@ -91831,7 +91831,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char sqlite3TableColumnAffinity(Table *pTab, int iCol){
 ** Return the 'affinity' of the expression pExpr if any.
 **
 ** If pExpr is a column, a reference to a column via an 'AS' alias,
-** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the 
+** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the
 ** affinity of that column is returned. Otherwise, 0x00 is returned,
 ** indicating no affinity for the expression.
 **
@@ -91917,7 +91917,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprSkipCollate(Expr *pExpr){
       assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE );
       pExpr = pExpr->pLeft;
     }
-  }   
+  }
   return pExpr;
 }
 
@@ -91988,7 +91988,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3ExprCollSeq(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
       break;
     }
   }
-  if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){ 
+  if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){
     pColl = 0;
   }
   return pColl;
@@ -92110,8 +92110,8 @@ static u8 binaryCompareP5(Expr *pExpr1, Expr *pExpr2, int jumpIfNull){
 ** it is not considered.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(
-  Parse *pParse, 
-  Expr *pLeft, 
+  Parse *pParse,
+  Expr *pLeft,
   Expr *pRight
 ){
   CollSeq *pColl;
@@ -92167,7 +92167,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprIsVector(Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR 
+** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR
 ** return the number of expressions in the vector. Or, if the expression
 ** is a sub-select, return the number of columns in the sub-select. For
 ** any other type of expression, return 1.
@@ -92217,7 +92217,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(Expr *pVector, int i){
 ** sqlite3ExprCode() will generate all necessary code to compute
 ** the iField-th column of the vector expression pVector.
 **
-** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0).  
+** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0).
 ** In that case, this routine works like sqlite3ExprDup().
 **
 ** The caller owns the returned Expr object and is responsible for
@@ -92272,7 +92272,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprForVectorField(
 
 /*
 ** If expression pExpr is of type TK_SELECT, generate code to evaluate
-** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the 
+** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the
 ** sub-select returns more than one column, the first in an array
 ** of registers in which the result is stored).
 **
@@ -92294,10 +92294,10 @@ static int exprCodeSubselect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 ** the register number of a register that contains the value of
 ** element iField of the vector.
 **
-** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have 
+** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have
 ** already been generated using the exprCodeSubselect() routine. In this
 ** case parameter regSelect should be the first in an array of registers
-** containing the results of the sub-select. 
+** containing the results of the sub-select.
 **
 ** If pVector is of type TK_VECTOR, then code for the requested field
 ** is generated. In this case (*pRegFree) may be set to the number of
@@ -92360,10 +92360,10 @@ static void codeVectorCompare(
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused");
     return;
   }
-  assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE 
-       || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT 
-       || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT 
-       || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE 
+  assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE
+       || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
+       || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT
+       || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE
   );
   assert( pExpr->op==op || (pExpr->op==TK_IS && op==TK_EQ)
             || (pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT && op==TK_NE) );
@@ -92379,7 +92379,7 @@ static void codeVectorCompare(
 
   for(i=0; 1 /*Loop exits by "break"*/; i++){
     int regFree1 = 0, regFree2 = 0;
-    Expr *pL, *pR; 
+    Expr *pL, *pR;
     int r1, r2;
     assert( i>=0 && i<nLeft );
     if( i>0 ) sqlite3ExprCachePush(pParse);
@@ -92427,7 +92427,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCheckHeight(Parse *pParse, int nHeight){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   int mxHeight = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_EXPR_DEPTH];
   if( nHeight>mxHeight ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
        "Expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", mxHeight
     );
     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -92473,10 +92473,10 @@ static void heightOfSelect(Select *p, int *pnHeight){
 }
 
 /*
-** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an 
-** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or 
+** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an
+** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or
 ** Expr.pSelect member has a height of 1. Any other expression
-** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other 
+** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other
 ** referenced Expr plus one.
 **
 ** Also propagate EP_Propagate flags up from Expr.x.pList to Expr.flags,
@@ -92501,7 +92501,7 @@ static void exprSetHeight(Expr *p){
 ** leave an error in pParse.
 **
 ** Also propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into
-** Expr.flags. 
+** Expr.flags.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
   if( pParse->nErr ) return;
@@ -92521,7 +92521,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SelectExprHeight(Select *p){
 #else /* ABOVE:  Height enforcement enabled.  BELOW: Height enforcement off */
 /*
 ** Propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into
-** Expr.flags. 
+** Expr.flags.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
   if( p && p->x.pList && !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_xIsSelect) ){
@@ -92591,7 +92591,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprAlloc(
     }
 #if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0
     pNew->nHeight = 1;
-#endif  
+#endif
   }
   return pNew;
 }
@@ -92760,7 +92760,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprFunction(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pList, Token *
 
 /*
 ** Assign a variable number to an expression that encodes a wildcard
-** in the original SQL statement.  
+** in the original SQL statement.
 **
 ** Wildcards consisting of a single "?" are assigned the next sequential
 ** variable number.
@@ -92875,7 +92875,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprDelete(sqlite3 *db, Expr *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure 
+** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure
 ** passed as the first argument. This is always one of EXPR_FULLSIZE,
 ** EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE or EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE.
 */
@@ -92890,14 +92890,14 @@ static int exprStructSize(Expr *p){
 ** to store a copy of an expression or expression tree.  They differ in
 ** how much of the tree is measured.
 **
-**     dupedExprStructSize()     Size of only the Expr structure 
+**     dupedExprStructSize()     Size of only the Expr structure
 **     dupedExprNodeSize()       Size of Expr + space for token
 **     dupedExprSize()           Expr + token + subtree components
 **
 ***************************************************************************
 **
-** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:  
-** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and 
+** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:
+** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and
 ** (2) the EP_xxx flags that indicate what the structure size should be.
 ** The return values is always one of:
 **
@@ -92928,7 +92928,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(Expr *p, int flags){
     nSize = EXPR_FULLSIZE;
   }else{
     assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) );
-    assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_FromJoin) ); 
+    assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_FromJoin) );
     assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_MemToken) );
     assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_NoReduce) );
     if( p->pLeft || p->x.pList ){
@@ -92942,7 +92942,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(Expr *p, int flags){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy 
+** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy
 ** of the Expr structure and a copy of the Expr.u.zToken string (if that
 ** string is defined.)
 */
@@ -92955,16 +92955,16 @@ static int dupedExprNodeSize(Expr *p, int flags){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the 
+** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the
 ** expression passed as the first argument. The second argument is a
 ** mask containing EXPRDUP_XXX flags.
 **
 ** The value returned includes space to create a copy of the Expr struct
 ** itself and the buffer referred to by Expr.u.zToken, if any.
 **
-** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes 
-** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft 
-** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or 
+** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes
+** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft
+** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or
 ** descended from the Expr.x.pList or Expr.x.pSelect variables).
 */
 static int dupedExprSize(Expr *p, int flags){
@@ -92979,8 +92979,8 @@ static int dupedExprSize(Expr *p, int flags){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer 
-** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough 
+** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer
+** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough
 ** to store the copy of expression p, the copies of p->u.zToken
 ** (if applicable), and the copies of the p->pLeft and p->pRight expressions,
 ** if any. Before returning, *pzBuffer is set to the first byte past the
@@ -93026,7 +93026,7 @@ static Expr *exprDup(sqlite3 *db, Expr *p, int dupFlags, u8 **pzBuffer){
     }else{
       u32 nSize = (u32)exprStructSize(p);
       memcpy(zAlloc, p, nSize);
-      if( nSize<EXPR_FULLSIZE ){ 
+      if( nSize<EXPR_FULLSIZE ){
         memset(&zAlloc[nSize], 0, EXPR_FULLSIZE-nSize);
       }
     }
@@ -93080,7 +93080,7 @@ static Expr *exprDup(sqlite3 *db, Expr *p, int dupFlags, u8 **pzBuffer){
 }
 
 /*
-** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second 
+** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second
 ** argument. If an OOM condition is encountered, NULL is returned
 ** and the db->mallocFailed flag set.
 */
@@ -93113,7 +93113,7 @@ static With *withDup(sqlite3 *db, With *p){
 ** without effecting the originals.
 **
 ** The expression list, ID, and source lists return by sqlite3ExprListDup(),
-** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded 
+** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded
 ** by subsequent calls to sqlite*ListAppend() routines.
 **
 ** Any tables that the SrcList might point to are not duplicated.
@@ -93143,9 +93143,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListDup(sqlite3 *db, ExprList *p, int flags)
     Expr *pOldExpr = pOldItem->pExpr;
     Expr *pNewExpr;
     pItem->pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pOldExpr, flags);
-    if( pOldExpr 
+    if( pOldExpr
      && pOldExpr->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN
-     && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0 
+     && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0
     ){
       assert( pNewExpr->iColumn==0 || i>0 );
       if( pNewExpr->iColumn==0 ){
@@ -93171,7 +93171,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListDup(sqlite3 *db, ExprList *p, int flags)
 
 /*
 ** If cursors, triggers, views and subqueries are all omitted from
-** the build, then none of the following routines, except for 
+** the build, then none of the following routines, except for
 ** sqlite3SelectDup(), can be called. sqlite3SelectDup() is sometimes
 ** called with a NULL argument.
 */
@@ -93204,7 +93204,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListDup(sqlite3 *db, SrcList *p, int flags){
     }
     pNewItem->pIBIndex = pOldItem->pIBIndex;
     if( pNewItem->fg.isTabFunc ){
-      pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg = 
+      pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg =
           sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pOldItem->u1.pFuncArg, flags);
     }
     pTab = pNewItem->pTab = pOldItem->pTab;
@@ -93317,7 +93317,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppend(
     pList->nExpr = 0;
   }else if( (pList->nExpr & (pList->nExpr-1))==0 ){
     ExprList *pNew;
-    pNew = sqlite3DbRealloc(db, pList, 
+    pNew = sqlite3DbRealloc(db, pList,
              sizeof(*pList)+(2*pList->nExpr - 1)*sizeof(pList->a[0]));
     if( pNew==0 ){
       goto no_mem;
@@ -93331,7 +93331,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppend(
   pItem->pExpr = pExpr;
   return pList;
 
-no_mem:     
+no_mem:
   /* Avoid leaking memory if malloc has failed. */
   sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pExpr);
   sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList);
@@ -93364,8 +93364,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppendVector(
   if( NEVER(pColumns==0) ) goto vector_append_error;
   if( pExpr==0 ) goto vector_append_error;
 
-  /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that 
-  ** the size of the RHS and LHS match.  But if the RHS is a SELECT, 
+  /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that
+  ** the size of the RHS and LHS match.  But if the RHS is a SELECT,
   ** wildcards ("*") in the result set of the SELECT must be expanded before
   ** we can do the size check, so defer the size check until code generation.
   */
@@ -93389,7 +93389,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppendVector(
     Expr *pFirst = pList->a[iFirst].pExpr;
     assert( pFirst!=0 );
     assert( pFirst->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN );
-     
+
     /* Store the SELECT statement in pRight so it will be deleted when
     ** sqlite3ExprListDelete() is called */
     pFirst->pRight = pExpr;
@@ -93555,7 +93555,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SelectWalkFail(Walker *pWalker, Select *NotUsed){
 ** in a CREATE TABLE statement.  The Walker.eCode value is 5 when parsing
 ** an existing schema and 4 when processing a new statement.  A bound
 ** parameter raises an error for new statements, but is silently converted
-** to NULL for existing schemas.  This allows sqlite_master tables that 
+** to NULL for existing schemas.  This allows sqlite_master tables that
 ** contain a bound parameter because they were generated by older versions
 ** of SQLite to be parsed by newer versions of SQLite without raising a
 ** malformed schema error.
@@ -93692,7 +93692,7 @@ static int exprNodeIsConstantOrGroupBy(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 
 /*
 ** Walk the expression tree passed as the first argument. Return non-zero
-** if the expression consists entirely of constants or copies of terms 
+** if the expression consists entirely of constants or copies of terms
 ** in pGroupBy that sort with the BINARY collation sequence.
 **
 ** This routine is used to determine if a term of the HAVING clause can
@@ -93794,7 +93794,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprIsInteger(Expr *p, int *pValue){
 ** Return FALSE if there is no chance that the expression can be NULL.
 **
 ** If the expression might be NULL or if the expression is too complex
-** to tell return TRUE.  
+** to tell return TRUE.
 **
 ** This routine is used as an optimization, to skip OP_IsNull opcodes
 ** when we know that a value cannot be NULL.  Hence, a false positive
@@ -93875,7 +93875,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsRowid(const char *z){
 }
 
 /*
-** pX is the RHS of an IN operator.  If pX is a SELECT statement 
+** pX is the RHS of an IN operator.  If pX is a SELECT statement
 ** that can be simplified to a direct table access, then return
 ** a pointer to the SELECT statement.  If pX is not a SELECT statement,
 ** or if the SELECT statement needs to be manifested into a transient
@@ -93942,7 +93942,7 @@ static void sqlite3SetHasNullFlag(Vdbe *v, int iCur, int regHasNull){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
 /*
-** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the 
+** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the
 ** right-hand side.  Return TRUE if that list is constant.
 */
 static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
@@ -94002,9 +94002,9 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
 ** to be unique - either because it is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or due to
 ** a UNIQUE constraint or index.
 **
-** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used 
-** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must 
-** be used unless <columns> is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an 
+** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used
+** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must
+** be used unless <columns> is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an
 ** index can be found with the specified <columns> as its left-most.
 **
 ** If the IN_INDEX_NOOP_OK and IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP are both set and
@@ -94016,7 +94016,7 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
 **
 ** When the b-tree is being used for membership tests, the calling function
 ** might need to know whether or not the RHS side of the IN operator
-** contains a NULL.  If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and 
+** contains a NULL.  If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and
 ** if there is any chance that the (...) might contain a NULL value at
 ** runtime, then a register is allocated and the register number written
 ** to *prRhsHasNull. If there is no chance that the (...) contains a
@@ -94055,9 +94055,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
   assert( pX->op==TK_IN );
   mustBeUnique = (inFlags & IN_INDEX_LOOP)!=0;
 
-  /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters 
+  /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters
   ** whether or not the SELECT result contains NULL values, check whether
-  ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due 
+  ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due
   ** to NOT NULL constraints in the schema). If no NULL values are possible,
   ** set prRhsHasNull to 0 before continuing.  */
   if( prRhsHasNull && (pX->flags & EP_xIsSelect) ){
@@ -94072,7 +94072,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
   }
 
   /* Check to see if an existing table or index can be used to
-  ** satisfy the query.  This is preferable to generating a new 
+  ** satisfy the query.  This is preferable to generating a new
   ** ephemeral table.  */
   if( pParse->nErr==0 && (p = isCandidateForInOpt(pX))!=0 ){
     sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;              /* Database connection */
@@ -94106,7 +94106,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
       int affinity_ok = 1;
       int i;
 
-      /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each 
+      /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each
       ** comparison is the same as the affinity of each column in table
       ** on the RHS of the IN operator.  If it not, it is not possible to
       ** use any index of the RHS table.  */
@@ -94150,14 +94150,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
               continue;  /* This index is not unique over the IN RHS columns */
             }
           }
-  
+
           colUsed = 0;   /* Columns of index used so far */
           for(i=0; i<nExpr; i++){
             Expr *pLhs = sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(pX->pLeft, i);
             Expr *pRhs = pEList->a[i].pExpr;
             CollSeq *pReq = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pLhs, pRhs);
             int j;
-  
+
             assert( pReq!=0 || pRhs->iColumn==XN_ROWID || pParse->nErr );
             for(j=0; j<nExpr; j++){
               if( pIdx->aiColumn[j]!=pRhs->iColumn ) continue;
@@ -94173,7 +94173,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
             colUsed |= mCol;
             if( aiMap ) aiMap[i] = j;
           }
-  
+
           assert( i==nExpr || colUsed!=(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) );
           if( colUsed==(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) ){
             /* If we reach this point, that means the index pIdx is usable */
@@ -94188,11 +94188,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
             VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName));
             assert( IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC == IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC+1 );
             eType = IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC + pIdx->aSortOrder[0];
-  
+
             if( prRhsHasNull ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK
               i64 mask = (1<<nExpr)-1;
-              sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Dup8(v, OP_ColumnsUsed, 
+              sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Dup8(v, OP_ColumnsUsed,
                   iTab, 0, 0, (u8*)&mask, P4_INT64);
 #endif
               *prRhsHasNull = ++pParse->nMem;
@@ -94254,8 +94254,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
 /*
-** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This 
-** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing 
+** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This
+** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing
 ** the affinities to be used for each column of the comparison.
 **
 ** It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure that the returned
@@ -94288,11 +94288,11 @@ static char *exprINAffinity(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
 /*
-** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error 
+** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error
 ** message of the form:
 **
 **   "sub-select returns N columns - expected M"
-*/   
+*/
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpect){
   const char *zFmt = "sub-select returns %d columns - expected %d";
   sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, zFmt, nActual, nExpect);
@@ -94301,7 +94301,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpec
 
 /*
 ** Expression pExpr is a vector that has been used in a context where
-** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine 
+** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine
 ** loads the Parse object with a message of the form:
 **
 **   "sub-select returns N columns - expected 1"
@@ -94309,7 +94309,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpec
 ** Or, if it is a regular scalar vector:
 **
 **   "row value misused"
-*/   
+*/
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VectorErrorMsg(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
   if( pExpr->flags & EP_xIsSelect ){
@@ -94394,13 +94394,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect(
       Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft; /* the LHS of the IN operator */
       KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = 0;      /* Key information */
       int nVal;                   /* Size of vector pLeft */
-      
+
       nVal = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pLeft);
       assert( !isRowid || nVal==1 );
 
       /* Whether this is an 'x IN(SELECT...)' or an 'x IN(<exprlist>)'
-      ** expression it is handled the same way.  An ephemeral table is 
-      ** filled with index keys representing the results from the 
+      ** expression it is handled the same way.  An ephemeral table is
+      ** filled with index keys representing the results from the
       ** SELECT or the <exprlist>.
       **
       ** If the 'x' expression is a column value, or the SELECT...
@@ -94412,7 +94412,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect(
       ** is used.
       */
       pExpr->iTable = pParse->nTab++;
-      addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, 
+      addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral,
           pExpr->iTable, (isRowid?0:nVal));
       pKeyInfo = isRowid ? 0 : sqlite3KeyInfoAlloc(pParse->db, nVal, 1);
 
@@ -94533,7 +94533,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect(
       ** If this is an EXISTS, write an integer 0 (not exists) or 1 (exists)
       ** into a register and return that register number.
       **
-      ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1".  Any 
+      ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1".  Any
       ** preexisting limit is discarded in place of the new LIMIT 1.
       */
       Select *pSel;                         /* SELECT statement to encode */
@@ -94589,9 +94589,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
 /*
-** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the 
-** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of 
-** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not 
+** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the
+** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of
+** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not
 ** a sub-query, that the LHS is a vector of size 1.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCheckIN(Parse *pParse, Expr *pIn){
@@ -94616,18 +94616,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCheckIN(Parse *pParse, Expr *pIn){
 **      x IN (SELECT ...)
 **      x IN (value, value, ...)
 **
-** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression.  The 
+** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression.  The
 ** right-hand side (RHS) is an array of zero or more scalar values, or a
 ** subquery.  If the RHS is a subquery, the number of result columns must
 ** match the number of columns in the vector on the LHS.  If the RHS is
-** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar. 
+** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar.
 **
 ** The IN operator is true if the LHS value is contained within the RHS.
-** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS.  The 
-** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be 
+** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS.  The
+** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be
 ** determined due to NULLs.
 **
-** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not 
+** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not
 ** contained within the RHS.  If due to NULLs we cannot determine if the LHS
 ** is contained in the RHS then jump to destIfNull.  If the LHS is contained
 ** within the RHS then fall through.
@@ -94656,7 +94656,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
   int destStep6 = 0;    /* Start of code for Step 6 */
   int addrTruthOp;      /* Address of opcode that determines the IN is true */
   int destNotNull;      /* Jump here if a comparison is not true in step 6 */
-  int addrTop;          /* Top of the step-6 loop */ 
+  int addrTop;          /* Top of the step-6 loop */
 
   pLeft = pExpr->pLeft;
   if( sqlite3ExprCheckIN(pParse, pExpr) ) return;
@@ -94668,7 +94668,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
   if( pParse->db->mallocFailed ) goto sqlite3ExprCodeIN_oom_error;
 
   /* Attempt to compute the RHS. After this step, if anything other than
-  ** IN_INDEX_NOOP is returned, the table opened ith cursor pExpr->iTable 
+  ** IN_INDEX_NOOP is returned, the table opened ith cursor pExpr->iTable
   ** contains the values that make up the RHS. If IN_INDEX_NOOP is returned,
   ** the RHS has not yet been coded.  */
   v = pParse->pVdbe;
@@ -94679,7 +94679,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
                              destIfFalse==destIfNull ? 0 : &rRhsHasNull, aiMap);
 
   assert( pParse->nErr || nVector==1 || eType==IN_INDEX_EPH
-       || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC 
+       || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC
   );
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
   /* Confirm that aiMap[] contains nVector integer values between 0 and
@@ -94691,8 +94691,8 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* Code the LHS, the <expr> from "<expr> IN (...)". If the LHS is a 
-  ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting 
+  /* Code the LHS, the <expr> from "<expr> IN (...)". If the LHS is a
+  ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting
   ** at r1.
   **
   ** sqlite3FindInIndex() might have reordered the fields of the LHS vector
@@ -94810,7 +94810,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
   }
 
   /* Step 5.  If we do not care about the difference between NULL and
-  ** FALSE, then just return false. 
+  ** FALSE, then just return false.
   */
   if( destIfFalse==destIfNull ) sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, destIfFalse);
 
@@ -94872,7 +94872,7 @@ sqlite3ExprCodeIN_oom_error:
 ** Generate an instruction that will put the floating point
 ** value described by z[0..n-1] into register iMem.
 **
-** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated.  But the 
+** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated.  But the
 ** z[n] character is guaranteed to be something that does not look
 ** like the continuation of the number.
 */
@@ -95121,7 +95121,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(
 
 /*
 ** Generate code that will extract the iColumn-th column from
-** table pTab and store the column value in a register. 
+** table pTab and store the column value in a register.
 **
 ** An effort is made to store the column value in register iReg.  This
 ** is not garanteeed for GetColumn() - the result can be stored in
@@ -95149,12 +95149,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(
       sqlite3ExprCachePinRegister(pParse, p->iReg);
       return p->iReg;
     }
-  }  
+  }
   assert( v!=0 );
   sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTable, iColumn, iReg);
   if( p5 ){
     sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, p5);
-  }else{   
+  }else{
     sqlite3ExprCacheStore(pParse, iTable, iColumn, iReg);
   }
   return iReg;
@@ -95447,7 +95447,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
     case TK_BITOR:
     case TK_SLASH:
     case TK_LSHIFT:
-    case TK_RSHIFT: 
+    case TK_RSHIFT:
     case TK_CONCAT: {
       assert( TK_AND==OP_And );            testcase( op==TK_AND );
       assert( TK_OR==OP_Or );              testcase( op==TK_OR );
@@ -95598,7 +95598,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
         char aff;
         assert( nFarg==1 );
         aff = sqlite3ExprAffinity(pFarg->a[0].pExpr);
-        sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, target, 
+        sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, target,
                               aff ? azAff[aff-SQLITE_AFF_BLOB] : "none");
         return target;
       }
@@ -95635,7 +95635,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
             assert( SQLITE_FUNC_LENGTH==OPFLAG_LENGTHARG );
             assert( SQLITE_FUNC_TYPEOF==OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG );
             testcase( pDef->funcFlags & OPFLAG_LENGTHARG );
-            pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 = 
+            pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 =
                   pDef->funcFlags & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG);
           }
         }
@@ -95656,7 +95656,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
       ** see if it is a column in a virtual table.  This is done because
       ** the left operand of infix functions (the operand we want to
       ** control overloading) ends up as the second argument to the
-      ** function.  The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to 
+      ** function.  The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to
       ** "glob(B,A).  We want to use the A in "A glob B" to test
       ** for function overloading.  But we use the B term in "glob(B,A)".
       */
@@ -95667,7 +95667,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
       }
 #endif
       if( pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){
-        if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl; 
+        if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl;
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0, 0, 0, (char *)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
       }
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, pParse->iSelfTab ? OP_PureFunc0 : OP_Function0,
@@ -95698,7 +95698,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
       }
       assert( pExpr->iTable==0 || pExpr->pLeft->op==TK_SELECT );
       if( pExpr->iTable
-       && pExpr->iTable!=(n = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft)) 
+       && pExpr->iTable!=(n = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))
       ){
         sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d columns assigned %d values",
                                 pExpr->iTable, n);
@@ -95735,7 +95735,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
       return target;
     }
     case TK_SPAN:
-    case TK_COLLATE: 
+    case TK_COLLATE:
     case TK_UPLUS: {
       return sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pExpr->pLeft, target);
     }
@@ -95750,7 +95750,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
       **
       ** The expression is implemented using an OP_Param opcode. The p1
       ** parameter is set to 0 for an old.rowid reference, or to (i+1)
-      ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where 
+      ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where
       ** i is the index of the column. For a new.rowid reference, p1 is
       ** set to (n+1), where n is the number of columns in each pseudo-table.
       ** For a reference to any other column in the new.* pseudo-table, p1
@@ -95764,7 +95764,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
       **
       **   p1==0   ->    old.rowid     p1==3   ->    new.rowid
       **   p1==1   ->    old.a         p1==4   ->    new.a
-      **   p1==2   ->    old.b         p1==5   ->    new.b       
+      **   p1==2   ->    old.b         p1==5   ->    new.b
       */
       Table *pTab = pExpr->pTab;
       int p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1 + pExpr->iColumn;
@@ -95787,7 +95787,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
       **
       ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-60985-57662 SQLite will convert the value back to
       ** floating point when extracting it from the record.  */
-      if( pExpr->iColumn>=0 
+      if( pExpr->iColumn>=0
        && pTab->aCol[pExpr->iColumn].affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL
       ){
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_RealAffinity, target);
@@ -95890,14 +95890,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
       }else{
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, target);
       }
-      assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed || pParse->nErr>0 
+      assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed || pParse->nErr>0
            || pParse->iCacheLevel==iCacheLevel );
       sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endLabel);
       break;
     }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
     case TK_RAISE: {
-      assert( pExpr->affinity==OE_Rollback 
+      assert( pExpr->affinity==OE_Rollback
            || pExpr->affinity==OE_Abort
            || pExpr->affinity==OE_Fail
            || pExpr->affinity==OE_Ignore
@@ -95933,8 +95933,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
 ** Factor out the code of the given expression to initialization time.
 **
 ** If regDest>=0 then the result is always stored in that register and the
-** result is not reusable.  If regDest<0 then this routine is free to 
-** store the value whereever it wants.  The register where the expression 
+** result is not reusable.  If regDest<0 then this routine is free to
+** store the value whereever it wants.  The register where the expression
 ** is stored is returned.  When regDest<0, two identical expressions will
 ** code to the same register.
 */
@@ -96056,7 +96056,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int ta
 ** and modify the expression so that the next time it is evaluated,
 ** the result is a copy of the cache register.
 **
-** This routine is used for expressions that are used multiple 
+** This routine is used for expressions that are used multiple
 ** times.  They are evaluated once and the results of the expression
 ** are reused.
 */
@@ -96143,7 +96143,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeExprList(
 **
 **    x BETWEEN y AND z
 **
-** The above is equivalent to 
+** The above is equivalent to
 **
 **    x>=y AND x<=z
 **
@@ -96338,7 +96338,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprIfTrue(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int dest, int
     }
   }
   sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree1);
-  sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);  
+  sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -96476,7 +96476,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprIfFalse(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int dest, int
     }
 #endif
     default: {
-    default_expr: 
+    default_expr:
       if( exprAlwaysFalse(pExpr) ){
         sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, dest);
       }else if( exprAlwaysTrue(pExpr) ){
@@ -96526,7 +96526,7 @@ static int exprCompareVariable(Parse *pParse, Expr *pVar, Expr *pExpr){
   int res = 0;
   int iVar;
   sqlite3_value *pL, *pR = 0;
-  
+
   sqlite3ValueFromExpr(pParse->db, pExpr, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB, &pR);
   if( pR ){
     iVar = pVar->iColumn;
@@ -96568,9 +96568,9 @@ static int exprCompareVariable(Parse *pParse, Expr *pVar, Expr *pExpr){
 ** an incorrect 0 or 1 could lead to a malfunction.
 **
 ** If pParse is not NULL then TK_VARIABLE terms in pA with bindings in
-** pParse->pReprepare can be matched against literals in pB.  The 
+** pParse->pReprepare can be matched against literals in pB.  The
 ** pParse->pVdbe->expmask bitmask is updated for each variable referenced.
-** If pParse is NULL (the normal case) then any TK_VARIABLE term in 
+** If pParse is NULL (the normal case) then any TK_VARIABLE term in
 ** Argument pParse should normally be NULL. If it is not NULL and pA or
 ** pB causes a return value of 2.
 */
@@ -96613,7 +96613,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCompare(Parse *pParse, Expr *pA, Expr *pB, int iTa
     if( sqlite3ExprListCompare(pA->x.pList, pB->x.pList, iTab) ) return 2;
     if( ALWAYS((combinedFlags & EP_Reduced)==0) && pA->op!=TK_STRING ){
       if( pA->iColumn!=pB->iColumn ) return 2;
-      if( pA->iTable!=pB->iTable 
+      if( pA->iTable!=pB->iTable
        && (pA->iTable!=iTab || NEVER(pB->iTable>=0)) ) return 2;
     }
   }
@@ -96621,7 +96621,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCompare(Parse *pParse, Expr *pA, Expr *pB, int iTa
 }
 
 /*
-** Compare two ExprList objects.  Return 0 if they are identical and 
+** Compare two ExprList objects.  Return 0 if they are identical and
 ** non-zero if they differ in any way.
 **
 ** If any subelement of pB has Expr.iTable==(-1) then it is allowed
@@ -96676,9 +96676,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCompareSkip(Expr *pA, Expr *pB, int iTab){
 ** When comparing TK_COLUMN nodes between pE1 and pE2, if pE2 has
 ** Expr.iTable<0 then assume a table number given by iTab.
 **
-** If pParse is not NULL, then the values of bound variables in pE1 are 
+** If pParse is not NULL, then the values of bound variables in pE1 are
 ** compared against literal values in pE2 and pParse->pVdbe->expmask is
-** modified to record which bound variables are referenced.  If pParse 
+** modified to record which bound variables are referenced.  If pParse
 ** is NULL, then false will be returned if pE1 contains any bound variables.
 **
 ** When in doubt, return false.  Returning true might give a performance
@@ -96716,7 +96716,7 @@ struct IdxCover {
 };
 
 /*
-** Check to see if there are references to columns in table 
+** Check to see if there are references to columns in table
 ** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->iCur can be satisfied using the index
 ** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->pIdx.
 */
@@ -96760,7 +96760,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCoveredByIndex(
 
 /*
 ** An instance of the following structure is used by the tree walker
-** to count references to table columns in the arguments of an 
+** to count references to table columns in the arguments of an
 ** aggregate function, in order to implement the
 ** sqlite3FunctionThisSrc() routine.
 */
@@ -96830,7 +96830,7 @@ static int addAggInfoColumn(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
        &i
   );
   return i;
-}    
+}
 
 /*
 ** Add a new element to the pAggInfo->aFunc[] array.  Return the index of
@@ -96839,14 +96839,14 @@ static int addAggInfoColumn(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
 static int addAggInfoFunc(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
   int i;
   pInfo->aFunc = sqlite3ArrayAllocate(
-       db, 
+       db,
        pInfo->aFunc,
        sizeof(pInfo->aFunc[0]),
        &pInfo->nFunc,
        &i
   );
   return i;
-}    
+}
 
 /*
 ** This is the xExprCallback for a tree walker.  It is used to
@@ -96874,7 +96874,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
           assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) );
           if( pExpr->iTable==pItem->iCursor ){
             /* If we reach this point, it means that pExpr refers to a table
-            ** that is in the FROM clause of the aggregate query.  
+            ** that is in the FROM clause of the aggregate query.
             **
             ** Make an entry for the column in pAggInfo->aCol[] if there
             ** is not an entry there already.
@@ -96888,7 +96888,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
               }
             }
             if( (k>=pAggInfo->nColumn)
-             && (k = addAggInfoColumn(pParse->db, pAggInfo))>=0 
+             && (k = addAggInfoColumn(pParse->db, pAggInfo))>=0
             ){
               pCol = &pAggInfo->aCol[k];
               pCol->pTab = pExpr->pTab;
@@ -96934,7 +96934,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
       if( (pNC->ncFlags & NC_InAggFunc)==0
        && pWalker->walkerDepth==pExpr->op2
       ){
-        /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate 
+        /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate
         ** function that is already in the pAggInfo structure
         */
         struct AggInfo_func *pItem = pAggInfo->aFunc;
@@ -96955,7 +96955,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
             pItem->iMem = ++pParse->nMem;
             assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_IntValue) );
             pItem->pFunc = sqlite3FindFunction(pParse->db,
-                   pExpr->u.zToken, 
+                   pExpr->u.zToken,
                    pExpr->x.pList ? pExpr->x.pList->nExpr : 0, enc, 0);
             if( pExpr->flags & EP_Distinct ){
               pItem->iDistinct = pParse->nTab++;
@@ -97143,9 +97143,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3NoTempsInRange(Parse *pParse, int iFirst, int iLast){
 
 
 /*
-** This function is used by SQL generated to implement the 
+** This function is used by SQL generated to implement the
 ** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TABLE or
-** CREATE INDEX command. The second is a table name. The table name in 
+** CREATE INDEX command. The second is a table name. The table name in
 ** the CREATE TABLE or CREATE INDEX statement is replaced with the third
 ** argument and the result returned. Examples:
 **
@@ -97173,7 +97173,7 @@ static void renameTableFunc(
 
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed);
 
-  /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TABLE 
+  /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TABLE
   ** statement is that the table name is the first non-space token that
   ** is immediately followed by a TK_LP or TK_USING token.
   */
@@ -97207,7 +97207,7 @@ static void renameTableFunc(
 /*
 ** This C function implements an SQL user function that is used by SQL code
 ** generated by the ALTER TABLE ... RENAME command to modify the definition
-** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the 
+** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the
 ** parent table. It is passed three arguments:
 **
 **   1) The complete text of the CREATE TABLE statement being modified,
@@ -97252,7 +97252,7 @@ static void renameParentFunc(
       if( zParent==0 ) break;
       sqlite3Dequote(zParent);
       if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp((const char *)zOld, zParent) ){
-        char *zOut = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%.*s\"%w\"", 
+        char *zOut = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%.*s\"%w\"",
             (zOutput?zOutput:""), (int)(z-zInput), zInput, (const char *)zNew
         );
         sqlite3DbFree(db, zOutput);
@@ -97263,7 +97263,7 @@ static void renameParentFunc(
     }
   }
 
-  zResult = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%s", (zOutput?zOutput:""), zInput), 
+  zResult = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%s", (zOutput?zOutput:""), zInput),
   sqlite3_result_text(context, zResult, -1, SQLITE_DYNAMIC);
   sqlite3DbFree(db, zOutput);
 }
@@ -97271,9 +97271,9 @@ static void renameParentFunc(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
 /* This function is used by SQL generated to implement the
-** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TRIGGER 
-** statement. The second is a table name. The table name in the CREATE 
-** TRIGGER statement is replaced with the third argument and the result 
+** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TRIGGER
+** statement. The second is a table name. The table name in the CREATE
+** TRIGGER statement is replaced with the third argument and the result
 ** returned. This is analagous to renameTableFunc() above, except for CREATE
 ** TRIGGER, not CREATE INDEX and CREATE TABLE.
 */
@@ -97295,7 +97295,7 @@ static void renameTriggerFunc(
 
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed);
 
-  /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TRIGGER 
+  /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TRIGGER
   ** statement is that the table name is the first token that is immediately
   ** preceded by either TK_ON or TK_DOT and immediately followed by one
   ** of TK_WHEN, TK_BEGIN or TK_FOR.
@@ -97322,12 +97322,12 @@ static void renameTriggerFunc(
       assert( len>0 );
 
       /* Variable 'dist' stores the number of tokens read since the most
-      ** recent TK_DOT or TK_ON. This means that when a WHEN, FOR or BEGIN 
+      ** recent TK_DOT or TK_ON. This means that when a WHEN, FOR or BEGIN
       ** token is read and 'dist' equals 2, the condition stated above
       ** to be met.
       **
       ** Note that ON cannot be a database, table or column name, so
-      ** there is no need to worry about syntax like 
+      ** there is no need to worry about syntax like
       ** "CREATE TRIGGER ... ON ON.ON BEGIN ..." etc.
       */
       dist++;
@@ -97367,16 +97367,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFunctions(void){
 **
 **   name=<constant1> OR name=<constant2> OR ...
 **
-** If argument zWhere is NULL, then a pointer string containing the text 
+** If argument zWhere is NULL, then a pointer string containing the text
 ** "name=<constant>" is returned, where <constant> is the quoted version
 ** of the string passed as argument zConstant. The returned buffer is
 ** allocated using sqlite3DbMalloc(). It is the responsibility of the
 ** caller to ensure that it is eventually freed.
 **
-** If argument zWhere is not NULL, then the string returned is 
+** If argument zWhere is not NULL, then the string returned is
 ** "<where> OR name=<constant>", where <where> is the contents of zWhere.
 ** In this case zWhere is passed to sqlite3DbFree() before returning.
-** 
+**
 */
 static char *whereOrName(sqlite3 *db, char *zWhere, char *zConstant){
   char *zNew;
@@ -97409,7 +97409,7 @@ static char *whereForeignKeys(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
 /*
 ** Generate the text of a WHERE expression which can be used to select all
 ** temporary triggers on table pTab from the sqlite_temp_master table. If
-** table pTab has no temporary triggers, or is itself stored in the 
+** table pTab has no temporary triggers, or is itself stored in the
 ** temporary database, NULL is returned.
 */
 static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
@@ -97417,9 +97417,9 @@ static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
   char *zWhere = 0;
   const Schema *pTempSchema = pParse->db->aDb[1].pSchema; /* Temp db schema */
 
-  /* If the table is not located in the temp-db (in which case NULL is 
+  /* If the table is not located in the temp-db (in which case NULL is
   ** returned, loop through the tables list of triggers. For each trigger
-  ** that is not part of the temp-db schema, add a clause to the WHERE 
+  ** that is not part of the temp-db schema, add a clause to the WHERE
   ** expression being built up in zWhere.
   */
   if( pTab->pSchema!=pTempSchema ){
@@ -97443,7 +97443,7 @@ static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
 ** pTab from the database, including triggers and temporary triggers.
 ** Argument zName is the name of the table in the database schema at
 ** the time the generated code is executed. This can be different from
-** pTab->zName if this function is being called to code part of an 
+** pTab->zName if this function is being called to code part of an
 ** "ALTER TABLE RENAME TO" statement.
 */
 static void reloadTableSchema(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, const char *zName){
@@ -97478,8 +97478,8 @@ static void reloadTableSchema(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, const char *zName){
   sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(v, iDb, zWhere);
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
-  /* Now, if the table is not stored in the temp database, reload any temp 
-  ** triggers. Don't use IN(...) in case SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY is defined. 
+  /* Now, if the table is not stored in the temp database, reload any temp
+  ** triggers. Don't use IN(...) in case SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY is defined.
   */
   if( (zWhere=whereTempTriggers(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
     sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(v, 1, zWhere);
@@ -97504,8 +97504,8 @@ static int isSystemTable(Parse *pParse, const char *zName){
 }
 
 /*
-** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy" 
-** command. 
+** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy"
+** command.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   Parse *pParse,            /* Parser context. */
@@ -97515,7 +97515,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   int iDb;                  /* Database that contains the table */
   char *zDb;                /* Name of database iDb */
   Table *pTab;              /* Table being renamed */
-  char *zName = 0;          /* NULL-terminated version of pName */ 
+  char *zName = 0;          /* NULL-terminated version of pName */
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */
   int nTabName;             /* Number of UTF-8 characters in zTabName */
   const char *zTabName;     /* Original name of the table */
@@ -97526,7 +97526,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   VTable *pVTab = 0;        /* Non-zero if this is a v-tab with an xRename() */
   u32 savedDbFlags;         /* Saved value of db->mDbFlags */
 
-  savedDbFlags = db->mDbFlags;  
+  savedDbFlags = db->mDbFlags;
   if( NEVER(db->mallocFailed) ) goto exit_rename_table;
   assert( pSrc->nSrc==1 );
   assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsAllMutexes(pParse->db) );
@@ -97545,7 +97545,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   ** in database iDb. If so, this is an error.
   */
   if( sqlite3FindTable(db, zName, zDb) || sqlite3FindIndex(db, zName, zDb) ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
         "there is already another table or index with this name: %s", zName);
     goto exit_rename_table;
   }
@@ -97586,7 +97586,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* Begin a transaction for database iDb. 
+  /* Begin a transaction for database iDb.
   ** Then modify the schema cookie (since the ALTER TABLE modifies the
   ** schema). Open a statement transaction if the table is a virtual
   ** table.
@@ -97618,11 +97618,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
 
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER)
   if( db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
-    /* If foreign-key support is enabled, rewrite the CREATE TABLE 
+    /* If foreign-key support is enabled, rewrite the CREATE TABLE
     ** statements corresponding to all child tables of foreign key constraints
     ** for which the renamed table is the parent table.  */
     if( (zWhere=whereForeignKeys(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
-      sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+      sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
           "UPDATE \"%w\".%s SET "
               "sql = sqlite_rename_parent(sql, %Q, %Q) "
               "WHERE %s;", zDb, MASTER_NAME, zTabName, zName, zWhere);
@@ -97648,8 +97648,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
              "'sqlite_autoindex_' || %Q || substr(name,%d+18) "
             "ELSE name END "
       "WHERE tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase AND "
-          "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');", 
-      zDb, MASTER_NAME, zName, zName, zName, 
+          "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');",
+      zDb, MASTER_NAME, zName, zName, zName,
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
       zName,
 #endif
@@ -97657,7 +97657,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   );
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
-  /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update 
+  /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update
   ** it with the new table name.
   */
   if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_sequence", zDb) ){
@@ -97673,7 +97673,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   ** the temp database.
   */
   if( (zWhere=whereTempTriggers(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
-    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
         "UPDATE sqlite_temp_master SET "
             "sql = sqlite_rename_trigger(sql, %Q), "
             "tbl_name = %Q "
@@ -97746,7 +97746,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a 
+  /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a
   ** literal NULL, then set pDflt to 0. This simplifies checking
   ** for an SQL NULL default below.
   */
@@ -97768,12 +97768,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
     return;
   }
   if( (db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys) && pNew->pFKey && pDflt ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
         "Cannot add a REFERENCES column with non-NULL default value");
     return;
   }
   if( pCol->notNull && !pDflt ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
         "Cannot add a NOT NULL column with default value NULL");
     return;
   }
@@ -97806,10 +97806,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
       *zEnd-- = '\0';
     }
     db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_PreferBuiltin;
-    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
         "UPDATE \"%w\".%s SET "
           "sql = substr(sql,1,%d) || ', ' || %Q || substr(sql,%d) "
-        "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q", 
+        "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q",
       zDb, MASTER_NAME, pNew->addColOffset, zCol, pNew->addColOffset+1,
       zTab
     );
@@ -97836,14 +97836,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called by the parser after the table-name in
-** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument 
+** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument
 ** pSrc is the full-name of the table being altered.
 **
 ** This routine makes a (partial) copy of the Table structure
 ** for the table being altered and sets Parse.pNewTable to point
 ** to it. Routines called by the parser as the column definition
-** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to 
-** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c 
+** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to
+** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c
 ** after parsing is finished.
 **
 ** Routine sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn() will be called to complete
@@ -97981,7 +97981,7 @@ exit_begin_add_column:
 ** integer is the average number of rows in the index that have the same
 ** value in the first column of the index.  The third integer is the average
 ** number of rows in the index that have the same value for the first two
-** columns.  The N-th integer (for N>1) is the average number of rows in 
+** columns.  The N-th integer (for N>1) is the average number of rows in
 ** the index which have the same value for the first N-1 columns.  For
 ** a K-column index, there will be K+1 integers in the stat column.  If
 ** the index is unique, then the last integer will be 1.
@@ -97991,7 +97991,7 @@ exit_begin_add_column:
 ** must be separated from the last integer by a single space.  If the
 ** "unordered" keyword is present, then the query planner assumes that
 ** the index is unordered and will not use the index for a range query.
-** 
+**
 ** If the sqlite_stat1.idx column is NULL, then the sqlite_stat1.stat
 ** column contains a single integer which is the (estimated) number of
 ** rows in the table identified by sqlite_stat1.tbl.
@@ -98049,9 +98049,9 @@ exit_begin_add_column:
 ** number of entries that are strictly less than the sample.  The first
 ** integer in nLt contains the number of entries in the index where the
 ** left-most column is less than the left-most column of the sample.
-** The K-th integer in the nLt entry is the number of index entries 
+** The K-th integer in the nLt entry is the number of index entries
 ** where the first K columns are less than the first K columns of the
-** sample.  The nDLt column is like nLt except that it contains the 
+** sample.  The nDLt column is like nLt except that it contains the
 ** number of distinct entries in the index that are less than the
 ** sample.
 **
@@ -98144,9 +98144,9 @@ static void openStatTable(
     Table *pStat;
     if( (pStat = sqlite3FindTable(db, zTab, pDb->zDbSName))==0 ){
       if( aTable[i].zCols ){
-        /* The sqlite_statN table does not exist. Create it. Note that a 
-        ** side-effect of the CREATE TABLE statement is to leave the rootpage 
-        ** of the new table in register pParse->regRoot. This is important 
+        /* The sqlite_statN table does not exist. Create it. Note that a
+        ** side-effect of the CREATE TABLE statement is to leave the rootpage
+        ** of the new table in register pParse->regRoot. This is important
         ** because the OpenWrite opcode below will be needing it. */
         sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
             "CREATE TABLE %Q.%s(%s)", pDb->zDbSName, zTab, aTable[i].zCols
@@ -98155,7 +98155,7 @@ static void openStatTable(
         aCreateTbl[i] = OPFLAG_P2ISREG;
       }
     }else{
-      /* The table already exists. If zWhere is not NULL, delete all entries 
+      /* The table already exists. If zWhere is not NULL, delete all entries
       ** associated with the table zWhere. If zWhere is NULL, delete the
       ** entire contents of the table. */
       aRoot[i] = pStat->tnum;
@@ -98210,7 +98210,7 @@ struct Stat4Sample {
   int iCol;                       /* If !isPSample, the reason for inclusion */
   u32 iHash;                      /* Tiebreaker hash */
 #endif
-};                                                    
+};
 struct Stat4Accum {
   tRowcnt nRow;             /* Number of rows in the entire table */
   tRowcnt nPSample;         /* How often to do a periodic sample */
@@ -98319,7 +98319,7 @@ static void stat4Destructor(void *pOld){
 ** PRIMARY KEY of the table.  The covering index that implements the
 ** original WITHOUT ROWID table as N==K as a special case.
 **
-** This routine allocates the Stat4Accum object in heap memory. The return 
+** This routine allocates the Stat4Accum object in heap memory. The return
 ** value is a pointer to the Stat4Accum object.  The datatype of the
 ** return value is BLOB, but it is really just a pointer to the Stat4Accum
 ** object.
@@ -98349,7 +98349,7 @@ static void statInit(
   assert( nKeyCol>0 );
 
   /* Allocate the space required for the Stat4Accum object */
-  n = sizeof(*p) 
+  n = sizeof(*p)
     + sizeof(tRowcnt)*nColUp                  /* Stat4Accum.anEq */
     + sizeof(tRowcnt)*nColUp                  /* Stat4Accum.anDLt */
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
@@ -98382,7 +98382,7 @@ static void statInit(
     p->nPSample = (tRowcnt)(sqlite3_value_int64(argv[2])/(mxSample/3+1) + 1);
     p->current.anLt = &p->current.anEq[nColUp];
     p->iPrn = 0x689e962d*(u32)nCol ^ 0xd0944565*(u32)sqlite3_value_int(argv[2]);
-  
+
     /* Set up the Stat4Accum.a[] and aBest[] arrays */
     p->a = (struct Stat4Sample*)&p->current.anLt[nColUp];
     p->aBest = &p->a[mxSample];
@@ -98393,7 +98393,7 @@ static void statInit(
       p->a[i].anDLt = (tRowcnt *)pSpace; pSpace += (sizeof(tRowcnt) * nColUp);
     }
     assert( (pSpace - (u8*)p)==n );
-  
+
     for(i=0; i<nCol; i++){
       p->aBest[i].iCol = i;
     }
@@ -98419,19 +98419,19 @@ static const FuncDef statInitFuncdef = {
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4
 /*
-** pNew and pOld are both candidate non-periodic samples selected for 
-** the same column (pNew->iCol==pOld->iCol). Ignoring this column and 
+** pNew and pOld are both candidate non-periodic samples selected for
+** the same column (pNew->iCol==pOld->iCol). Ignoring this column and
 ** considering only any trailing columns and the sample hash value, this
 ** function returns true if sample pNew is to be preferred over pOld.
 ** In other words, if we assume that the cardinalities of the selected
 ** column for pNew and pOld are equal, is pNew to be preferred over pOld.
 **
 ** This function assumes that for each argument sample, the contents of
-** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol+1] onwards are valid. 
+** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol+1] onwards are valid.
 */
 static int sampleIsBetterPost(
-  Stat4Accum *pAccum, 
-  Stat4Sample *pNew, 
+  Stat4Accum *pAccum,
+  Stat4Sample *pNew,
   Stat4Sample *pOld
 ){
   int nCol = pAccum->nCol;
@@ -98451,11 +98451,11 @@ static int sampleIsBetterPost(
 ** Return true if pNew is to be preferred over pOld.
 **
 ** This function assumes that for each argument sample, the contents of
-** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol] onwards are valid. 
+** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol] onwards are valid.
 */
 static int sampleIsBetter(
-  Stat4Accum *pAccum, 
-  Stat4Sample *pNew, 
+  Stat4Accum *pAccum,
+  Stat4Sample *pNew,
   Stat4Sample *pOld
 ){
   tRowcnt nEqNew = pNew->anEq[pNew->iCol];
@@ -98498,7 +98498,7 @@ static void sampleInsert(Stat4Accum *p, Stat4Sample *pNew, int nEqZero){
     Stat4Sample *pUpgrade = 0;
     assert( pNew->anEq[pNew->iCol]>0 );
 
-    /* This sample is being added because the prefix that ends in column 
+    /* This sample is being added because the prefix that ends in column
     ** iCol occurs many times in the table. However, if we have already
     ** added a sample that shares this prefix, there is no need to add
     ** this one. Instead, upgrade the priority of the highest priority
@@ -98542,7 +98542,7 @@ static void sampleInsert(Stat4Accum *p, Stat4Sample *pNew, int nEqZero){
   ** for the last sample in the p->a[] array. Otherwise, the samples would
   ** be out of order. */
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4
-  assert( p->nSample==0 
+  assert( p->nSample==0
        || pNew->anLt[p->nCol-1] > p->a[p->nSample-1].anLt[p->nCol-1] );
 #endif
 
@@ -98620,11 +98620,11 @@ static void samplePushPrevious(Stat4Accum *p, int iChng){
       p->current.isPSample = 1;
       sampleInsert(p, &p->current, 0);
       p->current.isPSample = 0;
-    }else 
+    }else
 
     /* Or if it is a non-periodic sample. Add it in this case too. */
-    if( p->nSample<p->mxSample 
-     || sampleIsBetter(p, &p->current, &p->a[p->iMin]) 
+    if( p->nSample<p->mxSample
+     || sampleIsBetter(p, &p->current, &p->a[p->iMin])
     ){
       sampleInsert(p, &p->current, 0);
     }
@@ -98768,9 +98768,9 @@ static void statGet(
   /* STAT3 and STAT4 have a parameter on this routine. */
   int eCall = sqlite3_value_int(argv[1]);
   assert( argc==2 );
-  assert( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 || eCall==STAT_GET_NEQ 
+  assert( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 || eCall==STAT_GET_NEQ
        || eCall==STAT_GET_ROWID || eCall==STAT_GET_NLT
-       || eCall==STAT_GET_NDLT 
+       || eCall==STAT_GET_NDLT
   );
   if( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 )
 #else
@@ -98780,20 +98780,20 @@ static void statGet(
     /* Return the value to store in the "stat" column of the sqlite_stat1
     ** table for this index.
     **
-    ** The value is a string composed of a list of integers describing 
-    ** the index. The first integer in the list is the total number of 
-    ** entries in the index. There is one additional integer in the list 
+    ** The value is a string composed of a list of integers describing
+    ** the index. The first integer in the list is the total number of
+    ** entries in the index. There is one additional integer in the list
     ** for each indexed column. This additional integer is an estimate of
     ** the number of rows matched by a stabbing query on the index using
     ** a key with the corresponding number of fields. In other words,
-    ** if the index is on columns (a,b) and the sqlite_stat1 value is 
+    ** if the index is on columns (a,b) and the sqlite_stat1 value is
     ** "100 10 2", then SQLite estimates that:
     **
     **   * the index contains 100 rows,
     **   * "WHERE a=?" matches 10 rows, and
     **   * "WHERE a=? AND b=?" matches 2 rows.
     **
-    ** If D is the count of distinct values and K is the total number of 
+    ** If D is the count of distinct values and K is the total number of
     ** rows, then each estimate is computed as:
     **
     **        I = (K+D-1)/D
@@ -98843,7 +98843,7 @@ static void statGet(
       case STAT_GET_NEQ:  aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anEq; break;
       case STAT_GET_NLT:  aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anLt; break;
       default: {
-        aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anDLt; 
+        aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anDLt;
         p->iGet++;
         break;
       }
@@ -98955,7 +98955,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* Establish a read-lock on the table at the shared-cache level. 
+  /* Establish a read-lock on the table at the shared-cache level.
   ** Open a read-only cursor on the table. Also allocate a cursor number
   ** to use for scanning indexes (iIdxCur). No index cursor is opened at
   ** this time though.  */
@@ -99021,9 +99021,9 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
     **  end_of_scan:
     */
 
-    /* Make sure there are enough memory cells allocated to accommodate 
+    /* Make sure there are enough memory cells allocated to accommodate
     ** the regPrev array and a trailing rowid (the rowid slot is required
-    ** when building a record to insert into the sample column of 
+    ** when building a record to insert into the sample column of
     ** the sqlite_stat4 table.  */
     pParse->nMem = MAX(pParse->nMem, regPrev+nColTest);
 
@@ -99034,7 +99034,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
     VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName));
 
     /* Invoke the stat_init() function. The arguments are:
-    ** 
+    **
     **    (1) the number of columns in the index including the rowid
     **        (or for a WITHOUT ROWID table, the number of PK columns),
     **    (2) the number of columns in the key without the rowid/pk
@@ -99085,7 +99085,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
       addrNextRow = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
       if( nColTest==1 && pIdx->nKeyCol==1 && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) ){
         /* For a single-column UNIQUE index, once we have found a non-NULL
-        ** row, we know that all the rest will be distinct, so skip 
+        ** row, we know that all the rest will be distinct, so skip
         ** subsequent distinctness tests. */
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, regPrev, endDistinctTest);
         VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -99094,15 +99094,15 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
         char *pColl = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pIdx->azColl[i]);
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, i, regChng);
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iIdxCur, i, regTemp);
-        aGotoChng[i] = 
+        aGotoChng[i] =
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Ne, regTemp, 0, regPrev+i, pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
         sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NULLEQ);
         VdbeCoverage(v);
       }
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, nColTest, regChng);
       sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, endDistinctTest);
-  
-  
+
+
       /*
       **  chng_addr_0:
       **   regPrev(0) = idx(0)
@@ -99118,7 +99118,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
       sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endDistinctTest);
       sqlite3DbFree(db, aGotoChng);
     }
-  
+
     /*
     **  chng_addr_N:
     **   regRowid = idx(rowid)            // STAT34 only
@@ -99421,7 +99421,7 @@ static void decodeIntArray(
 
 /*
 ** This callback is invoked once for each index when reading the
-** sqlite_stat1 table.  
+** sqlite_stat1 table.
 **
 **     argv[0] = name of the table
 **     argv[1] = name of the index (might be NULL)
@@ -99459,7 +99459,7 @@ static int analysisLoader(void *pData, int argc, char **argv, char **NotUsed){
     tRowcnt *aiRowEst = 0;
     int nCol = pIndex->nKeyCol+1;
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
-    /* Index.aiRowEst may already be set here if there are duplicate 
+    /* Index.aiRowEst may already be set here if there are duplicate
     ** sqlite_stat1 entries for this index. In that case just clobber
     ** the old data with the new instead of allocating a new array.  */
     if( pIndex->aiRowEst==0 ){
@@ -99516,7 +99516,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteIndexSamples(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
 /*
 ** Populate the pIdx->aAvgEq[] array based on the samples currently
-** stored in pIdx->aSample[]. 
+** stored in pIdx->aSample[].
 */
 static void initAvgEq(Index *pIdx){
   if( pIdx ){
@@ -99552,12 +99552,12 @@ static void initAvgEq(Index *pIdx){
       pIdx->nRowEst0 = nRow;
 
       /* Set nSum to the number of distinct (iCol+1) field prefixes that
-      ** occur in the stat4 table for this index. Set sumEq to the sum of 
-      ** the nEq values for column iCol for the same set (adding the value 
+      ** occur in the stat4 table for this index. Set sumEq to the sum of
+      ** the nEq values for column iCol for the same set (adding the value
       ** only once where there exist duplicate prefixes).  */
       for(i=0; i<nSample; i++){
         if( i==(pIdx->nSample-1)
-         || aSample[i].anDLt[iCol]!=aSample[i+1].anDLt[iCol] 
+         || aSample[i].anDLt[iCol]!=aSample[i+1].anDLt[iCol]
         ){
           sumEq += aSample[i].anEq[iCol];
           nSum100 += 100;
@@ -99591,7 +99591,7 @@ static Index *findIndexOrPrimaryKey(
 }
 
 /*
-** Load the content from either the sqlite_stat4 or sqlite_stat3 table 
+** Load the content from either the sqlite_stat4 or sqlite_stat3 table
 ** into the relevant Index.aSample[] arrays.
 **
 ** Arguments zSql1 and zSql2 must point to SQL statements that return
@@ -99690,7 +99690,7 @@ static int loadStatTbl(
     if( zIndex==0 ) continue;
     pIdx = findIndexOrPrimaryKey(db, zIndex, zDb);
     if( pIdx==0 ) continue;
-    /* This next condition is true if data has already been loaded from 
+    /* This next condition is true if data has already been loaded from
     ** the sqlite_stat4 table. In this case ignore stat3 data.  */
     nCol = pIdx->nSampleCol;
     if( bStat3 && nCol>1 ) continue;
@@ -99726,7 +99726,7 @@ static int loadStatTbl(
 }
 
 /*
-** Load content from the sqlite_stat4 and sqlite_stat3 tables into 
+** Load content from the sqlite_stat4 and sqlite_stat3 tables into
 ** the Index.aSample[] arrays of all indices.
 */
 static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
@@ -99735,7 +99735,7 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
   assert( db->lookaside.bDisable );
   if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_stat4", zDb) ){
     rc = loadStatTbl(db, 0,
-      "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4 GROUP BY idx", 
+      "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4 GROUP BY idx",
       "SELECT idx,neq,nlt,ndlt,sample FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4",
       zDb
     );
@@ -99743,7 +99743,7 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
 
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_stat3", zDb) ){
     rc = loadStatTbl(db, 1,
-      "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3 GROUP BY idx", 
+      "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3 GROUP BY idx",
       "SELECT idx,neq,nlt,ndlt,sqlite_record(sample) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3",
       zDb
     );
@@ -99760,11 +99760,11 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
 ** Index.aSample[] arrays.
 **
 ** If the sqlite_stat1 table is not present in the database, SQLITE_ERROR
-** is returned. In this case, even if SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined 
-** during compilation and the sqlite_stat3/4 table is present, no data is 
+** is returned. In this case, even if SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined
+** during compilation and the sqlite_stat3/4 table is present, no data is
 ** read from it.
 **
-** If SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined during compilation and the 
+** If SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined during compilation and the
 ** sqlite_stat4 table is not present in the database, SQLITE_ERROR is
 ** returned. However, in this case, data is read from the sqlite_stat1
 ** table (if it is present) before returning.
@@ -99802,7 +99802,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AnalysisLoad(sqlite3 *db, int iDb){
   sInfo.db = db;
   sInfo.zDatabase = db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName;
   if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_stat1", sInfo.zDatabase)!=0 ){
-    zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 
+    zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
         "SELECT tbl,idx,stat FROM %Q.sqlite_stat1", sInfo.zDatabase);
     if( zSql==0 ){
       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
@@ -99934,7 +99934,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
   **     * Specified database name already being used.
   */
   if( db->nDb>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_ATTACHED]+2 ){
-    zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "too many attached databases - max %d", 
+    zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "too many attached databases - max %d",
       db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_ATTACHED]
     );
     goto attach_error;
@@ -99990,7 +99990,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
     if( !pNew->pSchema ){
       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
     }else if( pNew->pSchema->file_format && pNew->pSchema->enc!=ENC(db) ){
-      zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 
+      zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
         "attached databases must use the same text encoding as main database");
       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
     }
@@ -100025,7 +100025,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
         zErrDyn = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "Invalid key value");
         rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
         break;
-        
+
       case SQLITE_TEXT:
       case SQLITE_BLOB:
         nKey = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[2]);
@@ -100045,7 +100045,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
 #endif
 
   /* If the file was opened successfully, read the schema for the new database.
-  ** If this fails, or if opening the file failed, then close the file and 
+  ** If this fails, or if opening the file failed, then close the file and
   ** remove the entry from the db->aDb[] array. i.e. put everything back the way
   ** we found it.
   */
@@ -100082,7 +100082,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
     }
     goto attach_error;
   }
-  
+
   return;
 
 attach_error:
@@ -100168,7 +100168,7 @@ static void codeAttach(
   memset(&sName, 0, sizeof(NameContext));
   sName.pParse = pParse;
 
-  if( 
+  if(
       SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pFilename)) ||
       SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pDbname)) ||
       SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pKey))
@@ -100204,14 +100204,14 @@ static void codeAttach(
                       (char *)pFunc, P4_FUNCDEF);
     assert( pFunc->nArg==-1 || (pFunc->nArg&0xff)==pFunc->nArg );
     sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, (u8)(pFunc->nArg));
- 
+
     /* Code an OP_Expire. For an ATTACH statement, set P1 to true (expire this
     ** statement only). For DETACH, set it to false (expire all existing
     ** statements).
     */
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Expire, (type==SQLITE_ATTACH));
   }
-  
+
 attach_end:
   sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pFilename);
   sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pDbname);
@@ -100554,10 +100554,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AuthReadCol(
 
 /*
 ** The pExpr should be a TK_COLUMN expression.  The table referred to
-** is in pTabList or else it is the NEW or OLD table of a trigger.  
+** is in pTabList or else it is the NEW or OLD table of a trigger.
 ** Check to see if it is OK to read this particular column.
 **
-** If the auth function returns SQLITE_IGNORE, change the TK_COLUMN 
+** If the auth function returns SQLITE_IGNORE, change the TK_COLUMN
 ** instruction into a TK_NULL.  If the auth function returns SQLITE_DENY,
 ** then generate an error.
 */
@@ -100672,7 +100672,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AuthCheck(
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AuthContextPush(
   Parse *pParse,
-  AuthContext *pContext, 
+  AuthContext *pContext,
   const char *zContext
 ){
   assert( pParse );
@@ -100735,7 +100735,7 @@ struct TableLock {
 };
 
 /*
-** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.  
+** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.
 **
 ** The table to be locked has root page iTab and is found in database iDb.
 ** A read or a write lock can be taken depending on isWritelock.
@@ -100788,7 +100788,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TableLock(
 */
 static void codeTableLocks(Parse *pParse){
   int i;
-  Vdbe *pVdbe; 
+  Vdbe *pVdbe;
 
   pVdbe = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
   assert( pVdbe!=0 ); /* sqlite3GetVdbe cannot fail: VDBE already allocated */
@@ -100843,7 +100843,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
   ** vdbe program
   */
   v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
-  assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite 
+  assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite
        || sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(v, pParse->mayAbort));
   if( v ){
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Halt);
@@ -100865,7 +100865,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
     ** transaction on each used database and to verify the schema cookie
     ** on each used database.
     */
-    if( db->mallocFailed==0 
+    if( db->mallocFailed==0
      && (DbMaskNonZero(pParse->cookieMask) || pParse->pConstExpr)
     ){
       int iDb, i;
@@ -100895,8 +100895,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
       pParse->nVtabLock = 0;
 #endif
 
-      /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened, 
-      ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the 
+      /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened,
+      ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the
       ** shared-cache feature is enabled.
       */
       codeTableLocks(pParse);
@@ -101088,7 +101088,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTable(
 ** sqlite3FixSrcList() for details.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem(
-  Parse *pParse, 
+  Parse *pParse,
   u32 flags,
   struct SrcList_item *p
 ){
@@ -101104,7 +101104,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem(
 }
 
 /*
-** Locate the in-memory structure that describes 
+** Locate the in-memory structure that describes
 ** a particular index given the name of that index
 ** and the name of the database that contains the index.
 ** Return NULL if not found.
@@ -101285,10 +101285,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteColumnNames(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){
 **
 ** This routine just deletes the data structure.  It does not unlink
 ** the table data structure from the hash table.  But it does destroy
-** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with 
+** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with
 ** the table.
 **
-** The db parameter is optional.  It is needed if the Table object 
+** The db parameter is optional.  It is needed if the Table object
 ** contains lookaside memory.  (Table objects in the schema do not use
 ** lookaside memory, but some ephemeral Table objects do.)  Or the
 ** db parameter can be used with db->pnBytesFreed to measure the memory
@@ -101313,7 +101313,7 @@ static void SQLITE_NOINLINE deleteTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){
     assert( pIndex->pSchema==pTable->pSchema
          || (IsVirtual(pTable) && pIndex->idxType!=SQLITE_IDXTYPE_APPDEF) );
     if( (db==0 || db->pnBytesFreed==0) && !IsVirtual(pTable) ){
-      char *zName = pIndex->zName; 
+      char *zName = pIndex->zName;
       TESTONLY ( Index *pOld = ) sqlite3HashInsert(
          &pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, zName, 0
       );
@@ -101428,7 +101428,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDbName(sqlite3 *db, const char *zName){
 /*
 ** The token *pName contains the name of a database (either "main" or
 ** "temp" or the name of an attached db). This routine returns the
-** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db 
+** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db
 ** does not exist.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){
@@ -101444,7 +101444,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){
 ** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example:
 **
 ** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...);
-** 
+**
 ** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if
 ** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.:
 **
@@ -101494,7 +101494,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3TwoPartName(
 ** is reserved for internal use.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CheckObjectName(Parse *pParse, const char *zName){
-  if( !pParse->db->init.busy && pParse->nested==0 
+  if( !pParse->db->init.busy && pParse->nested==0
           && (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_WriteSchema)==0
           && 0==sqlite3StrNICmp(zName, "sqlite_", 7) ){
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "object name reserved for internal use: %s", zName);
@@ -101566,7 +101566,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable(
     iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pName1, pName2, &pName);
     if( iDb<0 ) return;
     if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && isTemp && pName2->n>0 && iDb!=1 ){
-      /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless 
+      /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless
       ** the database name is "temp" anyway.  */
       sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "temporary table name must be unqualified");
       return;
@@ -101663,7 +101663,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable(
   ** the SQLITE_MASTER table.  Note in particular that we must go ahead
   ** and allocate the record number for the table entry now.  Before any
   ** PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE keywords are parsed.  Those keywords will cause
-  ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the 
+  ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the
   ** indices.  Hence, the record number for the table must be allocated
   ** now.
   */
@@ -101681,7 +101681,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable(
     }
 #endif
 
-    /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set, 
+    /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set,
     ** set them now.
     */
     reg1 = pParse->regRowid = ++pParse->nMem;
@@ -101790,7 +101790,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pName, Token *pType){
   memset(pCol, 0, sizeof(p->aCol[0]));
   pCol->zName = z;
   sqlite3ColumnPropertiesFromName(p, pCol);
- 
+
   if( pType->n==0 ){
     /* If there is no type specified, columns have the default affinity
     ** 'BLOB'. */
@@ -101826,11 +101826,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddNotNull(Parse *pParse, int onError){
 ** Scan the column type name zType (length nType) and return the
 ** associated affinity type.
 **
-** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the 
+** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the
 ** substrings in the following table. If one of the substrings is
 ** found, the corresponding affinity is returned. If zType contains
-** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of 
-** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT', 
+** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of
+** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT',
 ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER is returned.
 **
 ** Substring     | Affinity
@@ -101951,7 +101951,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddDefaultValue(Parse *pParse, ExprSpan *pSpan){
 
 /*
 ** Backwards Compatibility Hack:
-** 
+**
 ** Historical versions of SQLite accepted strings as column names in
 ** indexes and PRIMARY KEY constraints and in UNIQUE constraints.  Example:
 **
@@ -101974,7 +101974,7 @@ static void sqlite3StringToId(Expr *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table.  pList is a list of names 
+** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table.  pList is a list of names
 ** of columns that form the primary key.  If pList is NULL, then the
 ** most recently added column of the table is the primary key.
 **
@@ -102004,7 +102004,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddPrimaryKey(
   int nTerm;
   if( pTab==0 ) goto primary_key_exit;
   if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
       "table \"%s\" has more than one primary key", pTab->zName);
     goto primary_key_exit;
   }
@@ -102102,7 +102102,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddCollateType(Parse *pParse, Token *pToken){
     Index *pIdx;
     sqlite3DbFree(db, p->aCol[i].zColl);
     p->aCol[i].zColl = zColl;
-  
+
     /* If the column is declared as "<name> PRIMARY KEY COLLATE <type>",
     ** then an index may have been created on this column before the
     ** collation type was added. Correct this if it is the case.
@@ -102176,7 +102176,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ChangeCookie(Parse *pParse, int iDb){
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
   Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe;
   assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
-  sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, 
+  sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION,
                     db->aDb[iDb].pSchema->schema_cookie+1);
 }
 
@@ -102197,13 +102197,13 @@ static int identLength(const char *z){
 }
 
 /*
-** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second 
+** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second
 ** parameter is a pointer to an integer that contains the offset at
 ** which to write into the output buffer. This function copies the
 ** nul-terminated string pointed to by the third parameter, zSignedIdent,
 ** to the specified offset in the buffer and updates *pIdx to refer
 ** to the first byte after the last byte written before returning.
-** 
+**
 ** If the string zSignedIdent consists entirely of alpha-numeric
 ** characters, does not begin with a digit and is not an SQL keyword,
 ** then it is copied to the output buffer exactly as it is. Otherwise,
@@ -102247,7 +102247,7 @@ static char *createTableStmt(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
     n += identLength(pCol->zName) + 5;
   }
   n += identLength(p->zName);
-  if( n<50 ){ 
+  if( n<50 ){
     zSep = "";
     zSep2 = ",";
     zEnd = ")";
@@ -102288,10 +102288,10 @@ static char *createTableStmt(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
     testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC );
     testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER );
     testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL );
-    
+
     zType = azType[pCol->affinity - SQLITE_AFF_BLOB];
     len = sqlite3Strlen30(zType);
-    assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB 
+    assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB
             || pCol->affinity==sqlite3AffinityType(zType, 0) );
     memcpy(&zStmt[k], zType, len);
     k += len;
@@ -102370,7 +102370,7 @@ static int hasColumn(const i16 *aiCol, int nCol, int x){
 ** Changes include:
 **
 **     (1)  Set all columns of the PRIMARY KEY schema object to be NOT NULL.
-**     (2)  Convert P3 parameter of the OP_CreateBtree from BTREE_INTKEY 
+**     (2)  Convert P3 parameter of the OP_CreateBtree from BTREE_INTKEY
 **          into BTREE_BLOBKEY.
 **     (3)  Bypass the creation of the sqlite_master table entry
 **          for the PRIMARY KEY as the primary key index is now
@@ -102417,13 +102417,13 @@ static void convertToWithoutRowidTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
   }
 
   /* Locate the PRIMARY KEY index.  Or, if this table was originally
-  ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index. 
+  ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index.
   */
   if( pTab->iPKey>=0 ){
     ExprList *pList;
     Token ipkToken;
     sqlite3TokenInit(&ipkToken, pTab->aCol[pTab->iPKey].zName);
-    pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, 
+    pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
                   sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &ipkToken, 0));
     if( pList==0 ) return;
     pList->a[0].sortOrder = pParse->iPkSortOrder;
@@ -102528,7 +102528,7 @@ static void convertToWithoutRowidTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
 ** the sqlite_master table.  We do not want to create it again.
 **
 ** If the pSelect argument is not NULL, it means that this routine
-** was called to create a table generated from a 
+** was called to create a table generated from a
 ** "CREATE TABLE ... AS SELECT ..." statement.  The column names of
 ** the new table will match the result set of the SELECT.
 */
@@ -102616,7 +102616,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3EndTable(
 
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, 0);
 
-    /* 
+    /*
     ** Initialize zType for the new view or table.
     */
     if( p->pSelect==0 ){
@@ -102694,12 +102694,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3EndTable(
       Token *pEnd2 = tabOpts ? &pParse->sLastToken : pEnd;
       n = (int)(pEnd2->z - pParse->sNameToken.z);
       if( pEnd2->z[0]!=';' ) n += pEnd2->n;
-      zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 
+      zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
           "CREATE %s %.*s", zType2, n, pParse->sNameToken.z
       );
     }
 
-    /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the 
+    /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
     ** SQLITE_MASTER table.  We just need to update that slot with all
     ** the information we've collected.
     */
@@ -102852,7 +102852,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
   int nErr = 0;     /* Number of errors encountered */
   int n;            /* Temporarily holds the number of cursors assigned */
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;  /* Database connection for malloc errors */
-#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE	
+#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
   int rc;
 #endif
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
@@ -102887,7 +102887,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
   ** Actually, the error above is now caught prior to reaching this point.
   ** But the following test is still important as it does come up
   ** in the following:
-  ** 
+  **
   **     CREATE TABLE main.ex1(a);
   **     CREATE TEMP VIEW ex1 AS SELECT a FROM ex1;
   **     SELECT * FROM temp.ex1;
@@ -102928,9 +102928,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
       ** normally holds CHECK constraints on an ordinary table, but for
       ** a VIEW it holds the list of column names.
       */
-      sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck, 
+      sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck,
                                  &pTable->nCol, &pTable->aCol);
-      if( db->mallocFailed==0 
+      if( db->mallocFailed==0
        && pParse->nErr==0
        && pTable->nCol==pSel->pEList->nExpr
       ){
@@ -102958,7 +102958,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
   }
   pTable->pSchema->schemaFlags |= DB_UnresetViews;
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW */
-  return nErr;  
+  return nErr;
 }
 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE) */
 
@@ -102994,7 +102994,7 @@ static void sqliteViewResetAll(sqlite3 *db, int idx){
 ** on tables and/or indices that are the process of being deleted.
 ** If you are unlucky, one of those deleted indices or tables might
 ** have the same rootpage number as the real table or index that is
-** being moved.  So we cannot stop searching after the first match 
+** being moved.  So we cannot stop searching after the first match
 ** because the first match might be for one of the deleted indices
 ** or tables and not the table/index that is actually being moved.
 ** We must continue looping until all tables and indices with
@@ -103031,7 +103031,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RootPageMoved(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, int iFrom, int iT
 ** Also write code to modify the sqlite_master table and internal schema
 ** if a root-page of another table is moved by the btree-layer whilst
 ** erasing iTable (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database).
-*/ 
+*/
 static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
   Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
   int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
@@ -103048,7 +103048,7 @@ static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
   ** is in register NNN.  See grammar rules associated with the TK_REGISTER
   ** token for additional information.
   */
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
      "UPDATE %Q.%s SET rootpage=%d WHERE #%d AND rootpage=#%d",
      pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, MASTER_NAME, iTable, r1, r1);
 #endif
@@ -103064,7 +103064,7 @@ static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
 static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
   /* If the database may be auto-vacuum capable (if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
   ** is not defined), then it is important to call OP_Destroy on the
-  ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically 
+  ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically
   ** largest root-page number. This guarantees that none of the root-pages
   ** to be destroyed is relocated by an earlier OP_Destroy. i.e. if the
   ** following were coded:
@@ -103074,7 +103074,7 @@ static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
   ** OP_Destroy 5 0
   **
   ** and root page 5 happened to be the largest root-page number in the
-  ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the 
+  ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the
   ** "OP_Destroy 4 0" opcode. The subsequent "OP_Destroy 5 0" would hit
   ** a free-list page.
   */
@@ -103155,7 +103155,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeDropTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int iDb, in
   */
   pTrigger = sqlite3TriggerList(pParse, pTab);
   while( pTrigger ){
-    assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema || 
+    assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema ||
         pTrigger->pSchema==db->aDb[1].pSchema );
     sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(pParse, pTrigger);
     pTrigger = pTrigger->pNext;
@@ -103182,7 +103182,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeDropTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int iDb, in
   ** created in the temp database that refers to a table in another
   ** database.
   */
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
       "DELETE FROM %Q.%s WHERE tbl_name=%Q and type!='trigger'",
       pDb->zDbSName, MASTER_NAME, pTab->zName);
   if( !isView && !IsVirtual(pTab) ){
@@ -103269,7 +103269,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, int isView,
     }
   }
 #endif
-  if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 
+  if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
     && sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_stat", 11)!=0 ){
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %s may not be dropped", pTab->zName);
     goto exit_drop_table;
@@ -103388,8 +103388,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateForeignKey(
         }
       }
       if( j>=p->nCol ){
-        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
-          "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition", 
+        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+          "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition",
           pFromCol->a[i].zName);
         goto fk_end;
       }
@@ -103409,7 +103409,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateForeignKey(
   pFKey->aAction[1] = (u8)((flags >> 8 ) & 0xff);    /* ON UPDATE action */
 
   assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, p->pSchema) );
-  pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash, 
+  pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash,
       pFKey->zTo, (void *)pFKey
   );
   if( pNextTo==pFKey ){
@@ -103514,7 +103514,7 @@ static void sqlite3RefillIndex(Parse *pParse, Index *pIndex, int memRootPage){
   sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iTab, addr1+1); VdbeCoverage(v);
   sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1);
   if( memRootPage<0 ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Clear, tnum, iDb);
-  sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, tnum, iDb, 
+  sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, tnum, iDb,
                     (char *)pKey, P4_KEYINFO);
   sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_BULKCSR|((memRootPage>=0)?OPFLAG_P2ISREG:0));
 
@@ -103578,8 +103578,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3AllocateIndexObject(
 }
 
 /*
-** Create a new index for an SQL table.  pName1.pName2 is the name of the index 
-** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed.  Both will 
+** Create a new index for an SQL table.  pName1.pName2 is the name of the index
+** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed.  Both will
 ** be NULL for a primary key or an index that is created to satisfy a
 ** UNIQUE constraint.  If pTable and pIndex are NULL, use pParse->pNewTable
 ** as the table to be indexed.  pParse->pNewTable is a table that is
@@ -103587,7 +103587,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3AllocateIndexObject(
 **
 ** pList is a list of columns to be indexed.  pList will be NULL if this
 ** is a primary key or unique-constraint on the most recent column added
-** to the table currently under construction.  
+** to the table currently under construction.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
   Parse *pParse,     /* All information about this parse */
@@ -103634,7 +103634,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
   */
   if( pTblName!=0 ){
 
-    /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database 
+    /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database
     ** to search for the table. 'Fix' the table name to this db
     ** before looking up the table.
     */
@@ -103666,7 +103666,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
     assert( db->mallocFailed==0 || pTab==0 );
     if( pTab==0 ) goto exit_create_index;
     if( iDb==1 && db->aDb[iDb].pSchema!=pTab->pSchema ){
-      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
            "cannot create a TEMP index on non-TEMP table \"%s\"",
            pTab->zName);
       goto exit_create_index;
@@ -103683,7 +103683,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
 
   assert( pTab!=0 );
   assert( pParse->nErr==0 );
-  if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 
+  if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
        && db->init.busy==0
 #if SQLITE_USER_AUTHENTICATION
        && sqlite3UserAuthTable(pTab->zName)==0
@@ -103707,7 +103707,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
 
   /*
   ** Find the name of the index.  Make sure there is not already another
-  ** index or table with the same name.  
+  ** index or table with the same name.
   **
   ** Exception:  If we are reading the names of permanent indices from the
   ** sqlite_master table (because some other process changed the schema) and
@@ -103800,8 +103800,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
     }
   }
 
-  /* 
-  ** Allocate the index structure. 
+  /*
+  ** Allocate the index structure.
   */
   nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName);
   nExtraCol = pPk ? pPk->nKeyCol : 1;
@@ -103912,7 +103912,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
       int x = pPk->aiColumn[j];
       assert( x>=0 );
       if( hasColumn(pIndex->aiColumn, pIndex->nKeyCol, x) ){
-        pIndex->nColumn--; 
+        pIndex->nColumn--;
       }else{
         pIndex->aiColumn[i] = x;
         pIndex->azColl[i] = pPk->azColl[j];
@@ -103930,7 +103930,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
 
   /* If this index contains every column of its table, then mark
   ** it as a covering index */
-  assert( HasRowid(pTab) 
+  assert( HasRowid(pTab)
       || pTab->iPKey<0 || sqlite3ColumnOfIndex(pIndex, pTab->iPKey)>=0 );
   if( pTblName!=0 && pIndex->nColumn>=pTab->nCol ){
     pIndex->isCovering = 1;
@@ -103985,13 +103985,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
         if( pIdx->onError!=pIndex->onError ){
           /* This constraint creates the same index as a previous
           ** constraint specified somewhere in the CREATE TABLE statement.
-          ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this 
+          ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this
           ** constraint and the previous equivalent constraint have explicit
           ** ON CONFLICT clauses this is an error. Otherwise, use the
           ** explicitly specified behavior for the index.
           */
           if( !(pIdx->onError==OE_Default || pIndex->onError==OE_Default) ){
-            sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+            sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
                 "conflicting ON CONFLICT clauses specified", 0);
           }
           if( pIdx->onError==OE_Default ){
@@ -104005,14 +104005,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
   }
 
   /* Link the new Index structure to its table and to the other
-  ** in-memory database structures. 
+  ** in-memory database structures.
   */
   assert( pParse->nErr==0 );
   if( db->init.busy ){
     Index *p;
     assert( !IN_DECLARE_VTAB );
     assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, pIndex->pSchema) );
-    p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, 
+    p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash,
                           pIndex->zName, pIndex);
     if( p ){
       assert( p==pIndex );  /* Malloc must have failed */
@@ -104049,9 +104049,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
     sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, 1, iDb);
 
     /* Create the rootpage for the index using CreateIndex. But before
-    ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in 
-    ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a 
-    ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In 
+    ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in
+    ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a
+    ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In
     ** that case the convertToWithoutRowidTable() routine will replace
     ** the Noop with a Goto to jump over the VDBE code generated below. */
     pIndex->tnum = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Noop);
@@ -104074,7 +104074,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
 
     /* Add an entry in sqlite_master for this index
     */
-    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
         "INSERT INTO %Q.%s VALUES('index',%Q,%Q,#%d,%Q);",
         db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, MASTER_NAME,
         pIndex->zName,
@@ -104102,7 +104102,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
   ** sure all indices labeled OE_Replace come after all those labeled
   ** OE_Ignore.  This is necessary for the correct constraint check
   ** processing (in sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks()) as part of
-  ** UPDATE and INSERT statements.  
+  ** UPDATE and INSERT statements.
   */
   if( db->init.busy || pTblName==0 ){
     if( onError!=OE_Replace || pTab->pIndex==0
@@ -104157,7 +104157,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DefaultRowEst(Index *pIdx){
   /* Indexes with default row estimates should not have stat1 data */
   assert( !pIdx->hasStat1 );
 
-  /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated 
+  /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated
   ** number of rows in the table, or half the number of rows in the table
   ** for a partial index.   But do not let the estimate drop below 10. */
   a[0] = pIdx->pTable->nRowLogEst;
@@ -104418,7 +104418,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListEnlarge(
 ** database name prefix.  Like this:  "database.table".  The pDatabase
 ** points to the table name and the pTable points to the database name.
 ** The SrcList.a[].zName field is filled with the table name which might
-** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.  
+** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.
 ** SrcList.a[].zDatabase is filled with the database name from pTable,
 ** or with NULL if no database is specified.
 **
@@ -104544,7 +104544,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendFromTerm(
   struct SrcList_item *pItem;
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
   if( !p && (pOn || pUsing) ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s", 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s",
       (pOn ? "ON" : "USING")
     );
     goto append_from_error;
@@ -104572,7 +104572,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendFromTerm(
 }
 
 /*
-** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added 
+** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added
 ** element of the source-list passed as the second argument.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){
@@ -104585,7 +104585,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pI
     assert( pItem->fg.isIndexedBy==0 );
     assert( pItem->fg.isTabFunc==0 );
     if( pIndexedBy->n==1 && !pIndexedBy->z ){
-      /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y 
+      /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y
       ** construct "indexed_opt" for details. */
       pItem->fg.notIndexed = 1;
     }else{
@@ -104675,7 +104675,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3EndTransaction(Parse *pParse, int eType){
   assert( pParse->db!=0 );
   assert( eType==TK_COMMIT || eType==TK_END || eType==TK_ROLLBACK );
   isRollback = eType==TK_ROLLBACK;
-  if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_TRANSACTION, 
+  if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_TRANSACTION,
        isRollback ? "ROLLBACK" : "COMMIT", 0, 0) ){
     return;
   }
@@ -104687,7 +104687,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3EndTransaction(Parse *pParse, int eType){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called by the parser when it parses a command to create,
-** release or rollback an SQL savepoint. 
+** release or rollback an SQL savepoint.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Savepoint(Parse *pParse, int op, Token *pName){
   char *zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(pParse->db, pName);
@@ -104714,7 +104714,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(Parse *pParse){
   if( db->aDb[1].pBt==0 && !pParse->explain ){
     int rc;
     Btree *pBt;
-    static const int flags = 
+    static const int flags =
           SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
           SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
           SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
@@ -104760,7 +104760,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb){
 }
 
 /*
-** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each 
+** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each
 ** attached database. Otherwise, invoke it for the database named zDb only.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeVerifyNamedSchema(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb){
@@ -104806,9 +104806,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){
   pToplevel->isMultiWrite = 1;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** The code generator calls this routine if is discovers that it is
-** possible to abort a statement prior to completion.  In order to 
+** possible to abort a statement prior to completion.  In order to
 ** perform this abort without corrupting the database, we need to make
 ** sure that the statement is protected by a statement transaction.
 **
@@ -104817,7 +104817,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){
 ** such that the abort must occur after the multiwrite.  This makes
 ** some statements involving the REPLACE conflict resolution algorithm
 ** go a little faster.  But taking advantage of this time dependency
-** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in 
+** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in
 ** particular, it prevents us from writing an effective
 ** implementation of sqlite3AssertMayAbort()) and so we have chosen
 ** to take the safe route and skip the optimization.
@@ -104877,8 +104877,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3UniqueConstraint(
     }
   }
   zErr = sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&errMsg);
-  sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse, 
-    IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY 
+  sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse,
+    IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY
                             : SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_UNIQUE,
     onError, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC, P5_ConstraintUnique);
 }
@@ -104890,7 +104890,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3UniqueConstraint(
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RowidConstraint(
   Parse *pParse,    /* Parsing context */
   int onError,      /* Conflict resolution algorithm */
-  Table *pTab       /* The table with the non-unique rowid */ 
+  Table *pTab       /* The table with the non-unique rowid */
 ){
   char *zMsg;
   int rc;
@@ -105069,9 +105069,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE KeyInfo *sqlite3KeyInfoOfIndex(Parse *pParse, Index *pIdx){
 }
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
-/* 
-** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a 
-** WITH clause. 
+/*
+** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a
+** WITH clause.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE With *sqlite3WithAdd(
   Parse *pParse,          /* Parsing context */
@@ -105140,7 +105140,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithDelete(sqlite3 *db, With *pWith){
 /************** End of build.c ***********************************************/
 /************** Begin file callback.c ****************************************/
 /*
-** 2005 May 23 
+** 2005 May 23
 **
 ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.  In place of
 ** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
@@ -105210,8 +105210,8 @@ static int synthCollSeq(sqlite3 *db, CollSeq *pColl){
 ** This function is responsible for invoking the collation factory callback
 ** or substituting a collation sequence of a different encoding when the
 ** requested collation sequence is not available in the desired encoding.
-** 
-** If it is not NULL, then pColl must point to the database native encoding 
+**
+** If it is not NULL, then pColl must point to the database native encoding
 ** collation sequence with name zName, length nName.
 **
 ** The return value is either the collation sequence to be used in database
@@ -105257,7 +105257,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3GetCollSeq(
 ** that have not been defined by sqlite3_create_collation() etc.
 **
 ** If required, this routine calls the 'collation needed' callback to
-** request a definition of the collating sequence. If this doesn't work, 
+** request a definition of the collating sequence. If this doesn't work,
 ** an equivalent collating sequence that uses a text encoding different
 ** from the main database is substituted, if one is available.
 */
@@ -105311,7 +105311,7 @@ static CollSeq *findCollSeqEntry(
       memcpy(pColl[0].zName, zName, nName);
       pDel = sqlite3HashInsert(&db->aCollSeq, pColl[0].zName, pColl);
 
-      /* If a malloc() failure occurred in sqlite3HashInsert(), it will 
+      /* If a malloc() failure occurred in sqlite3HashInsert(), it will
       ** return the pColl pointer to be deleted (because it wasn't added
       ** to the hash table).
       */
@@ -105369,7 +105369,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3FindCollSeq(
 ** is also -1.  In other words, we are searching for a function that
 ** takes a variable number of arguments.
 **
-** If nArg is -2 that means that we are searching for any function 
+** If nArg is -2 that means that we are searching for any function
 ** regardless of the number of arguments it uses, so return a positive
 ** match score for any
 **
@@ -105462,8 +105462,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3InsertBuiltinFuncs(
     }
   }
 }
-  
-  
+
+
 
 /*
 ** Locate a user function given a name, a number of arguments and a flag
@@ -105524,7 +105524,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction(
   ** have fields overwritten with new information appropriate for the
   ** new function.  But the FuncDefs for built-in functions are read-only.
   ** So we must not search for built-ins when creating a new function.
-  */ 
+  */
   if( !createFlag && (pBest==0 || (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_PreferBuiltin)!=0) ){
     bestScore = 0;
     h = (sqlite3UpperToLower[(u8)zName[0]] + nName) % SQLITE_FUNC_HASH_SZ;
@@ -105543,7 +105543,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction(
   ** exact match for the name, number of arguments and encoding, then add a
   ** new entry to the hash table and return it.
   */
-  if( createFlag && bestScore<FUNC_PERFECT_MATCH && 
+  if( createFlag && bestScore<FUNC_PERFECT_MATCH &&
       (pBest = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(*pBest)+nName+1))!=0 ){
     FuncDef *pOther;
     pBest->zName = (const char*)&pBest[1];
@@ -105568,7 +105568,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction(
 
 /*
 ** Free all resources held by the schema structure. The void* argument points
-** at a Schema struct. This function does not call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the 
+** at a Schema struct. This function does not call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the
 ** pointer itself, it just cleans up subsidiary resources (i.e. the contents
 ** of the schema hash tables).
 **
@@ -105648,7 +105648,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Schema *sqlite3SchemaGet(sqlite3 *db, Btree *pBt){
 ** (as in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement) in this case it contains
 ** the name of a single table, as one might find in an INSERT, DELETE,
 ** or UPDATE statement.  Look up that table in the symbol table and
-** return a pointer.  Set an error message and return NULL if the table 
+** return a pointer.  Set an error message and return NULL if the table
 ** name is not found or if any other error occurs.
 **
 ** The following fields are initialized appropriate in pSrc:
@@ -105684,12 +105684,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsReadOnly(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int viewOk){
   **   1) It is a virtual table and no implementation of the xUpdate method
   **      has been provided, or
   **   2) It is a system table (i.e. sqlite_master), this call is not
-  **      part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not 
+  **      part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not
   **      been specified.
   **
   ** In either case leave an error message in pParse and return non-zero.
   */
-  if( ( IsVirtual(pTab) 
+  if( ( IsVirtual(pTab)
      && sqlite3GetVTable(pParse->db, pTab)->pMod->pModule->xUpdate==0 )
    || ( (pTab->tabFlags & TF_Readonly)!=0
      && (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_WriteSchema)==0
@@ -105735,7 +105735,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MaterializeView(
     assert( pFrom->a[0].pOn==0 );
     assert( pFrom->a[0].pUsing==0 );
   }
-  pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, 0, 
+  pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, 0,
                           SF_IncludeHidden, 0, 0);
   sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, SRT_EphemTab, iCur);
   sqlite3Select(pParse, pSel, &dest);
@@ -105784,11 +105784,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3LimitWhere(
     return pWhere;
   }
 
-  /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset 
+  /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset
   ** term for the DELETE or UPDATE statement.  For example:
   **   DELETE FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
   ** becomes:
-  **   DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN ( 
+  **   DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN (
   **     SELECT rowid FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
   **   );
   */
@@ -105869,7 +105869,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
   int addrEphOpen = 0;   /* Instruction to open the Ephemeral table */
   int bComplex;          /* True if there are triggers or FKs or
                          ** subqueries in the WHERE clause */
- 
+
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
   int isView;                  /* True if attempting to delete from a view */
   Trigger *pTrigger;           /* List of table triggers, if required */
@@ -105917,7 +105917,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
   }
   iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
   assert( iDb<db->nDb );
-  rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0, 
+  rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0,
                             db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName);
   assert( rcauth==SQLITE_OK || rcauth==SQLITE_DENY || rcauth==SQLITE_IGNORE );
   if( rcauth==SQLITE_DENY ){
@@ -105978,7 +105978,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRUNCATE_OPTIMIZATION
   /* Special case: A DELETE without a WHERE clause deletes everything.
   ** It is easier just to erase the whole table. Prior to version 3.6.5,
-  ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by 
+  ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by
   ** API function sqlite3_count_changes) to be set incorrectly.
   **
   ** The "rcauth==SQLITE_OK" terms is the
@@ -106029,7 +106029,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       addrEphOpen = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, iEphCur, nPk);
       sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk);
     }
-  
+
     /* Construct a query to find the rowid or primary key for every row
     ** to be deleted, based on the WHERE clause. Set variable eOnePass
     ** to indicate the strategy used to implement this delete:
@@ -106043,12 +106043,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
     eOnePass = sqlite3WhereOkOnePass(pWInfo, aiCurOnePass);
     assert( IsVirtual(pTab)==0 || eOnePass!=ONEPASS_MULTI );
     assert( IsVirtual(pTab) || bComplex || eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF );
-  
+
     /* Keep track of the number of rows to be deleted */
     if( db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows ){
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, memCnt, 1);
     }
-  
+
     /* Extract the rowid or primary key for the current row */
     if( pPk ){
       for(i=0; i<nPk; i++){
@@ -106062,7 +106062,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       iKey = sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(pParse, pTab, -1, iTabCur, iKey, 0);
       if( iKey>pParse->nMem ) pParse->nMem = iKey;
     }
-  
+
     if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
       /* For ONEPASS, no need to store the rowid/primary-key. There is only
       ** one, so just keep it in its register(s) and fall through to the
@@ -106092,18 +106092,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowSetAdd, iRowSet, iKey);
       }
     }
-  
-    /* If this DELETE cannot use the ONEPASS strategy, this is the 
+
+    /* If this DELETE cannot use the ONEPASS strategy, this is the
     ** end of the WHERE loop */
     if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
       addrBypass = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
     }else{
       sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo);
     }
-  
-    /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are 
+
+    /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are
     ** deleting from and all its indices. If this is a view, then the
-    ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF 
+    ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF
     ** triggers.
     */
     if( !isView ){
@@ -106118,7 +106118,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       assert( pPk || IsVirtual(pTab) || iIdxCur==iDataCur+1 );
       if( eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, iAddrOnce);
     }
-  
+
     /* Set up a loop over the rowids/primary-keys that were found in the
     ** where-clause loop above.
     */
@@ -106141,8 +106141,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       addrLoop = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowSetRead, iRowSet, 0, iKey);
       VdbeCoverage(v);
       assert( nKey==1 );
-    }  
-  
+    }
+
     /* Delete the row */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
     if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){
@@ -106162,7 +106162,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(pParse, pTab, pTrigger, iDataCur, iIdxCur,
           iKey, nKey, count, OE_Default, eOnePass, aiCurOnePass[1]);
     }
-  
+
     /* End of the loop over all rowids/primary-keys. */
     if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
       sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrBypass);
@@ -106173,7 +106173,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
     }else{
       sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrLoop);
       sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrLoop);
-    }     
+    }
   } /* End non-truncate path */
 
   /* Update the sqlite_sequence table by storing the content of the
@@ -106184,7 +106184,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
     sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse);
   }
 
-  /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is 
+  /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is
   ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
   ** invoke the callback function.
   */
@@ -106239,7 +106239,7 @@ delete_from_cleanup:
 **   and nPk before reading from it.
 **
 **   If eMode is ONEPASS_MULTI, then this call is being made as part
-**   of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if 
+**   of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if
 **   iIdxNoSeek is a valid cursor number (>=0) and is not the same as
 **   iDataCur, then its position should be preserved following the delete
 **   operation. Or, if iIdxNoSeek is not a valid cursor number, the
@@ -106275,7 +106275,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
   VdbeModuleComment((v, "BEGIN: GenRowDel(%d,%d,%d,%d)",
                          iDataCur, iIdxCur, iPk, (int)nPk));
 
-  /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists 
+  /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists
   ** (this can happen if a trigger program has already deleted it), do
   ** not attempt to delete it or fire any DELETE triggers.  */
   iLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
@@ -106285,7 +106285,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
     VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotExists);
     VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotFound);
   }
- 
+
   /* If there are any triggers to fire, allocate a range of registers to
   ** use for the old.* references in the triggers.  */
   if( sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0) || pTrigger ){
@@ -106302,7 +106302,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
     iOld = pParse->nMem+1;
     pParse->nMem += (1 + pTab->nCol);
 
-    /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be 
+    /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be
     ** used by any BEFORE and AFTER triggers that exist.  */
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, iPk, iOld);
     for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){
@@ -106315,11 +106315,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
 
     /* Invoke BEFORE DELETE trigger programs. */
     addrStart = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
-    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, 
+    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
         TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
     );
 
-    /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the 
+    /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the
     ** row to be deleted again. It may be that the BEFORE triggers moved
     ** the cursor or already deleted the row that the cursor was
     ** pointing to.
@@ -106336,21 +106336,21 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
     }
 
     /* Do FK processing. This call checks that any FK constraints that
-    ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables) 
+    ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables)
     ** are not violated by deleting this row.  */
     sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, iOld, 0, 0, 0);
   }
 
   /* Delete the index and table entries. Skip this step if pTab is really
   ** a view (in which case the only effect of the DELETE statement is to
-  ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers).  
+  ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers).
   **
   ** If variable 'count' is non-zero, then this OP_Delete instruction should
   ** invoke the update-hook. The pre-update-hook, on the other hand should
   ** be invoked unless table pTab is a system table. The difference is that
-  ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the 
+  ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the
   ** pre-update-hook is.
-  */ 
+  */
   if( pTab->pSelect==0 ){
     u8 p5 = 0;
     sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur,0,iIdxNoSeek);
@@ -106370,16 +106370,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
 
   /* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to
   ** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key
-  ** to the row just deleted. */ 
+  ** to the row just deleted. */
   sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, 0, iOld, 0, 0);
 
   /* Invoke AFTER DELETE trigger programs. */
-  sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, 
+  sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
       TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
   );
 
   /* Jump here if the row had already been deleted before any BEFORE
-  ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a 
+  ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a
   ** RAISE(IGNORE) exception.  */
   sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iLabel);
   VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenRowDel()"));
@@ -106463,7 +106463,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(
 ** its key into the same sequence of registers and if pPrior and pIdx share
 ** a column in common, then the register corresponding to that column already
 ** holds the correct value and the loading of that register is skipped.
-** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK 
+** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK
 ** on a table with multiple indices, and especially with the ROWID or
 ** PRIMARY KEY columns of the index.
 */
@@ -106487,7 +106487,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GenerateIndexKey(
       *piPartIdxLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
       pParse->iSelfTab = iDataCur + 1;
       sqlite3ExprCachePush(pParse);
-      sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel, 
+      sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel,
                             SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
       pParse->iSelfTab = 0;
     }else{
@@ -106675,7 +106675,7 @@ static void lengthFunc(
 ** Implementation of the abs() function.
 **
 ** IMP: R-23979-26855 The abs(X) function returns the absolute value of
-** the numeric argument X. 
+** the numeric argument X.
 */
 static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
   assert( argc==1 );
@@ -106692,7 +106692,7 @@ static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
           return;
         }
         iVal = -iVal;
-      } 
+      }
       sqlite3_result_int64(context, iVal);
       break;
     }
@@ -107014,7 +107014,7 @@ static void lowerFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 #define noopFunc versionFunc   /* Substitute function - never called */
 
 /*
-** Implementation of random().  Return a random integer.  
+** Implementation of random().  Return a random integer.
 */
 static void randomFunc(
   sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -107025,11 +107025,11 @@ static void randomFunc(
   UNUSED_PARAMETER2(NotUsed, NotUsed2);
   sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(r), &r);
   if( r<0 ){
-    /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000 
+    /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000
     ** (or -9223372036854775808) since when you do abs() of that
     ** number of you get the same value back again.  To do this
     ** in a way that is testable, mask the sign bit off of negative
-    ** values, resulting in a positive value.  Then take the 
+    ** values, resulting in a positive value.  Then take the
     ** 2s complement of that positive value.  The end result can
     ** therefore be no less than -9223372036854775807.
     */
@@ -107067,8 +107067,8 @@ static void randomBlob(
 ** value is the same as the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() API function.
 */
 static void last_insert_rowid(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  int NotUsed, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  int NotUsed,
   sqlite3_value **NotUsed2
 ){
   sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context);
@@ -107176,7 +107176,7 @@ static const struct compareInfo likeInfoAlt = { '%', '_',   0, 0 };
 ** it the last character in the list.
 **
 ** Like matching rules:
-** 
+**
 **      '%'       Matches any sequence of zero or more characters
 **
 ***     '_'       Matches any one character
@@ -107199,7 +107199,7 @@ static int patternCompare(
   u32 matchAll = pInfo->matchAll;  /* "*" or "%" */
   u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase;       /* True if uppercase==lowercase */
   const u8 *zEscaped = 0;          /* One past the last escaped input char */
-  
+
   while( (c = Utf8Read(zPattern))!=0 ){
     if( c==matchAll ){  /* Match "*" */
       /* Skip over multiple "*" characters in the pattern.  If there
@@ -107351,8 +107351,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_like_count = 0;
 ** the GLOB operator.
 */
 static void likeFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  int argc, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  int argc,
   sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
   const unsigned char *zA, *zB;
@@ -107394,7 +107394,7 @@ static void likeFunc(
     const unsigned char *zEsc = sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]);
     if( zEsc==0 ) return;
     if( sqlite3Utf8CharLen((char*)zEsc, -1)!=1 ){
-      sqlite3_result_error(context, 
+      sqlite3_result_error(context,
           "ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1);
       return;
     }
@@ -107499,8 +107499,8 @@ static void compileoptionusedFunc(
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function. 
-** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options 
+** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function.
+** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options
 ** used to build SQLite.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS
@@ -107524,7 +107524,7 @@ static void compileoptiongetFunc(
 ** digits. */
 static const char hexdigits[] = {
   '0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7',
-  '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F' 
+  '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'
 };
 
 /*
@@ -107559,7 +107559,7 @@ static void quoteFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
       char const *zBlob = sqlite3_value_blob(argv[0]);
       int nBlob = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0]);
       assert( zBlob==sqlite3_value_blob(argv[0]) ); /* No encoding change */
-      zText = (char *)contextMalloc(context, (2*(i64)nBlob)+4); 
+      zText = (char *)contextMalloc(context, (2*(i64)nBlob)+4);
       if( zText ){
         int i;
         for(i=0; i<nBlob; i++){
@@ -107608,7 +107608,7 @@ static void quoteFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 
 /*
 ** The unicode() function.  Return the integer unicode code-point value
-** for the first character of the input string. 
+** for the first character of the input string.
 */
 static void unicodeFunc(
   sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -107762,7 +107762,7 @@ static void replaceFunc(
   if( zOut==0 ){
     return;
   }
-  loopLimit = nStr - nPattern;  
+  loopLimit = nStr - nPattern;
   for(i=j=0; i<=loopLimit; i++){
     if( zStr[i]!=zPattern[0] || memcmp(&zStr[i], zPattern, nPattern) ){
       zOut[j++] = zStr[i];
@@ -107911,7 +107911,7 @@ static void unknownFunc(
 ** Compute the soundex encoding of a word.
 **
 ** IMP: R-59782-00072 The soundex(X) function returns a string that is the
-** soundex encoding of the string X. 
+** soundex encoding of the string X.
 */
 static void soundexFunc(
   sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -108000,7 +108000,7 @@ static void loadExt(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 typedef struct SumCtx SumCtx;
 struct SumCtx {
   double rSum;      /* Floating point sum */
-  i64 iSum;         /* Integer sum */   
+  i64 iSum;         /* Integer sum */
   i64 cnt;          /* Number of elements summed */
   u8 overflow;      /* True if integer overflow seen */
   u8 approx;        /* True if non-integer value was input to the sum */
@@ -108085,13 +108085,13 @@ static void countStep(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
   /* The sqlite3_aggregate_count() function is deprecated.  But just to make
-  ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our 
+  ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our
   ** internal count when using count(*) and when the total count can be
   ** expressed as a 32-bit integer. */
   assert( argc==1 || p==0 || p->n>0x7fffffff
           || p->n==sqlite3_aggregate_count(context) );
 #endif
-}   
+}
 static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
   CountCtx *p;
   p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0);
@@ -108102,8 +108102,8 @@ static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
 ** Routines to implement min() and max() aggregate functions.
 */
 static void minmaxStep(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  int NotUsed, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  int NotUsed,
   sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
   Mem *pArg  = (Mem *)argv[0];
@@ -108193,8 +108193,8 @@ static void groupConcatFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
       sqlite3_result_error_toobig(context);
     }else if( pAccum->accError==STRACCUM_NOMEM ){
       sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context);
-    }else{    
-      sqlite3_result_text(context, sqlite3StrAccumFinish(pAccum), -1, 
+    }else{
+      sqlite3_result_text(context, sqlite3StrAccumFinish(pAccum), -1,
                           sqlite3_free);
     }
   }
@@ -108238,10 +108238,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterLikeFunctions(sqlite3 *db, int caseSensitive)
   }
   sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "like", 2, SQLITE_UTF8, pInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0);
   sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "like", 3, SQLITE_UTF8, pInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0);
-  sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "glob", 2, SQLITE_UTF8, 
+  sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "glob", 2, SQLITE_UTF8,
       (struct compareInfo*)&globInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0);
   setLikeOptFlag(db, "glob", SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE | SQLITE_FUNC_CASE);
-  setLikeOptFlag(db, "like", 
+  setLikeOptFlag(db, "like",
       caseSensitive ? (SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE | SQLITE_FUNC_CASE) : SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE);
 }
 
@@ -108249,7 +108249,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterLikeFunctions(sqlite3 *db, int caseSensitive)
 ** pExpr points to an expression which implements a function.  If
 ** it is appropriate to apply the LIKE optimization to that function
 ** then set aWc[0] through aWc[2] to the wildcard characters and the
-** escape character and then return TRUE.  If the function is not a 
+** escape character and then return TRUE.  If the function is not a
 ** LIKE-style function then return FALSE.
 **
 ** The expression "a LIKE b ESCAPE c" is only considered a valid LIKE
@@ -108387,7 +108387,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
     AGGREGATE(count,             1, 0, 0, countStep,       countFinalize  ),
     AGGREGATE(group_concat,      1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize),
     AGGREGATE(group_concat,      2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize),
-  
+
     LIKEFUNC(glob, 2, &globInfo, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
 #ifdef SQLITE_CASE_SENSITIVE_LIKE
     LIKEFUNC(like, 2, &likeInfoAlt, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
@@ -108456,25 +108456,25 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
 ** Foreign keys in SQLite come in two flavours: deferred and immediate.
 ** If an immediate foreign key constraint is violated,
 ** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY is returned and the current
-** statement transaction rolled back. If a 
-** deferred foreign key constraint is violated, no action is taken 
-** immediately. However if the application attempts to commit the 
+** statement transaction rolled back. If a
+** deferred foreign key constraint is violated, no action is taken
+** immediately. However if the application attempts to commit the
 ** transaction before fixing the constraint violation, the attempt fails.
 **
 ** Deferred constraints are implemented using a simple counter associated
-** with the database handle. The counter is set to zero each time a 
-** database transaction is opened. Each time a statement is executed 
+** with the database handle. The counter is set to zero each time a
+** database transaction is opened. Each time a statement is executed
 ** that causes a foreign key violation, the counter is incremented. Each
 ** time a statement is executed that removes an existing violation from
 ** the database, the counter is decremented. When the transaction is
 ** committed, the commit fails if the current value of the counter is
 ** greater than zero. This scheme has two big drawbacks:
 **
-**   * When a commit fails due to a deferred foreign key constraint, 
+**   * When a commit fails due to a deferred foreign key constraint,
 **     there is no way to tell which foreign constraint is not satisfied,
 **     or which row it is not satisfied for.
 **
-**   * If the database contains foreign key violations when the 
+**   * If the database contains foreign key violations when the
 **     transaction is opened, this may cause the mechanism to malfunction.
 **
 ** Despite these problems, this approach is adopted as it seems simpler
@@ -108486,26 +108486,26 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
 **        the parent table for a match. If none is found increment the
 **        constraint counter.
 **
-**   I.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, 
+**   I.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table,
 **        search the child table for rows that correspond to the new
 **        row in the parent table. Decrement the counter for each row
 **        found (as the constraint is now satisfied).
 **
 ** DELETE operations:
 **
-**   D.1) For each FK for which the table is the child table, 
-**        search the parent table for a row that corresponds to the 
-**        deleted row in the child table. If such a row is not found, 
+**   D.1) For each FK for which the table is the child table,
+**        search the parent table for a row that corresponds to the
+**        deleted row in the child table. If such a row is not found,
 **        decrement the counter.
 **
-**   D.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, search 
-**        the child table for rows that correspond to the deleted row 
+**   D.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, search
+**        the child table for rows that correspond to the deleted row
 **        in the parent table. For each found increment the counter.
 **
 ** UPDATE operations:
 **
 **   An UPDATE command requires that all 4 steps above are taken, but only
-**   for FK constraints for which the affected columns are actually 
+**   for FK constraints for which the affected columns are actually
 **   modified (values must be compared at runtime).
 **
 ** Note that I.1 and D.1 are very similar operations, as are I.2 and D.2.
@@ -108514,10 +108514,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
 ** For the purposes of immediate FK constraints, the OR REPLACE conflict
 ** resolution is considered to delete rows before the new row is inserted.
 ** If a delete caused by OR REPLACE violates an FK constraint, an exception
-** is thrown, even if the FK constraint would be satisfied after the new 
+** is thrown, even if the FK constraint would be satisfied after the new
 ** row is inserted.
 **
-** Immediate constraints are usually handled similarly. The only difference 
+** Immediate constraints are usually handled similarly. The only difference
 ** is that the counter used is stored as part of each individual statement
 ** object (struct Vdbe). If, after the statement has run, its immediate
 ** constraint counter is greater than zero,
@@ -108528,7 +108528,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
 ** INSERT violates a foreign key constraint. This is necessary as such
 ** an INSERT does not open a statement transaction.
 **
-** TODO: How should dropping a table be handled? How should renaming a 
+** TODO: How should dropping a table be handled? How should renaming a
 ** table be handled?
 **
 **
@@ -108539,7 +108539,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
 ** for those two operations needs to know whether or not the operation
 ** requires any FK processing and, if so, which columns of the original
 ** row are required by the FK processing VDBE code (i.e. if FKs were
-** implemented using triggers, which of the old.* columns would be 
+** implemented using triggers, which of the old.* columns would be
 ** accessed). No information is required by the code-generator before
 ** coding an INSERT operation. The functions used by the UPDATE/DELETE
 ** generation code to query for this information are:
@@ -108576,13 +108576,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
 /*
 ** A foreign key constraint requires that the key columns in the parent
 ** table are collectively subject to a UNIQUE or PRIMARY KEY constraint.
-** Given that pParent is the parent table for foreign key constraint pFKey, 
-** search the schema for a unique index on the parent key columns. 
+** Given that pParent is the parent table for foreign key constraint pFKey,
+** search the schema for a unique index on the parent key columns.
+**
+** If successful, zero is returned. If the parent key is an INTEGER PRIMARY
+** KEY column, then output variable *ppIdx is set to NULL. Otherwise, *ppIdx
+** is set to point to the unique index.
 **
-** If successful, zero is returned. If the parent key is an INTEGER PRIMARY 
-** KEY column, then output variable *ppIdx is set to NULL. Otherwise, *ppIdx 
-** is set to point to the unique index. 
-** 
 ** If the parent key consists of a single column (the foreign key constraint
 ** is not a composite foreign key), output variable *paiCol is set to NULL.
 ** Otherwise, it is set to point to an allocated array of size N, where
@@ -108605,8 +108605,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
 **      PRIMARY KEY, or
 **
 **   4) No parent key columns were provided explicitly as part of the
-**      foreign key definition, and the PRIMARY KEY of the parent table 
-**      consists of a different number of columns to the child key in 
+**      foreign key definition, and the PRIMARY KEY of the parent table
+**      consists of a different number of columns to the child key in
 **      the child table.
 **
 ** then non-zero is returned, and a "foreign key mismatch" error loaded
@@ -108630,9 +108630,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
   assert( !paiCol || *paiCol==0 );
   assert( pParse );
 
-  /* If this is a non-composite (single column) foreign key, check if it 
-  ** maps to the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. If so, leave *ppIdx 
-  ** and *paiCol set to zero and return early. 
+  /* If this is a non-composite (single column) foreign key, check if it
+  ** maps to the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. If so, leave *ppIdx
+  ** and *paiCol set to zero and return early.
   **
   ** Otherwise, for a composite foreign key (more than one column), allocate
   ** space for the aiCol array (returned via output parameter *paiCol).
@@ -108641,7 +108641,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
   if( nCol==1 ){
     /* The FK maps to the IPK if any of the following are true:
     **
-    **   1) There is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and the FK is implicitly 
+    **   1) There is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and the FK is implicitly
     **      mapped to the primary key of table pParent, or
     **   2) The FK is explicitly mapped to a column declared as INTEGER
     **      PRIMARY KEY.
@@ -108658,14 +108658,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
   }
 
   for(pIdx=pParent->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){
-    if( pIdx->nKeyCol==nCol && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) && pIdx->pPartIdxWhere==0 ){ 
+    if( pIdx->nKeyCol==nCol && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) && pIdx->pPartIdxWhere==0 ){
       /* pIdx is a UNIQUE index (or a PRIMARY KEY) and has the right number
       ** of columns. If each indexed column corresponds to a foreign key
       ** column of pFKey, then this index is a winner.  */
 
       if( zKey==0 ){
-        /* If zKey is NULL, then this foreign key is implicitly mapped to 
-        ** the PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. The PRIMARY KEY index may be 
+        /* If zKey is NULL, then this foreign key is implicitly mapped to
+        ** the PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. The PRIMARY KEY index may be
         ** identified by the test.  */
         if( IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ){
           if( aiCol ){
@@ -108723,15 +108723,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called when a row is inserted into or deleted from the 
-** child table of foreign key constraint pFKey. If an SQL UPDATE is executed 
+** This function is called when a row is inserted into or deleted from the
+** child table of foreign key constraint pFKey. If an SQL UPDATE is executed
 ** on the child table of pFKey, this function is invoked twice for each row
 ** affected - once to "delete" the old row, and then again to "insert" the
 ** new row.
 **
 ** Each time it is called, this function generates VDBE code to locate the
-** row in the parent table that corresponds to the row being inserted into 
-** or deleted from the child table. If the parent row can be found, no 
+** row in the parent table that corresponds to the row being inserted into
+** or deleted from the child table. If the parent row can be found, no
 ** special action is taken. Otherwise, if the parent row can *not* be
 ** found in the parent table:
 **
@@ -108745,7 +108745,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
 **
 **   DELETE      deferred    Decrement the "deferred constraint counter".
 **
-** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file 
+** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
 ** (fkey.c) as "I.1" and "D.1".
 */
 static void fkLookupParent(
@@ -108768,8 +108768,8 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
   ** outstanding constraints to resolve. If there are not, there is no need
   ** to check if deleting this row resolves any outstanding violations.
   **
-  ** Check if any of the key columns in the child table row are NULL. If 
-  ** any are, then the constraint is considered satisfied. No need to 
+  ** Check if any of the key columns in the child table row are NULL. If
+  ** any are, then the constraint is considered satisfied. No need to
   ** search for a matching row in the parent table.  */
   if( nIncr<0 ){
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_FkIfZero, pFKey->isDeferred, iOk);
@@ -108786,8 +108786,8 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
       ** column of the parent table (table pTab).  */
       int iMustBeInt;               /* Address of MustBeInt instruction */
       int regTemp = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
-  
-      /* Invoke MustBeInt to coerce the child key value to an integer (i.e. 
+
+      /* Invoke MustBeInt to coerce the child key value to an integer (i.e.
       ** apply the affinity of the parent key). If this fails, then there
       ** is no matching parent key. Before using MustBeInt, make a copy of
       ** the value. Otherwise, the value inserted into the child key column
@@ -108795,7 +108795,7 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, aiCol[0]+1+regData, regTemp);
       iMustBeInt = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_MustBeInt, regTemp, 0);
       VdbeCoverage(v);
-  
+
       /* If the parent table is the same as the child table, and we are about
       ** to increment the constraint-counter (i.e. this is an INSERT operation),
       ** then check if the row being inserted matches itself. If so, do not
@@ -108804,7 +108804,7 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Eq, regData, iOk, regTemp); VdbeCoverage(v);
         sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL);
       }
-  
+
       sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead);
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iCur, 0, regTemp); VdbeCoverage(v);
       sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, iOk);
@@ -108815,19 +108815,19 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
       int nCol = pFKey->nCol;
       int regTemp = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nCol);
       int regRec = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
-  
+
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenRead, iCur, pIdx->tnum, iDb);
       sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pIdx);
       for(i=0; i<nCol; i++){
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, aiCol[i]+1+regData, regTemp+i);
       }
-  
+
       /* If the parent table is the same as the child table, and we are about
       ** to increment the constraint-counter (i.e. this is an INSERT operation),
       ** then check if the row being inserted matches itself. If so, do not
-      ** increment the constraint-counter. 
+      ** increment the constraint-counter.
       **
-      ** If any of the parent-key values are NULL, then the row cannot match 
+      ** If any of the parent-key values are NULL, then the row cannot match
       ** itself. So set JUMPIFNULL to make sure we do the OP_Found if any
       ** of the parent-key values are NULL (at this point it is known that
       ** none of the child key values are).
@@ -108848,19 +108848,19 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
         }
         sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, iOk);
       }
-  
+
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regTemp, nCol, regRec,
                         sqlite3IndexAffinityStr(pParse->db,pIdx), nCol);
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iCur, iOk, regRec, 0); VdbeCoverage(v);
-  
+
       sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRec);
       sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regTemp, nCol);
     }
   }
 
   if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs)
-   && !pParse->pToplevel 
-   && !pParse->isMultiWrite 
+   && !pParse->pToplevel
+   && !pParse->isMultiWrite
   ){
     /* Special case: If this is an INSERT statement that will insert exactly
     ** one row into the table, raise a constraint immediately instead of
@@ -108938,7 +108938,7 @@ static Expr *exprTableColumn(
 
 /*
 ** This function is called to generate code executed when a row is deleted
-** from the parent table of foreign key constraint pFKey and, if pFKey is 
+** from the parent table of foreign key constraint pFKey and, if pFKey is
 ** deferred, when a row is inserted into the same table. When generating
 ** code for an SQL UPDATE operation, this function may be called twice -
 ** once to "delete" the old row and once to "insert" the new row.
@@ -108965,7 +108965,7 @@ static Expr *exprTableColumn(
 **
 **   INSERT      deferred    Decrement the "deferred constraint counter".
 **
-** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file 
+** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
 ** (fkey.c) as "I.2" and "D.2".
 */
 static void fkScanChildren(
@@ -109008,7 +109008,7 @@ static void fkScanChildren(
     Expr *pLeft;                  /* Value from parent table row */
     Expr *pRight;                 /* Column ref to child table */
     Expr *pEq;                    /* Expression (pLeft = pRight) */
-    i16 iCol;                     /* Index of column in child table */ 
+    i16 iCol;                     /* Index of column in child table */
     const char *zCol;             /* Name of column in child table */
 
     iCol = pIdx ? pIdx->aiColumn[i] : -1;
@@ -109100,7 +109100,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FKey *sqlite3FkReferences(Table *pTab){
 }
 
 /*
-** The second argument is a Trigger structure allocated by the 
+** The second argument is a Trigger structure allocated by the
 ** fkActionTrigger() routine. This function deletes the Trigger structure
 ** and all of its sub-components.
 **
@@ -109128,7 +109128,7 @@ static void fkTriggerDelete(sqlite3 *dbMem, Trigger *p){
 **
 **   (a) The table is the parent table of a FK constraint, or
 **   (b) The table is the child table of a deferred FK constraint and it is
-**       determined at runtime that there are outstanding deferred FK 
+**       determined at runtime that there are outstanding deferred FK
 **       constraint violations in the database,
 **
 ** then the equivalent of "DELETE FROM <tbl>" is executed before dropping
@@ -109144,7 +109144,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa
     assert( v );                  /* VDBE has already been allocated */
     if( sqlite3FkReferences(pTab)==0 ){
       /* Search for a deferred foreign key constraint for which this table
-      ** is the child table. If one cannot be found, return without 
+      ** is the child table. If one cannot be found, return without
       ** generating any VDBE code. If one can be found, then jump over
       ** the entire DELETE if there are no outstanding deferred constraints
       ** when this statement is run.  */
@@ -109161,10 +109161,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa
     sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse, sqlite3SrcListDup(db, pName, 0), 0);
     pParse->disableTriggers = 0;
 
-    /* If the DELETE has generated immediate foreign key constraint 
+    /* If the DELETE has generated immediate foreign key constraint
     ** violations, halt the VDBE and return an error at this point, before
     ** any modifications to the schema are made. This is because statement
-    ** transactions are not able to rollback schema changes.  
+    ** transactions are not able to rollback schema changes.
     **
     ** If the SQLITE_DeferFKs flag is set, then this is not required, as
     ** the statement transaction will not be rolled back even if FK
@@ -109187,7 +109187,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa
 /*
 ** The second argument points to an FKey object representing a foreign key
 ** for which pTab is the child table. An UPDATE statement against pTab
-** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is 
+** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is
 ** actually updated, the corresponding element in the aChange[] array
 ** is zero or greater (if a column is unmodified the corresponding element
 ** is set to -1). If the rowid column is modified by the UPDATE statement
@@ -109214,7 +109214,7 @@ static int fkChildIsModified(
 /*
 ** The second argument points to an FKey object representing a foreign key
 ** for which pTab is the parent table. An UPDATE statement against pTab
-** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is 
+** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is
 ** actually updated, the corresponding element in the aChange[] array
 ** is zero or greater (if a column is unmodified the corresponding element
 ** is set to -1). If the rowid column is modified by the UPDATE statement
@@ -109224,9 +109224,9 @@ static int fkChildIsModified(
 ** parent key for FK constraint *p are modified.
 */
 static int fkParentIsModified(
-  Table *pTab, 
-  FKey *p, 
-  int *aChange, 
+  Table *pTab,
+  FKey *p,
+  int *aChange,
   int bChngRowid
 ){
   int i;
@@ -109267,7 +109267,7 @@ static int isSetNullAction(Parse *pParse, FKey *pFKey){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called when inserting, deleting or updating a row of
-** table pTab to generate VDBE code to perform foreign key constraint 
+** table pTab to generate VDBE code to perform foreign key constraint
 ** processing for the operation.
 **
 ** For a DELETE operation, parameter regOld is passed the index of the
@@ -109283,11 +109283,11 @@ static int isSetNullAction(Parse *pParse, FKey *pFKey){
 ** For an UPDATE operation, this function is called twice. Once before
 ** the original record is deleted from the table using the calling convention
 ** described for DELETE. Then again after the original record is deleted
-** but before the new record is inserted using the INSERT convention. 
+** but before the new record is inserted using the INSERT convention.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
   Parse *pParse,                  /* Parse context */
-  Table *pTab,                    /* Row is being deleted from this table */ 
+  Table *pTab,                    /* Row is being deleted from this table */
   int regOld,                     /* Previous row data is stored here */
   int regNew,                     /* New row data is stored here */
   int *aChange,                   /* Array indicating UPDATEd columns (or 0) */
@@ -109319,16 +109319,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
     int i;
     int bIgnore = 0;
 
-    if( aChange 
+    if( aChange
      && sqlite3_stricmp(pTab->zName, pFKey->zTo)!=0
-     && fkChildIsModified(pTab, pFKey, aChange, bChngRowid)==0 
+     && fkChildIsModified(pTab, pFKey, aChange, bChngRowid)==0
     ){
       continue;
     }
 
-    /* Find the parent table of this foreign key. Also find a unique index 
-    ** on the parent key columns in the parent table. If either of these 
-    ** schema items cannot be located, set an error in pParse and return 
+    /* Find the parent table of this foreign key. Also find a unique index
+    ** on the parent key columns in the parent table. If either of these
+    ** schema items cannot be located, set an error in pParse and return
     ** early.  */
     if( pParse->disableTriggers ){
       pTo = sqlite3FindTable(db, pFKey->zTo, zDb);
@@ -109370,7 +109370,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
       }
       assert( pIdx==0 || pIdx->aiColumn[i]>=0 );
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
-      /* Request permission to read the parent key columns. If the 
+      /* Request permission to read the parent key columns. If the
       ** authorization callback returns SQLITE_IGNORE, behave as if any
       ** values read from the parent table are NULL. */
       if( db->xAuth ){
@@ -109382,24 +109382,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
 #endif
     }
 
-    /* Take a shared-cache advisory read-lock on the parent table. Allocate 
-    ** a cursor to use to search the unique index on the parent key columns 
+    /* Take a shared-cache advisory read-lock on the parent table. Allocate
+    ** a cursor to use to search the unique index on the parent key columns
     ** in the parent table.  */
     sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTo->tnum, 0, pTo->zName);
     pParse->nTab++;
 
     if( regOld!=0 ){
       /* A row is being removed from the child table. Search for the parent.
-      ** If the parent does not exist, removing the child row resolves an 
+      ** If the parent does not exist, removing the child row resolves an
       ** outstanding foreign key constraint violation. */
       fkLookupParent(pParse, iDb, pTo, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regOld, -1, bIgnore);
     }
     if( regNew!=0 && !isSetNullAction(pParse, pFKey) ){
       /* A row is being added to the child table. If a parent row cannot
-      ** be found, adding the child row has violated the FK constraint. 
+      ** be found, adding the child row has violated the FK constraint.
       **
       ** If this operation is being performed as part of a trigger program
-      ** that is actually a "SET NULL" action belonging to this very 
+      ** that is actually a "SET NULL" action belonging to this very
       ** foreign key, then omit this scan altogether. As all child key
       ** values are guaranteed to be NULL, it is not possible for adding
       ** this row to cause an FK violation.  */
@@ -109420,8 +109420,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
       continue;
     }
 
-    if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs) 
-     && !pParse->pToplevel && !pParse->isMultiWrite 
+    if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs)
+     && !pParse->pToplevel && !pParse->isMultiWrite
     ){
       assert( regOld==0 && regNew!=0 );
       /* Inserting a single row into a parent table cannot cause (or fix)
@@ -109444,7 +109444,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
       pItem->zName = pFKey->pFrom->zName;
       pItem->pTab->nTabRef++;
       pItem->iCursor = pParse->nTab++;
-  
+
       if( regNew!=0 ){
         fkScanChildren(pParse, pSrc, pTab, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regNew, -1);
       }
@@ -109463,10 +109463,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
         **
         ** Note 2: At first glance it may seem like SQLite could simply omit
         ** all OP_FkCounter related scans when either CASCADE or SET NULL
-        ** applies. The trouble starts if the CASCADE or SET NULL action 
-        ** trigger causes other triggers or action rules attached to the 
+        ** applies. The trouble starts if the CASCADE or SET NULL action
+        ** trigger causes other triggers or action rules attached to the
         ** child table to fire. In these cases the fk constraint counters
-        ** might be set incorrectly if any OP_FkCounter related scans are 
+        ** might be set incorrectly if any OP_FkCounter related scans are
         ** omitted.  */
         if( !pFKey->isDeferred && eAction!=OE_Cascade && eAction!=OE_SetNull ){
           sqlite3MayAbort(pParse);
@@ -109482,7 +109482,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
 #define COLUMN_MASK(x) (((x)>31) ? 0xffffffff : ((u32)1<<(x)))
 
 /*
-** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a 
+** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
 ** row contained in table pTab.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3FkOldmask(
@@ -109512,17 +109512,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3FkOldmask(
 
 
 /*
-** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a 
+** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
 ** row contained in table pTab. If the operation is a DELETE, then
 ** parameter aChange is passed a NULL value. For an UPDATE, aChange points
 ** to an array of size N, where N is the number of columns in table pTab.
-** If the i'th column is not modified by the UPDATE, then the corresponding 
+** If the i'th column is not modified by the UPDATE, then the corresponding
 ** entry in the aChange[] array is set to -1. If the column is modified,
 ** the value is 0 or greater. Parameter chngRowid is set to true if the
 ** UPDATE statement modifies the rowid fields of the table.
 **
 ** If any foreign key processing will be required, this function returns
-** non-zero. If there is no foreign key related processing, this function 
+** non-zero. If there is no foreign key related processing, this function
 ** returns zero.
 **
 ** For an UPDATE, this function returns 2 if:
@@ -109542,8 +109542,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
   int eRet = 0;
   if( pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
     if( !aChange ){
-      /* A DELETE operation. Foreign key processing is required if the 
-      ** table in question is either the child or parent table for any 
+      /* A DELETE operation. Foreign key processing is required if the
+      ** table in question is either the child or parent table for any
       ** foreign key constraint.  */
       eRet = (sqlite3FkReferences(pTab) || pTab->pFKey);
     }else{
@@ -109572,7 +109572,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called when an UPDATE or DELETE operation is being 
+** This function is called when an UPDATE or DELETE operation is being
 ** compiled on table pTab, which is the parent table of foreign-key pFKey.
 ** If the current operation is an UPDATE, then the pChanges parameter is
 ** passed a pointer to the list of columns being modified. If it is a
@@ -109584,7 +109584,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
 ** returned (these actions require no special handling by the triggers
 ** sub-system, code for them is created by fkScanChildren()).
 **
-** For example, if pFKey is the foreign key and pTab is table "p" in 
+** For example, if pFKey is the foreign key and pTab is table "p" in
 ** the following schema:
 **
 **   CREATE TABLE p(pk PRIMARY KEY);
@@ -109597,7 +109597,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
 **   END;
 **
 ** The returned pointer is cached as part of the foreign key object. It
-** is eventually freed along with the rest of the foreign key object by 
+** is eventually freed along with the rest of the foreign key object by
 ** sqlite3FkDelete().
 */
 static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
@@ -109653,7 +109653,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
       ** that the affinity and collation sequence associated with the
       ** parent table are used for the comparison. */
       pEq = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ,
-          sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, 
+          sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
             sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tOld, 0),
             sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tToCol, 0)),
           sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tFromCol, 0)
@@ -109667,20 +109667,20 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
       */
       if( pChanges ){
         pEq = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_IS,
-            sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, 
+            sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
               sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tOld, 0),
               sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tToCol, 0)),
-            sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, 
+            sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
               sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tNew, 0),
               sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tToCol, 0))
             );
         pWhen = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pWhen, pEq);
       }
-  
+
       if( action!=OE_Restrict && (action!=OE_Cascade || pChanges) ){
         Expr *pNew;
         if( action==OE_Cascade ){
-          pNew = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, 
+          pNew = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
             sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tNew, 0),
             sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tToCol, 0));
         }else if( action==OE_SetDflt ){
@@ -109704,7 +109704,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
 
     if( action==OE_Restrict ){
       Token tFrom;
-      Expr *pRaise; 
+      Expr *pRaise;
 
       tFrom.z = zFrom;
       tFrom.n = nFrom;
@@ -109712,7 +109712,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
       if( pRaise ){
         pRaise->affinity = OE_Abort;
       }
-      pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 
+      pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse,
           sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, pRaise),
           sqlite3SrcListAppend(db, 0, &tFrom, 0),
           pWhere,
@@ -109724,7 +109724,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
     /* Disable lookaside memory allocation */
     db->lookaside.bDisable++;
 
-    pTrigger = (Trigger *)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, 
+    pTrigger = (Trigger *)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
         sizeof(Trigger) +         /* struct Trigger */
         sizeof(TriggerStep) +     /* Single step in trigger program */
         nFrom + 1                 /* Space for pStep->zTarget */
@@ -109733,7 +109733,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
       pStep = pTrigger->step_list = (TriggerStep *)&pTrigger[1];
       pStep->zTarget = (char *)&pStep[1];
       memcpy((char *)pStep->zTarget, zFrom, nFrom);
-  
+
       pStep->pWhere = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pWhere, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
       pStep->pExprList = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pList, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
       pStep->pSelect = sqlite3SelectDup(db, pSelect, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
@@ -109758,12 +109758,12 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
 
     switch( action ){
       case OE_Restrict:
-        pStep->op = TK_SELECT; 
+        pStep->op = TK_SELECT;
         break;
-      case OE_Cascade: 
-        if( !pChanges ){ 
-          pStep->op = TK_DELETE; 
-          break; 
+      case OE_Cascade:
+        if( !pChanges ){
+          pStep->op = TK_DELETE;
+          break;
         }
       default:
         pStep->op = TK_UPDATE;
@@ -109790,9 +109790,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkActions(
   int *aChange,                   /* Array indicating UPDATEd columns (or 0) */
   int bChngRowid                  /* True if rowid is UPDATEd */
 ){
-  /* If foreign-key support is enabled, iterate through all FKs that 
-  ** refer to table pTab. If there is an action associated with the FK 
-  ** for this operation (either update or delete), invoke the associated 
+  /* If foreign-key support is enabled, iterate through all FKs that
+  ** refer to table pTab. If there is an action associated with the FK
+  ** for this operation (either update or delete), invoke the associated
   ** trigger sub-program.  */
   if( pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
     FKey *pFKey;                  /* Iterator variable */
@@ -109872,7 +109872,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDelete(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){
 /* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
 
 /*
-** Generate code that will 
+** Generate code that will
 **
 **   (1) acquire a lock for table pTab then
 **   (2) open pTab as cursor iCur.
@@ -109891,7 +109891,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OpenTable(
   assert( !IsVirtual(pTab) );
   v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
   assert( opcode==OP_OpenWrite || opcode==OP_OpenRead );
-  sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum, 
+  sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum,
                    (opcode==OP_OpenWrite)?1:0, pTab->zName);
   if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, opcode, iCur, pTab->tnum, iDb, pTab->nCol);
@@ -109908,7 +109908,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OpenTable(
 
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to the column affinity string associated with index
-** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in 
+** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in
 ** the table, according to the affinity of the column:
 **
 **  Character      Column affinity
@@ -109960,7 +109960,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3IndexAffinityStr(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx){
     }
     pIdx->zColAff[n] = 0;
   }
- 
+
   return pIdx->zColAff;
 }
 
@@ -110015,9 +110015,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TableAffinity(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int iReg){
 
 /*
 ** Return non-zero if the table pTab in database iDb or any of its indices
-** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if 
-** a statement of the form  "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can 
-** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT. 
+** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if
+** a statement of the form  "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can
+** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT.
 */
 static int readsTable(Parse *p, int iDb, Table *pTab){
   Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(p);
@@ -110108,7 +110108,7 @@ static int autoIncBegin(
 
 /*
 ** This routine generates code that will initialize all of the
-** register used by the autoincrement tracker.  
+** register used by the autoincrement tracker.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){
   AutoincInfo *p;            /* Information about an AUTOINCREMENT */
@@ -110135,7 +110135,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){
       /* 6  */ {OP_Goto,    0,  9, 0},
       /* 7  */ {OP_Next,    0,  2, 0},
       /* 8  */ {OP_Integer, 0,  0, 0},
-      /* 9  */ {OP_Close,   0,  0, 0} 
+      /* 9  */ {OP_Close,   0,  0, 0}
     };
     VdbeOp *aOp;
     pDb = &db->aDb[p->iDb];
@@ -110479,7 +110479,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
   regData = regRowid+1;
 
   /* If the INSERT statement included an IDLIST term, then make sure
-  ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and 
+  ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and
   ** remember the column indices.
   **
   ** If the table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and that column
@@ -110551,7 +110551,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
     ** the destination table (template 3).
     **
     ** A temp table must be used if the table being updated is also one
-    ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement.  Also use a 
+    ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement.  Also use a
     ** temp table in the case of row triggers.
     */
     if( pTrigger || readsTable(pParse, iDb, pTab) ){
@@ -110587,7 +110587,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
       sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTempRowid);
     }
   }else{
-    /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a 
+    /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a
     ** single-row VALUES clause
     */
     NameContext sNC;
@@ -110606,7 +110606,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
   }
 
   /* If there is no IDLIST term but the table has an integer primary
-  ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key 
+  ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key
   ** column index in the original table definition.
   */
   if( pColumn==0 && nColumn>0 ){
@@ -110620,7 +110620,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
     nHidden += (IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[i]) ? 1 : 0);
   }
   if( pColumn==0 && nColumn && nColumn!=(pTab->nCol-nHidden) ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
        "table %S has %d columns but %d values were supplied",
        pTabList, 0, pTab->nCol-nHidden, nColumn);
     goto insert_cleanup;
@@ -110629,7 +110629,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d values for %d columns", nColumn, pColumn->nId);
     goto insert_cleanup;
   }
-    
+
   /* Initialize the count of rows to be inserted
   */
   if( db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows ){
@@ -110725,7 +110725,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
             || (pColumn==0 && IsOrdinaryHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[i])) ){
         sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pTab->aCol[i].pDflt, regCols+i+1);
       }else if( useTempTable ){
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, regCols+i+1); 
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, regCols+i+1);
       }else{
         assert( pSelect==0 ); /* Otherwise useTempTable is true */
         sqlite3ExprCodeAndCache(pParse, pList->a[j].pExpr, regCols+i+1);
@@ -110743,7 +110743,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
     }
 
     /* Fire BEFORE or INSTEAD OF triggers */
-    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, 
+    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE,
         pTab, regCols-pTab->nCol-1, onError, endOfLoop);
 
     sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regCols, pTab->nCol+1);
@@ -110827,7 +110827,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
       if( j<0 || nColumn==0 || (pColumn && j>=pColumn->nId) ){
         sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, pTab->aCol[i].pDflt, iRegStore);
       }else if( useTempTable ){
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, iRegStore); 
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, iRegStore);
       }else if( pSelect ){
         if( regFromSelect!=regData ){
           sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regFromSelect+j, iRegStore);
@@ -110861,7 +110861,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
       ** constraints or (b) there are no triggers and this table is not a
       ** parent table in a foreign key constraint. It is safe to set the
       ** flag in the second case as if any REPLACE constraint is hit, an
-      ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each 
+      ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each
       ** cursor that is disturbed. And these instructions both clear the
       ** VdbeCursor.seekResult variable, disabling the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT
       ** functionality.  */
@@ -110882,7 +110882,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
 
   if( pTrigger ){
     /* Code AFTER triggers */
-    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, 
+    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER,
         pTab, regData-2-pTab->nCol, onError, endOfLoop);
   }
 
@@ -110909,7 +110909,7 @@ insert_end:
   }
 
   /*
-  ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is 
+  ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is
   ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
   ** invoke the callback function.
   */
@@ -111112,9 +111112,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
   assert( v!=0 );
   assert( pTab->pSelect==0 );  /* This table is not a VIEW */
   nCol = pTab->nCol;
-  
+
   /* pPk is the PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables and NULL for
-  ** normal rowid tables.  nPkField is the number of key fields in the 
+  ** normal rowid tables.  nPkField is the number of key fields in the
   ** pPk index or 1 for a rowid table.  In other words, nPkField is the
   ** number of fields in the true primary key of the table. */
   if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
@@ -111272,10 +111272,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
         ** the triggers and remove both the table and index b-tree entries.
         **
         ** Otherwise, if there are no triggers or the recursive-triggers
-        ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call 
-        ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries 
-        ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry 
-        ** when it is inserted.  
+        ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call
+        ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries
+        ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry
+        ** when it is inserted.
         **
         ** If either GenerateRowDelete() or GenerateRowIndexDelete() is called,
         ** also invoke MultiWrite() to indicate that this VDBE may require
@@ -111386,7 +111386,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
     if( pIdx->idxType==2 ) sqlite3SetMakeRecordP5(v, pIdx->pTable);
 #endif
 
-    /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index 
+    /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index
     ** of a WITHOUT ROWID table and there has been no change the
     ** primary key, then no collision is possible.  The collision detection
     ** logic below can all be skipped. */
@@ -111397,7 +111397,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
 
     /* Find out what action to take in case there is a uniqueness conflict */
     onError = pIdx->onError;
-    if( onError==OE_None ){ 
+    if( onError==OE_None ){
       sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk);
       continue;  /* pIdx is not a UNIQUE index */
     }
@@ -111413,7 +111413,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
     **   (3) There are no secondary indexes on the table
     **   (4) No delete triggers need to be fired if there is a conflict
     **   (5) No FK constraint counters need to be updated if a conflict occurs.
-    */ 
+    */
     if( (ix==0 && pIdx->pNext==0)                   /* Condition 3 */
      && pPk==pIdx                                   /* Condition 2 */
      && onError==OE_Replace                         /* Condition 1 */
@@ -111456,7 +111456,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
           }
         }
         if( isUpdate ){
-          /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID 
+          /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID
           ** table, only conflict if the new PRIMARY KEY values are actually
           ** different from the old.
           **
@@ -111466,7 +111466,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
           int addrJump = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+pPk->nKeyCol;
           int op = OP_Ne;
           int regCmp = (IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? regIdx : regR);
-  
+
           for(i=0; i<pPk->nKeyCol; i++){
             char *p4 = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pPk->azColl[i]);
             x = pPk->aiColumn[i];
@@ -111475,7 +111475,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
               addrJump = addrUniqueOk;
               op = OP_Eq;
             }
-            sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op, 
+            sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op,
                 regOldData+1+x, addrJump, regCmp+i, p4, P4_COLLSEQ
             );
             sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL);
@@ -111521,7 +111521,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
     sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, ipkTop+1);
     sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, ipkBottom);
   }
-  
+
   *pbMayReplace = seenReplace;
   VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenCnstCks(%d)", seenReplace));
 }
@@ -111598,7 +111598,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CompleteInsertion(
       pik_flags |= (update_flags & OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION);
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
       if( update_flags==0 ){
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_InsertInt, 
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_InsertInt,
             iIdxCur+i, aRegIdx[i], 0, (char*)pTab, P4_TABLE
         );
         sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_ISNOOP);
@@ -111778,7 +111778,7 @@ static int xferCompatibleIndex(Index *pDest, Index *pSrc){
 **
 **     INSERT INTO tab1 SELECT * FROM tab2;
 **
-** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1.  
+** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1.
 ** Columns are not decoded and reassembled, which greatly improves
 ** performance.  Raw index records are transferred in the same way.
 **
@@ -111913,8 +111913,8 @@ static int xferOptimization(
     Column *pDestCol = &pDest->aCol[i];
     Column *pSrcCol = &pSrc->aCol[i];
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_HIDDEN_COLUMNS
-    if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0 
-     && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN 
+    if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0
+     && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN
     ){
       return 0;    /* Neither table may have __hidden__ columns */
     }
@@ -111932,7 +111932,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
     if( i>0 ){
       assert( pDestCol->pDflt==0 || pDestCol->pDflt->op==TK_SPAN );
       assert( pSrcCol->pDflt==0 || pSrcCol->pDflt->op==TK_SPAN );
-      if( (pDestCol->pDflt==0)!=(pSrcCol->pDflt==0) 
+      if( (pDestCol->pDflt==0)!=(pSrcCol->pDflt==0)
        || (pDestCol->pDflt && strcmp(pDestCol->pDflt->u.zToken,
                                        pSrcCol->pDflt->u.zToken)!=0)
       ){
@@ -111959,7 +111959,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
   /* Disallow the transfer optimization if the destination table constains
   ** any foreign key constraints.  This is more restrictive than necessary.
-  ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM 
+  ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM
   ** command, and the VACUUM command disables foreign key constraints.  So
   ** the extra complication to make this rule less restrictive is probably
   ** not worth the effort.  Ticket [6284df89debdfa61db8073e062908af0c9b6118e]
@@ -112006,7 +112006,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
     **     (If the destination is not initially empty, the rowid fields
     **     of index entries might need to change.)
     **
-    ** (2) The destination has a unique index.  (The xfer optimization 
+    ** (2) The destination has a unique index.  (The xfer optimization
     **     is unable to test uniqueness.)
     **
     ** (3) onError is something other than OE_Abort and OE_Rollback.
@@ -112069,14 +112069,14 @@ static int xferOptimization(
       /* This INSERT command is part of a VACUUM operation, which guarantees
       ** that the destination table is empty. If all indexed columns use
       ** collation sequence BINARY, then it can also be assumed that the
-      ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted 
+      ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted
       ** order. In this case, instead of seeking within the b-tree as part
       ** of every OP_IdxInsert opcode, an OP_SeekEnd is added before the
-      ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key 
+      ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key
       ** should be inserted. This is faster.
       **
       ** If any of the indexed columns use a collation sequence other than
-      ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user 
+      ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user
       ** might change the definition of a collation sequence and then run
       ** a VACUUM command. In that case keys may not be written in strictly
       ** sorted order.  */
@@ -112187,7 +112187,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_exec(
       rc = sqlite3_step(pStmt);
 
       /* Invoke the callback function if required */
-      if( xCallback && (SQLITE_ROW==rc || 
+      if( xCallback && (SQLITE_ROW==rc ||
           (SQLITE_DONE==rc && !callbackIsInit
                            && db->flags&SQLITE_NullCallback)) ){
         if( !callbackIsInit ){
@@ -112295,7 +112295,7 @@ exec_out:
 ** This header file defines the SQLite interface for use by
 ** shared libraries that want to be imported as extensions into
 ** an SQLite instance.  Shared libraries that intend to be loaded
-** as extensions by SQLite should #include this file instead of 
+** as extensions by SQLite should #include this file instead of
 ** sqlite3.h.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE3EXT_H
@@ -112844,14 +112844,14 @@ typedef int (*sqlite3_loadext_entry)(
 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_LOAD_EXTENSION) */
 
 #if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_LOAD_EXTENSION)
-  /* This case when the file really is being compiled as a loadable 
+  /* This case when the file really is being compiled as a loadable
   ** extension */
 # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1     const sqlite3_api_routines *sqlite3_api=0;
 # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT2(v)  sqlite3_api=v;
 # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3     \
     extern const sqlite3_api_routines *sqlite3_api;
 #else
-  /* This case when the file is being statically linked into the 
+  /* This case when the file is being statically linked into the
   ** application */
 # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1     /*no-op*/
 # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT2(v)  (void)v; /* unused parameter */
@@ -113142,8 +113142,8 @@ static const sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3Apis = {
   sqlite3_memory_highwater,
   sqlite3_memory_used,
 #ifdef SQLITE_MUTEX_OMIT
-  0, 
-  0, 
+  0,
+  0,
   0,
   0,
   0,
@@ -113286,7 +113286,7 @@ static const sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3Apis = {
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK on success and SQLITE_ERROR if something goes wrong.
 **
-** If an error occurs and pzErrMsg is not 0, then fill *pzErrMsg with 
+** If an error occurs and pzErrMsg is not 0, then fill *pzErrMsg with
 ** error message text.  The calling function should free this memory
 ** by calling sqlite3DbFree(db, ).
 */
@@ -113310,7 +113310,7 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension(
   /* Shared library endings to try if zFile cannot be loaded as written */
   static const char *azEndings[] = {
 #if SQLITE_OS_WIN
-     "dll"   
+     "dll"
 #elif defined(__APPLE__)
      "dylib"
 #else
@@ -113350,7 +113350,7 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension(
     if( pzErrMsg ){
       *pzErrMsg = zErrmsg = sqlite3_malloc64(nMsg);
       if( zErrmsg ){
-        sqlite3_snprintf(nMsg, zErrmsg, 
+        sqlite3_snprintf(nMsg, zErrmsg,
             "unable to open shared library [%s]", zFile);
         sqlite3OsDlError(pVfs, nMsg-1, zErrmsg);
       }
@@ -113362,9 +113362,9 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension(
   /* If no entry point was specified and the default legacy
   ** entry point name "sqlite3_extension_init" was not found, then
   ** construct an entry point name "sqlite3_X_init" where the X is
-  ** replaced by the lowercase value of every ASCII alphabetic 
+  ** replaced by the lowercase value of every ASCII alphabetic
   ** character in the filename after the last "/" upto the first ".",
-  ** and eliding the first three characters if they are "lib".  
+  ** and eliding the first three characters if they are "lib".
   ** Examples:
   **
   **    /usr/local/lib/libExample5.4.3.so ==>  sqlite3_example_init
@@ -113484,7 +113484,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_enable_load_extension(sqlite3 *db, int onoff){
 */
 typedef struct sqlite3AutoExtList sqlite3AutoExtList;
 static SQLITE_WSD struct sqlite3AutoExtList {
-  u32 nExt;              /* Number of entries in aExt[] */          
+  u32 nExt;              /* Number of entries in aExt[] */
   void (**aExt)(void);   /* Pointers to the extension init functions */
 } sqlite3Autoext = { 0, 0 };
 
@@ -113671,7 +113671,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoLoadExtensions(sqlite3 *db){
 ** that includes the PragType_XXXX macro definitions and the aPragmaName[]
 ** object.  This ensures that the aPragmaName[] table is arranged in
 ** lexicographical order to facility a binary search of the pragma name.
-** Do not edit pragma.h directly.  Edit and rerun the script in at 
+** Do not edit pragma.h directly.  Edit and rerun the script in at
 ** ../tool/mkpragmatab.tcl. */
 /************** Include pragma.h in the middle of pragma.c *******************/
 /************** Begin file pragma.h ******************************************/
@@ -113747,56 +113747,56 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoLoadExtensions(sqlite3 *db){
 static const char *const pragCName[] = {
   /*   0 */ "cache_size",  /* Used by: default_cache_size */
   /*   1 */ "cid",         /* Used by: table_info */
-  /*   2 */ "name",       
-  /*   3 */ "type",       
-  /*   4 */ "notnull",    
-  /*   5 */ "dflt_value", 
-  /*   6 */ "pk",         
+  /*   2 */ "name",
+  /*   3 */ "type",
+  /*   4 */ "notnull",
+  /*   5 */ "dflt_value",
+  /*   6 */ "pk",
   /*   7 */ "tbl",         /* Used by: stats */
-  /*   8 */ "idx",        
-  /*   9 */ "wdth",       
-  /*  10 */ "hght",       
-  /*  11 */ "flgs",       
+  /*   8 */ "idx",
+  /*   9 */ "wdth",
+  /*  10 */ "hght",
+  /*  11 */ "flgs",
   /*  12 */ "seqno",       /* Used by: index_info */
-  /*  13 */ "cid",        
-  /*  14 */ "name",       
+  /*  13 */ "cid",
+  /*  14 */ "name",
   /*  15 */ "seqno",       /* Used by: index_xinfo */
-  /*  16 */ "cid",        
-  /*  17 */ "name",       
-  /*  18 */ "desc",       
-  /*  19 */ "coll",       
-  /*  20 */ "key",        
+  /*  16 */ "cid",
+  /*  17 */ "name",
+  /*  18 */ "desc",
+  /*  19 */ "coll",
+  /*  20 */ "key",
   /*  21 */ "seq",         /* Used by: index_list */
-  /*  22 */ "name",       
-  /*  23 */ "unique",     
-  /*  24 */ "origin",     
-  /*  25 */ "partial",    
+  /*  22 */ "name",
+  /*  23 */ "unique",
+  /*  24 */ "origin",
+  /*  25 */ "partial",
   /*  26 */ "seq",         /* Used by: database_list */
-  /*  27 */ "name",       
-  /*  28 */ "file",       
+  /*  27 */ "name",
+  /*  28 */ "file",
   /*  29 */ "name",        /* Used by: function_list */
-  /*  30 */ "builtin",    
+  /*  30 */ "builtin",
   /*  31 */ "name",        /* Used by: module_list pragma_list */
   /*  32 */ "seq",         /* Used by: collation_list */
-  /*  33 */ "name",       
+  /*  33 */ "name",
   /*  34 */ "id",          /* Used by: foreign_key_list */
-  /*  35 */ "seq",        
-  /*  36 */ "table",      
-  /*  37 */ "from",       
-  /*  38 */ "to",         
-  /*  39 */ "on_update",  
-  /*  40 */ "on_delete",  
-  /*  41 */ "match",      
+  /*  35 */ "seq",
+  /*  36 */ "table",
+  /*  37 */ "from",
+  /*  38 */ "to",
+  /*  39 */ "on_update",
+  /*  40 */ "on_delete",
+  /*  41 */ "match",
   /*  42 */ "table",       /* Used by: foreign_key_check */
-  /*  43 */ "rowid",      
-  /*  44 */ "parent",     
-  /*  45 */ "fkid",       
+  /*  43 */ "rowid",
+  /*  44 */ "parent",
+  /*  45 */ "fkid",
   /*  46 */ "busy",        /* Used by: wal_checkpoint */
-  /*  47 */ "log",        
+  /*  47 */ "log",
   /*  48 */ "checkpointed",
   /*  49 */ "timeout",     /* Used by: busy_timeout */
   /*  50 */ "database",    /* Used by: lock_status */
-  /*  51 */ "status",     
+  /*  51 */ "status",
 };
 
 /* Definitions of all built-in pragmas */
@@ -114330,7 +114330,7 @@ static const PragmaName aPragmaName[] = {
 
 /*
 ** Interpret the given string as a safety level.  Return 0 for OFF,
-** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA.  Return 1 for an empty or 
+** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA.  Return 1 for an empty or
 ** unrecognized string argument.  The FULL and EXTRA option is disallowed
 ** if the omitFull parameter it 1.
 **
@@ -114389,7 +114389,7 @@ static int getLockingMode(const char *z){
 /*
 ** Interpret the given string as an auto-vacuum mode value.
 **
-** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are 
+** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are
 ** acceptable, as are their numeric equivalents: 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
 */
 static int getAutoVacuum(const char *z){
@@ -114541,7 +114541,7 @@ static const char *actionName(u8 action){
     case OE_SetDflt:  zName = "SET DEFAULT";     break;
     case OE_Cascade:  zName = "CASCADE";         break;
     case OE_Restrict: zName = "RESTRICT";        break;
-    default:          zName = "NO ACTION";  
+    default:          zName = "NO ACTION";
                       assert( action==OE_None ); break;
   }
   return zName;
@@ -114610,7 +114610,7 @@ static int integrityCheckResultRow(Vdbe *v){
 }
 
 /*
-** Process a pragma statement.  
+** Process a pragma statement.
 **
 ** Pragmas are of this form:
 **
@@ -114625,7 +114625,7 @@ static int integrityCheckResultRow(Vdbe *v){
 ** id and pId2 is any empty string.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
-  Parse *pParse, 
+  Parse *pParse,
   Token *pId1,        /* First part of [schema.]id field */
   Token *pId2,        /* Second part of [schema.]id field, or NULL */
   Token *pValue,      /* Token for <value>, or NULL */
@@ -114653,8 +114653,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
   if( iDb<0 ) return;
   pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
 
-  /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the 
-  ** pragma, make sure it is open. 
+  /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the
+  ** pragma, make sure it is open.
   */
   if( iDb==1 && sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(pParse) ){
     return;
@@ -114722,7 +114722,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
   }
 
   /* Register the result column names for pragmas that return results */
-  if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0 
+  if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0
    && ((pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1)==0 || zRight==0)
   ){
     setPragmaResultColumnNames(v, pPragma);
@@ -114730,7 +114730,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
 
   /* Jump to the appropriate pragma handler */
   switch( pPragma->ePragTyp ){
-  
+
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED)
   /*
   **  PRAGMA [schema.]default_cache_size
@@ -114846,7 +114846,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
   **  PRAGMA [schema.]max_page_count=N
   **
   ** The first form reports the current setting for the
-  ** maximum number of pages in the database file.  The 
+  ** maximum number of pages in the database file.  The
   ** second form attempts to change this setting.  Both
   ** forms return the current setting.
   **
@@ -114865,7 +114865,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
     if( sqlite3Tolower(zLeft[0])=='p' ){
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Pagecount, iDb, iReg);
     }else{
-      sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MaxPgcnt, iDb, iReg, 
+      sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MaxPgcnt, iDb, iReg,
                         sqlite3AbsInt32(sqlite3Atoi(zRight)));
     }
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, iReg, 1);
@@ -115002,7 +115002,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
       */
       rc = sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(pBt, eAuto);
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eAuto==1 || eAuto==2) ){
-        /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or 
+        /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or
         ** "incremental", write the value of meta[6] in the database
         ** file. Before writing to meta[6], check that meta[3] indicates
         ** that this really is an auto-vacuum capable database.
@@ -115104,7 +115104,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
     assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
     if( !zRight ){
       returnSingleInt(v,
-         (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 : 
+         (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 :
             sqlite3BtreeSetSpillSize(pDb->pBt,0));
     }else{
       int size = 1;
@@ -115278,7 +115278,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
       Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt);
       char *proxy_file_path = NULL;
       sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
-      sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE, 
+      sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
                            &proxy_file_path);
       returnSingleText(v, proxy_file_path);
     }else{
@@ -115286,10 +115286,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
       sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
       int res;
       if( zRight[0] ){
-        res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, 
+        res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
                                      zRight);
       } else {
-        res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, 
+        res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
                                      NULL);
       }
       if( res!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -115299,8 +115299,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
     }
     break;
   }
-#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */      
-    
+#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
+
   /*
   **   PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous
   **   PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous=OFF|ON|NORMAL|FULL|EXTRA
@@ -115315,7 +115315,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
       returnSingleInt(v, pDb->safety_level-1);
     }else{
       if( !db->autoCommit ){
-        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
             "Safety level may not be changed inside a transaction");
       }else if( iDb!=1 ){
         int iLevel = (getSafetyLevel(zRight,0,1)+1) & PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_MASK;
@@ -115355,7 +115355,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
         if( mask==SQLITE_DeferFKs ) db->nDeferredImmCons = 0;
       }
 
-      /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL 
+      /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL
       ** compiler (eg. count_changes). So add an opcode to expire all
       ** compiled SQL statements after modifying a pragma value.
       */
@@ -115572,7 +115572,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
     if( pTab ){
       pFK = pTab->pFKey;
       if( pFK ){
-        int i = 0; 
+        int i = 0;
         pParse->nMem = 8;
         sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(pParse, iDb);
         while(pFK){
@@ -115667,8 +115667,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
         addrOk = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
 
         /* Generate code to read the child key values into registers
-        ** regRow..regRow+n. If any of the child key values are NULL, this 
-        ** row cannot cause an FK violation. Jump directly to addrOk in 
+        ** regRow..regRow+n. If any of the child key values are NULL, this
+        ** row cannot cause an FK violation. Jump directly to addrOk in
         ** this case. */
         for(j=0; j<pFK->nCol; j++){
           int iCol = aiCols ? aiCols[j] : pFK->aCol[j].iFrom;
@@ -115744,7 +115744,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
   **
   ** Verify the integrity of the database.
   **
-  ** The "quick_check" is reduced version of 
+  ** The "quick_check" is reduced version of
   ** integrity_check designed to detect most database corruption
   ** without the overhead of cross-checking indexes.  Quick_check
   ** is linear time wherease integrity_check is O(NlogN).
@@ -115851,7 +115851,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
         sqlite3OpenTableAndIndices(pParse, pTab, OP_OpenRead, 0,
                                    1, 0, &iDataCur, &iIdxCur);
         /* reg[7] counts the number of entries in the table.
-        ** reg[8+i] counts the number of entries in the i-th index 
+        ** reg[8+i] counts the number of entries in the i-th index
         */
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, 7);
         for(j=0, pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext, j++){
@@ -115889,7 +115889,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
             for(k=pCheck->nExpr-1; k>0; k--){
               sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pCheck->a[k].pExpr, addrCkFault, 0);
             }
-            sqlite3ExprIfTrue(pParse, pCheck->a[0].pExpr, addrCkOk, 
+            sqlite3ExprIfTrue(pParse, pCheck->a[0].pExpr, addrCkOk,
                 SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
             sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrCkFault);
             pParse->iSelfTab = 0;
@@ -115970,7 +115970,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
           }
         }
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT */
-      } 
+      }
     }
     {
       static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(2);
@@ -116012,7 +116012,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
   ** encoding that will be used for the main database file if a new file
   ** is created. If an existing main database file is opened, then the
   ** default text encoding for the existing database is used.
-  ** 
+  **
   ** In all cases new databases created using the ATTACH command are
   ** created to use the same default text encoding as the main database. If
   ** the main database has not been initialized and/or created when ATTACH
@@ -116050,9 +116050,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
       ** will be overwritten when the schema is next loaded. If it does not
       ** already exists, it will be created to use the new encoding value.
       */
-      if( 
-        !(DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_SchemaLoaded)) || 
-        DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_Empty) 
+      if(
+        !(DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_SchemaLoaded)) ||
+        DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_Empty)
       ){
         for(pEnc=&encnames[0]; pEnc->zName; pEnc++){
           if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp(zRight, pEnc->zName) ){
@@ -116196,8 +116196,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
     if( zRight ){
       sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(db, sqlite3Atoi(zRight));
     }
-    returnSingleInt(v, 
-       db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ? 
+    returnSingleInt(v,
+       db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ?
            SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(db->pWalArg) : 0);
   }
   break;
@@ -116237,7 +116237,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
   **    0x0002    Run ANALYZE on tables that might benefit.  On by default.
   **              See below for additional information.
   **
-  **    0x0004    (Not yet implemented) Record usage and performance 
+  **    0x0004    (Not yet implemented) Record usage and performance
   **              information from the current session in the
   **              database file so that it will be available to "optimize"
   **              pragmas run by future database connections.
@@ -116248,7 +116248,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
   ** The default MASK is and always shall be 0xfffe.  0xfffe means perform all
   ** of the optimizations listed above except Debug Mode, including new
   ** optimizations that have not yet been invented.  If new optimizations are
-  ** ever added that should be off by default, those off-by-default 
+  ** ever added that should be off by default, those off-by-default
   ** optimizations will have bitmasks of 0x10000 or larger.
   **
   ** DETERMINATION OF WHEN TO RUN ANALYZE
@@ -116309,7 +116309,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
         }
         if( szThreshold ){
           sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iTabCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead);
-          sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfSmaller, iTabCur, 
+          sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfSmaller, iTabCur,
                          sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2+(opMask&1), szThreshold);
           VdbeCoverage(v);
         }
@@ -116403,7 +116403,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
       pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
       if( pBt==0 || sqlite3BtreePager(pBt)==0 ){
         zState = "closed";
-      }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0, 
+      }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0,
                                      SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCKSTATE, &j)==SQLITE_OK ){
          zState = azLockName[j];
       }
@@ -116461,7 +116461,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
   /* The following block is a no-op unless SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. Its only
   ** purpose is to execute assert() statements to verify that if the
   ** PragFlg_NoColumns1 flag is set and the caller specified an argument
-  ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow 
+  ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow
   ** instructions to the VM.  */
   if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1) && zRight ){
     sqlite3VdbeVerifyNoResultRow(v);
@@ -116492,7 +116492,7 @@ struct PragmaVtabCursor {
   char *azArg[2];           /* Value of the argument and schema */
 };
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Pragma virtual table module xConnect method.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabConnect(
@@ -116555,7 +116555,7 @@ static int pragmaVtabConnect(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Pragma virtual table module xDisconnect method.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
@@ -116653,11 +116653,11 @@ static int pragmaVtabNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Pragma virtual table module xFilter method.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabFilter(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
   int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
   int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
@@ -116712,11 +116712,11 @@ static int pragmaVtabEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
 }
 
 /* The xColumn method simply returns the corresponding column from
-** the PRAGMA.  
+** the PRAGMA.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabColumn(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, 
-  sqlite3_context *ctx, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
+  sqlite3_context *ctx,
   int i
 ){
   PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor;
@@ -116729,7 +116729,7 @@ static int pragmaVtabColumn(
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Pragma virtual table module xRowid method.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *p){
@@ -116971,7 +116971,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){
   }
 
   /* If there is not already a read-only (or read-write) transaction opened
-  ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it 
+  ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
   ** will be closed before this function returns.  */
   sqlite3BtreeEnter(pDb->pBt);
   if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInReadTrans(pDb->pBt) ){
@@ -117076,7 +117076,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){
   assert( db->init.busy );
   {
     char *zSql;
-    zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 
+    zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
         "SELECT name, rootpage, sql FROM \"%w\".%s ORDER BY rowid",
         db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, zMasterName);
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
@@ -117104,7 +117104,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){
   }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK || (db->flags&SQLITE_WriteSchema)){
     /* Black magic: If the SQLITE_WriteSchema flag is set, then consider
-    ** the schema loaded, even if errors occurred. In this situation the 
+    ** the schema loaded, even if errors occurred. In this situation the
     ** current sqlite3_prepare() operation will fail, but the following one
     ** will attempt to compile the supplied statement against whatever subset
     ** of the schema was loaded before the error occurred. The primary
@@ -117149,7 +117149,7 @@ error_out:
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Init(sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg){
   int i, rc;
   int commit_internal = !(db->mDbFlags&DBFLAG_SchemaChange);
-  
+
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
   assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[0].pBt) );
   assert( db->init.busy==0 );
@@ -117211,7 +117211,7 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){
     if( pBt==0 ) continue;
 
     /* If there is not already a read-only (or read-write) transaction opened
-    ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it 
+    ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
     ** will be closed immediately after reading the meta-value. */
     if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInReadTrans(pBt) ){
       rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, 0);
@@ -117222,7 +117222,7 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){
       openedTransaction = 1;
     }
 
-    /* Read the schema cookie from the database. If it does not match the 
+    /* Read the schema cookie from the database. If it does not match the
     ** value stored as part of the in-memory schema representation,
     ** set Parse.rc to SQLITE_SCHEMA. */
     sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(pBt, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, (u32 *)&cookie);
@@ -117249,13 +117249,13 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SchemaToIndex(sqlite3 *db, Schema *pSchema){
   int i = -1000000;
 
-  /* If pSchema is NULL, then return -1000000. This happens when code in 
+  /* If pSchema is NULL, then return -1000000. This happens when code in
   ** expr.c is trying to resolve a reference to a transient table (i.e. one
-  ** created by a sub-select). In this case the return value of this 
+  ** created by a sub-select). In this case the return value of this
   ** function should never be used.
   **
   ** We return -1000000 instead of the more usual -1 simply because using
-  ** -1000000 as the incorrect index into db->aDb[] is much 
+  ** -1000000 as the incorrect index into db->aDb[] is much
   ** more likely to cause a segfault than -1 (of course there are assert()
   ** statements too, but it never hurts to play the odds).
   */
@@ -117332,8 +117332,8 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare(
   ** This thread is currently holding mutexes on all Btrees (because
   ** of the sqlite3BtreeEnterAll() in sqlite3LockAndPrepare()) so it
   ** is not possible for another thread to start a new schema change
-  ** while this routine is running.  Hence, we do not need to hold 
-  ** locks on the schema, we just need to make sure nobody else is 
+  ** while this routine is running.  Hence, we do not need to hold
+  ** locks on the schema, we just need to make sure nobody else is
   ** holding them.
   **
   ** Note that setting READ_UNCOMMITTED overrides most lock detection,
@@ -117584,7 +117584,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare_v3(
 ** Compile the UTF-16 encoded SQL statement zSql into a statement handle.
 */
 static int sqlite3Prepare16(
-  sqlite3 *db,              /* Database handle. */ 
+  sqlite3 *db,              /* Database handle. */
   const void *zSql,         /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */
   int nBytes,               /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
   u32 prepFlags,            /* Zero or more SQLITE_PREPARE_* flags */
@@ -117627,7 +117627,7 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare16(
     int chars_parsed = sqlite3Utf8CharLen(zSql8, (int)(zTail8-zSql8));
     *pzTail = (u8 *)zSql + sqlite3Utf16ByteLen(zSql, chars_parsed);
   }
-  sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql8); 
+  sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql8);
   rc = sqlite3ApiExit(db, rc);
   sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex);
   return rc;
@@ -117642,7 +117642,7 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare16(
 ** occurs.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16(
-  sqlite3 *db,              /* Database handle. */ 
+  sqlite3 *db,              /* Database handle. */
   const void *zSql,         /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */
   int nBytes,               /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
   sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt,    /* OUT: A pointer to the prepared statement */
@@ -117654,7 +117654,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16(
   return rc;
 }
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16_v2(
-  sqlite3 *db,              /* Database handle. */ 
+  sqlite3 *db,              /* Database handle. */
   const void *zSql,         /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */
   int nBytes,               /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
   sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt,    /* OUT: A pointer to the prepared statement */
@@ -117666,7 +117666,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16_v2(
   return rc;
 }
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16_v3(
-  sqlite3 *db,              /* Database handle. */ 
+  sqlite3 *db,              /* Database handle. */
   const void *zSql,         /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */
   int nBytes,               /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
   unsigned int prepFlags,   /* Zero or more SQLITE_PREPARE_* flags */
@@ -117912,7 +117912,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JoinType(Parse *pParse, Token *pA, Token *pB, Token *p
   for(i=0; i<3 && apAll[i]; i++){
     p = apAll[i];
     for(j=0; j<ArraySize(aKeyword); j++){
-      if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar 
+      if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar
           && sqlite3StrNICmp((char*)p->z, &zKeyText[aKeyword[j].i], p->n)==0 ){
         jointype |= aKeyword[j].code;
         break;
@@ -117934,9 +117934,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JoinType(Parse *pParse, Token *pA, Token *pB, Token *p
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unknown or unsupported join type: "
        "%T %T%s%T", pA, pB, zSp, pC);
     jointype = JT_INNER;
-  }else if( (jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0 
+  }else if( (jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0
          && (jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT))!=JT_LEFT ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
       "RIGHT and FULL OUTER JOINs are not currently supported");
     jointype = JT_INNER;
   }
@@ -117957,7 +117957,7 @@ static int columnIndex(Table *pTab, const char *zCol){
 
 /*
 ** Search the first N tables in pSrc, from left to right, looking for a
-** table that has a column named zCol.  
+** table that has a column named zCol.
 **
 ** When found, set *piTab and *piCol to the table index and column index
 ** of the matching column and return TRUE.
@@ -117995,7 +117995,7 @@ static int tableAndColumnIndex(
 **
 **    (tab1.col1 = tab2.col2)
 **
-** where tab1 is the iSrc'th table in SrcList pSrc and tab2 is the 
+** where tab1 is the iSrc'th table in SrcList pSrc and tab2 is the
 ** (iSrc+1)'th. Column col1 is column iColLeft of tab1, and col2 is
 ** column iColRight of tab2.
 */
@@ -118072,7 +118072,7 @@ static void setJoinExpr(Expr *p, int iTable){
     }
     setJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable);
     p = p->pRight;
-  } 
+  }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -118145,7 +118145,7 @@ static int sqliteProcessJoin(Parse *pParse, Select *p){
     }
 
     /* Create extra terms on the WHERE clause for each column named
-    ** in the USING clause.  Example: If the two tables to be joined are 
+    ** in the USING clause.  Example: If the two tables to be joined are
     ** A and B and the USING clause names X, Y, and Z, then add this
     ** to the WHERE clause:    A.X=B.X AND A.Y=B.Y AND A.Z=B.Z
     ** Report an error if any column mentioned in the USING clause is
@@ -118240,7 +118240,7 @@ static void pushOntoSorter(
     pParse->nMem += pSort->nOBSat;
     nKey = nExpr - pSort->nOBSat + bSeq;
     if( bSeq ){
-      addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr); 
+      addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr);
     }else{
       addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SequenceTest, pSort->iECursor);
     }
@@ -118354,7 +118354,7 @@ static void codeDistinct(
 **
 ** If srcTab is negative, then the p->pEList expressions
 ** are evaluated in order to get the data for this row.  If srcTab is
-** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and p->pEList is used only 
+** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and p->pEList is used only
 ** to get the number of columns and the collation sequence for each column.
 */
 static void selectInnerLoop(
@@ -118431,8 +118431,8 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
     }
     if( pSort && hasDistinct==0 && eDest!=SRT_EphemTab && eDest!=SRT_Table ){
       /* For each expression in p->pEList that is a copy of an expression in
-      ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated 
-      ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY 
+      ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated
+      ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY
       ** expression within the sort-key that pushOntoSorter() will generate.
       ** This allows the p->pEList field to be omitted from the sorted record,
       ** saving space and CPU cycles.  */
@@ -118444,7 +118444,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
         }
       }
       regOrig = 0;
-      assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem 
+      assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem
            || eDest==SRT_Coroutine || eDest==SRT_Output );
     }
     nResultCol = sqlite3ExprCodeExprList(pParse,p->pEList,regResult,
@@ -118592,7 +118592,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
       }else{
         int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
         assert( sqlite3Strlen30(pDest->zAffSdst)==nResultCol );
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol, 
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol,
             r1, pDest->zAffSdst, nResultCol);
         sqlite3ExprCacheAffinityChange(pParse, regResult, nResultCol);
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, iParm, r1, regResult, nResultCol);
@@ -118610,7 +118610,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
     }
 
     /* If this is a scalar select that is part of an expression, then
-    ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of 
+    ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of
     ** memory cells and break out of the scan loop.
     */
     case SRT_Mem: {
@@ -118666,7 +118666,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
         /* If the destination is DistQueue, then cursor (iParm+1) is open
         ** on a second ephemeral index that holds all values every previously
         ** added to the queue. */
-        addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0, 
+        addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0,
                                         regResult, nResultCol);
         VdbeCoverage(v);
       }
@@ -118865,7 +118865,7 @@ static void explainTempTable(Parse *pParse, const char *zUsage){
 ** where iSub1 and iSub2 are the integers passed as the corresponding
 ** function parameters, and op is the text representation of the parameter
 ** of the same name. The parameter "op" must be one of TK_UNION, TK_EXCEPT,
-** TK_INTERSECT or TK_ALL. The first form is used if argument bUseTmp is 
+** TK_INTERSECT or TK_ALL. The first form is used if argument bUseTmp is
 ** false, or the second form if it is true.
 */
 static void explainComposite(
@@ -118991,7 +118991,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
     }
 #endif
     default: {
-      assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); 
+      assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
       testcase( eDest==SRT_Output );
       testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
       if( eDest==SRT_Output ){
@@ -119034,14 +119034,14 @@ static void generateSortTail(
 ** original CREATE TABLE statement if the expression is a column. The
 ** declaration type for a ROWID field is INTEGER. Exactly when an expression
 ** is considered a column can be complex in the presence of subqueries. The
-** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is 
+** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is
 ** considered a column by this function.
 **
 **   SELECT col FROM tbl;
 **   SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl;
 **   SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl);
 **   SELECT abc FROM (SELECT col AS abc FROM tbl);
-** 
+**
 ** The declaration type for any expression other than a column is NULL.
 **
 ** This routine has either 3 or 6 parameters depending on whether or not
@@ -119053,7 +119053,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
 # define columnType(A,B,C,D,E) columnTypeImpl(A,B)
 #endif
 static const char *columnTypeImpl(
-  NameContext *pNC, 
+  NameContext *pNC,
 #ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
   Expr *pExpr
 #else
@@ -119099,19 +119099,19 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
       if( pTab==0 ){
         /* At one time, code such as "SELECT new.x" within a trigger would
         ** cause this condition to run.  Since then, we have restructured how
-        ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer 
+        ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer
         ** possible. However, it can still be true for statements like
         ** the following:
         **
         **   CREATE TABLE t1(col INTEGER);
         **   SELECT (SELECT t1.col) FROM FROM t1;
         **
-        ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the 
+        ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the
         ** sub-select. In this case, set the column type to NULL, even
         ** though it should really be "INTEGER".
         **
         ** This is not a problem, as the column type of "t1.col" is never
-        ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression 
+        ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression
         ** "(SELECT t1.col)", the correct type is returned (see the TK_SELECT
         ** branch below.  */
         break;
@@ -119125,7 +119125,7 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
         */
         if( iCol>=0 && iCol<pS->pEList->nExpr ){
           /* If iCol is less than zero, then the expression requests the
-          ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see 
+          ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see
           ** test case misc2.2.2) - it always evaluates to NULL.
           */
           NameContext sNC;
@@ -119133,7 +119133,7 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
           sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
           sNC.pNext = pNC;
           sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
-          zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol); 
+          zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol);
         }
       }else{
         /* A real table or a CTE table */
@@ -119177,13 +119177,13 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
       sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
       sNC.pNext = pNC;
       sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
-      zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol); 
+      zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol);
       break;
     }
 #endif
   }
 
-#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA  
+#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
   if( pzOrigDb ){
     assert( pzOrigTab && pzOrigCol );
     *pzOrigDb = zOrigDb;
@@ -119219,7 +119219,7 @@ static void generateColumnTypes(
     const char *zOrigCol = 0;
     zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol);
 
-    /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other 
+    /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other
     ** column specific strings, in case the schema is reset before this
     ** virtual machine is deleted.
     */
@@ -119397,7 +119397,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(
         assert( pColExpr!=0 );
       }
       if( (pColExpr->op==TK_COLUMN || pColExpr->op==TK_AGG_COLUMN)
-       && pColExpr->pTab!=0 
+       && pColExpr->pTab!=0
       ){
         /* For columns use the column name name */
         int iCol = pColExpr->iColumn;
@@ -119453,7 +119453,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(
 /*
 ** Add type and collation information to a column list based on
 ** a SELECT statement.
-** 
+**
 ** The column list presumably came from selectColumnNamesFromExprList().
 ** The column list has only names, not types or collations.  This
 ** routine goes through and adds the types and collations.
@@ -119563,9 +119563,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Vdbe *sqlite3GetVdbe(Parse *pParse){
 ** Compute the iLimit and iOffset fields of the SELECT based on the
 ** pLimit and pOffset expressions.  pLimit and pOffset hold the expressions
 ** that appear in the original SQL statement after the LIMIT and OFFSET
-** keywords.  Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset 
-** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute 
-** the limit and offset.  If there is no limit and/or offset, then 
+** keywords.  Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset
+** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute
+** the limit and offset.  If there is no limit and/or offset, then
 ** iLimit and iOffset are negative.
 **
 ** This routine changes the values of iLimit and iOffset only if
@@ -119589,7 +119589,7 @@ static void computeLimitRegisters(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int iBreak){
   int n;
   if( p->iLimit ) return;
 
-  /* 
+  /*
   ** "LIMIT -1" always shows all rows.  There is some
   ** controversy about what the correct behavior should be.
   ** The current implementation interprets "LIMIT 0" to mean
@@ -119717,7 +119717,7 @@ static KeyInfo *multiSelectOrderByKeyInfo(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int nExtra){
 ** inserted into the Queue table.  The iDistinct table keeps a copy of all rows
 ** that have ever been inserted into Queue and causes duplicates to be
 ** discarded.  If the operator is UNION ALL, then duplicates are allowed.
-** 
+**
 ** If the query has an ORDER BY, then entries in the Queue table are kept in
 ** ORDER BY order and the first entry is extracted for each cycle.  Without
 ** an ORDER BY, the Queue table is just a FIFO.
@@ -119918,7 +119918,7 @@ static int multiSelectValues(
 **
 ** "p" points to the right-most of the two queries.  the query on the
 ** left is p->pPrior.  The left query could also be a compound query
-** in which case this routine will be called recursively. 
+** in which case this routine will be called recursively.
 **
 ** The results of the total query are to be written into a destination
 ** of type eDest with parameter iParm.
@@ -120046,7 +120046,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
       p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow);
       if( pPrior->pLimit
        && sqlite3ExprIsInteger(pPrior->pLimit, &nLimit)
-       && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit) 
+       && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit)
       ){
         p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit);
       }
@@ -120227,7 +120227,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
 
   explainComposite(pParse, p->op, iSub1, iSub2, p->op!=TK_ALL);
 
-  /* Compute collating sequences used by 
+  /* Compute collating sequences used by
   ** temporary tables needed to implement the compound select.
   ** Attach the KeyInfo structure to all temporary tables.
   **
@@ -120333,7 +120333,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
   addr = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
   iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
 
-  /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT 
+  /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT
   */
   if( regPrev ){
     int addr1, addr2;
@@ -120375,7 +120375,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
       int r1;
       testcase( pIn->nSdst>1 );
       r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
-      sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst, 
+      sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst,
           r1, pDest->zAffSdst, pIn->nSdst);
       sqlite3ExprCacheAffinityChange(pParse, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst);
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, pDest->iSDParm, r1,
@@ -120413,7 +120413,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
     ** SRT_Output.  This routine is never called with any other
     ** destination other than the ones handled above or SRT_Output.
     **
-    ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.  
+    ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.
     ** Then the OP_ResultRow opcode is used to cause sqlite3_step() to
     ** return the next row of result.
     */
@@ -120471,7 +120471,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
 **
 **    EofB:    Called when data is exhausted from selectB.
 **
-** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which 
+** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which
 ** <operator> is used:
 **
 **
@@ -120580,7 +120580,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
 
   /* Patch up the ORDER BY clause
   */
-  op = p->op;  
+  op = p->op;
   pPrior = p->pPrior;
   assert( pPrior->pOrderBy==0 );
   pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
@@ -120656,7 +120656,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
       }
     }
   }
- 
+
   /* Separate the left and the right query from one another
   */
   p->pPrior = 0;
@@ -120701,7 +120701,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   sqlite3VdbeEndCoroutine(v, regAddrA);
   sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1);
 
-  /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on 
+  /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on
   ** the right - the "B" select
   */
   addrSelectB = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 1;
@@ -120710,7 +120710,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   savedLimit = p->iLimit;
   savedOffset = p->iOffset;
   p->iLimit = regLimitB;
-  p->iOffset = 0;  
+  p->iOffset = 0;
   explainSetInteger(iSub2, pParse->iNextSelectId);
   sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &destB);
   p->iLimit = savedLimit;
@@ -120724,7 +120724,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   addrOutA = generateOutputSubroutine(pParse,
                  p, &destA, pDest, regOutA,
                  regPrev, pKeyDup, labelEnd);
-  
+
   /* Generate a subroutine that outputs the current row of the B
   ** select as the next output row of the compound select.
   */
@@ -120741,7 +120741,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   */
   if( op==TK_EXCEPT || op==TK_INTERSECT ){
     addrEofA_noB = addrEofA = labelEnd;
-  }else{  
+  }else{
     VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-A subroutine"));
     addrEofA = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutB, addrOutB);
     addrEofA_noB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrB, labelEnd);
@@ -120756,7 +120756,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   if( op==TK_INTERSECT ){
     addrEofB = addrEofA;
     if( p->nSelectRow > pPrior->nSelectRow ) p->nSelectRow = pPrior->nSelectRow;
-  }else{  
+  }else{
     VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-B subroutine"));
     addrEofB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutA, addrOutA);
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrA, labelEnd); VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -120851,13 +120851,13 @@ static void substSelect(SubstContext*, Select*, int);
 /*
 ** Scan through the expression pExpr.  Replace every reference to
 ** a column in table number iTable with a copy of the iColumn-th
-** entry in pEList.  (But leave references to the ROWID column 
+** entry in pEList.  (But leave references to the ROWID column
 ** unchanged.)
 **
 ** This routine is part of the flattening procedure.  A subquery
 ** whose result set is defined by pEList appears as entry in the
 ** FROM clause of a SELECT such that the VDBE cursor assigned to that
-** FORM clause entry is iTable.  This routine makes the necessary 
+** FORM clause entry is iTable.  This routine makes the necessary
 ** changes to pExpr so that it refers directly to the source table
 ** of the subquery rather the result set of the subquery.
 */
@@ -120977,7 +120977,7 @@ static void substSelect(
 **     SELECT x+y AS a FROM t1 WHERE z<100 AND a>5
 **
 ** The code generated for this simplification gives the same result
-** but only has to scan the data once.  And because indices might 
+** but only has to scan the data once.  And because indices might
 ** exist on the table t1, a complete scan of the data might be
 ** avoided.
 **
@@ -121003,7 +121003,7 @@ static void substSelect(
 **   (4)  The subquery can not be DISTINCT.
 **
 **  (**)  At one point restrictions (4) and (5) defined a subset of DISTINCT
-**        sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction 
+**        sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction
 **        (4) has since been expanded to exclude all DISTINCT subqueries.
 **
 **  (**)  We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries.  Was:
@@ -121020,7 +121020,7 @@ static void substSelect(
 **
 **  (**)  Restriction (10) was removed from the code on 2005-02-05 but we
 **        accidently carried the comment forward until 2014-09-15.  Original
-**        constraint: "If the subquery is aggregate then the outer query 
+**        constraint: "If the subquery is aggregate then the outer query
 **        may not use LIMIT."
 **
 **  (11)  The subquery and the outer query may not both have ORDER BY clauses.
@@ -121038,7 +121038,7 @@ static void substSelect(
 **
 **  (16)  If the outer query is aggregate, then the subquery may not
 **        use ORDER BY.  (Ticket #2942)  This used to not matter
-**        until we introduced the group_concat() function.  
+**        until we introduced the group_concat() function.
 **
 **  (17)  If the subquery is a compound select, then
 **        (17a) all compound operators must be a UNION ALL, and
@@ -121064,7 +121064,7 @@ static void substSelect(
 **        syntax error and return a detailed message.
 **
 **  (18)  If the sub-query is a compound select, then all terms of the
-**        ORDER BY clause of the parent must be simple references to 
+**        ORDER BY clause of the parent must be simple references to
 **        columns of the sub-query.
 **
 **  (19)  If the subquery uses LIMIT then the outer query may not
@@ -121089,7 +121089,7 @@ static void substSelect(
 **        recursive queries in multiSelect().
 **
 **  (**)  We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries.  Was:
-**        The subquery may not be an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or 
+**        The subquery may not be an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or
 **        or max() functions.  (Without this restriction, a query like:
 **        "SELECT x FROM (SELECT max(y), x FROM t1)" would not necessarily
 **        return the value X for which Y was maximal.)
@@ -121119,7 +121119,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
   SrcList *pSubSrc;   /* The FROM clause of the subquery */
   int iParent;        /* VDBE cursor number of the pSub result set temp table */
   int iNewParent = -1;/* Replacement table for iParent */
-  int isLeftJoin = 0; /* True if pSub is the right side of a LEFT JOIN */    
+  int isLeftJoin = 0; /* True if pSub is the right side of a LEFT JOIN */
   int i;              /* Loop counter */
   Expr *pWhere;                    /* The WHERE clause */
   struct SrcList_item *pSubitem;   /* The subquery */
@@ -121197,7 +121197,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
   else if( iFrom>0 && !isAgg ){
     /* Setting isLeftJoin to -1 causes OP_IfNullRow opcodes to be generated for
     ** every reference to any result column from subquery in a join, even
-    ** though they are not necessary.  This will stress-test the OP_IfNullRow 
+    ** though they are not necessary.  This will stress-test the OP_IfNullRow
     ** opcode. */
     isLeftJoin = -1;
   }
@@ -121263,13 +121263,13 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
   pParse->zAuthContext = zSavedAuthContext;
 
   /* If the sub-query is a compound SELECT statement, then (by restrictions
-  ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must 
+  ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must
   ** be of the form:
   **
-  **     SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause> 
+  **     SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause>
   **
   ** followed by any ORDER BY, LIMIT and/or OFFSET clauses. This block
-  ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or 
+  ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or
   ** OFFSET clauses and joins them to the left-hand-side of the original
   ** using UNION ALL operators. In this case N is the number of simple
   ** select statements in the compound sub-query.
@@ -121327,7 +121327,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
     if( db->mallocFailed ) return 1;
   }
 
-  /* Begin flattening the iFrom-th entry of the FROM clause 
+  /* Begin flattening the iFrom-th entry of the FROM clause
   ** in the outer query.
   */
   pSub = pSub1 = pSubitem->pSelect;
@@ -121427,10 +121427,10 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
       memset(&pSubSrc->a[i], 0, sizeof(pSubSrc->a[i]));
     }
     pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype = jointype;
-  
-    /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for 
+
+    /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for
     ** references to the iParent in the outer query.
-    ** 
+    **
     ** Example:
     **
     **   SELECT a+5, b*10 FROM (SELECT x*3 AS a, y+10 AS b FROM t1) WHERE a>b;
@@ -121474,12 +121474,12 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
       x.pEList = pSub->pEList;
       substSelect(&x, pParent, 0);
     }
-  
+
     /* The flattened query is distinct if either the inner or the
-    ** outer query is distinct. 
+    ** outer query is distinct.
     */
     pParent->selFlags |= pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct;
-  
+
     /*
     ** SELECT ... FROM (SELECT ... LIMIT a OFFSET b) LIMIT x OFFSET y;
     **
@@ -121567,7 +121567,7 @@ static int pushDownWhereTerms(
   ** in the future.
   */
   {
-    Select *pX;  
+    Select *pX;
     for(pX=pSubq; pX; pX=pX->pPrior){
       assert( (pX->selFlags & (SF_Recursive))==0 );
     }
@@ -121614,7 +121614,7 @@ static int pushDownWhereTerms(
 **    * the argument to the aggregate function is a column value.
 **
 ** If all of the above are true, then WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN or WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX
-** is returned as appropriate. Also, *ppMinMax is set to point to the 
+** is returned as appropriate. Also, *ppMinMax is set to point to the
 ** list of arguments passed to the aggregate before returning.
 **
 ** Or, if the conditions above are not met, *ppMinMax is set to 0 and
@@ -121647,7 +121647,7 @@ static u8 minMaxQuery(AggInfo *pAggInfo, ExprList **ppMinMax){
 
 /*
 ** The select statement passed as the first argument is an aggregate query.
-** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This 
+** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This
 ** function tests if the SELECT is of the form:
 **
 **   SELECT count(*) FROM <tbl>
@@ -121662,7 +121662,7 @@ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
 
   assert( !p->pGroupBy );
 
-  if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1 
+  if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1
    || p->pSrc->nSrc!=1 || p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect
   ){
     return 0;
@@ -121683,8 +121683,8 @@ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
 /*
 ** If the source-list item passed as an argument was augmented with an
 ** INDEXED BY clause, then try to locate the specified index. If there
-** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return 
-** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate 
+** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return
+** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate
 ** pFrom->pIndex and return SQLITE_OK.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pFrom){
@@ -121692,8 +121692,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pF
     Table *pTab = pFrom->pTab;
     char *zIndexedBy = pFrom->u1.zIndexedBy;
     Index *pIdx;
-    for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; 
-        pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy); 
+    for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex;
+        pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy);
         pIdx=pIdx->pNext
     );
     if( !pIdx ){
@@ -121706,7 +121706,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pF
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 /*
-** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with 
+** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with
 ** an alternative collating sequence.
 **
 **    SELECT ... FROM t1 EXCEPT SELECT ... FROM t2 ORDER BY .. COLLATE ...
@@ -121791,9 +121791,9 @@ static int cannotBeFunction(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pFrom){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
 /*
-** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested 
-** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by 
-** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE) 
+** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested
+** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by
+** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE)
 ** then return a pointer to the CTE definition for that table. Otherwise
 ** return NULL.
 **
@@ -121828,7 +121828,7 @@ static struct Cte *searchWith(
 ** onto the top of the stack. If argument bFree is true, then this
 ** WITH clause will never be popped from the stack. In this case it
 ** should be freed along with the Parse object. In other cases, when
-** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT 
+** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT
 ** statement with which it is associated.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
@@ -121842,7 +121842,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by 
+** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by
 ** a WITH clause on the stack currently maintained by the parser. And,
 ** if currently processing a CTE expression, if it is a recursive
 ** reference to the current CTE.
@@ -121857,7 +121857,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
 ** parser and some error code other than SQLITE_OK returned.
 */
 static int withExpand(
-  Walker *pWalker, 
+  Walker *pWalker,
   struct SrcList_item *pFrom
 ){
   Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse;
@@ -121906,8 +121906,8 @@ static int withExpand(
       SrcList *pSrc = pFrom->pSelect->pSrc;
       for(i=0; i<pSrc->nSrc; i++){
         struct SrcList_item *pItem = &pSrc->a[i];
-        if( pItem->zDatabase==0 
-         && pItem->zName!=0 
+        if( pItem->zDatabase==0
+         && pItem->zName!=0
          && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pItem->zName, pCte->zName)
           ){
           pItem->pTab = pTab;
@@ -121918,14 +121918,14 @@ static int withExpand(
       }
     }
 
-    /* Only one recursive reference is permitted. */ 
+    /* Only one recursive reference is permitted. */
     if( pTab->nTabRef>2 ){
       sqlite3ErrorMsg(
           pParse, "multiple references to recursive table: %s", pCte->zName
       );
       return SQLITE_ERROR;
     }
-    assert( pTab->nTabRef==1 || 
+    assert( pTab->nTabRef==1 ||
             ((pSel->selFlags&SF_Recursive) && pTab->nTabRef==2 ));
 
     pCte->zCteErr = "circular reference: %s";
@@ -121974,12 +121974,12 @@ static int withExpand(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
 /*
-** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH 
+** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH
 ** clause, pop it from the stack stored as part of the Parse object.
 **
 ** This function is used as the xSelectCallback2() callback by
 ** sqlite3SelectExpand() when walking a SELECT tree to resolve table
-** names and other FROM clause elements. 
+** names and other FROM clause elements.
 */
 static void selectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
   Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse;
@@ -122002,7 +122002,7 @@ static void selectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 **    (1)  Make sure VDBE cursor numbers have been assigned to every
 **         element of the FROM clause.
 **
-**    (2)  Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that 
+**    (2)  Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that
 **         defines FROM clause.  When views appear in the FROM clause,
 **         fill pTabList->a[].pSelect with a copy of the SELECT statement
 **         that implements the view.  A copy is made of the view's SELECT
@@ -122216,7 +122216,7 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
             ** bit set.
             */
             if( (p->selFlags & SF_IncludeHidden)==0
-             && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j]) 
+             && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j])
             ){
               continue;
             }
@@ -122226,7 +122226,7 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
               if( (pFrom->fg.jointype & JT_NATURAL)!=0
                 && tableAndColumnIndex(pTabList, i, zName, 0, 0)
               ){
-                /* In a NATURAL join, omit the join columns from the 
+                /* In a NATURAL join, omit the join columns from the
                 ** table to the right of the join */
                 continue;
               }
@@ -122296,8 +122296,8 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 **
 ** When this routine is the Walker.xExprCallback then expression trees
 ** are walked without any actions being taken at each node.  Presumably,
-** when this routine is used for Walker.xExprCallback then 
-** Walker.xSelectCallback is set to do something useful for every 
+** when this routine is used for Walker.xExprCallback then
+** Walker.xSelectCallback is set to do something useful for every
 ** subquery in the parser tree.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprWalkNoop(Walker *NotUsed, Expr *NotUsed2){
@@ -122559,7 +122559,7 @@ static void updateAccumulator(Parse *pParse, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
   }
 
   /* Before populating the accumulator registers, clear the column cache.
-  ** Otherwise, if any of the required column values are already present 
+  ** Otherwise, if any of the required column values are already present
   ** in registers, sqlite3ExprCode() may use OP_SCopy to copy the value
   ** to pC->iMem. But by the time the value is used, the original register
   ** may have been used, invalidating the underlying buffer holding the
@@ -122619,10 +122619,10 @@ struct HavingToWhereCtx {
 /*
 ** sqlite3WalkExpr() callback used by havingToWhere().
 **
-** If the node passed to the callback is a TK_AND node, return 
+** If the node passed to the callback is a TK_AND node, return
 ** WRC_Continue to tell sqlite3WalkExpr() to iterate through child nodes.
 **
-** Otherwise, return WRC_Prune. In this case, also check if the 
+** Otherwise, return WRC_Prune. In this case, also check if the
 ** sub-expression matches the criteria for being moved to the WHERE
 ** clause. If so, add it to the WHERE clause and replace the sub-expression
 ** within the HAVING expression with a constant "1".
@@ -122663,7 +122663,7 @@ static int havingToWhereExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 static void havingToWhere(
   Parse *pParse,
   ExprList *pGroupBy,
-  Expr *pHaving, 
+  Expr *pHaving,
   Expr **ppWhere
 ){
   struct HavingToWhereCtx sCtx;
@@ -122695,8 +122695,8 @@ static struct SrcList_item *isSelfJoinView(
     if( pItem->zName==0 ) continue;
     if( sqlite3_stricmp(pItem->zDatabase, pThis->zDatabase)!=0 ) continue;
     if( sqlite3_stricmp(pItem->zName, pThis->zName)!=0 ) continue;
-    if( sqlite3ExprCompare(0, 
-          pThis->pSelect->pWhere, pItem->pSelect->pWhere, -1) 
+    if( sqlite3ExprCompare(0,
+          pThis->pSelect->pWhere, pItem->pSelect->pWhere, -1)
     ){
       /* The view was modified by some other optimization such as
       ** pushDownWhereTerms() */
@@ -122790,7 +122790,7 @@ static int countOfViewOptimization(Parse *pParse, Select *p){
 #endif /* SQLITE_COUNTOFVIEW_OPTIMIZATION */
 
 /*
-** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.  
+** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.
 **
 ** The results are returned according to the SelectDest structure.
 ** See comments in sqliteInt.h for further information.
@@ -122847,7 +122847,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
   assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistQueue );
   assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Queue );
   if( IgnorableOrderby(pDest) ){
-    assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union || 
+    assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union ||
            pDest->eDest==SRT_Except || pDest->eDest==SRT_Discard ||
            pDest->eDest==SRT_Queue  || pDest->eDest==SRT_DistFifo ||
            pDest->eDest==SRT_DistQueue || pDest->eDest==SRT_Fifo);
@@ -123051,7 +123051,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
       ** set on each invocation.
       */
       int addrTop = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1;
-     
+
       pItem->regReturn = ++pParse->nMem;
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_InitCoroutine, pItem->regReturn, 0, addrTop);
       VdbeComment((v, "%s", pItem->pTab->zName));
@@ -123138,7 +123138,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and 
+  /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and
   ** if the select-list is the same as the ORDER BY list, then this query
   ** can be rewritten as a GROUP BY. In other words, this:
   **
@@ -123148,12 +123148,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
   **
   **     SELECT xyz FROM ... GROUP BY xyz ORDER BY xyz
   **
-  ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be 
-  ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally 
-  ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER 
+  ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be
+  ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally
+  ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER
   ** BY and DISTINCT, and an index or separate temp-table for the other.
   */
-  if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct 
+  if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct
    && sqlite3ExprListCompare(sSort.pOrderBy, pEList, -1)==0
   ){
     p->selFlags &= ~SF_Distinct;
@@ -123248,7 +123248,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
       }
     }
 
-    /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral 
+    /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral
     ** instruction ended up not being needed, then change the OP_OpenEphemeral
     ** into an OP_Noop.
     */
@@ -123302,8 +123302,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
     }
 
     /* If there is both a GROUP BY and an ORDER BY clause and they are
-    ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause 
-    ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out 
+    ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause
+    ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out
     ** in the correct order. It also may not - the GROUP BY might use a
     ** database index that causes rows to be grouped together as required
     ** but not actually sorted. Either way, record the fact that the
@@ -123312,7 +123312,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
     if( sqlite3ExprListCompare(pGroupBy, sSort.pOrderBy, -1)==0 ){
       orderByGrp = 1;
     }
- 
+
     /* Create a label to jump to when we want to abort the query */
     addrEnd = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
 
@@ -123364,12 +123364,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
       /* If there is a GROUP BY clause we might need a sorting index to
       ** implement it.  Allocate that sorting index now.  If it turns out
       ** that we do not need it after all, the OP_SorterOpen instruction
-      ** will be converted into a Noop.  
+      ** will be converted into a Noop.
       */
       sAggInfo.sortingIdx = pParse->nTab++;
       pKeyInfo = keyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pGroupBy, 0, sAggInfo.nColumn);
-      addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen, 
-          sAggInfo.sortingIdx, sAggInfo.nSortingColumn, 
+      addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen,
+          sAggInfo.sortingIdx, sAggInfo.nSortingColumn,
           0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO);
 
       /* Initialize memory locations used by GROUP BY aggregate processing
@@ -123417,7 +123417,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
         int nCol;
         int nGroupBy;
 
-        explainTempTable(pParse, 
+        explainTempTable(pParse,
             (sDistinct.isTnct && (p->selFlags&SF_Distinct)==0) ?
                     "DISTINCT" : "GROUP BY");
 
@@ -123439,7 +123439,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
           struct AggInfo_col *pCol = &sAggInfo.aCol[i];
           if( pCol->iSorterColumn>=j ){
             int r1 = j + regBase;
-            sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnToReg(pParse, 
+            sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnToReg(pParse,
                                pCol->pTab, pCol->iColumn, pCol->iTable, r1);
             j++;
           }
@@ -123465,9 +123465,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
       ** clause, cancel the ephemeral table open coded earlier.
       **
       ** This is an optimization - the correct answer should result regardless.
-      ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to 
+      ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to
       ** disable this optimization for testing purposes.  */
-      if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder) 
+      if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder)
        && (groupBySort || sqlite3WhereIsSorted(pWInfo))
       ){
         sSort.pOrderBy = 0;
@@ -123572,7 +123572,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
       sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrReset);
       resetAccumulator(pParse, &sAggInfo);
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Return, regReset);
-     
+
     } /* endif pGroupBy.  Begin aggregate queries without GROUP BY: */
     else {
       ExprList *pDel = 0;
@@ -123608,7 +123608,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
         **
         ** (2013-10-03) Do not count the entries in a partial index.
         **
-        ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only 
+        ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only
         ** passed to keep OP_OpenRead happy.
         */
         if( !HasRowid(pTab) ) pBest = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab);
@@ -123643,11 +123643,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
         **   SELECT max(x) FROM ...
         **
         ** If it is, then ask the code in where.c to attempt to sort results
-        ** as if there was an "ORDER ON x" or "ORDER ON x DESC" clause. 
+        ** as if there was an "ORDER ON x" or "ORDER ON x DESC" clause.
         ** If where.c is able to produce results sorted in this order, then
-        ** add vdbe code to break out of the processing loop after the 
-        ** first iteration (since the first iteration of the loop is 
-        ** guaranteed to operate on the row with the minimum or maximum 
+        ** add vdbe code to break out of the processing loop after the
+        ** first iteration (since the first iteration of the loop is
+        ** guaranteed to operate on the row with the minimum or maximum
         ** value of x, the only row required).
         **
         ** A special flag must be passed to sqlite3WhereBegin() to slightly
@@ -123658,13 +123658,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
         **     for x.
         **
         **   + The optimizer code in where.c (the thing that decides which
-        **     index or indices to use) should place a different priority on 
+        **     index or indices to use) should place a different priority on
         **     satisfying the 'ORDER BY' clause than it does in other cases.
         **     Refer to code and comments in where.c for details.
         */
         ExprList *pMinMax = 0;
         u8 flag = WHERE_ORDERBY_NORMAL;
-        
+
         assert( p->pGroupBy==0 );
         assert( flag==0 );
         if( p->pHaving==0 ){
@@ -123681,7 +123681,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
             pMinMax->a[0].pExpr->op = TK_COLUMN;
           }
         }
-  
+
         /* This case runs if the aggregate has no GROUP BY clause.  The
         ** processing is much simpler since there is only a single row
         ** of output.
@@ -123705,12 +123705,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
 
       sSort.pOrderBy = 0;
       sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pHaving, addrEnd, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
-      selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, -1, 0, 0, 
+      selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, -1, 0, 0,
                       pDest, addrEnd, addrEnd);
       sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pDel);
     }
     sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrEnd);
-    
+
   } /* endif aggregate query */
 
   if( sDistinct.eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_UNORDERED ){
@@ -123862,7 +123862,7 @@ malloc_failed:
 ** at the conclusion of the call.
 **
 ** The result that is written to ***pazResult is held in memory obtained
-** from malloc().  But the caller cannot free this memory directly.  
+** from malloc().  But the caller cannot free this memory directly.
 ** Instead, the entire table should be passed to sqlite3_free_table() when
 ** the calling procedure is finished using it.
 */
@@ -123985,7 +123985,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTriggerStep(sqlite3 *db, TriggerStep *pTriggerS
 }
 
 /*
-** Given table pTab, return a list of all the triggers attached to 
+** Given table pTab, return a list of all the triggers attached to
 ** the table. The list is connected by Trigger.pNext pointers.
 **
 ** All of the triggers on pTab that are in the same database as pTab
@@ -124012,7 +124012,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Trigger *sqlite3TriggerList(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
     for(p=sqliteHashFirst(&pTmpSchema->trigHash); p; p=sqliteHashNext(p)){
       Trigger *pTrig = (Trigger *)sqliteHashData(p);
       if( pTrig->pTabSchema==pTab->pSchema
-       && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pTrig->table, pTab->zName) 
+       && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pTrig->table, pTab->zName)
       ){
         pTrig->pNext = (pList ? pList : pTab->pTrigger);
         pList = pTrig;
@@ -124153,7 +124153,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BeginTrigger(
   ** of triggers.
   */
   if( pTab->pSelect && tr_tm!=TK_INSTEAD ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create %s trigger on view: %S", 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create %s trigger on view: %S",
         (tr_tm == TK_BEFORE)?"BEFORE":"AFTER", pTableName, 0);
     goto trigger_cleanup;
   }
@@ -124242,8 +124242,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishTrigger(
   }
   sqlite3TokenInit(&nameToken, pTrig->zName);
   sqlite3FixInit(&sFix, pParse, iDb, "trigger", &nameToken);
-  if( sqlite3FixTriggerStep(&sFix, pTrig->step_list) 
-   || sqlite3FixExpr(&sFix, pTrig->pWhen) 
+  if( sqlite3FixTriggerStep(&sFix, pTrig->step_list)
+   || sqlite3FixExpr(&sFix, pTrig->pWhen)
   ){
     goto triggerfinish_cleanup;
   }
@@ -124298,7 +124298,7 @@ triggerfinish_cleanup:
 ** a trigger step.  Return a pointer to a TriggerStep structure.
 **
 ** The parser calls this routine when it finds a SELECT statement in
-** body of a TRIGGER.  
+** body of a TRIGGER.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE TriggerStep *sqlite3TriggerSelectStep(sqlite3 *db, Select *pSelect){
   TriggerStep *pTriggerStep = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(TriggerStep));
@@ -124413,7 +124413,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE TriggerStep *sqlite3TriggerDeleteStep(
   return pTriggerStep;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Recursively delete a Trigger structure
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTrigger(sqlite3 *db, Trigger *pTrigger){
@@ -124427,7 +124427,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTrigger(sqlite3 *db, Trigger *pTrigger){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called to drop a trigger from the database schema. 
+** This function is called to drop a trigger from the database schema.
 **
 ** This may be called directly from the parser and therefore identifies
 ** the trigger by name.  The sqlite3DropTriggerPtr() routine does the
@@ -124482,7 +124482,7 @@ static Table *tableOfTrigger(Trigger *pTrigger){
 
 
 /*
-** Drop a trigger given a pointer to that trigger. 
+** Drop a trigger given a pointer to that trigger.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(Parse *pParse, Trigger *pTrigger){
   Table   *pTable;
@@ -124558,12 +124558,12 @@ static int checkColumnOverlap(IdList *pIdList, ExprList *pEList){
   for(e=0; e<pEList->nExpr; e++){
     if( sqlite3IdListIndex(pIdList, pEList->a[e].zName)>=0 ) return 1;
   }
-  return 0; 
+  return 0;
 }
 
 /*
 ** Return a list of all triggers on table pTab if there exists at least
-** one trigger that must be fired when an operation of type 'op' is 
+** one trigger that must be fired when an operation of type 'op' is
 ** performed on the table, and, if that operation is an UPDATE, if at
 ** least one of the columns in pChanges is being modified.
 */
@@ -124627,13 +124627,13 @@ static SrcList *targetSrcList(
 }
 
 /*
-** Generate VDBE code for the statements inside the body of a single 
+** Generate VDBE code for the statements inside the body of a single
 ** trigger.
 */
 static int codeTriggerProgram(
   Parse *pParse,            /* The parser context */
   TriggerStep *pStepList,   /* List of statements inside the trigger body */
-  int orconf                /* Conflict algorithm. (OE_Abort, etc) */  
+  int orconf                /* Conflict algorithm. (OE_Abort, etc) */
 ){
   TriggerStep *pStep;
   Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe;
@@ -124661,25 +124661,25 @@ static int codeTriggerProgram(
 
     switch( pStep->op ){
       case TK_UPDATE: {
-        sqlite3Update(pParse, 
+        sqlite3Update(pParse,
           targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
-          sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0), 
-          sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0), 
+          sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0),
+          sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0),
           pParse->eOrconf
         );
         break;
       }
       case TK_INSERT: {
-        sqlite3Insert(pParse, 
+        sqlite3Insert(pParse,
           targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
-          sqlite3SelectDup(db, pStep->pSelect, 0), 
-          sqlite3IdListDup(db, pStep->pIdList), 
+          sqlite3SelectDup(db, pStep->pSelect, 0),
+          sqlite3IdListDup(db, pStep->pIdList),
           pParse->eOrconf
         );
         break;
       }
       case TK_DELETE: {
-        sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse, 
+        sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse,
           targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
           sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0)
         );
@@ -124693,7 +124693,7 @@ static int codeTriggerProgram(
         sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect);
         break;
       }
-    } 
+    }
     if( pStep->op!=TK_SELECT ){
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_ResetCount);
     }
@@ -124738,7 +124738,7 @@ static void transferParseError(Parse *pTo, Parse *pFrom){
 }
 
 /*
-** Create and populate a new TriggerPrg object with a sub-program 
+** Create and populate a new TriggerPrg object with a sub-program
 ** implementing trigger pTrigger with ON CONFLICT policy orconf.
 */
 static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
@@ -124761,7 +124761,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
   assert( pTop->pVdbe );
 
   /* Allocate the TriggerPrg and SubProgram objects. To ensure that they
-  ** are freed if an error occurs, link them into the Parse.pTriggerPrg 
+  ** are freed if an error occurs, link them into the Parse.pTriggerPrg
   ** list of the top-level Parse object sooner rather than later.  */
   pPrg = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(TriggerPrg));
   if( !pPrg ) return 0;
@@ -124775,7 +124775,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
   pPrg->aColmask[0] = 0xffffffff;
   pPrg->aColmask[1] = 0xffffffff;
 
-  /* Allocate and populate a new Parse context to use for coding the 
+  /* Allocate and populate a new Parse context to use for coding the
   ** trigger sub-program.  */
   pSubParse = sqlite3StackAllocZero(db, sizeof(Parse));
   if( !pSubParse ) return 0;
@@ -124790,7 +124790,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
 
   v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pSubParse);
   if( v ){
-    VdbeComment((v, "Start: %s.%s (%s %s%s%s ON %s)", 
+    VdbeComment((v, "Start: %s.%s (%s %s%s%s ON %s)",
       pTrigger->zName, onErrorText(orconf),
       (pTrigger->tr_tm==TRIGGER_BEFORE ? "BEFORE" : "AFTER"),
         (pTrigger->op==TK_UPDATE ? "UPDATE" : ""),
@@ -124799,18 +124799,18 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
       pTab->zName
     ));
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
-    sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, 
+    sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1,
       sqlite3MPrintf(db, "-- TRIGGER %s", pTrigger->zName), P4_DYNAMIC
     );
 #endif
 
     /* If one was specified, code the WHEN clause. If it evaluates to false
-    ** (or NULL) the sub-vdbe is immediately halted by jumping to the 
+    ** (or NULL) the sub-vdbe is immediately halted by jumping to the
     ** OP_Halt inserted at the end of the program.  */
     if( pTrigger->pWhen ){
       pWhen = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pTrigger->pWhen, 0);
-      if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, pWhen) 
-       && db->mallocFailed==0 
+      if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, pWhen)
+       && db->mallocFailed==0
       ){
         iEndTrigger = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
         sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pSubParse, pWhen, iEndTrigger, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
@@ -124847,7 +124847,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
 
   return pPrg;
 }
-    
+
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to a TriggerPrg object containing the sub-program for
 ** trigger pTrigger with default ON CONFLICT algorithm orconf. If no such
@@ -124869,8 +124869,8 @@ static TriggerPrg *getRowTrigger(
   ** process of being coded). If this is the case, then an entry with
   ** a matching TriggerPrg.pTrigger field will be present somewhere
   ** in the Parse.pTriggerPrg list. Search for such an entry.  */
-  for(pPrg=pRoot->pTriggerPrg; 
-      pPrg && (pPrg->pTrigger!=pTrigger || pPrg->orconf!=orconf); 
+  for(pPrg=pRoot->pTriggerPrg;
+      pPrg && (pPrg->pTrigger!=pTrigger || pPrg->orconf!=orconf);
       pPrg=pPrg->pNext
   );
 
@@ -124883,7 +124883,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *getRowTrigger(
 }
 
 /*
-** Generate code for the trigger program associated with trigger p on 
+** Generate code for the trigger program associated with trigger p on
 ** table pTab. The reg, orconf and ignoreJump parameters passed to this
 ** function are the same as those described in the header function for
 ** sqlite3CodeRowTrigger()
@@ -124901,7 +124901,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(
   pPrg = getRowTrigger(pParse, p, pTab, orconf);
   assert( pPrg || pParse->nErr || pParse->db->mallocFailed );
 
-  /* Code the OP_Program opcode in the parent VDBE. P4 of the OP_Program 
+  /* Code the OP_Program opcode in the parent VDBE. P4 of the OP_Program
   ** is a pointer to the sub-vdbe containing the trigger program.  */
   if( pPrg ){
     int bRecursive = (p->zName && 0==(pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_RecTriggers));
@@ -124930,7 +124930,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(
 ** If there are no triggers that fire at the specified time for the specified
 ** operation on pTab, this function is a no-op.
 **
-** The reg argument is the address of the first in an array of registers 
+** The reg argument is the address of the first in an array of registers
 ** that contain the values substituted for the new.* and old.* references
 ** in the trigger program. If N is the number of columns in table pTab
 ** (a copy of pTab->nCol), then registers are populated as follows:
@@ -124947,12 +124947,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(
 **   reg+N+N+1      NEW.* value of right-most column of pTab
 **
 ** For ON DELETE triggers, the registers containing the NEW.* values will
-** never be accessed by the trigger program, so they are not allocated or 
-** populated by the caller (there is no data to populate them with anyway). 
+** never be accessed by the trigger program, so they are not allocated or
+** populated by the caller (there is no data to populate them with anyway).
 ** Similarly, for ON INSERT triggers the values stored in the OLD.* registers
 ** are never accessed, and so are not allocated by the caller. So, for an
 ** ON INSERT trigger, the value passed to this function as parameter reg
-** is not a readable register, although registers (reg+N) through 
+** is not a readable register, although registers (reg+N) through
 ** (reg+N+N+1) are.
 **
 ** Parameter orconf is the default conflict resolution algorithm for the
@@ -124984,12 +124984,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(
     ** or else it must be a TEMP trigger. */
     assert( p->pSchema!=0 );
     assert( p->pTabSchema!=0 );
-    assert( p->pSchema==p->pTabSchema 
+    assert( p->pSchema==p->pTabSchema
          || p->pSchema==pParse->db->aDb[1].pSchema );
 
     /* Determine whether we should code this trigger */
-    if( p->op==op 
-     && p->tr_tm==tr_tm 
+    if( p->op==op
+     && p->tr_tm==tr_tm
      && checkColumnOverlap(p->pColumns, pChanges)
     ){
       sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(pParse, p, pTab, reg, orconf, ignoreJump);
@@ -124998,9 +124998,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(
 }
 
 /*
-** Triggers may access values stored in the old.* or new.* pseudo-table. 
-** This function returns a 32-bit bitmask indicating which columns of the 
-** old.* or new.* tables actually are used by triggers. This information 
+** Triggers may access values stored in the old.* or new.* pseudo-table.
+** This function returns a 32-bit bitmask indicating which columns of the
+** old.* or new.* tables actually are used by triggers. This information
 ** may be used by the caller, for example, to avoid having to load the entire
 ** old.* record into memory when executing an UPDATE or DELETE command.
 **
@@ -125010,7 +125010,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(
 ** are more than 32 columns in the table, and at least one of the columns
 ** with an index greater than 32 may be accessed, 0xffffffff is returned.
 **
-** It is not possible to determine if the old.rowid or new.rowid column is 
+** It is not possible to determine if the old.rowid or new.rowid column is
 ** accessed by triggers. The caller must always assume that it is.
 **
 ** Parameter isNew must be either 1 or 0. If it is 0, then the mask returned
@@ -125087,10 +125087,10 @@ static void updateVirtualTable(
 
 /*
 ** The most recently coded instruction was an OP_Column to retrieve the
-** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the 
+** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the
 ** OP_Column to the default value, if any.
 **
-** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the 
+** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the
 ** column definition. This was either supplied by the user when the table
 ** was created, or added later to the table definition by an ALTER TABLE
 ** command. If the latter, then the row-records in the table btree on disk
@@ -125099,9 +125099,9 @@ static void updateVirtualTable(
 ** If the former, then all row-records are guaranteed to include a value
 ** for the column and the P4 value is not required.
 **
-** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have 
+** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have
 ** literal default values specified: a number, null or a string. (If a more
-** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated 
+** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated
 ** when the ALTER TABLE is executed and one of the literal values written
 ** into the sqlite_master table.)
 **
@@ -125111,8 +125111,8 @@ static void updateVirtualTable(
 ** sqlite3_value objects.
 **
 ** If parameter iReg is not negative, code an OP_RealAffinity instruction
-** on register iReg. This is used when an equivalent integer value is 
-** stored in place of an 8-byte floating point value in order to save 
+** on register iReg. This is used when an equivalent integer value is
+** stored in place of an 8-byte floating point value in order to save
 ** space.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ColumnDefault(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int i, int iReg){
@@ -125123,7 +125123,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ColumnDefault(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int i, int iReg){
     Column *pCol = &pTab->aCol[i];
     VdbeComment((v, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pCol->zName));
     assert( i<pTab->nCol );
-    sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), pCol->pDflt, enc, 
+    sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), pCol->pDflt, enc,
                          pCol->affinity, &pValue);
     if( pValue ){
       sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, pValue, P4_MEM);
@@ -125210,7 +125210,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
   }
   assert( pTabList->nSrc==1 );
 
-  /* Locate the table which we want to update. 
+  /* Locate the table which we want to update.
   */
   pTab = sqlite3SrcListLookup(pParse, pTabList);
   if( pTab==0 ) goto update_cleanup;
@@ -125256,7 +125256,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
     pParse->nTab++;
   }
 
-  /* Allocate space for aXRef[], aRegIdx[], and aToOpen[].  
+  /* Allocate space for aXRef[], aRegIdx[], and aToOpen[].
   ** Initialize aXRef[] and aToOpen[] to their default values.
   */
   aXRef = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(int) * (pTab->nCol+nIdx) + nIdx+2 );
@@ -125325,7 +125325,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
   assert( chngPk==0 || chngPk==1 );
   chngKey = chngRowid + chngPk;
 
-  /* The SET expressions are not actually used inside the WHERE loop.  
+  /* The SET expressions are not actually used inside the WHERE loop.
   ** So reset the colUsed mask. Unless this is a virtual table. In that
   ** case, set all bits of the colUsed mask (to ensure that the virtual
   ** table implementation makes all columns available).
@@ -125353,7 +125353,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
           reg = ++pParse->nMem;
           pParse->nMem += pIdx->nColumn;
           if( (onError==OE_Replace)
-           || (onError==OE_Default && pIdx->onError==OE_Replace) 
+           || (onError==OE_Default && pIdx->onError==OE_Replace)
           ){
             bReplace = 1;
           }
@@ -125365,7 +125365,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
     aRegIdx[j] = reg;
   }
   if( bReplace ){
-    /* If REPLACE conflict resolution might be invoked, open cursors on all 
+    /* If REPLACE conflict resolution might be invoked, open cursors on all
     ** indexes in case they are needed to delete records.  */
     memset(aToOpen, 1, nIdx+1);
   }
@@ -125442,7 +125442,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
     sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk);
   }
 
-  /* Begin the database scan. 
+  /* Begin the database scan.
   **
   ** Do not consider a single-pass strategy for a multi-row update if
   ** there are any triggers or foreign keys to process, or rows may
@@ -125474,7 +125474,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
     }
     assert( iCur!=iDataCur || !HasRowid(pTab) );
   }
-  
+
   if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
     /* Read the rowid of the current row of the WHERE scan. In ONEPASS_OFF
     ** mode, write the rowid into the FIFO. In either of the one-pass modes,
@@ -125487,7 +125487,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
     /* Read the PK of the current row into an array of registers. In
     ** ONEPASS_OFF mode, serialize the array into a record and store it in
     ** the ephemeral table. Or, in ONEPASS_SINGLE or MULTI mode, change
-    ** the OP_OpenEphemeral instruction to a Noop (the ephemeral table 
+    ** the OP_OpenEphemeral instruction to a Noop (the ephemeral table
     ** is not required) and leave the PK fields in the array of registers.  */
     for(i=0; i<nPk; i++){
       assert( pPk->aiColumn[i]>=0 );
@@ -125569,7 +125569,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
   ** information is needed */
   if( chngPk || hasFK || pTrigger ){
     u32 oldmask = (hasFK ? sqlite3FkOldmask(pParse, pTab) : 0);
-    oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse, 
+    oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse,
         pTrigger, pChanges, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE|TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, onError
     );
     for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){
@@ -125596,8 +125596,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
   ** If there are one or more BEFORE triggers, then do not populate the
   ** registers associated with columns that are (a) not modified by
   ** this UPDATE statement and (b) not accessed by new.* references. The
-  ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from 
-  ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger 
+  ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from
+  ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger
   ** may have modified them). So not loading those that are not going to
   ** be used eliminates some redundant opcodes.
   */
@@ -125612,7 +125612,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
       if( j>=0 ){
         sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pChanges->a[j].pExpr, regNew+i);
       }else if( 0==(tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE) || i>31 || (newmask & MASKBIT32(i)) ){
-        /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed 
+        /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed
         ** into a register. This is done if there are no BEFORE triggers, or
         ** if there are one or more BEFORE triggers that use this value via
         ** a new.* reference in a trigger program.
@@ -125631,11 +125631,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
   */
   if( tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE ){
     sqlite3TableAffinity(v, pTab, regNew);
-    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges, 
+    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
         TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, labelContinue);
 
     /* The row-trigger may have deleted the row being updated. In this
-    ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are 
+    ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are
     ** required. This behavior - what happens when the row being updated
     ** is deleted or renamed by a BEFORE trigger - is left undefined in the
     ** documentation.
@@ -125648,9 +125648,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
       VdbeCoverage(v);
     }
 
-    /* If it did not delete it, the row-trigger may still have modified 
-    ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for 
-    ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their 
+    /* If it did not delete it, the row-trigger may still have modified
+    ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for
+    ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their
     ** registers in case this has happened.
     */
     for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){
@@ -125689,7 +125689,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
     ** to process, delete the old record. Otherwise, add a noop OP_Delete
     ** to invoke the pre-update hook.
     **
-    ** That (regNew==regnewRowid+1) is true is also important for the 
+    ** That (regNew==regnewRowid+1) is true is also important for the
     ** pre-update hook. If the caller invokes preupdate_new(), the returned
     ** value is copied from memory cell (regNewRowid+1+iCol), where iCol
     ** is the column index supplied by the user.
@@ -125719,29 +125719,29 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
     if( hasFK ){
       sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, 0, regNewRowid, aXRef, chngKey);
     }
-  
+
     /* Insert the new index entries and the new record. */
     sqlite3CompleteInsertion(
-        pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, regNewRowid, aRegIdx, 
-        OPFLAG_ISUPDATE | (eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ? OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION : 0), 
+        pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, regNewRowid, aRegIdx,
+        OPFLAG_ISUPDATE | (eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ? OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION : 0),
         0, 0
     );
 
     /* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to
     ** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key
-    ** to the row just updated. */ 
+    ** to the row just updated. */
     if( hasFK ){
       sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, pChanges, regOldRowid, aXRef, chngKey);
     }
   }
 
-  /* Increment the row counter 
+  /* Increment the row counter
   */
   if( (db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows) && !pParse->pTriggerTab){
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, regRowCount, 1);
   }
 
-  sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges, 
+  sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
       TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, labelContinue);
 
   /* Repeat the above with the next record to be updated, until
@@ -125769,7 +125769,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
   }
 
   /*
-  ** Return the number of rows that were changed. If this routine is 
+  ** Return the number of rows that were changed. If this routine is
   ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
   ** invoke the callback function.
   */
@@ -125801,8 +125801,8 @@ update_cleanup:
 /*
 ** Generate code for an UPDATE of a virtual table.
 **
-** There are two possible strategies - the default and the special 
-** "onepass" strategy. Onepass is only used if the virtual table 
+** There are two possible strategies - the default and the special
+** "onepass" strategy. Onepass is only used if the virtual table
 ** implementation indicates that pWhere may match at most one row.
 **
 ** The default strategy is to create an ephemeral table that contains
@@ -125911,7 +125911,7 @@ static void updateVirtualTable(
     /* Begin scannning through the ephemeral table. */
     addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Rewind, ephemTab); VdbeCoverage(v);
 
-    /* Extract arguments from the current row of the ephemeral table and 
+    /* Extract arguments from the current row of the ephemeral table and
     ** invoke the VUpdate method.  */
     for(i=0; i<nArg; i++){
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, ephemTab, i, regArg+i);
@@ -126088,7 +126088,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RunVacuum(char **pzErrMsg, sqlite3 *db, int iDb){
     return SQLITE_ERROR;
   }
 
-  /* Save the current value of the database flags so that it can be 
+  /* Save the current value of the database flags so that it can be
   ** restored before returning. Then set the writable-schema flag, and
   ** disable CHECK and foreign key constraints.  */
   saved_flags = db->flags;
@@ -126226,7 +126226,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RunVacuum(char **pzErrMsg, sqlite3 *db, int iDb){
   );
   if( rc ) goto end_of_vacuum;
 
-  /* At this point, there is a write transaction open on both the 
+  /* At this point, there is a write transaction open on both the
   ** vacuum database and the main database. Assuming no error occurs,
   ** both transactions are closed by this block - the main database
   ** transaction by sqlite3BtreeCopyFile() and the other by an explicit
@@ -126300,7 +126300,7 @@ end_of_vacuum:
   }
 
   /* This both clears the schemas and reduces the size of the db->aDb[]
-  ** array. */ 
+  ** array. */
   sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db);
 
   return rc;
@@ -126329,7 +126329,7 @@ end_of_vacuum:
 /*
 ** Before a virtual table xCreate() or xConnect() method is invoked, the
 ** sqlite3.pVtabCtx member variable is set to point to an instance of
-** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of 
+** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of
 ** the sqlite3_declare_vtab() and sqlite3_vtab_config() APIs, both of which
 ** are invoked only from within xCreate and xConnect methods.
 */
@@ -126438,7 +126438,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_module_v2(
 /*
 ** Lock the virtual table so that it cannot be disconnected.
 ** Locks nest.  Every lock should have a corresponding unlock.
-** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.  
+** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.
 **
 ** If a disconnect is attempted while a virtual table is locked,
 ** the disconnect is deferred until all locks have been removed.
@@ -126450,7 +126450,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabLock(VTable *pVTab){
 
 /*
 ** pTab is a pointer to a Table structure representing a virtual-table.
-** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access 
+** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access
 ** this virtual-table, if one has been created, or NULL otherwise.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE VTable *sqlite3GetVTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){
@@ -126484,7 +126484,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlock(VTable *pVTab){
 /*
 ** Table p is a virtual table. This function moves all elements in the
 ** p->pVTable list to the sqlite3.pDisconnect lists of their associated
-** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity. 
+** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity.
 ** Except, if argument db is not NULL, then the entry associated with
 ** connection db is left in the p->pVTable list.
 */
@@ -126493,8 +126493,8 @@ static VTable *vtabDisconnectAll(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
   VTable *pVTable = p->pVTable;
   p->pVTable = 0;
 
-  /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database 
-  ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments 
+  /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database
+  ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments
   ** above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an explanation of why
   ** this makes it safe to access the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of any
   ** database connection that may have an entry in the p->pVTable list.
@@ -126550,7 +126550,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabDisconnect(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
 ** Disconnect all the virtual table objects in the sqlite3.pDisconnect list.
 **
 ** This function may only be called when the mutexes associated with all
-** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the 
+** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the
 ** caller. This is done to protect the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. The
 ** sqlite3.pDisconnect list is accessed only as follows:
 **
@@ -126563,7 +126563,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabDisconnect(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
 **      or, if the virtual table is stored in a non-sharable database, then
 **      the database handle mutex is held.
 **
-** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously 
+** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously
 ** by multiple threads. It is thread-safe.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -126589,12 +126589,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){
 ** record.
 **
 ** Since it is a virtual-table, the Table structure contains a pointer
-** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable 
+** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable
 ** structure is associated with a single sqlite3* user of the schema.
-** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database 
-** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the 
+** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database
+** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the
 ** structure being xDisconnected and free). Any other VTable structures
-** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated 
+** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated
 ** database connection.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabClear(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
@@ -126671,7 +126671,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabBeginParse(
   ** The second call, to obtain permission to create the table, is made now.
   */
   if( pTable->azModuleArg ){
-    sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName, 
+    sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName,
             pTable->azModuleArg[0], pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName);
   }
 #endif
@@ -126703,7 +126703,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){
   addArgumentToVtab(pParse);
   pParse->sArg.z = 0;
   if( pTab->nModuleArg<1 ) return;
-  
+
   /* If the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement is being entered for the
   ** first time (in other words if the virtual table is actually being
   ** created now instead of just being read out of sqlite_master) then
@@ -126723,9 +126723,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){
     }
     zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %T", &pParse->sNameToken);
 
-    /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the 
+    /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
     ** SQLITE_MASTER table.  We just need to update that slot with all
-    ** the information we've collected.  
+    ** the information we've collected.
     **
     ** The VM register number pParse->regRowid holds the rowid of an
     ** entry in the sqlite_master table tht was created for this vtab
@@ -126806,7 +126806,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabArgExtend(Parse *pParse, Token *p){
 ** to this procedure.
 */
 static int vtabCallConstructor(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   Table *pTab,
   Module *pMod,
   int (*xConstruct)(sqlite3*,void*,int,const char*const*,sqlite3_vtab**,char**),
@@ -126825,7 +126825,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
   /* Check that the virtual-table is not already being initialized */
   for(pCtx=db->pVtabCtx; pCtx; pCtx=pCtx->pPrior){
     if( pCtx->pTab==pTab ){
-      *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 
+      *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
           "vtable constructor called recursively: %s", pTab->zName
       );
       return SQLITE_LOCKED;
@@ -126885,7 +126885,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
       int iCol;
       u8 oooHidden = 0;
       /* If everything went according to plan, link the new VTable structure
-      ** into the linked list headed by pTab->pVTable. Then loop through the 
+      ** into the linked list headed by pTab->pVTable. Then loop through the
       ** columns of the table to see if any of them contain the token "hidden".
       ** If so, set the Column COLFLAG_HIDDEN flag and remove the token from
       ** the type string.  */
@@ -126930,7 +126930,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
 
 /*
 ** This function is invoked by the parser to call the xConnect() method
-** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned 
+** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned
 ** and an error left in pParse.
 **
 ** This call is a no-op if table pTab is not a virtual table.
@@ -127000,7 +127000,7 @@ static void addToVTrans(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
 
 /*
 ** This function is invoked by the vdbe to call the xCreate method
-** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb. 
+** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, *pzErr is set to point to an English language
 ** description of the error and an SQLITE_XXX error code is returned.
@@ -127019,8 +127019,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCallCreate(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab,
   zMod = pTab->azModuleArg[0];
   pMod = (Module*)sqlite3HashFind(&db->aModule, zMod);
 
-  /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method, 
-  ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an 
+  /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method,
+  ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an
   ** error. Otherwise, do nothing.
   */
   if( pMod==0 || pMod->pModule->xCreate==0 || pMod->pModule->xDestroy==0 ){
@@ -127073,7 +127073,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3 *db, const char *zCreateTable){
   sParse.declareVtab = 1;
   sParse.db = db;
   sParse.nQueryLoop = 1;
-  if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(&sParse, zCreateTable, &zErr) 
+  if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(&sParse, zCreateTable, &zErr)
    && sParse.pNewTable
    && !db->mallocFailed
    && !sParse.pNewTable->pSelect
@@ -127168,7 +127168,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab
 ** called is identified by the second argument, "offset", which is
 ** the offset of the method to call in the sqlite3_module structure.
 **
-** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks. 
+** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks.
 */
 static void callFinaliser(sqlite3 *db, int offset){
   int i;
@@ -127217,7 +127217,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabSync(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the 
+** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the
 ** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -127226,7 +127226,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 
 /*
-** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the 
+** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the
 ** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCommit(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -127248,7 +127248,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
 
   /* Special case: If db->aVTrans is NULL and db->nVTrans is greater
   ** than zero, then this function is being called from within a
-  ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to 
+  ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to
   ** virtual module tables in this case, so return SQLITE_LOCKED.
   */
   if( sqlite3VtabInSync(db) ){
@@ -127256,7 +127256,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
   }
   if( !pVTab ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
-  } 
+  }
   pModule = pVTab->pVtab->pModule;
 
   if( pModule->xBegin ){
@@ -127269,7 +127269,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
       }
     }
 
-    /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the 
+    /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the
     ** sqlite3.aVTrans[] array. */
     rc = growVTrans(db);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -127293,11 +127293,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
 ** as the second argument to the virtual table method invoked.
 **
 ** If op is SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, the xSavepoint method is invoked. If it is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is 
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is
 ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the xRelease method of each virtual table with
 ** an open transaction is invoked.
 **
-** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK, 
+** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK,
 ** processing is abandoned and the error returned to the caller of this
 ** function immediately. If all calls to virtual table methods are successful,
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned.
@@ -127344,7 +127344,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabSavepoint(sqlite3 *db, int op, int iSavepoint){
 ** This routine is used to allow virtual table implementations to
 ** overload MATCH, LIKE, GLOB, and REGEXP operators.
 **
-** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a 
+** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a
 ** new FuncDef structure that is marked as ephemeral using the
 ** SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM flag.
 */
@@ -127376,9 +127376,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3VtabOverloadFunction(
   assert( pVtab->pModule!=0 );
   pMod = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule;
   if( pMod->xFindFunction==0 ) return pDef;
- 
+
   /* Call the xFindFunction method on the virtual table implementation
-  ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function 
+  ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function
   */
   zLowerName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pDef->zName);
   if( zLowerName ){
@@ -127488,7 +127488,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabEponymousTableClear(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){
   Table *pTab = pMod->pEpoTab;
   if( pTab!=0 ){
     /* Mark the table as Ephemeral prior to deleting it, so that the
-    ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in 
+    ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in
     ** the schema. */
     pTab->tabFlags |= TF_Ephemeral;
     sqlite3DeleteTable(db, pTab);
@@ -127504,8 +127504,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabEponymousTableClear(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){
 ** within an xUpdate method.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){
-  static const unsigned char aMap[] = { 
-    SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE 
+  static const unsigned char aMap[] = {
+    SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE
   };
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
   if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ) return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
@@ -127517,7 +127517,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 
 /*
-** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide 
+** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide
 ** the SQLite core with additional information about the behavior
 ** of the virtual table being implemented.
 */
@@ -127728,7 +127728,7 @@ struct WhereLoop {
 
 /* This object holds the prerequisites and the cost of running a
 ** subquery on one operand of an OR operator in the WHERE clause.
-** See WhereOrSet for additional information 
+** See WhereOrSet for additional information
 */
 struct WhereOrCost {
   Bitmask prereq;     /* Prerequisites */
@@ -127780,7 +127780,7 @@ struct WherePath {
 ** clause subexpression is separated from the others by AND operators,
 ** usually, or sometimes subexpressions separated by OR.
 **
-** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.  
+** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.
 ** The following identity holds:
 **
 **        WhereTerm.pWC->a[WhereTerm.idx] == WhereTerm
@@ -127931,8 +127931,8 @@ struct WhereAndInfo {
 ** An instance of the following structure keeps track of a mapping
 ** between VDBE cursor numbers and bits of the bitmasks in WhereTerm.
 **
-** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in 
-** SrcList_item.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields.  For any given WHERE 
+** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in
+** SrcList_item.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields.  For any given WHERE
 ** clause, the cursor numbers might not begin with 0 and they might
 ** contain gaps in the numbering sequence.  But we want to make maximum
 ** use of the bits in our bitmasks.  This structure provides a mapping
@@ -128192,7 +128192,7 @@ static void explainAppendTerm(
 }
 
 /*
-** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This 
+** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This
 ** function appends text to pStr that describes the subset of table
 ** rows scanned by the strategy in the form of an SQL expression.
 **
@@ -128233,7 +128233,7 @@ static void explainIndexRange(StrAccum *pStr, WhereLoop *pLoop){
 /*
 ** This function is a no-op unless currently processing an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN
 ** command, or if either SQLITE_DEBUG or SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS was
-** defined at compile-time. If it is not a no-op, a single OP_Explain opcode 
+** defined at compile-time. If it is not a no-op, a single OP_Explain opcode
 ** is added to the output to describe the table scan strategy in pLevel.
 **
 ** If an OP_Explain opcode is added to the VM, its address is returned.
@@ -128344,11 +128344,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WhereExplainOneScan(
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS
 /*
 ** Configure the VM passed as the first argument with an
-** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to 
-** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM 
+** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to
+** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM
 ** clause that the scan reads data from.
 **
-** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an 
+** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an
 ** OP_Explain instruction that describes the same loop.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereAddScanStatus(
@@ -128404,7 +128404,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereAddScanStatus(
 **
 ** Only the parent term was in the original WHERE clause.  The child1
 ** and child2 terms were added by the LIKE optimization.  If both of
-** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be 
+** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be
 ** skipped.
 **
 ** Usually the parent term is marked as TERM_CODED.  But if the parent
@@ -128435,7 +128435,7 @@ static void disableTerm(WhereLevel *pLevel, WhereTerm *pTerm){
 
 /*
 ** Code an OP_Affinity opcode to apply the column affinity string zAff
-** to the n registers starting at base. 
+** to the n registers starting at base.
 **
 ** As an optimization, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB entries (which are no-ops) at the
 ** beginning and end of zAff are ignored.  If all entries in zAff are
@@ -128472,7 +128472,7 @@ static void codeApplyAffinity(Parse *pParse, int base, int n, char *zAff){
 }
 
 /*
-** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is 
+** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is
 ** either a vector of n elements or, if n==1, a scalar expression.
 ** Before the comparison operation, affinity zAff is to be applied
 ** to the pRight values. This function modifies characters within the
@@ -128499,7 +128499,7 @@ static void updateRangeAffinityStr(
 
 /*
 ** Generate code for a single equality term of the WHERE clause.  An equality
-** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...).   pTerm is the term to be 
+** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...).   pTerm is the term to be
 ** coded.
 **
 ** The current value for the constraint is left in a register, the index
@@ -128587,12 +128587,12 @@ static int codeEqualityTerm(
         Expr *pLeft = pX->pLeft;
 
         if( pSelect->pOrderBy ){
-          /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the 
-          ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an 
-          ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the 
+          /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the
+          ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an
+          ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the
           ** result-set. Since the result-set of the SELECT statement may
-          ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer 
-          ** set correctly.  Since setting them is just an optimization, 
+          ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer
+          ** set correctly.  Since setting them is just an optimization,
           ** it's easiest just to zero them here.  */
           ExprList *pOrderBy = pSelect->pOrderBy;
           for(i=0; i<pOrderBy->nExpr; i++){
@@ -128684,7 +128684,7 @@ static int codeEqualityTerm(
 ** For example, consider table t1(a,b,c,d,e,f) with index i1(a,b,c).
 ** Suppose the WHERE clause is this:  a==5 AND b IN (1,2,3) AND c>5 AND c<10
 ** The index has as many as three equality constraints, but in this
-** example, the third "c" value is an inequality.  So only two 
+** example, the third "c" value is an inequality.  So only two
 ** constraints are coded.  This routine will generate code to evaluate
 ** a==5 and b IN (1,2,3).  The current values for a and b will be stored
 ** in consecutive registers and the index of the first register is returned.
@@ -128774,7 +128774,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
       testcase( pIdx->aiColumn[j]==XN_EXPR );
       VdbeComment((v, "%s", explainIndexColumnName(pIdx, j)));
     }
-  }    
+  }
 
   /* Evaluate the equality constraints
   */
@@ -128783,7 +128783,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
     int r1;
     pTerm = pLoop->aLTerm[j];
     assert( pTerm!=0 );
-    /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns. 
+    /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns.
     ** Ex: CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a,b,a); SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=0 AND b=0; */
     testcase( (pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_CODED)!=0 );
     testcase( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
@@ -128799,8 +128799,8 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
     if( pTerm->eOperator & WO_IN ){
       if( pTerm->pExpr->flags & EP_xIsSelect ){
         /* No affinity ever needs to be (or should be) applied to a value
-        ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The 
-        ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the 
+        ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The
+        ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the
         ** affinity of the comparison has been applied to the value.  */
         if( zAff ) zAff[j] = SQLITE_AFF_BLOB;
       }
@@ -128827,7 +128827,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
 #ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS
 /*
 ** If the most recently coded instruction is a constant range constraint
-** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then 
+** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then
 ** set P3 and P5 on the OP_String opcode so that the string will be cast
 ** to a BLOB at appropriate times.
 **
@@ -128852,7 +128852,7 @@ static void whereLikeOptimizationStringFixup(
     assert( pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>0 );
     pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, -1);
     assert( pOp!=0 );
-    assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8 
+    assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8
             || pTerm->pWC->pWInfo->pParse->db->mallocFailed );
     pOp->p3 = (int)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>>1);  /* Register holding counter */
     pOp->p5 = (u8)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr&1);    /* ASC or DESC */
@@ -128895,7 +128895,7 @@ static int codeCursorHintCheckExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 /*
 ** Test whether or not expression pExpr, which was part of a WHERE clause,
 ** should be included in the cursor-hint for a table that is on the rhs
-** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the 
+** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the
 ** expression is not suitable.
 **
 ** An expression is unsuitable if it might evaluate to non NULL even if
@@ -128908,9 +128908,9 @@ static int codeCursorHintCheckExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 **   CASE WHEN col THEN 0 ELSE 1 END
 */
 static int codeCursorHintIsOrFunction(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
-  if( pExpr->op==TK_IS 
-   || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT 
-   || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE 
+  if( pExpr->op==TK_IS
+   || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
+   || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE
   ){
     pWalker->eCode = 1;
   }else if( pExpr->op==TK_FUNCTION ){
@@ -128931,10 +128931,10 @@ static int codeCursorHintIsOrFunction(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 ** that accesses any table other than the one identified by
 ** CCurHint.iTabCur, then do the following:
 **
-**   1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read 
+**   1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read
 **      the specified column into the new register, and
 **
-**   2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads 
+**   2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads
 **      from the newly populated register.
 **
 ** Also, if the node is a TK_COLUMN that does access the table idenified
@@ -128965,7 +128965,7 @@ static int codeCursorHintFixExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
     ** the parent context. Do not walk the function arguments in this case.
     **
     ** todo: It should be possible to replace this node with a TK_REGISTER
-    ** expression, as the result of the expression must be stored in a 
+    ** expression, as the result of the expression must be stored in a
     ** register at this point. The same holds for TK_AGG_COLUMN nodes. */
     rc = WRC_Prune;
   }
@@ -129008,18 +129008,18 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
     if( pTerm->wtFlags & (TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_CODED) ) continue;
     if( pTerm->prereqAll & pLevel->notReady ) continue;
 
-    /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT 
+    /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT
     ** JOIN for which the current table is not the rhs are omitted
-    ** from the cursor-hint. 
+    ** from the cursor-hint.
     **
-    ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms 
+    ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms
     ** that were specified as part of the WHERE clause must be excluded.
     ** This is to address the following:
     **
     **   SELECT ... t1 LEFT JOIN t2 ON (t1.a=t2.b) WHERE t2.c IS NULL;
     **
     ** Say there is a single row in t2 that matches (t1.a=t2.b), but its
-    ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is 
+    ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is
     ** pushed down to the cursor, this row is filtered out, causing
     ** SQLite to synthesize a row of NULL values. Which does match the
     ** WHERE clause, and so the query returns a row. Which is incorrect.
@@ -129032,7 +129032,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
     */
     if( pTabItem->fg.jointype & JT_LEFT ){
       Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr;
-      if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromJoin) 
+      if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromJoin)
        || pExpr->iRightJoinTable!=pTabItem->iCursor
       ){
         sWalker.eCode = 0;
@@ -129070,7 +129070,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
   if( pExpr!=0 ){
     sWalker.xExprCallback = codeCursorHintFixExpr;
     sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pExpr);
-    sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint, 
+    sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint,
                       (sHint.pIdx ? sHint.iIdxCur : sHint.iTabCur), 0, 0,
                       (const char*)pExpr, P4_EXPR);
   }
@@ -129082,7 +129082,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
 /*
 ** Cursor iCur is open on an intkey b-tree (a table). Register iRowid contains
 ** a rowid value just read from cursor iIdxCur, open on index pIdx. This
-** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the 
+** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the
 ** rowid stored in register iRowid.
 **
 ** Normally, this is just:
@@ -129092,8 +129092,8 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
 ** However, if the scan currently being coded is a branch of an OR-loop and
 ** the statement currently being coded is a SELECT, then P3 of OP_DeferredSeek
 ** is set to iIdxCur and P4 is set to point to an array of integers
-** containing one entry for each column of the table cursor iCur is open 
-** on. For each table column, if the column is the i'th column of the 
+** containing one entry for each column of the table cursor iCur is open
+** on. For each table column, if the column is the i'th column of the
 ** index, then the corresponding array entry is set to (i+1). If the column
 ** does not appear in the index at all, the array entry is set to 0.
 */
@@ -129108,7 +129108,7 @@ static void codeDeferredSeek(
 
   assert( iIdxCur>0 );
   assert( pIdx->aiColumn[pIdx->nColumn-1]==-1 );
-  
+
   sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_DeferredSeek, iIdxCur, 0, iCur);
   if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)
    && DbMaskAllZero(sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse)->writeMask)
@@ -129263,7 +129263,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
   iCur = pTabItem->iCursor;
   pLevel->notReady = notReady & ~sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, iCur);
   bRev = (pWInfo->revMask>>iLevel)&1;
-  omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0 
+  omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
            && (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0;
   VdbeModuleComment((v, "Begin WHERE-loop%d: %s",iLevel,pTabItem->pTab->zName));
 
@@ -129365,7 +129365,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
           sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, pOp->opcode, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3);
         }
 
-        /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if 
+        /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if
         ** the IN constraint is not satisfied */
         pCompare = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, 0, 0);
         assert( pCompare!=0 || db->mallocFailed );
@@ -129443,7 +129443,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       int r1, rTemp;        /* Registers for holding the start boundary */
       int op;               /* Cursor seek operation */
 
-      /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding 
+      /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding
       ** seek opcodes.  It depends on a particular ordering of TK_xx
       */
       const u8 aMoveOp[] = {
@@ -129492,8 +129492,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       testcase( pEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
       memEndValue = ++pParse->nMem;
       codeExprOrVector(pParse, pX->pRight, memEndValue, 1);
-      if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight) 
-       && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT) 
+      if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight)
+       && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT)
       ){
         testOp = bRev ? OP_Le : OP_Ge;
       }else{
@@ -129522,14 +129522,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
   }else if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED ){
     /* Case 4: A scan using an index.
     **
-    **         The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality 
+    **         The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality
     **         terms ("==" or "IN" operators) that refer to the N
     **         left-most columns of the index. It may also contain
     **         inequality constraints (>, <, >= or <=) on the indexed
-    **         column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only 
+    **         column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only
     **         the right-most column can be an inequality - the rest must
-    **         use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the 
-    **         index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all 
+    **         use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the
+    **         index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all
     **         optimized:
     **
     **            x=5
@@ -129550,7 +129550,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     **         This case is also used when there are no WHERE clause
     **         constraints but an index is selected anyway, in order
     **         to force the output order to conform to an ORDER BY.
-    */  
+    */
     static const u8 aStartOp[] = {
       0,
       0,
@@ -129589,8 +129589,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     iIdxCur = pLevel->iIdxCur;
     assert( nEq>=pLoop->nSkip );
 
-    /* If this loop satisfies a sort order (pOrderBy) request that 
-    ** was passed to this function to implement a "SELECT min(x) ..." 
+    /* If this loop satisfies a sort order (pOrderBy) request that
+    ** was passed to this function to implement a "SELECT min(x) ..."
     ** query, then the caller will only allow the loop to run for
     ** a single iteration. This means that the first row returned
     ** should not have a NULL value stored in 'x'. If column 'x' is
@@ -129609,15 +129609,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       nExtraReg = 1;
     }
 
-    /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end 
-    ** of the range. 
+    /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end
+    ** of the range.
     */
     j = nEq;
     if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_BTM_LIMIT ){
       pRangeStart = pLoop->aLTerm[j++];
       nExtraReg = MAX(nExtraReg, pLoop->u.btree.nBtm);
       /* Like optimization range constraints always occur in pairs */
-      assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 || 
+      assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 ||
               (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT)!=0 );
     }
     if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT ){
@@ -129650,7 +129650,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     assert( pRangeEnd==0 || (pRangeEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 );
 
     /* If we are doing a reverse order scan on an ascending index, or
-    ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the 
+    ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the
     ** start and end terms (pRangeStart and pRangeEnd).
     */
     if( (nEq<pIdx->nKeyCol && bRev==(pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]==SQLITE_SO_ASC))
@@ -129695,7 +129695,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       }
       if( zStartAff ){
         updateRangeAffinityStr(pRight, nBtm, &zStartAff[nEq]);
-      }  
+      }
       nConstraint += nBtm;
       testcase( pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
       if( sqlite3ExprIsVector(pRight)==0 ){
@@ -129783,7 +129783,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       /* pIdx is a covering index.  No need to access the main table. */
     }else if( HasRowid(pIdx->pTable) ){
       if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_SEEK_TABLE) || (
-          (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_SEEK_UNIQ_TABLE) 
+          (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_SEEK_UNIQ_TABLE)
        && (pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_SINGLE)
       )){
         iRowidReg = ++pParse->nMem;
@@ -129921,15 +129921,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       pOrTab = pWInfo->pTabList;
     }
 
-    /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is 
+    /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is
     ** equivalent to an empty rowset.  Or, create an ephemeral index
     ** capable of holding primary keys in the case of a WITHOUT ROWID.
     **
-    ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction 
+    ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction
     ** immediately following the OP_Return at the bottom of the loop. This
     ** is required in a few obscure LEFT JOIN cases where control jumps
-    ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the 
-    ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to 
+    ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the
+    ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to
     ** fall through to the next instruction, just as an OP_Next does if
     ** called on an uninitialized cursor.
     */
@@ -129954,7 +129954,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     **
     ** Actually, each subexpression is converted to "xN AND w" where w is
     ** the "interesting" terms of z - terms that did not originate in the
-    ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as 
+    ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as
     ** indices.
     **
     ** This optimization also only applies if the (x1 OR x2 OR ...) term
@@ -130040,9 +130040,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
               **
               ** Use some of the same optimizations as OP_RowSetTest: If iSet
               ** is zero, assume that the key cannot already be present in
-              ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no 
-              ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never 
-              ** be tested for.  */ 
+              ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no
+              ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never
+              ** be tested for.  */
               if( iSet ){
                 jmp1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, regRowset, 0, r, nPk);
                 VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -130081,8 +130081,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
           ** If the call to sqlite3WhereBegin() above resulted in a scan that
           ** uses an index, and this is either the first OR-connected term
           ** processed or the index is the same as that used by all previous
-          ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set 
-          ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will 
+          ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set
+          ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will
           ** be available.
           */
           pSubLoop = pSubWInfo->a[0].pWLoop;
@@ -130152,7 +130152,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
   **
   ** iLoop==1: Code only expressions that are entirely covered by pIdx.
   ** iLoop==2: Code remaining expressions that do not contain correlated
-  **           sub-queries.  
+  **           sub-queries.
   ** iLoop==3: Code all remaining expressions.
   **
   ** An effort is made to skip unnecessary iterations of the loop.
@@ -130177,7 +130177,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       if( pLevel->iLeftJoin && !ExprHasProperty(pE, EP_FromJoin) ){
         continue;
       }
-      
+
       if( iLoop==1 && !sqlite3ExprCoveredByIndex(pE, pLevel->iTabCur, pIdx) ){
         iNext = 2;
         continue;
@@ -130248,7 +130248,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
   }
 
   /* For a LEFT OUTER JOIN, generate code that will record the fact that
-  ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.  
+  ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.
   */
   if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){
     pLevel->addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
@@ -130390,7 +130390,7 @@ static int allowedOp(int op){
 ** collating sequence, then COLLATE operators are adjusted to ensure
 ** that the collating sequence does not change.  For example:
 ** "Y collate NOCASE op X" becomes "X op Y" because any collation sequence on
-** the left hand side of a comparison overrides any collation sequence 
+** the left hand side of a comparison overrides any collation sequence
 ** attached to the right. For the same reason the EP_Collate flag
 ** is not commuted.
 */
@@ -130514,8 +130514,8 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
     ** the LHS is numeric and so the optimization still works.
     */
     if( sqlite3Isdigit(z[0]) || z[0]=='-' ){
-      if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN 
-       || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT 
+      if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN
+       || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT
        || IsVirtual(pLeft->pTab)  /* Value might be numeric */
       ){
         sqlite3ValueFree(pVal);
@@ -130534,7 +130534,7 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
     ** with a wildcard and if (2) the non-wildcard prefix does not end with
     ** an (illegal 0xff) character.  The second condition is necessary so
     ** that we can increment the prefix key to find an upper bound for the
-    ** range search. 
+    ** range search.
     */
     if( cnt!=0 && 255!=(u8)z[cnt-1] ){
       Expr *pPrefix;
@@ -130567,7 +130567,7 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
           ** function, then no OP_Variable will be added to the program.
           ** This causes problems for the sqlite3_bind_parameter_name()
           ** API. To work around them, add a dummy OP_Variable here.
-          */ 
+          */
           int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
           sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pRight, r1);
           sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, 0);
@@ -130604,7 +130604,7 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
 **      9.  column IS NOT NULL           SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOTNULL
 **
 ** In every case, "column" must be a column of a virtual table.  If there
-** is a match, set *ppLeft to the "column" expression, set *ppRight to the 
+** is a match, set *ppLeft to the "column" expression, set *ppRight to the
 ** "expr" expression (even though in forms (6) and (8) the column is on the
 ** right and the expression is on the left).  Also set *peOp2 to the
 ** appropriate virtual table operator.  The return value is 1 or 2 if there
@@ -130724,7 +130724,7 @@ static WhereTerm *whereNthSubterm(WhereTerm *pTerm, int N){
 **
 ** The following is NOT generated:
 **
-**    x<y OR x>y    -->     x!=y     
+**    x<y OR x>y    -->     x!=y
 */
 static void whereCombineDisjuncts(
   SrcList *pSrc,         /* the FROM clause */
@@ -130821,10 +130821,10 @@ static void whereCombineDisjuncts(
 **     WhereTerm.u.pOrInfo->indexable  |=  the cursor number for table T
 **
 ** A subterm is "indexable" if it is of the form
-** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and 
+** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and
 ** <op> is one of "=", "<", "<=", ">", ">=", "IS NULL", or "IN".
 ** A subterm is also indexable if it is an AND of two or more
-** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable.  Indexable AND 
+** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable.  Indexable AND
 ** subterms have their eOperator set to WO_AND and they have
 ** u.pAndInfo set to a dynamically allocated WhereAndTerm object.
 **
@@ -130915,7 +130915,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
         if( !db->mallocFailed ){
           for(j=0, pAndTerm=pAndWC->a; j<pAndWC->nTerm; j++, pAndTerm++){
             assert( pAndTerm->pExpr );
-            if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op) 
+            if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op)
              || pAndTerm->eOperator==WO_AUX
             ){
               b |= sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pAndTerm->leftCursor);
@@ -131012,7 +131012,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
                                             pOrTerm->leftCursor))==0 ){
           /* This term must be of the form t1.a==t2.b where t2 is in the
           ** chngToIN set but t1 is not.  This term will be either preceded
-          ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a).  Skip this term 
+          ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a).  Skip this term
           ** and use its inversion. */
           testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_COPIED );
           testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
@@ -131060,7 +131060,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
     }
 
     /* At this point, okToChngToIN is true if original pTerm satisfies
-    ** case 1.  In that case, construct a new virtual term that is 
+    ** case 1.  In that case, construct a new virtual term that is
     ** pTerm converted into an IN operator.
     */
     if( okToChngToIN ){
@@ -131203,8 +131203,8 @@ static int exprMightBeIndexed(
   Expr *pExpr,           /* An operand of a comparison operator */
   int op                 /* The specific comparison operator */
 ){
-  /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a 
-  ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing 
+  /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a
+  ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing
   ** on the first element of the vector.  */
   assert( TK_GT+1==TK_LE && TK_GT+2==TK_LT && TK_GT+3==TK_GE );
   assert( TK_IS<TK_GE && TK_ISNULL<TK_GE && TK_IN<TK_GE );
@@ -131319,7 +131319,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
       pTerm->eOperator = operatorMask(op) & opMask;
     }
     if( op==TK_IS ) pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_IS;
-    if( pRight 
+    if( pRight
      && exprMightBeIndexed(pSrc, pTerm->prereqRight, aiCurCol, pRight, op)
     ){
       WhereTerm *pNew;
@@ -131384,7 +131384,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
     for(i=0; i<2; i++){
       Expr *pNewExpr;
       int idxNew;
-      pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i], 
+      pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i],
                              sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr->pLeft, 0),
                              sqlite3ExprDup(db, pList->a[i].pExpr, 0));
       transferJoinMarkings(pNewExpr, pExpr);
@@ -131422,7 +131422,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
   ** bound is made all lowercase so that the bounds also work when comparing
   ** BLOBs.
   */
-  if( pWC->op==TK_AND 
+  if( pWC->op==TK_AND
    && isLikeOrGlob(pParse, pExpr, &pStr1, &isComplete, &noCase)
   ){
     Expr *pLeft;       /* LHS of LIKE/GLOB operator */
@@ -131458,7 +131458,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
       if( noCase ){
         /* The point is to increment the last character before the first
         ** wildcard.  But if we increment '@', that will push it into the
-        ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the 
+        ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the
         ** inequality.  To avoid this, make sure to also run the full
         ** LIKE on all candidate expressions by clearing the isComplete flag
         */
@@ -131514,7 +131514,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
       prereqColumn = sqlite3WhereExprUsage(pMaskSet, pLeft);
       if( (prereqExpr & prereqColumn)==0 ){
         Expr *pNewExpr;
-        pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH, 
+        pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH,
             0, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pRight, 0));
         if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromJoin) && pNewExpr ){
           ExprSetProperty(pNewExpr, EP_FromJoin);
@@ -131544,11 +131544,11 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
   **
   ** This is only required if at least one side of the comparison operation
   ** is not a sub-select.  */
-  if( pWC->op==TK_AND 
+  if( pWC->op==TK_AND
   && (pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_IS)
   && (nLeft = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))>1
   && sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pRight)==nLeft
-  && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0 
+  && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0
     || (pExpr->pRight->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0)
   ){
     int i;
@@ -131570,7 +131570,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
 
   /* If there is a vector IN term - e.g. "(a, b) IN (SELECT ...)" - create
   ** a virtual term for each vector component. The expression object
-  ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...) 
+  ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...)
   ** expression). The WhereTerm.iField variable identifies the index within
   ** the vector on the LHS that the virtual term represents.
   **
@@ -131747,7 +131747,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereExprListUsage(WhereMaskSet *pMaskSet, ExprLis
 
 
 /*
-** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.  
+** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.
 **
 ** Note that exprAnalyze() might add new virtual terms onto the
 ** end of the WHERE clause.  We do not want to analyze these new
@@ -131766,7 +131766,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(
 
 /*
 ** For table-valued-functions, transform the function arguments into
-** new WHERE clause terms.  
+** new WHERE clause terms.
 **
 ** Each function argument translates into an equality constraint against
 ** a HIDDEN column in the table.
@@ -131893,7 +131893,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WhereBreakLabel(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
 ** operate directly on the rowis returned by a WHERE clause.  Return
 ** ONEPASS_SINGLE (1) if the statement can operation directly because only
 ** a single row is to be changed.  Return ONEPASS_MULTI (2) if the one-pass
-** optimization can be used on multiple 
+** optimization can be used on multiple
 **
 ** If the ONEPASS optimization is used (if this routine returns true)
 ** then also write the indices of open cursors used by ONEPASS
@@ -132142,7 +132142,7 @@ static WhereTerm *whereScanInit(
 ** if pIdx!=0 and <op> is one of the WO_xx operator codes specified by
 ** the op parameter.  Return a pointer to the term.  Return 0 if not found.
 **
-** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur.  
+** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur.
 ** Search for terms matching the iColumn-th column of pIdx
 ** rather than the iColumn-th column of table iCur.
 **
@@ -132255,17 +132255,17 @@ static int isDistinctRedundant(
 ){
   Table *pTab;
   Index *pIdx;
-  int i;                          
+  int i;
   int iBase;
 
   /* If there is more than one table or sub-select in the FROM clause of
-  ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT 
+  ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT
   ** clause is redundant. */
   if( pTabList->nSrc!=1 ) return 0;
   iBase = pTabList->a[0].iCursor;
   pTab = pTabList->a[0].pTab;
 
-  /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return 
+  /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return
   ** true. Note: The (p->iTable==iBase) part of this test may be false if the
   ** current SELECT is a correlated sub-query.
   */
@@ -132316,7 +132316,7 @@ static LogEst estLog(LogEst N){
 ** Convert OP_Column opcodes to OP_Copy in previously generated code.
 **
 ** This routine runs over generated VDBE code and translates OP_Column
-** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine 
+** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine
 ** instead of via table lookup.
 **
 ** If the bIncrRowid parameter is 0, then any OP_Rowid instructions on
@@ -132416,7 +132416,7 @@ static int termCanDriveIndex(
   char aff;
   if( pTerm->leftCursor!=pSrc->iCursor ) return 0;
   if( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_EQ|WO_IS))==0 ) return 0;
-  if( (pSrc->fg.jointype & JT_LEFT) 
+  if( (pSrc->fg.jointype & JT_LEFT)
    && !ExprHasProperty(pTerm->pExpr, EP_FromJoin)
    && (pTerm->eOperator & WO_IS)
   ){
@@ -132633,7 +132633,7 @@ static void constructAutomaticIndex(
   sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrTop);
   sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRecord);
   sqlite3ExprCachePop(pParse);
-  
+
   /* Jump here when skipping the initialization */
   sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrInit);
 
@@ -132644,7 +132644,7 @@ end_auto_index_create:
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
 /*
-** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the 
+** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the
 ** responsibility of the caller to eventually release the structure
 ** by passing the pointer returned by this function to sqlite3_free().
 */
@@ -132682,7 +132682,7 @@ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo(
     nTerm++;
   }
 
-  /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current 
+  /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current
   ** virtual table then allocate space for the aOrderBy part of
   ** the sqlite3_index_info structure.
   */
@@ -132760,7 +132760,7 @@ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo(
       assert( pTerm->eOperator&(WO_IN|WO_EQ|WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE|WO_AUX) );
 
       if( op & (WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE)
-       && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight) 
+       && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight)
       ){
         if( i<16 ) mNoOmit |= (1 << i);
         if( op==WO_LT ) pIdxCons[j].op = WO_LE;
@@ -132819,7 +132819,7 @@ static int vtabBestIndex(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, sqlite3_index_info *p){
   ** Search for "xBestIndex malfunction" below */
   for(i=0; i<p->nConstraint; i++){
     if( !p->aConstraint[i].usable && p->aConstraintUsage[i].argvIndex>0 ){
-      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
           "table %s: xBestIndex returned an invalid plan", pTab->zName);
     }
   }
@@ -132840,8 +132840,8 @@ static int vtabBestIndex(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, sqlite3_index_info *p){
 ** Return the index of the sample that is the smallest sample that
 ** is greater than or equal to pRec. Note that this index is not an index
 ** into the aSample[] array - it is an index into a virtual set of samples
-** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record 
-** pRec. 
+** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record
+** pRec.
 */
 static int whereKeyStats(
   Parse *pParse,              /* Database connection */
@@ -132877,38 +132877,38 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
   ** consider prefixes of those samples. For example, if the set of samples
   ** in aSample is:
   **
-  **     aSample[0] = (a, 5) 
-  **     aSample[1] = (a, 10) 
-  **     aSample[2] = (b, 5) 
-  **     aSample[3] = (c, 100) 
+  **     aSample[0] = (a, 5)
+  **     aSample[1] = (a, 10)
+  **     aSample[2] = (b, 5)
+  **     aSample[3] = (c, 100)
   **     aSample[4] = (c, 105)
   **
-  ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the 
-  ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize, 
+  ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the
+  ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize,
   ** the code actually searches this set:
   **
-  **     0: (a) 
-  **     1: (a, 5) 
-  **     2: (a, 10) 
-  **     3: (a, 10) 
-  **     4: (b) 
-  **     5: (b, 5) 
-  **     6: (c) 
-  **     7: (c, 100) 
+  **     0: (a)
+  **     1: (a, 5)
+  **     2: (a, 10)
+  **     3: (a, 10)
+  **     4: (b)
+  **     5: (b, 5)
+  **     6: (c)
+  **     7: (c, 100)
   **     8: (c, 105)
   **     9: (c, 105)
   **
   ** For each sample in the aSample[] array, N samples are present in the
-  ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on 
+  ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on
   ** sample aSample[0]. Samples 2 and 3 on aSample[1] etc.
   **
   ** Often, sample i of each block of N effective samples has (i+1) fields.
   ** Except, each sample may be extended to ensure that it is greater than or
-  ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above, 
-  ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it 
-  ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it 
-  ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result, 
-  ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not 
+  ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above,
+  ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it
+  ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it
+  ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result,
+  ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not
   ** cause any problems.
   */
   nField = pRec->nField;
@@ -132922,7 +132922,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
     iSamp = iTest / nField;
     if( iSamp>0 ){
       /* The proposed effective sample is a prefix of sample aSample[iSamp].
-      ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField) 
+      ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField)
       ** fields that is greater than the previous effective sample.  */
       for(n=(iTest % nField) + 1; n<nField; n++){
         if( aSample[iSamp-1].anLt[n-1]!=aSample[iSamp].anLt[n-1] ) break;
@@ -132957,8 +132957,8 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
       assert( i<pIdx->nSample );
       assert( iCol==nField-1 );
       pRec->nField = nField;
-      assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec) 
-           || pParse->db->mallocFailed 
+      assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)
+           || pParse->db->mallocFailed
       );
     }else{
       /* Unless i==pIdx->nSample, indicating that pRec is larger than
@@ -132966,7 +132966,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
       ** (iCol+1) field prefix of sample i.  */
       assert( i<=pIdx->nSample && i>=0 );
       pRec->nField = iCol+1;
-      assert( i==pIdx->nSample 
+      assert( i==pIdx->nSample
            || sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)>0
            || pParse->db->mallocFailed );
 
@@ -132994,7 +132994,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
     aStat[0] = aSample[i].anLt[iCol];
     aStat[1] = aSample[i].anEq[iCol];
   }else{
-    /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first 
+    /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first
     ** sample that is greater than pRec. Or, if i==pIdx->nSample then pRec
     ** is larger than all samples in the array. */
     tRowcnt iUpper, iGap;
@@ -133026,7 +133026,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
 
 /*
 ** If it is not NULL, pTerm is a term that provides an upper or lower
-** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated 
+** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated
 ** that the scan will visit nNew rows. This function returns the number
 ** estimated to be visited after taking pTerm into account.
 **
@@ -133063,18 +133063,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx, int iCo
 
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
-/* 
+/*
 ** This function is called to estimate the number of rows visited by a
 ** range-scan on a skip-scan index. For example:
 **
 **   CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a, b, c);
 **   SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=? AND c BETWEEN ? AND ?;
 **
-** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows 
-** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate 
+** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows
+** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate
 ** by some factor to account for the (c BETWEEN ? AND ?) expression based
-** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be peformed multiple 
-** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with 
+** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be peformed multiple
+** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with
 ** by the caller.
 **
 ** It does this by scanning through all stat4 samples, comparing values
@@ -133095,7 +133095,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx, int iCo
 ** estimate of the number of rows delivered remains unchanged), *pbDone
 ** is left as is.
 **
-** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise, 
+** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise,
 ** SQLITE_OK.
 */
 static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
@@ -133113,7 +133113,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   u8 aff = sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(db, p, nEq);
   CollSeq *pColl;
-  
+
   sqlite3_value *p1 = 0;          /* Value extracted from pLower */
   sqlite3_value *p2 = 0;          /* Value extracted from pUpper */
   sqlite3_value *pVal = 0;        /* Value extracted from record */
@@ -133145,7 +133145,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
     nDiff = (nUpper - nLower);
     if( nDiff<=0 ) nDiff = 1;
 
-    /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the 
+    /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the
     ** comparisons indicate that they are close together, use the fallback
     ** method (assume that the scan visits 1/64 of the rows) for estimating
     ** the number of rows visited. Otherwise, estimate the number of rows
@@ -133192,7 +133192,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
 **
 **   ... FROM t1 WHERE a = ? AND b > ? AND b < ? ...
 **
-** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second 
+** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second
 ** left-most column of the index). Or, if the query is:
 **
 **   ... FROM t1 WHERE a > ? AND a < ? ...
@@ -133200,13 +133200,13 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
 ** then nEq is set to 0.
 **
 ** When this function is called, *pnOut is set to the sqlite3LogEst() of the
-** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without 
-** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of 
+** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without
+** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of
 ** rows in the index. Assuming no error occurs, *pnOut is adjusted (reduced)
 ** to account for the range constraints pLower and pUpper.
-** 
+**
 ** In the absence of sqlite_stat4 ANALYZE data, or if such data cannot be
-** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4. 
+** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4.
 ** and a pair of constraints (x>? AND x<?) reduces the expected number of
 ** rows visited by a factor of 64.
 */
@@ -133232,7 +133232,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
       int nBtm = pLoop->u.btree.nBtm;
       int nTop = pLoop->u.btree.nTop;
 
-      /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in 
+      /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in
       ** the index that are less than the lower bound of the range query. The
       ** lower bound being the concatenation of $P and $L, where $P is the
       ** key-prefix formed by the nEq values matched against the nEq left-most
@@ -133241,7 +133241,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
       ** Or, if pLower is NULL or $L cannot be extracted from it (because it
       ** is not a simple variable or literal value), the lower bound of the
       ** range is $P. Due to a quirk in the way whereKeyStats() works, even
-      ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and 
+      ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and
       ** ($P:$L) and the larger of the two returned values is used.
       **
       ** Similarly, iUpper is to be set to the estimate of the number of rows
@@ -133265,7 +133265,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
         iLower = 0;
         iUpper = p->nRowEst0;
       }else{
-        /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must 
+        /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must
         ** have been requested when testing key $P in whereEqualScanEst().  */
         whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a);
         iLower = a[0];
@@ -133353,7 +133353,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
   ** reduced by an additional 75%. This means that, by default, an open-ended
   ** range query (e.g. col > ?) is assumed to match 1/4 of the rows in the
   ** index. While a closed range (e.g. col BETWEEN ? AND ?) is estimated to
-  ** match 1/64 of the index. */ 
+  ** match 1/64 of the index. */
   if( pLower && pLower->truthProb>0 && pUpper && pUpper->truthProb>0 ){
     nNew -= 20;
   }
@@ -133380,7 +133380,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
 ** for that index.  When pExpr==NULL that means the constraint is
 ** "x IS NULL" instead of "x=VALUE".
 **
-** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. 
+** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
 ** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return
 ** non-zero.
 **
@@ -133431,7 +133431,7 @@ static int whereEqualScanEst(
   WHERETRACE(0x10,("equality scan regions %s(%d): %d\n",
                    p->zName, nEq-1, (int)a[1]));
   *pnRow = a[1];
-  
+
   return rc;
 }
 #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4 */
@@ -133444,7 +133444,7 @@ static int whereEqualScanEst(
 **
 **        WHERE x IN (1,2,3,4)
 **
-** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. 
+** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
 ** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return
 ** non-zero.
 **
@@ -133504,7 +133504,7 @@ static void whereTermPrint(WhereTerm *pTerm, int iTerm){
       sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left={%d:%d}",
                        pTerm->leftCursor, pTerm->u.leftColumn);
     }else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0 && pTerm->u.pOrInfo!=0 ){
-      sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%lld", 
+      sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%lld",
                        pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable);
     }else{
       sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left=%d", pTerm->leftCursor);
@@ -133700,7 +133700,7 @@ static void whereInfoFree(sqlite3 *db, WhereInfo *pWInfo){
 **
 ** Conditions (2) and (3) mean that X is a "proper subset" of Y.
 ** If X is a proper subset of Y then Y is a better choice and ought
-** to have a lower cost.  This routine returns TRUE when that cost 
+** to have a lower cost.  This routine returns TRUE when that cost
 ** relationship is inverted and needs to be adjusted.  Constraint (4)
 ** was added because if X uses skip-scan less than Y it still might
 ** deserve a lower cost even if it is a proper subset of Y.  Constraint (5)
@@ -133727,7 +133727,7 @@ static int whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(
     }
     if( j<0 ) return 0;  /* X not a subset of Y since term X[i] not used by Y */
   }
-  if( (pX->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0 
+  if( (pX->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
    && (pY->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){
     return 0;  /* Constraint (5) */
   }
@@ -133754,7 +133754,7 @@ static void whereLoopAdjustCost(const WhereLoop *p, WhereLoop *pTemplate){
     if( p->iTab!=pTemplate->iTab ) continue;
     if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) continue;
     if( whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(p, pTemplate) ){
-      /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its 
+      /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its
       ** subset p. */
       WHERETRACE(0x80,("subset cost adjustment %d,%d to %d,%d\n",
                        pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut, p->rRun, p->nOut-1));
@@ -133800,7 +133800,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser(
     /* In the current implementation, the rSetup value is either zero
     ** or the cost of building an automatic index (NlogN) and the NlogN
     ** is the same for compatible WhereLoops. */
-    assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0 
+    assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0
                  || p->rSetup==pTemplate->rSetup );
 
     /* whereLoopAddBtree() always generates and inserts the automatic index
@@ -133865,7 +133865,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser(
 **
 ** When accumulating multiple loops (when pBuilder->pOrSet is NULL) we
 ** still might overwrite similar loops with the new template if the
-** new template is better.  Loops may be overwritten if the following 
+** new template is better.  Loops may be overwritten if the following
 ** conditions are met:
 **
 **    (1)  They have the same iTab.
@@ -133914,7 +133914,7 @@ static int whereLoopInsert(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, WhereLoop *pTemplate){
       whereLoopPrint(pTemplate, pBuilder->pWC);
     }
 #endif
-    return SQLITE_OK;  
+    return SQLITE_OK;
   }else{
     p = *ppPrev;
   }
@@ -134047,7 +134047,7 @@ static void whereLoopOutputAdjust(
   if( pLoop->nOut > nRow-iReduce )  pLoop->nOut = nRow - iReduce;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Term pTerm is a vector range comparison operation. The first comparison
 ** in the vector can be optimized using column nEq of the index. This
 ** function returns the total number of vector elements that can be used
@@ -134076,7 +134076,7 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
 
   nCmp = MIN(nCmp, (pIdx->nColumn - nEq));
   for(i=1; i<nCmp; i++){
-    /* Test if comparison i of pTerm is compatible with column (i+nEq) 
+    /* Test if comparison i of pTerm is compatible with column (i+nEq)
     ** of the index. If not, exit the loop.  */
     char aff;                     /* Comparison affinity */
     char idxaff = 0;              /* Indexed columns affinity */
@@ -134093,9 +134093,9 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
     ** the right column of the right source table. And that the sort
     ** order of the index column is the same as the sort order of the
     ** leftmost index column.  */
-    if( pLhs->op!=TK_COLUMN 
-     || pLhs->iTable!=iCur 
-     || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq] 
+    if( pLhs->op!=TK_COLUMN
+     || pLhs->iTable!=iCur
+     || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq]
      || pIdx->aSortOrder[i+nEq]!=pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]
     ){
       break;
@@ -134124,12 +134124,12 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
 #endif
 
 /*
-** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the 
+** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the
 ** index pIndex. Try to match one more.
 **
-** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the 
-** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq 
-** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this 
+** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the
+** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq
+** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this
 ** function returns.
 **
 ** If pProbe->tnum==0, that means pIndex is a fake index used for the
@@ -134237,9 +134237,9 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
     pNew->prereq = (saved_prereq | pTerm->prereqRight) & ~pNew->maskSelf;
 
     assert( nInMul==0
-        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0 
-        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0 
-        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0 
+        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0
+        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0
+        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0
     );
 
     if( eOp & WO_IN ){
@@ -134268,7 +134268,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
       int iCol = pProbe->aiColumn[saved_nEq];
       pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_COLUMN_EQ;
       assert( saved_nEq==pNew->u.btree.nEq );
-      if( iCol==XN_ROWID 
+      if( iCol==XN_ROWID
        || (iCol>0 && nInMul==0 && saved_nEq==pProbe->nKeyCol-1)
       ){
         if( iCol>=0 && pProbe->uniqNotNull==0 ){
@@ -134315,7 +134315,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
 
     /* At this point pNew->nOut is set to the number of rows expected to
     ** be visited by the index scan before considering term pTerm, or the
-    ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all 
+    ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all
     ** "x IN(...)" terms are replaced with "x = ?". This block updates
     ** the value of pNew->nOut to account for pTerm (but not nIn/nInMul).  */
     assert( pNew->nOut==saved_nOut );
@@ -134336,8 +134336,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
       }else{
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
         tRowcnt nOut = 0;
-        if( nInMul==0 
-         && pProbe->nSample 
+        if( nInMul==0
+         && pProbe->nSample
          && pNew->u.btree.nEq<=pProbe->nSampleCol
          && ((eOp & WO_IN)==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pTerm->pExpr, EP_xIsSelect))
         ){
@@ -134363,8 +134363,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
         {
           pNew->nOut += (pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq] - pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq-1]);
           if( eOp & WO_ISNULL ){
-            /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a 
-            ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows 
+            /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a
+            ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows
             ** as (col=?). */
             pNew->nOut += 10;
           }
@@ -134416,12 +134416,12 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
 
   /* Consider using a skip-scan if there are no WHERE clause constraints
   ** available for the left-most terms of the index, and if the average
-  ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18. 
+  ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18.
   **
   ** The magic number 18 is selected on the basis that scanning 17 rows
   ** is almost always quicker than an index seek (even though if the index
   ** contains fewer than 2^17 rows we assume otherwise in other parts of
-  ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower. 
+  ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower.
   ** On the other hand, the extra seeks could end up being significantly
   ** more expensive.  */
   assert( 42==sqlite3LogEst(18) );
@@ -134524,7 +134524,7 @@ static int whereUsablePartialIndex(int iTab, WhereClause *pWC, Expr *pWhere){
   for(i=0, pTerm=pWC->a; i<pWC->nTerm; i++, pTerm++){
     Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr;
     if( (!ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromJoin) || pExpr->iRightJoinTable==iTab)
-     && sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr(pParse, pExpr, pWhere, iTab) 
+     && sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr(pParse, pExpr, pWhere, iTab)
     ){
       return 1;
     }
@@ -134546,18 +134546,18 @@ static int whereUsablePartialIndex(int iTab, WhereClause *pWC, Expr *pWhere){
 **     cost = nRow * K                      // scan of covering index
 **     cost = nRow * (K+3.0)                // scan of non-covering index
 **
-** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative 
+** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative
 ** estimated average size of the index and table records.
 **
 ** For an index scan, where nVisit is the number of index rows visited
-** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on 
+** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on
 ** the index b-tree:
 **
 **     cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + K * nVisit)          // covering index
 **     cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + (K+3.0) * nVisit)    // non-covering index
 **
-** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the 
-** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when 
+** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the
+** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when
 ** implicit "x IN (SELECT x FROM tbl)" terms are added for skip-scans.
 **
 ** The estimated values (nRow, nVisit, nSeek) often contain a large amount
@@ -134587,7 +134587,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree(
   LogEst rLogSize;            /* Logarithm of the number of rows in the table */
   WhereClause *pWC;           /* The parsed WHERE clause */
   Table *pTab;                /* Table being queried */
-  
+
   pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
   pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
   pTabList = pWInfo->pTabList;
@@ -134765,7 +134765,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree(
               if( pTerm->eOperator & (WO_EQ|WO_IS) ) nLookup -= 19;
             }
           }
-          
+
           pNew->rRun = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pNew->rRun, nLookup);
         }
         ApplyCostMultiplier(pNew->rRun, pTab->costMult);
@@ -134844,13 +134844,13 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
   *pbIn = 0;
   pNew->prereq = mPrereq;
 
-  /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by 
+  /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by
   ** arguments mUsable and mExclude. */
   pIdxCons = *(struct sqlite3_index_constraint**)&pIdxInfo->aConstraint;
   for(i=0; i<nConstraint; i++, pIdxCons++){
     WhereTerm *pTerm = &pWC->a[pIdxCons->iTermOffset];
     pIdxCons->usable = 0;
-    if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight 
+    if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight
      && (pTerm->eOperator & mExclude)==0
     ){
       pIdxCons->usable = 1;
@@ -134958,8 +134958,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
 ** entries that occur before the virtual table in the FROM clause and are
 ** separated from it by at least one LEFT or CROSS JOIN. Similarly, the
 ** mUnusable mask contains all FROM clause entries that occur after the
-** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or 
-** CROSS JOIN. 
+** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or
+** CROSS JOIN.
 **
 ** For example, if the query were:
 **
@@ -134967,9 +134967,9 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
 **
 ** then mPrereq corresponds to (t1, t2) and mUnusable to (t5, t6).
 **
-** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual 
-** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by 
-** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex. 
+** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual
+** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by
+** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex.
 ** Conversely, all tables in mUnusable must be scanned after the current
 ** virtual table, so any terms for which the prerequisites overlap with
 ** mUnusable should always be configured as "not-usable" for xBestIndex.
@@ -134998,7 +134998,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
   pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
   pSrc = &pWInfo->pTabList->a[pNew->iTab];
   assert( IsVirtual(pSrc->pTab) );
-  p = allocateIndexInfo(pParse, pWC, mUnusable, pSrc, pBuilder->pOrderBy, 
+  p = allocateIndexInfo(pParse, pWC, mUnusable, pSrc, pBuilder->pOrderBy,
       &mNoOmit);
   if( p==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
   pNew->rSetup = 0;
@@ -135017,7 +135017,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
 
   /* If the call to xBestIndex() with all terms enabled produced a plan
   ** that does not require any source tables (IOW: a plan with mBest==0),
-  ** then there is no point in making any further calls to xBestIndex() 
+  ** then there is no point in making any further calls to xBestIndex()
   ** since they will all return the same result (if the xBestIndex()
   ** implementation is sane). */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (mBest = (pNew->prereq & ~mPrereq))!=0 ){
@@ -135040,7 +135040,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
       }
     }
 
-    /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq) 
+    /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq)
     ** in the set of terms that apply to the current virtual table.  */
     while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       int i;
@@ -135096,8 +135096,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
 ** btrees or virtual tables.
 */
 static int whereLoopAddOr(
-  WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, 
-  Bitmask mPrereq, 
+  WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder,
+  Bitmask mPrereq,
   Bitmask mUnusable
 ){
   WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
@@ -135110,7 +135110,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
   WhereLoopBuilder sSubBuild;
   WhereOrSet sSum, sCur;
   struct SrcList_item *pItem;
-  
+
   pWC = pBuilder->pWC;
   pWCEnd = pWC->a + pWC->nTerm;
   pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
@@ -135120,14 +135120,14 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
 
   for(pTerm=pWC->a; pTerm<pWCEnd && rc==SQLITE_OK; pTerm++){
     if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0
-     && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0 
+     && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0
     ){
       WhereClause * const pOrWC = &pTerm->u.pOrInfo->wc;
       WhereTerm * const pOrWCEnd = &pOrWC->a[pOrWC->nTerm];
       WhereTerm *pOrTerm;
       int once = 1;
       int i, j;
-    
+
       sSubBuild = *pBuilder;
       sSubBuild.pOrderBy = 0;
       sSubBuild.pOrSet = &sCur;
@@ -135148,7 +135148,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
         }
         sCur.n = 0;
 #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED
-        WHERETRACE(0x200, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n", 
+        WHERETRACE(0x200, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n",
                    (int)(pOrTerm-pOrWC->a), pTerm, sSubBuild.pWC->nTerm));
         if( sqlite3WhereTrace & 0x400 ){
           sqlite3WhereClausePrint(sSubBuild.pWC);
@@ -135195,8 +135195,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
         /* TUNING: Currently sSum.a[i].rRun is set to the sum of the costs
         ** of all sub-scans required by the OR-scan. However, due to rounding
         ** errors, it may be that the cost of the OR-scan is equal to its
-        ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty 
-        ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that 
+        ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty
+        ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that
         ** this does not happen. Otherwise, for WHERE clauses such as the
         ** following where there is an index on "y":
         **
@@ -135216,7 +135216,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
 }
 
 /*
-** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables 
+** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables
 */
 static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
   WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
@@ -135273,17 +135273,17 @@ static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
 ** Examine a WherePath (with the addition of the extra WhereLoop of the 6th
 ** parameters) to see if it outputs rows in the requested ORDER BY
 ** (or GROUP BY) without requiring a separate sort operation.  Return N:
-** 
+**
 **   N>0:   N terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied
 **   N==0:  No terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied
-**   N<0:   Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied.   
+**   N<0:   Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied.
 **
 ** Note that processing for WHERE_GROUPBY and WHERE_DISTINCTBY is not as
 ** strict.  With GROUP BY and DISTINCT the only requirement is that
 ** equivalent rows appear immediately adjacent to one another.  GROUP BY
 ** and DISTINCT do not require rows to appear in any particular order as long
 ** as equivalent rows are grouped together.  Thus for GROUP BY and DISTINCT
-** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order.  With ORDER BY, the 
+** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order.  With ORDER BY, the
 ** pOrderBy terms must be matched in strict left-to-right order.
 */
 static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
@@ -135333,7 +135333,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
   ** row of the WhereLoop.  Every one-row WhereLoop is automatically
   ** order-distinct.   A WhereLoop that has no columns in the ORDER BY clause
   ** is not order-distinct. To be order-distinct is not quite the same as being
-  ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that 
+  ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that
   ** are NULL and NULL values are equivalent for the purpose of order-distinct.
   ** To be order-distinct, the columns must be UNIQUE and NOT NULL.
   **
@@ -135384,7 +135384,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
                        ~ready, eqOpMask, 0);
       if( pTerm==0 ) continue;
       if( pTerm->eOperator==WO_IN ){
-        /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT 
+        /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT
         ** optimization, and then only if they are actually used
         ** by the query plan */
         assert( wctrlFlags & WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT );
@@ -135392,7 +135392,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
         if( j>=pLoop->nLTerm ) continue;
       }
       if( (pTerm->eOperator&(WO_EQ|WO_IS))!=0 && pOBExpr->iColumn>=0 ){
-        if( sqlite3ExprCollSeqMatch(pWInfo->pParse, 
+        if( sqlite3ExprCollSeqMatch(pWInfo->pParse,
                   pOrderBy->a[i].pExpr, pTerm->pExpr)==0 ){
           continue;
         }
@@ -135425,16 +135425,16 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
       for(j=0; j<nColumn; j++){
         u8 bOnce = 1; /* True to run the ORDER BY search loop */
 
-        assert( j>=pLoop->u.btree.nEq 
+        assert( j>=pLoop->u.btree.nEq
             || (pLoop->aLTerm[j]==0)==(j<pLoop->nSkip)
         );
         if( j<pLoop->u.btree.nEq && j>=pLoop->nSkip ){
           u16 eOp = pLoop->aLTerm[j]->eOperator;
 
           /* Skip over == and IS and ISNULL terms.  (Also skip IN terms when
-          ** doing WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT processing). 
+          ** doing WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT processing).
           **
-          ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...)) 
+          ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...))
           ** expression for which the SELECT returns more than one column,
           ** check that it is the only column used by this loop. Otherwise,
           ** if it is one of two or more, none of the columns can be
@@ -135444,7 +135444,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
               testcase( isOrderDistinct );
               isOrderDistinct = 0;
             }
-            continue;  
+            continue;
           }else if( ALWAYS(eOp & WO_IN) ){
             /* ALWAYS() justification: eOp is an equality operator due to the
             ** j<pLoop->u.btree.nEq constraint above.  Any equality other
@@ -135485,7 +135485,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
         }
 
         /* Find the ORDER BY term that corresponds to the j-th column
-        ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off 
+        ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off
         */
         isMatch = 0;
         for(i=0; bOnce && i<nOrderBy; i++){
@@ -135614,7 +135614,7 @@ static const char *wherePathName(WherePath *pPath, int nLoop, WhereLoop *pLast){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have 
+** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have
 ** nOrderby columns and that the first nSorted columns are already in
 ** order.
 */
@@ -135624,13 +135624,13 @@ static LogEst whereSortingCost(
   int nOrderBy,
   int nSorted
 ){
-  /* TUNING: Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is 
+  /* TUNING: Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is
   ** the number of rows to sort is:
   **
   **   cost = (3.0 * N * log(N)).
-  ** 
-  ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y 
-  ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the 
+  **
+  ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y
+  ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the
   ** sorting cost to:
   **
   **   cost = (3.0 * N * log(N)) * (Y/X)
@@ -135723,7 +135723,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
     ** space for the aSortCost[] array. Each element of the aSortCost array
     ** is either zero - meaning it has not yet been initialized - or the
     ** cost of sorting nRowEst rows of data where the first X terms of
-    ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array 
+    ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array
     ** index.  */
     aSortCost = (LogEst*)pX;
     memset(aSortCost, 0, sizeof(LogEst) * nOrderBy);
@@ -135744,7 +135744,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
     ** in this case the query may return a maximum of one row, the results
     ** are already in the requested order. Set isOrdered to nOrderBy to
     ** indicate this. Or, if nLoop is greater than zero, set isOrdered to
-    ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered, 
+    ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered,
     ** depending on the loops added to the current plan.  */
     aFrom[0].isOrdered = nLoop>0 ? -1 : nOrderBy;
   }
@@ -135771,7 +135771,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
           assert( 10==sqlite3LogEst(2) );
           continue;
         }
-        /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop. 
+        /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop.
         ** Compute its cost */
         rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pWLoop->rSetup,pWLoop->rRun + pFrom->nRow);
         rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, pFrom->rUnsorted);
@@ -135794,7 +135794,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
 
           WHERETRACE(0x002,
               ("---- sort cost=%-3d (%d/%d) increases cost %3d to %-3d\n",
-               aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy, 
+               aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy,
                rUnsorted, rCost));
         }else{
           rCost = rUnsorted;
@@ -135859,11 +135859,11 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
           ** same set of loops and has the same isOrdered setting as the
           ** candidate path.  Check to see if the candidate should replace
           ** pTo or if the candidate should be skipped.
-          ** 
+          **
           ** The conditional is an expanded vector comparison equivalent to:
           **   (pTo->rCost,pTo->nRow,pTo->rUnsorted) <= (rCost,nOut,rUnsorted)
           */
-          if( pTo->rCost<rCost 
+          if( pTo->rCost<rCost
            || (pTo->rCost==rCost
                && (pTo->nRow<nOut
                    || (pTo->nRow==nOut && pTo->rUnsorted<=rUnsorted)
@@ -135914,8 +135914,8 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
           mxCost = aTo[0].rCost;
           mxUnsorted = aTo[0].nRow;
           for(jj=1, pTo=&aTo[1]; jj<mxChoice; jj++, pTo++){
-            if( pTo->rCost>mxCost 
-             || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted) 
+            if( pTo->rCost>mxCost
+             || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted)
             ){
               mxCost = pTo->rCost;
               mxUnsorted = pTo->rUnsorted;
@@ -135954,7 +135954,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
     sqlite3DbFreeNN(db, pSpace);
     return SQLITE_ERROR;
   }
-  
+
   /* Find the lowest cost path.  pFrom will be left pointing to that path */
   pFrom = aFrom;
   for(ii=1; ii<nFrom; ii++){
@@ -135992,7 +135992,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
         pWInfo->nOBSat = 0;
         if( nLoop>0 ){
           u32 wsFlags = pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1]->wsFlags;
-          if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0 
+          if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0
            && (wsFlags&(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN))!=(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN)
           ){
             Bitmask m = 0;
@@ -136012,7 +136012,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
         && pWInfo->nOBSat==pWInfo->pOrderBy->nExpr && nLoop>0
     ){
       Bitmask revMask = 0;
-      int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy, 
+      int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy,
           pFrom, 0, nLoop-1, pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1], &revMask
       );
       assert( pWInfo->sorted==0 );
@@ -136039,7 +136039,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
 ** times for the common case.
 **
 ** Return non-zero on success, if this query can be handled by this
-** no-frills query planner.  Return zero if this query needs the 
+** no-frills query planner.  Return zero if this query needs the
 ** general-purpose query planner.
 */
 static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
@@ -136079,8 +136079,8 @@ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
       int opMask;
       assert( pLoop->aLTermSpace==pLoop->aLTerm );
       if( !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx)
-       || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0 
-       || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace) 
+       || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0
+       || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace)
       ) continue;
       opMask = pIdx->uniqNotNull ? (WO_EQ|WO_IS) : WO_EQ;
       for(j=0; j<pIdx->nKeyCol; j++){
@@ -136133,8 +136133,8 @@ static int exprNodeIsDeterministic(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return true if the expression contains no non-deterministic SQL 
-** functions. Do not consider non-deterministic SQL functions that are 
+** Return true if the expression contains no non-deterministic SQL
+** functions. Do not consider non-deterministic SQL functions that are
 ** part of sub-select statements.
 */
 static int exprIsDeterministic(Expr *p){
@@ -136227,7 +136227,7 @@ static int exprIsDeterministic(Expr *p){
 ** if there is one.  If there is no ORDER BY clause or if this routine
 ** is called from an UPDATE or DELETE statement, then pOrderBy is NULL.
 **
-** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index.  If 
+** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index.  If
 ** WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE is set, iIdxCur is the cursor number of an index
 ** to use for OR clause processing.  The WHERE clause should use this
 ** specific cursor.  If WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED is set, then iIdxCur is
@@ -136260,8 +136260,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   u8 bFordelete = 0;         /* OPFLAG_FORDELETE or zero, as appropriate */
 
   assert( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_MULTIROW)==0 || (
-        (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0 
-     && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0 
+        (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0
+     && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0
   ));
 
   /* Only one of WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE or WHERE_USE_LIMIT */
@@ -136284,7 +136284,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   }
 
   /* The number of tables in the FROM clause is limited by the number of
-  ** bits in a Bitmask 
+  ** bits in a Bitmask
   */
   testcase( pTabList->nSrc==BMS );
   if( pTabList->nSrc>BMS ){
@@ -136292,7 +136292,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
     return 0;
   }
 
-  /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in 
+  /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in
   ** pTabList.  But if the WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE flag is set, then we should
   ** only generate code for the first table in pTabList and assume that
   ** any cursors associated with subsequent tables are uninitialized.
@@ -136324,7 +136324,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   pWInfo->wctrlFlags = wctrlFlags;
   pWInfo->iLimit = iAuxArg;
   pWInfo->savedNQueryLoop = pParse->nQueryLoop;
-  memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0, 
+  memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0,
          offsetof(WhereInfo,sWC) - offsetof(WhereInfo,nOBSat));
   memset(&pWInfo->a[0], 0, sizeof(WhereLoop)+nTabList*sizeof(WhereLevel));
   assert( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF );  /* ONEPASS defaults to OFF */
@@ -136344,7 +136344,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   initMaskSet(pMaskSet);
   sqlite3WhereClauseInit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWInfo);
   sqlite3WhereSplit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWhere, TK_AND);
-    
+
   /* Special case: No FROM clause
   */
   if( nTabList==0 ){
@@ -136383,14 +136383,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
     }
   #endif
   }
-  
+
   /* Analyze all of the subexpressions. */
   sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(pTabList, &pWInfo->sWC);
   if( db->mallocFailed ) goto whereBeginError;
 
   /* Special case: WHERE terms that do not refer to any tables in the join
   ** (constant expressions). Evaluate each such term, and jump over all the
-  ** generated code if the result is not true.  
+  ** generated code if the result is not true.
   **
   ** Do not do this if the expression contains non-deterministic functions
   ** that are not within a sub-select. This is not strictly required, but
@@ -136435,7 +136435,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   if( nTabList!=1 || whereShortCut(&sWLB)==0 ){
     rc = whereLoopAddAll(&sWLB);
     if( rc ) goto whereBeginError;
-  
+
 #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED
     if( sqlite3WhereTrace ){    /* Display all of the WhereLoop objects */
       WhereLoop *p;
@@ -136448,7 +136448,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
       }
     }
 #endif
-  
+
     wherePathSolver(pWInfo, 0);
     if( db->mallocFailed ) goto whereBeginError;
     if( pWInfo->pOrderBy ){
@@ -136709,7 +136709,7 @@ whereBeginError:
 }
 
 /*
-** Generate the end of the WHERE loop.  See comments on 
+** Generate the end of the WHERE loop.  See comments on
 ** sqlite3WhereBegin() for additional information.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
@@ -136803,8 +136803,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
       if( (ws & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, pTabList->a[i].iCursor);
       }
-      if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED) 
-       || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCovidx) 
+      if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)
+       || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCovidx)
       ){
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, pLevel->iIdxCur);
       }
@@ -136849,7 +136849,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
     ** from the index instead of from the table where possible.  In some cases
     ** this optimization prevents the table from ever being read, which can
     ** yield a significant performance boost.
-    ** 
+    **
     ** Calls to the code generator in between sqlite3WhereBegin and
     ** sqlite3WhereEnd will have created code that references the table
     ** directly.  This loop scans all that code looking for opcodes
@@ -136883,7 +136883,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
             pOp->p2 = x;
             pOp->p1 = pLevel->iIdxCur;
           }
-          assert( (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 || x>=0 
+          assert( (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 || x>=0
               || pWInfo->eOnePass );
         }else if( pOp->opcode==OP_Rowid ){
           pOp->p1 = pLevel->iIdxCur;
@@ -137012,7 +137012,7 @@ static void disableLookaside(Parse *pParse){
         pLoop->pNext = pNext;
         pLoop->selFlags |= SF_Compound;
       }
-      if( (p->selFlags & SF_MultiValue)==0 && 
+      if( (p->selFlags & SF_MultiValue)==0 &&
         (mxSelect = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_COMPOUND_SELECT])>0 &&
         cnt>mxSelect
       ){
@@ -137050,7 +137050,7 @@ static void disableLookaside(Parse *pParse){
       }
 #if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0
       p->nHeight = 1;
-#endif  
+#endif
     }
     pOut->pExpr = p;
     pOut->zStart = t.z;
@@ -137089,7 +137089,7 @@ static void disableLookaside(Parse *pParse){
   ){
     pOperand->pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, op, pOperand->pExpr, 0);
     pOperand->zEnd = &pPostOp->z[pPostOp->n];
-  }                           
+  }
 
   /* A routine to convert a binary TK_IS or TK_ISNOT expression into a
   ** unary TK_ISNULL or TK_NOTNULL expression. */
@@ -137168,7 +137168,7 @@ static void disableLookaside(Parse *pParse){
 **                       the minor type might be the name of the identifier.
 **                       Each non-terminal can have a different minor type.
 **                       Terminal symbols all have the same minor type, though.
-**                       This macros defines the minor type for terminal 
+**                       This macros defines the minor type for terminal
 **                       symbols.
 **    YYMINORTYPE        is the data type used for all minor types.
 **                       This is typically a union of many types, one of
@@ -137254,7 +137254,7 @@ typedef union {
 /* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the
 ** current state and lookahead token.  These tables are used to implement
 ** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an
-** action integer.  
+** action integer.
 **
 ** Suppose the action integer is N.  Then the action is determined as
 ** follows
@@ -137767,9 +137767,9 @@ static const YYACTIONTYPE yy_default[] = {
 };
 /********** End of lemon-generated parsing tables *****************************/
 
-/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.  
+/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.
 ** If a construct like the following:
-** 
+**
 **      %fallback ID X Y Z.
 **
 ** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y,
@@ -137923,10 +137923,10 @@ static char *yyTracePrompt = 0;
 #endif /* NDEBUG */
 
 #ifndef NDEBUG
-/* 
+/*
 ** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace
 ** and a prompt to preface each trace message.  Tracing is turned off
-** by making either argument NULL 
+** by making either argument NULL
 **
 ** Inputs:
 ** <ul>
@@ -137951,70 +137951,70 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ParserTrace(FILE *TraceFILE, char *zTracePrompt){
 #ifndef NDEBUG
 /* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals
 ** are required.  The following table supplies these names */
-static const char *const yyTokenName[] = { 
-  "$",             "SEMI",          "EXPLAIN",       "QUERY",       
-  "PLAN",          "BEGIN",         "TRANSACTION",   "DEFERRED",    
-  "IMMEDIATE",     "EXCLUSIVE",     "COMMIT",        "END",         
-  "ROLLBACK",      "SAVEPOINT",     "RELEASE",       "TO",          
-  "TABLE",         "CREATE",        "IF",            "NOT",         
-  "EXISTS",        "TEMP",          "LP",            "RP",          
-  "AS",            "WITHOUT",       "COMMA",         "ABORT",       
-  "ACTION",        "AFTER",         "ANALYZE",       "ASC",         
-  "ATTACH",        "BEFORE",        "BY",            "CASCADE",     
-  "CAST",          "CONFLICT",      "DATABASE",      "DESC",        
-  "DETACH",        "EACH",          "FAIL",          "OR",          
-  "AND",           "IS",            "MATCH",         "LIKE_KW",     
-  "BETWEEN",       "IN",            "ISNULL",        "NOTNULL",     
-  "NE",            "EQ",            "GT",            "LE",          
-  "LT",            "GE",            "ESCAPE",        "ID",          
-  "COLUMNKW",      "FOR",           "IGNORE",        "INITIALLY",   
-  "INSTEAD",       "NO",            "KEY",           "OF",          
-  "OFFSET",        "PRAGMA",        "RAISE",         "RECURSIVE",   
-  "REPLACE",       "RESTRICT",      "ROW",           "TRIGGER",     
-  "VACUUM",        "VIEW",          "VIRTUAL",       "WITH",        
-  "REINDEX",       "RENAME",        "CTIME_KW",      "ANY",         
-  "BITAND",        "BITOR",         "LSHIFT",        "RSHIFT",      
-  "PLUS",          "MINUS",         "STAR",          "SLASH",       
-  "REM",           "CONCAT",        "COLLATE",       "BITNOT",      
-  "INDEXED",       "STRING",        "JOIN_KW",       "CONSTRAINT",  
-  "DEFAULT",       "NULL",          "PRIMARY",       "UNIQUE",      
-  "CHECK",         "REFERENCES",    "AUTOINCR",      "ON",          
-  "INSERT",        "DELETE",        "UPDATE",        "SET",         
-  "DEFERRABLE",    "FOREIGN",       "DROP",          "UNION",       
-  "ALL",           "EXCEPT",        "INTERSECT",     "SELECT",      
-  "VALUES",        "DISTINCT",      "DOT",           "FROM",        
-  "JOIN",          "USING",         "ORDER",         "GROUP",       
-  "HAVING",        "LIMIT",         "WHERE",         "INTO",        
-  "FLOAT",         "BLOB",          "INTEGER",       "VARIABLE",    
-  "CASE",          "WHEN",          "THEN",          "ELSE",        
-  "INDEX",         "ALTER",         "ADD",           "error",       
-  "input",         "cmdlist",       "ecmd",          "explain",     
-  "cmdx",          "cmd",           "transtype",     "trans_opt",   
+static const char *const yyTokenName[] = {
+  "$",             "SEMI",          "EXPLAIN",       "QUERY",
+  "PLAN",          "BEGIN",         "TRANSACTION",   "DEFERRED",
+  "IMMEDIATE",     "EXCLUSIVE",     "COMMIT",        "END",
+  "ROLLBACK",      "SAVEPOINT",     "RELEASE",       "TO",
+  "TABLE",         "CREATE",        "IF",            "NOT",
+  "EXISTS",        "TEMP",          "LP",            "RP",
+  "AS",            "WITHOUT",       "COMMA",         "ABORT",
+  "ACTION",        "AFTER",         "ANALYZE",       "ASC",
+  "ATTACH",        "BEFORE",        "BY",            "CASCADE",
+  "CAST",          "CONFLICT",      "DATABASE",      "DESC",
+  "DETACH",        "EACH",          "FAIL",          "OR",
+  "AND",           "IS",            "MATCH",         "LIKE_KW",
+  "BETWEEN",       "IN",            "ISNULL",        "NOTNULL",
+  "NE",            "EQ",            "GT",            "LE",
+  "LT",            "GE",            "ESCAPE",        "ID",
+  "COLUMNKW",      "FOR",           "IGNORE",        "INITIALLY",
+  "INSTEAD",       "NO",            "KEY",           "OF",
+  "OFFSET",        "PRAGMA",        "RAISE",         "RECURSIVE",
+  "REPLACE",       "RESTRICT",      "ROW",           "TRIGGER",
+  "VACUUM",        "VIEW",          "VIRTUAL",       "WITH",
+  "REINDEX",       "RENAME",        "CTIME_KW",      "ANY",
+  "BITAND",        "BITOR",         "LSHIFT",        "RSHIFT",
+  "PLUS",          "MINUS",         "STAR",          "SLASH",
+  "REM",           "CONCAT",        "COLLATE",       "BITNOT",
+  "INDEXED",       "STRING",        "JOIN_KW",       "CONSTRAINT",
+  "DEFAULT",       "NULL",          "PRIMARY",       "UNIQUE",
+  "CHECK",         "REFERENCES",    "AUTOINCR",      "ON",
+  "INSERT",        "DELETE",        "UPDATE",        "SET",
+  "DEFERRABLE",    "FOREIGN",       "DROP",          "UNION",
+  "ALL",           "EXCEPT",        "INTERSECT",     "SELECT",
+  "VALUES",        "DISTINCT",      "DOT",           "FROM",
+  "JOIN",          "USING",         "ORDER",         "GROUP",
+  "HAVING",        "LIMIT",         "WHERE",         "INTO",
+  "FLOAT",         "BLOB",          "INTEGER",       "VARIABLE",
+  "CASE",          "WHEN",          "THEN",          "ELSE",
+  "INDEX",         "ALTER",         "ADD",           "error",
+  "input",         "cmdlist",       "ecmd",          "explain",
+  "cmdx",          "cmd",           "transtype",     "trans_opt",
   "nm",            "savepoint_opt",  "create_table",  "create_table_args",
-  "createkw",      "temp",          "ifnotexists",   "dbnm",        
-  "columnlist",    "conslist_opt",  "table_options",  "select",      
-  "columnname",    "carglist",      "typetoken",     "typename",    
-  "signed",        "plus_num",      "minus_num",     "ccons",       
-  "term",          "expr",          "onconf",        "sortorder",   
+  "createkw",      "temp",          "ifnotexists",   "dbnm",
+  "columnlist",    "conslist_opt",  "table_options",  "select",
+  "columnname",    "carglist",      "typetoken",     "typename",
+  "signed",        "plus_num",      "minus_num",     "ccons",
+  "term",          "expr",          "onconf",        "sortorder",
   "autoinc",       "eidlist_opt",   "refargs",       "defer_subclause",
-  "refarg",        "refact",        "init_deferred_pred_opt",  "conslist",    
-  "tconscomma",    "tcons",         "sortlist",      "eidlist",     
-  "defer_subclause_opt",  "orconf",        "resolvetype",   "raisetype",   
-  "ifexists",      "fullname",      "selectnowith",  "oneselect",   
-  "with",          "multiselect_op",  "distinct",      "selcollist",  
-  "from",          "where_opt",     "groupby_opt",   "having_opt",  
-  "orderby_opt",   "limit_opt",     "values",        "nexprlist",   
-  "exprlist",      "sclp",          "as",            "seltablist",  
-  "stl_prefix",    "joinop",        "indexed_opt",   "on_opt",      
-  "using_opt",     "idlist",        "setlist",       "insert_cmd",  
-  "idlist_opt",    "likeop",        "between_op",    "in_op",       
-  "paren_exprlist",  "case_operand",  "case_exprlist",  "case_else",   
+  "refarg",        "refact",        "init_deferred_pred_opt",  "conslist",
+  "tconscomma",    "tcons",         "sortlist",      "eidlist",
+  "defer_subclause_opt",  "orconf",        "resolvetype",   "raisetype",
+  "ifexists",      "fullname",      "selectnowith",  "oneselect",
+  "with",          "multiselect_op",  "distinct",      "selcollist",
+  "from",          "where_opt",     "groupby_opt",   "having_opt",
+  "orderby_opt",   "limit_opt",     "values",        "nexprlist",
+  "exprlist",      "sclp",          "as",            "seltablist",
+  "stl_prefix",    "joinop",        "indexed_opt",   "on_opt",
+  "using_opt",     "idlist",        "setlist",       "insert_cmd",
+  "idlist_opt",    "likeop",        "between_op",    "in_op",
+  "paren_exprlist",  "case_operand",  "case_exprlist",  "case_else",
   "uniqueflag",    "collate",       "nmnum",         "trigger_decl",
   "trigger_cmd_list",  "trigger_time",  "trigger_event",  "foreach_clause",
-  "when_clause",   "trigger_cmd",   "trnm",          "tridxby",     
+  "when_clause",   "trigger_cmd",   "trnm",          "tridxby",
   "database_kw_opt",  "key_opt",       "add_column_fullname",  "kwcolumn_opt",
   "create_vtab",   "vtabarglist",   "vtabarg",       "vtabargtoken",
-  "lp",            "anylist",       "wqlist",      
+  "lp",            "anylist",       "wqlist",
 };
 #endif /* NDEBUG */
 
@@ -138384,7 +138384,7 @@ static int yyGrowStack(yyParser *p){
 #endif
     p->yystksz = newSize;
   }
-  return pNew==0; 
+  return pNew==0;
 }
 #endif
 
@@ -138425,7 +138425,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ParserInit(void *yypParser){
 }
 
 #ifndef sqlite3Parser_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
+/*
 ** This function allocates a new parser.
 ** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like
 ** malloc.
@@ -138449,7 +138449,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3ParserAlloc(void *(*mallocProc)(YYMALLOCARGTYPE)){
 /* The following function deletes the "minor type" or semantic value
 ** associated with a symbol.  The symbol can be either a terminal
 ** or nonterminal. "yymajor" is the symbol code, and "yypminor" is
-** a pointer to the value to be deleted.  The code used to do the 
+** a pointer to the value to be deleted.  The code used to do the
 ** deletions is derived from the %destructor and/or %token_destructor
 ** directives of the input grammar.
 */
@@ -138463,7 +138463,7 @@ static void yy_destructor(
     /* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a
     ** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed.  This can happen
     ** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a
-    ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is 
+    ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is
     ** being destroyed before it is finished parsing.
     **
     ** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those
@@ -138582,7 +138582,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ParserFinalize(void *p){
 }
 
 #ifndef sqlite3Parser_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
+/*
 ** Deallocate and destroy a parser.  Destructors are called for
 ** all stack elements before shutting the parser down.
 **
@@ -138622,7 +138622,7 @@ static unsigned int yy_find_shift_action(
 ){
   int i;
   int stateno = pParser->yytos->stateno;
- 
+
   if( stateno>=YY_MIN_REDUCE ) return stateno;
   assert( stateno <= YY_SHIFT_COUNT );
   do{
@@ -138648,7 +138648,7 @@ static unsigned int yy_find_shift_action(
 #ifdef YYWILDCARD
       {
         int j = i - iLookAhead + YYWILDCARD;
-        if( 
+        if(
 #if YY_SHIFT_MIN+YYWILDCARD<0
           j>=0 &&
 #endif
@@ -138763,7 +138763,7 @@ static void yy_shift(
     assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack) );
   }
 #endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
+#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
   if( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystackEnd ){
     yypParser->yytos--;
     yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
@@ -139160,7 +139160,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
       assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack));
     }
 #endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
+#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
     if( yypParser->yytos>=yypParser->yystackEnd ){
       yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
       return;
@@ -139735,7 +139735,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
 {
   sqlite3WithPush(pParse, yymsp[-7].minor.yy285, 1);
   sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(pParse, yymsp[-4].minor.yy185, &yymsp[-3].minor.yy0);
-  sqlite3ExprListCheckLength(pParse,yymsp[-1].minor.yy148,"set list"); 
+  sqlite3ExprListCheckLength(pParse,yymsp[-1].minor.yy148,"set list");
   sqlite3Update(pParse,yymsp[-4].minor.yy185,yymsp[-1].minor.yy148,yymsp[0].minor.yy72,yymsp[-5].minor.yy194);
 }
         break;
@@ -139977,7 +139977,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
     yymsp[-4].minor.yy190.pExpr->x.pList = pList;
   }else{
     sqlite3ExprListDelete(pParse->db, pList);
-  } 
+  }
   exprNot(pParse, yymsp[-3].minor.yy194, &yymsp[-4].minor.yy190);
   yymsp[-4].minor.yy190.zEnd = yymsp[0].minor.yy190.zEnd;
 }
@@ -140109,7 +140109,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
         break;
       case 205: /* cmd ::= createkw uniqueflag INDEX ifnotexists nm dbnm ON nm LP sortlist RP where_opt */
 {
-  sqlite3CreateIndex(pParse, &yymsp[-7].minor.yy0, &yymsp[-6].minor.yy0, 
+  sqlite3CreateIndex(pParse, &yymsp[-7].minor.yy0, &yymsp[-6].minor.yy0,
                      sqlite3SrcListAppend(pParse->db,0,&yymsp[-4].minor.yy0,0), yymsp[-2].minor.yy148, yymsp[-10].minor.yy194,
                       &yymsp[-11].minor.yy0, yymsp[0].minor.yy72, SQLITE_SO_ASC, yymsp[-8].minor.yy194, SQLITE_IDXTYPE_APPDEF);
 }
@@ -140201,7 +140201,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
 }
         break;
       case 235: /* trigger_cmd_list ::= trigger_cmd SEMI */
-{ 
+{
   assert( yymsp[-1].minor.yy145!=0 );
   yymsp[-1].minor.yy145->pLast = yymsp[-1].minor.yy145;
 }
@@ -140209,7 +140209,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
       case 236: /* trnm ::= nm DOT nm */
 {
   yymsp[-2].minor.yy0 = yymsp[0].minor.yy0;
-  sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+  sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
         "qualified table names are not allowed on INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE "
         "statements within triggers");
 }
@@ -140243,7 +140243,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
       case 243: /* expr ::= RAISE LP IGNORE RP */
 {
   spanSet(&yymsp[-3].minor.yy190,&yymsp[-3].minor.yy0,&yymsp[0].minor.yy0);  /*A-overwrites-X*/
-  yymsp[-3].minor.yy190.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0); 
+  yymsp[-3].minor.yy190.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0);
   if( yymsp[-3].minor.yy190.pExpr ){
     yymsp[-3].minor.yy190.pExpr->affinity = OE_Ignore;
   }
@@ -140252,7 +140252,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
       case 244: /* expr ::= RAISE LP raisetype COMMA nm RP */
 {
   spanSet(&yymsp[-5].minor.yy190,&yymsp[-5].minor.yy0,&yymsp[0].minor.yy0);  /*A-overwrites-X*/
-  yymsp[-5].minor.yy190.pExpr = sqlite3ExprAlloc(pParse->db, TK_RAISE, &yymsp[-1].minor.yy0, 1); 
+  yymsp[-5].minor.yy190.pExpr = sqlite3ExprAlloc(pParse->db, TK_RAISE, &yymsp[-1].minor.yy0, 1);
   if( yymsp[-5].minor.yy190.pExpr ) {
     yymsp[-5].minor.yy190.pExpr->affinity = (char)yymsp[-3].minor.yy194;
   }
@@ -140567,7 +140567,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Parser(
 #ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
       /* A syntax error has occurred.
       ** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the
-      ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".  
+      ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".
       **
       ** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR:
       **
@@ -140630,7 +140630,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Parser(
       yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
       yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
       yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      
+
 #else  /* YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */
       /* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR:
       **
@@ -140776,7 +140776,7 @@ static const unsigned char aiClass[] = {
 ** lower-case ASCII equivalent.  On ASCII machines, this is just
 ** an upper-to-lower case map.  On EBCDIC machines we also need
 ** to adjust the encoding.  The mapping is only valid for alphabetics
-** which are the only characters for which this feature is used. 
+** which are the only characters for which this feature is used.
 **
 ** Used by keywordhash.h
 */
@@ -140808,7 +140808,7 @@ const unsigned char ebcdicToAscii[] = {
 
 /*
 ** The sqlite3KeywordCode function looks up an identifier to determine if
-** it is a keyword.  If it is a keyword, the token code of that keyword is 
+** it is a keyword.  If it is a keyword, the token code of that keyword is
 ** returned.  If the input is not a keyword, TK_ID is returned.
 **
 ** The implementation of this routine was generated by a program,
@@ -140934,31 +140934,31 @@ static const unsigned short int aKWOffset[124] = {
 };
 /* aKWCode[i] is the parser symbol code for the i-th keyword */
 static const unsigned char aKWCode[124] = {
-  TK_REINDEX,    TK_INDEXED,    TK_INDEX,      TK_DESC,       TK_ESCAPE,     
-  TK_EACH,       TK_CHECK,      TK_KEY,        TK_BEFORE,     TK_FOREIGN,    
-  TK_FOR,        TK_IGNORE,     TK_LIKE_KW,    TK_EXPLAIN,    TK_INSTEAD,    
-  TK_ADD,        TK_DATABASE,   TK_AS,         TK_SELECT,     TK_TABLE,      
-  TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_THEN,       TK_END,        TK_DEFERRABLE, TK_ELSE,       
-  TK_EXCEPT,     TK_TRANSACTION,TK_ACTION,     TK_ON,         TK_JOIN_KW,    
-  TK_ALTER,      TK_RAISE,      TK_EXCLUSIVE,  TK_EXISTS,     TK_SAVEPOINT,  
-  TK_INTERSECT,  TK_TRIGGER,    TK_REFERENCES, TK_CONSTRAINT, TK_INTO,       
-  TK_OFFSET,     TK_OF,         TK_SET,        TK_TEMP,       TK_TEMP,       
-  TK_OR,         TK_UNIQUE,     TK_QUERY,      TK_WITHOUT,    TK_WITH,       
-  TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_RELEASE,    TK_ATTACH,     TK_HAVING,     TK_GROUP,      
-  TK_UPDATE,     TK_BEGIN,      TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_RECURSIVE,  TK_BETWEEN,    
-  TK_NOTNULL,    TK_NOT,        TK_NO,         TK_NULL,       TK_LIKE_KW,    
-  TK_CASCADE,    TK_ASC,        TK_DELETE,     TK_CASE,       TK_COLLATE,    
-  TK_CREATE,     TK_CTIME_KW,   TK_DETACH,     TK_IMMEDIATE,  TK_JOIN,       
-  TK_INSERT,     TK_MATCH,      TK_PLAN,       TK_ANALYZE,    TK_PRAGMA,     
-  TK_ABORT,      TK_VALUES,     TK_VIRTUAL,    TK_LIMIT,      TK_WHEN,       
-  TK_WHERE,      TK_RENAME,     TK_AFTER,      TK_REPLACE,    TK_AND,        
-  TK_DEFAULT,    TK_AUTOINCR,   TK_TO,         TK_IN,         TK_CAST,       
-  TK_COLUMNKW,   TK_COMMIT,     TK_CONFLICT,   TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_CTIME_KW,   
-  TK_CTIME_KW,   TK_PRIMARY,    TK_DEFERRED,   TK_DISTINCT,   TK_IS,         
-  TK_DROP,       TK_FAIL,       TK_FROM,       TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_LIKE_KW,    
-  TK_BY,         TK_IF,         TK_ISNULL,     TK_ORDER,      TK_RESTRICT,   
-  TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_ROLLBACK,   TK_ROW,        TK_UNION,      TK_USING,      
-  TK_VACUUM,     TK_VIEW,       TK_INITIALLY,  TK_ALL,        
+  TK_REINDEX,    TK_INDEXED,    TK_INDEX,      TK_DESC,       TK_ESCAPE,
+  TK_EACH,       TK_CHECK,      TK_KEY,        TK_BEFORE,     TK_FOREIGN,
+  TK_FOR,        TK_IGNORE,     TK_LIKE_KW,    TK_EXPLAIN,    TK_INSTEAD,
+  TK_ADD,        TK_DATABASE,   TK_AS,         TK_SELECT,     TK_TABLE,
+  TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_THEN,       TK_END,        TK_DEFERRABLE, TK_ELSE,
+  TK_EXCEPT,     TK_TRANSACTION,TK_ACTION,     TK_ON,         TK_JOIN_KW,
+  TK_ALTER,      TK_RAISE,      TK_EXCLUSIVE,  TK_EXISTS,     TK_SAVEPOINT,
+  TK_INTERSECT,  TK_TRIGGER,    TK_REFERENCES, TK_CONSTRAINT, TK_INTO,
+  TK_OFFSET,     TK_OF,         TK_SET,        TK_TEMP,       TK_TEMP,
+  TK_OR,         TK_UNIQUE,     TK_QUERY,      TK_WITHOUT,    TK_WITH,
+  TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_RELEASE,    TK_ATTACH,     TK_HAVING,     TK_GROUP,
+  TK_UPDATE,     TK_BEGIN,      TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_RECURSIVE,  TK_BETWEEN,
+  TK_NOTNULL,    TK_NOT,        TK_NO,         TK_NULL,       TK_LIKE_KW,
+  TK_CASCADE,    TK_ASC,        TK_DELETE,     TK_CASE,       TK_COLLATE,
+  TK_CREATE,     TK_CTIME_KW,   TK_DETACH,     TK_IMMEDIATE,  TK_JOIN,
+  TK_INSERT,     TK_MATCH,      TK_PLAN,       TK_ANALYZE,    TK_PRAGMA,
+  TK_ABORT,      TK_VALUES,     TK_VIRTUAL,    TK_LIMIT,      TK_WHEN,
+  TK_WHERE,      TK_RENAME,     TK_AFTER,      TK_REPLACE,    TK_AND,
+  TK_DEFAULT,    TK_AUTOINCR,   TK_TO,         TK_IN,         TK_CAST,
+  TK_COLUMNKW,   TK_COMMIT,     TK_CONFLICT,   TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_CTIME_KW,
+  TK_CTIME_KW,   TK_PRIMARY,    TK_DEFERRED,   TK_DISTINCT,   TK_IS,
+  TK_DROP,       TK_FAIL,       TK_FROM,       TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_LIKE_KW,
+  TK_BY,         TK_IF,         TK_ISNULL,     TK_ORDER,      TK_RESTRICT,
+  TK_JOIN_KW,    TK_ROLLBACK,   TK_ROW,        TK_UNION,      TK_USING,
+  TK_VACUUM,     TK_VIEW,       TK_INITIALLY,  TK_ALL,
 };
 /* Check to see if z[0..n-1] is a keyword. If it is, write the
 ** parser symbol code for that keyword into *pType.  Always
@@ -141125,14 +141125,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3KeywordCode(const unsigned char *z, int n){
 ** IdChar(X) will be true.  Otherwise it is false.
 **
 ** For ASCII, any character with the high-order bit set is
-** allowed in an identifier.  For 7-bit characters, 
+** allowed in an identifier.  For 7-bit characters,
 ** sqlite3IsIdChar[X] must be 1.
 **
 ** For EBCDIC, the rules are more complex but have the same
 ** end result.
 **
 ** Ticket #1066.  the SQL standard does not allow '$' in the
-** middle of identifiers.  But many SQL implementations do. 
+** middle of identifiers.  But many SQL implementations do.
 ** SQLite will allow '$' in identifiers for compatibility.
 ** But the feature is undocumented.
 */
@@ -141165,7 +141165,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsIdChar(u8 c){ return IdChar(c); }
 
 
 /*
-** Return the length (in bytes) of the token that begins at z[0]. 
+** Return the length (in bytes) of the token that begins at z[0].
 ** Store the token type in *tokenType before returning.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){
@@ -141343,7 +141343,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){
         *tokenType = TK_FLOAT;
       }
       if( (z[i]=='e' || z[i]=='E') &&
-           ( sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+1]) 
+           ( sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+1])
             || ((z[i+1]=='+' || z[i+1]=='-') && sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+2]))
            )
       ){
@@ -141444,7 +141444,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){
 /*
 ** Run the parser on the given SQL string.  The parser structure is
 ** passed in.  An SQLITE_ status code is returned.  If an error occurs
-** then an and attempt is made to write an error message into 
+** then an and attempt is made to write an error message into
 ** memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc() and to make *pzErrMsg point to that
 ** error message.
 */
@@ -141566,7 +141566,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RunParser(Parse *pParse, const char *zSql, char **pzEr
 #endif
 
   if( !IN_DECLARE_VTAB ){
-    /* If the pParse->declareVtab flag is set, do not delete any table 
+    /* If the pParse->declareVtab flag is set, do not delete any table
     ** structure built up in pParse->pNewTable. The calling code (see vtab.c)
     ** will take responsibility for freeing the Table structure.
     */
@@ -141660,7 +141660,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char sqlite3IsEbcdicIdChar[];
 **   (2) NORMAL    We are in the middle of statement which ends with a single
 **                 semicolon.
 **
-**   (3) EXPLAIN   The keyword EXPLAIN has been seen at the beginning of 
+**   (3) EXPLAIN   The keyword EXPLAIN has been seen at the beginning of
 **                 a statement.
 **
 **   (4) CREATE    The keyword CREATE has been seen at the beginning of a
@@ -142015,13 +142015,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts5Init(sqlite3*);
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION
 /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-46656-45156 The sqlite3_version[] string constant
-** contains the text of SQLITE_VERSION macro. 
+** contains the text of SQLITE_VERSION macro.
 */
 SQLITE_API const char sqlite3_version[] = SQLITE_VERSION;
 #endif
 
 /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-53536-42575 The sqlite3_libversion() function returns
-** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant. 
+** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant.
 */
 SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_libversion(void){ return sqlite3_version; }
 
@@ -142085,13 +142085,13 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_temp_directory = 0;
 SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_data_directory = 0;
 
 /*
-** Initialize SQLite.  
+** Initialize SQLite.
 **
 ** This routine must be called to initialize the memory allocation,
 ** VFS, and mutex subsystems prior to doing any serious work with
 ** SQLite.  But as long as you do not compile with SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINIT
 ** this routine will be called automatically by key routines such as
-** sqlite3_open().  
+** sqlite3_open().
 **
 ** This routine is a no-op except on its very first call for the process,
 ** or for the first call after a call to sqlite3_shutdown.
@@ -142141,7 +142141,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_initialize(void){
   */
   if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit ) return SQLITE_OK;
 
-  /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized.  If unable to 
+  /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized.  If unable to
   ** initialize the mutex subsystem, return early with the error.
   ** If the system is so sick that we are unable to allocate a mutex,
   ** there is not much SQLite is going to be able to do.
@@ -142218,7 +142218,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_initialize(void){
       rc = sqlite3OsInit();
     }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-      sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage, 
+      sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage,
           sqlite3GlobalConfig.szPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.nPage);
       sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit = 1;
 #ifdef SQLITE_EXTRA_INIT
@@ -142435,7 +142435,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
       ** a single parameter which is a pointer to an integer and writes into
       ** that integer the number of extra bytes per page required for each page
       ** in SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE. */
-      *va_arg(ap, int*) = 
+      *va_arg(ap, int*) =
           sqlite3HeaderSizeBtree() +
           sqlite3HeaderSizePcache() +
           sqlite3HeaderSizePcache1();
@@ -142522,7 +142522,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
       sqlite3GlobalConfig.nLookaside = va_arg(ap, int);
       break;
     }
-    
+
     /* Record a pointer to the logger function and its first argument.
     ** The default is NULL.  Logging is disabled if the function pointer is
     ** NULL.
@@ -142626,7 +142626,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
 
 /*
 ** Set up the lookaside buffers for a database connection.
-** Return SQLITE_OK on success.  
+** Return SQLITE_OK on success.
 ** If lookaside is already active, return SQLITE_BUSY.
 **
 ** The sz parameter is the number of bytes in each lookaside slot.
@@ -142638,12 +142638,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
 static int setupLookaside(sqlite3 *db, void *pBuf, int sz, int cnt){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_LOOKASIDE
   void *pStart;
-  
+
   if( sqlite3LookasideUsed(db,0)>0 ){
     return SQLITE_BUSY;
   }
   /* Free any existing lookaside buffer for this handle before
-  ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for 
+  ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for
   ** both at the same time.
   */
   if( db->lookaside.bMalloced ){
@@ -142871,7 +142871,7 @@ static int binCollFunc(
 }
 
 /*
-** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE. 
+** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE.
 **
 ** This collating sequence is intended to be used for "case independent
 ** comparison". SQLite's knowledge of upper and lower case equivalents
@@ -143013,7 +143013,7 @@ static void disconnectAllVtab(sqlite3 *db){
 
 /*
 ** Return TRUE if database connection db has unfinalized prepared
-** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects.  
+** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects.
 */
 static int connectionIsBusy(sqlite3 *db){
   int j;
@@ -143202,7 +143202,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3LeaveMutexAndCloseZombie(sqlite3 *db){
   /* The temp-database schema is allocated differently from the other schema
   ** objects (using sqliteMalloc() directly, instead of sqlite3BtreeSchema()).
   ** So it needs to be freed here. Todo: Why not roll the temp schema into
-  ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database 
+  ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database
   ** structure?
   */
   sqlite3DbFree(db, db->aDb[1].pSchema);
@@ -143230,7 +143230,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RollbackAll(sqlite3 *db, int tripCode){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
   sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
 
-  /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback(). 
+  /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback().
   ** This is important in case the transaction being rolled back has
   ** modified the database schema. If the b-tree mutexes are not taken
   ** here, then another shared-cache connection might sneak in between
@@ -143493,7 +143493,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3InvokeBusyHandler(BusyHandler *p){
   }else{
     p->nBusy++;
   }
-  return rc; 
+  return rc;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -143524,9 +143524,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_busy_handler(
 ** be invoked every nOps opcodes.
 */
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   int nOps,
-  int (*xProgress)(void*), 
+  int (*xProgress)(void*),
   void *pArg
 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -143585,7 +143585,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_interrupt(sqlite3 *db){
 ** This function is exactly the same as sqlite3_create_function(), except
 ** that it is designed to be called by internal code. The difference is
 ** that if a malloc() fails in sqlite3_create_function(), an error code
-** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared. 
+** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
   sqlite3 *db,
@@ -143604,7 +143604,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
 
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
   if( zFunctionName==0 ||
-      (xSFunc && (xFinal || xStep)) || 
+      (xSFunc && (xFinal || xStep)) ||
       (!xSFunc && (xFinal && !xStep)) ||
       (!xSFunc && (!xFinal && xStep)) ||
       (nArg<-1 || nArg>SQLITE_MAX_FUNCTION_ARG) ||
@@ -143615,7 +143615,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
   assert( SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT==SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC );
   extraFlags = enc &  SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC;
   enc &= (SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK|SQLITE_ANY);
-  
+
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
   /* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
   ** to one of SQLITE_UTF16LE or SQLITE_UTF16BE using the
@@ -143642,7 +143642,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
 #else
   enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
 #endif
-  
+
   /* Check if an existing function is being overridden or deleted. If so,
   ** and there are active VMs, then return SQLITE_BUSY. If a function
   ** is being overridden/deleted but there are no active VMs, allow the
@@ -143651,7 +143651,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
   p = sqlite3FindFunction(db, zFunctionName, nArg, (u8)enc, 0);
   if( p && (p->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK)==enc && p->nArg==nArg ){
     if( db->nVdbeActive ){
-      sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, 
+      sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
         "unable to delete/modify user-function due to active statements");
       assert( !db->mallocFailed );
       return SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -143776,7 +143776,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_function16(
 **
 ** If the function already exists as a regular global function, then
 ** this routine is a no-op.  If the function does not exist, then create
-** a new one that always throws a run-time error.  
+** a new one that always throws a run-time error.
 **
 ** When virtual tables intend to provide an overloaded function, they
 ** should call this routine to make sure the global function exists.
@@ -143808,7 +143808,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_overload_function(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
 /*
 ** Register a trace function.  The pArg from the previously registered trace
-** is returned.  
+** is returned.
 **
 ** A NULL trace function means that no tracing is executes.  A non-NULL
 ** trace is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the start of each
@@ -143859,8 +143859,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_trace_v2(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
 /*
-** Register a profile function.  The pArg from the previously registered 
-** profile function is returned.  
+** Register a profile function.  The pArg from the previously registered
+** profile function is returned.
 **
 ** A NULL profile function means that no profiling is executes.  A non-NULL
 ** profile is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the conclusion of
@@ -143992,7 +143992,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_preupdate_hook(
 ** Invoke sqlite3_wal_checkpoint if the number of frames in the log file
 ** is greater than sqlite3.pWalArg cast to an integer (the value configured by
 ** wal_autocheckpoint()).
-*/ 
+*/
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalDefaultHook(
   void *pClientData,     /* Argument */
   sqlite3 *db,           /* Connection */
@@ -144126,7 +144126,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2(
 
 /*
 ** Checkpoint database zDb. If zDb is NULL, or if the buffer zDb points
-** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are 
+** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are
 ** checkpointed.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
@@ -144140,9 +144140,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
 ** Run a checkpoint on database iDb. This is a no-op if database iDb is
 ** not currently open in WAL mode.
 **
-** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this 
-** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If 
-** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is 
+** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this
+** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If
+** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is
 ** returned (i.e. SQLITE_IOERR). Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** The mutex on database handle db should be held by the caller. The mutex
@@ -144311,7 +144311,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_extended_errcode(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3 *db){
   return db ? db->iSysErrno : 0;
-}  
+}
 
 /*
 ** Return a string that describes the kind of error specified in the
@@ -144328,7 +144328,7 @@ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_errstr(int rc){
 */
 static int createCollation(
   sqlite3* db,
-  const char *zName, 
+  const char *zName,
   u8 enc,
   void* pCtx,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
@@ -144336,7 +144336,7 @@ static int createCollation(
 ){
   CollSeq *pColl;
   int enc2;
-  
+
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
 
   /* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
@@ -144353,14 +144353,14 @@ static int createCollation(
     return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
   }
 
-  /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation 
+  /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation
   ** sequence. If so, and there are active VMs, return busy. If there
   ** are no active VMs, invalidate any pre-compiled statements.
   */
   pColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, (u8)enc2, zName, 0);
   if( pColl && pColl->xCmp ){
     if( db->nVdbeActive ){
-      sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, 
+      sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
         "unable to delete/modify collation sequence due to active statements");
       return SQLITE_BUSY;
     }
@@ -144371,7 +144371,7 @@ static int createCollation(
     ** then any copies made by synthCollSeq() need to be invalidated.
     ** Also, collation destructor - CollSeq.xDel() - function may need
     ** to be called.
-    */ 
+    */
     if( (pColl->enc & ~SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED)==enc2 ){
       CollSeq *aColl = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aCollSeq, zName);
       int j;
@@ -144520,17 +144520,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3 *db, int limitId, int newLimit){
 ** query parameter. The second argument contains the URI (or non-URI filename)
 ** itself. When this function is called the *pFlags variable should contain
 ** the default flags to open the database handle with. The value stored in
-** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains 
+** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains
 ** "cache=xxx" or "mode=xxx" query parameters.
 **
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case *ppVfs is set to point to
 ** the VFS that should be used to open the database file. *pzFile is set to
-** point to a buffer containing the name of the file to open. It is the 
+** point to a buffer containing the name of the file to open. It is the
 ** responsibility of the caller to eventually call sqlite3_free() to release
 ** this buffer.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, then an SQLite error code is returned and *pzErrMsg
-** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error 
+** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error
 ** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually release
 ** this buffer by calling sqlite3_free().
 */
@@ -144538,7 +144538,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
   const char *zDefaultVfs,        /* VFS to use if no "vfs=xxx" query option */
   const char *zUri,               /* Nul-terminated URI to parse */
   unsigned int *pFlags,           /* IN/OUT: SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags */
-  sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs,            /* OUT: VFS to use */ 
+  sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs,            /* OUT: VFS to use */
   char **pzFile,                  /* OUT: Filename component of URI */
   char **pzErrMsg                 /* OUT: Error message (if rc!=SQLITE_OK) */
 ){
@@ -144561,7 +144561,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
     int iOut = 0;                 /* Output character index */
     u64 nByte = nUri+2;           /* Bytes of space to allocate */
 
-    /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen 
+    /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen
     ** method that there may be extra parameters following the file-name.  */
     flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_URI;
 
@@ -144576,7 +144576,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
       /* The following condition causes URIs with five leading / characters
       ** like file://///host/path to be converted into UNCs like //host/path.
       ** The correct URI for that UNC has only two or four leading / characters
-      ** file://host/path or file:////host/path.  But 5 leading slashes is a 
+      ** file://host/path or file:////host/path.  But 5 leading slashes is a
       ** common error, we are told, so we handle it as a special case. */
       if( strncmp(zUri+7, "///", 3)==0 ){ iIn++; }
     }else if( strncmp(zUri+5, "//localhost/", 12)==0 ){
@@ -144588,7 +144588,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
       iIn = 7;
       while( zUri[iIn] && zUri[iIn]!='/' ) iIn++;
       if( iIn!=7 && (iIn!=16 || memcmp("localhost", &zUri[7], 9)) ){
-        *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s", 
+        *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s",
             iIn-7, &zUri[7]);
         rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
         goto parse_uri_out;
@@ -144596,8 +144596,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
     }
 #endif
 
-    /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer. 
-    ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way. 
+    /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer.
+    ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way.
     **
     ** Within this loop, variable eState may be set to 0, 1 or 2, depending
     ** on the parsing context. As follows:
@@ -144609,9 +144609,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
     eState = 0;
     while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' ){
       iIn++;
-      if( c=='%' 
-       && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn]) 
-       && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1]) 
+      if( c=='%'
+       && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn])
+       && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1])
       ){
         int octet = (sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]) << 4);
         octet += sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]);
@@ -144623,7 +144623,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
           ** case we ignore all text in the remainder of the path, name or
           ** value currently being parsed. So ignore the current character
           ** and skip to the next "?", "=" or "&", as appropriate. */
-          while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' 
+          while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#'
               && (eState!=0 || c!='?')
               && (eState!=1 || (c!='=' && c!='&'))
               && (eState!=2 || c!='&')
@@ -144661,7 +144661,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
     zFile[iOut++] = '\0';
     zFile[iOut++] = '\0';
 
-    /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted 
+    /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted
     ** here. Options that are interpreted here include "vfs" and those that
     ** correspond to flags that may be passed to the sqlite3_open_v2()
     ** method. */
@@ -144697,7 +144697,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
         if( nOpt==4 && memcmp("mode", zOpt, 4)==0 ){
           static struct OpenMode aOpenMode[] = {
             { "ro",  SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY },
-            { "rw",  SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE }, 
+            { "rw",  SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE },
             { "rwc", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE },
             { "memory", SQLITE_OPEN_MEMORY },
             { 0, 0 }
@@ -144767,7 +144767,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
 
 /*
 ** This routine does the work of opening a database on behalf of
-** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"  
+** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"
 ** is UTF-8 encoded.
 */
 static int openDatabase(
@@ -144818,11 +144818,11 @@ static int openDatabase(
   flags &=  ~( SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE |
                SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
                SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB |
-               SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB | 
-               SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB | 
-               SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL | 
-               SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL | 
-               SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | 
+               SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB |
+               SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB |
+               SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL |
+               SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL |
+               SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL |
                SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL |
                SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX |
                SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX |
@@ -144907,14 +144907,14 @@ static int openDatabase(
     goto opendb_out;
   }
   /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-08308-17224 The default collating function for all
-  ** strings is BINARY. 
+  ** strings is BINARY.
   */
   db->pDfltColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3StrBINARY, 0);
   assert( db->pDfltColl!=0 );
 
   /* Parse the filename/URI argument
   **
-  ** Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument.  
+  ** Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument.
   ** Throw an error if any non-sense combination is used.  If we
   ** do not block illegal combinations here, it could trigger
   ** assert() statements in deeper layers.  Sensible combinations
@@ -144960,7 +144960,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
   db->aDb[1].pSchema = sqlite3SchemaGet(db, 0);
 
   /* The default safety_level for the main database is FULL; for the temp
-  ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults.  
+  ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults.
   */
   db->aDb[0].zDbSName = "main";
   db->aDb[0].safety_level = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS+1;
@@ -144982,7 +144982,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS5
   /* Register any built-in FTS5 module before loading the automatic
-  ** extensions. This allows automatic extensions to register FTS5 
+  ** extensions. This allows automatic extensions to register FTS5
   ** tokenizers and auxiliary functions.  */
   if( !db->mallocFailed && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     rc = sqlite3Fts5Init(db);
@@ -145121,8 +145121,8 @@ opendb_out:
 ** Open a new database handle.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open(
-  const char *zFilename, 
-  sqlite3 **ppDb 
+  const char *zFilename,
+  sqlite3 **ppDb
 ){
   return openDatabase(zFilename, ppDb,
                       SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, 0);
@@ -145141,7 +145141,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** Open a new database handle.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open16(
-  const void *zFilename, 
+  const void *zFilename,
   sqlite3 **ppDb
 ){
   char const *zFilename8;   /* zFilename encoded in UTF-8 instead of UTF-16 */
@@ -145180,9 +145180,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open16(
 ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation(
-  sqlite3* db, 
-  const char *zName, 
-  int enc, 
+  sqlite3* db,
+  const char *zName,
+  int enc,
   void* pCtx,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
 ){
@@ -145193,9 +145193,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation(
 ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
-  sqlite3* db, 
-  const char *zName, 
-  int enc, 
+  sqlite3* db,
+  const char *zName,
+  int enc,
   void* pCtx,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
   void(*xDel)(void*)
@@ -145218,9 +145218,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
 ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16(
-  sqlite3* db, 
+  sqlite3* db,
   const void *zName,
-  int enc, 
+  int enc,
   void* pCtx,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
 ){
@@ -145248,8 +145248,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16(
 ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  void *pCollNeededArg, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  void *pCollNeededArg,
   void(*xCollNeeded)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -145269,8 +145269,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed(
 ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  void *pCollNeededArg, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  void *pCollNeededArg,
   void(*xCollNeeded16)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -145440,13 +145440,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_table_column_metadata(
   /* The following block stores the meta information that will be returned
   ** to the caller in local variables zDataType, zCollSeq, notnull, primarykey
   ** and autoinc. At this point there are two possibilities:
-  ** 
-  **     1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" 
-  **        and there is no explicitly declared IPK column. 
   **
-  **     2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an 
+  **     1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_"
+  **        and there is no explicitly declared IPK column.
+  **
+  **     2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an
   **        explicitly declared column. Copy meta information from *pCol.
-  */ 
+  */
   if( pCol ){
     zDataType = sqlite3ColumnType(pCol,0);
     zCollSeq = pCol->zColl;
@@ -145496,7 +145496,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_sleep(int ms){
   pVfs = sqlite3_vfs_find(0);
   if( pVfs==0 ) return 0;
 
-  /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep() 
+  /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep()
   ** API uses microseconds. Hence the 1000's.
   */
   rc = (sqlite3OsSleep(pVfs, 1000*ms)/1000);
@@ -145636,7 +145636,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
     /*
     **  sqlite3_test_control(BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS, xBegin, xEnd)
     **
-    ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures 
+    ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures
     ** are benign.
     */
     case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS: {
@@ -145734,7 +145734,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
     **      10     little-endian, determined at run-time
     **  432101     big-endian,    determined at compile-time
     **  123410     little-endian, determined at compile-time
-    */ 
+    */
     case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BYTEORDER: {
       rc = SQLITE_BYTEORDER*100 + SQLITE_LITTLEENDIAN*10 + SQLITE_BIGENDIAN;
       break;
@@ -145756,7 +145756,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
 
     /*  sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZATIONS, sqlite3 *db, int N)
     **
-    ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes.  The 
+    ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes.  The
     ** argument N is a bitmask of optimizations to be disabled.  For normal
     ** operation N should be 0.  The idea is that a test program (like the
     ** SQL Logic Test or SLT test module) can run the same SQL multiple times
@@ -145774,7 +145774,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
     **
     ** If zWord is a keyword recognized by the parser, then return the
     ** number of keywords.  Or if zWord is not a keyword, return 0.
-    ** 
+    **
     ** This test feature is only available in the amalgamation since
     ** the SQLITE_N_KEYWORD macro is not defined in this file if SQLite
     ** is built using separate source files.
@@ -145785,7 +145785,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
       rc = (sqlite3KeywordCode((u8*)zWord, n)!=TK_ID) ? SQLITE_N_KEYWORD : 0;
       break;
     }
-#endif 
+#endif
 
     /*   sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_LOCALTIME_FAULT, int onoff);
     **
@@ -145823,7 +145823,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
 
     /*   sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE, xCallback, ptr);
     **
-    ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context 
+    ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context
     ** pointer ptr.
     */
     case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE: {
@@ -145888,7 +145888,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
 
 /*
 ** This is a utility routine, useful to VFS implementations, that checks
-** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query 
+** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
 ** parameter, and if so obtains the value of the query parameter.
 **
 ** The zFilename argument is the filename pointer passed into the xOpen()
@@ -145976,11 +145976,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_readonly(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDbName){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
 /*
-** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently 
+** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently
 ** being read by handle db.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   const char *zDb,
   sqlite3_snapshot **ppSnapshot
 ){
@@ -146016,8 +146016,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
 ** Open a read-transaction on the snapshot idendified by pSnapshot.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_snapshot_open(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  const char *zDb, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  const char *zDb,
   sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -146101,7 +146101,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_compileoption_used(const char *zOptName){
   int i, n;
   int nOpt;
   const char **azCompileOpt;
- 
+
 #if SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
   if( zOptName==0 ){
     (void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
@@ -146114,7 +146114,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_compileoption_used(const char *zOptName){
   if( sqlite3StrNICmp(zOptName, "SQLITE_", 7)==0 ) zOptName += 7;
   n = sqlite3Strlen30(zOptName);
 
-  /* Since nOpt is normally in single digits, a linear search is 
+  /* Since nOpt is normally in single digits, a linear search is
   ** adequate. No need for a binary search. */
   for(i=0; i<nOpt; i++){
     if( sqlite3StrNICmp(zOptName, azCompileOpt[i], n)==0
@@ -146186,13 +146186,13 @@ static sqlite3 *SQLITE_WSD sqlite3BlockedList = 0;
 
 #ifndef NDEBUG
 /*
-** This function is a complex assert() that verifies the following 
+** This function is a complex assert() that verifies the following
 ** properties of the blocked connections list:
 **
-**   1) Each entry in the list has a non-NULL value for either 
+**   1) Each entry in the list has a non-NULL value for either
 **      pUnlockConnection or pBlockingConnection, or both.
 **
-**   2) All entries in the list that share a common value for 
+**   2) All entries in the list that share a common value for
 **      xUnlockNotify are grouped together.
 **
 **   3) If the argument db is not NULL, then none of the entries in the
@@ -146244,8 +146244,8 @@ static void addToBlockedList(sqlite3 *db){
   sqlite3 **pp;
   assertMutexHeld();
   for(
-    pp=&sqlite3BlockedList; 
-    *pp && (*pp)->xUnlockNotify!=db->xUnlockNotify; 
+    pp=&sqlite3BlockedList;
+    *pp && (*pp)->xUnlockNotify!=db->xUnlockNotify;
     pp=&(*pp)->pNextBlocked
   );
   db->pNextBlocked = *pp;
@@ -146307,9 +146307,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify(
     db->xUnlockNotify = 0;
     db->pUnlockArg = 0;
   }else if( 0==db->pBlockingConnection ){
-    /* The blocking transaction has been concluded. Or there never was a 
+    /* The blocking transaction has been concluded. Or there never was a
     ** blocking transaction. In either case, invoke the notify callback
-    ** immediately. 
+    ** immediately.
     */
     xNotify(&pArg, 1);
   }else{
@@ -146335,7 +146335,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called while stepping or preparing a statement 
+** This function is called while stepping or preparing a statement
 ** associated with connection db. The operation will return SQLITE_LOCKED
 ** to the user because it requires a lock that will not be available
 ** until connection pBlocker concludes its current transaction.
@@ -146351,7 +146351,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionBlocked(sqlite3 *db, sqlite3 *pBlocker){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called when
-** the transaction opened by database db has just finished. Locks held 
+** the transaction opened by database db has just finished. Locks held
 ** by database connection db have been released.
 **
 ** This function loops through each entry in the blocked connections
@@ -146411,7 +146411,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){
         }else{
           /* This occurs when the array of context pointers that need to
           ** be passed to the unlock-notify callback is larger than the
-          ** aStatic[] array allocated on the stack and the attempt to 
+          ** aStatic[] array allocated on the stack and the attempt to
           ** allocate a larger array from the heap has failed.
           **
           ** This is a difficult situation to handle. Returning an error
@@ -146419,17 +146419,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){
           ** is returned the transaction on connection db will still be
           ** closed and the unlock-notify callbacks on blocked connections
           ** will go unissued. This might cause the application to wait
-          ** indefinitely for an unlock-notify callback that will never 
+          ** indefinitely for an unlock-notify callback that will never
           ** arrive.
           **
           ** Instead, invoke the unlock-notify callback with the context
           ** array already accumulated. We can then clear the array and
-          ** begin accumulating any further context pointers without 
+          ** begin accumulating any further context pointers without
           ** requiring any dynamic allocation. This is sub-optimal because
           ** it means that instead of one callback with a large array of
           ** context pointers the application will receive two or more
           ** callbacks with smaller arrays of context pointers, which will
-          ** reduce the applications ability to prioritize multiple 
+          ** reduce the applications ability to prioritize multiple
           ** connections. But it is the best that can be done under the
           ** circumstances.
           */
@@ -146464,7 +146464,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 
 /*
-** This is called when the database connection passed as an argument is 
+** This is called when the database connection passed as an argument is
 ** being closed. The connection is removed from the blocked list.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -146541,7 +146541,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
 ** A doclist (document list) holds a docid-sorted list of hits for a
 ** given term.  Doclists hold docids and associated token positions.
 ** A docid is the unique integer identifier for a single document.
-** A position is the index of a word within the document.  The first 
+** A position is the index of a word within the document.  The first
 ** word of the document has a position of 0.
 **
 ** FTS3 used to optionally store character offsets using a compile-time
@@ -146566,7 +146566,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
 **
 ** Here, array { X } means zero or more occurrences of X, adjacent in
 ** memory.  A "position" is an index of a token in the token stream
-** generated by the tokenizer. Note that POS_END and POS_COLUMN occur 
+** generated by the tokenizer. Note that POS_END and POS_COLUMN occur
 ** in the same logical place as the position element, and act as sentinals
 ** ending a position list array.  POS_END is 0.  POS_COLUMN is 1.
 ** The positions numbers are not stored literally but rather as two more
@@ -146590,7 +146590,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
 ** a document record consists of a docid followed by a position-list and
 ** a doclist consists of one or more document records.
 **
-** A bare doclist omits the position information, becoming an 
+** A bare doclist omits the position information, becoming an
 ** array of varint-encoded docids.
 **
 **** Segment leaf nodes ****
@@ -146786,7 +146786,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
 #ifndef _FTSINT_H
 #define _FTSINT_H
 
-#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) 
+#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
 # define NDEBUG 1
 #endif
 
@@ -146853,7 +146853,7 @@ SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3
 ** When an fts3 table is created, it passes any arguments passed to
 ** the tokenizer clause of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement to the
 ** sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xCreate() function of the requested tokenizer
-** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an 
+** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an
 ** sqlite3_tokenizer structure representing the specific tokenizer to
 ** be used for the fts3 table (customized by the tokenizer clause arguments).
 **
@@ -146885,7 +146885,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
   ** then argc is set to 2, and the argv[] array contains pointers
   ** to the strings "arg1" and "arg2".
   **
-  ** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error 
+  ** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error
   ** code. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *ppTokenizer should be set
   ** to point at the newly created tokenizer structure. The generic
   ** sqlite3_tokenizer.pModule variable should not be initialized by
@@ -146906,7 +146906,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
   /*
   ** Create a tokenizer cursor to tokenize an input buffer. The caller
   ** is responsible for ensuring that the input buffer remains valid
-  ** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method). 
+  ** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method).
   */
   int (*xOpen)(
     sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer,       /* Tokenizer object */
@@ -146915,7 +146915,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
   );
 
   /*
-  ** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this 
+  ** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this
   ** method exactly once for each successful call to xOpen().
   */
   int (*xClose)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor);
@@ -146926,7 +146926,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
   ** "OUT" variables identified below, or SQLITE_DONE to indicate that
   ** the end of the buffer has been reached, or an SQLite error code.
   **
-  ** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the 
+  ** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the
   ** normalized version of the token (i.e. after any case-folding and/or
   ** stemming has been performed). *pnBytes should be set to the length
   ** of this buffer in bytes. The input text that generated the token is
@@ -146938,7 +146938,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
   **
   ** The buffer *ppToken is set to point at is managed by the tokenizer
   ** implementation. It is only required to be valid until the next call
-  ** to xNext() or xClose(). 
+  ** to xNext() or xClose().
   */
   /* TODO(shess) current implementation requires pInput to be
   ** nul-terminated.  This should either be fixed, or pInput/nBytes
@@ -146956,7 +146956,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
   ** Methods below this point are only available if iVersion>=1.
   */
 
-  /* 
+  /*
   ** Configure the language id of a tokenizer cursor.
   */
   int (*xLanguageid)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr, int iLangid);
@@ -147025,7 +147025,7 @@ struct Fts3Hash {
   } *ht;
 };
 
-/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following 
+/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
 ** structure.  All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
 **
 ** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
@@ -147044,10 +147044,10 @@ struct Fts3HashElem {
 **                           (including the null-terminator, if any).  Case
 **                           is respected in comparisons.
 **
-**   FTS3_HASH_BINARY        pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long. 
+**   FTS3_HASH_BINARY        pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
 **                           memcmp() is used to compare keys.
 **
-** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1.  
+** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1.
 */
 #define FTS3_HASH_STRING    1
 #define FTS3_HASH_BINARY    2
@@ -147100,7 +147100,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
 
 /*
 ** This constant determines the maximum depth of an FTS expression tree
-** that the library will create and use. FTS uses recursion to perform 
+** that the library will create and use. FTS uses recursion to perform
 ** various operations on the query tree, so the disadvantage of a large
 ** limit is that it may allow very large queries to use large amounts
 ** of stack space (perhaps causing a stack overflow).
@@ -147118,11 +147118,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
 #define FTS3_MERGE_COUNT 16
 
 /*
-** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the 
+** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the
 ** Fts3Table.pendingTerms hash table. Normally, the hash table is
 ** populated as documents are inserted/updated/deleted in a transaction
 ** and used to create a new segment when the transaction is committed.
-** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new 
+** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new
 ** segment is created and the hash table cleared immediately.
 */
 #define FTS3_MAX_PENDING_DATA (1*1024*1024)
@@ -147151,7 +147151,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
 /*
 ** FTS4 virtual tables may maintain multiple indexes - one index of all terms
 ** in the document set and zero or more prefix indexes. All indexes are stored
-** as one or more b+-trees in the %_segments and %_segdir tables. 
+** as one or more b+-trees in the %_segments and %_segdir tables.
 **
 ** It is possible to determine which index a b+-tree belongs to based on the
 ** value stored in the "%_segdir.level" column. Given this value L, the index
@@ -147159,8 +147159,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
 ** level values between 0 and 1023 (inclusive) belong to index 0, all levels
 ** between 1024 and 2047 to index 1, and so on.
 **
-** It is considered impossible for an index to use more than 1024 levels. In 
-** theory though this may happen, but only after at least 
+** It is considered impossible for an index to use more than 1024 levels. In
+** theory though this may happen, but only after at least
 ** (FTS3_MERGE_COUNT^1024) separate flushes of the pending-terms tables.
 */
 #define FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL      1024
@@ -147178,11 +147178,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
 ** Terminator values for position-lists and column-lists.
 */
 #define POS_COLUMN  (1)     /* Column-list terminator */
-#define POS_END     (0)     /* Position-list terminator */ 
+#define POS_END     (0)     /* Position-list terminator */
 
 /*
 ** This section provides definitions to allow the
-** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the 
+** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the
 ** amalgamation.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION
@@ -147220,7 +147220,7 @@ typedef sqlite3_int64 i64;        /* 8-byte signed integer */
 /*
 ** Activate assert() only if SQLITE_TEST is enabled.
 */
-#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) 
+#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
 # define NDEBUG 1
 #endif
 
@@ -147279,8 +147279,8 @@ struct Fts3Table {
   int nAutoincrmerge;             /* Value configured by 'automerge' */
   u32 nLeafAdd;                   /* Number of leaf blocks added this trans */
 
-  /* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these 
-  ** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call. 
+  /* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these
+  ** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call.
   */
   sqlite3_stmt *aStmt[40];
   sqlite3_stmt *pSeekStmt;        /* Cache for fts3CursorSeekStmt() */
@@ -147298,8 +147298,8 @@ struct Fts3Table {
   char *zSegmentsTbl;             /* Name of %_segments table */
   sqlite3_blob *pSegments;        /* Blob handle open on %_segments table */
 
-  /* 
-  ** The following array of hash tables is used to buffer pending index 
+  /*
+  ** The following array of hash tables is used to buffer pending index
   ** updates during transactions. All pending updates buffered at any one
   ** time must share a common language-id (see the FTS4 langid= feature).
   ** The current language id is stored in variable iPrevLangid.
@@ -147309,10 +147309,10 @@ struct Fts3Table {
   ** terms that appear in the document set. Each subsequent index in aIndex[]
   ** is an index of prefixes of a specific length.
   **
-  ** Variable nPendingData contains an estimate the memory consumed by the 
+  ** Variable nPendingData contains an estimate the memory consumed by the
   ** pending data structures, including hash table overhead, but not including
   ** malloc overhead.  When nPendingData exceeds nMaxPendingData, all hash
-  ** tables are flushed to disk. Variable iPrevDocid is the docid of the most 
+  ** tables are flushed to disk. Variable iPrevDocid is the docid of the most
   ** recently inserted record.
   */
   int nIndex;                     /* Size of aIndex[] */
@@ -147385,10 +147385,10 @@ struct Fts3Cursor {
 **
 **     CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE ex1 USING fts3(a,b,c,d);
 **     SELECT docid FROM ex1 WHERE b MATCH 'one two three';
-** 
+**
 ** Because the LHS of the MATCH operator is 2nd column "b",
 ** Fts3Cursor.eSearch will be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+1.  (+0 for a,
-** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.)  If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1" 
+** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.)  If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1"
 ** indicating that all columns should be searched,
 ** then eSearch would be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+4.
 */
@@ -147447,8 +147447,8 @@ struct Fts3Phrase {
   char *pOrPoslist;
   i64 iOrDocid;
 
-  /* Variables below this point are populated by fts3_expr.c when parsing 
-  ** a MATCH expression. Everything above is part of the evaluation phase. 
+  /* Variables below this point are populated by fts3_expr.c when parsing
+  ** a MATCH expression. Everything above is part of the evaluation phase.
   */
   int nToken;                /* Number of tokens in the phrase */
   int iColumn;               /* Index of column this phrase must match */
@@ -147458,10 +147458,10 @@ struct Fts3Phrase {
 /*
 ** A tree of these objects forms the RHS of a MATCH operator.
 **
-** If Fts3Expr.eType is FTSQUERY_PHRASE and isLoaded is true, then aDoclist 
-** points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes, containing the results 
-** of this phrase query in FTS3 doclist format. As usual, the initial 
-** "Length" field found in doclists stored on disk is omitted from this 
+** If Fts3Expr.eType is FTSQUERY_PHRASE and isLoaded is true, then aDoclist
+** points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes, containing the results
+** of this phrase query in FTS3 doclist format. As usual, the initial
+** "Length" field found in doclists stored on disk is omitted from this
 ** buffer.
 **
 ** Variable aMI is used only for FTSQUERY_NEAR nodes to store the global
@@ -147473,7 +147473,7 @@ struct Fts3Phrase {
 **   aMI[iCol*3 + 1] = Number of occurrences
 **   aMI[iCol*3 + 2] = Number of rows containing at least one instance
 **
-** The aMI array is allocated using sqlite3_malloc(). It should be freed 
+** The aMI array is allocated using sqlite3_malloc(). It should be freed
 ** when the expression node is.
 */
 struct Fts3Expr {
@@ -147497,7 +147497,7 @@ struct Fts3Expr {
 
 /*
 ** Candidate values for Fts3Query.eType. Note that the order of the first
-** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For 
+** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For
 ** example, the following:
 **
 **   "a OR b AND c NOT d NEAR e"
@@ -147554,7 +147554,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(Fts3Table*, Fts3MultiSegReader*, Ft
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(Fts3Table *, Fts3MultiSegReader *);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(Fts3MultiSegReader *);
 
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(Fts3Table *, 
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(Fts3Table *,
     int, int, int, const char *, int, int, int, Fts3MultiSegReader *);
 
 /* Flags allowed as part of the 4th argument to SegmentReaderIterate() */
@@ -147618,7 +147618,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pRc);
 /* fts3_tokenizer.c */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3Fts3NextToken(const char *, int *);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(sqlite3 *, Fts3Hash *, const char *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash, const char *, 
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash, const char *,
     sqlite3_tokenizer **, char **
 );
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(char);
@@ -147654,7 +147654,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrStart(
     Fts3Table*, Fts3MultiSegReader*, int, const char*, int);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(
     Fts3Table *, Fts3MultiSegReader *, sqlite3_int64 *, char **, int *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3Expr *, int iCol, char **); 
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3Expr *, int iCol, char **);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3MultiSegReader *, int *);
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrRestart(Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr);
 
@@ -147687,7 +147687,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(int);
 /* #include <stdarg.h> */
 
 /* #include "fts3.h" */
-#ifndef SQLITE_CORE 
+#ifndef SQLITE_CORE
 /* # include "sqlite3ext.h" */
   SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1
 #endif
@@ -147704,7 +147704,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Never(int b)  { assert( !b ); return b; }
 # endif
 #endif
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Write a 64-bit variable-length integer to memory starting at p[0].
 ** The length of data written will be between 1 and FTS3_VARINT_MAX bytes.
 ** The number of bytes written is returned.
@@ -147728,7 +147728,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3PutVarint(char *p, sqlite_int64 v){
   v = (*ptr++);                                               \
   if( (v & mask2)==0 ){ var = v; return ret; }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Read a 64-bit variable-length integer from memory starting at p[0].
 ** Return the number of bytes read, or 0 on error.
 ** The value is stored in *v.
@@ -147756,7 +147756,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(const char *pBuf, sqlite_int64 *v){
 }
 
 /*
-** Similar to sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(), except that the output is truncated to 
+** Similar to sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(), except that the output is truncated to
 ** a non-negative 32-bit integer before it is returned.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(const char *p, int *pi){
@@ -147814,7 +147814,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Dequote(char *z){
     int iOut = 0;                 /* Index of next byte to write to output */
 
     /* If the first byte was a '[', then the close-quote character is a ']' */
-    if( quote=='[' ) quote = ']';  
+    if( quote=='[' ) quote = ']';
 
     while( z[iIn] ){
       if( z[iIn]==quote ){
@@ -147850,14 +147850,14 @@ static void fts3GetDeltaVarint(char **pp, sqlite3_int64 *pVal){
 ** varint is part of.
 */
 static void fts3GetReverseVarint(
-  char **pp, 
-  char *pStart, 
+  char **pp,
+  char *pStart,
   sqlite3_int64 *pVal
 ){
   sqlite3_int64 iVal;
   char *p;
 
-  /* Pointer p now points at the first byte past the varint we are 
+  /* Pointer p now points at the first byte past the varint we are
   ** interested in. So, unless the doclist is corrupt, the 0x80 bit is
   ** clear on character p[-1]. */
   for(p = (*pp)-2; p>=pStart && *p&0x80; p--);
@@ -147965,7 +147965,7 @@ static int fts3DestroyMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
 ** passed as the first argument. This is done as part of the xConnect()
 ** and xCreate() methods.
 **
-** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op. 
+** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op.
 ** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is stored in *pRc
 ** before returning.
 */
@@ -147988,7 +147988,7 @@ static void fts3DeclareVtab(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
 
     /* Create the whole "CREATE TABLE" statement to pass to SQLite */
     zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(
-        "CREATE TABLE x(%s %Q HIDDEN, docid HIDDEN, %Q HIDDEN)", 
+        "CREATE TABLE x(%s %Q HIDDEN, docid HIDDEN, %Q HIDDEN)",
         zCols, p->zName, zLanguageid
     );
     if( !zCols || !zSql ){
@@ -148007,7 +148007,7 @@ static void fts3DeclareVtab(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
 ** Create the %_stat table if it does not already exist.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3CreateStatTable(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
-  fts3DbExec(pRc, p->db, 
+  fts3DbExec(pRc, p->db,
       "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS %Q.'%q_stat'"
           "(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, value BLOB);",
       p->zDb, p->zName
@@ -148043,9 +148043,9 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){
       zContentCols = sqlite3_mprintf("%z, langid", zContentCols, zLanguageid);
     }
     if( zContentCols==0 ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
-  
+
     /* Create the content table */
-    fts3DbExec(&rc, db, 
+    fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
        "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_content'(%s)",
        p->zDb, p->zName, zContentCols
     );
@@ -148053,11 +148053,11 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){
   }
 
   /* Create other tables */
-  fts3DbExec(&rc, db, 
+  fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
       "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_segments'(blockid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, block BLOB);",
       p->zDb, p->zName
   );
-  fts3DbExec(&rc, db, 
+  fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
       "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_segdir'("
         "level INTEGER,"
         "idx INTEGER,"
@@ -148070,7 +148070,7 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){
       p->zDb, p->zName
   );
   if( p->bHasDocsize ){
-    fts3DbExec(&rc, db, 
+    fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
         "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_docsize'(docid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, size BLOB);",
         p->zDb, p->zName
     );
@@ -148085,7 +148085,7 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){
 /*
 ** Store the current database page-size in bytes in p->nPgsz.
 **
-** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op. 
+** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op.
 ** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is stored in *pRc
 ** before returning.
 */
@@ -148094,7 +148094,7 @@ static void fts3DatabasePageSize(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
     int rc;                       /* Return code */
     char *zSql;                   /* SQL text "PRAGMA %Q.page_size" */
     sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;          /* Compiled "PRAGMA %Q.page_size" statement */
-  
+
     zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA %Q.page_size", p->zDb);
     if( !zSql ){
       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
@@ -148120,11 +148120,11 @@ static void fts3DatabasePageSize(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
 **
 **   <key> = <value>
 **
-** There may not be whitespace surrounding the "=" character. The <value> 
+** There may not be whitespace surrounding the "=" character. The <value>
 ** term may be quoted, but the <key> may not.
 */
 static int fts3IsSpecialColumn(
-  const char *z, 
+  const char *z,
   int *pnKey,
   char **pzValue
 ){
@@ -148201,7 +148201,7 @@ static char *fts3QuoteId(char const *zInput){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return a list of comma separated SQL expressions and a FROM clause that 
+** Return a list of comma separated SQL expressions and a FROM clause that
 ** could be used in a SELECT statement such as the following:
 **
 **     SELECT <list of expressions> FROM %_content AS x ...
@@ -148252,7 +148252,7 @@ static char *fts3ReadExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){
       fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, ", x.%Q", p->zLanguageid);
     }
   }
-  fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, " FROM '%q'.'%q%s' AS x", 
+  fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, " FROM '%q'.'%q%s' AS x",
       p->zDb,
       (p->zContentTbl ? p->zContentTbl : p->zName),
       (p->zContentTbl ? "" : "_content")
@@ -148267,7 +148267,7 @@ static char *fts3ReadExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){
 **
 ** If argument zFunc is not NULL, then all but the first question mark
 ** is preceded by zFunc and an open bracket, and followed by a closed
-** bracket. For example, if zFunc is "zip" and the FTS3 table has three 
+** bracket. For example, if zFunc is "zip" and the FTS3 table has three
 ** user-defined text columns, the following string is returned:
 **
 **     "?, zip(?), zip(?), zip(?)"
@@ -148304,11 +148304,11 @@ static char *fts3WriteExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){
 
 /*
 ** This function interprets the string at (*pp) as a non-negative integer
-** value. It reads the integer and sets *pnOut to the value read, then 
+** value. It reads the integer and sets *pnOut to the value read, then
 ** sets *pp to point to the byte immediately following the last byte of
 ** the integer value.
 **
-** Only decimal digits ('0'..'9') may be part of an integer value. 
+** Only decimal digits ('0'..'9') may be part of an integer value.
 **
 ** If *pp does not being with a decimal digit SQLITE_ERROR is returned and
 ** the output value undefined. Otherwise SQLITE_OK is returned.
@@ -148429,7 +148429,7 @@ static int fts3ContentColumns(
   char **pzErr                    /* OUT: error message */
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;             /* Return code */
-  char *zSql;                     /* "SELECT *" statement on zTbl */  
+  char *zSql;                     /* "SELECT *" statement on zTbl */
   sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;        /* Compiled version of zSql */
 
   zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT * FROM %Q.%Q", zDb, zTbl);
@@ -148571,9 +148571,9 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
     char *zVal;
 
     /* Check if this is a tokenizer specification */
-    if( !pTokenizer 
+    if( !pTokenizer
      && strlen(z)>8
-     && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(z, "tokenize", 8) 
+     && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(z, "tokenize", 8)
      && 0==sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(z[8])
     ){
       rc = sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(pHash, &z[9], &pTokenizer, pzErr);
@@ -148633,8 +148633,8 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
             break;
 
           case 4:               /* ORDER */
-            if( (strlen(zVal)!=3 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "asc", 3)) 
-             && (strlen(zVal)!=4 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "desc", 4)) 
+            if( (strlen(zVal)!=3 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "asc", 3))
+             && (strlen(zVal)!=4 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "desc", 4))
             ){
               sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr, "unrecognized order: %s", zVal);
               rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -148685,17 +148685,17 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
   **      TABLE statement, use all columns from the content table.
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && zContent ){
-    sqlite3_free(zCompress); 
-    sqlite3_free(zUncompress); 
+    sqlite3_free(zCompress);
+    sqlite3_free(zUncompress);
     zCompress = 0;
     zUncompress = 0;
     if( nCol==0 ){
-      sqlite3_free((void*)aCol); 
+      sqlite3_free((void*)aCol);
       aCol = 0;
       rc = fts3ContentColumns(db, argv[1], zContent,&aCol,&nCol,&nString,pzErr);
 
       /* If a languageid= option was specified, remove the language id
-      ** column from the aCol[] array. */ 
+      ** column from the aCol[] array. */
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && zLanguageid ){
         int j;
         for(j=0; j<nCol; j++){
@@ -148782,7 +148782,7 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
 
   /* Fill in the azColumn array */
   for(iCol=0; iCol<nCol; iCol++){
-    char *z; 
+    char *z;
     int n = 0;
     z = (char *)sqlite3Fts3NextToken(aCol[iCol], &n);
     if( n>0 ){
@@ -148801,7 +148801,7 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
     for(i=0; i<nNotindexed; i++){
       char *zNot = azNotindexed[i];
       if( zNot && n==(int)strlen(zNot)
-       && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(p->azColumn[iCol], zNot, n) 
+       && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(p->azColumn[iCol], zNot, n)
       ){
         p->abNotindexed[iCol] = 1;
         sqlite3_free(zNot);
@@ -148825,7 +148825,7 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
   p->zWriteExprlist = fts3WriteExprList(p, zCompress, &rc);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto fts3_init_out;
 
-  /* If this is an xCreate call, create the underlying tables in the 
+  /* If this is an xCreate call, create the underlying tables in the
   ** database. TODO: For xConnect(), it could verify that said tables exist.
   */
   if( isCreate ){
@@ -148921,11 +148921,11 @@ static void fts3SetUniqueFlag(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
 #endif
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Implementation of the xBestIndex method for FTS3 tables. There
 ** are three possible strategies, in order of preference:
 **
-**   1. Direct lookup by rowid or docid. 
+**   1. Direct lookup by rowid or docid.
 **   2. Full-text search using a MATCH operator on a non-docid column.
 **   3. Linear scan of %_content table.
 */
@@ -148940,7 +148940,7 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
   int iIdx;
 
   /* By default use a full table scan. This is an expensive option,
-  ** so search through the constraints to see if a more efficient 
+  ** so search through the constraints to see if a more efficient
   ** strategy is possible.
   */
   pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_FULLSCAN_SEARCH;
@@ -148976,12 +148976,12 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
     **
     ** If there is more than one MATCH constraint available, use the first
     ** one encountered. If there is both a MATCH constraint and a direct
-    ** rowid/docid lookup, prefer the MATCH strategy. This is done even 
+    ** rowid/docid lookup, prefer the MATCH strategy. This is done even
     ** though the rowid/docid lookup is faster than a MATCH query, selecting
-    ** it would lead to an "unable to use function MATCH in the requested 
+    ** it would lead to an "unable to use function MATCH in the requested
     ** context" error.
     */
-    if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH 
+    if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH
      && pCons->iColumn>=0 && pCons->iColumn<=p->nColumn
     ){
       pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH + pCons->iColumn;
@@ -148990,7 +148990,7 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
     }
 
     /* Equality constraint on the langid column */
-    if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ 
+    if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
      && pCons->iColumn==p->nColumn + 2
     ){
       iLangidCons = i;
@@ -149018,22 +149018,22 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
   if( iCons>=0 ){
     pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iCons].argvIndex = iIdx++;
     pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iCons].omit = 1;
-  } 
+  }
   if( iLangidCons>=0 ){
     pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_LANGID;
     pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iLangidCons].argvIndex = iIdx++;
-  } 
+  }
   if( iDocidGe>=0 ){
     pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_DOCID_GE;
     pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iDocidGe].argvIndex = iIdx++;
-  } 
+  }
   if( iDocidLe>=0 ){
     pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_DOCID_LE;
     pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iDocidLe].argvIndex = iIdx++;
-  } 
+  }
 
   /* Regardless of the strategy selected, FTS can deliver rows in rowid (or
-  ** docid) order. Both ascending and descending are possible. 
+  ** docid) order. Both ascending and descending are possible.
   */
   if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1 ){
     struct sqlite3_index_orderby *pOrder = &pInfo->aOrderBy[0];
@@ -149060,7 +149060,7 @@ static int fts3OpenMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCsr){
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
 
   /* Allocate a buffer large enough for an Fts3Cursor structure. If the
-  ** allocation succeeds, zero it and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, 
+  ** allocation succeeds, zero it and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise,
   ** if the allocation fails, return SQLITE_NOMEM.
   */
   *ppCsr = pCsr = (sqlite3_vtab_cursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3Cursor));
@@ -149148,7 +149148,7 @@ static int fts3CursorSeekStmt(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
 /*
 ** Position the pCsr->pStmt statement so that it is on the row
 ** of the %_content table that contains the last match.  Return
-** SQLITE_OK on success.  
+** SQLITE_OK on success.
 */
 static int fts3CursorSeek(sqlite3_context *pContext, Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -149180,7 +149180,7 @@ static int fts3CursorSeek(sqlite3_context *pContext, Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
 
 /*
 ** This function is used to process a single interior node when searching
-** a b-tree for a term or term prefix. The node data is passed to this 
+** a b-tree for a term or term prefix. The node data is passed to this
 ** function via the zNode/nNode parameters. The term to search for is
 ** passed in zTerm/nTerm.
 **
@@ -149209,9 +149209,9 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode(
   int isFirstTerm = 1;            /* True when processing first term on page */
   sqlite3_int64 iChild;           /* Block id of child node to descend to */
 
-  /* Skip over the 'height' varint that occurs at the start of every 
+  /* Skip over the 'height' varint that occurs at the start of every
   ** interior node. Then load the blockid of the left-child of the b-tree
-  ** node into variable iChild.  
+  ** node into variable iChild.
   **
   ** Even if the data structure on disk is corrupted, this (reading two
   ** varints from the buffer) does not risk an overread. If zNode is a
@@ -149227,13 +149227,13 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode(
   if( zCsr>zEnd ){
     return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB;
   }
-  
+
   while( zCsr<zEnd && (piFirst || piLast) ){
     int cmp;                      /* memcmp() result */
     int nSuffix;                  /* Size of term suffix */
     int nPrefix = 0;              /* Size of term prefix */
     int nBuffer;                  /* Total term size */
-  
+
     /* Load the next term on the node into zBuffer. Use realloc() to expand
     ** the size of zBuffer if required.  */
     if( !isFirstTerm ){
@@ -149241,7 +149241,7 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode(
     }
     isFirstTerm = 0;
     zCsr += fts3GetVarint32(zCsr, &nSuffix);
-    
+
     assert( nPrefix>=0 && nSuffix>=0 );
     if( &zCsr[nSuffix]>zEnd ){
       rc = FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB;
@@ -149264,8 +149264,8 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode(
 
     /* Compare the term we are searching for with the term just loaded from
     ** the interior node. If the specified term is greater than or equal
-    ** to the term from the interior node, then all terms on the sub-tree 
-    ** headed by node iChild are smaller than zTerm. No need to search 
+    ** to the term from the interior node, then all terms on the sub-tree
+    ** headed by node iChild are smaller than zTerm. No need to search
     ** iChild.
     **
     ** If the interior node term is larger than the specified term, then
@@ -149301,20 +149301,20 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode(
 ** node for the range of leaf nodes that may contain the specified term
 ** or terms for which the specified term is a prefix.
 **
-** If piLeaf is not NULL, then *piLeaf is set to the blockid of the 
+** If piLeaf is not NULL, then *piLeaf is set to the blockid of the
 ** left-most leaf node in the tree that may contain the specified term.
 ** If piLeaf2 is not NULL, then *piLeaf2 is set to the blockid of the
 ** right-most leaf node that may contain a term for which the specified
 ** term is a prefix.
 **
-** It is possible that the range of returned leaf nodes does not contain 
-** the specified term or any terms for which it is a prefix. However, if the 
+** It is possible that the range of returned leaf nodes does not contain
+** the specified term or any terms for which it is a prefix. However, if the
 ** segment does contain any such terms, they are stored within the identified
 ** range. Because this function only inspects interior segment nodes (and
 ** never loads leaf nodes into memory), it is not possible to be sure.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, an error code other than SQLITE_OK is returned.
-*/ 
+*/
 static int fts3SelectLeaf(
   Fts3Table *p,                   /* Virtual table handle */
   const char *zTerm,              /* Term to select leaves for */
@@ -149360,7 +149360,7 @@ static int fts3SelectLeaf(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used to create delta-encoded serialized lists of FTS3 
+** This function is used to create delta-encoded serialized lists of FTS3
 ** varints. Each call to this function appends a single varint to a list.
 */
 static void fts3PutDeltaVarint(
@@ -149374,11 +149374,11 @@ static void fts3PutDeltaVarint(
 }
 
 /*
-** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the 
+** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the
 ** start of a position-list. After it returns, *ppPoslist points to the
 ** first byte after the position-list.
 **
-** A position list is list of positions (delta encoded) and columns for 
+** A position list is list of positions (delta encoded) and columns for
 ** a single document record of a doclist.  So, in other words, this
 ** routine advances *ppPoslist so that it points to the next docid in
 ** the doclist, or to the first byte past the end of the doclist.
@@ -149391,12 +149391,12 @@ static void fts3PoslistCopy(char **pp, char **ppPoslist){
   char *pEnd = *ppPoslist;
   char c = 0;
 
-  /* The end of a position list is marked by a zero encoded as an FTS3 
+  /* The end of a position list is marked by a zero encoded as an FTS3
   ** varint. A single POS_END (0) byte. Except, if the 0 byte is preceded by
   ** a byte with the 0x80 bit set, then it is not a varint 0, but the tail
   ** of some other, multi-byte, value.
   **
-  ** The following while-loop moves pEnd to point to the first byte that is not 
+  ** The following while-loop moves pEnd to point to the first byte that is not
   ** immediately preceded by a byte with the 0x80 bit set. Then increments
   ** pEnd once more so that it points to the byte immediately following the
   ** last byte in the position-list.
@@ -149418,7 +149418,7 @@ static void fts3PoslistCopy(char **pp, char **ppPoslist){
 }
 
 /*
-** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the 
+** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the
 ** start of a column-list. After it returns, *ppPoslist points to the
 ** to the terminator (POS_COLUMN or POS_END) byte of the column-list.
 **
@@ -149468,7 +149468,7 @@ static void fts3ColumnlistCopy(char **pp, char **ppPoslist){
 ** (in which case **pp will be a terminator bytes POS_END (0) or
 ** (1)).
 **
-** If *pp points past the end of the current position-list, set *pi to 
+** If *pp points past the end of the current position-list, set *pi to
 ** POSITION_LIST_END and return. Otherwise, read the next varint from *pp,
 ** increment the current value of *pi by the value read, and set *pp to
 ** point to the next value before returning.
@@ -149496,7 +149496,7 @@ static void fts3ReadNextPos(
 ** the value of iCol encoded as a varint to *pp.   This will start a new
 ** column list.
 **
-** Set *pp to point to the byte just after the last byte written before 
+** Set *pp to point to the byte just after the last byte written before
 ** returning (do not modify it if iCol==0). Return the total number of bytes
 ** written (0 if iCol==0).
 */
@@ -149549,7 +149549,7 @@ static void fts3PoslistMerge(
 
       /* At this point, both p1 and p2 point to the start of column-lists
       ** for the same column (the column with index iCol1 and iCol2).
-      ** A column-list is a list of non-negative delta-encoded varints, each 
+      ** A column-list is a list of non-negative delta-encoded varints, each
       ** incremented by 2 before being stored. Each list is terminated by a
       ** POS_END (0) or POS_COLUMN (1). The following block merges the two lists
       ** and writes the results to buffer p. p is left pointing to the byte
@@ -149559,7 +149559,7 @@ static void fts3PoslistMerge(
       fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p1, &i1);
       fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p2, &i2);
       do {
-        fts3PutDeltaVarint(&p, &iPrev, (i1<i2) ? i1 : i2); 
+        fts3PutDeltaVarint(&p, &iPrev, (i1<i2) ? i1 : i2);
         iPrev -= 2;
         if( i1==i2 ){
           fts3ReadNextPos(&p1, &i1);
@@ -149600,7 +149600,7 @@ static void fts3PoslistMerge(
 ** When this function returns, both *pp1 and *pp2 are left pointing to the
 ** byte following the 0x00 terminator of their respective position lists.
 **
-** If isSaveLeft is 0, an entry is added to the output position list for 
+** If isSaveLeft is 0, an entry is added to the output position list for
 ** each position in *pp2 for which there exists one or more positions in
 ** *pp1 so that (pos(*pp2)>pos(*pp1) && pos(*pp2)-pos(*pp1)<=nToken). i.e.
 ** when the *pp1 token appears before the *pp2 token, but not more than nToken
@@ -149626,11 +149626,11 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(
   assert( isSaveLeft==0 || isExact==0 );
 
   assert( p!=0 && *p1!=0 && *p2!=0 );
-  if( *p1==POS_COLUMN ){ 
+  if( *p1==POS_COLUMN ){
     p1++;
     p1 += fts3GetVarint32(p1, &iCol1);
   }
-  if( *p2==POS_COLUMN ){ 
+  if( *p2==POS_COLUMN ){
     p2++;
     p2 += fts3GetVarint32(p2, &iCol2);
   }
@@ -149653,8 +149653,8 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(
       fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p2, &iPos2); iPos2 -= 2;
 
       while( 1 ){
-        if( iPos2==iPos1+nToken 
-         || (isExact==0 && iPos2>iPos1 && iPos2<=iPos1+nToken) 
+        if( iPos2==iPos1+nToken
+         || (isExact==0 && iPos2>iPos1 && iPos2<=iPos1+nToken)
         ){
           sqlite3_int64 iSave;
           iSave = isSaveLeft ? iPos1 : iPos2;
@@ -149689,8 +149689,8 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(
 
     /* Advance pointer p1 or p2 (whichever corresponds to the smaller of
     ** iCol1 and iCol2) so that it points to either the 0x00 that marks the
-    ** end of the position list, or the 0x01 that precedes the next 
-    ** column-number in the position list. 
+    ** end of the position list, or the 0x01 that precedes the next
+    ** column-number in the position list.
     */
     else if( iCol1<iCol2 ){
       fts3ColumnlistCopy(0, &p1);
@@ -149719,14 +149719,14 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(
 
 /*
 ** Merge two position-lists as required by the NEAR operator. The argument
-** position lists correspond to the left and right phrases of an expression 
+** position lists correspond to the left and right phrases of an expression
 ** like:
 **
 **     "phrase 1" NEAR "phrase number 2"
 **
-** Position list *pp1 corresponds to the left-hand side of the NEAR 
-** expression and *pp2 to the right. As usual, the indexes in the position 
-** lists are the offsets of the last token in each phrase (tokens "1" and "2" 
+** Position list *pp1 corresponds to the left-hand side of the NEAR
+** expression and *pp2 to the right. As usual, the indexes in the position
+** lists are the offsets of the last token in each phrase (tokens "1" and "2"
 ** in the example above).
 **
 ** The output position list - written to *pp - is a copy of *pp2 with those
@@ -149766,7 +149766,7 @@ static int fts3PoslistNearMerge(
   return res;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** An instance of this function is used to merge together the (potentially
 ** large number of) doclists for each term that matches a prefix query.
 ** See function fts3TermSelectMerge() for details.
@@ -149787,7 +149787,7 @@ struct TermSelect {
 ** from *pp. *pp is then set to point 1 byte past the end of the read varint.
 **
 ** If bDescIdx is false, the value read is added to *pVal before returning.
-** If it is true, the value read is subtracted from *pVal before this 
+** If it is true, the value read is subtracted from *pVal before this
 ** function returns.
 */
 static void fts3GetDeltaVarint3(
@@ -149815,9 +149815,9 @@ static void fts3GetDeltaVarint3(
 ** end of the value written.
 **
 ** If *pbFirst is zero when this function is called, the value written to
-** the buffer is that of parameter iVal. 
+** the buffer is that of parameter iVal.
 **
-** If *pbFirst is non-zero when this function is called, then the value 
+** If *pbFirst is non-zero when this function is called, then the value
 ** written is either (iVal-*piPrev) (if bDescIdx is zero) or (*piPrev-iVal)
 ** (if bDescIdx is non-zero).
 **
@@ -149848,7 +149848,7 @@ static void fts3PutDeltaVarint3(
 /*
 ** This macro is used by various functions that merge doclists. The two
 ** arguments are 64-bit docid values. If the value of the stack variable
-** bDescDoclist is 0 when this macro is invoked, then it returns (i1-i2). 
+** bDescDoclist is 0 when this macro is invoked, then it returns (i1-i2).
 ** Otherwise, (i2-i1).
 **
 ** Using this makes it easier to write code that can merge doclists that are
@@ -149858,7 +149858,7 @@ static void fts3PutDeltaVarint3(
 
 /*
 ** This function does an "OR" merge of two doclists (output contains all
-** positions contained in either argument doclist). If the docids in the 
+** positions contained in either argument doclist). If the docids in the
 ** input doclists are sorted in ascending order, parameter bDescDoclist
 ** should be false. If they are sorted in ascending order, it should be
 ** passed a non-zero value.
@@ -149897,12 +149897,12 @@ static int fts3DoclistOrMerge(
   ** current and previous docid (a positive number - since the list is in
   ** ascending order).
   **
-  ** The first docid written to the output is therefore encoded using the 
+  ** The first docid written to the output is therefore encoded using the
   ** same number of bytes as it is in whichever of the input lists it is
-  ** read from. And each subsequent docid read from the same input list 
+  ** read from. And each subsequent docid read from the same input list
   ** consumes either the same or less bytes as it did in the input (since
   ** the difference between it and the previous value in the output must
-  ** be a positive value less than or equal to the delta value read from 
+  ** be a positive value less than or equal to the delta value read from
   ** the input list). The same argument applies to all but the first docid
   ** read from the 'other' list. And to the contents of all position lists
   ** that will be copied and merged from the input to the output.
@@ -149914,9 +149914,9 @@ static int fts3DoclistOrMerge(
   **
   ** The space required to store the output is therefore the sum of the
   ** sizes of the two inputs, plus enough space for exactly one of the input
-  ** docids to grow. 
+  ** docids to grow.
   **
-  ** A symetric argument may be made if the doclists are in descending 
+  ** A symetric argument may be made if the doclists are in descending
   ** order.
   */
   aOut = sqlite3_malloc(n1+n2+FTS3_VARINT_MAX-1);
@@ -149957,7 +149957,7 @@ static int fts3DoclistOrMerge(
 ** exactly nDist tokens before it.
 **
 ** If the docids in the input doclists are sorted in ascending order,
-** parameter bDescDoclist should be false. If they are sorted in ascending 
+** parameter bDescDoclist should be false. If they are sorted in ascending
 ** order, it should be passed a non-zero value.
 **
 ** The right-hand input doclist is overwritten by this function.
@@ -150103,7 +150103,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectFinishMerge(Fts3Table *p, TermSelect *pTS){
         int nNew;
         char *aNew;
 
-        int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, 
+        int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx,
             pTS->aaOutput[i], pTS->anOutput[i], aOut, nOut, &aNew, &nNew
         );
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -150147,15 +150147,15 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge(
 ){
   if( pTS->aaOutput[0]==0 ){
     /* If this is the first term selected, copy the doclist to the output
-    ** buffer using memcpy(). 
+    ** buffer using memcpy().
     **
-    ** Add FTS3_VARINT_MAX bytes of unused space to the end of the 
+    ** Add FTS3_VARINT_MAX bytes of unused space to the end of the
     ** allocation. This is so as to ensure that the buffer is big enough
     ** to hold the current doclist AND'd with any other doclist. If the
     ** doclists are stored in order=ASC order, this padding would not be
     ** required (since the size of [doclistA AND doclistB] is always less
     ** than or equal to the size of [doclistA] in that case). But this is
-    ** not true for order=DESC. For example, a doclist containing (1, -1) 
+    ** not true for order=DESC. For example, a doclist containing (1, -1)
     ** may be smaller than (-1), as in the first example the -1 may be stored
     ** as a single-byte delta, whereas in the second it must be stored as a
     ** FTS3_VARINT_MAX byte varint.
@@ -150184,7 +150184,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge(
         char *aNew;
         int nNew;
 
-        int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, aMerge, nMerge, 
+        int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, aMerge, nMerge,
             pTS->aaOutput[iOut], pTS->anOutput[iOut], &aNew, &nNew
         );
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -150195,7 +150195,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge(
         if( aMerge!=aDoclist ) sqlite3_free(aMerge);
         sqlite3_free(pTS->aaOutput[iOut]);
         pTS->aaOutput[iOut] = 0;
-  
+
         aMerge = aNew;
         nMerge = nNew;
         if( (iOut+1)==SizeofArray(pTS->aaOutput) ){
@@ -150212,7 +150212,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge(
 ** Append SegReader object pNew to the end of the pCsr->apSegment[] array.
 */
 static int fts3SegReaderCursorAppend(
-  Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr, 
+  Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr,
   Fts3SegReader *pNew
 ){
   if( (pCsr->nSegment%16)==0 ){
@@ -150251,10 +150251,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor(
   sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;        /* Statement to iterate through segments */
   int rc2;                        /* Result of sqlite3_reset() */
 
-  /* If iLevel is less than 0 and this is not a scan, include a seg-reader 
+  /* If iLevel is less than 0 and this is not a scan, include a seg-reader
   ** for the pending-terms. If this is a scan, then this call must be being
   ** made by an fts4aux module, not an FTS table. In this case calling
-  ** Fts3SegReaderPending might segfault, as the data structures used by 
+  ** Fts3SegReaderPending might segfault, as the data structures used by
   ** fts4aux are not completely populated. So it's easiest to filter these
   ** calls out here.  */
   if( iLevel<0 && p->aIndex ){
@@ -150288,10 +150288,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor(
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished;
         if( isPrefix==0 && isScan==0 ) iLeavesEndBlock = iStartBlock;
       }
- 
-      rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(pCsr->nSegment+1, 
+
+      rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(pCsr->nSegment+1,
           (isPrefix==0 && isScan==0),
-          iStartBlock, iLeavesEndBlock, 
+          iStartBlock, iLeavesEndBlock,
           iEndBlock, zRoot, nRoot, &pSeg
       );
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished;
@@ -150307,7 +150307,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor(
 }
 
 /*
-** Set up a cursor object for iterating through a full-text index or a 
+** Set up a cursor object for iterating through a full-text index or a
 ** single level therein.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(
@@ -150323,7 +150323,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(
 ){
   assert( iIndex>=0 && iIndex<p->nIndex );
   assert( iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL
-      ||  iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING 
+      ||  iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING
       ||  iLevel>=0
   );
   assert( iLevel<FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL );
@@ -150349,20 +150349,20 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursorAddZero(
   int nTerm,                      /* Number of bytes in zTerm */
   Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr        /* Fts3MultiSegReader to modify */
 ){
-  return fts3SegReaderCursor(p, 
+  return fts3SegReaderCursor(p,
       iLangid, 0, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, 0, 0,pCsr
   );
 }
 
 /*
 ** Open an Fts3MultiSegReader to scan the doclist for term zTerm/nTerm. Or,
-** if isPrefix is true, to scan the doclist for all terms for which 
+** if isPrefix is true, to scan the doclist for all terms for which
 ** zTerm/nTerm is a prefix. If successful, return SQLITE_OK and write
 ** a pointer to the new Fts3MultiSegReader to *ppSegcsr. Otherwise, return
 ** an SQLite error code.
 **
 ** It is the responsibility of the caller to free this object by eventually
-** passing it to fts3SegReaderCursorFree() 
+** passing it to fts3SegReaderCursorFree()
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs, otherwise an SQLite error code.
 ** Output parameter *ppSegcsr is set to 0 if an error occurs.
@@ -150387,7 +150387,7 @@ static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor(
       for(i=1; bFound==0 && i<p->nIndex; i++){
         if( p->aIndex[i].nPrefix==nTerm ){
           bFound = 1;
-          rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, 
+          rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
               i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, 0, 0, pSegcsr
           );
           pSegcsr->bLookup = 1;
@@ -150397,7 +150397,7 @@ static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor(
       for(i=1; bFound==0 && i<p->nIndex; i++){
         if( p->aIndex[i].nPrefix==nTerm+1 ){
           bFound = 1;
-          rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, 
+          rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
               i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, 1, 0, pSegcsr
           );
           if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -150410,7 +150410,7 @@ static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor(
     }
 
     if( bFound==0 ){
-      rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, 
+      rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
           0, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, isPrefix, 0, pSegcsr
       );
       pSegcsr->bLookup = !isPrefix;
@@ -150458,7 +150458,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelect(
 
   rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(p, pSegcsr, &filter);
   while( SQLITE_OK==rc
-      && SQLITE_ROW==(rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, pSegcsr)) 
+      && SQLITE_ROW==(rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, pSegcsr))
   ){
     rc = fts3TermSelectMerge(p, &tsc, pSegcsr->aDoclist, pSegcsr->nDoclist);
   }
@@ -150487,7 +150487,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelect(
 **
 ** If the isPoslist argument is true, then it is assumed that the doclist
 ** contains a position-list following each docid. Otherwise, it is assumed
-** that the doclist is simply a list of docids stored as delta encoded 
+** that the doclist is simply a list of docids stored as delta encoded
 ** varints.
 */
 static int fts3DoclistCountDocids(char *aList, int nList){
@@ -150638,7 +150638,7 @@ static int fts3FilterMethod(
 
     assert( p->base.zErrMsg==0 );
     rc = sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(p->pTokenizer, pCsr->iLangid,
-        p->azColumn, p->bFts4, p->nColumn, iCol, zQuery, -1, &pCsr->pExpr, 
+        p->azColumn, p->bFts4, p->nColumn, iCol, zQuery, -1, &pCsr->pExpr,
         &p->base.zErrMsg
     );
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -150665,7 +150665,7 @@ static int fts3FilterMethod(
           (pCsr->bDesc ? "DESC" : "ASC")
       );
     }else{
-      zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT %s ORDER BY rowid %s", 
+      zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT %s ORDER BY rowid %s",
           p->zReadExprlist, (pCsr->bDesc ? "DESC" : "ASC")
       );
     }
@@ -150686,8 +150686,8 @@ static int fts3FilterMethod(
   return fts3NextMethod(pCursor);
 }
 
-/* 
-** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this 
+/*
+** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this
 ** routine to find out if it has reached the end of a result set.
 */
 static int fts3EofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
@@ -150699,7 +150699,7 @@ static int fts3EofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
   return pCsr->isEof;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This is the xRowid method. The SQLite core calls this routine to
 ** retrieve the rowid for the current row of the result set. fts3
 ** exposes %_content.docid as the rowid for the virtual table. The
@@ -150711,7 +150711,7 @@ static int fts3RowidMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This is the xColumn method, called by SQLite to request a value from
 ** the row that the supplied cursor currently points to.
 **
@@ -150771,8 +150771,8 @@ static int fts3ColumnMethod(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
-** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by 
+/*
+** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by
 ** FTS3 virtual tables. It is invoked by SQLite each time a row is to be
 ** inserted, updated or deleted.
 */
@@ -150807,7 +150807,7 @@ static int fts3SyncMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
   **
   ** Of course, updating the input segments also involves deleting a bunch
   ** of blocks from the segments table. But this is not considered overhead
-  ** as it would also be required by a crisis-merge that used the same input 
+  ** as it would also be required by a crisis-merge that used the same input
   ** segments.
   */
   const u32 nMinMerge = 64;       /* Minimum amount of incr-merge work to do */
@@ -150817,8 +150817,8 @@ static int fts3SyncMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
   i64 iLastRowid = sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(p->db);
 
   rc = sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(p);
-  if( rc==SQLITE_OK 
-   && p->nLeafAdd>(nMinMerge/16) 
+  if( rc==SQLITE_OK
+   && p->nLeafAdd>(nMinMerge/16)
    && p->nAutoincrmerge && p->nAutoincrmerge!=0xff
   ){
     int mxLevel = 0;              /* Maximum relative level value in db */
@@ -150857,7 +150857,7 @@ static int fts3SetHasStat(Fts3Table *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of xBegin() method. 
+** Implementation of xBegin() method.
 */
 static int fts3BeginMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
   Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table*)pVtab;
@@ -150913,17 +150913,17 @@ static void fts3ReversePoslist(char *pStart, char **ppPoslist){
   /* Skip backwards passed any trailing 0x00 bytes added by NearTrim() */
   while( p>pStart && (c=*p--)==0 );
 
-  /* Search backwards for a varint with value zero (the end of the previous 
+  /* Search backwards for a varint with value zero (the end of the previous
   ** poslist). This is an 0x00 byte preceded by some byte that does not
   ** have the 0x80 bit set.  */
-  while( p>pStart && (*p & 0x80) | c ){ 
-    c = *p--; 
+  while( p>pStart && (*p & 0x80) | c ){
+    c = *p--;
   }
   assert( p==pStart || c==0 );
 
   /* At this point p points to that preceding byte without the 0x80 bit
   ** set. So to find the start of the poslist, skip forward 2 bytes then
-  ** over a varint. 
+  ** over a varint.
   **
   ** Normally. The other case is that p==pStart and the poslist to return
   ** is the first in the doclist. In this case do not skip forward 2 bytes.
@@ -150944,7 +150944,7 @@ static void fts3ReversePoslist(char *pStart, char **ppPoslist){
 ** offsets() and optimize() SQL functions.
 **
 ** If the value passed as the third argument is a blob of size
-** sizeof(Fts3Cursor*), then the blob contents are copied to the 
+** sizeof(Fts3Cursor*), then the blob contents are copied to the
 ** output variable *ppCsr and SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, an error
 ** message is written to context pContext and SQLITE_ERROR returned. The
 ** string passed via zFunc is used as part of the error message.
@@ -150989,7 +150989,7 @@ static void fts3SnippetFunc(
   assert( nVal>=1 );
 
   if( nVal>6 ){
-    sqlite3_result_error(pContext, 
+    sqlite3_result_error(pContext,
         "wrong number of arguments to function snippet()", -1);
     return;
   }
@@ -151031,8 +151031,8 @@ static void fts3OffsetsFunc(
   }
 }
 
-/* 
-** Implementation of the special optimize() function for FTS3. This 
+/*
+** Implementation of the special optimize() function for FTS3. This
 ** function merges all segments in the database to a single segment.
 ** Example usage is:
 **
@@ -151141,10 +151141,10 @@ static int fts3RenameMethod(
   /* At this point it must be known if the %_stat table exists or not.
   ** So bHasStat may not be 2.  */
   rc = fts3SetHasStat(p);
-  
+
   /* As it happens, the pending terms table is always empty here. This is
-  ** because an "ALTER TABLE RENAME TABLE" statement inside a transaction 
-  ** always opens a savepoint transaction. And the xSavepoint() method 
+  ** because an "ALTER TABLE RENAME TABLE" statement inside a transaction
+  ** always opens a savepoint transaction. And the xSavepoint() method
   ** flushes the pending terms table. But leave the (no-op) call to
   ** PendingTermsFlush() in in case that changes.
   */
@@ -151268,7 +151268,7 @@ static void hashDestroy(void *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** The fts3 built-in tokenizers - "simple", "porter" and "icu"- are 
+** The fts3 built-in tokenizers - "simple", "porter" and "icu"- are
 ** implemented in files fts3_tokenizer1.c, fts3_porter.c and fts3_icu.c
 ** respectively. The following three forward declarations are for functions
 ** declared in these files used to retrieve the respective implementations.
@@ -151332,10 +151332,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){
   /* Load the built-in tokenizers into the hash table */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     if( sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "simple", 7, (void *)pSimple)
-     || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "porter", 7, (void *)pPorter) 
+     || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "porter", 7, (void *)pPorter)
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE
-     || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "unicode61", 10, (void *)pUnicode) 
+     || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "unicode61", 10, (void *)pUnicode)
 #endif
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU
      || (pIcu && sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "icu", 4, (void *)pIcu))
@@ -151351,11 +151351,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* Create the virtual table wrapper around the hash-table and overload 
+  /* Create the virtual table wrapper around the hash-table and overload
   ** the four scalar functions. If this is successful, register the
   ** module with sqlite.
   */
-  if( SQLITE_OK==rc 
+  if( SQLITE_OK==rc
    && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(db, pHash, "fts3_tokenizer"))
    && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3_overload_function(db, "snippet", -1))
    && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3_overload_function(db, "offsets", 1))
@@ -151389,7 +151389,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){
 
 /*
 ** Allocate an Fts3MultiSegReader for each token in the expression headed
-** by pExpr. 
+** by pExpr.
 **
 ** An Fts3SegReader object is a cursor that can seek or scan a range of
 ** entries within a single segment b-tree. An Fts3MultiSegReader uses multiple
@@ -151399,7 +151399,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){
 ** If the allocated Fts3MultiSegReader just seeks to a single entry in a
 ** segment b-tree (if the term is not a prefix or it is a prefix for which
 ** there exists prefix b-tree of the right length) then it may be traversed
-** and merged incrementally. Otherwise, it has to be merged into an in-memory 
+** and merged incrementally. Otherwise, it has to be merged into an in-memory
 ** doclist and then traversed.
 */
 static void fts3EvalAllocateReaders(
@@ -151416,7 +151416,7 @@ static void fts3EvalAllocateReaders(
       *pnToken += nToken;
       for(i=0; i<nToken; i++){
         Fts3PhraseToken *pToken = &pExpr->pPhrase->aToken[i];
-        int rc = fts3TermSegReaderCursor(pCsr, 
+        int rc = fts3TermSegReaderCursor(pCsr,
             pToken->z, pToken->n, pToken->isPrefix, &pToken->pSegcsr
         );
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -151621,7 +151621,7 @@ static int fts3EvalDeferredPhrase(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){
         sqlite3_free(aPoslist);
         return SQLITE_NOMEM;
       }
-      
+
       pPhrase->doclist.pList = aOut;
       if( fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(&aOut, nDistance, 0, 1, &p1, &p2) ){
         pPhrase->doclist.bFreeList = 1;
@@ -151645,7 +151645,7 @@ static int fts3EvalDeferredPhrase(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){
 #define MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS 4
 
 /*
-** This function is called for each Fts3Phrase in a full-text query 
+** This function is called for each Fts3Phrase in a full-text query
 ** expression to initialize the mechanism for returning rows. Once this
 ** function has been called successfully on an Fts3Phrase, it may be
 ** used with fts3EvalPhraseNext() to iterate through the matching docids.
@@ -151663,12 +151663,12 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseStart(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int bOptOk, Fts3Phrase *p){
 
   /* Determine if doclists may be loaded from disk incrementally. This is
   ** possible if the bOptOk argument is true, the FTS doclists will be
-  ** scanned in forward order, and the phrase consists of 
+  ** scanned in forward order, and the phrase consists of
   ** MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS or fewer tokens, none of which are are "^first"
   ** tokens or prefix tokens that cannot use a prefix-index.  */
   int bHaveIncr = 0;
-  int bIncrOk = (bOptOk 
-   && pCsr->bDesc==pTab->bDescIdx 
+  int bIncrOk = (bOptOk
+   && pCsr->bDesc==pTab->bDescIdx
    && p->nToken<=MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS && p->nToken>0
 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
    && pTab->bNoIncrDoclist==0
@@ -151704,12 +151704,12 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseStart(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int bOptOk, Fts3Phrase *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used to iterate backwards (from the end to start) 
+** This function is used to iterate backwards (from the end to start)
 ** through doclists. It is used by this module to iterate through phrase
 ** doclists in reverse and by the fts3_write.c module to iterate through
 ** pending-terms lists when writing to databases with "order=desc".
 **
-** The doclist may be sorted in ascending (parameter bDescIdx==0) or 
+** The doclist may be sorted in ascending (parameter bDescIdx==0) or
 ** descending (parameter bDescIdx==1) order of docid. Regardless, this
 ** function iterates from the end of the doclist to the beginning.
 */
@@ -151789,7 +151789,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3DoclistNext(
     p += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(p, piDocid);
   }else{
     fts3PoslistCopy(0, &p);
-    while( p<&aDoclist[nDoclist] && *p==0 ) p++; 
+    while( p<&aDoclist[nDoclist] && *p==0 ) p++;
     if( p>=&aDoclist[nDoclist] ){
       *pbEof = 1;
     }else{
@@ -151813,7 +151813,7 @@ static void fts3EvalDlPhraseNext(
 ){
   char *pIter;                            /* Used to iterate through aAll */
   char *pEnd = &pDL->aAll[pDL->nAll];     /* 1 byte past end of aAll */
- 
+
   if( pDL->pNextDocid ){
     pIter = pDL->pNextDocid;
   }else{
@@ -151861,12 +151861,12 @@ struct TokenDoclist {
 };
 
 /*
-** Token pToken is an incrementally loaded token that is part of a 
+** Token pToken is an incrementally loaded token that is part of a
 ** multi-token phrase. Advance it to the next matching document in the
 ** database and populate output variable *p with the details of the new
 ** entry. Or, if the iterator has reached EOF, set *pbEof to true.
 **
-** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return 
+** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
 ** SQLITE_OK.
 */
 static int incrPhraseTokenNext(
@@ -151907,18 +151907,18 @@ static int incrPhraseTokenNext(
 /*
 ** The phrase iterator passed as the second argument:
 **
-**   * features at least one token that uses an incremental doclist, and 
+**   * features at least one token that uses an incremental doclist, and
 **
 **   * does not contain any deferred tokens.
 **
 ** Advance it to the next matching documnent in the database and populate
-** the Fts3Doclist.pList and nList fields. 
+** the Fts3Doclist.pList and nList fields.
 **
 ** If there is no "next" entry and no error occurs, then *pbEof is set to
 ** 1 before returning. Otherwise, if no error occurs and the iterator is
 ** successfully advanced, *pbEof is set to 0.
 **
-** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return 
+** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
 ** SQLITE_OK.
 */
 static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(
@@ -151936,7 +151936,7 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(
   assert( p->bIncr==1 );
 
   if( p->nToken==1 ){
-    rc = sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(pTab, p->aToken[0].pSegcsr, 
+    rc = sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(pTab, p->aToken[0].pSegcsr,
         &pDL->iDocid, &pDL->pList, &pDL->nList
     );
     if( pDL->pList==0 ) bEof = 1;
@@ -151966,8 +151966,8 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(
 
       /* Keep advancing iterators until they all point to the same document */
       for(i=0; i<p->nToken; i++){
-        while( rc==SQLITE_OK && bEof==0 
-            && a[i].bIgnore==0 && DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)<0 
+        while( rc==SQLITE_OK && bEof==0
+            && a[i].bIgnore==0 && DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)<0
         ){
           rc = incrPhraseTokenNext(pTab, p, i, &a[i], &bEof);
           if( DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)>0 ){
@@ -152013,8 +152013,8 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to move the phrase iterator to point to the next matching docid. 
-** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return 
+** Attempt to move the phrase iterator to point to the next matching docid.
+** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
 ** SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** If there is no "next" entry and no error occurs, then *pbEof is set to
@@ -152033,7 +152033,7 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseNext(
   if( p->bIncr ){
     rc = fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(pCsr, p, pbEof);
   }else if( pCsr->bDesc!=pTab->bDescIdx && pDL->nAll ){
-    sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(pTab->bDescIdx, pDL->aAll, pDL->nAll, 
+    sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(pTab->bDescIdx, pDL->aAll, pDL->nAll,
         &pDL->pNextDocid, &pDL->iDocid, &pDL->nList, pbEof
     );
     pDL->pList = pDL->pNextDocid;
@@ -152093,7 +152093,7 @@ static void fts3EvalStartReaders(
 ** Tokens are divided into AND/NEAR clusters. All tokens in a cluster belong
 ** to phrases that are connected only by AND and NEAR operators (not OR or
 ** NOT). When determining tokens to defer, each AND/NEAR cluster is considered
-** separately. The root of a tokens AND/NEAR cluster is stored in 
+** separately. The root of a tokens AND/NEAR cluster is stored in
 ** Fts3TokenAndCost.pRoot.
 */
 typedef struct Fts3TokenAndCost Fts3TokenAndCost;
@@ -152161,7 +152161,7 @@ static void fts3EvalTokenCosts(
 ** write this value to *pnPage and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return
 ** an SQLite error code.
 **
-** The average document size in pages is calculated by first calculating 
+** The average document size in pages is calculated by first calculating
 ** determining the average size in bytes, B. If B is less than the amount
 ** of data that will fit on a single leaf page of an intkey table in
 ** this database, then the average docsize is 1. Otherwise, it is 1 plus
@@ -152171,10 +152171,10 @@ static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   if( pCsr->nRowAvg==0 ){
     /* The average document size, which is required to calculate the cost
-    ** of each doclist, has not yet been determined. Read the required 
+    ** of each doclist, has not yet been determined. Read the required
     ** data from the %_stat table to calculate it.
     **
-    ** Entry 0 of the %_stat table is a blob containing (nCol+1) FTS3 
+    ** Entry 0 of the %_stat table is a blob containing (nCol+1) FTS3
     ** varints, where nCol is the number of columns in the FTS3 table.
     ** The first varint is the number of documents currently stored in
     ** the table. The following nCol varints contain the total amount of
@@ -152205,7 +152205,7 @@ static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){
 
     pCsr->nDoc = nDoc;
     pCsr->nRowAvg = (int)(((nByte / nDoc) + p->nPgsz) / p->nPgsz);
-    assert( pCsr->nRowAvg>0 ); 
+    assert( pCsr->nRowAvg>0 );
     rc = sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
   }
 
@@ -152214,11 +152214,11 @@ static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called to select the tokens (if any) that will be 
+** This function is called to select the tokens (if any) that will be
 ** deferred. The array aTC[] has already been populated when this is
 ** called.
 **
-** This function is called once for each AND/NEAR cluster in the 
+** This function is called once for each AND/NEAR cluster in the
 ** expression. Each invocation determines which tokens to defer within
 ** the cluster with root node pRoot. See comments above the definition
 ** of struct Fts3TokenAndCost for more details.
@@ -152268,8 +152268,8 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
   assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nDocSize>0 );
 
 
-  /* Iterate through all tokens in this AND/NEAR cluster, in ascending order 
-  ** of the number of overflow pages that will be loaded by the pager layer 
+  /* Iterate through all tokens in this AND/NEAR cluster, in ascending order
+  ** of the number of overflow pages that will be loaded by the pager layer
   ** to retrieve the entire doclist for the token from the full-text index.
   ** Load the doclists for tokens that are either:
   **
@@ -152280,7 +152280,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
   **
   ** After each token doclist is loaded, merge it with the others from the
   ** same phrase and count the number of documents that the merged doclist
-  ** contains. Set variable "nMinEst" to the smallest number of documents in 
+  ** contains. Set variable "nMinEst" to the smallest number of documents in
   ** any phrase doclist for which 1 or more token doclists have been loaded.
   ** Let nOther be the number of other phrases for which it is certain that
   ** one or more tokens will not be deferred.
@@ -152296,8 +152296,8 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
 
     /* Set pTC to point to the cheapest remaining token. */
     for(iTC=0; iTC<nTC; iTC++){
-      if( aTC[iTC].pToken && aTC[iTC].pRoot==pRoot 
-       && (!pTC || aTC[iTC].nOvfl<pTC->nOvfl) 
+      if( aTC[iTC].pToken && aTC[iTC].pRoot==pRoot
+       && (!pTC || aTC[iTC].nOvfl<pTC->nOvfl)
       ){
         pTC = &aTC[iTC];
       }
@@ -152306,7 +152306,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
 
     if( ii && pTC->nOvfl>=((nMinEst+(nLoad4/4)-1)/(nLoad4/4))*nDocSize ){
       /* The number of overflow pages to load for this (and therefore all
-      ** subsequent) tokens is greater than the estimated number of pages 
+      ** subsequent) tokens is greater than the estimated number of pages
       ** that will be loaded if all subsequent tokens are deferred.
       */
       Fts3PhraseToken *pToken = pTC->pToken;
@@ -152315,7 +152315,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
       pToken->pSegcsr = 0;
     }else{
       /* Set nLoad4 to the value of (4^nOther) for the next iteration of the
-      ** for-loop. Except, limit the value to 2^24 to prevent it from 
+      ** for-loop. Except, limit the value to 2^24 to prevent it from
       ** overflowing the 32-bit integer it is stored in. */
       if( ii<12 ) nLoad4 = nLoad4*4;
 
@@ -152437,7 +152437,7 @@ static void fts3EvalInvalidatePoslist(Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){
 ** close to a position in the *paPoslist position list are removed. If this
 ** leaves 0 positions, zero is returned. Otherwise, non-zero.
 **
-** Before returning, *paPoslist is set to point to the position lsit 
+** Before returning, *paPoslist is set to point to the position lsit
 ** associated with pPhrase. And *pnToken is set to the number of tokens in
 ** pPhrase.
 */
@@ -152451,8 +152451,8 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTrim(
   int nParam1 = nNear + pPhrase->nToken;
   int nParam2 = nNear + *pnToken;
   int nNew;
-  char *p2; 
-  char *pOut; 
+  char *p2;
+  char *pOut;
   int res;
 
   assert( pPhrase->doclist.pList );
@@ -152499,19 +152499,19 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTrim(
 **
 **   1. Deferred tokens are not taken into account. If a phrase consists
 **      entirely of deferred tokens, it is assumed to match every row in
-**      the db. In this case the position-list is not populated at all. 
+**      the db. In this case the position-list is not populated at all.
 **
 **      Or, if a phrase contains one or more deferred tokens and one or
-**      more non-deferred tokens, then the expression is advanced to the 
+**      more non-deferred tokens, then the expression is advanced to the
 **      next possible match, considering only non-deferred tokens. In other
 **      words, if the phrase is "A B C", and "B" is deferred, the expression
-**      is advanced to the next row that contains an instance of "A * C", 
+**      is advanced to the next row that contains an instance of "A * C",
 **      where "*" may match any single token. The position list in this case
 **      is populated as for "A * C" before returning.
 **
-**   2. NEAR is treated as AND. If the expression is "x NEAR y", it is 
+**   2. NEAR is treated as AND. If the expression is "x NEAR y", it is
 **      advanced to point to the next row that matches "x AND y".
-** 
+**
 ** See sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred() for details on testing if a row is
 ** really a match, taking into account deferred tokens and NEAR operators.
 */
@@ -152579,7 +152579,7 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow(
         }
         break;
       }
-  
+
       case FTSQUERY_OR: {
         Fts3Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft;
         Fts3Expr *pRight = pExpr->pRight;
@@ -152619,9 +152619,9 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow(
 
         fts3EvalNextRow(pCsr, pLeft, pRc);
         if( pLeft->bEof==0 ){
-          while( !*pRc 
-              && !pRight->bEof 
-              && DOCID_CMP(pLeft->iDocid, pRight->iDocid)>0 
+          while( !*pRc
+              && !pRight->bEof
+              && DOCID_CMP(pLeft->iDocid, pRight->iDocid)>0
           ){
             fts3EvalNextRow(pCsr, pRight, pRc);
           }
@@ -152646,14 +152646,14 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow(
 ** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK, or if pExpr is not the root node of a NEAR
 ** cluster, then this function returns 1 immediately.
 **
-** Otherwise, it checks if the current row really does match the NEAR 
-** expression, using the data currently stored in the position lists 
-** (Fts3Expr->pPhrase.doclist.pList/nList) for each phrase in the expression. 
+** Otherwise, it checks if the current row really does match the NEAR
+** expression, using the data currently stored in the position lists
+** (Fts3Expr->pPhrase.doclist.pList/nList) for each phrase in the expression.
 **
 ** If the current row is a match, the position list associated with each
 ** phrase in the NEAR expression is edited in place to contain only those
 ** phrase instances sufficiently close to their peers to satisfy all NEAR
-** constraints. In this case it returns 1. If the NEAR expression does not 
+** constraints. In this case it returns 1. If the NEAR expression does not
 ** match the current row, 0 is returned. The position lists may or may not
 ** be edited if 0 is returned.
 */
@@ -152676,15 +152676,15 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTest(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int *pRc){
   **                |        |
   **               "w"      "x"
   **
-  ** The right-hand child of a NEAR node is always a phrase. The 
+  ** The right-hand child of a NEAR node is always a phrase. The
   ** left-hand child may be either a phrase or a NEAR node. There are
   ** no exceptions to this - it's the way the parser in fts3_expr.c works.
   */
-  if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK 
-   && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR 
+  if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK
+   && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
    && (pExpr->pParent==0 || pExpr->pParent->eType!=FTSQUERY_NEAR)
   ){
-    Fts3Expr *p; 
+    Fts3Expr *p;
     int nTmp = 0;                 /* Bytes of temp space */
     char *aTmp;                   /* Temp space for PoslistNearMerge() */
 
@@ -152731,12 +152731,12 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTest(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int *pRc){
 /*
 ** This function is a helper function for sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred().
 ** Assuming no error occurs or has occurred, It returns non-zero if the
-** expression passed as the second argument matches the row that pCsr 
+** expression passed as the second argument matches the row that pCsr
 ** currently points to, or zero if it does not.
 **
 ** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is a no-op.
-** If an error occurs during execution of this function, *pRc is set to 
-** the appropriate SQLite error code. In this case the returned value is 
+** If an error occurs during execution of this function, *pRc is set to
+** the appropriate SQLite error code. In this case the returned value is
 ** undefined.
 */
 static int fts3EvalTestExpr(
@@ -152755,10 +152755,10 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr(
          && fts3EvalNearTest(pExpr, pRc)
         );
 
-        /* If the NEAR expression does not match any rows, zero the doclist for 
+        /* If the NEAR expression does not match any rows, zero the doclist for
         ** all phrases involved in the NEAR. This is because the snippet(),
-        ** offsets() and matchinfo() functions are not supposed to recognize 
-        ** any instances of phrases that are part of unmatched NEAR queries. 
+        ** offsets() and matchinfo() functions are not supposed to recognize
+        ** any instances of phrases that are part of unmatched NEAR queries.
         ** For example if this expression:
         **
         **    ... MATCH 'a OR (b NEAR c)'
@@ -152770,8 +152770,8 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr(
         ** then any snippet() should ony highlight the "a" term, not the "b"
         ** (as "b" is part of a non-matching NEAR clause).
         */
-        if( bHit==0 
-         && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR 
+        if( bHit==0
+         && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
          && (pExpr->pParent==0 || pExpr->pParent->eType!=FTSQUERY_NEAR)
         ){
           Fts3Expr *p;
@@ -152803,7 +152803,7 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr(
 
       default: {
 #ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS4_DEFERRED
-        if( pCsr->pDeferred 
+        if( pCsr->pDeferred
          && (pExpr->iDocid==pCsr->iPrevId || pExpr->bDeferred)
         ){
           Fts3Phrase *pPhrase = pExpr->pPhrase;
@@ -152859,7 +152859,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pRc){
     ** memory and scan it to determine the position list for each deferred
     ** token. Then, see if this row is really a match, considering deferred
     ** tokens and NEAR operators (neither of which were taken into account
-    ** earlier, by fts3EvalNextRow()). 
+    ** earlier, by fts3EvalNextRow()).
     */
     if( pCsr->pDeferred ){
       rc = fts3CursorSeek(0, pCsr);
@@ -152914,7 +152914,7 @@ static int fts3EvalNext(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
 
 /*
 ** Restart interation for expression pExpr so that the next call to
-** fts3EvalNext() visits the first row. Do not allow incremental 
+** fts3EvalNext() visits the first row. Do not allow incremental
 ** loading or merging of phrase doclists for this iteration.
 **
 ** If *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is
@@ -152957,11 +152957,11 @@ static void fts3EvalRestart(
 }
 
 /*
-** After allocating the Fts3Expr.aMI[] array for each phrase in the 
+** After allocating the Fts3Expr.aMI[] array for each phrase in the
 ** expression rooted at pExpr, the cursor iterates through all rows matched
 ** by pExpr, calling this function for each row. This function increments
 ** the values in Fts3Expr.aMI[] according to the position-list currently
-** found in Fts3Expr.pPhrase->doclist.pList for each of the phrase 
+** found in Fts3Expr.pPhrase->doclist.pList for each of the phrase
 ** expression nodes.
 */
 static void fts3EvalUpdateCounts(Fts3Expr *pExpr){
@@ -153056,9 +153056,9 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats(
         pCsr->isRequireSeek = 1;
         pCsr->isMatchinfoNeeded = 1;
         pCsr->iPrevId = pRoot->iDocid;
-      }while( pCsr->isEof==0 
-           && pRoot->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR 
-           && sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(pCsr, &rc) 
+      }while( pCsr->isEof==0
+           && pRoot->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
+           && sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(pCsr, &rc)
       );
 
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pCsr->isEof==0 ){
@@ -153073,7 +153073,7 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats(
       pRoot->bEof = bEof;
     }else{
       /* Caution: pRoot may iterate through docids in ascending or descending
-      ** order. For this reason, even though it seems more defensive, the 
+      ** order. For this reason, even though it seems more defensive, the
       ** do loop can not be written:
       **
       **   do {...} while( pRoot->iDocid<iDocid && rc==SQLITE_OK );
@@ -153089,10 +153089,10 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used by the matchinfo() module to query a phrase 
+** This function is used by the matchinfo() module to query a phrase
 ** expression node for the following information:
 **
-**   1. The total number of occurrences of the phrase in each column of 
+**   1. The total number of occurrences of the phrase in each column of
 **      the FTS table (considering all rows), and
 **
 **   2. For each column, the number of rows in the table for which the
@@ -153106,12 +153106,12 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats(
 **
 ** Caveats:
 **
-**   * If a phrase consists entirely of deferred tokens, then all output 
+**   * If a phrase consists entirely of deferred tokens, then all output
 **     values are set to the number of documents in the table. In other
-**     words we assume that very common tokens occur exactly once in each 
+**     words we assume that very common tokens occur exactly once in each
 **     column of each row of the table.
 **
-**   * If a phrase contains some deferred tokens (and some non-deferred 
+**   * If a phrase contains some deferred tokens (and some non-deferred
 **     tokens), count the potential occurrence identified by considering
 **     the non-deferred tokens instead of actual phrase occurrences.
 **
@@ -153149,14 +153149,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhraseStats(
 
 /*
 ** The expression pExpr passed as the second argument to this function
-** must be of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE. 
+** must be of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE.
 **
 ** The returned value is either NULL or a pointer to a buffer containing
 ** a position-list indicating the occurrences of the phrase in column iCol
-** of the current row. 
+** of the current row.
 **
-** More specifically, the returned buffer contains 1 varint for each 
-** occurrence of the phrase in the column, stored using the normal (delta+2) 
+** More specifically, the returned buffer contains 1 varint for each
+** occurrence of the phrase in the column, stored using the normal (delta+2)
 ** compression and is terminated by either an 0x01 or 0x00 byte. For example,
 ** if the requested column contains "a b X c d X X" and the position-list
 ** for 'X' is requested, the buffer returned may contain:
@@ -153178,7 +153178,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(
   int iThis;
   sqlite3_int64 iDocid;
 
-  /* If this phrase is applies specifically to some column other than 
+  /* If this phrase is applies specifically to some column other than
   ** column iCol, return a NULL pointer.  */
   *ppOut = 0;
   assert( iCol>=0 && iCol<pTab->nColumn );
@@ -153197,8 +153197,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(
     Fts3Expr *pNear;              /* Most senior NEAR ancestor (or pExpr) */
     int bMatch;
 
-    /* Check if this phrase descends from an OR expression node. If not, 
-    ** return NULL. Otherwise, the entry that corresponds to docid 
+    /* Check if this phrase descends from an OR expression node. If not,
+    ** return NULL. Otherwise, the entry that corresponds to docid
     ** pCsr->iPrevId may lie earlier in the doclist buffer. Or, if the
     ** tree that the node is part of has been marked as EOF, but the node
     ** itself is not EOF, then it may point to an earlier entry. */
@@ -153246,7 +153246,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(
           (pIter >= (pPh->doclist.aAll + pPh->doclist.nAll));
         while( (pIter==0 || DOCID_CMP(iDocid, pCsr->iPrevId)<0 ) && bEof==0 ){
           sqlite3Fts3DoclistNext(
-              bDescDoclist, pPh->doclist.aAll, pPh->doclist.nAll, 
+              bDescDoclist, pPh->doclist.aAll, pPh->doclist.nAll,
               &pIter, &iDocid, &bEof
           );
         }
@@ -153255,7 +153255,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(
         while( (pIter==0 || DOCID_CMP(iDocid, pCsr->iPrevId)>0 ) && bEof==0 ){
           int dummy;
           sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(
-              bDescDoclist, pPh->doclist.aAll, pPh->doclist.nAll, 
+              bDescDoclist, pPh->doclist.aAll, pPh->doclist.nAll,
               &pIter, &iDocid, &dummy, &bEof
               );
         }
@@ -153331,7 +153331,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Corrupt(){
 __declspec(dllexport)
 #endif
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_init(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   char **pzErrMsg,
   const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
 ){
@@ -153425,11 +153425,11 @@ static int fts3auxConnectMethod(
   */
   if( argc!=4 && argc!=5 ) goto bad_args;
 
-  zDb = argv[1]; 
+  zDb = argv[1];
   nDb = (int)strlen(zDb);
   if( argc==5 ){
     if( nDb==4 && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp("temp", zDb, 4) ){
-      zDb = argv[3]; 
+      zDb = argv[3];
       nDb = (int)strlen(zDb);
       zFts3 = argv[4];
     }else{
@@ -153493,7 +153493,7 @@ static int fts3auxDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
 ** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause.
 */
 static int fts3auxBestIndexMethod(
-  sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, 
+  sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
   sqlite3_index_info *pInfo
 ){
   int i;
@@ -153506,14 +153506,14 @@ static int fts3auxBestIndexMethod(
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
 
   /* This vtab delivers always results in "ORDER BY term ASC" order. */
-  if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1 
-   && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0 
+  if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1
+   && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0
    && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].desc==0
   ){
     pInfo->orderByConsumed = 1;
   }
 
-  /* Search for equality and range constraints on the "term" column. 
+  /* Search for equality and range constraints on the "term" column.
   ** And equality constraints on the hidden "languageid" column. */
   for(i=0; i<pInfo->nConstraint; i++){
     if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable ){
@@ -153594,11 +153594,11 @@ static int fts3auxCloseMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
 static int fts3auxGrowStatArray(Fts3auxCursor *pCsr, int nSize){
   if( nSize>pCsr->nStat ){
     struct Fts3auxColstats *aNew;
-    aNew = (struct Fts3auxColstats *)sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->aStat, 
+    aNew = (struct Fts3auxColstats *)sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->aStat,
         sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * nSize
     );
     if( aNew==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
-    memset(&aNew[pCsr->nStat], 0, 
+    memset(&aNew[pCsr->nStat], 0,
         sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * (nSize - pCsr->nStat)
     );
     pCsr->aStat = aNew;
@@ -153658,8 +153658,8 @@ static int fts3auxNextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
 
         /* State 1. In this state we are expecting either a 1, indicating
         ** that the following integer will be a column number, or the
-        ** start of a position list for column 0.  
-        ** 
+        ** start of a position list for column 0.
+        **
         ** The only difference between state 1 and state 2 is that if the
         ** integer encountered in state 1 is not 0 or 1, then we need to
         ** increment the column 0 "nDoc" count for this term.
@@ -153772,7 +153772,7 @@ static int fts3auxFilterMethod(
     pCsr->nStop = sqlite3_value_bytes(apVal[iLe]);
     if( pCsr->zStop==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
   }
-  
+
   if( iLangid>=0 ){
     iLangVal = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[iLangid]);
 
@@ -153910,15 +153910,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
 ******************************************************************************
 **
 ** This module contains code that implements a parser for fts3 query strings
-** (the right-hand argument to the MATCH operator). Because the supported 
+** (the right-hand argument to the MATCH operator). Because the supported
 ** syntax is relatively simple, the whole tokenizer/parser system is
-** hand-coded. 
+** hand-coded.
 */
 /* #include "fts3Int.h" */
 #if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
 
 /*
-** By default, this module parses the legacy syntax that has been 
+** By default, this module parses the legacy syntax that has been
 ** traditionally used by fts3. Or, if SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
 ** is defined, then it uses the new syntax. The differences between
 ** the new and the old syntaxes are:
@@ -153927,7 +153927,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
 **
 **  b) The new syntax supports the AND and NOT operators. The old does not.
 **
-**  c) The old syntax supports the "-" token qualifier. This is not 
+**  c) The old syntax supports the "-" token qualifier. This is not
 **     supported by the new syntax (it is replaced by the NOT operator).
 **
 **  d) When using the old syntax, the OR operator has a greater precedence
@@ -153936,7 +153936,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
 **
 ** If compiled with SQLITE_TEST defined, then this module exports the
 ** symbol "int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses". Setting this variable
-** to zero causes the module to use the old syntax. If it is set to 
+** to zero causes the module to use the old syntax. If it is set to
 ** non-zero the new syntax is activated. This is so both syntaxes can
 ** be tested using a single build of testfixture.
 **
@@ -153965,7 +153965,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses = 0;
 #else
-# ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS 
+# ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
 #  define sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 1
 # else
 #  define sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 0
@@ -153983,7 +153983,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses = 0;
 /*
 ** isNot:
 **   This variable is used by function getNextNode(). When getNextNode() is
-**   called, it sets ParseContext.isNot to true if the 'next node' is a 
+**   called, it sets ParseContext.isNot to true if the 'next node' is a
 **   FTSQUERY_PHRASE with a unary "-" attached to it. i.e. "mysql" in the
 **   FTS3 query "sqlite -mysql". Otherwise, ParseContext.isNot is set to
 **   zero.
@@ -154002,7 +154002,7 @@ struct ParseContext {
 };
 
 /*
-** This function is equivalent to the standard isspace() function. 
+** This function is equivalent to the standard isspace() function.
 **
 ** The standard isspace() can be awkward to use safely, because although it
 ** is defined to accept an argument of type int, its behavior when passed
@@ -154018,7 +154018,7 @@ static int fts3isspace(char c){
 
 /*
 ** Allocate nByte bytes of memory using sqlite3_malloc(). If successful,
-** zero the memory before returning a pointer to it. If unsuccessful, 
+** zero the memory before returning a pointer to it. If unsuccessful,
 ** return NULL.
 */
 static void *fts3MallocZero(int nByte){
@@ -154066,7 +154066,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParse(ParseContext *, const char *, int, Fts3Expr **, int *);
 ** structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE containing a phrase consisting of this
 ** single token and set *ppExpr to point to it. If the end of the buffer is
 ** reached before a token is found, set *ppExpr to zero. It is the
-** responsibility of the caller to eventually deallocate the allocated 
+** responsibility of the caller to eventually deallocate the allocated
 ** Fts3Expr structure (if any) by passing it to sqlite3_free().
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation
@@ -154120,8 +154120,8 @@ static int getNextToken(
         }
 
         while( 1 ){
-          if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 
-           && iStart>0 && z[iStart-1]=='-' 
+          if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses
+           && iStart>0 && z[iStart-1]=='-'
           ){
             pParse->isNot = 1;
             iStart--;
@@ -154141,7 +154141,7 @@ static int getNextToken(
 
     pModule->xClose(pCursor);
   }
-  
+
   *ppExpr = pRet;
   return rc;
 }
@@ -154163,7 +154163,7 @@ static void *fts3ReallocOrFree(void *pOrig, int nNew){
 ** Buffer zInput, length nInput, contains the contents of a quoted string
 ** that appeared as part of an fts3 query expression. Neither quote character
 ** is included in the buffer. This function attempts to tokenize the entire
-** input buffer and create an Fts3Expr structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE 
+** input buffer and create an Fts3Expr structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE
 ** containing the results.
 **
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppExpr set to point at the
@@ -154188,7 +154188,7 @@ static int getNextString(
   int nToken = 0;
 
   /* The final Fts3Expr data structure, including the Fts3Phrase,
-  ** Fts3PhraseToken structures token buffers are all stored as a single 
+  ** Fts3PhraseToken structures token buffers are all stored as a single
   ** allocation so that the expression can be freed with a single call to
   ** sqlite3_free(). Setting this up requires a two pass approach.
   **
@@ -154197,7 +154197,7 @@ static int getNextString(
   ** to assemble data in two dynamic buffers:
   **
   **   Buffer p: Points to the Fts3Expr structure, followed by the Fts3Phrase
-  **             structure, followed by the array of Fts3PhraseToken 
+  **             structure, followed by the array of Fts3PhraseToken
   **             structures. This pass only populates the Fts3PhraseToken array.
   **
   **   Buffer zTemp: Contains copies of all tokens.
@@ -154282,7 +154282,7 @@ no_mem:
 }
 
 /*
-** The output variable *ppExpr is populated with an allocated Fts3Expr 
+** The output variable *ppExpr is populated with an allocated Fts3Expr
 ** structure, or set to 0 if the end of the input buffer is reached.
 **
 ** Returns an SQLite error code. SQLITE_OK if everything works, SQLITE_NOMEM
@@ -154318,7 +154318,7 @@ static int getNextNode(
   pParse->isNot = 0;
 
   /* Skip over any whitespace before checking for a keyword, an open or
-  ** close bracket, or a quoted string. 
+  ** close bracket, or a quoted string.
   */
   while( nInput>0 && fts3isspace(*zInput) ){
     nInput--;
@@ -154354,10 +154354,10 @@ static int getNextNode(
 
       /* At this point this is probably a keyword. But for that to be true,
       ** the next byte must contain either whitespace, an open or close
-      ** parenthesis, a quote character, or EOF. 
+      ** parenthesis, a quote character, or EOF.
       */
       cNext = zInput[nKey];
-      if( fts3isspace(cNext) 
+      if( fts3isspace(cNext)
        || cNext=='"' || cNext=='(' || cNext==')' || cNext==0
       ){
         pRet = (Fts3Expr *)fts3MallocZero(sizeof(Fts3Expr));
@@ -154407,15 +154407,15 @@ static int getNextNode(
     }
   }
 
-  /* If control flows to this point, this must be a regular token, or 
+  /* If control flows to this point, this must be a regular token, or
   ** the end of the input. Read a regular token using the sqlite3_tokenizer
   ** interface. Before doing so, figure out if there is an explicit
-  ** column specifier for the token. 
+  ** column specifier for the token.
   **
   ** TODO: Strangely, it is not possible to associate a column specifier
   ** with a quoted phrase, only with a single token. Not sure if this was
   ** an implementation artifact or an intentional decision when fts3 was
-  ** first implemented. Whichever it was, this module duplicates the 
+  ** first implemented. Whichever it was, this module duplicates the
   ** limitation.
   */
   iCol = pParse->iDefaultCol;
@@ -154423,8 +154423,8 @@ static int getNextNode(
   for(ii=0; ii<pParse->nCol; ii++){
     const char *zStr = pParse->azCol[ii];
     int nStr = (int)strlen(zStr);
-    if( nInput>nStr && zInput[nStr]==':' 
-     && sqlite3_strnicmp(zStr, zInput, nStr)==0 
+    if( nInput>nStr && zInput[nStr]==':'
+     && sqlite3_strnicmp(zStr, zInput, nStr)==0
     ){
       iCol = ii;
       iColLen = (int)((zInput - z) + nStr + 1);
@@ -154469,7 +154469,7 @@ static int opPrecedence(Fts3Expr *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Argument ppHead contains a pointer to the current head of a query 
+** Argument ppHead contains a pointer to the current head of a query
 ** expression tree being parsed. pPrev is the expression node most recently
 ** inserted into the tree. This function adds pNew, which is always a binary
 ** operator node, into the expression tree based on the relative precedence
@@ -154499,7 +154499,7 @@ static void insertBinaryOperator(
 
 /*
 ** Parse the fts3 query expression found in buffer z, length n. This function
-** returns either when the end of the buffer is reached or an unmatched 
+** returns either when the end of the buffer is reached or an unmatched
 ** closing bracket - ')' - is encountered.
 **
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned, *ppExpr is set to point to the
@@ -154531,8 +154531,8 @@ static int fts3ExprParse(
       if( p ){
         int isPhrase;
 
-        if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 
-            && p->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE && pParse->isNot 
+        if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses
+            && p->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE && pParse->isNot
         ){
           /* Create an implicit NOT operator. */
           Fts3Expr *pNot = fts3MallocZero(sizeof(Fts3Expr));
@@ -154653,13 +154653,13 @@ exprparse_out:
 }
 
 /*
-** Return SQLITE_ERROR if the maximum depth of the expression tree passed 
+** Return SQLITE_ERROR if the maximum depth of the expression tree passed
 ** as the only argument is more than nMaxDepth.
 */
 static int fts3ExprCheckDepth(Fts3Expr *p, int nMaxDepth){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   if( p ){
-    if( nMaxDepth<0 ){ 
+    if( nMaxDepth<0 ){
       rc = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
     }else{
       rc = fts3ExprCheckDepth(p->pLeft, nMaxDepth-1);
@@ -154674,12 +154674,12 @@ static int fts3ExprCheckDepth(Fts3Expr *p, int nMaxDepth){
 /*
 ** This function attempts to transform the expression tree at (*pp) to
 ** an equivalent but more balanced form. The tree is modified in place.
-** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and (*pp) set to point to the 
-** new root expression node. 
+** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and (*pp) set to point to the
+** new root expression node.
 **
 ** nMaxDepth is the maximum allowable depth of the balanced sub-tree.
 **
-** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and 
+** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and
 ** expression (*pp) freed.
 */
 static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){
@@ -154794,7 +154794,7 @@ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){
           }
           pRoot = p;
         }else{
-          /* An error occurred. Delete the contents of the apLeaf[] array 
+          /* An error occurred. Delete the contents of the apLeaf[] array
           ** and pFree list. Everything else is cleaned up by the call to
           ** sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(pRoot) below.  */
           Fts3Expr *pDel;
@@ -154836,7 +154836,7 @@ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){
       }
     }
   }
-  
+
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
     sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(pRoot);
     pRoot = 0;
@@ -154850,9 +154850,9 @@ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){
 ** differences:
 **
 **   1. It does not do expression rebalancing.
-**   2. It does not check that the expression does not exceed the 
+**   2. It does not check that the expression does not exceed the
 **      maximum allowable depth.
-**   3. Even if it fails, *ppExpr may still be set to point to an 
+**   3. Even if it fails, *ppExpr may still be set to point to an
 **      expression tree. It should be deleted using sqlite3Fts3ExprFree()
 **      in this case.
 */
@@ -154891,7 +154891,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParseUnbalanced(
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && sParse.nNest ){
     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
   }
-  
+
   return rc;
 }
 
@@ -154910,7 +154910,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParseUnbalanced(
 ** The first parameter, pTokenizer, is passed the fts3 tokenizer module to
 ** use to normalize query tokens while parsing the expression. The azCol[]
 ** array, which is assumed to contain nCol entries, should contain the names
-** of each column in the target fts3 table, in order from left to right. 
+** of each column in the target fts3 table, in order from left to right.
 ** Column names must be nul-terminated strings.
 **
 ** The iDefaultCol parameter should be passed the index of the table column
@@ -154933,7 +154933,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(
   int rc = fts3ExprParseUnbalanced(
       pTokenizer, iLangid, azCol, bFts4, nCol, iDefaultCol, z, n, ppExpr
   );
-  
+
   /* Rebalance the expression. And check that its depth does not exceed
   ** SQLITE_FTS3_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH.  */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && *ppExpr ){
@@ -154948,7 +154948,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(
     *ppExpr = 0;
     if( rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG ){
       sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr,
-          "FTS expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", 
+          "FTS expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)",
           SQLITE_FTS3_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH
       );
       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -155011,8 +155011,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(Fts3Expr *pDel){
 ** Function to query the hash-table of tokenizers (see README.tokenizers).
 */
 static int queryTestTokenizer(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  const char *zName,  
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  const char *zName,
   const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
 ){
   int rc;
@@ -155038,11 +155038,11 @@ static int queryTestTokenizer(
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to a buffer containing a text representation of the
 ** expression passed as the first argument. The buffer is obtained from
-** sqlite3_malloc(). It is the responsibility of the caller to use 
+** sqlite3_malloc(). It is the responsibility of the caller to use
 ** sqlite3_free() to release the memory. If an OOM condition is encountered,
 ** NULL is returned.
 **
-** If the second argument is not NULL, then its contents are prepended to 
+** If the second argument is not NULL, then its contents are prepended to
 ** the returned expression text and then freed using sqlite3_free().
 */
 static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){
@@ -155056,7 +155056,7 @@ static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){
       zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf(
           "%zPHRASE %d 0", zBuf, pPhrase->iColumn);
       for(i=0; zBuf && i<pPhrase->nToken; i++){
-        zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%z %.*s%s", zBuf, 
+        zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%z %.*s%s", zBuf,
             pPhrase->aToken[i].n, pPhrase->aToken[i].z,
             (pPhrase->aToken[i].isPrefix?"+":"")
         );
@@ -155089,7 +155089,7 @@ static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){
 }
 
 /*
-** This is the implementation of a scalar SQL function used to test the 
+** This is the implementation of a scalar SQL function used to test the
 ** expression parser. It should be called as follows:
 **
 **   fts3_exprtest(<tokenizer>, <expr>, <column 1>, ...);
@@ -155120,7 +155120,7 @@ static void fts3ExprTest(
   sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context);
 
   if( argc<3 ){
-    sqlite3_result_error(context, 
+    sqlite3_result_error(context,
         "Usage: fts3_exprtest(tokenizer, expr, col1, ...", -1
     );
     return;
@@ -155189,15 +155189,15 @@ exprtest_out:
 }
 
 /*
-** Register the query expression parser test function fts3_exprtest() 
-** with database connection db. 
+** Register the query expression parser test function fts3_exprtest()
+** with database connection db.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprInitTestInterface(sqlite3* db){
   int rc = sqlite3_create_function(
       db, "fts3_exprtest", -1, SQLITE_UTF8, 0, fts3ExprTest, 0, 0
   );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "fts3_exprtest_rebalance", 
+    rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "fts3_exprtest_rebalance",
         -1, SQLITE_UTF8, (void *)1, fts3ExprTest, 0, 0
     );
   }
@@ -155261,8 +155261,8 @@ static void fts3HashFree(void *p){
 ** fields of the Hash structure.
 **
 ** "pNew" is a pointer to the hash table that is to be initialized.
-** keyClass is one of the constants 
-** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING.  The value of keyClass 
+** keyClass is one of the constants
+** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING.  The value of keyClass
 ** determines what kind of key the hash table will use.  "copyKey" is
 ** true if the hash table should make its own private copy of keys and
 ** false if it should just use the supplied pointer.
@@ -155339,7 +155339,7 @@ static int fts3BinCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
 **
-** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some 
+** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
 ** programmers, so we provide the following additional explanation:
 **
 ** The name of the function is "ftsHashFunction".  The function takes a
@@ -155399,7 +155399,7 @@ static void fts3HashInsertElement(
 
 
 /* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
-** "new_size" must be a power of 2.  The hash table might fail 
+** "new_size" must be a power of 2.  The hash table might fail
 ** to resize if sqliteMalloc() fails.
 **
 ** Return non-zero if a memory allocation error occurs.
@@ -155444,7 +155444,7 @@ static Fts3HashElem *fts3FindElementByHash(
     count = pEntry->count;
     xCompare = ftsCompareFunction(pH->keyClass);
     while( count-- && elem ){
-      if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){ 
+      if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
         return elem;
       }
       elem = elem->next;
@@ -155463,7 +155463,7 @@ static void fts3RemoveElementByHash(
 ){
   struct _fts3ht *pEntry;
   if( elem->prev ){
-    elem->prev->next = elem->next; 
+    elem->prev->next = elem->next;
   }else{
     pH->first = elem->next;
   }
@@ -155491,8 +155491,8 @@ static void fts3RemoveElementByHash(
 }
 
 SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(
-  const Fts3Hash *pH, 
-  const void *pKey, 
+  const Fts3Hash *pH,
+  const void *pKey,
   int nKey
 ){
   int h;                          /* A hash on key */
@@ -155506,7 +155506,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(
   return fts3FindElementByHash(pH,pKey,nKey, h & (pH->htsize-1));
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Attempt to locate an element of the hash table pH with a key
 ** that matches pKey,nKey.  Return the data for this element if it is
 ** found, or NULL if there is no match.
@@ -155680,7 +155680,7 @@ static int porterDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
 /*
 ** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string.  The input
 ** string to be tokenized is zInput[0..nInput-1].  A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in 
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
 ** *ppCursor.
 */
 static int porterOpen(
@@ -155733,7 +155733,7 @@ static const char cType[] = {
 /*
 ** isConsonant() and isVowel() determine if their first character in
 ** the string they point to is a consonant or a vowel, according
-** to Porter ruls.  
+** to Porter ruls.
 **
 ** A consonate is any letter other than 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', or 'u'.
 ** 'Y' is a consonant unless it follows another consonant,
@@ -155853,11 +155853,11 @@ static int star_oh(const char *z){
 
 /*
 ** If the word ends with zFrom and xCond() is true for the stem
-** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the 
+** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the
 ** ending to zTo.
 **
 ** The input word *pz and zFrom are both in reverse order.  zTo
-** is in normal order. 
+** is in normal order.
 **
 ** Return TRUE if zFrom matches.  Return FALSE if zFrom does not
 ** match.  Not that TRUE is returned even if xCond() fails and
@@ -155926,9 +155926,9 @@ static void copy_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
 ** word contains digits, 3 bytes are taken from the beginning and
 ** 3 bytes from the end.  For long words without digits, 10 bytes
 ** are taken from each end.  US-ASCII case folding still applies.
-** 
-** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not 
-** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just 
+**
+** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not
+** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just
 ** copies the input into the input into the output with US-ASCII
 ** case folding.
 **
@@ -155973,11 +155973,11 @@ static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
     }
   }
 
-  /* Step 1b */  
+  /* Step 1b */
   z2 = z;
   if( stem(&z, "dee", "ee", m_gt_0) ){
     /* Do nothing.  The work was all in the test */
-  }else if( 
+  }else if(
      (stem(&z, "gni", "", hasVowel) || stem(&z, "de", "", hasVowel))
       && z!=z2
   ){
@@ -156016,7 +156016,7 @@ static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
      stem(&z, "igol", "log", m_gt_0);
      break;
    case 'l':
-     if( !stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0) 
+     if( !stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0)
       && !stem(&z, "illa", "al", m_gt_0)
       && !stem(&z, "iltne", "ent", m_gt_0)
       && !stem(&z, "ile", "e", m_gt_0)
@@ -156304,7 +156304,7 @@ static int fts3TokenizerEnabled(sqlite3_context *context){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying 
+** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying
 ** hash table. This function may be called as follows:
 **
 **   SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>);
@@ -156474,7 +156474,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
       sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr, "unknown tokenizer");
     }else{
-      (*ppTok)->pModule = m; 
+      (*ppTok)->pModule = m;
     }
     sqlite3_free((void *)aArg);
   }
@@ -156494,7 +156494,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
 /* #include <string.h> */
 
 /*
-** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers 
+** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers
 ** designed to be used in concert with the Tcl testing framework. This
 ** function must be called with two or more arguments:
 **
@@ -156506,9 +156506,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
 **
 ** The return value is a string that may be interpreted as a Tcl
 ** list. For each token in the <input-string>, three elements are
-** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the 
+** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the
 ** second is the token text (folded, stemmed, etc.) and the third is the
-** substring of <input-string> associated with the token. For example, 
+** substring of <input-string> associated with the token. For example,
 ** using the built-in "simple" tokenizer:
 **
 **   SELECT fts_tokenizer_test('simple', 'I don't see how');
@@ -156516,7 +156516,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
 ** will return the string:
 **
 **   "{0 i I 1 dont don't 2 see see 3 how how}"
-**   
+**
 */
 static void testFunc(
   sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -156611,8 +156611,8 @@ finish:
 
 static
 int registerTokenizer(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  char *zName, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  char *zName,
   const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p
 ){
   int rc;
@@ -156634,8 +156634,8 @@ int registerTokenizer(
 
 static
 int queryTokenizer(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  char *zName,  
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  char *zName,
   const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
 ){
   int rc;
@@ -156718,23 +156718,23 @@ static void intTestFunc(
 /*
 ** Set up SQL objects in database db used to access the contents of
 ** the hash table pointed to by argument pHash. The hash table must
-** been initialized to use string keys, and to take a private copy 
+** been initialized to use string keys, and to take a private copy
 ** of the key when a value is inserted. i.e. by a call similar to:
 **
 **    sqlite3Fts3HashInit(pHash, FTS3_HASH_STRING, 1);
 **
 ** This function adds a scalar function (see header comment above
 ** fts3TokenizerFunc() in this file for details) and, if ENABLE_TABLE is
-** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header 
-** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both 
+** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header
+** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both
 ** provide read/write access to the contents of *pHash.
 **
 ** The third argument to this function, zName, is used as the name
 ** of both the scalar and, if created, the virtual table.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  Fts3Hash *pHash, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  Fts3Hash *pHash,
   const char *zName
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -156888,7 +156888,7 @@ static int simpleDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
 /*
 ** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string.  The input
 ** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1].  A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in 
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
 ** *ppCursor.
 */
 static int simpleOpen(
@@ -157043,8 +157043,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SimpleTokenizerModule(
 **
 **   input = <string>
 **
-** The virtual table module tokenizes this <string>, using the FTS3 
-** tokenizer specified by the arguments to the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE 
+** The virtual table module tokenizes this <string>, using the FTS3
+** tokenizer specified by the arguments to the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
 ** statement and returns one row for each token in the result. With
 ** fields set as follows:
 **
@@ -157113,7 +157113,7 @@ static int fts3tokQueryTokenizer(
 
 /*
 ** The second argument, argv[], is an array of pointers to nul-terminated
-** strings. This function makes a copy of the array and strings into a 
+** strings. This function makes a copy of the array and strings into a
 ** single block of memory. It then dequotes any of the strings that appear
 ** to be quoted.
 **
@@ -157169,7 +157169,7 @@ static int fts3tokDequoteArray(
 ** and xCreate are identical operations.
 **
 **   argv[0]: module name
-**   argv[1]: database name 
+**   argv[1]: database name
 **   argv[2]: table name
 **   argv[3]: first argument (tokenizer name)
 */
@@ -157249,16 +157249,16 @@ static int fts3tokDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
 ** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause.
 */
 static int fts3tokBestIndexMethod(
-  sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, 
+  sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
   sqlite3_index_info *pInfo
 ){
   int i;
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
 
   for(i=0; i<pInfo->nConstraint; i++){
-    if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable 
-     && pInfo->aConstraint[i].iColumn==0 
-     && pInfo->aConstraint[i].op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ 
+    if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable
+     && pInfo->aConstraint[i].iColumn==0
+     && pInfo->aConstraint[i].op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
     ){
       pInfo->idxNum = 1;
       pInfo->aConstraintUsage[i].argvIndex = 1;
@@ -157488,7 +157488,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){
 ** This file is part of the SQLite FTS3 extension module. Specifically,
 ** this file contains code to insert, update and delete rows from FTS3
 ** tables. It also contains code to merge FTS3 b-tree segments. Some
-** of the sub-routines used to merge segments are also used by the query 
+** of the sub-routines used to merge segments are also used by the query
 ** code in fts3.c.
 */
 
@@ -157504,7 +157504,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){
 
 /*
 ** When full-text index nodes are loaded from disk, the buffer that they
-** are loaded into has the following number of bytes of padding at the end 
+** are loaded into has the following number of bytes of padding at the end
 ** of it. i.e. if a full-text index node is 900 bytes in size, then a buffer
 ** of 920 bytes is allocated for it.
 **
@@ -157521,10 +157521,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){
 ** method before retrieving all query results (as may happen, for example,
 ** if a query has a LIMIT clause).
 **
-** Incremental loading is used for b-tree nodes FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD 
+** Incremental loading is used for b-tree nodes FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD
 ** bytes and larger. Nodes are loaded in chunks of FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE bytes.
-** The code is written so that the hard lower-limit for each of these values 
-** is 1. Clearly such small values would be inefficient, but can be useful 
+** The code is written so that the hard lower-limit for each of these values
+** is 1. Clearly such small values would be inefficient, but can be useful
 ** for testing purposes.
 **
 ** If this module is built with SQLITE_TEST defined, these constants may
@@ -157537,7 +157537,7 @@ int test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold = (4*1024)*4;
 # define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE       test_fts3_node_chunksize
 # define FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold
 #else
-# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE (4*1024) 
+# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE (4*1024)
 # define FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD (FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE*4)
 #endif
 
@@ -157551,7 +157551,7 @@ int test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold = (4*1024)*4;
 
 /*
 ** If FTS_LOG_MERGES is defined, call sqlite3_log() to report each automatic
-** and incremental merge operation that takes place. This is used for 
+** and incremental merge operation that takes place. This is used for
 ** debugging FTS only, it should not usually be turned on in production
 ** systems.
 */
@@ -157637,7 +157637,7 @@ struct Fts3SegReader {
   char *aDoclist;                 /* Pointer to doclist of current entry */
   int nDoclist;                   /* Size of doclist in current entry */
 
-  /* The following variables are used by fts3SegReaderNextDocid() to iterate 
+  /* The following variables are used by fts3SegReaderNextDocid() to iterate
   ** through the current doclist (aDoclist/nDoclist).
   */
   char *pOffsetList;
@@ -157682,11 +157682,11 @@ struct SegmentWriter {
 **   fts3NodeFree()
 **
 ** When a b+tree is written to the database (either as a result of a merge
-** or the pending-terms table being flushed), leaves are written into the 
+** or the pending-terms table being flushed), leaves are written into the
 ** database file as soon as they are completely populated. The interior of
 ** the tree is assembled in memory and written out only once all leaves have
 ** been populated and stored. This is Ok, as the b+-tree fanout is usually
-** very large, meaning that the interior of the tree consumes relatively 
+** very large, meaning that the interior of the tree consumes relatively
 ** little memory.
 */
 struct SegmentNode {
@@ -157707,7 +157707,7 @@ struct SegmentNode {
 */
 #define SQL_DELETE_CONTENT             0
 #define SQL_IS_EMPTY                   1
-#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT         2 
+#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT         2
 #define SQL_DELETE_ALL_SEGMENTS        3
 #define SQL_DELETE_ALL_SEGDIR          4
 #define SQL_DELETE_ALL_DOCSIZE         5
@@ -157755,7 +157755,7 @@ struct SegmentNode {
 ** Otherwise, an SQLite error code is returned and *pp is set to 0.
 **
 ** If argument apVal is not NULL, then it must point to an array with
-** at least as many entries as the requested statement has bound 
+** at least as many entries as the requested statement has bound
 ** parameters. The values are bound to the statements parameters before
 ** returning.
 */
@@ -157779,7 +157779,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
 /* 10 */  "SELECT coalesce((SELECT max(blockid) FROM %Q.'%q_segments') + 1, 1)",
 /* 11 */  "REPLACE INTO %Q.'%q_segdir' VALUES(?,?,?,?,?,?)",
 
-          /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/ 
+          /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/
 /* 12 */  "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root "
             "FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? ORDER BY idx ASC",
 /* 13 */  "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root "
@@ -157813,7 +157813,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
          "  ORDER BY (level %% 1024) ASC LIMIT 1",
 
 /* Estimate the upper limit on the number of leaf nodes in a new segment
-** created by merging the oldest :2 segments from absolute level :1. See 
+** created by merging the oldest :2 segments from absolute level :1. See
 ** function sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge() for details.  */
 /* 29 */ "SELECT 2 * total(1 + leaves_end_block - start_block) "
          "  FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? AND idx < ?",
@@ -157828,7 +157828,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
 /* 31 */ "UPDATE %Q.'%q_segdir' SET idx = ? WHERE level=? AND idx=?",
 
 /* SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR
-**   Read a single entry from the %_segdir table. The entry from absolute 
+**   Read a single entry from the %_segdir table. The entry from absolute
 **   level :1 with index value :2.  */
 /* 32 */  "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root "
             "FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? AND idx = ?",
@@ -157852,7 +157852,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
 **   Return the largest relative level in the FTS index or indexes.  */
 /* 36 */  "SELECT max( level %% 1024 ) FROM %Q.'%q_segdir'",
 
-          /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/ 
+          /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/
 /* 37 */  "SELECT level, idx, end_block "
             "FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level BETWEEN ? AND ? "
             "ORDER BY level DESC, idx ASC",
@@ -157868,7 +157868,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
 
   assert( SizeofArray(azSql)==SizeofArray(p->aStmt) );
   assert( eStmt<SizeofArray(azSql) && eStmt>=0 );
-  
+
   pStmt = p->aStmt[eStmt];
   if( !pStmt ){
     char *zSql;
@@ -157972,7 +157972,7 @@ static void fts3SqlExec(
   sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
   int rc;
   if( *pRC ) return;
-  rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, eStmt, &pStmt, apVal); 
+  rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, eStmt, &pStmt, apVal);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     sqlite3_step(pStmt);
     rc = sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
@@ -157982,22 +157982,22 @@ static void fts3SqlExec(
 
 
 /*
-** This function ensures that the caller has obtained an exclusive 
-** shared-cache table-lock on the %_segdir table. This is required before 
+** This function ensures that the caller has obtained an exclusive
+** shared-cache table-lock on the %_segdir table. This is required before
 ** writing data to the fts3 table. If this lock is not acquired first, then
 ** the caller may end up attempting to take this lock as part of committing
-** a transaction, causing SQLite to return SQLITE_LOCKED or 
+** a transaction, causing SQLite to return SQLITE_LOCKED or
 ** LOCKED_SHAREDCACHEto a COMMIT command.
 **
-** It is best to avoid this because if FTS3 returns any error when 
-** committing a transaction, the whole transaction will be rolled back. 
-** And this is not what users expect when they get SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. 
-** It can still happen if the user locks the underlying tables directly 
+** It is best to avoid this because if FTS3 returns any error when
+** committing a transaction, the whole transaction will be rolled back.
+** And this is not what users expect when they get SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE.
+** It can still happen if the user locks the underlying tables directly
 ** instead of accessing them via FTS.
 */
 static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  
+
   if( p->nPendingData==0 ){
     sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
     rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_DELETE_SEGDIR_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0);
@@ -158014,7 +158014,7 @@ static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){
 /*
 ** FTS maintains a separate indexes for each language-id (a 32-bit integer).
 ** Within each language id, a separate index is maintained to store the
-** document terms, and each configured prefix size (configured the FTS 
+** document terms, and each configured prefix size (configured the FTS
 ** "prefix=" option). And each index consists of multiple levels ("relative
 ** levels").
 **
@@ -158024,14 +158024,14 @@ static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){
 ** separate component values into the single 64-bit integer value that
 ** can be used to query the %_segdir table.
 **
-** Specifically, each language-id/index combination is allocated 1024 
+** Specifically, each language-id/index combination is allocated 1024
 ** 64-bit integer level values ("absolute levels"). The main terms index
 ** for language-id 0 is allocate values 0-1023. The first prefix index
 ** (if any) for language-id 0 is allocated values 1024-2047. And so on.
 ** Language 1 indexes are allocated immediately following language 0.
 **
 ** So, for a system with nPrefix prefix indexes configured, the block of
-** absolute levels that corresponds to language-id iLangid and index 
+** absolute levels that corresponds to language-id iLangid and index
 ** iIndex starts at absolute level ((iLangid * (nPrefix+1) + iIndex) * 1024).
 */
 static sqlite3_int64 getAbsoluteLevel(
@@ -158052,7 +158052,7 @@ static sqlite3_int64 getAbsoluteLevel(
 /*
 ** Set *ppStmt to a statement handle that may be used to iterate through
 ** all rows in the %_segdir table, from oldest to newest. If successful,
-** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs while preparing the statement, 
+** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs while preparing the statement,
 ** return an SQLite error code.
 **
 ** There is only ever one instance of this SQL statement compiled for
@@ -158083,16 +158083,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3AllSegdirs(
   if( iLevel<0 ){
     /* "SELECT * FROM %_segdir WHERE level BETWEEN ? AND ? ORDER BY ..." */
     rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_LEVEL_RANGE, &pStmt, 0);
-    if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 
+    if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0));
-      sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, 
+      sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
           getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1)
       );
     }
   }else{
     /* "SELECT * FROM %_segdir WHERE level = ? ORDER BY ..." */
     rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0);
-    if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 
+    if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex,iLevel));
     }
   }
@@ -158236,7 +158236,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAddOne(
   }
   if( fts3PendingListAppend(&pList, p->iPrevDocid, iCol, iPos, &rc) ){
     if( pList==fts3HashInsert(pHash, zToken, nToken, pList) ){
-      /* Malloc failed while inserting the new entry. This can only 
+      /* Malloc failed while inserting the new entry. This can only
       ** happen if there was no previous entry for this token.
       */
       assert( 0==fts3HashFind(pHash, zToken, nToken) );
@@ -158282,7 +158282,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd(
   assert( pTokenizer && pModule );
 
   /* If the user has inserted a NULL value, this function may be called with
-  ** zText==0. In this case, add zero token entries to the hash table and 
+  ** zText==0. In this case, add zero token entries to the hash table and
   ** return early. */
   if( zText==0 ){
     *pnWord = 0;
@@ -158313,8 +158313,8 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd(
     rc = fts3PendingTermsAddOne(
         p, iCol, iPos, &p->aIndex[0].hPending, zToken, nToken
     );
-    
-    /* Add the term to each of the prefix indexes that it is not too 
+
+    /* Add the term to each of the prefix indexes that it is not too
     ** short for. */
     for(i=1; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<p->nIndex; i++){
       struct Fts3Index *pIndex = &p->aIndex[i];
@@ -158330,8 +158330,8 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd(
   return (rc==SQLITE_DONE ? SQLITE_OK : rc);
 }
 
-/* 
-** Calling this function indicates that subsequent calls to 
+/*
+** Calling this function indicates that subsequent calls to
 ** fts3PendingTermsAdd() are to add term/position-list pairs for the
 ** contents of the document with docid iDocid.
 */
@@ -158350,10 +158350,10 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsDocid(
   ** buffer was half empty, that would let the less frequent terms
   ** generate longer doclists.
   */
-  if( iDocid<p->iPrevDocid 
+  if( iDocid<p->iPrevDocid
    || (iDocid==p->iPrevDocid && p->bPrevDelete==0)
    || p->iPrevLangid!=iLangid
-   || p->nPendingData>p->nMaxPendingData 
+   || p->nPendingData>p->nMaxPendingData
   ){
     int rc = sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(p);
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -158365,7 +158365,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsDocid(
 }
 
 /*
-** Discard the contents of the pending-terms hash tables. 
+** Discard the contents of the pending-terms hash tables.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsClear(Fts3Table *p){
   int i;
@@ -158390,9 +158390,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsClear(Fts3Table *p){
 ** fts3InsertData(). Parameter iDocid is the docid of the new row.
 */
 static int fts3InsertTerms(
-  Fts3Table *p, 
-  int iLangid, 
-  sqlite3_value **apVal, 
+  Fts3Table *p,
+  int iLangid,
+  sqlite3_value **apVal,
   u32 *aSz
 ){
   int i;                          /* Iterator variable */
@@ -158455,7 +158455,7 @@ static int fts3InsertData(
   rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_CONTENT_INSERT, &pContentInsert, &apVal[1]);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && p->zLanguageid ){
     rc = sqlite3_bind_int(
-        pContentInsert, p->nColumn+2, 
+        pContentInsert, p->nColumn+2,
         sqlite3_value_int(apVal[p->nColumn+4])
     );
   }
@@ -158482,8 +158482,8 @@ static int fts3InsertData(
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
   }
 
-  /* Execute the statement to insert the record. Set *piDocid to the 
-  ** new docid value. 
+  /* Execute the statement to insert the record. Set *piDocid to the
+  ** new docid value.
   */
   sqlite3_step(pContentInsert);
   rc = sqlite3_reset(pContentInsert);
@@ -158533,7 +158533,7 @@ static int langidFromSelect(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_stmt *pSelect){
 ** (an integer) of a row about to be deleted. Remove all terms from the
 ** full-text index.
 */
-static void fts3DeleteTerms( 
+static void fts3DeleteTerms(
   int *pRC,               /* Result code */
   Fts3Table *p,           /* The FTS table to delete from */
   sqlite3_value *pRowid,  /* The docid to be deleted */
@@ -158580,7 +158580,7 @@ static void fts3DeleteTerms(
 */
 static int fts3SegmentMerge(Fts3Table *, int, int, int);
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This function allocates a new level iLevel index in the segdir table.
 ** Usually, indexes are allocated within a level sequentially starting
 ** with 0, so the allocated index is one greater than the value returned
@@ -158589,17 +158589,17 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(Fts3Table *, int, int, int);
 **   SELECT max(idx) FROM %_segdir WHERE level = :iLevel
 **
 ** However, if there are already FTS3_MERGE_COUNT indexes at the requested
-** level, they are merged into a single level (iLevel+1) segment and the 
+** level, they are merged into a single level (iLevel+1) segment and the
 ** allocated index is 0.
 **
 ** If successful, *piIdx is set to the allocated index slot and SQLITE_OK
 ** returned. Otherwise, an SQLite error code is returned.
 */
 static int fts3AllocateSegdirIdx(
-  Fts3Table *p, 
+  Fts3Table *p,
   int iLangid,                    /* Language id */
   int iIndex,                     /* Index for p->aIndex */
-  int iLevel, 
+  int iLevel,
   int *piIdx
 ){
   int rc;                         /* Return Code */
@@ -158647,7 +158647,7 @@ static int fts3AllocateSegdirIdx(
 ** This function reads data from a single row of the %_segments table. The
 ** specific row is identified by the iBlockid parameter. If paBlob is not
 ** NULL, then a buffer is allocated using sqlite3_malloc() and populated
-** with the contents of the blob stored in the "block" column of the 
+** with the contents of the blob stored in the "block" column of the
 ** identified table row is. Whether or not paBlob is NULL, *pnBlob is set
 ** to the size of the blob in bytes before returning.
 **
@@ -158724,14 +158724,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegmentsClose(Fts3Table *p){
   sqlite3_blob_close(p->pSegments);
   p->pSegments = 0;
 }
-    
+
 static int fts3SegReaderIncrRead(Fts3SegReader *pReader){
   int nRead;                      /* Number of bytes to read */
   int rc;                         /* Return code */
 
   nRead = MIN(pReader->nNode - pReader->nPopulate, FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE);
   rc = sqlite3_blob_read(
-      pReader->pBlob, 
+      pReader->pBlob,
       &pReader->aNode[pReader->nPopulate],
       nRead,
       pReader->nPopulate
@@ -158751,10 +158751,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderIncrRead(Fts3SegReader *pReader){
 
 static int fts3SegReaderRequire(Fts3SegReader *pReader, char *pFrom, int nByte){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  assert( !pReader->pBlob 
+  assert( !pReader->pBlob
        || (pFrom>=pReader->aNode && pFrom<&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode])
   );
-  while( pReader->pBlob && rc==SQLITE_OK 
+  while( pReader->pBlob && rc==SQLITE_OK
      &&  (pFrom - pReader->aNode + nByte)>pReader->nPopulate
   ){
     rc = fts3SegReaderIncrRead(pReader);
@@ -158780,7 +158780,7 @@ static void fts3SegReaderSetEof(Fts3SegReader *pSeg){
 ** SQLITE_DONE. Otherwise, an SQLite error code.
 */
 static int fts3SegReaderNext(
-  Fts3Table *p, 
+  Fts3Table *p,
   Fts3SegReader *pReader,
   int bIncr
 ){
@@ -158820,7 +158820,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext(
 
     fts3SegReaderSetEof(pReader);
 
-    /* If iCurrentBlock>=iLeafEndBlock, this is an EOF condition. All leaf 
+    /* If iCurrentBlock>=iLeafEndBlock, this is an EOF condition. All leaf
     ** blocks have already been traversed.  */
     assert( pReader->iCurrentBlock<=pReader->iLeafEndBlock );
     if( pReader->iCurrentBlock>=pReader->iLeafEndBlock ){
@@ -158828,7 +158828,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext(
     }
 
     rc = sqlite3Fts3ReadBlock(
-        p, ++pReader->iCurrentBlock, &pReader->aNode, &pReader->nNode, 
+        p, ++pReader->iCurrentBlock, &pReader->aNode, &pReader->nNode,
         (bIncr ? &pReader->nPopulate : 0)
     );
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -158844,13 +158844,13 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext(
 
   rc = fts3SegReaderRequire(pReader, pNext, FTS3_VARINT_MAX*2);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
-  
-  /* Because of the FTS3_NODE_PADDING bytes of padding, the following is 
+
+  /* Because of the FTS3_NODE_PADDING bytes of padding, the following is
   ** safe (no risk of overread) even if the node data is corrupted. */
   pNext += fts3GetVarint32(pNext, &nPrefix);
   pNext += fts3GetVarint32(pNext, &nSuffix);
-  if( nPrefix<0 || nSuffix<=0 
-   || &pNext[nSuffix]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode] 
+  if( nPrefix<0 || nSuffix<=0
+   || &pNext[nSuffix]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode]
   ){
     return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB;
   }
@@ -158876,10 +158876,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext(
   pReader->pOffsetList = 0;
 
   /* Check that the doclist does not appear to extend past the end of the
-  ** b-tree node. And that the final byte of the doclist is 0x00. If either 
+  ** b-tree node. And that the final byte of the doclist is 0x00. If either
   ** of these statements is untrue, then the data structure is corrupt.
   */
-  if( &pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode] 
+  if( &pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode]
    || (pReader->nPopulate==0 && pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist-1])
   ){
     return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB;
@@ -158900,7 +158900,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderFirstDocid(Fts3Table *pTab, Fts3SegReader *pReader){
     pReader->iDocid = 0;
     pReader->nOffsetList = 0;
     sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(0,
-        pReader->aDoclist, pReader->nDoclist, &pReader->pOffsetList, 
+        pReader->aDoclist, pReader->nDoclist, &pReader->pOffsetList,
         &pReader->iDocid, &pReader->nOffsetList, &bEof
     );
   }else{
@@ -158916,8 +158916,8 @@ static int fts3SegReaderFirstDocid(Fts3Table *pTab, Fts3SegReader *pReader){
 /*
 ** Advance the SegReader to point to the next docid in the doclist
 ** associated with the current term.
-** 
-** If arguments ppOffsetList and pnOffsetList are not NULL, then 
+**
+** If arguments ppOffsetList and pnOffsetList are not NULL, then
 ** *ppOffsetList is set to point to the first column-offset list
 ** in the doclist entry (i.e. immediately past the docid varint).
 ** *pnOffsetList is set to the length of the set of column-offset
@@ -158960,22 +158960,22 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNextDocid(
     ** following block advances it to point one byte past the end of
     ** the same offset list. */
     while( 1 ){
-  
+
       /* The following line of code (and the "p++" below the while() loop) is
-      ** normally all that is required to move pointer p to the desired 
+      ** normally all that is required to move pointer p to the desired
       ** position. The exception is if this node is being loaded from disk
       ** incrementally and pointer "p" now points to the first byte past
       ** the populated part of pReader->aNode[].
       */
       while( *p | c ) c = *p++ & 0x80;
       assert( *p==0 );
-  
+
       if( pReader->pBlob==0 || p<&pReader->aNode[pReader->nPopulate] ) break;
       rc = fts3SegReaderIncrRead(pReader);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
     }
     p++;
-  
+
     /* If required, populate the output variables with a pointer to and the
     ** size of the previous offset-list.
     */
@@ -158986,7 +158986,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNextDocid(
 
     /* List may have been edited in place by fts3EvalNearTrim() */
     while( p<pEnd && *p==0 ) p++;
-  
+
     /* If there are no more entries in the doclist, set pOffsetList to
     ** NULL. Otherwise, set Fts3SegReader.iDocid to the next docid and
     ** Fts3SegReader.pOffsetList to point to the next offset list before
@@ -159013,7 +159013,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNextDocid(
 
 
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl(
-  Fts3Cursor *pCsr, 
+  Fts3Cursor *pCsr,
   Fts3MultiSegReader *pMsr,
   int *pnOvfl
 ){
@@ -159028,8 +159028,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl(
 
   for(ii=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && ii<pMsr->nSegment; ii++){
     Fts3SegReader *pReader = pMsr->apSegment[ii];
-    if( !fts3SegReaderIsPending(pReader) 
-     && !fts3SegReaderIsRootOnly(pReader) 
+    if( !fts3SegReaderIsPending(pReader)
+     && !fts3SegReaderIsRootOnly(pReader)
     ){
       sqlite3_int64 jj;
       for(jj=pReader->iStartBlock; jj<=pReader->iLeafEndBlock; jj++){
@@ -159047,7 +159047,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl(
 }
 
 /*
-** Free all allocations associated with the iterator passed as the 
+** Free all allocations associated with the iterator passed as the
 ** second argument.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFree(Fts3SegReader *pReader){
@@ -159201,7 +159201,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderPending(
 
   }else{
     /* The query is a simple term lookup that matches at most one term in
-    ** the index. All that is required is a straight hash-lookup. 
+    ** the index. All that is required is a straight hash-lookup.
     **
     ** Because the stack address of pE may be accessed via the aElem pointer
     ** below, the "Fts3HashElem *pE" must be declared so that it is valid
@@ -159235,7 +159235,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderPending(
 }
 
 /*
-** Compare the entries pointed to by two Fts3SegReader structures. 
+** Compare the entries pointed to by two Fts3SegReader structures.
 ** Comparison is as follows:
 **
 **   1) EOF is greater than not EOF.
@@ -159306,7 +159306,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderDoclistCmpRev(Fts3SegReader *pLhs, Fts3SegReader *pRhs){
 
 /*
 ** Compare the term that the Fts3SegReader object passed as the first argument
-** points to with the term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm. 
+** points to with the term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm.
 **
 ** If the pSeg iterator is already at EOF, return 0. Otherwise, return
 ** -ve if the pSeg term is less than zTerm/nTerm, 0 if the two terms are
@@ -159367,7 +159367,7 @@ static void fts3SegReaderSort(
 #endif
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Insert a record into the %_segments table.
 */
 static int fts3WriteSegment(
@@ -159408,7 +159408,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MaxLevel(Fts3Table *p, int *pnMax){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Insert a record into the %_segdir table.
 */
 static int fts3WriteSegdir(
@@ -159445,7 +159445,7 @@ static int fts3WriteSegdir(
 
 /*
 ** Return the size of the common prefix (if any) shared by zPrev and
-** zNext, in bytes. For example, 
+** zNext, in bytes. For example,
 **
 **   fts3PrefixCompress("abc", 3, "abcdef", 6)   // returns 3
 **   fts3PrefixCompress("abX", 3, "abcdef", 6)   // returns 2
@@ -159469,7 +159469,7 @@ static int fts3PrefixCompress(
 */
 static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
   Fts3Table *p,                   /* Virtual table handle */
-  SegmentNode **ppTree,           /* IN/OUT: SegmentNode handle */ 
+  SegmentNode **ppTree,           /* IN/OUT: SegmentNode handle */
   int isCopyTerm,                 /* True if zTerm/nTerm is transient */
   const char *zTerm,              /* Pointer to buffer containing term */
   int nTerm                       /* Size of term in bytes */
@@ -159478,7 +159478,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
   int rc;
   SegmentNode *pNew;
 
-  /* First try to append the term to the current node. Return early if 
+  /* First try to append the term to the current node. Return early if
   ** this is possible.
   */
   if( pTree ){
@@ -159498,8 +159498,8 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
         ** and the static node buffer (p->nNodeSize bytes) is not large
         ** enough. Use a separately malloced buffer instead This wastes
         ** p->nNodeSize bytes, but since this scenario only comes about when
-        ** the database contain two terms that share a prefix of almost 2KB, 
-        ** this is not expected to be a serious problem. 
+        ** the database contain two terms that share a prefix of almost 2KB,
+        ** this is not expected to be a serious problem.
         */
         assert( pTree->aData==(char *)&pTree[1] );
         pTree->aData = (char *)sqlite3_malloc(nReq);
@@ -159543,7 +159543,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
   ** If this is the first node in the tree, the term is added to it.
   **
   ** Otherwise, the term is not added to the new node, it is left empty for
-  ** now. Instead, the term is inserted into the parent of pTree. If pTree 
+  ** now. Instead, the term is inserted into the parent of pTree. If pTree
   ** has no parent, one is created here.
   */
   pNew = (SegmentNode *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(SegmentNode) + p->nNodeSize);
@@ -159568,7 +159568,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
     pTree->zMalloc = 0;
   }else{
     pNew->pLeftmost = pNew;
-    rc = fts3NodeAddTerm(p, &pNew, isCopyTerm, zTerm, nTerm); 
+    rc = fts3NodeAddTerm(p, &pNew, isCopyTerm, zTerm, nTerm);
   }
 
   *ppTree = pNew;
@@ -159579,8 +159579,8 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
 ** Helper function for fts3NodeWrite().
 */
 static int fts3TreeFinishNode(
-  SegmentNode *pTree, 
-  int iHeight, 
+  SegmentNode *pTree,
+  int iHeight,
   sqlite3_int64 iLeftChild
 ){
   int nStart;
@@ -159593,15 +159593,15 @@ static int fts3TreeFinishNode(
 
 /*
 ** Write the buffer for the segment node pTree and all of its peers to the
-** database. Then call this function recursively to write the parent of 
-** pTree and its peers to the database. 
+** database. Then call this function recursively to write the parent of
+** pTree and its peers to the database.
 **
 ** Except, if pTree is a root node, do not write it to the database. Instead,
 ** set output variables *paRoot and *pnRoot to contain the root node.
 **
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and output variable *piLast is
 ** set to the largest blockid written to the database (or zero if no
-** blocks were written to the db). Otherwise, an SQLite error code is 
+** blocks were written to the db). Otherwise, an SQLite error code is
 ** returned.
 */
 static int fts3NodeWrite(
@@ -159629,7 +159629,7 @@ static int fts3NodeWrite(
     for(pIter=pTree->pLeftmost; pIter && rc==SQLITE_OK; pIter=pIter->pRight){
       int nStart = fts3TreeFinishNode(pIter, iHeight, iNextLeaf);
       int nWrite = pIter->nData - nStart;
-  
+
       rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, iNextFree, &pIter->aData[nStart], nWrite);
       iNextFree++;
       iNextLeaf += (pIter->nEntry+1);
@@ -159675,7 +159675,7 @@ static void fts3NodeFree(SegmentNode *pTree){
 */
 static int fts3SegWriterAdd(
   Fts3Table *p,                   /* Virtual table handle */
-  SegmentWriter **ppWriter,       /* IN/OUT: SegmentWriter handle */ 
+  SegmentWriter **ppWriter,       /* IN/OUT: SegmentWriter handle */
   int isCopyTerm,                 /* True if buffer zTerm must be copied */
   const char *zTerm,              /* Pointer to buffer containing term */
   int nTerm,                      /* Size of term in bytes */
@@ -159835,12 +159835,12 @@ static int fts3SegWriterFlush(
           pWriter->iFirst, pWriter->iFree, &iLast, &zRoot, &nRoot);
     }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-      rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx, 
+      rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx,
           pWriter->iFirst, iLastLeaf, iLast, pWriter->nLeafData, zRoot, nRoot);
     }
   }else{
     /* The entire tree fits on the root node. Write it to the segdir table. */
-    rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx, 
+    rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx,
         0, 0, 0, pWriter->nLeafData, pWriter->aData, pWriter->nData);
   }
   p->nLeafAdd++;
@@ -159848,7 +159848,7 @@ static int fts3SegWriterFlush(
 }
 
 /*
-** Release all memory held by the SegmentWriter object passed as the 
+** Release all memory held by the SegmentWriter object passed as the
 ** first argument.
 */
 static void fts3SegWriterFree(SegmentWriter *pWriter){
@@ -159898,9 +159898,9 @@ static int fts3IsEmpty(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_value *pRowid, int *pisEmpty){
 ** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if not.
 */
 static int fts3SegmentMaxLevel(
-  Fts3Table *p, 
+  Fts3Table *p,
   int iLangid,
-  int iIndex, 
+  int iIndex,
   sqlite3_int64 *pnMax
 ){
   sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
@@ -159916,7 +159916,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMaxLevel(
   rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR_MAX_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
   sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0));
-  sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, 
+  sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
       getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1)
   );
   if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){
@@ -159945,7 +159945,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentIsMaxLevel(Fts3Table *p, i64 iAbsLevel, int *pbMax){
   int rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR_MAX_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
   sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, iAbsLevel+1);
-  sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, 
+  sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
       ((iAbsLevel/FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL)+1) * FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL
   );
 
@@ -159983,9 +159983,9 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegment(
 ** This function is used after merging multiple segments into a single large
 ** segment to delete the old, now redundant, segment b-trees. Specifically,
 ** it:
-** 
-**   1) Deletes all %_segments entries for the segments associated with 
-**      each of the SegReader objects in the array passed as the third 
+**
+**   1) Deletes all %_segments entries for the segments associated with
+**      each of the SegReader objects in the array passed as the third
 **      argument, and
 **
 **   2) deletes all %_segdir entries with level iLevel, or all %_segdir
@@ -160017,7 +160017,7 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegdir(
     rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_DELETE_SEGDIR_RANGE, &pDelete, 0);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0));
-      sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 2, 
+      sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 2,
           getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1)
       );
     }
@@ -160039,7 +160039,7 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegdir(
 }
 
 /*
-** When this function is called, buffer *ppList (size *pnList bytes) contains 
+** When this function is called, buffer *ppList (size *pnList bytes) contains
 ** a position list that may (or may not) feature multiple columns. This
 ** function adjusts the pointer *ppList and the length *pnList so that they
 ** identify the subset of the position list that corresponds to column iCol.
@@ -160066,7 +160066,7 @@ static void fts3ColumnFilter(
   while( 1 ){
     char c = 0;
     while( p<pEnd && (c | *p)&0xFE ) c = *p++ & 0x80;
-  
+
     if( iCol==iCurrent ){
       nList = (int)(p - pList);
       break;
@@ -160146,7 +160146,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(
 
       rc = fts3SegReaderNextDocid(p, apSegment[0], &pList, &nList);
       j = 1;
-      while( rc==SQLITE_OK 
+      while( rc==SQLITE_OK
         && j<nMerge
         && apSegment[j]->pOffsetList
         && apSegment[j]->iDocid==iDocid
@@ -160189,7 +160189,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderStart(
   int i;
   int nSeg = pCsr->nSegment;
 
-  /* If the Fts3SegFilter defines a specific term (or term prefix) to search 
+  /* If the Fts3SegFilter defines a specific term (or term prefix) to search
   ** for, then advance each segment iterator until it points to a term of
   ** equal or greater value than the specified term. This prevents many
   ** unnecessary merge/sort operations for the case where single segment
@@ -160273,7 +160273,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrStart(
 **   sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart()
 **   sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep()
 **
-** then the entire doclist for the term is available in 
+** then the entire doclist for the term is available in
 ** MultiSegReader.aDoclist/nDoclist.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrRestart(Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr){
@@ -160321,9 +160321,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(
   do {
     int nMerge;
     int i;
-  
+
     /* Advance the first pCsr->nAdvance entries in the apSegment[] array
-    ** forward. Then sort the list in order of current term again.  
+    ** forward. Then sort the list in order of current term again.
     */
     for(i=0; i<pCsr->nAdvance; i++){
       Fts3SegReader *pSeg = apSegment[i];
@@ -160345,34 +160345,34 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(
     pCsr->zTerm = apSegment[0]->zTerm;
 
     /* If this is a prefix-search, and if the term that apSegment[0] points
-    ** to does not share a suffix with pFilter->zTerm/nTerm, then all 
+    ** to does not share a suffix with pFilter->zTerm/nTerm, then all
     ** required callbacks have been made. In this case exit early.
     **
     ** Similarly, if this is a search for an exact match, and the first term
     ** of segment apSegment[0] is not a match, exit early.
     */
     if( pFilter->zTerm && !isScan ){
-      if( pCsr->nTerm<pFilter->nTerm 
+      if( pCsr->nTerm<pFilter->nTerm
        || (!isPrefix && pCsr->nTerm>pFilter->nTerm)
-       || memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, pFilter->zTerm, pFilter->nTerm) 
+       || memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, pFilter->zTerm, pFilter->nTerm)
       ){
         break;
       }
     }
 
     nMerge = 1;
-    while( nMerge<nSegment 
+    while( nMerge<nSegment
         && apSegment[nMerge]->aNode
-        && apSegment[nMerge]->nTerm==pCsr->nTerm 
+        && apSegment[nMerge]->nTerm==pCsr->nTerm
         && 0==memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, apSegment[nMerge]->zTerm, pCsr->nTerm)
     ){
       nMerge++;
     }
 
     assert( isIgnoreEmpty || (isRequirePos && !isColFilter) );
-    if( nMerge==1 
-     && !isIgnoreEmpty 
-     && !isFirst 
+    if( nMerge==1
+     && !isIgnoreEmpty
+     && !isFirst
      && (p->bDescIdx==0 || fts3SegReaderIsPending(apSegment[0])==0)
     ){
       pCsr->nDoclist = apSegment[0]->nDoclist;
@@ -160417,7 +160417,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(
 
         if( !isIgnoreEmpty || nList>0 ){
 
-          /* Calculate the 'docid' delta value to write into the merged 
+          /* Calculate the 'docid' delta value to write into the merged
           ** doclist. */
           sqlite3_int64 iDelta;
           if( p->bDescIdx && nDoclist>0 ){
@@ -160442,7 +160442,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(
           if( isFirst ){
             char *a = &pCsr->aBuffer[nDoclist];
             int nWrite;
-           
+
             nWrite = sqlite3Fts3FirstFilter(iDelta, pList, nList, a);
             if( nWrite ){
               iPrev = iDocid;
@@ -160492,18 +160492,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(
 }
 
 /*
-** Decode the "end_block" field, selected by column iCol of the SELECT 
-** statement passed as the first argument. 
+** Decode the "end_block" field, selected by column iCol of the SELECT
+** statement passed as the first argument.
 **
 ** The "end_block" field may contain either an integer, or a text field
-** containing the text representation of two non-negative integers separated 
-** by one or more space (0x20) characters. In the first case, set *piEndBlock 
-** to the integer value and *pnByte to zero before returning. In the second, 
+** containing the text representation of two non-negative integers separated
+** by one or more space (0x20) characters. In the first case, set *piEndBlock
+** to the integer value and *pnByte to zero before returning. In the second,
 ** set *piEndBlock to the first value and *pnByte to the second.
 */
 static void fts3ReadEndBlockField(
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int iCol, 
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int iCol,
   i64 *piEndBlock,
   i64 *pnByte
 ){
@@ -160549,10 +160549,10 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments(
     i64 iLast = (iAbsLevel/FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL + 1) * FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL - 1;
     i64 nLimit = (nByte*3)/2;
 
-    /* Loop through all entries in the %_segdir table corresponding to 
+    /* Loop through all entries in the %_segdir table corresponding to
     ** segments in this index on levels greater than iAbsLevel. If there is
-    ** at least one such segment, and it is possible to determine that all 
-    ** such segments are smaller than nLimit bytes in size, they will be 
+    ** at least one such segment, and it is possible to determine that all
+    ** such segments are smaller than nLimit bytes in size, they will be
     ** promoted to level iAbsLevel.  */
     sqlite3_bind_int64(pRange, 1, iAbsLevel+1);
     sqlite3_bind_int64(pRange, 2, iLast);
@@ -160560,7 +160560,7 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments(
       i64 nSize = 0, dummy;
       fts3ReadEndBlockField(pRange, 2, &dummy, &nSize);
       if( nSize<=0 || nSize>nLimit ){
-        /* If nSize==0, then the %_segdir.end_block field does not not 
+        /* If nSize==0, then the %_segdir.end_block field does not not
         ** contain a size value. This happens if it was written by an
         ** old version of FTS. In this case it is not possible to determine
         ** the size of the segment, and so segment promotion does not
@@ -160626,18 +160626,18 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments(
 }
 
 /*
-** Merge all level iLevel segments in the database into a single 
+** Merge all level iLevel segments in the database into a single
 ** iLevel+1 segment. Or, if iLevel<0, merge all segments into a
-** single segment with a level equal to the numerically largest level 
+** single segment with a level equal to the numerically largest level
 ** currently present in the database.
 **
 ** If this function is called with iLevel<0, but there is only one
-** segment in the database, SQLITE_DONE is returned immediately. 
-** Otherwise, if successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error occurs, 
+** segment in the database, SQLITE_DONE is returned immediately.
+** Otherwise, if successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error occurs,
 ** an SQLite error code is returned.
 */
 static int fts3SegmentMerge(
-  Fts3Table *p, 
+  Fts3Table *p,
   int iLangid,                    /* Language id to merge */
   int iIndex,                     /* Index in p->aIndex[] to merge */
   int iLevel                      /* Level to merge */
@@ -160681,7 +160681,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(
   }else{
     /* This call is to merge all segments at level iLevel. find the next
     ** available segment index at level iLevel+1. The call to
-    ** fts3AllocateSegdirIdx() will merge the segments at level iLevel+1 to 
+    ** fts3AllocateSegdirIdx() will merge the segments at level iLevel+1 to
     ** a single iLevel+2 segment if necessary.  */
     assert( FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING==-1 );
     iNewLevel = getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, iLevel+1);
@@ -160702,7 +160702,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(
   while( SQLITE_OK==rc ){
     rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, &csr);
     if( rc!=SQLITE_ROW ) break;
-    rc = fts3SegWriterAdd(p, &pWriter, 1, 
+    rc = fts3SegWriterAdd(p, &pWriter, 1,
         csr.zTerm, csr.nTerm, csr.aDoclist, csr.nDoclist);
   }
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished;
@@ -160730,13 +160730,13 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(
 }
 
 
-/* 
-** Flush the contents of pendingTerms to level 0 segments. 
+/*
+** Flush the contents of pendingTerms to level 0 segments.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(Fts3Table *p){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   int i;
-        
+
   for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<p->nIndex; i++){
     rc = fts3SegmentMerge(p, p->iPrevLangid, i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING);
     if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -160838,7 +160838,7 @@ static void fts3InsertDocsize(
 /*
 ** Record 0 of the %_stat table contains a blob consisting of N varints,
 ** where N is the number of user defined columns in the fts3 table plus
-** two. If nCol is the number of user defined columns, then values of the 
+** two. If nCol is the number of user defined columns, then values of the
 ** varints are set as follows:
 **
 **   Varint 0:       Total number of rows in the table.
@@ -160922,7 +160922,7 @@ static void fts3UpdateDocTotals(
 }
 
 /*
-** Merge the entire database so that there is one segment for each 
+** Merge the entire database so that there is one segment for each
 ** iIndex/iLangid combination.
 */
 static int fts3DoOptimize(Fts3Table *p, int bReturnDone){
@@ -160961,7 +160961,7 @@ static int fts3DoOptimize(Fts3Table *p, int bReturnDone){
 **
 **     INSERT INTO <tbl>(<tbl>) VALUES('rebuild');
 **
-** The entire FTS index is discarded and rebuilt. If the table is one 
+** The entire FTS index is discarded and rebuilt. If the table is one
 ** created using the content=xxx option, then the new index is based on
 ** the current contents of the xxx table. Otherwise, it is rebuilt based
 ** on the contents of the %_content table.
@@ -161041,9 +161041,9 @@ static int fts3DoRebuild(Fts3Table *p){
 
 
 /*
-** This function opens a cursor used to read the input data for an 
+** This function opens a cursor used to read the input data for an
 ** incremental merge operation. Specifically, it opens a cursor to scan
-** the oldest nSeg segments (idx=0 through idx=(nSeg-1)) in absolute 
+** the oldest nSeg segments (idx=0 through idx=(nSeg-1)) in absolute
 ** level iAbsLevel.
 */
 static int fts3IncrmergeCsr(
@@ -161053,7 +161053,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeCsr(
   Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr        /* Cursor object to populate */
 ){
   int rc;                         /* Return Code */
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;        /* Statement used to read %_segdir entry */  
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;        /* Statement used to read %_segdir entry */
   int nByte;                      /* Bytes allocated at pCsr->apSegment[] */
 
   /* Allocate space for the Fts3MultiSegReader.aCsr[] array */
@@ -161108,7 +161108,7 @@ struct Blob {
 };
 
 /*
-** This structure is used to build up buffers containing segment b-tree 
+** This structure is used to build up buffers containing segment b-tree
 ** nodes (blocks).
 */
 struct NodeWriter {
@@ -161177,12 +161177,12 @@ static void blobGrowBuffer(Blob *pBlob, int nMin, int *pRc){
 
 /*
 ** Attempt to advance the node-reader object passed as the first argument to
-** the next entry on the node. 
+** the next entry on the node.
 **
-** Return an error code if an error occurs (SQLITE_NOMEM is possible). 
+** Return an error code if an error occurs (SQLITE_NOMEM is possible).
 ** Otherwise return SQLITE_OK. If there is no next entry on the node
 ** (e.g. because the current entry is the last) set NodeReader->aNode to
-** NULL to indicate EOF. Otherwise, populate the NodeReader structure output 
+** NULL to indicate EOF. Otherwise, populate the NodeReader structure output
 ** variables for the new entry.
 */
 static int nodeReaderNext(NodeReader *p){
@@ -161230,7 +161230,7 @@ static void nodeReaderRelease(NodeReader *p){
 /*
 ** Initialize a node-reader object to read the node in buffer aNode/nNode.
 **
-** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and the NodeReader object set to 
+** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and the NodeReader object set to
 ** point to the first entry on the node (if any). Otherwise, an SQLite
 ** error code is returned.
 */
@@ -161279,7 +161279,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush(
     int nSpace;
 
     /* Figure out how much space the key will consume if it is written to
-    ** the current node of layer iLayer. Due to the prefix compression, 
+    ** the current node of layer iLayer. Due to the prefix compression,
     ** the space required changes depending on which node the key is to
     ** be added to.  */
     nPrefix = fts3PrefixCompress(pNode->key.a, pNode->key.n, zTerm, nTerm);
@@ -161287,9 +161287,9 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush(
     nSpace  = sqlite3Fts3VarintLen(nPrefix);
     nSpace += sqlite3Fts3VarintLen(nSuffix) + nSuffix;
 
-    if( pNode->key.n==0 || (pNode->block.n + nSpace)<=p->nNodeSize ){ 
+    if( pNode->key.n==0 || (pNode->block.n + nSpace)<=p->nNodeSize ){
       /* If the current node of layer iLayer contains zero keys, or if adding
-      ** the key to it will not cause it to grow to larger than nNodeSize 
+      ** the key to it will not cause it to grow to larger than nNodeSize
       ** bytes in size, write the key here.  */
 
       Blob *pBlk = &pNode->block;
@@ -161345,12 +161345,12 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush(
 ** A node header is a single 0x00 byte for a leaf node, or a height varint
 ** followed by the left-hand-child varint for an internal node.
 **
-** The term to be appended is passed via arguments zTerm/nTerm. For a 
+** The term to be appended is passed via arguments zTerm/nTerm. For a
 ** leaf node, the doclist is passed as aDoclist/nDoclist. For an internal
 ** node, both aDoclist and nDoclist must be passed 0.
 **
 ** If the size of the value in blob pPrev is zero, then this is the first
-** term written to the node. Otherwise, pPrev contains a copy of the 
+** term written to the node. Otherwise, pPrev contains a copy of the
 ** previous term. Before this function returns, it is updated to contain a
 ** copy of zTerm/nTerm.
 **
@@ -161367,7 +161367,7 @@ static int fts3AppendToNode(
   const char *zTerm,              /* New term to write */
   int nTerm,                      /* Size of zTerm in bytes */
   const char *aDoclist,           /* Doclist (or NULL) to write */
-  int nDoclist                    /* Size of aDoclist in bytes */ 
+  int nDoclist                    /* Size of aDoclist in bytes */
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;             /* Return code */
   int bFirst = (pPrev->n==0);     /* True if this is the first term written */
@@ -161441,7 +161441,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeAppend(
     rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, pLeaf->iBlock, pLeaf->block.a, pLeaf->block.n);
     pWriter->nWork++;
 
-    /* Add the current term to the parent node. The term added to the 
+    /* Add the current term to the parent node. The term added to the
     ** parent must:
     **
     **   a) be greater than the largest term on the leaf node just written
@@ -161506,7 +161506,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease(
   NodeWriter *pRoot;              /* NodeWriter for root node */
   int rc = *pRc;                  /* Error code */
 
-  /* Set iRoot to the index in pWriter->aNodeWriter[] of the output segment 
+  /* Set iRoot to the index in pWriter->aNodeWriter[] of the output segment
   ** root node. If the segment fits entirely on a single leaf node, iRoot
   ** will be set to 0. If the root node is the parent of the leaves, iRoot
   ** will be 1. And so on.  */
@@ -161524,17 +161524,17 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease(
 
   /* The entire output segment fits on a single node. Normally, this means
   ** the node would be stored as a blob in the "root" column of the %_segdir
-  ** table. However, this is not permitted in this case. The problem is that 
-  ** space has already been reserved in the %_segments table, and so the 
-  ** start_block and end_block fields of the %_segdir table must be populated. 
-  ** And, by design or by accident, released versions of FTS cannot handle 
+  ** table. However, this is not permitted in this case. The problem is that
+  ** space has already been reserved in the %_segments table, and so the
+  ** start_block and end_block fields of the %_segdir table must be populated.
+  ** And, by design or by accident, released versions of FTS cannot handle
   ** segments that fit entirely on the root node with start_block!=0.
   **
-  ** Instead, create a synthetic root node that contains nothing but a 
+  ** Instead, create a synthetic root node that contains nothing but a
   ** pointer to the single content node. So that the segment consists of a
   ** single leaf and a single interior (root) node.
   **
-  ** Todo: Better might be to defer allocating space in the %_segments 
+  ** Todo: Better might be to defer allocating space in the %_segments
   ** table until we are sure it is needed.
   */
   if( iRoot==0 ){
@@ -161562,7 +161562,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease(
 
   /* Write the %_segdir record. */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, 
+    rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p,
         pWriter->iAbsLevel+1,               /* level */
         pWriter->iIdx,                      /* idx */
         pWriter->iStart,                    /* start_block */
@@ -161601,11 +161601,11 @@ static int fts3TermCmp(
 
 
 /*
-** Query to see if the entry in the %_segments table with blockid iEnd is 
+** Query to see if the entry in the %_segments table with blockid iEnd is
 ** NULL. If no error occurs and the entry is NULL, set *pbRes 1 before
-** returning. Otherwise, set *pbRes to 0. 
+** returning. Otherwise, set *pbRes to 0.
 **
-** Or, if an error occurs while querying the database, return an SQLite 
+** Or, if an error occurs while querying the database, return an SQLite
 ** error code. The final value of *pbRes is undefined in this case.
 **
 ** This is used to test if a segment is an "appendable" segment. If it
@@ -161623,14 +161623,14 @@ static int fts3IsAppendable(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_int64 iEnd, int *pbRes){
     if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pCheck) ) bRes = 1;
     rc = sqlite3_reset(pCheck);
   }
-  
+
   *pbRes = bRes;
   return rc;
 }
 
 /*
 ** This function is called when initializing an incremental-merge operation.
-** It checks if the existing segment with index value iIdx at absolute level 
+** It checks if the existing segment with index value iIdx at absolute level
 ** (iAbsLevel+1) can be appended to by the incremental merge. If it can, the
 ** merge-writer object *pWriter is initialized to write to it.
 **
@@ -161639,7 +161639,7 @@ static int fts3IsAppendable(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_int64 iEnd, int *pbRes){
 **   * It was initially created as an appendable segment (with all required
 **     space pre-allocated), and
 **
-**   * The first key read from the input (arguments zKey and nKey) is 
+**   * The first key read from the input (arguments zKey and nKey) is
 **     greater than the largest key currently stored in the potential
 **     output segment.
 */
@@ -161769,13 +161769,13 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeLoad(
 /*
 ** Determine the largest segment index value that exists within absolute
 ** level iAbsLevel+1. If no error occurs, set *piIdx to this value plus
-** one before returning SQLITE_OK. Or, if there are no segments at all 
+** one before returning SQLITE_OK. Or, if there are no segments at all
 ** within level iAbsLevel, set *piIdx to zero.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. The final value of
 ** *piIdx is undefined in this case.
 */
-static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx( 
+static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
   Fts3Table *p,                   /* FTS Table handle */
   sqlite3_int64 iAbsLevel,        /* Absolute index of input segments */
   int *piIdx                      /* OUT: Next free index at iAbsLevel+1 */
@@ -161794,7 +161794,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Allocate an appendable output segment on absolute level iAbsLevel+1
 ** with idx value iIdx.
 **
@@ -161808,7 +161808,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
 ** When an appendable segment is allocated, it is estimated that the
 ** maximum number of leaf blocks that may be required is the sum of the
 ** number of leaf blocks consumed by the input segments, plus the number
-** of input segments, multiplied by two. This value is stored in stack 
+** of input segments, multiplied by two. This value is stored in stack
 ** variable nLeafEst.
 **
 ** A total of 16*nLeafEst blocks are allocated when an appendable segment
@@ -161817,10 +161817,10 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
 ** of interior nodes that are parents of the leaf nodes start at block
 ** (start_block + (1 + end_block - start_block) / 16). And so on.
 **
-** In the actual code below, the value "16" is replaced with the 
+** In the actual code below, the value "16" is replaced with the
 ** pre-processor macro FTS_MAX_APPENDABLE_HEIGHT.
 */
-static int fts3IncrmergeWriter( 
+static int fts3IncrmergeWriter(
   Fts3Table *p,                   /* Fts3 table handle */
   sqlite3_int64 iAbsLevel,        /* Absolute level of input segments */
   int iIdx,                       /* Index of new output segment */
@@ -161858,7 +161858,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeWriter(
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
 
   /* Insert the marker in the %_segments table to make sure nobody tries
-  ** to steal the space just allocated. This is also used to identify 
+  ** to steal the space just allocated. This is also used to identify
   ** appendable segments.  */
   rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, pWriter->iEnd, 0, 0);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -161875,13 +161875,13 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeWriter(
 }
 
 /*
-** Remove an entry from the %_segdir table. This involves running the 
+** Remove an entry from the %_segdir table. This involves running the
 ** following two statements:
 **
 **   DELETE FROM %_segdir WHERE level = :iAbsLevel AND idx = :iIdx
 **   UPDATE %_segdir SET idx = idx - 1 WHERE level = :iAbsLevel AND idx > :iIdx
 **
-** The DELETE statement removes the specific %_segdir level. The UPDATE 
+** The DELETE statement removes the specific %_segdir level. The UPDATE
 ** statement ensures that the remaining segments have contiguously allocated
 ** idx values.
 */
@@ -162003,8 +162003,8 @@ static int fts3TruncateNode(
   pNew->n = 0;
 
   /* Populate new node buffer */
-  for(rc = nodeReaderInit(&reader, aNode, nNode); 
-      rc==SQLITE_OK && reader.aNode; 
+  for(rc = nodeReaderInit(&reader, aNode, nNode);
+      rc==SQLITE_OK && reader.aNode;
       rc = nodeReaderNext(&reader)
   ){
     if( pNew->n==0 ){
@@ -162031,7 +162031,7 @@ static int fts3TruncateNode(
 }
 
 /*
-** Remove all terms smaller than zTerm/nTerm from segment iIdx in absolute 
+** Remove all terms smaller than zTerm/nTerm from segment iIdx in absolute
 ** level iAbsLevel. This may involve deleting entries from the %_segments
 ** table, and modifying existing entries in both the %_segments and %_segdir
 ** tables.
@@ -162154,9 +162154,9 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeChomp(
       }
       *pnRem = 0;
     }else{
-      /* The incremental merge did not copy all the data from this 
+      /* The incremental merge did not copy all the data from this
       ** segment to the upper level. The segment is modified in place
-      ** so that it contains no keys smaller than zTerm/nTerm. */ 
+      ** so that it contains no keys smaller than zTerm/nTerm. */
       const char *zTerm = pSeg->zTerm;
       int nTerm = pSeg->nTerm;
       rc = fts3TruncateSegment(p, iAbsLevel, pSeg->iIdx, zTerm, nTerm);
@@ -162191,7 +162191,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintStore(Fts3Table *p, Blob *pHint){
 }
 
 /*
-** Load an incr-merge hint from the database. The incr-merge hint, if one 
+** Load an incr-merge hint from the database. The incr-merge hint, if one
 ** exists, is stored in the rowid==1 row of the %_stat table.
 **
 ** If successful, populate blob *pHint with the value read from the %_stat
@@ -162228,7 +162228,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintLoad(Fts3Table *p, Blob *pHint){
 /*
 ** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is a no-op.
 ** Otherwise, append an entry to the hint stored in blob *pHint. Each entry
-** consists of two varints, the absolute level number of the input segments 
+** consists of two varints, the absolute level number of the input segments
 ** and the number of input segments.
 **
 ** If successful, leave *pRc set to SQLITE_OK and return. If an error occurs,
@@ -162249,7 +162249,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeHintPush(
 
 /*
 ** Read the last entry (most recently pushed) from the hint blob *pHint
-** and then remove the entry. Write the two values read to *piAbsLevel and 
+** and then remove the entry. Write the two values read to *piAbsLevel and
 ** *pnInput before returning.
 **
 ** If no error occurs, return SQLITE_OK. If the hint blob in *pHint does
@@ -162275,10 +162275,10 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintPop(Blob *pHint, i64 *piAbsLevel, int *pnInput){
 /*
 ** Attempt an incremental merge that writes nMerge leaf blocks.
 **
-** Incremental merges happen nMin segments at a time. The segments 
-** to be merged are the nMin oldest segments (the ones with the smallest 
-** values for the _segdir.idx field) in the highest level that contains 
-** at least nMin segments. Multiple merges might occur in an attempt to 
+** Incremental merges happen nMin segments at a time. The segments
+** to be merged are the nMin oldest segments (the ones with the smallest
+** values for the _segdir.idx field) in the highest level that contains
+** at least nMin segments. Multiple merges might occur in an attempt to
 ** write the quota of nMerge leaf blocks.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
@@ -162309,7 +162309,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
     /* Search the %_segdir table for the absolute level with the smallest
     ** relative level number that contains at least nMin segments, if any.
     ** If one is found, set iAbsLevel to the absolute level number and
-    ** nSeg to nMin. If no level with at least nMin segments can be found, 
+    ** nSeg to nMin. If no level with at least nMin segments can be found,
     ** set nSeg to -1.
     */
     rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_FIND_MERGE_LEVEL, &pFindLevel, 0);
@@ -162325,7 +162325,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
 
     /* If the hint read from the %_stat table is not empty, check if the
     ** last entry in it specifies a relative level smaller than or equal
-    ** to the level identified by the block above (if any). If so, this 
+    ** to the level identified by the block above (if any). If so, this
     ** iteration of the loop will work on merging at the hinted level.
     */
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && hint.n ){
@@ -162351,11 +162351,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
     ** Exit early in this case.  */
     if( nSeg<0 ) break;
 
-    /* Open a cursor to iterate through the contents of the oldest nSeg 
-    ** indexes of absolute level iAbsLevel. If this cursor is opened using 
+    /* Open a cursor to iterate through the contents of the oldest nSeg
+    ** indexes of absolute level iAbsLevel. If this cursor is opened using
     ** the 'hint' parameters, it is possible that there are less than nSeg
     ** segments available in level iAbsLevel. In this case, no work is
-    ** done on iAbsLevel - fall through to the next iteration of the loop 
+    ** done on iAbsLevel - fall through to the next iteration of the loop
     ** to start work on some other level.  */
     memset(pWriter, 0, nAlloc);
     pFilter->flags = FTS3_SEGMENT_REQUIRE_POS;
@@ -162434,7 +162434,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
 ** the integer.
 **
 ** This function used for parameters to merge= and incrmerge=
-** commands. 
+** commands.
 */
 static int fts3Getint(const char **pz){
   const char *z = *pz;
@@ -162625,7 +162625,7 @@ static u64 fts3ChecksumIndex(
 ** to true and return SQLITE_OK. Or if the contents do not match, set *pbOk
 ** to false before returning.
 **
-** If an error occurs (e.g. an OOM or IO error), return an SQLite error 
+** If an error occurs (e.g. an OOM or IO error), return an SQLite error
 ** code. The final value of *pbOk is undefined in this case.
 */
 static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
@@ -162656,7 +162656,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
     sqlite3_tokenizer_module const *pModule = p->pTokenizer->pModule;
     sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;
     char *zSql;
-   
+
     zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT %s" , p->zReadExprlist);
     if( !zSql ){
       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
@@ -162716,7 +162716,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
 ** the FTS index are correct, return SQLITE_OK. Or, if the contents of the
 ** FTS index are incorrect, return SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB.
 **
-** Or, if an error (e.g. an OOM or IO error) occurs, return an SQLite 
+** Or, if an error (e.g. an OOM or IO error) occurs, return an SQLite
 ** error code.
 **
 ** The integrity-check works as follows. For each token and indexed token
@@ -162725,7 +162725,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
 **
 **     + The index number (0 for the main index, 1 for the first prefix
 **       index etc.),
-**     + The token (or token prefix) text itself, 
+**     + The token (or token prefix) text itself,
 **     + The language-id of the row it appears in,
 **     + The docid of the row it appears in,
 **     + The column it appears in, and
@@ -162736,7 +162736,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
 **
 ** The integrity-check code calculates the same checksum in two ways:
 **
-**     1. By scanning the contents of the FTS index, and 
+**     1. By scanning the contents of the FTS index, and
 **     2. By scanning and tokenizing the content table.
 **
 ** If the two checksums are identical, the integrity-check is deemed to have
@@ -162757,7 +162757,7 @@ static int fts3DoIntegrityCheck(
 **
 **   "INSERT INTO tbl(tbl) VALUES(<expr>)"
 **
-** Argument pVal contains the result of <expr>. Currently the only 
+** Argument pVal contains the result of <expr>. Currently the only
 ** meaningful value to insert is the text 'optimize'.
 */
 static int fts3SpecialInsert(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_value *pVal){
@@ -162809,7 +162809,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Free all entries in the pCsr->pDeffered list. Entries are added to 
+** Free all entries in the pCsr->pDeffered list. Entries are added to
 ** this list using sqlite3Fts3DeferToken().
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredTokens(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
@@ -162837,14 +162837,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3CacheDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
     int i;                        /* Used to iterate through table columns */
     sqlite3_int64 iDocid;         /* Docid of the row pCsr points to */
     Fts3DeferredToken *pDef;      /* Used to iterate through deferred tokens */
-  
+
     Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table *)pCsr->base.pVtab;
     sqlite3_tokenizer *pT = p->pTokenizer;
     sqlite3_tokenizer_module const *pModule = pT->pModule;
-   
+
     assert( pCsr->isRequireSeek==0 );
     iDocid = sqlite3_column_int64(pCsr->pStmt, 0);
-  
+
     for(i=0; i<p->nColumn && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){
       if( p->abNotindexed[i]==0 ){
         const char *zText = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, i+1);
@@ -162885,8 +162885,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3CacheDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
 }
 
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferredTokenList(
-  Fts3DeferredToken *p, 
-  char **ppData, 
+  Fts3DeferredToken *p,
+  char **ppData,
   int *pnData
 ){
   char *pRet;
@@ -162906,7 +162906,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferredTokenList(
   nSkip = sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(p->pList->aData, &dummy);
   *pnData = p->pList->nData - nSkip;
   *ppData = pRet;
-  
+
   memcpy(pRet, &p->pList->aData[nSkip], *pnData);
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
@@ -162926,7 +162926,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferToken(
   }
   memset(pDeferred, 0, sizeof(*pDeferred));
   pDeferred->pToken = pToken;
-  pDeferred->pNext = pCsr->pDeferred; 
+  pDeferred->pNext = pCsr->pDeferred;
   pDeferred->iCol = iCol;
   pCsr->pDeferred = pDeferred;
 
@@ -162943,8 +162943,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferToken(
 ** of subsiduary data structures accordingly.
 */
 static int fts3DeleteByRowid(
-  Fts3Table *p, 
-  sqlite3_value *pRowid, 
+  Fts3Table *p,
+  sqlite3_value *pRowid,
   int *pnChng,                    /* IN/OUT: Decrement if row is deleted */
   u32 *aSzDel
 ){
@@ -162982,14 +162982,14 @@ static int fts3DeleteByRowid(
 ** This function does the work for the xUpdate method of FTS3 virtual
 ** tables. The schema of the virtual table being:
 **
-**     CREATE TABLE <table name>( 
+**     CREATE TABLE <table name>(
 **       <user columns>,
-**       <table name> HIDDEN, 
-**       docid HIDDEN, 
+**       <table name> HIDDEN,
+**       docid HIDDEN,
 **       <langid> HIDDEN
 **     );
 **
-** 
+**
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab,            /* FTS3 vtab object */
@@ -163010,7 +163010,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
   assert( p->bHasStat==0 || p->bHasStat==1 );
 
   assert( p->pSegments==0 );
-  assert( 
+  assert(
       nArg==1                     /* DELETE operations */
    || nArg==(2 + p->nColumn + 3)  /* INSERT or UPDATE operations */
   );
@@ -163019,9 +163019,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
   **
   **   INSERT INTO xyz(xyz) VALUES('command');
   */
-  if( nArg>1 
-   && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL 
-   && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[p->nColumn+2])!=SQLITE_NULL 
+  if( nArg>1
+   && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL
+   && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[p->nColumn+2])!=SQLITE_NULL
   ){
     rc = fts3SpecialInsert(p, apVal[p->nColumn+2]);
     goto update_out;
@@ -163060,24 +163060,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
       pNewRowid = apVal[1];
     }
 
-    if( sqlite3_value_type(pNewRowid)!=SQLITE_NULL && ( 
+    if( sqlite3_value_type(pNewRowid)!=SQLITE_NULL && (
         sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL
      || sqlite3_value_int64(apVal[0])!=sqlite3_value_int64(pNewRowid)
     )){
       /* The new rowid is not NULL (in this case the rowid will be
-      ** automatically assigned and there is no chance of a conflict), and 
+      ** automatically assigned and there is no chance of a conflict), and
       ** the statement is either an INSERT or an UPDATE that modifies the
       ** rowid column. So if the conflict mode is REPLACE, then delete any
-      ** existing row with rowid=pNewRowid. 
+      ** existing row with rowid=pNewRowid.
       **
-      ** Or, if the conflict mode is not REPLACE, insert the new record into 
+      ** Or, if the conflict mode is not REPLACE, insert the new record into
       ** the %_content table. If we hit the duplicate rowid constraint (or any
       ** other error) while doing so, return immediately.
       **
       ** This branch may also run if pNewRowid contains a value that cannot
-      ** be losslessly converted to an integer. In this case, the eventual 
+      ** be losslessly converted to an integer. In this case, the eventual
       ** call to fts3InsertData() (either just below or further on in this
-      ** function) will return SQLITE_MISMATCH. If fts3DeleteByRowid is 
+      ** function) will return SQLITE_MISMATCH. If fts3DeleteByRowid is
       ** invoked, it will delete zero rows (since no row will have
       ** docid=$pNewRowid if $pNewRowid is not an integer value).
       */
@@ -163099,7 +163099,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
     rc = fts3DeleteByRowid(p, apVal[0], &nChng, aSzDel);
     isRemove = 1;
   }
-  
+
   /* If this is an INSERT or UPDATE operation, insert the new record. */
   if( nArg>1 && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     int iLangid = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[2 + p->nColumn + 2]);
@@ -163132,10 +163132,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Flush any data in the pending-terms hash table to disk. If successful,
-** merge all segments in the database (including the new segment, if 
-** there was any data to flush) into a single segment. 
+** merge all segments in the database (including the new segment, if
+** there was any data to flush) into a single segment.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Optimize(Fts3Table *p){
   int rc;
@@ -163191,7 +163191,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Optimize(Fts3Table *p){
 #define FTS3_MATCHINFO_LHITS_BM  'b'        /* nCol*nPhrase values */
 
 /*
-** The default value for the second argument to matchinfo(). 
+** The default value for the second argument to matchinfo().
 */
 #define FTS3_MATCHINFO_DEFAULT   "pcx"
 
@@ -163208,7 +163208,7 @@ struct LoadDoclistCtx {
 };
 
 /*
-** The following types are used as part of the implementation of the 
+** The following types are used as part of the implementation of the
 ** fts3BestSnippet() routine.
 */
 typedef struct SnippetIter SnippetIter;
@@ -163241,7 +163241,7 @@ struct SnippetFragment {
 };
 
 /*
-** This type is used as an fts3ExprIterate() context object while 
+** This type is used as an fts3ExprIterate() context object while
 ** accumulating the data returned by the matchinfo() function.
 */
 typedef struct MatchInfo MatchInfo;
@@ -163310,8 +163310,8 @@ static MatchinfoBuffer *fts3MIBufferNew(int nElem, const char *zMatchinfo){
 static void fts3MIBufferFree(void *p){
   MatchinfoBuffer *pBuf = (MatchinfoBuffer*)((u8*)p - ((u32*)p)[-1]);
 
-  assert( (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[1] 
-       || (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[pBuf->nElem+2] 
+  assert( (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[1]
+       || (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[pBuf->nElem+2]
   );
   if( (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[1] ){
     pBuf->aRef[1] = 0;
@@ -163367,7 +163367,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3MIBufferFree(MatchinfoBuffer *p){
   }
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** End of MatchinfoBuffer code.
 *************************************************************************/
 
@@ -163428,7 +163428,7 @@ static int fts3ExprIterate2(
 ** are part of a sub-tree that is the right-hand-side of a NOT operator.
 ** For each phrase node found, the supplied callback function is invoked.
 **
-** If the callback function returns anything other than SQLITE_OK, 
+** If the callback function returns anything other than SQLITE_OK,
 ** the iteration is abandoned and the error code returned immediately.
 ** Otherwise, SQLITE_OK is returned after a callback has been made for
 ** all eligible phrase nodes.
@@ -163463,11 +163463,11 @@ static int fts3ExprLoadDoclistsCb(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){
 
 /*
 ** Load the doclists for each phrase in the query associated with FTS3 cursor
-** pCsr. 
+** pCsr.
 **
-** If pnPhrase is not NULL, then *pnPhrase is set to the number of matchable 
-** phrases in the expression (all phrases except those directly or 
-** indirectly descended from the right-hand-side of a NOT operator). If 
+** If pnPhrase is not NULL, then *pnPhrase is set to the number of matchable
+** phrases in the expression (all phrases except those directly or
+** indirectly descended from the right-hand-side of a NOT operator). If
 ** pnToken is not NULL, then it is set to the number of tokens in all
 ** matchable phrases of the expression.
 */
@@ -163497,7 +163497,7 @@ static int fts3ExprPhraseCount(Fts3Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Advance the position list iterator specified by the first two 
+** Advance the position list iterator specified by the first two
 ** arguments so that it points to the first element with a value greater
 ** than or equal to parameter iNext.
 */
@@ -163566,7 +163566,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetNextCandidate(SnippetIter *pIter){
 }
 
 /*
-** Retrieve information about the current candidate snippet of snippet 
+** Retrieve information about the current candidate snippet of snippet
 ** iterator pIter.
 */
 static void fts3SnippetDetails(
@@ -163642,7 +163642,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetFindPositions(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){
     pPhrase->iTail = iFirst;
   }else{
     assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (
-       pPhrase->pList==0 && pPhrase->pHead==0 && pPhrase->pTail==0 
+       pPhrase->pList==0 && pPhrase->pHead==0 && pPhrase->pTail==0
     ));
   }
 
@@ -163650,14 +163650,14 @@ static int fts3SnippetFindPositions(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){
 }
 
 /*
-** Select the fragment of text consisting of nFragment contiguous tokens 
+** Select the fragment of text consisting of nFragment contiguous tokens
 ** from column iCol that represent the "best" snippet. The best snippet
 ** is the snippet with the highest score, where scores are calculated
 ** by adding:
 **
 **   (a) +1 point for each occurrence of a matchable phrase in the snippet.
 **
-**   (b) +1000 points for the first occurrence of each matchable phrase in 
+**   (b) +1000 points for the first occurrence of each matchable phrase in
 **       the snippet for which the corresponding mCovered bit is not set.
 **
 ** The selected snippet parameters are stored in structure *pFragment before
@@ -163718,7 +163718,7 @@ static int fts3BestSnippet(
       }
     }
 
-    /* Loop through all candidate snippets. Store the best snippet in 
+    /* Loop through all candidate snippets. Store the best snippet in
      ** *pFragment. Store its associated 'score' in iBestScore.
      */
     pFragment->iCol = iCol;
@@ -163790,8 +163790,8 @@ static int fts3StringAppend(
 **
 **     ........X.....X
 **
-** This function "shifts" the beginning of the snippet forward in the 
-** document so that there are approximately the same number of 
+** This function "shifts" the beginning of the snippet forward in the
+** document so that there are approximately the same number of
 ** non-highlighted terms to the right of the final highlighted term as there
 ** are to the left of the first highlighted term. For example, to this:
 **
@@ -163799,8 +163799,8 @@ static int fts3StringAppend(
 **
 ** This is done as part of extracting the snippet text, not when selecting
 ** the snippet. Snippet selection is done based on doclists only, so there
-** is no way for fts3BestSnippet() to know whether or not the document 
-** actually contains terms that follow the final highlighted term. 
+** is no way for fts3BestSnippet() to know whether or not the document
+** actually contains terms that follow the final highlighted term.
 */
 static int fts3SnippetShift(
   Fts3Table *pTab,                /* FTS3 table snippet comes from */
@@ -163889,7 +163889,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText(
   int iCol = pFragment->iCol+1;   /* Query column to extract text from */
   sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pMod; /* Tokenizer module methods object */
   sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pC;   /* Tokenizer cursor open on zDoc/nDoc */
-  
+
   zDoc = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, iCol);
   if( zDoc==0 ){
     if( sqlite3_column_type(pCsr->pStmt, iCol)!=SQLITE_NULL ){
@@ -163929,7 +163929,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText(
       if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
         /* Special case - the last token of the snippet is also the last token
         ** of the column. Append any punctuation that occurred between the end
-        ** of the previous token and the end of the document to the output. 
+        ** of the previous token and the end of the document to the output.
         ** Then break out of the loop. */
         rc = fts3StringAppend(pOut, &zDoc[iEnd], -1);
       }
@@ -163946,7 +163946,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText(
 
       /* Now that the shift has been done, check if the initial "..." are
       ** required. They are required if (a) this is not the first fragment,
-      ** or (b) this fragment does not begin at position 0 of its column. 
+      ** or (b) this fragment does not begin at position 0 of its column.
       */
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         if( iPos>0 || iFragment>0 ){
@@ -163982,8 +163982,8 @@ static int fts3SnippetText(
 
 
 /*
-** This function is used to count the entries in a column-list (a 
-** delta-encoded list of term offsets within a single column of a single 
+** This function is used to count the entries in a column-list (a
+** delta-encoded list of term offsets within a single column of a single
 ** row). When this function is called, *ppCollist should point to the
 ** beginning of the first varint in the column-list (the varint that
 ** contains the position of the first matching term in the column data).
@@ -164065,11 +164065,11 @@ static void fts3ExprLHitGather(
 
 /*
 ** fts3ExprIterate() callback used to collect the "global" matchinfo stats
-** for a single query. 
+** for a single query.
 **
 ** fts3ExprIterate() callback to load the 'global' elements of a
-** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS matchinfo array. The global stats are those elements 
-** of the matchinfo array that are constant for all rows returned by the 
+** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS matchinfo array. The global stats are those elements
+** of the matchinfo array that are constant for all rows returned by the
 ** current query.
 **
 ** Argument pCtx is actually a pointer to a struct of type MatchInfo. This
@@ -164085,7 +164085,7 @@ static void fts3ExprLHitGather(
 ** at least one instance of phrase iPhrase.
 **
 ** If the phrase pExpr consists entirely of deferred tokens, then all X and
-** Y values are set to nDoc, where nDoc is the number of documents in the 
+** Y values are set to nDoc, where nDoc is the number of documents in the
 ** file system. This is done because the full-text index doclist is required
 ** to calculate these values properly, and the full-text index doclist is
 ** not available for deferred tokens.
@@ -164103,7 +164103,7 @@ static int fts3ExprGlobalHitsCb(
 
 /*
 ** fts3ExprIterate() callback used to collect the "local" part of the
-** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS array. The local stats are those elements of the 
+** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS array. The local stats are those elements of the
 ** array that are different for each row returned by the query.
 */
 static int fts3ExprLocalHitsCb(
@@ -164130,7 +164130,7 @@ static int fts3ExprLocalHitsCb(
 }
 
 static int fts3MatchinfoCheck(
-  Fts3Table *pTab, 
+  Fts3Table *pTab,
   char cArg,
   char **pzErr
 ){
@@ -164155,8 +164155,8 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoSize(MatchInfo *pInfo, char cArg){
 
   switch( cArg ){
     case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NDOC:
-    case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE: 
-    case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL: 
+    case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE:
+    case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL:
       nVal = 1;
       break;
 
@@ -164210,7 +164210,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoSelectDoctotal(
 }
 
 /*
-** An instance of the following structure is used to store state while 
+** An instance of the following structure is used to store state while
 ** iterating through a multi-column position-list corresponding to the
 ** hits for a single phrase on a single row in order to calculate the
 ** values for a matchinfo() FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS request.
@@ -164223,7 +164223,7 @@ struct LcsIterator {
   int iPos;                       /* Current position */
 };
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** If LcsIterator.iCol is set to the following value, the iterator has
 ** finished iterating through all offsets for all columns.
 */
@@ -164260,16 +164260,16 @@ static int fts3LcsIteratorAdvance(LcsIterator *pIter){
   pIter->pRead = pRead;
   return rc;
 }
-  
+
 /*
-** This function implements the FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS matchinfo() flag. 
+** This function implements the FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS matchinfo() flag.
 **
 ** If the call is successful, the longest-common-substring lengths for each
-** column are written into the first nCol elements of the pInfo->aMatchinfo[] 
+** column are written into the first nCol elements of the pInfo->aMatchinfo[]
 ** array before returning. SQLITE_OK is returned in this case.
 **
 ** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the
-** data written to the first nCol elements of pInfo->aMatchinfo[] is 
+** data written to the first nCol elements of pInfo->aMatchinfo[] is
 ** undefined.
 */
 static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){
@@ -164341,7 +164341,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){
 
 /*
 ** Populate the buffer pInfo->aMatchinfo[] with an array of integers to
-** be returned by the matchinfo() function. Argument zArg contains the 
+** be returned by the matchinfo() function. Argument zArg contains the
 ** format string passed as the second argument to matchinfo (or the
 ** default value "pcx" if no second argument was specified). The format
 ** string has already been validated and the pInfo->aMatchinfo[] array
@@ -164352,7 +164352,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){
 ** rows (i.e. FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE, NCOL, NDOC, AVGLENGTH and part of HITS)
 ** have already been populated.
 **
-** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error 
+** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error
 ** occurs. If a value other than SQLITE_OK is returned, the state the
 ** pInfo->aMatchinfo[] buffer is left in is undefined.
 */
@@ -164377,7 +164377,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues(
       case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL:
         if( bGlobal ) pInfo->aMatchinfo[0] = pInfo->nCol;
         break;
-        
+
       case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NDOC:
         if( bGlobal ){
           sqlite3_int64 nDoc = 0;
@@ -164386,7 +164386,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues(
         }
         break;
 
-      case FTS3_MATCHINFO_AVGLENGTH: 
+      case FTS3_MATCHINFO_AVGLENGTH:
         if( bGlobal ){
           sqlite3_int64 nDoc;     /* Number of rows in table */
           const char *a;          /* Aggregate column length array */
@@ -164465,7 +164465,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues(
 
 
 /*
-** Populate pCsr->aMatchinfo[] with data for the current row. The 
+** Populate pCsr->aMatchinfo[] with data for the current row. The
 ** 'matchinfo' data is an array of 32-bit unsigned integers (C type u32).
 */
 static void fts3GetMatchinfo(
@@ -164485,8 +164485,8 @@ static void fts3GetMatchinfo(
   sInfo.pCursor = pCsr;
   sInfo.nCol = pTab->nColumn;
 
-  /* If there is cached matchinfo() data, but the format string for the 
-  ** cache does not match the format string for this request, discard 
+  /* If there is cached matchinfo() data, but the format string for the
+  ** cache does not match the format string for this request, discard
   ** the cached data. */
   if( pCsr->pMIBuffer && strcmp(pCsr->pMIBuffer->zMatchinfo, zArg) ){
     sqlite3Fts3MIBufferFree(pCsr->pMIBuffer);
@@ -164494,7 +164494,7 @@ static void fts3GetMatchinfo(
   }
 
   /* If Fts3Cursor.pMIBuffer is NULL, then this is the first time the
-  ** matchinfo function has been called for this query. In this case 
+  ** matchinfo function has been called for this query. In this case
   ** allocate the array used to accumulate the matchinfo data and
   ** initialize those elements that are constant for every row.
   */
@@ -164569,7 +164569,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Snippet(
 
   /* The returned text includes up to four fragments of text extracted from
   ** the data in the current row. The first iteration of the for(...) loop
-  ** below attempts to locate a single fragment of text nToken tokens in 
+  ** below attempts to locate a single fragment of text nToken tokens in
   ** size that contains at least one instance of all phrases in the query
   ** expression that appear in the current row. If such a fragment of text
   ** cannot be found, the second iteration of the loop attempts to locate
@@ -164636,7 +164636,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Snippet(
   assert( nFToken>0 );
 
   for(i=0; i<nSnippet && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){
-    rc = fts3SnippetText(pCsr, &aSnippet[i], 
+    rc = fts3SnippetText(pCsr, &aSnippet[i],
         i, (i==nSnippet-1), nFToken, zStart, zEnd, zEllipsis, &res
     );
   }
@@ -164734,7 +164734,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets(
   sCtx.iDocid = pCsr->iPrevId;
   sCtx.pCsr = pCsr;
 
-  /* Loop through the table columns, appending offset information to 
+  /* Loop through the table columns, appending offset information to
   ** string-buffer res for each column.
   */
   for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nColumn; iCol++){
@@ -164747,7 +164747,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets(
     const char *zDoc;
     int nDoc;
 
-    /* Initialize the contents of sCtx.aTerm[] for column iCol. There is 
+    /* Initialize the contents of sCtx.aTerm[] for column iCol. There is
     ** no way that this operation can fail, so the return code from
     ** fts3ExprIterate() can be discarded.
     */
@@ -164755,11 +164755,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets(
     sCtx.iTerm = 0;
     (void)fts3ExprIterate(pCsr->pExpr, fts3ExprTermOffsetInit, (void*)&sCtx);
 
-    /* Retreive the text stored in column iCol. If an SQL NULL is stored 
+    /* Retreive the text stored in column iCol. If an SQL NULL is stored
     ** in column iCol, jump immediately to the next iteration of the loop.
     ** If an OOM occurs while retrieving the data (this can happen if SQLite
-    ** needs to transform the data from utf-16 to utf-8), return SQLITE_NOMEM 
-    ** to the caller. 
+    ** needs to transform the data from utf-16 to utf-8), return SQLITE_NOMEM
+    ** to the caller.
     */
     zDoc = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, iCol+1);
     nDoc = sqlite3_column_bytes(pCsr->pStmt, iCol+1);
@@ -164806,7 +164806,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets(
         }
         if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
           char aBuffer[64];
-          sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(aBuffer), aBuffer, 
+          sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(aBuffer), aBuffer,
               "%d %d %d %d ", iCol, pTerm-sCtx.aTerm, iStart, iEnd-iStart
           );
           rc = fts3StringAppend(&res, aBuffer, -1);
@@ -164987,7 +164987,7 @@ static int unicodeDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
 **
 ** For each codepoint in the zIn/nIn string, this function checks if the
 ** sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum() function already returns the desired result.
-** If so, no action is taken. Otherwise, the codepoint is added to the 
+** If so, no action is taken. Otherwise, the codepoint is added to the
 ** unicode_tokenizer.aiException[] array. For the purposes of tokenization,
 ** the return value of sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum() is inverted for all
 ** codepoints in the aiException[] array.
@@ -165013,8 +165013,8 @@ static int unicodeAddExceptions(
   while( z<zTerm ){
     READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
     assert( (sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum((int)iCode) & 0xFFFFFFFE)==0 );
-    if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum((int)iCode)!=bAlnum 
-     && sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic((int)iCode)==0 
+    if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum((int)iCode)!=bAlnum
+     && sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic((int)iCode)==0
     ){
       nEntry++;
     }
@@ -165031,7 +165031,7 @@ static int unicodeAddExceptions(
     z = (const unsigned char *)zIn;
     while( z<zTerm ){
       READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
-      if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum((int)iCode)!=bAlnum 
+      if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum((int)iCode)!=bAlnum
        && sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic((int)iCode)==0
       ){
         int i, j;
@@ -165131,7 +165131,7 @@ static int unicodeCreate(
 /*
 ** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string.  The input
 ** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1].  A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in 
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
 ** *ppCursor.
 */
 static int unicodeOpen(
@@ -165195,7 +165195,7 @@ static int unicodeNext(
   const unsigned char *zTerm = &pCsr->aInput[pCsr->nInput];
 
   /* Scan past any delimiter characters before the start of the next token.
-  ** Return SQLITE_DONE early if this takes us all the way to the end of 
+  ** Return SQLITE_DONE early if this takes us all the way to the end of
   ** the input.  */
   while( z<zTerm ){
     READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
@@ -165227,7 +165227,7 @@ static int unicodeNext(
     /* If the cursor is not at EOF, read the next character */
     if( z>=zTerm ) break;
     READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
-  }while( unicodeIsAlnum(p, (int)iCode) 
+  }while( unicodeIsAlnum(p, (int)iCode)
        || sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic((int)iCode)
   );
 
@@ -165242,7 +165242,7 @@ static int unicodeNext(
 }
 
 /*
-** Set *ppModule to a pointer to the sqlite3_tokenizer_module 
+** Set *ppModule to a pointer to the sqlite3_tokenizer_module
 ** structure for the unicode tokenizer.
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3UnicodeTokenizer(sqlite3_tokenizer_module const **ppModule){
@@ -165297,11 +165297,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(int c){
   ** range of unicode codepoints that are not either letters or numbers (i.e.
   ** codepoints for which this function should return 0).
   **
-  ** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first 
+  ** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first
   ** codepoint in the range. The least significant 10 bits are used to store
-  ** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value 
-  ** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint 
-  ** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints 
+  ** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value
+  ** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint
+  ** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints
   ** using this format.
   */
   static const unsigned int aEntry[] = {
@@ -165426,30 +165426,30 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(int c){
 */
 static int remove_diacritic(int c){
   unsigned short aDia[] = {
-        0,  1797,  1848,  1859,  1891,  1928,  1940,  1995, 
-     2024,  2040,  2060,  2110,  2168,  2206,  2264,  2286, 
-     2344,  2383,  2472,  2488,  2516,  2596,  2668,  2732, 
-     2782,  2842,  2894,  2954,  2984,  3000,  3028,  3336, 
-     3456,  3696,  3712,  3728,  3744,  3896,  3912,  3928, 
-     3968,  4008,  4040,  4106,  4138,  4170,  4202,  4234, 
-     4266,  4296,  4312,  4344,  4408,  4424,  4472,  4504, 
-     6148,  6198,  6264,  6280,  6360,  6429,  6505,  6529, 
-    61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726, 
-    61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122, 
-    62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536, 
-    62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730, 
-    62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390, 
+        0,  1797,  1848,  1859,  1891,  1928,  1940,  1995,
+     2024,  2040,  2060,  2110,  2168,  2206,  2264,  2286,
+     2344,  2383,  2472,  2488,  2516,  2596,  2668,  2732,
+     2782,  2842,  2894,  2954,  2984,  3000,  3028,  3336,
+     3456,  3696,  3712,  3728,  3744,  3896,  3912,  3928,
+     3968,  4008,  4040,  4106,  4138,  4170,  4202,  4234,
+     4266,  4296,  4312,  4344,  4408,  4424,  4472,  4504,
+     6148,  6198,  6264,  6280,  6360,  6429,  6505,  6529,
+    61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726,
+    61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122,
+    62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536,
+    62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730,
+    62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390,
   };
   char aChar[] = {
-    '\0', 'a',  'c',  'e',  'i',  'n',  'o',  'u',  'y',  'y',  'a',  'c',  
-    'd',  'e',  'e',  'g',  'h',  'i',  'j',  'k',  'l',  'n',  'o',  'r',  
-    's',  't',  'u',  'u',  'w',  'y',  'z',  'o',  'u',  'a',  'i',  'o',  
-    'u',  'g',  'k',  'o',  'j',  'g',  'n',  'a',  'e',  'i',  'o',  'r',  
-    'u',  's',  't',  'h',  'a',  'e',  'o',  'y',  '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 
-    '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a',  'b',  'd',  'd',  'e',  'f',  'g',  'h',  
-    'h',  'i',  'k',  'l',  'l',  'm',  'n',  'p',  'r',  'r',  's',  't',  
-    'u',  'v',  'w',  'w',  'x',  'y',  'z',  'h',  't',  'w',  'y',  'a',  
-    'e',  'i',  'o',  'u',  'y',  
+    '\0', 'a',  'c',  'e',  'i',  'n',  'o',  'u',  'y',  'y',  'a',  'c',
+    'd',  'e',  'e',  'g',  'h',  'i',  'j',  'k',  'l',  'n',  'o',  'r',
+    's',  't',  'u',  'u',  'w',  'y',  'z',  'o',  'u',  'a',  'i',  'o',
+    'u',  'g',  'k',  'o',  'j',  'g',  'n',  'a',  'e',  'i',  'o',  'r',
+    'u',  's',  't',  'h',  'a',  'e',  'o',  'y',  '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0',
+    '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a',  'b',  'd',  'd',  'e',  'f',  'g',  'h',
+    'h',  'i',  'k',  'l',  'l',  'm',  'n',  'p',  'r',  'r',  's',  't',
+    'u',  'v',  'w',  'w',  'x',  'y',  'z',  'h',  't',  'w',  'y',  'a',
+    'e',  'i',  'o',  'u',  'y',
   };
 
   unsigned int key = (((unsigned int)c)<<3) | 0x00000007;
@@ -165570,19 +165570,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
     {42802, 1, 62},        {42873, 1, 4},         {42877, 76, 1},
     {42878, 1, 10},        {42891, 0, 1},         {42893, 74, 1},
     {42896, 1, 4},         {42912, 1, 10},        {42922, 72, 1},
-    {65313, 14, 26},       
+    {65313, 14, 26},
   };
   static const unsigned short aiOff[] = {
-   1,     2,     8,     15,    16,    26,    28,    32,    
-   37,    38,    40,    48,    63,    64,    69,    71,    
-   79,    80,    116,   202,   203,   205,   206,   207,   
-   209,   210,   211,   213,   214,   217,   218,   219,   
-   775,   7264,  10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721, 
-   54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274, 
-   57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406, 
-   65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462, 
-   65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511, 
-   65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529, 
+   1,     2,     8,     15,    16,    26,    28,    32,
+   37,    38,    40,    48,    63,    64,    69,    71,
+   79,    80,    116,   202,   203,   205,   206,   207,
+   209,   210,   211,   213,   214,   217,   218,   219,
+   775,   7264,  10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721,
+   54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274,
+   57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406,
+   65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462,
+   65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511,
+   65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529,
   };
 
   int ret = c;
@@ -165618,7 +165618,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
 
     if( bRemoveDiacritic ) ret = remove_diacritic(ret);
   }
-  
+
   else if( c>=66560 && c<66600 ){
     ret = c + 40;
   }
@@ -165649,7 +165649,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
 ** Database Format of R-Tree Tables
 ** --------------------------------
 **
-** The data structure for a single virtual r-tree table is stored in three 
+** The data structure for a single virtual r-tree table is stored in three
 ** native SQLite tables declared as follows. In each case, the '%' character
 ** in the table name is replaced with the user-supplied name of the r-tree
 ** table.
@@ -165674,7 +165674,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
 **      of the node contain the tree depth as a big-endian integer.
 **      For non-root nodes, the first 2 bytes are left unused.
 **
-**   2. The next 2 bytes contain the number of entries currently 
+**   2. The next 2 bytes contain the number of entries currently
 **      stored in the node.
 **
 **   3. The remainder of the node contains the node entries. Each entry
@@ -165726,7 +165726,7 @@ typedef struct RtreeSearchPoint RtreeSearchPoint;
 #define RTREE_MAX_DIMENSIONS 5
 
 /* Size of hash table Rtree.aHash. This hash table is not expected to
-** ever contain very many entries, so a fixed number of buckets is 
+** ever contain very many entries, so a fixed number of buckets is
 ** used.
 */
 #define HASHSIZE 97
@@ -165735,13 +165735,13 @@ typedef struct RtreeSearchPoint RtreeSearchPoint;
 ** the number of rows in the virtual table to calculate the costs of
 ** various strategies. If possible, this estimate is loaded from the
 ** sqlite_stat1 table (with RTREE_MIN_ROWEST as a hard-coded minimum).
-** Otherwise, if no sqlite_stat1 entry is available, use 
+** Otherwise, if no sqlite_stat1 entry is available, use
 ** RTREE_DEFAULT_ROWEST.
 */
 #define RTREE_DEFAULT_ROWEST 1048576
 #define RTREE_MIN_ROWEST         100
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** An rtree virtual-table object.
 */
 struct Rtree {
@@ -165755,14 +165755,14 @@ struct Rtree {
   u8 inWrTrans;               /* True if inside write transaction */
   int iDepth;                 /* Current depth of the r-tree structure */
   char *zDb;                  /* Name of database containing r-tree table */
-  char *zName;                /* Name of r-tree table */ 
+  char *zName;                /* Name of r-tree table */
   u32 nBusy;                  /* Current number of users of this structure */
   i64 nRowEst;                /* Estimated number of rows in this table */
   u32 nCursor;                /* Number of open cursors */
 
   /* List of nodes removed during a CondenseTree operation. List is
   ** linked together via the pointer normally used for hash chains -
-  ** RtreeNode.pNext. RtreeNode.iNode stores the depth of the sub-tree 
+  ** RtreeNode.pNext. RtreeNode.iNode stores the depth of the sub-tree
   ** headed by the node (leaf nodes have RtreeNode.iNode==0).
   */
   RtreeNode *pDeleted;
@@ -165785,7 +165785,7 @@ struct Rtree {
   sqlite3_stmt *pWriteParent;
   sqlite3_stmt *pDeleteParent;
 
-  RtreeNode *aHash[HASHSIZE]; /* Hash table of in-memory nodes. */ 
+  RtreeNode *aHash[HASHSIZE]; /* Hash table of in-memory nodes. */
 };
 
 /* Possible values for Rtree.eCoordType: */
@@ -165825,7 +165825,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint {
 };
 
 /*
-** The minimum number of cells allowed for a node is a third of the 
+** The minimum number of cells allowed for a node is a third of the
 ** maximum. In Gutman's notation:
 **
 **     m = M/3
@@ -165840,7 +165840,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint {
 /*
 ** The smallest possible node-size is (512-64)==448 bytes. And the largest
 ** supported cell size is 48 bytes (8 byte rowid + ten 4 byte coordinates).
-** Therefore all non-root nodes must contain at least 3 entries. Since 
+** Therefore all non-root nodes must contain at least 3 entries. Since
 ** 2^40 is greater than 2^64, an r-tree structure always has a depth of
 ** 40 or less.
 */
@@ -165854,7 +165854,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint {
 */
 #define RTREE_CACHE_SZ  5
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** An rtree cursor object.
 */
 struct RtreeCursor {
@@ -165926,7 +165926,7 @@ struct RtreeConstraint {
 #define RTREE_QUERY 0x47  /* G: New-style sqlite3_rtree_query_callback() */
 
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** An rtree structure node.
 */
 struct RtreeNode {
@@ -165941,7 +165941,7 @@ struct RtreeNode {
 /* Return the number of cells in a node  */
 #define NCELL(pNode) readInt16(&(pNode)->zData[2])
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** A single cell from a node, deserialized
 */
 struct RtreeCell {
@@ -165956,11 +165956,11 @@ struct RtreeCell {
 ** sqlite3_rtree_query_callback() and which appear on the right of MATCH
 ** operators in order to constrain a search.
 **
-** xGeom and xQueryFunc are the callback functions.  Exactly one of 
+** xGeom and xQueryFunc are the callback functions.  Exactly one of
 ** xGeom and xQueryFunc fields is non-NULL, depending on whether the
 ** SQL function was created using sqlite3_rtree_geometry_callback() or
 ** sqlite3_rtree_query_callback().
-** 
+**
 ** This object is deleted automatically by the destructor mechanism in
 ** sqlite3_create_function_v2().
 */
@@ -166061,9 +166061,9 @@ static void readCoord(u8 *p, RtreeCoord *pCoord){
   pCoord->u = *(u32*)p;
 #else
   pCoord->u = (
-    (((u32)p[0]) << 24) + 
-    (((u32)p[1]) << 16) + 
-    (((u32)p[2]) <<  8) + 
+    (((u32)p[0]) << 24) +
+    (((u32)p[1]) << 16) +
+    (((u32)p[2]) <<  8) +
     (((u32)p[3]) <<  0)
   );
 #endif
@@ -166083,13 +166083,13 @@ static i64 readInt64(u8 *p){
   return x;
 #else
   return (i64)(
-    (((u64)p[0]) << 56) + 
-    (((u64)p[1]) << 48) + 
-    (((u64)p[2]) << 40) + 
-    (((u64)p[3]) << 32) + 
-    (((u64)p[4]) << 24) + 
-    (((u64)p[5]) << 16) + 
-    (((u64)p[6]) <<  8) + 
+    (((u64)p[0]) << 56) +
+    (((u64)p[1]) << 48) +
+    (((u64)p[2]) << 40) +
+    (((u64)p[3]) << 32) +
+    (((u64)p[4]) << 24) +
+    (((u64)p[5]) << 16) +
+    (((u64)p[6]) <<  8) +
     (((u64)p[7]) <<  0)
   );
 #endif
@@ -166319,7 +166319,7 @@ static int nodeAcquire(
   }
 
   /* If no error has occurred so far, check if the "number of entries"
-  ** field on the node is too large. If so, set the return code to 
+  ** field on the node is too large. If so, set the return code to
   ** SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB.
   */
   if( pNode && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -166509,7 +166509,7 @@ static int rtreeInit(
   sqlite3 *, void *, int, const char *const*, sqlite3_vtab **, char **, int
 );
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xCreate method.
 */
 static int rtreeCreate(
@@ -166522,7 +166522,7 @@ static int rtreeCreate(
   return rtreeInit(db, pAux, argc, argv, ppVtab, pzErr, 1);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xConnect method.
 */
 static int rtreeConnect(
@@ -166564,7 +166564,7 @@ static void rtreeRelease(Rtree *pRtree){
   }
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xDisconnect method.
 */
 static int rtreeDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
@@ -166572,7 +166572,7 @@ static int rtreeDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xDestroy method.
 */
 static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
@@ -166582,7 +166582,7 @@ static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
     "DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_node';"
     "DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_rowid';"
     "DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_parent';",
-    pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, 
+    pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName,
     pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName,
     pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName
   );
@@ -166600,7 +166600,7 @@ static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xOpen method.
 */
 static int rtreeOpen(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCursor){
@@ -166639,7 +166639,7 @@ static void freeCursorConstraints(RtreeCursor *pCsr){
   }
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xClose method.
 */
 static int rtreeClose(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
@@ -166659,7 +166659,7 @@ static int rtreeClose(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
 /*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xEof method.
 **
-** Return non-zero if the cursor does not currently point to a valid 
+** Return non-zero if the cursor does not currently point to a valid
 ** record (i.e if the scan has finished), or zero otherwise.
 */
 static int rtreeEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
@@ -166715,7 +166715,7 @@ static int rtreeEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
 
 /*
 ** Check the RTree node or entry given by pCellData and p against the MATCH
-** constraint pConstraint.  
+** constraint pConstraint.
 */
 static int rtreeCallbackConstraint(
   RtreeConstraint *pConstraint,  /* The constraint to test */
@@ -166788,7 +166788,7 @@ static int rtreeCallbackConstraint(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Check the internal RTree node given by pCellData against constraint p.
 ** If this constraint cannot be satisfied by any child within the node,
 ** set *peWithin to NOT_WITHIN.
@@ -166806,7 +166806,7 @@ static void rtreeNonleafConstraint(
   */
   pCellData += 8 + 4*(p->iCoord&0xfe);
 
-  assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE 
+  assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
       || p->op==RTREE_GT || p->op==RTREE_EQ );
   assert( ((((char*)pCellData) - (char*)0)&3)==0 );  /* 4-byte aligned */
   switch( p->op ){
@@ -166846,7 +166846,7 @@ static void rtreeLeafConstraint(
 ){
   RtreeDValue xN;      /* Coordinate value converted to a double */
 
-  assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE 
+  assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
       || p->op==RTREE_GT || p->op==RTREE_EQ );
   pCellData += 8 + p->iCoord*4;
   assert( ((((char*)pCellData) - (char*)0)&3)==0 );  /* 4-byte aligned */
@@ -166862,12 +166862,12 @@ static void rtreeLeafConstraint(
 }
 
 /*
-** One of the cells in node pNode is guaranteed to have a 64-bit 
+** One of the cells in node pNode is guaranteed to have a 64-bit
 ** integer value equal to iRowid. Return the index of this cell.
 */
 static int nodeRowidIndex(
-  Rtree *pRtree, 
-  RtreeNode *pNode, 
+  Rtree *pRtree,
+  RtreeNode *pNode,
   i64 iRowid,
   int *piIndex
 ){
@@ -167008,7 +167008,7 @@ static RtreeSearchPoint *rtreeSearchPointNew(
   pFirst = rtreeSearchPointFirst(pCur);
   pCur->anQueue[iLevel]++;
   if( pFirst==0
-   || pFirst->rScore>rScore 
+   || pFirst->rScore>rScore
    || (pFirst->rScore==rScore && pFirst->iLevel>iLevel)
   ){
     if( pCur->bPoint ){
@@ -167181,7 +167181,7 @@ static int rtreeStepToLeaf(RtreeCursor *pCur){
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xNext method.
 */
 static int rtreeNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
@@ -167195,7 +167195,7 @@ static int rtreeNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xRowid method.
 */
 static int rtreeRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
@@ -167209,7 +167209,7 @@ static int rtreeRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xColumn method.
 */
 static int rtreeColumn(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur, sqlite3_context *ctx, int i){
@@ -167239,8 +167239,8 @@ static int rtreeColumn(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur, sqlite3_context *ctx, int i){
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
-** Use nodeAcquire() to obtain the leaf node containing the record with 
+/*
+** Use nodeAcquire() to obtain the leaf node containing the record with
 ** rowid iRowid. If successful, set *ppLeaf to point to the node and
 ** return SQLITE_OK. If there is no such record in the table, set
 ** *ppLeaf to 0 and return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs, set *ppLeaf
@@ -167299,11 +167299,11 @@ static int deserializeGeometry(sqlite3_value *pValue, RtreeConstraint *pCons){
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xFilter method.
 */
 static int rtreeFilter(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
   int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
   int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
@@ -167343,8 +167343,8 @@ static int rtreeFilter(
       pCsr->atEOF = 1;
     }
   }else{
-    /* Normal case - r-tree scan. Set up the RtreeCursor.aConstraint array 
-    ** with the configured constraints. 
+    /* Normal case - r-tree scan. Set up the RtreeCursor.aConstraint array
+    ** with the configured constraints.
     */
     rc = nodeAcquire(pRtree, 1, 0, &pRoot);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && argc>0 ){
@@ -167405,7 +167405,7 @@ static int rtreeFilter(
 
 /*
 ** Rtree virtual table module xBestIndex method. There are three
-** table scan strategies to choose from (in order from most to 
+** table scan strategies to choose from (in order from most to
 ** least desirable):
 **
 **   idxNum     idxStr        Strategy
@@ -167415,8 +167415,8 @@ static int rtreeFilter(
 **   ------------------------------------------------
 **
 ** If strategy 1 is used, then idxStr is not meaningful. If strategy
-** 2 is used, idxStr is formatted to contain 2 bytes for each 
-** constraint used. The first two bytes of idxStr correspond to 
+** 2 is used, idxStr is formatted to contain 2 bytes for each
+** constraint used. The first two bytes of idxStr correspond to
 ** the constraint in sqlite3_index_info.aConstraintUsage[] with
 ** (argvIndex==1) etc.
 **
@@ -167462,8 +167462,8 @@ static int rtreeBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
   for(ii=0; ii<pIdxInfo->nConstraint && iIdx<(int)(sizeof(zIdxStr)-1); ii++){
     struct sqlite3_index_constraint *p = &pIdxInfo->aConstraint[ii];
 
-    if( bMatch==0 && p->usable 
-     && p->iColumn==0 && p->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ 
+    if( bMatch==0 && p->usable
+     && p->iColumn==0 && p->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
     ){
       /* We have an equality constraint on the rowid. Use strategy 1. */
       int jj;
@@ -167476,11 +167476,11 @@ static int rtreeBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
       pIdxInfo->aConstraintUsage[jj].omit = 1;
 
       /* This strategy involves a two rowid lookups on an B-Tree structures
-      ** and then a linear search of an R-Tree node. This should be 
-      ** considered almost as quick as a direct rowid lookup (for which 
+      ** and then a linear search of an R-Tree node. This should be
+      ** considered almost as quick as a direct rowid lookup (for which
       ** sqlite uses an internal cost of 0.0). It is expected to return
       ** a single row.
-      */ 
+      */
       pIdxInfo->estimatedCost = 30.0;
       pIdxInfo->estimatedRows = 1;
       return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -167496,7 +167496,7 @@ static int rtreeBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
         case SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GE: op = RTREE_GE; break;
         default:
           assert( p->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH );
-          op = RTREE_MATCH; 
+          op = RTREE_MATCH;
           break;
       }
       zIdxStr[iIdx++] = op;
@@ -167592,8 +167592,8 @@ static int cellContains(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeCell *p1, RtreeCell *p2){
   for(ii=0; ii<pRtree->nDim2; ii+=2){
     RtreeCoord *a1 = &p1->aCoord[ii];
     RtreeCoord *a2 = &p2->aCoord[ii];
-    if( (!isInt && (a2[0].f<a1[0].f || a2[1].f>a1[1].f)) 
-     || ( isInt && (a2[0].i<a1[0].i || a2[1].i>a1[1].i)) 
+    if( (!isInt && (a2[0].f<a1[0].f || a2[1].f>a1[1].f))
+     || ( isInt && (a2[0].i<a1[0].i || a2[1].i>a1[1].i))
     ){
       return 0;
     }
@@ -167614,9 +167614,9 @@ static RtreeDValue cellGrowth(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeCell *p, RtreeCell *pCell){
 }
 
 static RtreeDValue cellOverlap(
-  Rtree *pRtree, 
-  RtreeCell *p, 
-  RtreeCell *aCell, 
+  Rtree *pRtree,
+  RtreeCell *p,
+  RtreeCell *aCell,
   int nCell
 ){
   int ii;
@@ -167725,7 +167725,7 @@ static int AdjustTree(
       cellUnion(pRtree, &cell, pCell);
       nodeOverwriteCell(pRtree, pParent, &cell, iCell);
     }
- 
+
     p = pParent;
   }
   return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -167756,7 +167756,7 @@ static int rtreeInsertCell(Rtree *, RtreeNode *, RtreeCell *, int);
 
 /*
 ** Arguments aIdx, aDistance and aSpare all point to arrays of size
-** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to 
+** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
 ** (nIdx-1) in no particular order. This function sorts the values
 ** in aIdx according to the indexed values in aDistance. For
 ** example, assuming the inputs:
@@ -167772,9 +167772,9 @@ static int rtreeInsertCell(Rtree *, RtreeNode *, RtreeCell *, int);
 ** sorting algorithm.
 */
 static void SortByDistance(
-  int *aIdx, 
-  int nIdx, 
-  RtreeDValue *aDistance, 
+  int *aIdx,
+  int nIdx,
+  RtreeDValue *aDistance,
   int *aSpare
 ){
   if( nIdx>1 ){
@@ -167828,7 +167828,7 @@ static void SortByDistance(
 
 /*
 ** Arguments aIdx, aCell and aSpare all point to arrays of size
-** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to 
+** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
 ** (nIdx-1) in no particular order. This function sorts the values
 ** in aIdx according to dimension iDim of the cells in aCell. The
 ** minimum value of dimension iDim is considered first, the
@@ -167839,10 +167839,10 @@ static void SortByDistance(
 */
 static void SortByDimension(
   Rtree *pRtree,
-  int *aIdx, 
-  int nIdx, 
-  int iDim, 
-  RtreeCell *aCell, 
+  int *aIdx,
+  int nIdx,
+  int iDim,
+  RtreeCell *aCell,
   int *aSpare
 ){
   if( nIdx>1 ){
@@ -167939,8 +167939,8 @@ static int splitNodeStartree(
     int nLeft;
 
     for(
-      nLeft=RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree); 
-      nLeft<=(nCell-RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree)); 
+      nLeft=RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree);
+      nLeft<=(nCell-RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree));
       nLeft++
     ){
       RtreeCell left;
@@ -167995,9 +167995,9 @@ static int splitNodeStartree(
 
 
 static int updateMapping(
-  Rtree *pRtree, 
-  i64 iRowid, 
-  RtreeNode *pNode, 
+  Rtree *pRtree,
+  i64 iRowid,
+  RtreeNode *pNode,
   int iHeight
 ){
   int (*xSetMapping)(Rtree *, sqlite3_int64, sqlite3_int64);
@@ -168033,7 +168033,7 @@ static int SplitNode(
   RtreeCell leftbbox;
   RtreeCell rightbbox;
 
-  /* Allocate an array and populate it with a copy of pCell and 
+  /* Allocate an array and populate it with a copy of pCell and
   ** all cells from node pLeft. Then zero the original node.
   */
   aCell = sqlite3_malloc((sizeof(RtreeCell)+sizeof(int))*(nCell+1));
@@ -168150,14 +168150,14 @@ splitnode_out:
 }
 
 /*
-** If node pLeaf is not the root of the r-tree and its pParent pointer is 
+** If node pLeaf is not the root of the r-tree and its pParent pointer is
 ** still NULL, load all ancestor nodes of pLeaf into memory and populate
 ** the pLeaf->pParent chain all the way up to the root node.
 **
 ** This operation is required when a row is deleted (or updated - an update
 ** is implemented as a delete followed by an insert). SQLite provides the
 ** rowid of the row to delete, which can be used to find the leaf on which
-** the entry resides (argument pLeaf). Once the leaf is located, this 
+** the entry resides (argument pLeaf). Once the leaf is located, this
 ** function is called to determine its ancestry.
 */
 static int fixLeafParent(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pLeaf){
@@ -168228,7 +168228,7 @@ static int removeNode(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iHeight){
   if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3_reset(pRtree->pDeleteParent)) ){
     return rc;
   }
-  
+
   /* Remove the node from the in-memory hash table and link it into
   ** the Rtree.pDeleted list. Its contents will be re-inserted later on.
   */
@@ -168243,9 +168243,9 @@ static int removeNode(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iHeight){
 
 static int fixBoundingBox(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode){
   RtreeNode *pParent = pNode->pParent;
-  int rc = SQLITE_OK; 
+  int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   if( pParent ){
-    int ii; 
+    int ii;
     int nCell = NCELL(pNode);
     RtreeCell box;                            /* Bounding box for pNode */
     nodeGetCell(pRtree, pNode, 0, &box);
@@ -168300,9 +168300,9 @@ static int deleteCell(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iCell, int iHeight){
 }
 
 static int Reinsert(
-  Rtree *pRtree, 
-  RtreeNode *pNode, 
-  RtreeCell *pCell, 
+  Rtree *pRtree,
+  RtreeNode *pNode,
+  RtreeCell *pCell,
   int iHeight
 ){
   int *aOrder;
@@ -168356,7 +168356,7 @@ static int Reinsert(
   for(ii=0; ii<nCell; ii++){
     aDistance[ii] = RTREE_ZERO;
     for(iDim=0; iDim<pRtree->nDim; iDim++){
-      RtreeDValue coord = (DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2+1]) - 
+      RtreeDValue coord = (DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2+1]) -
                                DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2]));
       aDistance[ii] += (coord-aCenterCoord[iDim])*(coord-aCenterCoord[iDim]);
     }
@@ -168401,7 +168401,7 @@ static int Reinsert(
 }
 
 /*
-** Insert cell pCell into node pNode. Node pNode is the head of a 
+** Insert cell pCell into node pNode. Node pNode is the head of a
 ** subtree iHeight high (leaf nodes have iHeight==0).
 */
 static int rtreeInsertCell(
@@ -168491,8 +168491,8 @@ static int rtreeDeleteRowid(Rtree *pRtree, sqlite3_int64 iDelete){
   /* Obtain a reference to the root node to initialize Rtree.iDepth */
   rc = nodeAcquire(pRtree, 1, 0, &pRoot);
 
-  /* Obtain a reference to the leaf node that contains the entry 
-  ** about to be deleted. 
+  /* Obtain a reference to the leaf node that contains the entry
+  ** about to be deleted.
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     rc = findLeafNode(pRtree, iDelete, &pLeaf, 0);
@@ -168519,11 +168519,11 @@ static int rtreeDeleteRowid(Rtree *pRtree, sqlite3_int64 iDelete){
   }
 
   /* Check if the root node now has exactly one child. If so, remove
-  ** it, schedule the contents of the child for reinsertion and 
+  ** it, schedule the contents of the child for reinsertion and
   ** reduce the tree height by one.
   **
   ** This is equivalent to copying the contents of the child into
-  ** the root node (the operation that Gutman's paper says to perform 
+  ** the root node (the operation that Gutman's paper says to perform
   ** in this scenario).
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pRtree->iDepth>0 && NCELL(pRoot)==1 ){
@@ -168592,8 +168592,8 @@ static RtreeValue rtreeValueUp(sqlite3_value *v){
 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_RTREE_INT_ONLY) */
 
 /*
-** A constraint has failed while inserting a row into an rtree table. 
-** Assuming no OOM error occurs, this function sets the error message 
+** A constraint has failed while inserting a row into an rtree table.
+** Assuming no OOM error occurs, this function sets the error message
 ** (at pRtree->base.zErrMsg) to an appropriate value and returns
 ** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT.
 **
@@ -168606,7 +168606,7 @@ static RtreeValue rtreeValueUp(sqlite3_value *v){
 */
 static int rtreeConstraintError(Rtree *pRtree, int iCol){
   sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;
-  char *zSql; 
+  char *zSql;
   int rc;
 
   assert( iCol==0 || iCol%2 );
@@ -168643,9 +168643,9 @@ static int rtreeConstraintError(Rtree *pRtree, int iCol){
 ** The xUpdate method for rtree module virtual tables.
 */
 static int rtreeUpdate(
-  sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, 
-  int nData, 
-  sqlite3_value **azData, 
+  sqlite3_vtab *pVtab,
+  int nData,
+  sqlite3_value **azData,
   sqlite_int64 *pRowid
 ){
   Rtree *pRtree = (Rtree *)pVtab;
@@ -168705,7 +168705,7 @@ static int rtreeUpdate(
       }
     }
 
-    /* If a rowid value was supplied, check if it is already present in 
+    /* If a rowid value was supplied, check if it is already present in
     ** the table. If so, the constraint has failed. */
     if( sqlite3_value_type(azData[2])!=SQLITE_NULL ){
       cell.iRowid = sqlite3_value_int64(azData[2]);
@@ -168801,8 +168801,8 @@ static int rtreeRename(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNewName){
     "ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_node'   RENAME TO \"%w_node\";"
     "ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_parent' RENAME TO \"%w_parent\";"
     "ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_rowid'  RENAME TO \"%w_rowid\";"
-    , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName 
-    , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName 
+    , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
+    , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
     , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
   );
   if( zSql ){
@@ -168817,8 +168817,8 @@ static int rtreeRename(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNewName){
 ** The xSavepoint method.
 **
 ** This module does not need to do anything to support savepoints. However,
-** it uses this hook to close any open blob handle. This is done because a 
-** DROP TABLE command - which fortunately always opens a savepoint - cannot 
+** it uses this hook to close any open blob handle. This is done because a
+** DROP TABLE command - which fortunately always opens a savepoint - cannot
 ** succeed if there are any open blob handles. i.e. if the blob handle were
 ** not closed here, the following would fail:
 **
@@ -168908,10 +168908,10 @@ static sqlite3_module rtreeModule = {
 };
 
 static int rtreeSqlInit(
-  Rtree *pRtree, 
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  const char *zDb, 
-  const char *zPrefix, 
+  Rtree *pRtree,
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  const char *zDb,
+  const char *zPrefix,
   int isCreate
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -168970,7 +168970,7 @@ static int rtreeSqlInit(
     char *zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azSql[i], zDb, zPrefix);
     if( zSql ){
       rc = sqlite3_prepare_v3(db, zSql, -1, SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT,
-                              appStmt[i], 0); 
+                              appStmt[i], 0);
     }else{
       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
     }
@@ -169012,9 +169012,9 @@ static int getIntFromStmt(sqlite3 *db, const char *zSql, int *piVal){
 ** table already exists. In this case the node-size is determined by inspecting
 ** the root node of the tree.
 **
-** Otherwise, for an xCreate(), use 64 bytes less than the database page-size. 
-** This ensures that each node is stored on a single database page. If the 
-** database page-size is so large that more than RTREE_MAXCELLS entries 
+** Otherwise, for an xCreate(), use 64 bytes less than the database page-size.
+** This ensures that each node is stored on a single database page. If the
+** database page-size is so large that more than RTREE_MAXCELLS entries
 ** would fit in a single node, use a smaller node-size.
 */
 static int getNodeSize(
@@ -169056,7 +169056,7 @@ static int getNodeSize(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This function is the implementation of both the xConnect and xCreate
 ** methods of the r-tree virtual table.
 **
@@ -169170,7 +169170,7 @@ static int rtreeInit(
 **
 ** The human readable string takes the form of a Tcl list with one
 ** entry for each cell in the r-tree node. Each entry is itself a
-** list, containing the 8-byte rowid/pageno followed by the 
+** list, containing the 8-byte rowid/pageno followed by the
 ** <num-dimension>*2 coordinates.
 */
 static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
@@ -169215,7 +169215,7 @@ static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
       zText = sqlite3_mprintf("{%s}", zCell);
     }
   }
-  
+
   sqlite3_result_text(ctx, zText, -1, sqlite3_free);
 }
 
@@ -169230,10 +169230,10 @@ static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
 */
 static void rtreedepth(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg);
-  if( sqlite3_value_type(apArg[0])!=SQLITE_BLOB 
+  if( sqlite3_value_type(apArg[0])!=SQLITE_BLOB
    || sqlite3_value_bytes(apArg[0])<2
   ){
-    sqlite3_result_error(ctx, "Invalid argument to rtreedepth()", -1); 
+    sqlite3_result_error(ctx, "Invalid argument to rtreedepth()", -1);
   }else{
     u8 *zBlob = (u8 *)sqlite3_value_blob(apArg[0]);
     sqlite3_result_int(ctx, readInt16(zBlob));
@@ -169242,7 +169242,7 @@ static void rtreedepth(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
 
 /*
 ** Register the r-tree module with database handle db. This creates the
-** virtual table module "rtree" and the debugging/analysis scalar 
+** virtual table module "rtree" and the debugging/analysis scalar
 ** function "rtreenode".
 */
 SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RtreeInit(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -169361,7 +169361,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_geometry_callback(
   pGeomCtx->xQueryFunc = 0;
   pGeomCtx->xDestructor = 0;
   pGeomCtx->pContext = pContext;
-  return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zGeom, -1, SQLITE_ANY, 
+  return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zGeom, -1, SQLITE_ANY,
       (void *)pGeomCtx, geomCallback, 0, 0, rtreeFreeCallback
   );
 }
@@ -169386,7 +169386,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_query_callback(
   pGeomCtx->xQueryFunc = xQueryFunc;
   pGeomCtx->xDestructor = xDestructor;
   pGeomCtx->pContext = pContext;
-  return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zQueryFunc, -1, SQLITE_ANY, 
+  return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zQueryFunc, -1, SQLITE_ANY,
       (void *)pGeomCtx, geomCallback, 0, 0, rtreeFreeCallback
   );
 }
@@ -169422,9 +169422,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_init(
 *************************************************************************
 ** $Id: icu.c,v 1.7 2007/12/13 21:54:11 drh Exp $
 **
-** This file implements an integration between the ICU library 
-** ("International Components for Unicode", an open-source library 
-** for handling unicode data) and SQLite. The integration uses 
+** This file implements an integration between the ICU library
+** ("International Components for Unicode", an open-source library
+** for handling unicode data) and SQLite. The integration uses
 ** ICU to provide the following to SQLite:
 **
 **   * An implementation of the SQL regexp() function (and hence REGEXP
@@ -169435,7 +169435,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_init(
 **
 **   * Integration of ICU and SQLite collation sequences.
 **
-**   * An implementation of the LIKE operator that uses ICU to 
+**   * An implementation of the LIKE operator that uses ICU to
 **     provide case-independent matching.
 */
 
@@ -169505,7 +169505,7 @@ static const unsigned char icuUtf8Trans1[] = {
 
 /*
 ** Compare two UTF-8 strings for equality where the first string is
-** a "LIKE" expression. Return true (1) if they are the same and 
+** a "LIKE" expression. Return true (1) if they are the same and
 ** false (0) if they are different.
 */
 static int icuLikeCompare(
@@ -169537,7 +169537,7 @@ static int icuLikeCompare(
       uint8_t c;
 
       /* Skip any MATCH_ALL or MATCH_ONE characters that follow a
-      ** MATCH_ALL. For each MATCH_ONE, skip one character in the 
+      ** MATCH_ALL. For each MATCH_ONE, skip one character in the
       ** test string.
       */
       while( (c=*zPattern) == MATCH_ALL || c == MATCH_ONE ){
@@ -169590,15 +169590,15 @@ static int icuLikeCompare(
 **
 **       A LIKE B
 **
-** is implemented as like(B, A). If there is an escape character E, 
+** is implemented as like(B, A). If there is an escape character E,
 **
 **       A LIKE B ESCAPE E
 **
 ** is mapped to like(B, A, E).
 */
 static void icuLikeFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  int argc, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  int argc,
   sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
   const unsigned char *zA = sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]);
@@ -169624,7 +169624,7 @@ static void icuLikeFunc(
     if( zE==0 ) return;
     U8_NEXT(zE, i, nE, uEsc);
     if( i!=nE){
-      sqlite3_result_error(context, 
+      sqlite3_result_error(context,
           "ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1);
       return;
     }
@@ -169639,7 +169639,7 @@ static void icuLikeFunc(
 ** This function is called when an ICU function called from within
 ** the implementation of an SQL scalar function returns an error.
 **
-** The scalar function context passed as the first argument is 
+** The scalar function context passed as the first argument is
 ** loaded with an error message based on the following two args.
 */
 static void icuFunctionError(
@@ -169665,7 +169665,7 @@ static void icuRegexpDelete(void *p){
 /*
 ** Implementation of SQLite REGEXP operator. This scalar function takes
 ** two arguments. The first is a regular expression pattern to compile
-** the second is a string to match against that pattern. If either 
+** the second is a string to match against that pattern. If either
 ** argument is an SQL NULL, then NULL Is returned. Otherwise, the result
 ** is 1 if the string matches the pattern, or 0 otherwise.
 **
@@ -169689,8 +169689,8 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
 
   (void)nArg;  /* Unused parameter */
 
-  /* If the left hand side of the regexp operator is NULL, 
-  ** then the result is also NULL. 
+  /* If the left hand side of the regexp operator is NULL,
+  ** then the result is also NULL.
   */
   if( !zString ){
     return;
@@ -169728,7 +169728,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
   }
 
   /* Set the text that the regular expression operates on to a NULL
-  ** pointer. This is not really necessary, but it is tidier than 
+  ** pointer. This is not really necessary, but it is tidier than
   ** leaving the regular expression object configured with an invalid
   ** pointer after this function returns.
   */
@@ -169739,7 +169739,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementations of scalar functions for case mapping - upper() and 
+** Implementations of scalar functions for case mapping - upper() and
 ** lower(). Function upper() converts its input to upper-case (ABC).
 ** Function lower() converts to lower-case (abc).
 **
@@ -169747,7 +169747,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
 ** "language specific". Refer to ICU documentation for the differences
 ** between the two.
 **
-** To utilise "general" case mapping, the upper() or lower() scalar 
+** To utilise "general" case mapping, the upper() or lower() scalar
 ** functions are invoked with one argument:
 **
 **     upper('ABC') -> 'abc'
@@ -169853,7 +169853,7 @@ static int icuCollationColl(
 /*
 ** Implementation of the scalar function icu_load_collation().
 **
-** This scalar function is used to add ICU collation based collation 
+** This scalar function is used to add ICU collation based collation
 ** types to an SQLite database connection. It is intended to be called
 ** as follows:
 **
@@ -169864,8 +169864,8 @@ static int icuCollationColl(
 ** collation sequence to create.
 */
 static void icuLoadCollation(
-  sqlite3_context *p, 
-  int nArg, 
+  sqlite3_context *p,
+  int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
   sqlite3 *db = (sqlite3 *)sqlite3_user_data(p);
@@ -169891,7 +169891,7 @@ static void icuLoadCollation(
   }
   assert(p);
 
-  rc = sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, SQLITE_UTF16, (void *)pUCollator, 
+  rc = sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, SQLITE_UTF16, (void *)pUCollator,
       icuCollationColl, icuCollationDel
   );
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -169927,11 +169927,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IcuInit(sqlite3 *db){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   int i;
 
-  
+
   for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<(int)(sizeof(scalars)/sizeof(scalars[0])); i++){
     const struct IcuScalar *p = &scalars[i];
     rc = sqlite3_create_function(
-        db, p->zName, p->nArg, p->enc, 
+        db, p->zName, p->nArg, p->enc,
         p->iContext ? (void*)db : (void*)0,
         p->xFunc, 0, 0
     );
@@ -169945,7 +169945,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IcuInit(sqlite3 *db){
 __declspec(dllexport)
 #endif
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_icu_init(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   char **pzErrMsg,
   const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
 ){
@@ -170048,7 +170048,7 @@ static int icuDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
 /*
 ** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string.  The input
 ** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1].  A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in 
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
 ** *ppCursor.
 */
 static int icuOpen(
@@ -170090,7 +170090,7 @@ static int icuOpen(
   pCsr->aOffset = (int *)&pCsr->aChar[(nChar+3)&~3];
 
   pCsr->aOffset[iOut] = iInput;
-  U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c); 
+  U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
   while( c>0 ){
     int isError = 0;
     c = u_foldCase(c, opt);
@@ -170236,7 +170236,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 *************************************************************************
 **
 **
-** OVERVIEW 
+** OVERVIEW
 **
 **  The RBU extension requires that the RBU update be packaged as an
 **  SQLite database. The tables it expects to find are described in
@@ -170244,34 +170244,34 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 **  that the user wishes to write to, a corresponding data_xyz table is
 **  created in the RBU database and populated with one row for each row to
 **  update, insert or delete from the target table.
-** 
+**
 **  The update proceeds in three stages:
-** 
+**
 **  1) The database is updated. The modified database pages are written
 **     to a *-oal file. A *-oal file is just like a *-wal file, except
 **     that it is named "<database>-oal" instead of "<database>-wal".
 **     Because regular SQLite clients do not look for file named
 **     "<database>-oal", they go on using the original database in
 **     rollback mode while the *-oal file is being generated.
-** 
+**
 **     During this stage RBU does not update the database by writing
 **     directly to the target tables. Instead it creates "imposter"
 **     tables using the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_IMPOSTER interface that it uses
 **     to update each b-tree individually. All updates required by each
 **     b-tree are completed before moving on to the next, and all
 **     updates are done in sorted key order.
-** 
+**
 **  2) The "<database>-oal" file is moved to the equivalent "<database>-wal"
 **     location using a call to rename(2). Before doing this the RBU
 **     module takes an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file, ensuring
 **     that there are no other active readers.
-** 
+**
 **     Once the EXCLUSIVE lock is released, any other database readers
 **     detect the new *-wal file and read the database in wal mode. At
 **     this point they see the new version of the database - including
 **     the updates made as part of the RBU update.
-** 
-**  3) The new *-wal file is checkpointed. This proceeds in the same way 
+**
+**  3) The new *-wal file is checkpointed. This proceeds in the same way
 **     as a regular database checkpoint, except that a single frame is
 **     checkpointed each time sqlite3rbu_step() is called. If the RBU
 **     handle is closed before the entire *-wal file is checkpointed,
@@ -170280,7 +170280,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 **     the future.
 **
 ** POTENTIAL PROBLEMS
-** 
+**
 **  The rename() call might not be portable. And RBU is not currently
 **  syncing the directory after renaming the file.
 **
@@ -170302,7 +170302,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 **  fields are collected.  This means we're probably writing a lot more
 **  data to disk when saving the state of an ongoing update to the RBU
 **  update database than is strictly necessary.
-** 
+**
 */
 
 /* #include <assert.h> */
@@ -170326,42 +170326,42 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 **
 *************************************************************************
 **
-** This file contains the public interface for the RBU extension. 
+** This file contains the public interface for the RBU extension.
 */
 
 /*
 ** SUMMARY
 **
-** Writing a transaction containing a large number of operations on 
+** Writing a transaction containing a large number of operations on
 ** b-tree indexes that are collectively larger than the available cache
-** memory can be very inefficient. 
+** memory can be very inefficient.
 **
 ** The problem is that in order to update a b-tree, the leaf page (at least)
 ** containing the entry being inserted or deleted must be modified. If the
-** working set of leaves is larger than the available cache memory, then a 
-** single leaf that is modified more than once as part of the transaction 
+** working set of leaves is larger than the available cache memory, then a
+** single leaf that is modified more than once as part of the transaction
 ** may be loaded from or written to the persistent media multiple times.
 ** Additionally, because the index updates are likely to be applied in
-** random order, access to pages within the database is also likely to be in 
+** random order, access to pages within the database is also likely to be in
 ** random order, which is itself quite inefficient.
 **
 ** One way to improve the situation is to sort the operations on each index
 ** by index key before applying them to the b-tree. This leads to an IO
 ** pattern that resembles a single linear scan through the index b-tree,
-** and all but guarantees each modified leaf page is loaded and stored 
+** and all but guarantees each modified leaf page is loaded and stored
 ** exactly once. SQLite uses this trick to improve the performance of
 ** CREATE INDEX commands. This extension allows it to be used to improve
 ** the performance of large transactions on existing databases.
 **
-** Additionally, this extension allows the work involved in writing the 
-** large transaction to be broken down into sub-transactions performed 
-** sequentially by separate processes. This is useful if the system cannot 
-** guarantee that a single update process will run for long enough to apply 
-** the entire update, for example because the update is being applied on a 
-** mobile device that is frequently rebooted. Even after the writer process 
+** Additionally, this extension allows the work involved in writing the
+** large transaction to be broken down into sub-transactions performed
+** sequentially by separate processes. This is useful if the system cannot
+** guarantee that a single update process will run for long enough to apply
+** the entire update, for example because the update is being applied on a
+** mobile device that is frequently rebooted. Even after the writer process
 ** has committed one or more sub-transactions, other database clients continue
-** to read from the original database snapshot. In other words, partially 
-** applied transactions are not visible to other clients. 
+** to read from the original database snapshot. In other words, partially
+** applied transactions are not visible to other clients.
 **
 ** "RBU" stands for "Resumable Bulk Update". As in a large database update
 ** transmitted via a wireless network to a mobile device. A transaction
@@ -170377,9 +170377,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 **
 **   * INSERT statements may not use any default values.
 **
-**   * UPDATE and DELETE statements must identify their target rows by 
+**   * UPDATE and DELETE statements must identify their target rows by
 **     non-NULL PRIMARY KEY values. Rows with NULL values stored in PRIMARY
-**     KEY fields may not be updated or deleted. If the table being written 
+**     KEY fields may not be updated or deleted. If the table being written
 **     has no PRIMARY KEY, affected rows must be identified by rowid.
 **
 **   * UPDATE statements may not modify PRIMARY KEY columns.
@@ -170396,10 +170396,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 ** PREPARATION
 **
 ** An "RBU update" is stored as a separate SQLite database. A database
-** containing an RBU update is an "RBU database". For each table in the 
+** containing an RBU update is an "RBU database". For each table in the
 ** target database to be updated, the RBU database should contain a table
 ** named "data_<target name>" containing the same set of columns as the
-** target table, and one more - "rbu_control". The data_% table should 
+** target table, and one more - "rbu_control". The data_% table should
 ** have no PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE constraints, but each column should have
 ** the same type as the corresponding column in the target database.
 ** The "rbu_control" column should have no type at all. For example, if
@@ -170414,22 +170414,22 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 ** The order of the columns in the data_% table does not matter.
 **
 ** Instead of a regular table, the RBU database may also contain virtual
-** tables or view named using the data_<target> naming scheme. 
+** tables or view named using the data_<target> naming scheme.
 **
-** Instead of the plain data_<target> naming scheme, RBU database tables 
+** Instead of the plain data_<target> naming scheme, RBU database tables
 ** may also be named data<integer>_<target>, where <integer> is any sequence
 ** of zero or more numeric characters (0-9). This can be significant because
-** tables within the RBU database are always processed in order sorted by 
+** tables within the RBU database are always processed in order sorted by
 ** name. By judicious selection of the <integer> portion of the names
 ** of the RBU tables the user can therefore control the order in which they
 ** are processed. This can be useful, for example, to ensure that "external
 ** content" FTS4 tables are updated before their underlying content tables.
 **
 ** If the target database table is a virtual table or a table that has no
-** PRIMARY KEY declaration, the data_% table must also contain a column 
-** named "rbu_rowid". This column is mapped to the tables implicit primary 
-** key column - "rowid". Virtual tables for which the "rowid" column does 
-** not function like a primary key value cannot be updated using RBU. For 
+** PRIMARY KEY declaration, the data_% table must also contain a column
+** named "rbu_rowid". This column is mapped to the tables implicit primary
+** key column - "rowid". Virtual tables for which the "rowid" column does
+** not function like a primary key value cannot be updated using RBU. For
 ** example, if the target db contains either of the following:
 **
 **   CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE x1 USING fts3(a, b);
@@ -170452,35 +170452,35 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 **   CREATE TABLE data_ft1(a, b, langid, rbu_rowid, rbu_control);
 **   CREATE TABLE data_ft1(a, b, rbu_rowid, rbu_control);
 **
-** For each row to INSERT into the target database as part of the RBU 
+** For each row to INSERT into the target database as part of the RBU
 ** update, the corresponding data_% table should contain a single record
 ** with the "rbu_control" column set to contain integer value 0. The
-** other columns should be set to the values that make up the new record 
-** to insert. 
+** other columns should be set to the values that make up the new record
+** to insert.
 **
-** If the target database table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, it is not 
-** possible to insert a NULL value into the IPK column. Attempting to 
+** If the target database table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, it is not
+** possible to insert a NULL value into the IPK column. Attempting to
 ** do so results in an SQLITE_MISMATCH error.
 **
-** For each row to DELETE from the target database as part of the RBU 
+** For each row to DELETE from the target database as part of the RBU
 ** update, the corresponding data_% table should contain a single record
 ** with the "rbu_control" column set to contain integer value 1. The
 ** real primary key values of the row to delete should be stored in the
 ** corresponding columns of the data_% table. The values stored in the
 ** other columns are not used.
 **
-** For each row to UPDATE from the target database as part of the RBU 
+** For each row to UPDATE from the target database as part of the RBU
 ** update, the corresponding data_% table should contain a single record
 ** with the "rbu_control" column set to contain a value of type text.
-** The real primary key values identifying the row to update should be 
+** The real primary key values identifying the row to update should be
 ** stored in the corresponding columns of the data_% table row, as should
-** the new values of all columns being update. The text value in the 
+** the new values of all columns being update. The text value in the
 ** "rbu_control" column must contain the same number of characters as
 ** there are columns in the target database table, and must consist entirely
-** of 'x' and '.' characters (or in some special cases 'd' - see below). For 
+** of 'x' and '.' characters (or in some special cases 'd' - see below). For
 ** each column that is being updated, the corresponding character is set to
 ** 'x'. For those that remain as they are, the corresponding character of the
-** rbu_control value should be set to '.'. For example, given the tables 
+** rbu_control value should be set to '.'. For example, given the tables
 ** above, the update statement:
 **
 **   UPDATE t1 SET c = 'usa' WHERE a = 4;
@@ -170494,30 +170494,30 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 ** target table with the value stored in the corresponding data_% column, the
 ** user-defined SQL function "rbu_delta()" is invoked and the result stored in
 ** the target table column. rbu_delta() is invoked with two arguments - the
-** original value currently stored in the target table column and the 
+** original value currently stored in the target table column and the
 ** value specified in the data_xxx table.
 **
 ** For example, this row:
 **
 **   INSERT INTO data_t1(a, b, c, rbu_control) VALUES(4, NULL, 'usa', '..d');
 **
-** is similar to an UPDATE statement such as: 
+** is similar to an UPDATE statement such as:
 **
 **   UPDATE t1 SET c = rbu_delta(c, 'usa') WHERE a = 4;
 **
-** Finally, if an 'f' character appears in place of a 'd' or 's' in an 
+** Finally, if an 'f' character appears in place of a 'd' or 's' in an
 ** ota_control string, the contents of the data_xxx table column is assumed
 ** to be a "fossil delta" - a patch to be applied to a blob value in the
 ** format used by the fossil source-code management system. In this case
-** the existing value within the target database table must be of type BLOB. 
+** the existing value within the target database table must be of type BLOB.
 ** It is replaced by the result of applying the specified fossil delta to
 ** itself.
 **
 ** If the target database table is a virtual table or a table with no PRIMARY
-** KEY, the rbu_control value should not include a character corresponding 
+** KEY, the rbu_control value should not include a character corresponding
 ** to the rbu_rowid value. For example, this:
 **
-**   INSERT INTO data_ft1(a, b, rbu_rowid, rbu_control) 
+**   INSERT INTO data_ft1(a, b, rbu_rowid, rbu_control)
 **       VALUES(NULL, 'usa', 12, '.x');
 **
 ** causes a result similar to:
@@ -170527,14 +170527,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 ** The data_xxx tables themselves should have no PRIMARY KEY declarations.
 ** However, RBU is more efficient if reading the rows in from each data_xxx
 ** table in "rowid" order is roughly the same as reading them sorted by
-** the PRIMARY KEY of the corresponding target database table. In other 
-** words, rows should be sorted using the destination table PRIMARY KEY 
+** the PRIMARY KEY of the corresponding target database table. In other
+** words, rows should be sorted using the destination table PRIMARY KEY
 ** fields before they are inserted into the data_xxx tables.
 **
 ** USAGE
 **
-** The API declared below allows an application to apply an RBU update 
-** stored on disk to an existing target database. Essentially, the 
+** The API declared below allows an application to apply an RBU update
+** stored on disk to an existing target database. Essentially, the
 ** application:
 **
 **     1) Opens an RBU handle using the sqlite3rbu_open() function.
@@ -170545,24 +170545,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
 **
 **     3) Calls the sqlite3rbu_step() function one or more times on
 **        the new handle. Each call to sqlite3rbu_step() performs a single
-**        b-tree operation, so thousands of calls may be required to apply 
+**        b-tree operation, so thousands of calls may be required to apply
 **        a complete update.
 **
 **     4) Calls sqlite3rbu_close() to close the RBU update handle. If
 **        sqlite3rbu_step() has been called enough times to completely
 **        apply the update to the target database, then the RBU database
-**        is marked as fully applied. Otherwise, the state of the RBU 
-**        update application is saved in the RBU database for later 
+**        is marked as fully applied. Otherwise, the state of the RBU
+**        update application is saved in the RBU database for later
 **        resumption.
 **
 ** See comments below for more detail on APIs.
 **
 ** If an update is only partially applied to the target database by the
-** time sqlite3rbu_close() is called, various state information is saved 
+** time sqlite3rbu_close() is called, various state information is saved
 ** within the RBU database. This allows subsequent processes to automatically
 ** resume the RBU update from where it left off.
 **
-** To remove all RBU extension state information, returning an RBU database 
+** To remove all RBU extension state information, returning an RBU database
 ** to its original contents, it is sufficient to drop all tables that begin
 ** with the prefix "rbu_"
 **
@@ -170598,21 +170598,21 @@ typedef struct sqlite3rbu sqlite3rbu;
 ** the path to the RBU database. Each call to this function must be matched
 ** by a call to sqlite3rbu_close(). When opening the databases, RBU passes
 ** the SQLITE_CONFIG_URI flag to sqlite3_open_v2(). So if either zTarget
-** or zRbu begin with "file:", it will be interpreted as an SQLite 
+** or zRbu begin with "file:", it will be interpreted as an SQLite
 ** database URI, not a regular file name.
 **
-** If the zState argument is passed a NULL value, the RBU extension stores 
-** the current state of the update (how many rows have been updated, which 
+** If the zState argument is passed a NULL value, the RBU extension stores
+** the current state of the update (how many rows have been updated, which
 ** indexes are yet to be updated etc.) within the RBU database itself. This
 ** can be convenient, as it means that the RBU application does not need to
-** organize removing a separate state file after the update is concluded. 
-** Or, if zState is non-NULL, it must be a path to a database file in which 
+** organize removing a separate state file after the update is concluded.
+** Or, if zState is non-NULL, it must be a path to a database file in which
 ** the RBU extension can store the state of the update.
 **
 ** When resuming an RBU update, the zState argument must be passed the same
 ** value as when the RBU update was started.
 **
-** Once the RBU update is finished, the RBU extension does not 
+** Once the RBU update is finished, the RBU extension does not
 ** automatically remove any zState database file, even if it created it.
 **
 ** By default, RBU uses the default VFS to access the files on disk. To
@@ -170625,7 +170625,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3rbu sqlite3rbu;
 ** the zipvfs_create_vfs() API below for details on using RBU with zipvfs.
 */
 SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_open(
-  const char *zTarget, 
+  const char *zTarget,
   const char *zRbu,
   const char *zState
 );
@@ -170635,13 +170635,13 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_open(
 ** An RBU vacuum is similar to SQLite's built-in VACUUM command, except
 ** that it can be suspended and resumed like an RBU update.
 **
-** The second argument to this function identifies a database in which 
-** to store the state of the RBU vacuum operation if it is suspended. The 
+** The second argument to this function identifies a database in which
+** to store the state of the RBU vacuum operation if it is suspended. The
 ** first time sqlite3rbu_vacuum() is called, to start an RBU vacuum
 ** operation, the state database should either not exist or be empty
-** (contain no tables). If an RBU vacuum is suspended by calling 
+** (contain no tables). If an RBU vacuum is suspended by calling
 ** sqlite3rbu_close() on the RBU handle before sqlite3rbu_step() has
-** returned SQLITE_DONE, the vacuum state is stored in the state database. 
+** returned SQLITE_DONE, the vacuum state is stored in the state database.
 ** The vacuum can be resumed by calling this function to open a new RBU
 ** handle specifying the same target and state databases.
 **
@@ -170655,16 +170655,16 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_open(
 ** is completed, even if it created it. However, if the call to
 ** sqlite3rbu_close() returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, the contents
 ** of the state tables within the state database are zeroed. This way,
-** the next call to sqlite3rbu_vacuum() opens a handle that starts a 
+** the next call to sqlite3rbu_vacuum() opens a handle that starts a
 ** new RBU vacuum operation.
 **
 ** As with sqlite3rbu_open(), Zipvfs users should rever to the comment
-** describing the sqlite3rbu_create_vfs() API function below for 
-** a description of the complications associated with using RBU with 
+** describing the sqlite3rbu_create_vfs() API function below for
+** a description of the complications associated with using RBU with
 ** zipvfs databases.
 */
 SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_vacuum(
-  const char *zTarget, 
+  const char *zTarget,
   const char *zState
 );
 
@@ -170676,7 +170676,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_vacuum(
 ** is removed entirely. If the second parameter is negative, the limit is
 ** not modified (this is useful for querying the current limit).
 **
-** In all cases the returned value is the current limit in bytes (zero 
+** In all cases the returned value is the current limit in bytes (zero
 ** indicates unlimited).
 **
 ** If the temp space limit is exceeded during operation, an SQLITE_FULL
@@ -170685,13 +170685,13 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_vacuum(
 SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_temp_size_limit(sqlite3rbu*, sqlite3_int64);
 
 /*
-** Return the current amount of temp file space, in bytes, currently used by 
+** Return the current amount of temp file space, in bytes, currently used by
 ** the RBU handle passed as the only argument.
 */
 SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_temp_size(sqlite3rbu*);
 
 /*
-** Internally, each RBU connection uses a separate SQLite database 
+** Internally, each RBU connection uses a separate SQLite database
 ** connection to access the target and rbu update databases. This
 ** API allows the application direct access to these database handles.
 **
@@ -170702,10 +170702,10 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_temp_size(sqlite3rbu*);
 ** following scenarios:
 **
 **   * If any target tables are virtual tables, it may be necessary to
-**     call sqlite3_create_module() on the target database handle to 
+**     call sqlite3_create_module() on the target database handle to
 **     register the required virtual table implementations.
 **
-**   * If the data_xxx tables in the RBU source database are virtual 
+**   * If the data_xxx tables in the RBU source database are virtual
 **     tables, the application may need to call sqlite3_create_module() on
 **     the rbu update db handle to any required virtual table
 **     implementations.
@@ -170724,12 +170724,12 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_temp_size(sqlite3rbu*);
 SQLITE_API sqlite3 *sqlite3rbu_db(sqlite3rbu*, int bRbu);
 
 /*
-** Do some work towards applying the RBU update to the target db. 
+** Do some work towards applying the RBU update to the target db.
 **
-** Return SQLITE_DONE if the update has been completely applied, or 
+** Return SQLITE_DONE if the update has been completely applied, or
 ** SQLITE_OK if no error occurs but there remains work to do to apply
-** the RBU update. If an error does occur, some other error code is 
-** returned. 
+** the RBU update. If an error does occur, some other error code is
+** returned.
 **
 ** Once a call to sqlite3rbu_step() has returned a value other than
 ** SQLITE_OK, all subsequent calls on the same RBU handle are no-ops
@@ -170742,7 +170742,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
 **
 ** If a power failure or application crash occurs during an update, following
 ** system recovery RBU may resume the update from the point at which the state
-** was last saved. In other words, from the most recent successful call to 
+** was last saved. In other words, from the most recent successful call to
 ** sqlite3rbu_close() or this function.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
@@ -170750,7 +170750,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_savestate(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
 
 /*
-** Close an RBU handle. 
+** Close an RBU handle.
 **
 ** If the RBU update has been completely applied, mark the RBU database
 ** as fully applied. Otherwise, assuming no error has occurred, save the
@@ -170764,20 +170764,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_savestate(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
 ** eventually free any such buffer using sqlite3_free().
 **
 ** Otherwise, if no error occurs, this function returns SQLITE_OK if the
-** update has been partially applied, or SQLITE_DONE if it has been 
+** update has been partially applied, or SQLITE_DONE if it has been
 ** completely applied.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_close(sqlite3rbu *pRbu, char **pzErrmsg);
 
 /*
-** Return the total number of key-value operations (inserts, deletes or 
+** Return the total number of key-value operations (inserts, deletes or
 ** updates) that have been performed on the target database since the
 ** current RBU update was started.
 */
 SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_progress(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
 
 /*
-** Obtain permyriadage (permyriadage is to 10000 as percentage is to 100) 
+** Obtain permyriadage (permyriadage is to 10000 as percentage is to 100)
 ** progress indications for the two stages of an RBU update. This API may
 ** be useful for driving GUI progress indicators and similar.
 **
@@ -170790,16 +170790,16 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_progress(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
 ** The update is visible to non-RBU clients during stage 2. During stage 1
 ** non-RBU reader clients may see the original database.
 **
-** If this API is called during stage 2 of the update, output variable 
+** If this API is called during stage 2 of the update, output variable
 ** (*pnOne) is set to 10000 to indicate that stage 1 has finished and (*pnTwo)
 ** to a value between 0 and 10000 to indicate the permyriadage progress of
-** stage 2. A value of 5000 indicates that stage 2 is half finished, 
+** stage 2. A value of 5000 indicates that stage 2 is half finished,
 ** 9000 indicates that it is 90% finished, and so on.
 **
-** If this API is called during stage 1 of the update, output variable 
+** If this API is called during stage 1 of the update, output variable
 ** (*pnTwo) is set to 0 to indicate that stage 2 has not yet started. The
-** value to which (*pnOne) is set depends on whether or not the RBU 
-** database contains an "rbu_count" table. The rbu_count table, if it 
+** value to which (*pnOne) is set depends on whether or not the RBU
+** database contains an "rbu_count" table. The rbu_count table, if it
 ** exists, must contain the same columns as the following:
 **
 **   CREATE TABLE rbu_count(tbl TEXT PRIMARY KEY, cnt INTEGER) WITHOUT ROWID;
@@ -170858,20 +170858,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_state(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
 
 /*
 ** Create an RBU VFS named zName that accesses the underlying file-system
-** via existing VFS zParent. Or, if the zParent parameter is passed NULL, 
+** via existing VFS zParent. Or, if the zParent parameter is passed NULL,
 ** then the new RBU VFS uses the default system VFS to access the file-system.
-** The new object is registered as a non-default VFS with SQLite before 
+** The new object is registered as a non-default VFS with SQLite before
 ** returning.
 **
 ** Part of the RBU implementation uses a custom VFS object. Usually, this
-** object is created and deleted automatically by RBU. 
+** object is created and deleted automatically by RBU.
 **
 ** The exception is for applications that also use zipvfs. In this case,
 ** the custom VFS must be explicitly created by the user before the RBU
 ** handle is opened. The RBU VFS should be installed so that the zipvfs
-** VFS uses the RBU VFS, which in turn uses any other VFS layers in use 
+** VFS uses the RBU VFS, which in turn uses any other VFS layers in use
 ** (for example multiplexor) to access the file-system. For example,
-** to assemble an RBU enabled VFS stack that uses both zipvfs and 
+** to assemble an RBU enabled VFS stack that uses both zipvfs and
 ** multiplexor (error checking omitted):
 **
 **     // Create a VFS named "multiplex" (not the default).
@@ -170893,9 +170893,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_state(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
 ** may be used by RBU clients. Attempting to use RBU with a zipvfs VFS stack
 ** that does not include the RBU layer results in an error.
 **
-** The overhead of adding the "rbu" VFS to the system is negligible for 
-** non-RBU users. There is no harm in an application accessing the 
-** file-system via "rbu" all the time, even if it only uses RBU functionality 
+** The overhead of adding the "rbu" VFS to the system is negligible for
+** non-RBU users. There is no harm in an application accessing the
+** file-system via "rbu" all the time, even if it only uses RBU functionality
 ** occasionally.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_create_vfs(const char *zName, const char *zParent);
@@ -170948,17 +170948,17 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3rbu_destroy_vfs(const char *zName);
 ** RBU_STATE_STAGE:
 **   May be set to integer values 1, 2, 4 or 5. As follows:
 **       1: the *-rbu file is currently under construction.
-**       2: the *-rbu file has been constructed, but not yet moved 
+**       2: the *-rbu file has been constructed, but not yet moved
 **          to the *-wal path.
 **       4: the checkpoint is underway.
 **       5: the rbu update has been checkpointed.
 **
 ** RBU_STATE_TBL:
-**   Only valid if STAGE==1. The target database name of the table 
+**   Only valid if STAGE==1. The target database name of the table
 **   currently being written.
 **
 ** RBU_STATE_IDX:
-**   Only valid if STAGE==1. The target database name of the index 
+**   Only valid if STAGE==1. The target database name of the index
 **   currently being written, or NULL if the main table is currently being
 **   updated.
 **
@@ -170978,7 +170978,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3rbu_destroy_vfs(const char *zName);
 **   be continued if this happens).
 **
 ** RBU_STATE_COOKIE:
-**   Valid if STAGE==1. The current change-counter cookie value in the 
+**   Valid if STAGE==1. The current change-counter cookie value in the
 **   target db file.
 **
 ** RBU_STATE_OALSZ:
@@ -171055,7 +171055,7 @@ struct RbuUpdateStmt {
 ** the target database that require updating. For each such table, the
 ** iterator visits, in order:
 **
-**     * the table itself, 
+**     * the table itself,
 **     * each index of the table (zero or more points to visit), and
 **     * a special "cleanup table" state.
 **
@@ -171064,7 +171064,7 @@ struct RbuUpdateStmt {
 **   it points to an array of flags nTblCol elements in size. The flag is
 **   set for each column that is either a part of the PK or a part of an
 **   index. Or clear otherwise.
-**   
+**
 */
 struct RbuObjIter {
   sqlite3_stmt *pTblIter;         /* Iterate through tables */
@@ -171143,7 +171143,7 @@ struct RbuFrame {
 **
 ** nPhaseOneStep:
 **   If the RBU database contains an rbu_count table, this value is set to
-**   a running estimate of the number of b-tree operations required to 
+**   a running estimate of the number of b-tree operations required to
 **   finish populating the *-oal file. This allows the sqlite3_bp_progress()
 **   API to calculate the permyriadage progress of populating the *-oal file
 **   using the formula:
@@ -171163,7 +171163,7 @@ struct RbuFrame {
 **
 **     * the RBU update contains any UPDATE operations. If the PK specified
 **       for an UPDATE operation does not exist in the target table, then
-**       no b-tree operations are required on index b-trees. Or if the 
+**       no b-tree operations are required on index b-trees. Or if the
 **       specified PK does exist, then (nIndex*2) such operations are
 **       required (one delete and one insert on each index b-tree).
 **
@@ -171517,7 +171517,7 @@ static void rbuFossilDeltaFunc(
 /*
 ** Prepare the SQL statement in buffer zSql against database handle db.
 ** If successful, set *ppStmt to point to the new statement and return
-** SQLITE_OK. 
+** SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** Otherwise, if an error does occur, set *ppStmt to NULL and return
 ** an SQLite error code. Additionally, set output variable *pzErrmsg to
@@ -171525,7 +171525,7 @@ static void rbuFossilDeltaFunc(
 ** of the caller to (eventually) free this buffer using sqlite3_free().
 */
 static int prepareAndCollectError(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt,
   char **pzErrmsg,
   const char *zSql
@@ -171557,9 +171557,9 @@ static int resetAndCollectError(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, char **pzErrmsg){
 /*
 ** Unless it is NULL, argument zSql points to a buffer allocated using
 ** sqlite3_malloc containing an SQL statement. This function prepares the SQL
-** statement against database db and frees the buffer. If statement 
-** compilation is successful, *ppStmt is set to point to the new statement 
-** handle and SQLITE_OK is returned. 
+** statement against database db and frees the buffer. If statement
+** compilation is successful, *ppStmt is set to point to the new statement
+** handle and SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** Otherwise, if an error occurs, *ppStmt is set to NULL and an error code
 ** returned. In this case, *pzErrmsg may also be set to point to an error
@@ -171570,7 +171570,7 @@ static int resetAndCollectError(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, char **pzErrmsg){
 ** In this case SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and *ppStmt set to NULL.
 */
 static int prepareFreeAndCollectError(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt,
   char **pzErrmsg,
   char *zSql
@@ -171625,7 +171625,7 @@ static void rbuObjIterClearStatements(RbuObjIter *pIter){
     sqlite3_free(pUp);
     pUp = pTmp;
   }
-  
+
   pIter->pSelect = 0;
   pIter->pInsert = 0;
   pIter->pDelete = 0;
@@ -171649,16 +171649,16 @@ static void rbuObjIterFinalize(RbuObjIter *pIter){
 /*
 ** Advance the iterator to the next position.
 **
-** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the iterator is left 
-** pointing to the next entry. Otherwise, an error code and message is 
-** left in the RBU handle passed as the first argument. A copy of the 
+** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the iterator is left
+** pointing to the next entry. Otherwise, an error code and message is
+** left in the RBU handle passed as the first argument. A copy of the
 ** error code is returned.
 */
 static int rbuObjIterNext(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
   int rc = p->rc;
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
 
-    /* Free any SQLite statements used while processing the previous object */ 
+    /* Free any SQLite statements used while processing the previous object */
     rbuObjIterClearStatements(pIter);
     if( pIter->zIdx==0 ){
       rc = sqlite3_exec(p->dbMain,
@@ -171717,7 +171717,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterNext(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 ** The implementation of the rbu_target_name() SQL function. This function
 ** accepts one or two arguments. The first argument is the name of a table -
 ** the name of a table in the RBU database.  The second, if it is present, is 1
-** for a view or 0 for a table. 
+** for a view or 0 for a table.
 **
 ** For a non-vacuum RBU handle, if the table name matches the pattern:
 **
@@ -171764,16 +171764,16 @@ static void rbuTargetNameFunc(
 /*
 ** Initialize the iterator structure passed as the second argument.
 **
-** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the iterator is left 
-** pointing to the first entry. Otherwise, an error code and message is 
-** left in the RBU handle passed as the first argument. A copy of the 
+** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the iterator is left
+** pointing to the first entry. Otherwise, an error code and message is
+** left in the RBU handle passed as the first argument. A copy of the
 ** error code is returned.
 */
 static int rbuObjIterFirst(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
   int rc;
   memset(pIter, 0, sizeof(RbuObjIter));
 
-  rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pIter->pTblIter, &p->zErrmsg, 
+  rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pIter->pTblIter, &p->zErrmsg,
     sqlite3_mprintf(
       "SELECT rbu_target_name(name, type='view') AS target, name "
       "FROM sqlite_master "
@@ -171801,7 +171801,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterFirst(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 **
 ** If an error has already occurred (p->rc is already set to something other
 ** than SQLITE_OK), then this function returns NULL without modifying the
-** stored error code. In this case it still calls sqlite3_free() on any 
+** stored error code. In this case it still calls sqlite3_free() on any
 ** printf() parameters associated with %z conversions.
 */
 static char *rbuMPrintf(sqlite3rbu *p, const char *zFmt, ...){
@@ -171847,12 +171847,12 @@ static int rbuMPrintfExec(sqlite3rbu *p, sqlite3 *db, const char *zFmt, ...){
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to allocate and return a pointer to a zeroed block of nByte 
-** bytes. 
+** Attempt to allocate and return a pointer to a zeroed block of nByte
+** bytes.
 **
-** If an error (i.e. an OOM condition) occurs, return NULL and leave an 
-** error code in the rbu handle passed as the first argument. Or, if an 
-** error has already occurred when this function is called, return NULL 
+** If an error (i.e. an OOM condition) occurs, return NULL and leave an
+** error code in the rbu handle passed as the first argument. Or, if an
+** error has already occurred when this function is called, return NULL
 ** immediately without attempting the allocation or modifying the stored
 ** error code.
 */
@@ -171948,7 +171948,7 @@ static void rbuFinalize(sqlite3rbu *p, sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
 **     RBU_PK_VTAB:          Table is a virtual table.
 **
 **   Argument *piPk is also of type (int*), and also points to an output
-**   parameter. Unless the table has an external primary key index 
+**   parameter. Unless the table has an external primary key index
 **   (i.e. unless *peType is set to 3), then *piPk is set to zero. Or,
 **   if the table does have an external primary key index, then *piPk
 **   is set to the root page number of the primary key index before
@@ -171983,7 +171983,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
   /*
   ** 0) SELECT count(*) FROM sqlite_master where name=%Q AND IsVirtual(%Q)
   ** 1) PRAGMA index_list = ?
-  ** 2) SELECT count(*) FROM sqlite_master where name=%Q 
+  ** 2) SELECT count(*) FROM sqlite_master where name=%Q
   ** 3) PRAGMA table_info = ?
   */
   sqlite3_stmt *aStmt[4] = {0, 0, 0, 0};
@@ -171992,7 +171992,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
   *piPk = 0;
 
   assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK );
-  p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[0], &p->zErrmsg, 
+  p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[0], &p->zErrmsg,
     sqlite3_mprintf(
           "SELECT (sql LIKE 'create virtual%%'), rootpage"
           "  FROM sqlite_master"
@@ -172008,7 +172008,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
   }
   *piTnum = sqlite3_column_int(aStmt[0], 1);
 
-  p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[1], &p->zErrmsg, 
+  p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[1], &p->zErrmsg,
     sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA index_list=%Q",zTab)
   );
   if( p->rc ) goto rbuTableType_end;
@@ -172016,7 +172016,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
     const u8 *zOrig = sqlite3_column_text(aStmt[1], 3);
     const u8 *zIdx = sqlite3_column_text(aStmt[1], 1);
     if( zOrig && zIdx && zOrig[0]=='p' ){
-      p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[2], &p->zErrmsg, 
+      p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[2], &p->zErrmsg,
           sqlite3_mprintf(
             "SELECT rootpage FROM sqlite_master WHERE name = %Q", zIdx
       ));
@@ -172032,7 +172032,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
     }
   }
 
-  p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[3], &p->zErrmsg, 
+  p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[3], &p->zErrmsg,
     sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA table_info=%Q",zTab)
   );
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -172101,7 +172101,7 @@ static void rbuObjIterCacheIndexedCols(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 ** the table (not index) that the iterator currently points to.
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise. If
-** an error does occur, an error code and error message are also left in 
+** an error does occur, an error code and error message are also left in
 ** the RBU handle.
 */
 static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
@@ -172123,7 +172123,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
     if( p->rc ) return p->rc;
     if( pIter->zIdx==0 ) pIter->iTnum = iTnum;
 
-    assert( pIter->eType==RBU_PK_NONE || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_IPK 
+    assert( pIter->eType==RBU_PK_NONE || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_IPK
          || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_EXTERNAL || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_WITHOUT_ROWID
          || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_VTAB
     );
@@ -172131,7 +172131,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
     /* Populate the azTblCol[] and nTblCol variables based on the columns
     ** of the input table. Ignore any input table columns that begin with
     ** "rbu_".  */
-    p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg, 
+    p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
         sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT * FROM '%q'", pIter->zDataTbl)
     );
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -172167,7 +172167,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
     ** present in the input table. Populate the abTblPk[], azTblType[] and
     ** aiTblOrder[] arrays at the same time.  */
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-      p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg, 
+      p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
           sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA table_info(%Q)", pIter->zTbl)
       );
     }
@@ -172209,8 +172209,8 @@ static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function constructs and returns a pointer to a nul-terminated 
-** string containing some SQL clause or list based on one or more of the 
+** This function constructs and returns a pointer to a nul-terminated
+** string containing some SQL clause or list based on one or more of the
 ** column names currently stored in the pIter->azTblCol[] array.
 */
 static char *rbuObjIterGetCollist(
@@ -172229,23 +172229,23 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetCollist(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used to create a SELECT list (the list of SQL 
-** expressions that follows a SELECT keyword) for a SELECT statement 
-** used to read from an data_xxx or rbu_tmp_xxx table while updating the 
-** index object currently indicated by the iterator object passed as the 
-** second argument. A "PRAGMA index_xinfo = <idxname>" statement is used 
+** This function is used to create a SELECT list (the list of SQL
+** expressions that follows a SELECT keyword) for a SELECT statement
+** used to read from an data_xxx or rbu_tmp_xxx table while updating the
+** index object currently indicated by the iterator object passed as the
+** second argument. A "PRAGMA index_xinfo = <idxname>" statement is used
 ** to obtain the required information.
 **
 ** If the index is of the following form:
 **
 **   CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(c, b COLLATE nocase);
 **
-** and "t1" is a table with an explicit INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column 
+** and "t1" is a table with an explicit INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column
 ** "ipk", the returned string is:
 **
 **   "`c` COLLATE 'BINARY', `b` COLLATE 'NOCASE', `ipk` COLLATE 'BINARY'"
 **
-** As well as the returned string, three other malloc'd strings are 
+** As well as the returned string, three other malloc'd strings are
 ** returned via output parameters. As follows:
 **
 **   pzImposterCols: ...
@@ -172307,11 +172307,11 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetIndexCols(
     zRet = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"%w\" COLLATE %Q", zRet, zCom, zCol, zCollate);
     if( pIter->bUnique==0 || sqlite3_column_int(pXInfo, 5) ){
       const char *zOrder = (bDesc ? " DESC" : "");
-      zImpPK = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"rbu_imp_%d%w\"%s", 
+      zImpPK = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"rbu_imp_%d%w\"%s",
           zImpPK, zCom, nBind, zCol, zOrder
       );
     }
-    zImpCols = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"rbu_imp_%d%w\" %s COLLATE %Q", 
+    zImpCols = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"rbu_imp_%d%w\" %s COLLATE %Q",
         zImpCols, zCom, nBind, zCol, zType, zCollate
     );
     zWhere = sqlite3_mprintf(
@@ -172357,7 +172357,7 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetIndexCols(
 ** the text ", old._rowid_" to the returned value.
 */
 static char *rbuObjIterGetOldlist(
-  sqlite3rbu *p, 
+  sqlite3rbu *p,
   RbuObjIter *pIter,
   const char *zObj
 ){
@@ -172398,7 +172398,7 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetOldlist(
 **   "b = ?1 AND c = ?2"
 */
 static char *rbuObjIterGetWhere(
-  sqlite3rbu *p, 
+  sqlite3rbu *p,
   RbuObjIter *pIter
 ){
   char *zList = 0;
@@ -172413,7 +172413,7 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetWhere(
         zSep = " AND ";
       }
     }
-    zList = rbuMPrintf(p, 
+    zList = rbuMPrintf(p,
         "_rowid_ = (SELECT id FROM rbu_imposter2 WHERE %z)", zList
     );
 
@@ -172453,7 +172453,7 @@ static void rbuBadControlError(sqlite3rbu *p){
 **
 ** The memory for the returned string is obtained from sqlite3_malloc().
 ** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free it using
-** sqlite3_free(). 
+** sqlite3_free().
 **
 ** If an OOM error is encountered when allocating space for the new
 ** string, an error code is left in the rbu handle passed as the first
@@ -172477,19 +172477,19 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetSetlist(
       for(i=0; i<pIter->nTblCol; i++){
         char c = zMask[pIter->aiSrcOrder[i]];
         if( c=='x' ){
-          zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=?%d", 
+          zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=?%d",
               zList, zSep, pIter->azTblCol[i], i+1
           );
           zSep = ", ";
         }
         else if( c=='d' ){
-          zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=rbu_delta(\"%w\", ?%d)", 
+          zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=rbu_delta(\"%w\", ?%d)",
               zList, zSep, pIter->azTblCol[i], pIter->azTblCol[i], i+1
           );
           zSep = ", ";
         }
         else if( c=='f' ){
-          zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=rbu_fossil_delta(\"%w\", ?%d)", 
+          zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=rbu_fossil_delta(\"%w\", ?%d)",
               zList, zSep, pIter->azTblCol[i], pIter->azTblCol[i], i+1
           );
           zSep = ", ";
@@ -172507,7 +172507,7 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetSetlist(
 **
 ** The memory for the returned string is obtained from sqlite3_malloc().
 ** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free it using
-** sqlite3_free(). 
+** sqlite3_free().
 **
 ** If an OOM error is encountered when allocating space for the new
 ** string, an error code is left in the rbu handle passed as the first
@@ -172531,8 +172531,8 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetBindlist(sqlite3rbu *p, int nBind){
 }
 
 /*
-** The iterator currently points to a table (not index) of type 
-** RBU_PK_WITHOUT_ROWID. This function creates the PRIMARY KEY 
+** The iterator currently points to a table (not index) of type
+** RBU_PK_WITHOUT_ROWID. This function creates the PRIMARY KEY
 ** declaration for the corresponding imposter table. For example,
 ** if the iterator points to a table created as:
 **
@@ -172549,7 +172549,7 @@ static char *rbuWithoutRowidPK(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
     const char *zSep = "PRIMARY KEY(";
     sqlite3_stmt *pXList = 0;     /* PRAGMA index_list = (pIter->zTbl) */
     sqlite3_stmt *pXInfo = 0;     /* PRAGMA index_xinfo = <pk-index> */
-   
+
     p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pXList, &p->zErrmsg,
         sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA main.index_list = %Q", pIter->zTbl)
     );
@@ -172587,7 +172587,7 @@ static char *rbuWithoutRowidPK(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 ** a table b-tree where the table has an external primary key. If the
 ** iterator passed as the second argument does not currently point to
 ** a table (not index) with an external primary key, this function is a
-** no-op. 
+** no-op.
 **
 ** Assuming the iterator does point to a table with an external PK, this
 ** function creates a WITHOUT ROWID imposter table named "rbu_imposter2"
@@ -172614,7 +172614,7 @@ static void rbuCreateImposterTable2(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
     /* Figure out the name of the primary key index for the current table.
     ** This is needed for the argument to "PRAGMA index_xinfo". Set
     ** zIdx to point to a nul-terminated string containing this name. */
-    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pQuery, &p->zErrmsg, 
+    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pQuery, &p->zErrmsg,
         "SELECT name FROM sqlite_master WHERE rootpage = ?"
     );
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -172636,7 +172636,7 @@ static void rbuCreateImposterTable2(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
         int iCid = sqlite3_column_int(pXInfo, 1);
         int bDesc = sqlite3_column_int(pXInfo, 3);
         const char *zCollate = (const char*)sqlite3_column_text(pXInfo, 4);
-        zCols = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%sc%d %s COLLATE %s", zCols, zComma, 
+        zCols = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%sc%d %s COLLATE %s", zCols, zComma,
             iCid, pIter->azTblType[iCid], zCollate
         );
         zPk = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%sc%d%s", zPk, zComma, iCid, bDesc?" DESC":"");
@@ -172648,7 +172648,7 @@ static void rbuCreateImposterTable2(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 
     sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_IMPOSTER, p->dbMain, "main", 1, tnum);
     rbuMPrintfExec(p, p->dbMain,
-        "CREATE TABLE rbu_imposter2(%z, PRIMARY KEY(%z)) WITHOUT ROWID", 
+        "CREATE TABLE rbu_imposter2(%z, PRIMARY KEY(%z)) WITHOUT ROWID",
         zCols, zPk
     );
     sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_IMPOSTER, p->dbMain, "main", 0, 0);
@@ -172656,7 +172656,7 @@ static void rbuCreateImposterTable2(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 }
 
 /*
-** If an error has already occurred when this function is called, it 
+** If an error has already occurred when this function is called, it
 ** immediately returns zero (without doing any work). Or, if an error
 ** occurs during the execution of this function, it sets the error code
 ** in the sqlite3rbu object indicated by the first argument and returns
@@ -172669,9 +172669,9 @@ static void rbuCreateImposterTable2(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 ** an imposter table are created, or zero otherwise.
 **
 ** An imposter table is required in all cases except RBU_PK_VTAB. Only
-** virtual tables are written to directly. The imposter table has the 
-** same schema as the actual target table (less any UNIQUE constraints). 
-** More precisely, the "same schema" means the same columns, types, 
+** virtual tables are written to directly. The imposter table has the
+** same schema as the actual target table (less any UNIQUE constraints).
+** More precisely, the "same schema" means the same columns, types,
 ** collation sequences. For tables that do not have an external PRIMARY
 ** KEY, it also means the same PRIMARY KEY declaration.
 */
@@ -172697,7 +172697,7 @@ static void rbuCreateImposterTable(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
         ** "PRIMARY KEY" to the imposter table column declaration. */
         zPk = "PRIMARY KEY ";
       }
-      zSql = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\" %s %sCOLLATE %s%s", 
+      zSql = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\" %s %sCOLLATE %s%s",
           zSql, zComma, zCol, pIter->azTblType[iCol], zPk, zColl,
           (pIter->abNotNull[iCol] ? " NOT NULL" : "")
       );
@@ -172712,8 +172712,8 @@ static void rbuCreateImposterTable(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
     }
 
     sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_IMPOSTER, p->dbMain, "main", 1, tnum);
-    rbuMPrintfExec(p, p->dbMain, "CREATE TABLE \"rbu_imp_%w\"(%z)%s", 
-        pIter->zTbl, zSql, 
+    rbuMPrintfExec(p, p->dbMain, "CREATE TABLE \"rbu_imp_%w\"(%z)%s",
+        pIter->zTbl, zSql,
         (pIter->eType==RBU_PK_WITHOUT_ROWID ? " WITHOUT ROWID" : "")
     );
     sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_IMPOSTER, p->dbMain, "main", 0, 0);
@@ -172727,12 +172727,12 @@ static void rbuCreateImposterTable(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
 **     INSERT INTO rbu_tmp_xxx VALUES(?, ?, ? ...);
 **
 ** The number of bound variables is equal to the number of columns in
-** the target table, plus one (for the rbu_control column), plus one more 
-** (for the rbu_rowid column) if the target table is an implicit IPK or 
+** the target table, plus one (for the rbu_control column), plus one more
+** (for the rbu_rowid column) if the target table is an implicit IPK or
 ** virtual table.
 */
 static void rbuObjIterPrepareTmpInsert(
-  sqlite3rbu *p, 
+  sqlite3rbu *p,
   RbuObjIter *pIter,
   const char *zCollist,
   const char *zRbuRowid
@@ -172743,14 +172743,14 @@ static void rbuObjIterPrepareTmpInsert(
     assert( pIter->pTmpInsert==0 );
     p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(
         p->dbRbu, &pIter->pTmpInsert, &p->zErrmsg, sqlite3_mprintf(
-          "INSERT INTO %s.'rbu_tmp_%q'(rbu_control,%s%s) VALUES(%z)", 
+          "INSERT INTO %s.'rbu_tmp_%q'(rbu_control,%s%s) VALUES(%z)",
           p->zStateDb, pIter->zDataTbl, zCollist, zRbuRowid, zBind
     ));
   }
 }
 
 static void rbuTmpInsertFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nVal,
   sqlite3_value **apVal
 ){
@@ -172759,8 +172759,8 @@ static void rbuTmpInsertFunc(
   int i;
 
   assert( sqlite3_value_int(apVal[0])!=0
-      || p->objiter.eType==RBU_PK_EXTERNAL 
-      || p->objiter.eType==RBU_PK_NONE 
+      || p->objiter.eType==RBU_PK_EXTERNAL
+      || p->objiter.eType==RBU_PK_NONE
   );
   if( sqlite3_value_int(apVal[0])!=0 ){
     p->nPhaseOneStep += p->objiter.nIndex;
@@ -172780,12 +172780,12 @@ static void rbuTmpInsertFunc(
 }
 
 /*
-** Ensure that the SQLite statement handles required to update the 
-** target database object currently indicated by the iterator passed 
+** Ensure that the SQLite statement handles required to update the
+** target database object currently indicated by the iterator passed
 ** as the second argument are available.
 */
 static int rbuObjIterPrepareAll(
-  sqlite3rbu *p, 
+  sqlite3rbu *p,
   RbuObjIter *pIter,
   int nOffset                     /* Add "LIMIT -1 OFFSET $nOffset" to SELECT */
 ){
@@ -172848,7 +172848,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterPrepareAll(
         if( rbuIsVacuum(p) ){
           zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(
               "SELECT %s, 0 AS rbu_control FROM '%q' ORDER BY %s%s",
-              zCollist, 
+              zCollist,
               pIter->zDataTbl,
               zCollist, zLimit
           );
@@ -172867,8 +172867,8 @@ static int rbuObjIterPrepareAll(
               "SELECT %s, rbu_control FROM '%q' "
               "WHERE typeof(rbu_control)='integer' AND rbu_control!=1 "
               "ORDER BY %s%s",
-              zCollist, p->zStateDb, pIter->zDataTbl, 
-              zCollist, pIter->zDataTbl, 
+              zCollist, p->zStateDb, pIter->zDataTbl,
+              zCollist, pIter->zDataTbl,
               zCollist, zLimit
           );
         }
@@ -172903,7 +172903,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterPrepareAll(
       if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pIter->pInsert, pz,
             sqlite3_mprintf(
-              "INSERT INTO \"%s%w\"(%s%s) VALUES(%s)", 
+              "INSERT INTO \"%s%w\"(%s%s) VALUES(%s)",
               zWrite, zTbl, zCollist, (bRbuRowid ? ", _rowid_" : ""), zBindings
             )
         );
@@ -172976,8 +172976,8 @@ static int rbuObjIterPrepareAll(
         }
         p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pIter->pSelect, pz,
             sqlite3_mprintf(
-              "SELECT %s,%s rbu_control%s FROM '%q'%s", 
-              zCollist, 
+              "SELECT %s,%s rbu_control%s FROM '%q'%s",
+              zCollist,
               (rbuIsVacuum(p) ? "0 AS " : ""),
               zRbuRowid,
               pIter->zDataTbl, zLimit
@@ -172993,16 +172993,16 @@ static int rbuObjIterPrepareAll(
     sqlite3_free(zCollist);
     sqlite3_free(zLimit);
   }
-  
+
   return p->rc;
 }
 
 /*
 ** Set output variable *ppStmt to point to an UPDATE statement that may
 ** be used to update the imposter table for the main table b-tree of the
-** table object that pIter currently points to, assuming that the 
+** table object that pIter currently points to, assuming that the
 ** rbu_control column of the data_xyz table contains zMask.
-** 
+**
 ** If the zMask string does not specify any columns to update, then this
 ** is not an error. Output variable *ppStmt is set to NULL in this case.
 */
@@ -173029,7 +173029,7 @@ static int rbuGetUpdateStmt(
       *pp = pUp->pNext;
       pUp->pNext = pIter->pRbuUpdate;
       pIter->pRbuUpdate = pUp;
-      *ppStmt = pUp->pUpdate; 
+      *ppStmt = pUp->pUpdate;
       return SQLITE_OK;
     }
     nUp++;
@@ -173059,7 +173059,7 @@ static int rbuGetUpdateStmt(
       const char *zPrefix = "";
 
       if( pIter->eType!=RBU_PK_VTAB ) zPrefix = "rbu_imp_";
-      zUpdate = sqlite3_mprintf("UPDATE \"%s%w\" SET %s WHERE %s", 
+      zUpdate = sqlite3_mprintf("UPDATE \"%s%w\" SET %s WHERE %s",
           zPrefix, pIter->zTbl, zSet, zWhere
       );
       p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(
@@ -173075,8 +173075,8 @@ static int rbuGetUpdateStmt(
 }
 
 static sqlite3 *rbuOpenDbhandle(
-  sqlite3rbu *p, 
-  const char *zName, 
+  sqlite3rbu *p,
+  const char *zName,
   int bUseVfs
 ){
   sqlite3 *db = 0;
@@ -173104,8 +173104,8 @@ static void rbuFreeState(RbuState *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Allocate an RbuState object and load the contents of the rbu_state 
-** table into it. Return a pointer to the new object. It is the 
+** Allocate an RbuState object and load the contents of the rbu_state
+** table into it. Return a pointer to the new object. It is the
 ** responsibility of the caller to eventually free the object using
 ** sqlite3_free().
 **
@@ -173121,7 +173121,7 @@ static RbuState *rbuLoadState(sqlite3rbu *p){
   pRet = (RbuState*)rbuMalloc(p, sizeof(RbuState));
   if( pRet==0 ) return 0;
 
-  rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg, 
+  rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
       sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT k, v FROM %s.rbu_state", p->zStateDb)
   );
   while( rc==SQLITE_OK && SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){
@@ -173227,7 +173227,7 @@ static void rbuOpenDatabase(sqlite3rbu *p, int *pbRetry){
       p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pCnt, &p->zErrmsg,
           "SELECT count(*) FROM stat.sqlite_master"
       );
-      if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK 
+      if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK
        && sqlite3_step(pCnt)==SQLITE_ROW
        && 1==sqlite3_column_int(pCnt, 0)
       ){
@@ -173240,7 +173240,7 @@ static void rbuOpenDatabase(sqlite3rbu *p, int *pbRetry){
         p->rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
         p->zErrmsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid state database");
       }
-    
+
       if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         p->rc = sqlite3_exec(p->dbRbu, "COMMIT", 0, 0, 0);
       }
@@ -173294,7 +173294,7 @@ static void rbuOpenDatabase(sqlite3rbu *p, int *pbRetry){
         if( *zExtra=='\0' ) zExtra = 0;
       }
 
-      zTarget = sqlite3_mprintf("file:%s-vacuum?rbu_memory=1%s%s", 
+      zTarget = sqlite3_mprintf("file:%s-vacuum?rbu_memory=1%s%s",
           sqlite3_db_filename(p->dbRbu, "main"),
           (zExtra==0 ? "" : "&"), (zExtra==0 ? "" : zExtra)
       );
@@ -173309,19 +173309,19 @@ static void rbuOpenDatabase(sqlite3rbu *p, int *pbRetry){
   }
 
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    p->rc = sqlite3_create_function(p->dbMain, 
+    p->rc = sqlite3_create_function(p->dbMain,
         "rbu_tmp_insert", -1, SQLITE_UTF8, (void*)p, rbuTmpInsertFunc, 0, 0
     );
   }
 
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    p->rc = sqlite3_create_function(p->dbMain, 
+    p->rc = sqlite3_create_function(p->dbMain,
         "rbu_fossil_delta", 2, SQLITE_UTF8, 0, rbuFossilDeltaFunc, 0, 0
     );
   }
 
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    p->rc = sqlite3_create_function(p->dbRbu, 
+    p->rc = sqlite3_create_function(p->dbRbu,
         "rbu_target_name", -1, SQLITE_UTF8, (void*)p, rbuTargetNameFunc, 0, 0
     );
   }
@@ -173331,7 +173331,7 @@ static void rbuOpenDatabase(sqlite3rbu *p, int *pbRetry){
   }
   rbuMPrintfExec(p, p->dbMain, "SELECT * FROM sqlite_master");
 
-  /* Mark the database file just opened as an RBU target database. If 
+  /* Mark the database file just opened as an RBU target database. If
   ** this call returns SQLITE_NOTFOUND, then the RBU vfs is not in use.
   ** This is an error.  */
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -173379,10 +173379,10 @@ static void rbuFileSuffix3(const char *zBase, char *z){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the current wal-index header checksum for the target database 
+** Return the current wal-index header checksum for the target database
 ** as a 64-bit integer.
 **
-** The checksum is store in the first page of xShmMap memory as an 8-byte 
+** The checksum is store in the first page of xShmMap memory as an 8-byte
 ** blob starting at byte offset 40.
 */
 static i64 rbuShmChecksum(sqlite3rbu *p){
@@ -173400,11 +173400,11 @@ static i64 rbuShmChecksum(sqlite3rbu *p){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called as part of initializing or reinitializing an
-** incremental checkpoint. 
+** incremental checkpoint.
 **
-** It populates the sqlite3rbu.aFrame[] array with the set of 
-** (wal frame -> db page) copy operations required to checkpoint the 
-** current wal file, and obtains the set of shm locks required to safely 
+** It populates the sqlite3rbu.aFrame[] array with the set of
+** (wal frame -> db page) copy operations required to checkpoint the
+** current wal file, and obtains the set of shm locks required to safely
 ** perform the copy operations directly on the file-system.
 **
 ** If argument pState is not NULL, then the incremental checkpoint is
@@ -173439,19 +173439,19 @@ static void rbuSetupCheckpoint(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuState *pState){
   **     would be read/written are recorded in the sqlite3rbu.aFrame[]
   **     array.
   **
-  **   * Calls to xShmLock(UNLOCK) to release the exclusive shm WRITER, 
+  **   * Calls to xShmLock(UNLOCK) to release the exclusive shm WRITER,
   **     READ0 and CHECKPOINT locks taken as part of the checkpoint are
   **     no-ops. These locks will not be released until the connection
   **     is closed.
   **
-  **   * Attempting to xSync() the database file causes an SQLITE_INTERNAL 
+  **   * Attempting to xSync() the database file causes an SQLITE_INTERNAL
   **     error.
   **
   ** As a result, unless an error (i.e. OOM or SQLITE_BUSY) occurs, the
   ** checkpoint below fails with SQLITE_INTERNAL, and leaves the aFrame[]
-  ** array populated with a set of (frame -> page) mappings. Because the 
-  ** WRITER, CHECKPOINT and READ0 locks are still held, it is safe to copy 
-  ** data from the wal file into the database file according to the 
+  ** array populated with a set of (frame -> page) mappings. Because the
+  ** WRITER, CHECKPOINT and READ0 locks are still held, it is safe to copy
+  ** data from the wal file into the database file according to the
   ** contents of aFrame[].
   */
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -173484,9 +173484,9 @@ static void rbuSetupCheckpoint(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuState *pState){
         p->nPagePerSector = 1;
       }
 
-      /* Call xSync() on the wal file. This causes SQLite to sync the 
-      ** directory in which the target database and the wal file reside, in 
-      ** case it has not been synced since the rename() call in 
+      /* Call xSync() on the wal file. This causes SQLite to sync the
+      ** directory in which the target database and the wal file reside, in
+      ** case it has not been synced since the rename() call in
       ** rbuMoveOalFile(). */
       p->rc = pWal->pMethods->xSync(pWal, SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL);
     }
@@ -173527,7 +173527,7 @@ static int rbuCaptureWalRead(sqlite3rbu *pRbu, i64 iOff, int iAmt){
 
 /*
 ** Called when a page of data is written to offset iOff of the database
-** file while the rbu handle is in capture mode. Record the page number 
+** file while the rbu handle is in capture mode. Record the page number
 ** of the page being written in the aFrame[] array.
 */
 static int rbuCaptureDbWrite(sqlite3rbu *pRbu, i64 iOff){
@@ -173595,7 +173595,7 @@ static LPWSTR rbuWinUtf8ToUnicode(const char *zFilename){
 ** The RBU handle is currently in RBU_STAGE_OAL state, with a SHARED lock
 ** on the database file. This proc moves the *-oal file to the *-wal path,
 ** then reopens the database file (this time in vanilla, non-oal, WAL mode).
-** If an error occurs, leave an error code and error message in the rbu 
+** If an error occurs, leave an error code and error message in the rbu
 ** handle.
 */
 static void rbuMoveOalFile(sqlite3rbu *p){
@@ -173617,7 +173617,7 @@ static void rbuMoveOalFile(sqlite3rbu *p){
   }else{
     /* Move the *-oal file to *-wal. At this point connection p->db is
     ** holding a SHARED lock on the target database file (because it is
-    ** in WAL mode). So no other connection may be writing the db. 
+    ** in WAL mode). So no other connection may be writing the db.
     **
     ** In order to ensure that there are no database readers, an EXCLUSIVE
     ** lock is obtained here before the *-oal is moved to *-wal.
@@ -173775,8 +173775,8 @@ static void rbuStepOneOp(sqlite3rbu *p, int eType){
     /* If this is an INSERT into a table b-tree and the table has an
     ** explicit INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, check that this is not an attempt
     ** to write a NULL into the IPK column. That is not permitted.  */
-    if( eType==RBU_INSERT 
-     && pIter->zIdx==0 && pIter->eType==RBU_PK_IPK && pIter->abTblPk[i] 
+    if( eType==RBU_INSERT
+     && pIter->zIdx==0 && pIter->eType==RBU_PK_IPK && pIter->abTblPk[i]
      && sqlite3_column_type(pIter->pSelect, i)==SQLITE_NULL
     ){
       p->rc = SQLITE_MISMATCH;
@@ -173793,18 +173793,18 @@ static void rbuStepOneOp(sqlite3rbu *p, int eType){
     if( p->rc ) return;
   }
   if( pIter->zIdx==0 ){
-    if( pIter->eType==RBU_PK_VTAB 
-     || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_NONE 
-     || (pIter->eType==RBU_PK_EXTERNAL && rbuIsVacuum(p)) 
+    if( pIter->eType==RBU_PK_VTAB
+     || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_NONE
+     || (pIter->eType==RBU_PK_EXTERNAL && rbuIsVacuum(p))
     ){
-      /* For a virtual table, or a table with no primary key, the 
+      /* For a virtual table, or a table with no primary key, the
       ** SELECT statement is:
       **
       **   SELECT <cols>, rbu_control, rbu_rowid FROM ....
       **
       ** Hence column_value(pIter->nCol+1).
       */
-      assertColumnName(pIter->pSelect, pIter->nCol+1, 
+      assertColumnName(pIter->pSelect, pIter->nCol+1,
           rbuIsVacuum(p) ? "rowid" : "rbu_rowid"
       );
       pVal = sqlite3_column_value(pIter->pSelect, pIter->nCol+1);
@@ -173868,8 +173868,8 @@ static int rbuStep(sqlite3rbu *p){
             p->rc = sqlite3_bind_value(pUpdate, i+1, pVal);
           }
         }
-        if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK 
-         && (pIter->eType==RBU_PK_VTAB || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_NONE) 
+        if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK
+         && (pIter->eType==RBU_PK_VTAB || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_NONE)
         ){
           /* Bind the rbu_rowid value to column _rowid_ */
           assertColumnName(pIter->pSelect, pIter->nCol+1, "rbu_rowid");
@@ -173899,7 +173899,7 @@ static void rbuIncrSchemaCookie(sqlite3rbu *p){
     int iCookie = 1000000;
     sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
 
-    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(dbread, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg, 
+    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(dbread, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
         "PRAGMA schema_version"
     );
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -173931,7 +173931,7 @@ static void rbuSaveState(sqlite3rbu *p, int eStage){
     int rc;
 
     assert( p->zErrmsg==0 );
-    rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pInsert, &p->zErrmsg, 
+    rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pInsert, &p->zErrmsg,
         sqlite3_mprintf(
           "INSERT OR REPLACE INTO %s.rbu_state(k, v) VALUES "
           "(%d, %d), "
@@ -173945,9 +173945,9 @@ static void rbuSaveState(sqlite3rbu *p, int eStage){
           "(%d, %lld) ",
           p->zStateDb,
           RBU_STATE_STAGE, eStage,
-          RBU_STATE_TBL, p->objiter.zTbl, 
-          RBU_STATE_IDX, p->objiter.zIdx, 
-          RBU_STATE_ROW, p->nStep, 
+          RBU_STATE_TBL, p->objiter.zTbl,
+          RBU_STATE_IDX, p->objiter.zIdx,
+          RBU_STATE_ROW, p->nStep,
           RBU_STATE_PROGRESS, p->nProgress,
           RBU_STATE_CKPT, p->iWalCksum,
           RBU_STATE_COOKIE, (i64)pFd->iCookie,
@@ -173967,7 +173967,7 @@ static void rbuSaveState(sqlite3rbu *p, int eStage){
 
 
 /*
-** The second argument passed to this function is the name of a PRAGMA 
+** The second argument passed to this function is the name of a PRAGMA
 ** setting - "page_size", "auto_vacuum", "user_version" or "application_id".
 ** This function executes the following on sqlite3rbu.dbRbu:
 **
@@ -173986,7 +173986,7 @@ static void rbuSaveState(sqlite3rbu *p, int eStage){
 static void rbuCopyPragma(sqlite3rbu *p, const char *zPragma){
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     sqlite3_stmt *pPragma = 0;
-    p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pPragma, &p->zErrmsg, 
+    p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pPragma, &p->zErrmsg,
         sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA main.%s", zPragma)
     );
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK && SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pPragma) ){
@@ -173999,7 +173999,7 @@ static void rbuCopyPragma(sqlite3rbu *p, const char *zPragma){
 }
 
 /*
-** The RBU handle passed as the only argument has just been opened and 
+** The RBU handle passed as the only argument has just been opened and
 ** the state database is empty. If this RBU handle was opened for an
 ** RBU vacuum operation, create the schema in the target db.
 */
@@ -174010,7 +174010,7 @@ static void rbuCreateTargetSchema(sqlite3rbu *p){
   assert( rbuIsVacuum(p) );
   p->rc = sqlite3_exec(p->dbMain, "PRAGMA writable_schema=1", 0,0, &p->zErrmsg);
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pSql, &p->zErrmsg, 
+    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pSql, &p->zErrmsg,
       "SELECT sql FROM sqlite_master WHERE sql!='' AND rootpage!=0"
       " AND name!='sqlite_sequence' "
       " ORDER BY type DESC"
@@ -174025,13 +174025,13 @@ static void rbuCreateTargetSchema(sqlite3rbu *p){
   if( p->rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return;
 
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pSql, &p->zErrmsg, 
-        "SELECT * FROM sqlite_master WHERE rootpage=0 OR rootpage IS NULL" 
+    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pSql, &p->zErrmsg,
+        "SELECT * FROM sqlite_master WHERE rootpage=0 OR rootpage IS NULL"
     );
   }
 
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pInsert, &p->zErrmsg, 
+    p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pInsert, &p->zErrmsg,
         "INSERT INTO sqlite_master VALUES(?,?,?,?,?)"
     );
   }
@@ -174072,11 +174072,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *p){
         while( p->rc==SQLITE_OK && pIter->zTbl ){
 
           if( pIter->bCleanup ){
-            /* Clean up the rbu_tmp_xxx table for the previous table. It 
+            /* Clean up the rbu_tmp_xxx table for the previous table. It
             ** cannot be dropped as there are currently active SQL statements.
             ** But the contents can be deleted.  */
             if( rbuIsVacuum(p)==0 && pIter->abIndexed ){
-              rbuMPrintfExec(p, p->dbRbu, 
+              rbuMPrintfExec(p, p->dbRbu,
                   "DELETE FROM %s.'rbu_tmp_%q'", p->zStateDb, pIter->zDataTbl
               );
             }
@@ -174126,10 +174126,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *p){
         if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
           if( p->nStep>=p->nFrame ){
             sqlite3_file *pDb = p->pTargetFd->pReal;
-  
+
             /* Sync the db file */
             p->rc = pDb->pMethods->xSync(pDb, SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL);
-  
+
             /* Update nBackfill */
             if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
               void volatile *ptr;
@@ -174138,7 +174138,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *p){
                 ((u32 volatile*)ptr)[24] = p->iMaxFrame;
               }
             }
-  
+
             if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
               p->eStage = RBU_STAGE_DONE;
               p->rc = SQLITE_DONE;
@@ -174146,7 +174146,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *p){
           }else{
             /* At one point the following block copied a single frame from the
             ** wal file to the database file. So that one call to sqlite3rbu_step()
-            ** checkpointed a single frame. 
+            ** checkpointed a single frame.
             **
             ** However, if the sector-size is larger than the page-size, and the
             ** application calls sqlite3rbu_savestate() or close() immediately
@@ -174160,7 +174160,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *p){
               iSector = (pFrame->iDbPage-1) / p->nPagePerSector;
               rbuCheckpointFrame(p, pFrame);
               p->nStep++;
-            }while( p->nStep<p->nFrame 
+            }while( p->nStep<p->nFrame
                  && iSector==((p->aFrame[p->nStep].iDbPage-1) / p->nPagePerSector)
                  && p->rc==SQLITE_OK
             );
@@ -174206,9 +174206,9 @@ static void rbuSetupOal(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuState *pState){
     RbuObjIter *pIter = &p->objiter;
     int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
-    while( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIter->zTbl && (pIter->bCleanup 
+    while( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIter->zTbl && (pIter->bCleanup
        || rbuStrCompare(pIter->zIdx, pState->zIdx)
-       || rbuStrCompare(pIter->zTbl, pState->zTbl) 
+       || rbuStrCompare(pIter->zTbl, pState->zTbl)
     )){
       rc = rbuObjIterNext(p, pIter);
     }
@@ -174281,7 +174281,7 @@ static void rbuDeleteVfs(sqlite3rbu *p){
 ** the number of auxilliary indexes on the table.
 */
 static void rbuIndexCntFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nVal,
   sqlite3_value **apVal
 ){
@@ -174291,8 +174291,8 @@ static void rbuIndexCntFunc(
   int rc;
 
   assert( nVal==1 );
-  
-  rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pStmt, &zErrmsg, 
+
+  rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pStmt, &zErrmsg,
       sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT count(*) FROM sqlite_master "
         "WHERE type='index' AND tbl_name = %Q", sqlite3_value_text(apVal[0]))
   );
@@ -174326,7 +174326,7 @@ static void rbuIndexCntFunc(
 ** and the cnt column the number of rows it contains.
 **
 ** sqlite3rbu.nPhaseOneStep is initialized to the sum of (1 + nIndex) * cnt
-** for all rows in the rbu_count table, where nIndex is the number of 
+** for all rows in the rbu_count table, where nIndex is the number of
 ** indexes on the corresponding target database table.
 */
 static void rbuInitPhaseOneSteps(sqlite3rbu *p){
@@ -174336,10 +174336,10 @@ static void rbuInitPhaseOneSteps(sqlite3rbu *p){
 
     p->nPhaseOneStep = -1;
 
-    p->rc = sqlite3_create_function(p->dbRbu, 
+    p->rc = sqlite3_create_function(p->dbRbu,
         "rbu_index_cnt", 1, SQLITE_UTF8, (void*)p, rbuIndexCntFunc, 0, 0
     );
-  
+
     /* Check for the rbu_count table. If it does not exist, or if an error
     ** occurs, nPhaseOneStep will be left set to -1. */
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -174353,7 +174353,7 @@ static void rbuInitPhaseOneSteps(sqlite3rbu *p){
       }
       p->rc = sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
     }
-  
+
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK && bExists ){
       p->rc = prepareAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
           "SELECT sum(cnt * (1 + rbu_index_cnt(rbu_target_name(tbl))))"
@@ -174371,7 +174371,7 @@ static void rbuInitPhaseOneSteps(sqlite3rbu *p){
 
 
 static sqlite3rbu *openRbuHandle(
-  const char *zTarget, 
+  const char *zTarget,
   const char *zRbu,
   const char *zState
 ){
@@ -174409,7 +174409,7 @@ static sqlite3rbu *openRbuHandle(
       ** to be a wal-mode db. But, this may have happened due to an earlier
       ** RBU vacuum operation leaving an old wal file in the directory.
       ** If this is the case, it will have been checkpointed and deleted
-      ** when the handle was closed and a second attempt to open the 
+      ** when the handle was closed and a second attempt to open the
       ** database may succeed.  */
       rbuOpenDatabase(p, &bRetry);
       if( bRetry ){
@@ -174422,7 +174422,7 @@ static sqlite3rbu *openRbuHandle(
       assert( pState || p->rc!=SQLITE_OK );
       if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
 
-        if( pState->eStage==0 ){ 
+        if( pState->eStage==0 ){
           rbuDeleteOalFile(p);
           rbuInitPhaseOneSteps(p);
           p->eStage = RBU_STAGE_OAL;
@@ -174446,15 +174446,15 @@ static sqlite3rbu *openRbuHandle(
       }
     }
 
-    if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK 
+    if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK
      && (p->eStage==RBU_STAGE_OAL || p->eStage==RBU_STAGE_MOVE)
      && pState->eStage!=0
     ){
       rbu_file *pFd = (rbuIsVacuum(p) ? p->pRbuFd : p->pTargetFd);
-      if( pFd->iCookie!=pState->iCookie ){   
+      if( pFd->iCookie!=pState->iCookie ){
         /* At this point (pTargetFd->iCookie) contains the value of the
-        ** change-counter cookie (the thing that gets incremented when a 
-        ** transaction is committed in rollback mode) currently stored on 
+        ** change-counter cookie (the thing that gets incremented when a
+        ** transaction is committed in rollback mode) currently stored on
         ** page 1 of the database file. */
         p->rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
         p->zErrmsg = sqlite3_mprintf("database modified during rbu %s",
@@ -174491,7 +174491,7 @@ static sqlite3rbu *openRbuHandle(
           }
 
           /* Check if the main database is a zipvfs db. If it is, set the upper
-          ** level pager to use "journal_mode=off". This prevents it from 
+          ** level pager to use "journal_mode=off". This prevents it from
           ** generating a large journal using a temp file.  */
           if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
             int frc = sqlite3_file_control(db, "main", SQLITE_FCNTL_ZIPVFS, 0);
@@ -174537,10 +174537,10 @@ static sqlite3rbu *rbuMisuseError(void){
 }
 
 /*
-** Open and return a new RBU handle. 
+** Open and return a new RBU handle.
 */
 SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_open(
-  const char *zTarget, 
+  const char *zTarget,
   const char *zRbu,
   const char *zState
 ){
@@ -174553,7 +174553,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_open(
 ** Open a handle to begin or resume an RBU VACUUM operation.
 */
 SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_vacuum(
-  const char *zTarget, 
+  const char *zTarget,
   const char *zState
 ){
   if( zTarget==0 ){ return rbuMisuseError(); }
@@ -174621,8 +174621,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_close(sqlite3rbu *p, char **pzErrmsg){
     rbuObjIterFinalize(&p->objiter);
 
     /* If this is an RBU vacuum handle and the vacuum has either finished
-    ** successfully or encountered an error, delete the contents of the 
-    ** state table. This causes the next call to sqlite3rbu_vacuum() 
+    ** successfully or encountered an error, delete the contents of the
+    ** state table. This causes the next call to sqlite3rbu_vacuum()
     ** specifying the current target and state databases to start a new
     ** vacuum from scratch.  */
     if( rbuIsVacuum(p) && p->rc!=SQLITE_OK && p->dbRbu ){
@@ -174655,7 +174655,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_close(sqlite3rbu *p, char **pzErrmsg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the total number of key-value operations (inserts, deletes or 
+** Return the total number of key-value operations (inserts, deletes or
 ** updates) that have been performed on the target database since the
 ** current RBU update was started.
 */
@@ -174765,7 +174765,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_savestate(sqlite3rbu *p){
 ** Beginning of RBU VFS shim methods. The VFS shim modifies the behaviour
 ** of a standard VFS in the following ways:
 **
-** 1. Whenever the first page of a main database file is read or 
+** 1. Whenever the first page of a main database file is read or
 **    written, the value of the change-counter cookie is stored in
 **    rbu_file.iCookie. Similarly, the value of the "write-version"
 **    database header field is stored in rbu_file.iWriteVer. This ensures
@@ -174773,15 +174773,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_savestate(sqlite3rbu *p){
 **
 ** 2. Whenever an SQLITE_OPEN_WAL file is opened, the (rbu_file.pWalFd)
 **    member variable of the associated database file descriptor is set
-**    to point to the new file. A mutex protected linked list of all main 
-**    db fds opened using a particular RBU VFS is maintained at 
+**    to point to the new file. A mutex protected linked list of all main
+**    db fds opened using a particular RBU VFS is maintained at
 **    rbu_vfs.pMain to facilitate this.
 **
-** 3. Using a new file-control "SQLITE_FCNTL_RBU", a main db rbu_file 
+** 3. Using a new file-control "SQLITE_FCNTL_RBU", a main db rbu_file
 **    object can be marked as the target database of an RBU update. This
 **    turns on the following extra special behaviour:
 **
-** 3a. If xAccess() is called to check if there exists a *-wal file 
+** 3a. If xAccess() is called to check if there exists a *-wal file
 **     associated with an RBU target database currently in RBU_STAGE_OAL
 **     stage (preparing the *-oal file), the following special handling
 **     applies:
@@ -174794,26 +174794,26 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_savestate(sqlite3rbu *p){
 **
 **     Then, when xOpen() is called to open the *-wal file associated with
 **     the RBU target in RBU_STAGE_OAL stage, instead of opening the *-wal
-**     file, the rbu vfs opens the corresponding *-oal file instead. 
+**     file, the rbu vfs opens the corresponding *-oal file instead.
 **
 ** 3b. The *-shm pages returned by xShmMap() for a target db file in
 **     RBU_STAGE_OAL mode are actually stored in heap memory. This is to
 **     avoid creating a *-shm file on disk. Additionally, xShmLock() calls
 **     are no-ops on target database files in RBU_STAGE_OAL mode. This is
-**     because assert() statements in some VFS implementations fail if 
+**     because assert() statements in some VFS implementations fail if
 **     xShmLock() is called before xShmMap().
 **
 ** 3c. If an EXCLUSIVE lock is attempted on a target database file in any
-**     mode except RBU_STAGE_DONE (all work completed and checkpointed), it 
+**     mode except RBU_STAGE_DONE (all work completed and checkpointed), it
 **     fails with an SQLITE_BUSY error. This is to stop RBU connections
 **     from automatically checkpointing a *-wal (or *-oal) file from within
 **     sqlite3_close().
 **
 ** 3d. In RBU_STAGE_CAPTURE mode, all xRead() calls on the wal file, and
-**     all xWrite() calls on the target database file perform no IO. 
+**     all xWrite() calls on the target database file perform no IO.
 **     Instead the frame and page numbers that would be read and written
 **     are recorded. Additionally, successful attempts to obtain exclusive
-**     xShmLock() WRITER, CHECKPOINTER and READ0 locks on the target 
+**     xShmLock() WRITER, CHECKPOINTER and READ0 locks on the target
 **     database file are recorded. xShmLock() calls to unlock the same
 **     locks are no-ops (so that once obtained, these locks are never
 **     relinquished). Finally, calls to xSync() on the target database
@@ -174882,7 +174882,7 @@ static int rbuVfsClose(sqlite3_file *pFile){
 
 
 /*
-** Read and return an unsigned 32-bit big-endian integer from the buffer 
+** Read and return an unsigned 32-bit big-endian integer from the buffer
 ** passed as the only argument.
 */
 static u32 rbuGetU32(u8 *aBuf){
@@ -174912,9 +174912,9 @@ static void rbuPutU16(u8 *aBuf, u16 iVal){
 ** Read data from an rbuVfs-file.
 */
 static int rbuVfsRead(
-  sqlite3_file *pFile, 
-  void *zBuf, 
-  int iAmt, 
+  sqlite3_file *pFile,
+  void *zBuf,
+  int iAmt,
   sqlite_int64 iOfst
 ){
   rbu_file *p = (rbu_file*)pFile;
@@ -174925,20 +174925,20 @@ static int rbuVfsRead(
     assert( p->openFlags & SQLITE_OPEN_WAL );
     rc = rbuCaptureWalRead(p->pRbu, iOfst, iAmt);
   }else{
-    if( pRbu && pRbu->eStage==RBU_STAGE_OAL 
-     && (p->openFlags & SQLITE_OPEN_WAL) 
-     && iOfst>=pRbu->iOalSz 
+    if( pRbu && pRbu->eStage==RBU_STAGE_OAL
+     && (p->openFlags & SQLITE_OPEN_WAL)
+     && iOfst>=pRbu->iOalSz
     ){
       rc = SQLITE_OK;
       memset(zBuf, 0, iAmt);
     }else{
       rc = p->pReal->pMethods->xRead(p->pReal, zBuf, iAmt, iOfst);
 #if 1
-      /* If this is being called to read the first page of the target 
-      ** database as part of an rbu vacuum operation, synthesize the 
+      /* If this is being called to read the first page of the target
+      ** database as part of an rbu vacuum operation, synthesize the
       ** contents of the first page if it does not yet exist. Otherwise,
       ** SQLite will not check for a *-wal file.  */
-      if( pRbu && rbuIsVacuum(pRbu) 
+      if( pRbu && rbuIsVacuum(pRbu)
           && rc==SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ && iOfst==0
           && (p->openFlags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB)
           && pRbu->rc==SQLITE_OK
@@ -174978,9 +174978,9 @@ static int rbuVfsRead(
 ** Write data to an rbuVfs-file.
 */
 static int rbuVfsWrite(
-  sqlite3_file *pFile, 
-  const void *zBuf, 
-  int iAmt, 
+  sqlite3_file *pFile,
+  const void *zBuf,
+  int iAmt,
   sqlite_int64 iOfst
 ){
   rbu_file *p = (rbu_file*)pFile;
@@ -174992,8 +174992,8 @@ static int rbuVfsWrite(
     rc = rbuCaptureDbWrite(p->pRbu, iOfst);
   }else{
     if( pRbu ){
-      if( pRbu->eStage==RBU_STAGE_OAL 
-       && (p->openFlags & SQLITE_OPEN_WAL) 
+      if( pRbu->eStage==RBU_STAGE_OAL
+       && (p->openFlags & SQLITE_OPEN_WAL)
        && iOfst>=pRbu->iOalSz
       ){
         pRbu->iOalSz = iAmt + iOfst;
@@ -175053,10 +175053,10 @@ static int rbuVfsFileSize(sqlite3_file *pFile, sqlite_int64 *pSize){
 
   /* If this is an RBU vacuum operation and this is the target database,
   ** pretend that it has at least one page. Otherwise, SQLite will not
-  ** check for the existance of a *-wal file. rbuVfsRead() contains 
+  ** check for the existance of a *-wal file. rbuVfsRead() contains
   ** similar logic.  */
-  if( rc==SQLITE_OK && *pSize==0 
-   && p->pRbu && rbuIsVacuum(p->pRbu) 
+  if( rc==SQLITE_OK && *pSize==0
+   && p->pRbu && rbuIsVacuum(p->pRbu)
    && (p->openFlags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB)
   ){
     *pSize = 1024;
@@ -175073,10 +175073,10 @@ static int rbuVfsLock(sqlite3_file *pFile, int eLock){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
   assert( p->openFlags & (SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB|SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB) );
-  if( eLock==SQLITE_LOCK_EXCLUSIVE 
+  if( eLock==SQLITE_LOCK_EXCLUSIVE
    && (p->bNolock || (pRbu && pRbu->eStage!=RBU_STAGE_DONE))
   ){
-    /* Do not allow EXCLUSIVE locks. Preventing SQLite from taking this 
+    /* Do not allow EXCLUSIVE locks. Preventing SQLite from taking this
     ** prevents it from checkpointing the database from sqlite3_close(). */
     rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
   }else{
@@ -175188,8 +175188,8 @@ static int rbuVfsShmLock(sqlite3_file *pFile, int ofst, int n, int flags){
   assert( p->openFlags & (SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB|SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB) );
   if( pRbu && (pRbu->eStage==RBU_STAGE_OAL || pRbu->eStage==RBU_STAGE_MOVE) ){
     /* Magic number 1 is the WAL_CKPT_LOCK lock. Preventing SQLite from
-    ** taking this lock also prevents any checkpoints from occurring. 
-    ** todo: really, it's not clear why this might occur, as 
+    ** taking this lock also prevents any checkpoints from occurring.
+    ** todo: really, it's not clear why this might occur, as
     ** wal_autocheckpoint ought to be turned off.  */
     if( ofst==WAL_LOCK_CKPT && n==1 ) rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
   }else{
@@ -175216,10 +175216,10 @@ static int rbuVfsShmLock(sqlite3_file *pFile, int ofst, int n, int flags){
 ** Obtain a pointer to a mapping of a single 32KiB page of the *-shm file.
 */
 static int rbuVfsShmMap(
-  sqlite3_file *pFile, 
-  int iRegion, 
-  int szRegion, 
-  int isWrite, 
+  sqlite3_file *pFile,
+  int iRegion,
+  int szRegion,
+  int isWrite,
   void volatile **pp
 ){
   rbu_file *p = (rbu_file*)pFile;
@@ -175227,7 +175227,7 @@ static int rbuVfsShmMap(
   int eStage = (p->pRbu ? p->pRbu->eStage : 0);
 
   /* If not in RBU_STAGE_OAL, allow this call to pass through. Or, if this
-  ** rbu is in the RBU_STAGE_OAL state, use heap memory for *-shm space 
+  ** rbu is in the RBU_STAGE_OAL state, use heap memory for *-shm space
   ** instead of a file on disk.  */
   assert( p->openFlags & (SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB|SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB) );
   if( eStage==RBU_STAGE_OAL || eStage==RBU_STAGE_MOVE ){
@@ -175294,7 +175294,7 @@ static int rbuVfsShmUnmap(sqlite3_file *pFile, int delFlag){
 }
 
 /*
-** Given that zWal points to a buffer containing a wal file name passed to 
+** Given that zWal points to a buffer containing a wal file name passed to
 ** either the xOpen() or xAccess() VFS method, return a pointer to the
 ** file-handle opened by the same database connection on the corresponding
 ** database file.
@@ -175307,12 +175307,12 @@ static rbu_file *rbuFindMaindb(rbu_vfs *pRbuVfs, const char *zWal){
   return pDb;
 }
 
-/* 
-** A main database named zName has just been opened. The following 
+/*
+** A main database named zName has just been opened. The following
 ** function returns a pointer to a buffer owned by SQLite that contains
 ** the name of the *-wal file this db connection will use. SQLite
 ** happens to pass a pointer to this buffer when using xAccess()
-** or xOpen() to operate on the *-wal file.  
+** or xOpen() to operate on the *-wal file.
 */
 static const char *rbuMainToWal(const char *zName, int flags){
   int n = (int)strlen(zName);
@@ -175390,7 +175390,7 @@ static int rbuVfsOpen(
         if( pDb->pRbu && pDb->pRbu->eStage==RBU_STAGE_OAL ){
           /* This call is to open a *-wal file. Intead, open the *-oal. This
           ** code ensures that the string passed to xOpen() is terminated by a
-          ** pair of '\0' bytes in case the VFS attempts to extract a URI 
+          ** pair of '\0' bytes in case the VFS attempts to extract a URI
           ** parameter from it.  */
           const char *zBase = zName;
           size_t nCopy;
@@ -175419,8 +175419,8 @@ static int rbuVfsOpen(
     pFd->pRbu = pRbuVfs->pRbu;
   }
 
-  if( oflags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB 
-   && sqlite3_uri_boolean(zName, "rbu_memory", 0) 
+  if( oflags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB
+   && sqlite3_uri_boolean(zName, "rbu_memory", 0)
   ){
     assert( oflags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB );
     oflags =  SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
@@ -175462,9 +175462,9 @@ static int rbuVfsDelete(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, const char *zPath, int dirSync){
 ** is available, or false otherwise.
 */
 static int rbuVfsAccess(
-  sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, 
-  const char *zPath, 
-  int flags, 
+  sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
+  const char *zPath,
+  int flags,
   int *pResOut
 ){
   rbu_vfs *pRbuVfs = (rbu_vfs*)pVfs;
@@ -175480,7 +175480,7 @@ static int rbuVfsAccess(
   **   a) if the *-wal file does exist, return SQLITE_CANTOPEN. This
   **      ensures that the RBU extension never tries to update a database
   **      in wal mode, even if the first page of the database file has
-  **      been damaged. 
+  **      been damaged.
   **
   **   b) if the *-wal file does not exist, claim that it does anyway,
   **      causing SQLite to call xOpen() to open it. This call will also
@@ -175509,9 +175509,9 @@ static int rbuVfsAccess(
 ** of at least (DEVSYM_MAX_PATHNAME+1) bytes.
 */
 static int rbuVfsFullPathname(
-  sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, 
-  const char *zPath, 
-  int nOut, 
+  sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
+  const char *zPath,
+  int nOut,
   char *zOut
 ){
   sqlite3_vfs *pRealVfs = ((rbu_vfs*)pVfs)->pRealVfs;
@@ -175529,7 +175529,7 @@ static void *rbuVfsDlOpen(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, const char *zPath){
 
 /*
 ** Populate the buffer zErrMsg (size nByte bytes) with a human readable
-** utf-8 string describing the most recent error encountered associated 
+** utf-8 string describing the most recent error encountered associated
 ** with dynamic libraries.
 */
 static void rbuVfsDlError(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nByte, char *zErrMsg){
@@ -175541,8 +175541,8 @@ static void rbuVfsDlError(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nByte, char *zErrMsg){
 ** Return a pointer to the symbol zSymbol in the dynamic library pHandle.
 */
 static void (*rbuVfsDlSym(
-  sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, 
-  void *pArg, 
+  sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
+  void *pArg,
   const char *zSym
 ))(void){
   sqlite3_vfs *pRealVfs = ((rbu_vfs*)pVfs)->pRealVfs;
@@ -175559,7 +175559,7 @@ static void rbuVfsDlClose(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, void *pHandle){
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_LOAD_EXTENSION */
 
 /*
-** Populate the buffer pointed to by zBufOut with nByte bytes of 
+** Populate the buffer pointed to by zBufOut with nByte bytes of
 ** random data.
 */
 static int rbuVfsRandomness(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nByte, char *zBufOut){
@@ -175568,7 +175568,7 @@ static int rbuVfsRandomness(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nByte, char *zBufOut){
 }
 
 /*
-** Sleep for nMicro microseconds. Return the number of microseconds 
+** Sleep for nMicro microseconds. Return the number of microseconds
 ** actually slept.
 */
 static int rbuVfsSleep(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nMicro){
@@ -175734,22 +175734,22 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_temp_size(sqlite3rbu *pRbu){
 
 /*
 ** Page paths:
-** 
-**   The value of the 'path' column describes the path taken from the 
-**   root-node of the b-tree structure to each page. The value of the 
+**
+**   The value of the 'path' column describes the path taken from the
+**   root-node of the b-tree structure to each page. The value of the
 **   root-node path is '/'.
 **
 **   The value of the path for the left-most child page of the root of
 **   a b-tree is '/000/'. (Btrees store content ordered from left to right
 **   so the pages to the left have smaller keys than the pages to the right.)
 **   The next to left-most child of the root page is
-**   '/001', and so on, each sibling page identified by a 3-digit hex 
+**   '/001', and so on, each sibling page identified by a 3-digit hex
 **   value. The children of the 451st left-most sibling have paths such
 **   as '/1c2/000/, '/1c2/001/' etc.
 **
-**   Overflow pages are specified by appending a '+' character and a 
+**   Overflow pages are specified by appending a '+' character and a
 **   six-digit hexadecimal value to the path to the cell they are linked
-**   from. For example, the three overflow pages in a chain linked from 
+**   from. For example, the three overflow pages in a chain linked from
 **   the left-most cell of the 450th child of the root page are identified
 **   by the paths:
 **
@@ -175920,8 +175920,8 @@ static int statBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
   }
 
 
-  /* Records are always returned in ascending order of (name, path). 
-  ** If this will satisfy the client, set the orderByConsumed flag so that 
+  /* Records are always returned in ascending order of (name, path).
+  ** If this will satisfy the client, set the orderByConsumed flag so that
   ** SQLite does not do an external sort.
   */
   if( ( pIdxInfo->nOrderBy==1
@@ -176006,7 +176006,7 @@ static void getLocalPayload(
   int nLocal;
   int nMinLocal;
   int nMaxLocal;
- 
+
   if( flags==0x0D ){              /* Table leaf node */
     nMinLocal = (nUsable - 12) * 32 / 255 - 23;
     nMaxLocal = nUsable - 35;
@@ -176099,7 +176099,7 @@ static int statDecodePage(Btree *pBt, StatPage *p){
             if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
               assert( pPg==0 );
               return rc;
-            } 
+            }
             pCell->aOvfl[j] = sqlite3Get4byte(sqlite3PagerGetData(pPg));
             sqlite3PagerUnref(pPg);
           }
@@ -176183,7 +176183,7 @@ statNextRestart:
       if( pCell->iOvfl<pCell->nOvfl ){
         int nUsable;
         sqlite3BtreeEnter(pBt);
-        nUsable = sqlite3BtreeGetPageSize(pBt) - 
+        nUsable = sqlite3BtreeGetPageSize(pBt) -
                         sqlite3BtreeGetReserveNoMutex(pBt);
         sqlite3BtreeLeave(pBt);
         pCsr->zName = (char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, 0);
@@ -176279,7 +176279,7 @@ static int statEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
 }
 
 static int statFilter(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor,
   int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
   int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
@@ -176324,8 +176324,8 @@ static int statFilter(
 }
 
 static int statColumn(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, 
-  sqlite3_context *ctx, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor,
+  sqlite3_context *ctx,
   int i
 ){
   StatCursor *pCsr = (StatCursor *)pCursor;
@@ -176428,7 +176428,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3DbstatRegister(sqlite3 *db){ return SQLITE_OK; }
 ** This file contains an implementation of the "sqlite_dbpage" virtual table.
 **
 ** The sqlite_dbpage virtual table is used to read or write whole raw
-** pages of the database file.  The pager interface is used so that 
+** pages of the database file.  The pager interface is used so that
 ** uncommitted changes and changes recorded in the WAL file are correctly
 ** retrieved.
 **
@@ -176493,7 +176493,7 @@ static int dbpageConnect(
   }else{
     iDb = 0;
   }
-  rc = sqlite3_declare_vtab(db, 
+  rc = sqlite3_declare_vtab(db,
           "CREATE TABLE x(pgno INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, data BLOB, schema HIDDEN)");
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     pTab = (DbpageTable *)sqlite3_malloc64(sizeof(DbpageTable));
@@ -176595,7 +176595,7 @@ static int dbpageEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
 }
 
 static int dbpageFilter(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor,
   int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
   int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
@@ -176622,8 +176622,8 @@ static int dbpageFilter(
 }
 
 static int dbpageColumn(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, 
-  sqlite3_context *ctx, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor,
+  sqlite3_context *ctx,
   int i
 ){
   DbpageCursor *pCsr = (DbpageCursor *)pCursor;
@@ -176684,8 +176684,8 @@ static int dbpageUpdate(
     zErr = "cannot insert";
     goto update_fail;
   }
-  if( sqlite3_value_type(argv[3])!=SQLITE_BLOB 
-   || sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[3])!=pTab->szPage 
+  if( sqlite3_value_type(argv[3])!=SQLITE_BLOB
+   || sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[3])!=pTab->szPage
   ){
     zErr = "bad page value";
     goto update_fail;
@@ -176808,7 +176808,7 @@ struct SessionBuffer {
 };
 
 /*
-** An object of this type is used internally as an abstraction for 
+** An object of this type is used internally as an abstraction for
 ** input data. Input data may be supplied either as a single large buffer
 ** (e.g. sqlite3changeset_start()) or using a stream function (e.g.
 **  sqlite3changeset_start_strm()).
@@ -176867,11 +176867,11 @@ struct SessionTable {
   SessionChange **apChange;       /* Hash table buckets */
 };
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** RECORD FORMAT:
 **
-** The following record format is similar to (but not compatible with) that 
-** used in SQLite database files. This format is used as part of the 
+** The following record format is similar to (but not compatible with) that
+** used in SQLite database files. This format is used as part of the
 ** change-set binary format, and so must be architecture independent.
 **
 ** Unlike the SQLite database record format, each field is self-contained -
@@ -176905,7 +176905,7 @@ struct SessionTable {
 **   Real values:
 **     An 8-byte big-endian IEEE 754-2008 real value.
 **
-** Varint values are encoded in the same way as varints in the SQLite 
+** Varint values are encoded in the same way as varints in the SQLite
 ** record format.
 **
 ** CHANGESET FORMAT:
@@ -176937,7 +176937,7 @@ struct SessionTable {
 **
 ** The new.* record that is part of each INSERT change contains the values
 ** that make up the new row. Similarly, the old.* record that is part of each
-** DELETE change contains the values that made up the row that was deleted 
+** DELETE change contains the values that made up the row that was deleted
 ** from the database. In the changeset format, the records that are part
 ** of INSERT or DELETE changes never contain any undefined (type byte 0x00)
 ** fields.
@@ -176946,8 +176946,8 @@ struct SessionTable {
 ** associated with table columns that are not PRIMARY KEY columns and are
 ** not modified by the UPDATE change are set to "undefined". Other fields
 ** are set to the values that made up the row before the UPDATE that the
-** change records took place. Within the new.* record, fields associated 
-** with table columns modified by the UPDATE change contain the new 
+** change records took place. Within the new.* record, fields associated
+** with table columns modified by the UPDATE change contain the new
 ** values. Fields associated with table columns that are not modified
 ** are set to "undefined".
 **
@@ -176973,7 +176973,7 @@ struct SessionTable {
 **
 ** As in the changeset format, each field of the single record that is part
 ** of a patchset change is associated with the correspondingly positioned
-** table column, counting from left to right within the CREATE TABLE 
+** table column, counting from left to right within the CREATE TABLE
 ** statement.
 **
 ** For a DELETE change, all fields within the record except those associated
@@ -177003,7 +177003,7 @@ struct SessionChange {
 };
 
 /*
-** Write a varint with value iVal into the buffer at aBuf. Return the 
+** Write a varint with value iVal into the buffer at aBuf. Return the
 ** number of bytes written.
 */
 static int sessionVarintPut(u8 *aBuf, int iVal){
@@ -177018,7 +177018,7 @@ static int sessionVarintLen(int iVal){
 }
 
 /*
-** Read a varint value from aBuf[] into *piVal. Return the number of 
+** Read a varint value from aBuf[] into *piVal. Return the number of
 ** bytes read.
 */
 static int sessionVarintGet(u8 *aBuf, int *piVal){
@@ -177057,13 +177057,13 @@ static void sessionPutI64(u8 *aBuf, sqlite3_int64 i){
 ** This function is used to serialize the contents of value pValue (see
 ** comment titled "RECORD FORMAT" above).
 **
-** If it is non-NULL, the serialized form of the value is written to 
+** If it is non-NULL, the serialized form of the value is written to
 ** buffer aBuf. *pnWrite is set to the number of bytes written before
 ** returning. Or, if aBuf is NULL, the only thing this function does is
 ** set *pnWrite.
 **
 ** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned. Or, if an OOM error occurs
-** within a call to sqlite3_value_text() (may fail if the db is utf-16)) 
+** within a call to sqlite3_value_text() (may fail if the db is utf-16))
 ** SQLITE_NOMEM is returned.
 */
 static int sessionSerializeValue(
@@ -177075,16 +177075,16 @@ static int sessionSerializeValue(
 
   if( pValue ){
     int eType;                    /* Value type (SQLITE_NULL, TEXT etc.) */
-  
+
     eType = sqlite3_value_type(pValue);
     if( aBuf ) aBuf[0] = eType;
-  
+
     switch( eType ){
-      case SQLITE_NULL: 
+      case SQLITE_NULL:
         nByte = 1;
         break;
-  
-      case SQLITE_INTEGER: 
+
+      case SQLITE_INTEGER:
       case SQLITE_FLOAT:
         if( aBuf ){
           /* TODO: SQLite does something special to deal with mixed-endian
@@ -177101,14 +177101,14 @@ static int sessionSerializeValue(
           }
           sessionPutI64(&aBuf[1], i);
         }
-        nByte = 9; 
+        nByte = 9;
         break;
-  
+
       default: {
         u8 *z;
         int n;
         int nVarint;
-  
+
         assert( eType==SQLITE_TEXT || eType==SQLITE_BLOB );
         if( eType==SQLITE_TEXT ){
           z = (u8 *)sqlite3_value_text(pValue);
@@ -177118,12 +177118,12 @@ static int sessionSerializeValue(
         n = sqlite3_value_bytes(pValue);
         if( z==0 && (eType!=SQLITE_BLOB || n>0) ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
         nVarint = sessionVarintLen(n);
-  
+
         if( aBuf ){
           sessionVarintPut(&aBuf[1], n);
           if( n ) memcpy(&aBuf[nVarint + 1], z, n);
         }
-  
+
         nByte = 1 + nVarint + n;
         break;
       }
@@ -177165,7 +177165,7 @@ static unsigned int sessionHashAppendI64(unsigned int h, i64 i){
 }
 
 /*
-** Append the hash of the blob passed via the second and third arguments to 
+** Append the hash of the blob passed via the second and third arguments to
 ** the hash-key value passed as the first. Return the new hash-key value.
 */
 static unsigned int sessionHashAppendBlob(unsigned int h, int n, const u8 *z){
@@ -177184,7 +177184,7 @@ static unsigned int sessionHashAppendType(unsigned int h, int eType){
 
 /*
 ** This function may only be called from within a pre-update callback.
-** It calculates a hash based on the primary key values of the old.* or 
+** It calculates a hash based on the primary key values of the old.* or
 ** new.* row currently available and, assuming no error occurs, writes it to
 ** *piHash before returning. If the primary key contains one or more NULL
 ** values, *pbNullPK is set to true before returning.
@@ -177290,12 +177290,12 @@ static unsigned int sessionChangeHash(
     int isPK = pTab->abPK[i];
     if( bPkOnly && isPK==0 ) continue;
 
-    /* It is not possible for eType to be SQLITE_NULL here. The session 
+    /* It is not possible for eType to be SQLITE_NULL here. The session
     ** module does not record changes for rows with NULL values stored in
     ** primary key columns. */
-    assert( eType==SQLITE_INTEGER || eType==SQLITE_FLOAT 
-         || eType==SQLITE_TEXT || eType==SQLITE_BLOB 
-         || eType==SQLITE_NULL || eType==0 
+    assert( eType==SQLITE_INTEGER || eType==SQLITE_FLOAT
+         || eType==SQLITE_TEXT || eType==SQLITE_BLOB
+         || eType==SQLITE_NULL || eType==0
     );
     assert( !isPK || (eType!=0 && eType!=SQLITE_NULL) );
 
@@ -177306,7 +177306,7 @@ static unsigned int sessionChangeHash(
         h = sessionHashAppendI64(h, sessionGetI64(a));
         a += 8;
       }else{
-        int n; 
+        int n;
         a += sessionVarintGet(a, &n);
         h = sessionHashAppendBlob(h, n, a);
         a += n;
@@ -177321,7 +177321,7 @@ static unsigned int sessionChangeHash(
 /*
 ** Arguments aLeft and aRight are pointers to change records for table pTab.
 ** This function returns true if the two records apply to the same row (i.e.
-** have the same values stored in the primary key columns), or false 
+** have the same values stored in the primary key columns), or false
 ** otherwise.
 */
 static int sessionChangeEqual(
@@ -177358,17 +177358,17 @@ static int sessionChangeEqual(
 ** Arguments aLeft and aRight both point to buffers containing change
 ** records with nCol columns. This function "merges" the two records into
 ** a single records which is written to the buffer at *paOut. *paOut is
-** then set to point to one byte after the last byte written before 
+** then set to point to one byte after the last byte written before
 ** returning.
 **
-** The merging of records is done as follows: For each column, if the 
+** The merging of records is done as follows: For each column, if the
 ** aRight record contains a value for the column, copy the value from
 ** their. Otherwise, if aLeft contains a value, copy it. If neither
 ** record contains a value for a given column, then neither does the
 ** output record.
 */
 static void sessionMergeRecord(
-  u8 **paOut, 
+  u8 **paOut,
   int nCol,
   u8 *aLeft,
   u8 *aRight
@@ -177398,13 +177398,13 @@ static void sessionMergeRecord(
 /*
 ** This is a helper function used by sessionMergeUpdate().
 **
-** When this function is called, both *paOne and *paTwo point to a value 
-** within a change record. Before it returns, both have been advanced so 
+** When this function is called, both *paOne and *paTwo point to a value
+** within a change record. Before it returns, both have been advanced so
 ** as to point to the next value in the record.
 **
 ** If, when this function is called, *paTwo points to a valid value (i.e.
 ** *paTwo[0] is not 0x00 - the "no value" placeholder), a copy of the *paTwo
-** pointer is returned and *pnVal is set to the number of bytes in the 
+** pointer is returned and *pnVal is set to the number of bytes in the
 ** serialized value. Otherwise, a copy of *paOne is returned and *pnVal
 ** set to the number of bytes in the value at *paOne. If *paOne points
 ** to the "no value" placeholder, *pnVal is set to 1. In other words:
@@ -177503,8 +177503,8 @@ static int sessionMergeUpdate(
 
     aOld = sessionMergeValue(&aOld1, &aOld2, &nOld);
     aNew = sessionMergeValue(&aNew1, &aNew2, &nNew);
-    if( bPatchset==0 
-     && (pTab->abPK[i] || (nOld==nNew && 0==memcmp(aOld, aNew, nNew))) 
+    if( bPatchset==0
+     && (pTab->abPK[i] || (nOld==nNew && 0==memcmp(aOld, aNew, nNew)))
     ){
       *(aOut++) = '\0';
     }else{
@@ -177594,7 +177594,7 @@ static int sessionPreupdateEqual(
 }
 
 /*
-** If required, grow the hash table used to store changes on table pTab 
+** If required, grow the hash table used to store changes on table pTab
 ** (part of the session pSession). If a fatal OOM error occurs, set the
 ** session object to failed and return SQLITE_ERROR. Otherwise, return
 ** SQLITE_OK.
@@ -177722,7 +177722,7 @@ static int sessionTableInfo(
       *pzTab = (char *)pAlloc;
       pAlloc += nThis+1;
     }
-  
+
     i = 0;
     while( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){
       int nName = sqlite3_column_bytes(pStmt, 1);
@@ -177735,7 +177735,7 @@ static int sessionTableInfo(
       i++;
     }
     rc = sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
-  
+
   }
 
   /* If successful, populate the output variables. Otherwise, zero them and
@@ -177765,14 +177765,14 @@ static int sessionTableInfo(
 ** If an error occurs, an error code is stored in sqlite3_session.rc and
 ** non-zero returned. Or, if no error occurs but the table has no primary
 ** key, sqlite3_session.rc is left set to SQLITE_OK and non-zero returned to
-** indicate that updates on this table should be ignored. SessionTable.abPK 
+** indicate that updates on this table should be ignored. SessionTable.abPK
 ** is set to NULL in this case.
 */
 static int sessionInitTable(sqlite3_session *pSession, SessionTable *pTab){
   if( pTab->nCol==0 ){
     u8 *abPK;
     assert( pTab->azCol==0 || pTab->abPK==0 );
-    pSession->rc = sessionTableInfo(pSession->db, pSession->zDb, 
+    pSession->rc = sessionTableInfo(pSession->db, pSession->zDb,
         pTab->zName, &pTab->nCol, 0, &pTab->azCol, &abPK
     );
     if( pSession->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -177789,7 +177789,7 @@ static int sessionInitTable(sqlite3_session *pSession, SessionTable *pTab){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is only called from with a pre-update-hook reporting a 
+** This function is only called from with a pre-update-hook reporting a
 ** change on table pTab (attached to session pSession). The type of change
 ** (UPDATE, INSERT, DELETE) is specified by the first argument.
 **
@@ -177801,8 +177801,8 @@ static void sessionPreupdateOneChange(
   sqlite3_session *pSession,      /* Session object pTab is attached to */
   SessionTable *pTab              /* Table that change applies to */
 ){
-  int iHash; 
-  int bNull = 0; 
+  int iHash;
+  int bNull = 0;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
   if( pSession->rc ) return;
@@ -177810,7 +177810,7 @@ static void sessionPreupdateOneChange(
   /* Load table details if required */
   if( sessionInitTable(pSession, pTab) ) return;
 
-  /* Check the number of columns in this xPreUpdate call matches the 
+  /* Check the number of columns in this xPreUpdate call matches the
   ** number of columns in the table.  */
   if( pTab->nCol!=pSession->hook.xCount(pSession->hook.pCtx) ){
     pSession->rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA;
@@ -177843,10 +177843,10 @@ static void sessionPreupdateOneChange(
       SessionChange *pChange; /* New change object */
       int nByte;              /* Number of bytes to allocate */
       int i;                  /* Used to iterate through columns */
-  
+
       assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
       pTab->nEntry++;
-  
+
       /* Figure out how large an allocation is required */
       nByte = sizeof(SessionChange);
       for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){
@@ -177864,7 +177864,7 @@ static void sessionPreupdateOneChange(
         rc = sessionSerializeValue(0, p, &nByte);
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto error_out;
       }
-  
+
       /* Allocate the change object */
       pChange = (SessionChange *)sqlite3_malloc(nByte);
       if( !pChange ){
@@ -177874,7 +177874,7 @@ static void sessionPreupdateOneChange(
         memset(pChange, 0, sizeof(SessionChange));
         pChange->aRecord = (u8 *)&pChange[1];
       }
-  
+
       /* Populate the change object. None of the preupdate_old(),
       ** preupdate_new() or SerializeValue() calls below may fail as all
       ** required values and encodings have already been cached in memory.
@@ -177902,8 +177902,8 @@ static void sessionPreupdateOneChange(
     }else if( pC->bIndirect ){
       /* If the existing change is considered "indirect", but this current
       ** change is "direct", mark the change object as direct. */
-      if( pSession->hook.xDepth(pSession->hook.pCtx)==0 
-       && pSession->bIndirect==0 
+      if( pSession->hook.xDepth(pSession->hook.pCtx)==0
+       && pSession->bIndirect==0
       ){
         pC->bIndirect = 0;
       }
@@ -177918,7 +177918,7 @@ static void sessionPreupdateOneChange(
 }
 
 static int sessionFindTable(
-  sqlite3_session *pSession, 
+  sqlite3_session *pSession,
   const char *zName,
   SessionTable **ppTab
 ){
@@ -177935,7 +177935,7 @@ static int sessionFindTable(
     /* If there is a table-filter configured, invoke it. If it returns 0,
     ** do not automatically add the new table. */
     if( pSession->xTableFilter==0
-     || pSession->xTableFilter(pSession->pFilterCtx, zName) 
+     || pSession->xTableFilter(pSession->pFilterCtx, zName)
     ){
       rc = sqlite3session_attach(pSession, zName);
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -177970,8 +177970,8 @@ static void xPreUpdate(
   for(pSession=(sqlite3_session *)pCtx; pSession; pSession=pSession->pNext){
     SessionTable *pTab;
 
-    /* If this session is attached to a different database ("main", "temp" 
-    ** etc.), or if it is not currently enabled, there is nothing to do. Skip 
+    /* If this session is attached to a different database ("main", "temp"
+    ** etc.), or if it is not currently enabled, there is nothing to do. Skip
     ** to the next session object attached to this database. */
     if( pSession->bEnable==0 ) continue;
     if( pSession->rc ) continue;
@@ -178062,7 +178062,7 @@ static void sessionDiffHooks(
 
 static char *sessionExprComparePK(
   int nCol,
-  const char *zDb1, const char *zDb2, 
+  const char *zDb1, const char *zDb2,
   const char *zTab,
   const char **azCol, u8 *abPK
 ){
@@ -178085,7 +178085,7 @@ static char *sessionExprComparePK(
 
 static char *sessionExprCompareOther(
   int nCol,
-  const char *zDb1, const char *zDb2, 
+  const char *zDb1, const char *zDb2,
   const char *zTab,
   const char **azCol, u8 *abPK
 ){
@@ -178162,9 +178162,9 @@ static int sessionDiffFindNew(
 }
 
 static int sessionDiffFindModified(
-  sqlite3_session *pSession, 
-  SessionTable *pTab, 
-  const char *zFrom, 
+  sqlite3_session *pSession,
+  SessionTable *pTab,
+  const char *zFrom,
   const char *zExpr
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -178262,7 +178262,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_diff(
     }
 
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-      zExpr = sessionExprComparePK(pTo->nCol, 
+      zExpr = sessionExprComparePK(pTo->nCol,
           zDb, zFrom, pTo->zName, pTo->azCol, pTo->abPK
       );
     }
@@ -178317,7 +178317,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_create(
   memcpy(pNew->zDb, zDb, nDb+1);
   sessionPreupdateHooks(pNew);
 
-  /* Add the new session object to the linked list of session objects 
+  /* Add the new session object to the linked list of session objects
   ** attached to database handle $db. Do this under the cover of the db
   ** handle mutex.  */
   sqlite3_mutex_enter(sqlite3_db_mutex(db));
@@ -178375,7 +178375,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_delete(sqlite3_session *pSession){
   }
   sqlite3_mutex_leave(sqlite3_db_mutex(db));
 
-  /* Delete all attached table objects. And the contents of their 
+  /* Delete all attached table objects. And the contents of their
   ** associated hash-tables. */
   sessionDeleteTable(pSession->pTable);
 
@@ -178387,7 +178387,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_delete(sqlite3_session *pSession){
 ** Set a table filter on a Session Object.
 */
 SQLITE_API void sqlite3session_table_filter(
-  sqlite3_session *pSession, 
+  sqlite3_session *pSession,
   int(*xFilter)(void*, const char*),
   void *pCtx                      /* First argument passed to xFilter */
 ){
@@ -178431,7 +178431,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_attach(
         rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
       }else{
         /* Populate the new SessionTable object and link it into the list.
-        ** The new object must be linked onto the end of the list, not 
+        ** The new object must be linked onto the end of the list, not
         ** simply added to the start of it in order to ensure that tables
         ** appear in the correct order when a changeset or patchset is
         ** eventually generated. */
@@ -178499,8 +178499,8 @@ static void sessionAppendValue(SessionBuffer *p, sqlite3_value *pVal, int *pRc){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is 
-** called. Otherwise, append a single byte to the buffer. 
+** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is
+** called. Otherwise, append a single byte to the buffer.
 **
 ** If an OOM condition is encountered, set *pRc to SQLITE_NOMEM before
 ** returning.
@@ -178512,8 +178512,8 @@ static void sessionAppendByte(SessionBuffer *p, u8 v, int *pRc){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is 
-** called. Otherwise, append a single varint to the buffer. 
+** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is
+** called. Otherwise, append a single varint to the buffer.
 **
 ** If an OOM condition is encountered, set *pRc to SQLITE_NOMEM before
 ** returning.
@@ -178525,16 +178525,16 @@ static void sessionAppendVarint(SessionBuffer *p, int v, int *pRc){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is 
-** called. Otherwise, append a blob of data to the buffer. 
+** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is
+** called. Otherwise, append a blob of data to the buffer.
 **
 ** If an OOM condition is encountered, set *pRc to SQLITE_NOMEM before
 ** returning.
 */
 static void sessionAppendBlob(
-  SessionBuffer *p, 
-  const u8 *aBlob, 
-  int nBlob, 
+  SessionBuffer *p,
+  const u8 *aBlob,
+  int nBlob,
   int *pRc
 ){
   if( nBlob>0 && 0==sessionBufferGrow(p, nBlob, pRc) ){
@@ -178544,7 +178544,7 @@ static void sessionAppendBlob(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is 
+** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is
 ** called. Otherwise, append a string to the buffer. All bytes in the string
 ** up to (but not including) the nul-terminator are written to the buffer.
 **
@@ -178552,8 +178552,8 @@ static void sessionAppendBlob(
 ** returning.
 */
 static void sessionAppendStr(
-  SessionBuffer *p, 
-  const char *zStr, 
+  SessionBuffer *p,
+  const char *zStr,
   int *pRc
 ){
   int nStr = sqlite3Strlen30(zStr);
@@ -178564,7 +178564,7 @@ static void sessionAppendStr(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is 
+** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is
 ** called. Otherwise, append the string representation of integer iVal
 ** to the buffer. No nul-terminator is written.
 **
@@ -178582,9 +178582,9 @@ static void sessionAppendInteger(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is 
+** This function is a no-op if *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when it is
 ** called. Otherwise, append the string zStr enclosed in quotes (") and
-** with any embedded quote characters escaped to the buffer. No 
+** with any embedded quote characters escaped to the buffer. No
 ** nul-terminator byte is written.
 **
 ** If an OOM condition is encountered, set *pRc to SQLITE_NOMEM before
@@ -178657,8 +178657,8 @@ static void sessionAppendCol(
 
 /*
 **
-** This function appends an update change to the buffer (see the comments 
-** under "CHANGESET FORMAT" at the top of the file). An update change 
+** This function appends an update change to the buffer (see the comments
+** under "CHANGESET FORMAT" at the top of the file). An update change
 ** consists of:
 **
 **   1 byte:  SQLITE_UPDATE (0x17)
@@ -178673,10 +178673,10 @@ static void sessionAppendCol(
 ** If all of the old.* values are equal to their corresponding new.* value
 ** (i.e. nothing has changed), then no data at all is appended to the buffer.
 **
-** Otherwise, the old.* record contains all primary key values and the 
-** original values of any fields that have been modified. The new.* record 
+** Otherwise, the old.* record contains all primary key values and the
+** original values of any fields that have been modified. The new.* record
 ** contains the new values of only those fields that have been modified.
-*/ 
+*/
 static int sessionAppendUpdate(
   SessionBuffer *pBuf,            /* Buffer to append to */
   int bPatchset,                  /* True for "patchset", 0 for "changeset" */
@@ -178727,8 +178727,8 @@ static int sessionAppendUpdate(
         int nHdr = 1 + sessionVarintGet(&pCsr[1], &n);
         assert( eType==SQLITE_TEXT || eType==SQLITE_BLOB );
         nAdvance = nHdr + n;
-        if( eType==sqlite3_column_type(pStmt, i) 
-         && n==sqlite3_column_bytes(pStmt, i) 
+        if( eType==sqlite3_column_type(pStmt, i)
+         && n==sqlite3_column_bytes(pStmt, i)
          && (n==0 || 0==memcmp(&pCsr[nHdr], sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, i), n))
         ){
           break;
@@ -178941,7 +178941,7 @@ static int sessionSelectBind(
 
 /*
 ** This function is a no-op if *pRc is set to other than SQLITE_OK when it
-** is called. Otherwise, append a serialized table header (part of the binary 
+** is called. Otherwise, append a serialized table header (part of the binary
 ** changeset format) to buffer *pBuf. If an error occurs, set *pRc to an
 ** SQLite error code before returning.
 */
@@ -178965,7 +178965,7 @@ static void sessionAppendTableHdr(
 **
 ** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the new changeset/patchset
 ** stored in output variables *pnChangeset and *ppChangeset. Or, if an error
-** occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and both output variables set 
+** occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and both output variables set
 ** to 0.
 */
 static int sessionGenerateChangeset(
@@ -179050,10 +179050,10 @@ static int sessionGenerateChangeset(
 
           /* If the buffer is now larger than SESSIONS_STRM_CHUNK_SIZE, pass
           ** its contents to the xOutput() callback. */
-          if( xOutput 
-           && rc==SQLITE_OK 
-           && buf.nBuf>nNoop 
-           && buf.nBuf>SESSIONS_STRM_CHUNK_SIZE 
+          if( xOutput
+           && rc==SQLITE_OK
+           && buf.nBuf>nNoop
+           && buf.nBuf>SESSIONS_STRM_CHUNK_SIZE
           ){
             rc = xOutput(pOut, (void*)buf.aBuf, buf.nBuf);
             nNoop = -1;
@@ -179088,10 +179088,10 @@ static int sessionGenerateChangeset(
 }
 
 /*
-** Obtain a changeset object containing all changes recorded by the 
+** Obtain a changeset object containing all changes recorded by the
 ** session object passed as the first argument.
 **
-** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free the buffer 
+** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free the buffer
 ** using sqlite3_free().
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_changeset(
@@ -179125,10 +179125,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_patchset_strm(
 }
 
 /*
-** Obtain a patchset object containing all changes recorded by the 
+** Obtain a patchset object containing all changes recorded by the
 ** session object passed as the first argument.
 **
-** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free the buffer 
+** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free the buffer
 ** using sqlite3_free().
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_patchset(
@@ -179314,7 +179314,7 @@ static void sessionSkipRecord(
 
 /*
 ** This function sets the value of the sqlite3_value object passed as the
-** first argument to a copy of the string or blob held in the aData[] 
+** first argument to a copy of the string or blob held in the aData[]
 ** buffer. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or SQLITE_NOMEM if an OOM
 ** error occurs.
 */
@@ -179325,7 +179325,7 @@ static int sessionValueSetStr(
   u8 enc                          /* String encoding (0 for blobs) */
 ){
   /* In theory this code could just pass SQLITE_TRANSIENT as the final
-  ** argument to sqlite3ValueSetStr() and have the copy created 
+  ** argument to sqlite3ValueSetStr() and have the copy created
   ** automatically. But doing so makes it difficult to detect any OOM
   ** error. Hence the code to create the copy externally. */
   u8 *aCopy = sqlite3_malloc(nData+1);
@@ -179419,7 +179419,7 @@ static int sessionReadRecord(
 **   + array of PK flags (1 byte per column),
 **   + table name (nul terminated).
 **
-** This function ensures that all of the above is present in the input 
+** This function ensures that all of the above is present in the input
 ** buffer (i.e. that it can be accessed without any calls to xInput()).
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, an SQLite error code.
 ** The input pointer is not moved.
@@ -179491,8 +179491,8 @@ static int sessionChangesetBufferRecord(
 **   + array of PK flags (1 byte per column),
 **   + table name (nul terminated).
 **
-** This function decodes the table-header and populates the p->nCol, 
-** p->zTab and p->abPK[] variables accordingly. The p->apValue[] array is 
+** This function decodes the table-header and populates the p->nCol,
+** p->zTab and p->abPK[] variables accordingly. The p->apValue[] array is
 ** also allocated or resized according to the new value of p->nCol. The
 ** input pointer is left pointing to the byte following the table header.
 **
@@ -179541,9 +179541,9 @@ static int sessionChangesetReadTblhdr(sqlite3_changeset_iter *p){
 ** record is written to *paRec before returning and the number of bytes in
 ** the record to *pnRec.
 **
-** Either way, this function returns SQLITE_ROW if the iterator is 
-** successfully advanced to the next change in the changeset, an SQLite 
-** error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_DONE if there are no further 
+** Either way, this function returns SQLITE_ROW if the iterator is
+** successfully advanced to the next change in the changeset, an SQLite
+** error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_DONE if there are no further
 ** changes in the changeset.
 */
 static int sessionChangesetNext(
@@ -179598,7 +179598,7 @@ static int sessionChangesetNext(
     return (p->rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT);
   }
 
-  if( paRec ){ 
+  if( paRec ){
     int nVal;                     /* Number of values to buffer */
     if( p->bPatchset==0 && op==SQLITE_UPDATE ){
       nVal = p->nCol * 2;
@@ -179759,7 +179759,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_new(
 
 /*
 ** This function may only be called with a changeset iterator that has been
-** passed to an SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA or SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT 
+** passed to an SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA or SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT
 ** conflict-handler function. Otherwise, SQLITE_MISUSE is returned.
 **
 ** If successful, *ppValue is set to point to an sqlite3_value structure
@@ -180106,7 +180106,7 @@ static int sessionDeleteRow(
 }
 
 /*
-** Formulate and prepare a statement to UPDATE a row from database db. 
+** Formulate and prepare a statement to UPDATE a row from database db.
 ** Assuming a table structure like this:
 **
 **     CREATE TABLE x(a, b, c, d, PRIMARY KEY(a, c));
@@ -180118,7 +180118,7 @@ static int sessionDeleteRow(
 **     b = CASE WHEN ?5  THEN ?6  ELSE b END,
 **     c = CASE WHEN ?8  THEN ?9  ELSE c END,
 **     d = CASE WHEN ?11 THEN ?12 ELSE d END
-**     WHERE a = ?1 AND c = ?7 AND (?13 OR 
+**     WHERE a = ?1 AND c = ?7 AND (?13 OR
 **       (?5==0 OR b IS ?4) AND (?11==0 OR d IS ?10) AND
 **     )
 **
@@ -180263,7 +180263,7 @@ static int sessionInsertRow(
 }
 
 /*
-** A wrapper around sqlite3_bind_value() that detects an extra problem. 
+** A wrapper around sqlite3_bind_value() that detects an extra problem.
 ** See comments in the body of this function for details.
 */
 static int sessionBindValue(
@@ -180286,15 +180286,15 @@ static int sessionBindValue(
 }
 
 /*
-** Iterator pIter must point to an SQLITE_INSERT entry. This function 
+** Iterator pIter must point to an SQLITE_INSERT entry. This function
 ** transfers new.* values from the current iterator entry to statement
 ** pStmt. The table being inserted into has nCol columns.
 **
-** New.* value $i from the iterator is bound to variable ($i+1) of 
+** New.* value $i from the iterator is bound to variable ($i+1) of
 ** statement pStmt. If parameter abPK is NULL, all values from 0 to (nCol-1)
 ** are transfered to the statement. Otherwise, if abPK is not NULL, it points
-** to an array nCol elements in size. In this case only those values for 
-** which abPK[$i] is true are read from the iterator and bound to the 
+** to an array nCol elements in size. In this case only those values for
+** which abPK[$i] is true are read from the iterator and bound to the
 ** statement.
 **
 ** An SQLite error code is returned if an error occurs. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
@@ -180310,8 +180310,8 @@ static int sessionBindRow(
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
   /* Neither sqlite3changeset_old or sqlite3changeset_new can fail if the
-  ** argument iterator points to a suitable entry. Make sure that xValue 
-  ** is one of these to guarantee that it is safe to ignore the return 
+  ** argument iterator points to a suitable entry. Make sure that xValue
+  ** is one of these to guarantee that it is safe to ignore the return
   ** in the code below. */
   assert( xValue==sqlite3changeset_old || xValue==sqlite3changeset_new );
 
@@ -180329,18 +180329,18 @@ static int sessionBindRow(
 ** SQL statement pSelect is as generated by the sessionSelectRow() function.
 ** This function binds the primary key values from the change that changeset
 ** iterator pIter points to to the SELECT and attempts to seek to the table
-** entry. If a row is found, the SELECT statement left pointing at the row 
+** entry. If a row is found, the SELECT statement left pointing at the row
 ** and SQLITE_ROW is returned. Otherwise, if no row is found and no error
 ** has occured, the statement is reset and SQLITE_OK is returned. If an
 ** error occurs, the statement is reset and an SQLite error code is returned.
 **
-** If this function returns SQLITE_ROW, the caller must eventually reset() 
+** If this function returns SQLITE_ROW, the caller must eventually reset()
 ** statement pSelect. If any other value is returned, the statement does
 ** not require a reset().
 **
 ** If the iterator currently points to an INSERT record, bind values from the
 ** new.* record to the SELECT statement. Or, if it points to a DELETE or
-** UPDATE, bind values from the old.* record. 
+** UPDATE, bind values from the old.* record.
 */
 static int sessionSeekToRow(
   sqlite3 *db,                    /* Database handle */
@@ -180354,7 +180354,7 @@ static int sessionSeekToRow(
   const char *zDummy;             /* Unused */
 
   sqlite3changeset_op(pIter, &zDummy, &nCol, &op, 0);
-  rc = sessionBindRow(pIter, 
+  rc = sessionBindRow(pIter,
       op==SQLITE_INSERT ? sqlite3changeset_new : sqlite3changeset_old,
       nCol, abPK, pSelect
   );
@@ -180398,7 +180398,7 @@ static int sessionSeekToRow(
 ** is set to non-zero before returning SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** If the conflict handler returns SQLITE_CHANGESET_ABORT, SQLITE_ABORT is
-** returned. Or, if the conflict handler returns an invalid value, 
+** returned. Or, if the conflict handler returns an invalid value,
 ** SQLITE_MISUSE. If the conflict handler returns SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT,
 ** this function returns SQLITE_OK.
 */
@@ -180485,16 +180485,16 @@ static int sessionConflictHandler(
 ** to true before returning. In this case the caller will invoke this function
 ** again, this time with pbRetry set to NULL.
 **
-** If argument pbReplace is NULL and a CHANGESET_CONFLICT conflict is 
+** If argument pbReplace is NULL and a CHANGESET_CONFLICT conflict is
 ** encountered invoke the conflict handler with CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT instead.
 ** Or, if pbReplace is not NULL, invoke it with CHANGESET_CONFLICT. If such
 ** an invocation returns SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE, set *pbReplace to true
 ** before retrying. In this case the caller attempts to remove the conflicting
-** row before invoking this function again, this time with pbReplace set 
+** row before invoking this function again, this time with pbReplace set
 ** to NULL.
 **
 ** If any conflict handler returns SQLITE_CHANGESET_ABORT, this function
-** returns SQLITE_ABORT. Otherwise, if no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is 
+** returns SQLITE_ABORT. Otherwise, if no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is
 ** returned.
 */
 static int sessionApplyOneOp(
@@ -180613,7 +180613,7 @@ static int sessionApplyOneOp(
 ** the conflict handler callback.
 **
 ** The difference between this function and sessionApplyOne() is that this
-** function handles the case where the conflict-handler is invoked and 
+** function handles the case where the conflict-handler is invoked and
 ** returns SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE - indicating that the change should be
 ** retried in some manner.
 */
@@ -180634,7 +180634,7 @@ static int sessionApplyOneWithRetry(
   /* If the bRetry flag is set, the change has not been applied due to an
   ** SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA problem (i.e. this is an UPDATE or DELETE and
   ** a row with the correct PK is present in the db, but one or more other
-  ** fields do not contain the expected values) and the conflict handler 
+  ** fields do not contain the expected values) and the conflict handler
   ** returned SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE. In this case retry the operation,
   ** but pass NULL as the final argument so that sessionApplyOneOp() ignores
   ** the SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA problem.  */
@@ -180652,7 +180652,7 @@ static int sessionApplyOneWithRetry(
     assert( pIter->op==SQLITE_INSERT );
     rc = sqlite3_exec(db, "SAVEPOINT replace_op", 0, 0, 0);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-      rc = sessionBindRow(pIter, 
+      rc = sessionBindRow(pIter,
           sqlite3changeset_new, pApply->nCol, pApply->abPK, pApply->pDelete);
       sqlite3_bind_int(pApply->pDelete, pApply->nCol+1, 1);
     }
@@ -180675,7 +180675,7 @@ static int sessionApplyOneWithRetry(
 ** Retry the changes accumulated in the pApply->constraints buffer.
 */
 static int sessionRetryConstraints(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   int bPatchset,
   const char *zTab,
   SessionApplyCtx *pApply,
@@ -180723,7 +180723,7 @@ static int sessionRetryConstraints(
 
 /*
 ** Argument pIter is a changeset iterator that has been initialized, but
-** not yet passed to sqlite3changeset_next(). This function applies the 
+** not yet passed to sqlite3changeset_next(). This function applies the
 ** changeset to the main database attached to handle "db". The supplied
 ** conflict handler callback is invoked to resolve any conflicts encountered
 ** while applying the change.
@@ -180762,7 +180762,7 @@ static int sessionChangesetApply(
     int nCol;
     int op;
     const char *zNew;
-    
+
     sqlite3changeset_op(pIter, &zNew, &nCol, &op, 0);
 
     if( zTab==0 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zNew, zTab, nTab+1) ){
@@ -180775,14 +180775,14 @@ static int sessionChangesetApply(
 
       sqlite3_free((char*)sApply.azCol);  /* cast works around VC++ bug */
       sqlite3_finalize(sApply.pDelete);
-      sqlite3_finalize(sApply.pUpdate); 
+      sqlite3_finalize(sApply.pUpdate);
       sqlite3_finalize(sApply.pInsert);
       sqlite3_finalize(sApply.pSelect);
       memset(&sApply, 0, sizeof(sApply));
       sApply.db = db;
       sApply.bDeferConstraints = 1;
 
-      /* If an xFilter() callback was specified, invoke it now. If the 
+      /* If an xFilter() callback was specified, invoke it now. If the
       ** xFilter callback returns zero, skip this table. If it returns
       ** non-zero, proceed. */
       schemaMismatch = (xFilter && (0==xFilter(pCtx, zNew)));
@@ -180806,18 +180806,18 @@ static int sessionChangesetApply(
         for(i=0; i<sApply.nCol; i++){
           if( sApply.abPK[i] ) nMinCol = i+1;
         }
-  
+
         if( sApply.nCol==0 ){
           schemaMismatch = 1;
-          sqlite3_log(SQLITE_SCHEMA, 
+          sqlite3_log(SQLITE_SCHEMA,
               "sqlite3changeset_apply(): no such table: %s", zTab
           );
         }
         else if( sApply.nCol<nCol ){
           schemaMismatch = 1;
-          sqlite3_log(SQLITE_SCHEMA, 
+          sqlite3_log(SQLITE_SCHEMA,
               "sqlite3changeset_apply(): table %s has %d columns, "
-              "expected %d or more", 
+              "expected %d or more",
               zTab, sApply.nCol, nCol
           );
         }
@@ -180912,7 +180912,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
   ),
   void *pCtx                      /* First argument passed to xConflict */
 ){
-  sqlite3_changeset_iter *pIter;  /* Iterator to skip through changeset */  
+  sqlite3_changeset_iter *pIter;  /* Iterator to skip through changeset */
   int rc = sqlite3changeset_start(&pIter, nChangeset, pChangeset);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     rc = sessionChangesetApply(db, pIter, xFilter, xConflict, pCtx);
@@ -180940,7 +180940,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply_strm(
   ),
   void *pCtx                      /* First argument passed to xConflict */
 ){
-  sqlite3_changeset_iter *pIter;  /* Iterator to skip through changeset */  
+  sqlite3_changeset_iter *pIter;  /* Iterator to skip through changeset */
   int rc = sqlite3changeset_start_strm(&pIter, xInput, pIn);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     rc = sessionChangesetApply(db, pIter, xFilter, xConflict, pCtx);
@@ -180988,7 +180988,7 @@ static int sessionChangeMerge(
   }else{
     int op1 = pExist->op;
 
-    /* 
+    /*
     **   op1=INSERT, op2=INSERT      ->      Unsupported. Discard op2.
     **   op1=INSERT, op2=UPDATE      ->      INSERT.
     **   op1=INSERT, op2=DELETE      ->      (none)
@@ -181000,7 +181000,7 @@ static int sessionChangeMerge(
     **   op1=DELETE, op2=INSERT      ->      UPDATE.
     **   op1=DELETE, op2=UPDATE      ->      Unsupported. Discard op2.
     **   op1=DELETE, op2=DELETE      ->      Unsupported. Discard op2.
-    */   
+    */
     if( (op1==SQLITE_INSERT && op2==SQLITE_INSERT)
      || (op1==SQLITE_UPDATE && op2==SQLITE_INSERT)
      || (op1==SQLITE_DELETE && op2==SQLITE_UPDATE)
@@ -181139,7 +181139,7 @@ static int sessionChangesetToHash(
 
         /* The new object must be linked on to the end of the list, not
         ** simply added to the start of it. This is to ensure that the
-        ** tables within the output of sqlite3changegroup_output() are in 
+        ** tables within the output of sqlite3changegroup_output() are in
         ** the right order.  */
         for(ppTab=&pGrp->pList; *ppTab; ppTab=&(*ppTab)->pNext);
         *ppTab = pTab;
@@ -181157,7 +181157,7 @@ static int sessionChangesetToHash(
         pTab, (pIter->bPatchset && op==SQLITE_DELETE), aRec, pTab->nChange
     );
 
-    /* Search for existing entry. If found, remove it from the hash table. 
+    /* Search for existing entry. If found, remove it from the hash table.
     ** Code below may link it back in.
     */
     for(pp=&pTab->apChange[iHash]; *pp; pp=&(*pp)->pNext){
@@ -181175,7 +181175,7 @@ static int sessionChangesetToHash(
       }
     }
 
-    rc = sessionChangeMerge(pTab, 
+    rc = sessionChangeMerge(pTab,
         pIter->bPatchset, pExist, op, bIndirect, aRec, nRec, &pChange
     );
     if( rc ) break;
@@ -181196,7 +181196,7 @@ static int sessionChangesetToHash(
 **
 ** If xOutput is not NULL, then the changeset/patchset is returned to the
 ** user via one or more calls to xOutput, as with the other streaming
-** interfaces. 
+** interfaces.
 **
 ** Or, if xOutput is NULL, then (*ppOut) is populated with a pointer to a
 ** buffer containing the output changeset before this function returns. In
@@ -181221,7 +181221,7 @@ static int sessionChangegroupOutput(
   assert( xOutput==0 || (ppOut==0 && pnOut==0) );
 
   /* Create the serialized output changeset based on the contents of the
-  ** hash tables attached to the SessionTable objects in list p->pList. 
+  ** hash tables attached to the SessionTable objects in list p->pList.
   */
   for(pTab=pGrp->pList; rc==SQLITE_OK && pTab; pTab=pTab->pNext){
     int i;
@@ -181325,7 +181325,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_add_strm(
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3changegroup_output_strm(
   sqlite3_changegroup *pGrp,
-  int (*xOutput)(void *pOut, const void *pData, int nData), 
+  int (*xOutput)(void *pOut, const void *pData, int nData),
   void *pOut
 ){
   return sessionChangegroupOutput(pGrp, xOutput, pOut, 0, 0);
@@ -181341,7 +181341,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup *pGrp){
   }
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Combine two changesets together.
 */
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_concat(
@@ -181619,7 +181619,7 @@ static void jsonReset(JsonString *p){
 }
 
 
-/* Report an out-of-memory (OOM) condition 
+/* Report an out-of-memory (OOM) condition
 */
 static void jsonOom(JsonString *p){
   p->bErr = 1;
@@ -181736,7 +181736,7 @@ static void jsonAppendString(JsonString *p, const char *zIn, u32 N){
 }
 
 /*
-** Append a function parameter value to the JSON string under 
+** Append a function parameter value to the JSON string under
 ** construction.
 */
 static void jsonAppendValue(
@@ -181781,7 +181781,7 @@ static void jsonAppendValue(
 */
 static void jsonResult(JsonString *p){
   if( p->bErr==0 ){
-    sqlite3_result_text64(p->pCtx, p->zBuf, p->nUsed, 
+    sqlite3_result_text64(p->pCtx, p->zBuf, p->nUsed,
                           p->bStatic ? SQLITE_TRANSIENT : sqlite3_free,
                           SQLITE_UTF8);
     jsonZero(p);
@@ -181993,7 +181993,7 @@ static void jsonReturn(
       if( pNode->jnFlags & JNODE_RAW ){
         sqlite3_result_text(pCtx, pNode->u.zJContent, pNode->n,
                             SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
-      }else 
+      }else
 #endif
       assert( (pNode->jnFlags & JNODE_RAW)==0 );
       if( (pNode->jnFlags & JNODE_ESCAPE)==0 ){
@@ -182644,7 +182644,7 @@ static void jsonWrongNumArgs(
   char *zMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("json_%s() needs an odd number of arguments",
                                zFuncName);
   sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, zMsg, -1);
-  sqlite3_free(zMsg);     
+  sqlite3_free(zMsg);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -182731,7 +182731,7 @@ static void jsonTest1Func(
 
 /*
 ** Implementation of the json_QUOTE(VALUE) function.  Return a JSON value
-** corresponding to the SQL value input.  Mostly this means putting 
+** corresponding to the SQL value input.  Mostly this means putting
 ** double-quotes around strings and returning the unquoted string "null"
 ** when given a NULL input.
 */
@@ -182778,7 +182778,7 @@ static void jsonArrayFunc(
 ** json_array_length(JSON)
 ** json_array_length(JSON, PATH)
 **
-** Return the number of elements in the top-level JSON array.  
+** Return the number of elements in the top-level JSON array.
 ** Return 0 if the input is not a well-formed JSON array.
 */
 static void jsonArrayLengthFunc(
@@ -183322,7 +183322,7 @@ static int jsonEachConnect(
   UNUSED_PARAM(argv);
   UNUSED_PARAM(argc);
   UNUSED_PARAM(pAux);
-  rc = sqlite3_declare_vtab(db, 
+  rc = sqlite3_declare_vtab(db,
      "CREATE TABLE x(key,value,type,atom,id,parent,fullkey,path,"
                     "json HIDDEN,root HIDDEN)");
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -183500,7 +183500,7 @@ static int jsonEachColumn(
       break;
     }
     case JEACH_ID: {
-      sqlite3_result_int64(ctx, 
+      sqlite3_result_int64(ctx,
          (sqlite3_int64)p->i + ((pThis->jnFlags & JNODE_LABEL)!=0));
       break;
     }
@@ -183797,7 +183797,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Json1Init(sqlite3 *db){
 #endif
   for(i=0; i<sizeof(aFunc)/sizeof(aFunc[0]) && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){
     rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, aFunc[i].zName, aFunc[i].nArg,
-                                 SQLITE_UTF8 | SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC, 
+                                 SQLITE_UTF8 | SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC,
                                  (void*)&aFunc[i].flag,
                                  aFunc[i].xFunc, 0, 0);
   }
@@ -183820,8 +183820,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Json1Init(sqlite3 *db){
 __declspec(dllexport)
 #endif
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_json_init(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  char **pzErrMsg, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  char **pzErrMsg,
   const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
 ){
   SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT2(pApi);
@@ -183835,9 +183835,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_json_init(
 /************** Begin file fts5.c ********************************************/
 
 
-#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS5) 
+#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS5)
 
-#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) 
+#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
 # define NDEBUG 1
 #endif
 #if defined(NDEBUG) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
@@ -183856,7 +183856,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_json_init(
 **
 ******************************************************************************
 **
-** Interfaces to extend FTS5. Using the interfaces defined in this file, 
+** Interfaces to extend FTS5. Using the interfaces defined in this file,
 ** FTS5 may be extended with:
 **
 **     * custom tokenizers, and
@@ -183901,19 +183901,19 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 ** EXTENSION API FUNCTIONS
 **
 ** xUserData(pFts):
-**   Return a copy of the context pointer the extension function was 
+**   Return a copy of the context pointer the extension function was
 **   registered with.
 **
 ** xColumnTotalSize(pFts, iCol, pnToken):
 **   If parameter iCol is less than zero, set output variable *pnToken
 **   to the total number of tokens in the FTS5 table. Or, if iCol is
 **   non-negative but less than the number of columns in the table, return
-**   the total number of tokens in column iCol, considering all rows in 
+**   the total number of tokens in column iCol, considering all rows in
 **   the FTS5 table.
 **
 **   If parameter iCol is greater than or equal to the number of columns
 **   in the table, SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Or, if an error occurs (e.g.
-**   an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is 
+**   an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
 **   returned.
 **
 ** xColumnCount(pFts):
@@ -183927,7 +183927,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **
 **   If parameter iCol is greater than or equal to the number of columns
 **   in the table, SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Or, if an error occurs (e.g.
-**   an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is 
+**   an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
 **   returned.
 **
 **   This function may be quite inefficient if used with an FTS5 table
@@ -183954,8 +183954,8 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **   an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if an error occurs.
 **
 **   This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created 
-**   with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option 
+**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
+**   with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
 **   (i.e. if it is a contentless table), then this API always returns 0.
 **
 ** xInst:
@@ -183970,11 +183970,11 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **   with the offsets=0 option specified. In this case *piOff is always
 **   set to -1.
 **
-**   Returns SQLITE_OK if successful, or an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) 
+**   Returns SQLITE_OK if successful, or an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM)
 **   if an error occurs.
 **
 **   This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. 
+**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option.
 **
 ** xRowid:
 **   Returns the rowid of the current row.
@@ -183990,11 +183990,11 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **
 **   with $p set to a phrase equivalent to the phrase iPhrase of the
 **   current query is executed. Any column filter that applies to
-**   phrase iPhrase of the current query is included in $p. For each 
-**   row visited, the callback function passed as the fourth argument 
-**   is invoked. The context and API objects passed to the callback 
+**   phrase iPhrase of the current query is included in $p. For each
+**   row visited, the callback function passed as the fourth argument
+**   is invoked. The context and API objects passed to the callback
 **   function may be used to access the properties of each matched row.
-**   Invoking Api.xUserData() returns a copy of the pointer passed as 
+**   Invoking Api.xUserData() returns a copy of the pointer passed as
 **   the third argument to pUserData.
 **
 **   If the callback function returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, the
@@ -184009,14 +184009,14 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **
 ** xSetAuxdata(pFts5, pAux, xDelete)
 **
-**   Save the pointer passed as the second argument as the extension functions 
+**   Save the pointer passed as the second argument as the extension functions
 **   "auxiliary data". The pointer may then be retrieved by the current or any
 **   future invocation of the same fts5 extension function made as part of
 **   of the same MATCH query using the xGetAuxdata() API.
 **
 **   Each extension function is allocated a single auxiliary data slot for
-**   each FTS query (MATCH expression). If the extension function is invoked 
-**   more than once for a single FTS query, then all invocations share a 
+**   each FTS query (MATCH expression). If the extension function is invoked
+**   more than once for a single FTS query, then all invocations share a
 **   single auxiliary data context.
 **
 **   If there is already an auxiliary data pointer when this function is
@@ -184035,7 +184035,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **
 ** xGetAuxdata(pFts5, bClear)
 **
-**   Returns the current auxiliary data pointer for the fts5 extension 
+**   Returns the current auxiliary data pointer for the fts5 extension
 **   function. See the xSetAuxdata() method for details.
 **
 **   If the bClear argument is non-zero, then the auxiliary data is cleared
@@ -184055,7 +184055,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **   method, to iterate through all instances of a single query phrase within
 **   the current row. This is the same information as is accessible via the
 **   xInstCount/xInst APIs. While the xInstCount/xInst APIs are more convenient
-**   to use, this API may be faster under some circumstances. To iterate 
+**   to use, this API may be faster under some circumstances. To iterate
 **   through instances of phrase iPhrase, use the following code:
 **
 **       Fts5PhraseIter iter;
@@ -184073,8 +184073,8 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **   xPhraseFirstColumn() and xPhraseNextColumn() as illustrated below).
 **
 **   This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created 
-**   with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option 
+**   "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
+**   with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
 **   (i.e. if it is a contentless table), then this API always iterates
 **   through an empty set (all calls to xPhraseFirst() set iCol to -1).
 **
@@ -184098,16 +184098,16 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
 **       }
 **
 **   This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-**   "detail=none" option. If the FTS5 table is created with either 
-**   "detail=none" "content=" option (i.e. if it is a contentless table), 
-**   then this API always iterates through an empty set (all calls to 
+**   "detail=none" option. If the FTS5 table is created with either
+**   "detail=none" "content=" option (i.e. if it is a contentless table),
+**   then this API always iterates through an empty set (all calls to
 **   xPhraseFirstColumn() set iCol to -1).
 **
 **   The information accessed using this API and its companion
 **   xPhraseFirstColumn() may also be obtained using xPhraseFirst/xPhraseNext
 **   (or xInst/xInstCount). The chief advantage of this API is that it is
 **   significantly more efficient than those alternatives when used with
-**   "detail=column" tables.  
+**   "detail=column" tables.
 **
 ** xPhraseNextColumn()
 **   See xPhraseFirstColumn above.
@@ -184121,7 +184121,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
   int (*xRowCount)(Fts5Context*, sqlite3_int64 *pnRow);
   int (*xColumnTotalSize)(Fts5Context*, int iCol, sqlite3_int64 *pnToken);
 
-  int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Context*, 
+  int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Context*,
     const char *pText, int nText, /* Text to tokenize */
     void *pCtx,                   /* Context passed to xToken() */
     int (*xToken)(void*, int, const char*, int, int, int)       /* Callback */
@@ -184150,15 +184150,15 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
   void (*xPhraseNextColumn)(Fts5Context*, Fts5PhraseIter*, int *piCol);
 };
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
 *************************************************************************/
 
 /*************************************************************************
 ** CUSTOM TOKENIZERS
 **
-** Applications may also register custom tokenizer types. A tokenizer 
-** is registered by providing fts5 with a populated instance of the 
+** Applications may also register custom tokenizer types. A tokenizer
+** is registered by providing fts5 with a populated instance of the
 ** following structure. All structure methods must be defined, setting
 ** any member of the fts5_tokenizer struct to NULL leads to undefined
 ** behaviour. The structure methods are expected to function as follows:
@@ -184169,16 +184169,16 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **
 **   The first argument passed to this function is a copy of the (void*)
 **   pointer provided by the application when the fts5_tokenizer object
-**   was registered with FTS5 (the third argument to xCreateTokenizer()). 
+**   was registered with FTS5 (the third argument to xCreateTokenizer()).
 **   The second and third arguments are an array of nul-terminated strings
 **   containing the tokenizer arguments, if any, specified following the
 **   tokenizer name as part of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement used
 **   to create the FTS5 table.
 **
-**   The final argument is an output variable. If successful, (*ppOut) 
+**   The final argument is an output variable. If successful, (*ppOut)
 **   should be set to point to the new tokenizer handle and SQLITE_OK
 **   returned. If an error occurs, some value other than SQLITE_OK should
-**   be returned. In this case, fts5 assumes that the final value of *ppOut 
+**   be returned. In this case, fts5 assumes that the final value of *ppOut
 **   is undefined.
 **
 ** xDelete:
@@ -184187,7 +184187,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **   be invoked exactly once for each successful call to xCreate().
 **
 ** xTokenize:
-**   This function is expected to tokenize the nText byte string indicated 
+**   This function is expected to tokenize the nText byte string indicated
 **   by argument pText. pText may or may not be nul-terminated. The first
 **   argument passed to this function is a pointer to an Fts5Tokenizer object
 **   returned by an earlier call to xCreate().
@@ -184201,8 +184201,8 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **            determine the set of tokens to add to (or delete from) the
 **            FTS index.
 **
-**       <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY</b> - A MATCH query is being executed 
-**            against the FTS index. The tokenizer is being called to tokenize 
+**       <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY</b> - A MATCH query is being executed
+**            against the FTS index. The tokenizer is being called to tokenize
 **            a bareword or quoted string specified as part of the query.
 **
 **       <li> <b>(FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY | FTS5_TOKENIZE_PREFIX)</b> - Same as
@@ -184210,10 +184210,10 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **            followed by a "*" character, indicating that the last token
 **            returned by the tokenizer will be treated as a token prefix.
 **
-**       <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_AUX</b> - The tokenizer is being invoked to 
+**       <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_AUX</b> - The tokenizer is being invoked to
 **            satisfy an fts5_api.xTokenize() request made by an auxiliary
 **            function. Or an fts5_api.xColumnSize() request made by the same
-**            on a columnsize=0 database.  
+**            on a columnsize=0 database.
 **   </ul>
 **
 **   For each token in the input string, the supplied callback xToken() must
@@ -184225,10 +184225,10 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **   which the token is derived within the input.
 **
 **   The second argument passed to the xToken() callback ("tflags") should
-**   normally be set to 0. The exception is if the tokenizer supports 
+**   normally be set to 0. The exception is if the tokenizer supports
 **   synonyms. In this case see the discussion below for details.
 **
-**   FTS5 assumes the xToken() callback is invoked for each token in the 
+**   FTS5 assumes the xToken() callback is invoked for each token in the
 **   order that they occur within the input text.
 **
 **   If an xToken() callback returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, then
@@ -184242,7 +184242,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 ** SYNONYM SUPPORT
 **
 **   Custom tokenizers may also support synonyms. Consider a case in which a
-**   user wishes to query for a phrase such as "first place". Using the 
+**   user wishes to query for a phrase such as "first place". Using the
 **   built-in tokenizers, the FTS5 query 'first + place' will match instances
 **   of "first place" within the document set, but not alternative forms
 **   such as "1st place". In some applications, it would be better to match
@@ -184251,7 +184251,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **
 **   There are several ways to approach this in FTS5:
 **
-**   <ol><li> By mapping all synonyms to a single token. In this case, the 
+**   <ol><li> By mapping all synonyms to a single token. In this case, the
 **            In the above example, this means that the tokenizer returns the
 **            same token for inputs "first" and "1st". Say that token is in
 **            fact "first", so that when the user inserts the document "I won
@@ -184261,7 +184261,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **            as expected.
 **
 **       <li> By adding multiple synonyms for a single term to the FTS index.
-**            In this case, when tokenizing query text, the tokenizer may 
+**            In this case, when tokenizing query text, the tokenizer may
 **            provide multiple synonyms for a single term within the document.
 **            FTS5 then queries the index for each synonym individually. For
 **            example, faced with the query:
@@ -184270,26 +184270,26 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **     ... MATCH 'first place'</codeblock>
 **
 **            the tokenizer offers both "1st" and "first" as synonyms for the
-**            first token in the MATCH query and FTS5 effectively runs a query 
+**            first token in the MATCH query and FTS5 effectively runs a query
 **            similar to:
 **
 **   <codeblock>
 **     ... MATCH '(first OR 1st) place'</codeblock>
 **
 **            except that, for the purposes of auxiliary functions, the query
-**            still appears to contain just two phrases - "(first OR 1st)" 
+**            still appears to contain just two phrases - "(first OR 1st)"
 **            being treated as a single phrase.
 **
 **       <li> By adding multiple synonyms for a single term to the FTS index.
 **            Using this method, when tokenizing document text, the tokenizer
-**            provides multiple synonyms for each token. So that when a 
+**            provides multiple synonyms for each token. So that when a
 **            document such as "I won first place" is tokenized, entries are
 **            added to the FTS index for "i", "won", "first", "1st" and
 **            "place".
 **
 **            This way, even if the tokenizer does not provide synonyms
 **            when tokenizing query text (it should not - to do would be
-**            inefficient), it doesn't matter if the user queries for 
+**            inefficient), it doesn't matter if the user queries for
 **            'first + place' or '1st + place', as there are entires in the
 **            FTS index corresponding to both forms of the first token.
 **   </ol>
@@ -184310,11 +184310,11 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **
 **   It is an error to specify the FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED flag the first time
 **   xToken() is called. Multiple synonyms may be specified for a single token
-**   by making multiple calls to xToken(FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED) in sequence. 
+**   by making multiple calls to xToken(FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED) in sequence.
 **   There is no limit to the number of synonyms that may be provided for a
 **   single token.
 **
-**   In many cases, method (1) above is the best approach. It does not add 
+**   In many cases, method (1) above is the best approach. It does not add
 **   extra data to the FTS index or require FTS5 to query for multiple terms,
 **   so it is efficient in terms of disk space and query speed. However, it
 **   does not support prefix queries very well. If, as suggested above, the
@@ -184326,18 +184326,18 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
 **   will not match documents that contain the token "1st" (as the tokenizer
 **   will probably not map "1s" to any prefix of "first").
 **
-**   For full prefix support, method (3) may be preferred. In this case, 
+**   For full prefix support, method (3) may be preferred. In this case,
 **   because the index contains entries for both "first" and "1st", prefix
 **   queries such as 'fi*' or '1s*' will match correctly. However, because
 **   extra entries are added to the FTS index, this method uses more space
 **   within the database.
 **
 **   Method (2) offers a midpoint between (1) and (3). Using this method,
-**   a query such as '1s*' will match documents that contain the literal 
+**   a query such as '1s*' will match documents that contain the literal
 **   token "1st", but not "first" (assuming the tokenizer is not able to
 **   provide synonyms for prefixes). However, a non-prefix query like '1st'
 **   will match against "1st" and "first". This method does not require
-**   extra disk space, as no extra entries are added to the FTS index. 
+**   extra disk space, as no extra entries are added to the FTS index.
 **   On the other hand, it may require more CPU cycles to run MATCH queries,
 **   as separate queries of the FTS index are required for each synonym.
 **
@@ -184351,10 +184351,10 @@ typedef struct fts5_tokenizer fts5_tokenizer;
 struct fts5_tokenizer {
   int (*xCreate)(void*, const char **azArg, int nArg, Fts5Tokenizer **ppOut);
   void (*xDelete)(Fts5Tokenizer*);
-  int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Tokenizer*, 
+  int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Tokenizer*,
       void *pCtx,
       int flags,            /* Mask of FTS5_TOKENIZE_* flags */
-      const char *pText, int nText, 
+      const char *pText, int nText,
       int (*xToken)(
         void *pCtx,         /* Copy of 2nd argument to xTokenize() */
         int tflags,         /* Mask of FTS5_TOKEN_* flags */
@@ -184475,7 +184475,7 @@ typedef sqlite3_uint64 u64;
 
 #endif
 
-/* Truncate very long tokens to this many bytes. Hard limit is 
+/* Truncate very long tokens to this many bytes. Hard limit is
 ** (65536-1-1-4-9)==65521 bytes. The limiting factor is the 16-bit offset
 ** field that occurs at the start of each leaf page (see fts5_index.c). */
 #define FTS5_MAX_TOKEN_SIZE 32768
@@ -184503,7 +184503,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5Corrupt(void);
 
 /*
 ** The assert_nc() macro is similar to the assert() macro, except that it
-** is used for assert() conditions that are true only if it can be 
+** is used for assert() conditions that are true only if it can be
 ** guranteed that the database is not corrupt.
 */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
@@ -184526,7 +184526,7 @@ SQLITE_API extern int sqlite3_fts5_may_be_corrupt;
 typedef struct Fts5Global Fts5Global;
 typedef struct Fts5Colset Fts5Colset;
 
-/* If a NEAR() clump or phrase may only match a specific set of columns, 
+/* If a NEAR() clump or phrase may only match a specific set of columns,
 ** then an object of the following type is used to record the set of columns.
 ** Each entry in the aiCol[] array is a column that may be matched.
 **
@@ -184554,20 +184554,20 @@ typedef struct Fts5Config Fts5Config;
 **
 ** nAutomerge:
 **   The minimum number of segments that an auto-merge operation should
-**   attempt to merge together. A value of 1 sets the object to use the 
+**   attempt to merge together. A value of 1 sets the object to use the
 **   compile time default. Zero disables auto-merge altogether.
 **
 ** zContent:
 **
 ** zContentRowid:
-**   The value of the content_rowid= option, if one was specified. Or 
+**   The value of the content_rowid= option, if one was specified. Or
 **   the string "rowid" otherwise. This text is not quoted - if it is
 **   used as part of an SQL statement it needs to be quoted appropriately.
 **
 ** zContentExprlist:
 **
 ** pzErrmsg:
-**   This exists in order to allow the fts5_index.c module to return a 
+**   This exists in order to allow the fts5_index.c module to return a
 **   decent error message if it encounters a file-format version it does
 **   not understand.
 **
@@ -184591,8 +184591,8 @@ struct Fts5Config {
   int nPrefix;                    /* Number of prefix indexes */
   int *aPrefix;                   /* Sizes in bytes of nPrefix prefix indexes */
   int eContent;                   /* An FTS5_CONTENT value */
-  char *zContent;                 /* content table */ 
-  char *zContentRowid;            /* "content_rowid=" option value */ 
+  char *zContent;                 /* content table */
+  char *zContentRowid;            /* "content_rowid=" option value */
   int bColumnsize;                /* "columnsize=" option value (dflt==1) */
   int eDetail;                    /* FTS5_DETAIL_XXX value */
   char *zContentExprlist;
@@ -184793,27 +184793,27 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexClose(Fts5Index *p);
 ** Return a simple checksum value based on the arguments.
 */
 static u64 sqlite3Fts5IndexEntryCksum(
-  i64 iRowid, 
-  int iCol, 
-  int iPos, 
+  i64 iRowid,
+  int iCol,
+  int iPos,
   int iIdx,
   const char *pTerm,
   int nTerm
 );
 
 /*
-** Argument p points to a buffer containing utf-8 text that is n bytes in 
+** Argument p points to a buffer containing utf-8 text that is n bytes in
 ** size. Return the number of bytes in the nChar character prefix of the
 ** buffer, or 0 if there are less than nChar characters in total.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexCharlenToBytelen(
-  const char *p, 
-  int nByte, 
+  const char *p,
+  int nByte,
   int nChar
 );
 
 /*
-** Open a new iterator to iterate though all rowids that match the 
+** Open a new iterator to iterate though all rowids that match the
 ** specified token or token prefix.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexQuery(
@@ -184844,7 +184844,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IterNextScan(Fts5IndexIter*);
 
 
 /*
-** Insert or remove data to or from the index. Each time a document is 
+** Insert or remove data to or from the index. Each time a document is
 ** added to or removed from the index, this function is called one or more
 ** times.
 **
@@ -184879,7 +184879,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexSync(Fts5Index *p);
 /*
 ** Discard any data stored in the in-memory hash tables. Do not write it
 ** to the database. Additionally, assume that the contents of the %_data
-** table may have changed on disk. So any in-memory caches of %_data 
+** table may have changed on disk. So any in-memory caches of %_data
 ** records must be invalidated.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexRollback(Fts5Index *p);
@@ -184895,16 +184895,16 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexSetAverages(Fts5Index *p, const u8*, int);
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexIntegrityCheck(Fts5Index*, u64 cksum);
 
-/* 
-** Called during virtual module initialization to register UDF 
-** fts5_decode() with SQLite 
+/*
+** Called during virtual module initialization to register UDF
+** fts5_decode() with SQLite
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexInit(sqlite3*);
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexSetCookie(Fts5Index*, int);
 
 /*
-** Return the total number of entries read from the %_data table by 
+** Return the total number of entries read from the %_data table by
 ** this connection since it was created.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexReads(Fts5Index *p);
@@ -184921,7 +184921,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexLoadConfig(Fts5Index *p);
 **************************************************************************/
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to code in fts5_varint.c. 
+** Interface to code in fts5_varint.c.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v);
 static int sqlite3Fts5GetVarintLen(u32 iVal);
@@ -184946,11 +184946,11 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5PutVarint(unsigned char *p, u64 v);
 
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to code in fts5.c. 
+** Interface to code in fts5.c.
 */
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5GetTokenizer(
-  Fts5Global*, 
+  Fts5Global*,
   const char **azArg,
   int nArg,
   Fts5Tokenizer**,
@@ -184965,7 +184965,7 @@ static Fts5Index *sqlite3Fts5IndexFromCsrid(Fts5Global*, i64, Fts5Config **);
 **************************************************************************/
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to code in fts5_hash.c. 
+** Interface to code in fts5_hash.c.
 */
 typedef struct Fts5Hash Fts5Hash;
 
@@ -185014,7 +185014,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(Fts5Hash *,
 **************************************************************************/
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to code in fts5_storage.c. fts5_storage.c contains contains 
+** Interface to code in fts5_storage.c. fts5_storage.c contains contains
 ** code to access the data stored in the %_content and %_docsize tables.
 */
 
@@ -185063,7 +185063,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageReset(Fts5Storage *p);
 
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to code in fts5_expr.c. 
+** Interface to code in fts5_expr.c.
 */
 typedef struct Fts5Expr Fts5Expr;
 typedef struct Fts5ExprNode Fts5ExprNode;
@@ -185079,10 +185079,10 @@ struct Fts5Token {
 
 /* Parse a MATCH expression. */
 static int sqlite3Fts5ExprNew(
-  Fts5Config *pConfig, 
+  Fts5Config *pConfig,
   int iCol,                       /* Column on LHS of MATCH operator */
   const char *zExpr,
-  Fts5Expr **ppNew, 
+  Fts5Expr **ppNew,
   char **pzErr
 );
 
@@ -185142,21 +185142,21 @@ static Fts5ExprNode *sqlite3Fts5ParseImplicitAnd(
 );
 
 static Fts5ExprPhrase *sqlite3Fts5ParseTerm(
-  Fts5Parse *pParse, 
-  Fts5ExprPhrase *pPhrase, 
+  Fts5Parse *pParse,
+  Fts5ExprPhrase *pPhrase,
   Fts5Token *pToken,
   int bPrefix
 );
 
 static Fts5ExprNearset *sqlite3Fts5ParseNearset(
-  Fts5Parse*, 
+  Fts5Parse*,
   Fts5ExprNearset*,
-  Fts5ExprPhrase* 
+  Fts5ExprPhrase*
 );
 
 static Fts5Colset *sqlite3Fts5ParseColset(
-  Fts5Parse*, 
-  Fts5Colset*, 
+  Fts5Parse*,
+  Fts5Colset*,
   Fts5Token *
 );
 
@@ -185177,7 +185177,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5ParseNear(Fts5Parse *pParse, Fts5Token*);
 
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to code in fts5_aux.c. 
+** Interface to code in fts5_aux.c.
 */
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5AuxInit(fts5_api*);
@@ -185186,7 +185186,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5AuxInit(fts5_api*);
 **************************************************************************/
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to code in fts5_tokenizer.c. 
+** Interface to code in fts5_tokenizer.c.
 */
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5TokenizerInit(fts5_api*);
@@ -185195,7 +185195,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5TokenizerInit(fts5_api*);
 **************************************************************************/
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to code in fts5_vocab.c. 
+** Interface to code in fts5_vocab.c.
 */
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5VocabInit(Fts5Global*, sqlite3*);
@@ -185206,7 +185206,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5VocabInit(Fts5Global*, sqlite3*);
 
 
 /**************************************************************************
-** Interface to automatically generated code in fts5_unicode2.c. 
+** Interface to automatically generated code in fts5_unicode2.c.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeIsalnum(int c);
 static int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeIsdiacritic(int c);
@@ -185315,7 +185315,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic);
 **                       the minor type might be the name of the identifier.
 **                       Each non-terminal can have a different minor type.
 **                       Terminal symbols all have the same minor type, though.
-**                       This macros defines the minor type for terminal 
+**                       This macros defines the minor type for terminal
 **                       symbols.
 **    fts5YYMINORTYPE        is the data type used for all minor types.
 **                       This is typically a union of many types, one of
@@ -185392,7 +185392,7 @@ typedef union {
 /* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the
 ** current state and lookahead token.  These tables are used to implement
 ** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an
-** action integer.  
+** action integer.
 **
 ** Suppose the action integer is N.  Then the action is determined as
 ** follows
@@ -185496,9 +185496,9 @@ static const fts5YYACTIONTYPE fts5yy_default[] = {
 };
 /********** End of lemon-generated parsing tables *****************************/
 
-/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.  
+/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.
 ** If a construct like the following:
-** 
+**
 **      %fallback ID X Y Z.
 **
 ** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y,
@@ -185569,10 +185569,10 @@ static char *fts5yyTracePrompt = 0;
 #endif /* NDEBUG */
 
 #ifndef NDEBUG
-/* 
+/*
 ** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace
 ** and a prompt to preface each trace message.  Tracing is turned off
-** by making either argument NULL 
+** by making either argument NULL
 **
 ** Inputs:
 ** <ul>
@@ -185597,14 +185597,14 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5ParserTrace(FILE *TraceFILE, char *zTracePrompt){
 #ifndef NDEBUG
 /* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals
 ** are required.  The following table supplies these names */
-static const char *const fts5yyTokenName[] = { 
-  "$",             "OR",            "AND",           "NOT",         
-  "TERM",          "COLON",         "MINUS",         "LCP",         
-  "RCP",           "STRING",        "LP",            "RP",          
-  "COMMA",         "PLUS",          "STAR",          "error",       
-  "input",         "expr",          "cnearset",      "exprlist",    
-  "colset",        "colsetlist",    "nearset",       "nearphrases", 
-  "phrase",        "neardist_opt",  "star_opt",    
+static const char *const fts5yyTokenName[] = {
+  "$",             "OR",            "AND",           "NOT",
+  "TERM",          "COLON",         "MINUS",         "LCP",
+  "RCP",           "STRING",        "LP",            "RP",
+  "COMMA",         "PLUS",          "STAR",          "error",
+  "input",         "expr",          "cnearset",      "exprlist",
+  "colset",        "colsetlist",    "nearset",       "nearphrases",
+  "phrase",        "neardist_opt",  "star_opt",
 };
 #endif /* NDEBUG */
 
@@ -185672,7 +185672,7 @@ static int fts5yyGrowStack(fts5yyParser *p){
 #endif
     p->fts5yystksz = newSize;
   }
-  return pNew==0; 
+  return pNew==0;
 }
 #endif
 
@@ -185713,7 +185713,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5ParserInit(void *fts5yypParser){
 }
 
 #ifndef sqlite3Fts5Parser_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
+/*
 ** This function allocates a new parser.
 ** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like
 ** malloc.
@@ -185737,7 +185737,7 @@ static void *sqlite3Fts5ParserAlloc(void *(*mallocProc)(fts5YYMALLOCARGTYPE)){
 /* The following function deletes the "minor type" or semantic value
 ** associated with a symbol.  The symbol can be either a terminal
 ** or nonterminal. "fts5yymajor" is the symbol code, and "fts5yypminor" is
-** a pointer to the value to be deleted.  The code used to do the 
+** a pointer to the value to be deleted.  The code used to do the
 ** deletions is derived from the %destructor and/or %token_destructor
 ** directives of the input grammar.
 */
@@ -185751,7 +185751,7 @@ static void fts5yy_destructor(
     /* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a
     ** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed.  This can happen
     ** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a
-    ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is 
+    ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is
     ** being destroyed before it is finished parsing.
     **
     ** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those
@@ -185761,31 +185761,31 @@ static void fts5yy_destructor(
 /********* Begin destructor definitions ***************************************/
     case 16: /* input */
 {
- (void)pParse; 
+ (void)pParse;
 }
       break;
     case 17: /* expr */
     case 18: /* cnearset */
     case 19: /* exprlist */
 {
- sqlite3Fts5ParseNodeFree((fts5yypminor->fts5yy24)); 
+ sqlite3Fts5ParseNodeFree((fts5yypminor->fts5yy24));
 }
       break;
     case 20: /* colset */
     case 21: /* colsetlist */
 {
- sqlite3_free((fts5yypminor->fts5yy11)); 
+ sqlite3_free((fts5yypminor->fts5yy11));
 }
       break;
     case 22: /* nearset */
     case 23: /* nearphrases */
 {
- sqlite3Fts5ParseNearsetFree((fts5yypminor->fts5yy46)); 
+ sqlite3Fts5ParseNearsetFree((fts5yypminor->fts5yy46));
 }
       break;
     case 24: /* phrase */
 {
- sqlite3Fts5ParsePhraseFree((fts5yypminor->fts5yy53)); 
+ sqlite3Fts5ParsePhraseFree((fts5yypminor->fts5yy53));
 }
       break;
 /********* End destructor definitions *****************************************/
@@ -185826,7 +185826,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5ParserFinalize(void *p){
 }
 
 #ifndef sqlite3Fts5Parser_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
+/*
 ** Deallocate and destroy a parser.  Destructors are called for
 ** all stack elements before shutting the parser down.
 **
@@ -185866,7 +185866,7 @@ static unsigned int fts5yy_find_shift_action(
 ){
   int i;
   int stateno = pParser->fts5yytos->stateno;
- 
+
   if( stateno>=fts5YY_MIN_REDUCE ) return stateno;
   assert( stateno <= fts5YY_SHIFT_COUNT );
   do{
@@ -185892,7 +185892,7 @@ static unsigned int fts5yy_find_shift_action(
 #ifdef fts5YYWILDCARD
       {
         int j = i - iLookAhead + fts5YYWILDCARD;
-        if( 
+        if(
 #if fts5YY_SHIFT_MIN+fts5YYWILDCARD<0
           j>=0 &&
 #endif
@@ -186007,7 +186007,7 @@ static void fts5yy_shift(
     assert( fts5yypParser->fts5yyhwm == (int)(fts5yypParser->fts5yytos - fts5yypParser->fts5yystack) );
   }
 #endif
-#if fts5YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
+#if fts5YYSTACKDEPTH>0
   if( fts5yypParser->fts5yytos>fts5yypParser->fts5yystackEnd ){
     fts5yypParser->fts5yytos--;
     fts5yyStackOverflow(fts5yypParser);
@@ -186102,7 +186102,7 @@ static void fts5yy_reduce(
       assert( fts5yypParser->fts5yyhwm == (int)(fts5yypParser->fts5yytos - fts5yypParser->fts5yystack));
     }
 #endif
-#if fts5YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
+#if fts5YYSTACKDEPTH>0
     if( fts5yypParser->fts5yytos>=fts5yypParser->fts5yystackEnd ){
       fts5yyStackOverflow(fts5yypParser);
       return;
@@ -186133,7 +186133,7 @@ static void fts5yy_reduce(
 { sqlite3Fts5ParseFinished(pParse, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy24); }
         break;
       case 1: /* colset ::= MINUS LCP colsetlist RCP */
-{ 
+{
     fts5yymsp[-3].minor.fts5yy11 = sqlite3Fts5ParseColsetInvert(pParse, fts5yymsp[-1].minor.fts5yy11);
 }
         break;
@@ -186153,13 +186153,13 @@ static void fts5yy_reduce(
 }
         break;
       case 5: /* colsetlist ::= colsetlist STRING */
-{ 
+{
   fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy11 = sqlite3Fts5ParseColset(pParse, fts5yymsp[-1].minor.fts5yy11, &fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy0); }
   fts5yymsp[-1].minor.fts5yy11 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy11;
         break;
       case 6: /* colsetlist ::= STRING */
-{ 
-  fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy11 = sqlite3Fts5ParseColset(pParse, 0, &fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy0); 
+{
+  fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy11 = sqlite3Fts5ParseColset(pParse, 0, &fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy0);
 }
   fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy11 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy11;
         break;
@@ -186203,14 +186203,14 @@ static void fts5yy_reduce(
   fts5yymsp[-1].minor.fts5yy24 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy24;
         break;
       case 15: /* cnearset ::= nearset */
-{ 
-  fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy24 = sqlite3Fts5ParseNode(pParse, FTS5_STRING, 0, 0, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy46); 
+{
+  fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy24 = sqlite3Fts5ParseNode(pParse, FTS5_STRING, 0, 0, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy46);
 }
   fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy24 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy24;
         break;
       case 16: /* cnearset ::= colset COLON nearset */
-{ 
-  fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy24 = sqlite3Fts5ParseNode(pParse, FTS5_STRING, 0, 0, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy46); 
+{
+  fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy24 = sqlite3Fts5ParseNode(pParse, FTS5_STRING, 0, 0, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy46);
   sqlite3Fts5ParseSetColset(pParse, fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy24, fts5yymsp[-2].minor.fts5yy11);
 }
   fts5yymsp[-2].minor.fts5yy24 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy24;
@@ -186228,8 +186228,8 @@ static void fts5yy_reduce(
   fts5yymsp[-4].minor.fts5yy46 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy46;
         break;
       case 19: /* nearphrases ::= phrase */
-{ 
-  fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy46 = sqlite3Fts5ParseNearset(pParse, 0, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy53); 
+{
+  fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy46 = sqlite3Fts5ParseNearset(pParse, 0, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy53);
 }
   fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy46 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy46;
         break;
@@ -186246,13 +186246,13 @@ static void fts5yy_reduce(
 { fts5yymsp[-1].minor.fts5yy0 = fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy0; }
         break;
       case 23: /* phrase ::= phrase PLUS STRING star_opt */
-{ 
+{
   fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy53 = sqlite3Fts5ParseTerm(pParse, fts5yymsp[-3].minor.fts5yy53, &fts5yymsp[-1].minor.fts5yy0, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy4);
 }
   fts5yymsp[-3].minor.fts5yy53 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy53;
         break;
       case 24: /* phrase ::= STRING star_opt */
-{ 
+{
   fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy53 = sqlite3Fts5ParseTerm(pParse, 0, &fts5yymsp[-1].minor.fts5yy0, fts5yymsp[0].minor.fts5yy4);
 }
   fts5yymsp[-1].minor.fts5yy53 = fts5yylhsminor.fts5yy53;
@@ -186428,7 +186428,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5Parser(
 #ifdef fts5YYERRORSYMBOL
       /* A syntax error has occurred.
       ** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the
-      ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".  
+      ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".
       **
       ** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR:
       **
@@ -186491,7 +186491,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5Parser(
       fts5yy_syntax_error(fts5yypParser,fts5yymajor, fts5yyminor);
       fts5yy_destructor(fts5yypParser,(fts5YYCODETYPE)fts5yymajor,&fts5yyminorunion);
       fts5yymajor = fts5YYNOCODE;
-      
+
 #else  /* fts5YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */
       /* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR:
       **
@@ -186550,7 +186550,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5Parser(
 #include <math.h>                 /* amalgamator: keep */
 
 /*
-** Object used to iterate through all "coalesced phrase instances" in 
+** Object used to iterate through all "coalesced phrase instances" in
 ** a single column of the current row. If the phrase instances in the
 ** column being considered do not overlap, this object simply iterates
 ** through them. Or, if they do overlap (share one or more tokens in
@@ -186613,7 +186613,7 @@ static int fts5CInstIterNext(CInstIter *pIter){
 }
 
 /*
-** Initialize the iterator object indicated by the final parameter to 
+** Initialize the iterator object indicated by the final parameter to
 ** iterate through coalesced phrase instances in column iCol.
 */
 static int fts5CInstIterInit(
@@ -186658,16 +186658,16 @@ struct HighlightContext {
 
 /*
 ** Append text to the HighlightContext output string - p->zOut. Argument
-** z points to a buffer containing n bytes of text to append. If n is 
+** z points to a buffer containing n bytes of text to append. If n is
 ** negative, everything up until the first '\0' is appended to the output.
 **
-** If *pRc is set to any value other than SQLITE_OK when this function is 
-** called, it is a no-op. If an error (i.e. an OOM condition) is encountered, 
-** *pRc is set to an error code before returning. 
+** If *pRc is set to any value other than SQLITE_OK when this function is
+** called, it is a no-op. If an error (i.e. an OOM condition) is encountered,
+** *pRc is set to an error code before returning.
 */
 static void fts5HighlightAppend(
-  int *pRc, 
-  HighlightContext *p, 
+  int *pRc,
+  HighlightContext *p,
   const char *z, int n
 ){
   if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -186952,7 +186952,7 @@ static void fts5SnippetFunction(
       sFinder.nFirst = 0;
       rc = pApi->xColumnText(pFts, i, &sFinder.zDoc, &nDoc);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) break;
-      rc = pApi->xTokenize(pFts, 
+      rc = pApi->xTokenize(pFts,
           sFinder.zDoc, nDoc, (void*)&sFinder,fts5SentenceFinderCb
       );
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) break;
@@ -186985,7 +186985,7 @@ static void fts5SnippetFunction(
 
           if( sFinder.aFirst[jj]<io ){
             memset(aSeen, 0, nPhrase);
-            rc = fts5SnippetScore(pApi, pFts, nDocsize, aSeen, i, 
+            rc = fts5SnippetScore(pApi, pFts, nDocsize, aSeen, i,
               sFinder.aFirst[jj], nToken, &nScore, 0
             );
 
@@ -187064,7 +187064,7 @@ struct Fts5Bm25Data {
 ** table matched by each individual phrase within the query.
 */
 static int fts5CountCb(
-  const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi, 
+  const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi,
   Fts5Context *pFts,
   void *pUserData                 /* Pointer to sqlite3_int64 variable */
 ){
@@ -187075,12 +187075,12 @@ static int fts5CountCb(
 }
 
 /*
-** Set *ppData to point to the Fts5Bm25Data object for the current query. 
+** Set *ppData to point to the Fts5Bm25Data object for the current query.
 ** If the object has not already been allocated, allocate and populate it
 ** now.
 */
 static int fts5Bm25GetData(
-  const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi, 
+  const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi,
   Fts5Context *pFts,
   Fts5Bm25Data **ppData           /* OUT: bm25-data object for this query */
 ){
@@ -187127,7 +187127,7 @@ static int fts5Bm25GetData(
         ** is the number that contain at least one instance of the phrase
         ** under consideration.
         **
-        ** The problem with this is that if (N < 2*nHit), the IDF is 
+        ** The problem with this is that if (N < 2*nHit), the IDF is
         ** negative. Which is undesirable. So the mimimum allowable IDF is
         ** (1e-6) - roughly the same as a term that appears in just over
         ** half of set of 5,000,000 documents.  */
@@ -187195,11 +187195,11 @@ static void fts5Bm25Function(
   /* Determine the BM25 score for the current row. */
   for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<pData->nPhrase; i++){
     score += pData->aIDF[i] * (
-      ( aFreq[i] * (k1 + 1.0) ) / 
+      ( aFreq[i] * (k1 + 1.0) ) /
       ( aFreq[i] + k1 * (1 - b + b * D / pData->avgdl) )
     );
   }
-  
+
   /* If no error has occurred, return the calculated score. Otherwise,
   ** throw an SQL exception.  */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -187295,14 +187295,14 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5Get32(const u8 *aBuf){
 }
 
 /*
-** Append buffer nData/pData to buffer pBuf. If an OOM error occurs, set 
+** Append buffer nData/pData to buffer pBuf. If an OOM error occurs, set
 ** the error code in p. If an error has already occurred when this function
 ** is called, it is a no-op.
 */
 static void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendBlob(
   int *pRc,
-  Fts5Buffer *pBuf, 
-  u32 nData, 
+  Fts5Buffer *pBuf,
+  u32 nData,
   const u8 *pData
 ){
   assert_nc( *pRc || nData>=0 );
@@ -187315,12 +187315,12 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendBlob(
 
 /*
 ** Append the nul-terminated string zStr to the buffer pBuf. This function
-** ensures that the byte following the buffer data is set to 0x00, even 
+** ensures that the byte following the buffer data is set to 0x00, even
 ** though this byte is not included in the pBuf->n count.
 */
 static void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendString(
   int *pRc,
-  Fts5Buffer *pBuf, 
+  Fts5Buffer *pBuf,
   const char *zStr
 ){
   int nStr = (int)strlen(zStr);
@@ -187332,13 +187332,13 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendString(
 ** Argument zFmt is a printf() style format string. This function performs
 ** the printf() style processing, then appends the results to buffer pBuf.
 **
-** Like sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendString(), this function ensures that the byte 
+** Like sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendString(), this function ensures that the byte
 ** following the buffer data is set to 0x00, even though this byte is not
 ** included in the pBuf->n count.
-*/ 
+*/
 static void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendPrintf(
   int *pRc,
-  Fts5Buffer *pBuf, 
+  Fts5Buffer *pBuf,
   char *zFmt, ...
 ){
   if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -187365,12 +187365,12 @@ static char *sqlite3Fts5Mprintf(int *pRc, const char *zFmt, ...){
     zRet = sqlite3_vmprintf(zFmt, ap);
     va_end(ap);
     if( zRet==0 ){
-      *pRc = SQLITE_NOMEM; 
+      *pRc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
     }
   }
   return zRet;
 }
- 
+
 
 /*
 ** Free any buffer allocated by pBuf. Zero the structure before returning.
@@ -187381,7 +187381,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5BufferFree(Fts5Buffer *pBuf){
 }
 
 /*
-** Zero the contents of the buffer object. But do not free the associated 
+** Zero the contents of the buffer object. But do not free the associated
 ** memory allocation.
 */
 static void sqlite3Fts5BufferZero(Fts5Buffer *pBuf){
@@ -187395,8 +187395,8 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5BufferZero(Fts5Buffer *pBuf){
 */
 static void sqlite3Fts5BufferSet(
   int *pRc,
-  Fts5Buffer *pBuf, 
-  int nData, 
+  Fts5Buffer *pBuf,
+  int nData,
   const u8 *pData
 ){
   pBuf->n = 0;
@@ -187412,7 +187412,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5PoslistNext64(
   if( i>=n ){
     /* EOF */
     *piOff = -1;
-    return 1;  
+    return 1;
   }else{
     i64 iOff = *piOff;
     int iVal;
@@ -187458,8 +187458,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5PoslistReaderInit(
 ** to iPos before returning.
 */
 static void sqlite3Fts5PoslistSafeAppend(
-  Fts5Buffer *pBuf, 
-  i64 *piPrev, 
+  Fts5Buffer *pBuf,
+  i64 *piPrev,
   i64 iPos
 ){
   static const i64 colmask = ((i64)(0x7FFFFFFF)) << 32;
@@ -187473,7 +187473,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5PoslistSafeAppend(
 }
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5PoslistWriterAppend(
-  Fts5Buffer *pBuf, 
+  Fts5Buffer *pBuf,
   Fts5PoslistWriter *pWriter,
   i64 iPos
 ){
@@ -187502,7 +187502,7 @@ static void *sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(int *pRc, int nByte){
 ** the length of the string is determined using strlen().
 **
 ** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free the returned
-** buffer using sqlite3_free(). If an OOM error occurs, NULL is returned. 
+** buffer using sqlite3_free(). If an OOM error occurs, NULL is returned.
 */
 static char *sqlite3Fts5Strndup(int *pRc, const char *pIn, int nIn){
   char *zRet = 0;
@@ -187569,9 +187569,9 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5TermsetNew(Fts5Termset **pp){
 }
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5TermsetAdd(
-  Fts5Termset *p, 
+  Fts5Termset *p,
   int iIdx,
-  const char *pTerm, int nTerm, 
+  const char *pTerm, int nTerm,
   int *pbPresent
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -187592,9 +187592,9 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5TermsetAdd(
     hash = hash % ArraySize(p->apHash);
 
     for(pEntry=p->apHash[hash]; pEntry; pEntry=pEntry->pNext){
-      if( pEntry->iIdx==iIdx 
-          && pEntry->nTerm==nTerm 
-          && memcmp(pEntry->pTerm, pTerm, nTerm)==0 
+      if( pEntry->iIdx==iIdx
+          && pEntry->nTerm==nTerm
+          && memcmp(pEntry->pTerm, pTerm, nTerm)==0
       ){
         *pbPresent = 1;
         break;
@@ -187668,8 +187668,8 @@ static int fts5_isopenquote(char x){
 }
 
 /*
-** Argument pIn points to a character that is part of a nul-terminated 
-** string. Return a pointer to the first character following *pIn in 
+** Argument pIn points to a character that is part of a nul-terminated
+** string. Return a pointer to the first character following *pIn in
 ** the string that is not a white-space character.
 */
 static const char *fts5ConfigSkipWhitespace(const char *pIn){
@@ -187681,8 +187681,8 @@ static const char *fts5ConfigSkipWhitespace(const char *pIn){
 }
 
 /*
-** Argument pIn points to a character that is part of a nul-terminated 
-** string. Return a pointer to the first character following *pIn in 
+** Argument pIn points to a character that is part of a nul-terminated
+** string. Return a pointer to the first character following *pIn in
 ** the string that is not a "bareword" character.
 */
 static const char *fts5ConfigSkipBareword(const char *pIn){
@@ -187713,9 +187713,9 @@ static const char *fts5ConfigSkipLiteral(const char *pIn){
       p++;
       if( *p=='\'' ){
         p++;
-        while( (*p>='a' && *p<='f') 
-            || (*p>='A' && *p<='F') 
-            || (*p>='0' && *p<='9') 
+        while( (*p>='a' && *p<='f')
+            || (*p>='A' && *p<='F')
+            || (*p>='0' && *p<='9')
             ){
           p++;
         }
@@ -187746,7 +187746,7 @@ static const char *fts5ConfigSkipLiteral(const char *pIn){
       if( *p=='+' || *p=='-' ) p++;
       while( fts5_isdigit(*p) ) p++;
 
-      /* At this point, if the literal was an integer, the parse is 
+      /* At this point, if the literal was an integer, the parse is
       ** finished. Or, if it is a floating point value, it may continue
       ** with either a decimal point or an 'E' character. */
       if( *p=='.' && fts5_isdigit(p[1]) ){
@@ -187770,8 +187770,8 @@ static const char *fts5ConfigSkipLiteral(const char *pIn){
 ** nul-terminator byte.
 **
 ** If the close-quote is found, the value returned is the byte offset of
-** the character immediately following it. Or, if the close-quote is not 
-** found, -1 is returned. If -1 is returned, the buffer is left in an 
+** the character immediately following it. Or, if the close-quote is not
+** found, -1 is returned. If -1 is returned, the buffer is left in an
 ** undefined state.
 */
 static int fts5Dequote(char *z){
@@ -187782,7 +187782,7 @@ static int fts5Dequote(char *z){
 
   /* Set stack variable q to the close-quote character */
   assert( q=='[' || q=='\'' || q=='"' || q=='`' );
-  if( q=='[' ) q = ']';  
+  if( q=='[' ) q = ']';
 
   while( ALWAYS(z[iIn]) ){
     if( z[iIn]==q ){
@@ -187792,7 +187792,7 @@ static int fts5Dequote(char *z){
         break;
       }else{
         /* Character iIn and iIn+1 form an escaped quote character. Skip
-        ** the input cursor past both and copy a single quote character 
+        ** the input cursor past both and copy a single quote character
         ** to the output buffer. */
         iIn += 2;
         z[iOut++] = q;
@@ -187837,8 +187837,8 @@ struct Fts5Enum {
 typedef struct Fts5Enum Fts5Enum;
 
 static int fts5ConfigSetEnum(
-  const Fts5Enum *aEnum, 
-  const char *zEnum, 
+  const Fts5Enum *aEnum,
+  const char *zEnum,
   int *peVal
 ){
   int nEnum = (int)strlen(zEnum);
@@ -187958,7 +187958,7 @@ static int fts5ConfigParseSpecial(
           *pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf("parse error in tokenize directive");
           rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
         }else{
-          rc = sqlite3Fts5GetTokenizer(pGlobal, 
+          rc = sqlite3Fts5GetTokenizer(pGlobal,
               (const char**)azArg, nArg, &pConfig->pTok, &pConfig->pTokApi,
               pzErr
           );
@@ -188025,7 +188025,7 @@ static int fts5ConfigParseSpecial(
 }
 
 /*
-** Allocate an instance of the default tokenizer ("simple") at 
+** Allocate an instance of the default tokenizer ("simple") at
 ** Fts5Config.pTokenizer. Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error
 ** code if an error occurs.
 */
@@ -188092,14 +188092,14 @@ static const char *fts5ConfigGobbleWord(
 }
 
 static int fts5ConfigParseColumn(
-  Fts5Config *p, 
-  char *zCol, 
-  char *zArg, 
+  Fts5Config *p,
+  char *zCol,
+  char *zArg,
   char **pzErr
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp(zCol, FTS5_RANK_NAME) 
-   || 0==sqlite3_stricmp(zCol, FTS5_ROWID_NAME) 
+  if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp(zCol, FTS5_RANK_NAME)
+   || 0==sqlite3_stricmp(zCol, FTS5_ROWID_NAME)
   ){
     *pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf("reserved fts5 column name: %s", zCol);
     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -188142,14 +188142,14 @@ static int fts5ConfigMakeExprlist(Fts5Config *p){
 
 /*
 ** Arguments nArg/azArg contain the string arguments passed to the xCreate
-** or xConnect method of the virtual table. This function attempts to 
+** or xConnect method of the virtual table. This function attempts to
 ** allocate an instance of Fts5Config containing the results of parsing
 ** those arguments.
 **
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppOut is set to point to the
-** new Fts5Config object. If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is 
+** new Fts5Config object. If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is
 ** returned, *ppOut is set to NULL and an error message may be left in
-** *pzErr. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free any 
+** *pzErr. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free any
 ** such error message using sqlite3_free().
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigParse(
@@ -188236,8 +188236,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigParse(
   /* If no zContent option was specified, fill in the default values. */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pRet->zContent==0 ){
     const char *zTail = 0;
-    assert( pRet->eContent==FTS5_CONTENT_NORMAL 
-         || pRet->eContent==FTS5_CONTENT_NONE 
+    assert( pRet->eContent==FTS5_CONTENT_NORMAL
+         || pRet->eContent==FTS5_CONTENT_NONE
     );
     if( pRet->eContent==FTS5_CONTENT_NORMAL ){
       zTail = "content";
@@ -188308,7 +188308,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigDeclareVtab(Fts5Config *pConfig){
     const char *zSep = (i==0?"":", ");
     zSql = sqlite3Fts5Mprintf(&rc, "%z%s%Q", zSql, zSep, pConfig->azCol[i]);
   }
-  zSql = sqlite3Fts5Mprintf(&rc, "%z, %Q HIDDEN, %s HIDDEN)", 
+  zSql = sqlite3Fts5Mprintf(&rc, "%z, %Q HIDDEN, %s HIDDEN)",
       zSql, pConfig->zName, FTS5_RANK_NAME
   );
 
@@ -188317,7 +188317,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigDeclareVtab(Fts5Config *pConfig){
     rc = sqlite3_declare_vtab(pConfig->db, zSql);
     sqlite3_free(zSql);
   }
-  
+
   return rc;
 }
 
@@ -188335,7 +188335,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigDeclareVtab(Fts5Config *pConfig){
 **     int iPos            // Position of token in input (first token is 0)
 **
 ** If the callback returns a non-zero value the tokenization is abandoned
-** and no further callbacks are issued. 
+** and no further callbacks are issued.
 **
 ** This function returns SQLITE_OK if successful or an SQLite error code
 ** if an error occurs. If the tokenization was abandoned early because
@@ -188365,7 +188365,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(
 */
 static const char *fts5ConfigSkipArgs(const char *pIn){
   const char *p = pIn;
-  
+
   while( 1 ){
     p = fts5ConfigSkipWhitespace(p);
     p = fts5ConfigSkipLiteral(p);
@@ -188382,7 +188382,7 @@ static const char *fts5ConfigSkipArgs(const char *pIn){
 }
 
 /*
-** Parameter zIn contains a rank() function specification. The format of 
+** Parameter zIn contains a rank() function specification. The format of
 ** this is:
 **
 **   + Bareword (function name)
@@ -188424,7 +188424,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigParseRank(
       p++;
     }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-      const char *pArgs; 
+      const char *pArgs;
       p = fts5ConfigSkipWhitespace(p);
       pArgs = p;
       if( *p!=')' ){
@@ -188450,8 +188450,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigParseRank(
 }
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigSetValue(
-  Fts5Config *pConfig, 
-  const char *zKey, 
+  Fts5Config *pConfig,
+  const char *zKey,
   sqlite3_value *pVal,
   int *pbBadkey
 ){
@@ -188576,7 +188576,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ConfigLoad(Fts5Config *pConfig, int iCookie){
     }
     rc = sqlite3_finalize(p);
   }
-  
+
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && iVersion!=FTS5_CURRENT_VERSION ){
     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
     if( pConfig->pzErrmsg ){
@@ -188664,7 +188664,7 @@ struct Fts5ExprNode {
   i64 iRowid;                     /* Current rowid */
   Fts5ExprNearset *pNear;         /* For FTS5_STRING - cluster of phrases */
 
-  /* Child nodes. For a NOT node, this array always contains 2 entries. For 
+  /* Child nodes. For a NOT node, this array always contains 2 entries. For
   ** AND or OR nodes, it contains 2 or more entries.  */
   int nChild;                     /* Number of child nodes */
   Fts5ExprNode *apChild[1];       /* Array of child nodes */
@@ -188742,7 +188742,7 @@ static int fts5ExprIsspace(char t){
 ** Read the first token from the nul-terminated string at *pz.
 */
 static int fts5ExprGetToken(
-  Fts5Parse *pParse, 
+  Fts5Parse *pParse,
   const char **pz,                /* IN/OUT: Pointer into buffer */
   Fts5Token *pToken
 ){
@@ -188811,7 +188811,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ExprNew(
   Fts5Config *pConfig,            /* FTS5 Configuration */
   int iCol,
   const char *zExpr,              /* Expression text */
-  Fts5Expr **ppNew, 
+  Fts5Expr **ppNew,
   char **pzErr
 ){
   Fts5Parse sParse;
@@ -188931,7 +188931,7 @@ static i64 fts5ExprSynonymRowid(Fts5ExprTerm *pTerm, int bDesc, int *pbEof){
 ** Argument pTerm must be a synonym iterator.
 */
 static int fts5ExprSynonymList(
-  Fts5ExprTerm *pTerm, 
+  Fts5ExprTerm *pTerm,
   i64 iRowid,
   Fts5Buffer *pBuf,               /* Use this buffer for space if required */
   u8 **pa, int *pn
@@ -189004,13 +189004,13 @@ static int fts5ExprSynonymList(
 
 /*
 ** All individual term iterators in pPhrase are guaranteed to be valid and
-** pointing to the same rowid when this function is called. This function 
+** pointing to the same rowid when this function is called. This function
 ** checks if the current rowid really is a match, and if so populates
 ** the pPhrase->poslist buffer accordingly. Output parameter *pbMatch
 ** is set to true if this is really a match, or false otherwise.
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if an error occurs, or an SQLite error code 
-** otherwise. It is not considered an error code if the current rowid is 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if an error occurs, or an SQLite error code
+** otherwise. It is not considered an error code if the current rowid is
 ** not a match.
 */
 static int fts5ExprPhraseIsMatch(
@@ -189023,7 +189023,7 @@ static int fts5ExprPhraseIsMatch(
   Fts5PoslistReader *aIter = aStatic;
   int i;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  
+
   fts5BufferZero(&pPhrase->poslist);
 
   /* If the aStatic[] array is not large enough, allocate a large array
@@ -189143,7 +189143,7 @@ struct Fts5NearTrimmer {
 ** function is called, it is a no-op. Or, if an error (e.g. SQLITE_NOMEM)
 ** occurs within this function (*pRc) is set accordingly before returning.
 ** The return value is undefined in both these cases.
-** 
+**
 ** If no error occurs and non-zero (a match) is returned, the position-list
 ** of each phrase object is edited to contain only those entries that
 ** meet the constraint before returning.
@@ -189175,7 +189175,7 @@ static int fts5ExprNearIsMatch(int *pRc, Fts5ExprNearset *pNear){
   /* Initialize a lookahead iterator for each phrase. After passing the
   ** buffer and buffer size to the lookaside-reader init function, zero
   ** the phrase poslist buffer. The new poslist for the phrase (containing
-  ** the same entries as the original with some entries removed on account 
+  ** the same entries as the original with some entries removed on account
   ** of the NEAR constraint) is written over the original even as it is
   ** being read. This is safe as the entries for the new poslist are a
   ** subset of the old, so it is not possible for data yet to be read to
@@ -189478,7 +189478,7 @@ static void fts5ExprNodeZeroPoslist(Fts5ExprNode *pNode){
 */
 static int fts5NodeCompare(
   Fts5Expr *pExpr,
-  Fts5ExprNode *p1, 
+  Fts5ExprNode *p1,
   Fts5ExprNode *p2
 ){
   if( p2->bEof ) return -1;
@@ -189493,7 +189493,7 @@ static int fts5NodeCompare(
 ** If an EOF is reached before this happens, *pbEof is set to true before
 ** returning.
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if an error occurs, or an SQLite error code 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if an error occurs, or an SQLite error code
 ** otherwise. It is not considered an error code if an iterator reaches
 ** EOF.
 */
@@ -189510,8 +189510,8 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeTest_STRING(
   const int bDesc = pExpr->bDesc;
 
   /* Check that this node should not be FTS5_TERM */
-  assert( pNear->nPhrase>1 
-       || pNear->apPhrase[0]->nTerm>1 
+  assert( pNear->nPhrase>1
+       || pNear->apPhrase[0]->nTerm>1
        || pNear->apPhrase[0]->aTerm[0].pSynonym
   );
 
@@ -189570,7 +189570,7 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeNext_STRING(
   Fts5Expr *pExpr,                /* Expression pPhrase belongs to */
   Fts5ExprNode *pNode,            /* FTS5_STRING or FTS5_TERM node */
   int bFromValid,
-  i64 iFrom 
+  i64 iFrom
 ){
   Fts5ExprTerm *pTerm = &pNode->pNear->apPhrase[0]->aTerm[0];
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -189588,8 +189588,8 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeNext_STRING(
     for(p=pTerm; p; p=p->pSynonym){
       if( sqlite3Fts5IterEof(p->pIter)==0 ){
         i64 ii = p->pIter->iRowid;
-        if( ii==iRowid 
-         || (bFromValid && ii!=iFrom && (ii>iFrom)==pExpr->bDesc) 
+        if( ii==iRowid
+         || (bFromValid && ii!=iFrom && (ii>iFrom)==pExpr->bDesc)
         ){
           if( bFromValid ){
             rc = sqlite3Fts5IterNextFrom(p->pIter, iFrom);
@@ -189635,9 +189635,9 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeTest_TERM(
   Fts5Expr *pExpr,                /* Expression that pNear is a part of */
   Fts5ExprNode *pNode             /* The "NEAR" node (FTS5_TERM) */
 ){
-  /* As this "NEAR" object is actually a single phrase that consists 
+  /* As this "NEAR" object is actually a single phrase that consists
   ** of a single term only, grab pointers into the poslist managed by the
-  ** fts5_index.c iterator object. This is much faster than synthesizing 
+  ** fts5_index.c iterator object. This is much faster than synthesizing
   ** a new poslist the way we have to for more complicated phrase or NEAR
   ** expressions.  */
   Fts5ExprPhrase *pPhrase = pNode->pNear->apPhrase[0];
@@ -189660,7 +189660,7 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeTest_TERM(
 ** xNext() method for a node of type FTS5_TERM.
 */
 static int fts5ExprNodeNext_TERM(
-  Fts5Expr *pExpr, 
+  Fts5Expr *pExpr,
   Fts5ExprNode *pNode,
   int bFromValid,
   i64 iFrom
@@ -189703,7 +189703,7 @@ static void fts5ExprNodeTest_OR(
 }
 
 static int fts5ExprNodeNext_OR(
-  Fts5Expr *pExpr, 
+  Fts5Expr *pExpr,
   Fts5ExprNode *pNode,
   int bFromValid,
   i64 iFrom
@@ -189715,7 +189715,7 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeNext_OR(
     Fts5ExprNode *p1 = pNode->apChild[i];
     assert( p1->bEof || fts5RowidCmp(pExpr, p1->iRowid, iLast)>=0 );
     if( p1->bEof==0 ){
-      if( (p1->iRowid==iLast) 
+      if( (p1->iRowid==iLast)
        || (bFromValid && fts5RowidCmp(pExpr, p1->iRowid, iFrom)<0)
       ){
         int rc = fts5ExprNodeNext(pExpr, p1, bFromValid, iFrom);
@@ -189787,7 +189787,7 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeTest_AND(
 }
 
 static int fts5ExprNodeNext_AND(
-  Fts5Expr *pExpr, 
+  Fts5Expr *pExpr,
   Fts5ExprNode *pNode,
   int bFromValid,
   i64 iFrom
@@ -189830,7 +189830,7 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeTest_NOT(
 }
 
 static int fts5ExprNodeNext_NOT(
-  Fts5Expr *pExpr, 
+  Fts5Expr *pExpr,
   Fts5ExprNode *pNode,
   int bFromValid,
   i64 iFrom
@@ -189887,7 +189887,7 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeTest(
   return rc;
 }
 
- 
+
 /*
 ** Set node pNode, which is part of expression pExpr, to point to the first
 ** match. If there are no matches, set the Node.bEof flag to indicate EOF.
@@ -189941,8 +189941,8 @@ static int fts5ExprNodeFirst(Fts5Expr *pExpr, Fts5ExprNode *pNode){
 
 /*
 ** Begin iterating through the set of documents in index pIdx matched by
-** the MATCH expression passed as the first argument. If the "bDesc" 
-** parameter is passed a non-zero value, iteration is in descending rowid 
+** the MATCH expression passed as the first argument. If the "bDesc"
+** parameter is passed a non-zero value, iteration is in descending rowid
 ** order. Or, if it is zero, in ascending order.
 **
 ** If iterating in ascending rowid order (bDesc==0), the first document
@@ -189964,9 +189964,9 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ExprFirst(Fts5Expr *p, Fts5Index *pIdx, i64 iFirst, int bD
 
   /* If not at EOF but the current rowid occurs earlier than iFirst in
   ** the iteration order, move to document iFirst or later. */
-  if( rc==SQLITE_OK 
-   && 0==pRoot->bEof 
-   && fts5RowidCmp(p, pRoot->iRowid, iFirst)<0 
+  if( rc==SQLITE_OK
+   && 0==pRoot->bEof
+   && fts5RowidCmp(p, pRoot->iRowid, iFirst)<0
   ){
     rc = fts5ExprNodeNext(p, pRoot, 1, iFirst);
   }
@@ -189980,7 +189980,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ExprFirst(Fts5Expr *p, Fts5Index *pIdx, i64 iFirst, int bD
 }
 
 /*
-** Move to the next document 
+** Move to the next document
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise. It
 ** is not considered an error if the query does not match any documents.
@@ -190150,7 +190150,7 @@ static int fts5ParseTokenize(
       Fts5ExprPhrase *pNew;
       int nNew = SZALLOC + (pPhrase ? pPhrase->nTerm : 0);
 
-      pNew = (Fts5ExprPhrase*)sqlite3_realloc(pPhrase, 
+      pNew = (Fts5ExprPhrase*)sqlite3_realloc(pPhrase,
           sizeof(Fts5ExprPhrase) + sizeof(Fts5ExprTerm) * nNew
       );
       if( pNew==0 ){
@@ -190267,8 +190267,8 @@ static Fts5ExprPhrase *sqlite3Fts5ParseTerm(
 ** expression passed as the second argument.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5ExprClonePhrase(
-  Fts5Expr *pExpr, 
-  int iPhrase, 
+  Fts5Expr *pExpr,
+  int iPhrase,
   Fts5Expr **ppNew
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;             /* Return code */
@@ -190279,15 +190279,15 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ExprClonePhrase(
   pOrig = pExpr->apExprPhrase[iPhrase];
   pNew = (Fts5Expr*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc, sizeof(Fts5Expr));
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    pNew->apExprPhrase = (Fts5ExprPhrase**)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc, 
+    pNew->apExprPhrase = (Fts5ExprPhrase**)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc,
         sizeof(Fts5ExprPhrase*));
   }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    pNew->pRoot = (Fts5ExprNode*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc, 
+    pNew->pRoot = (Fts5ExprNode*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc,
         sizeof(Fts5ExprNode));
   }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    pNew->pRoot->pNear = (Fts5ExprNearset*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc, 
+    pNew->pRoot->pNear = (Fts5ExprNearset*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc,
         sizeof(Fts5ExprNearset) + sizeof(Fts5ExprPhrase*));
   }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -190295,7 +190295,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ExprClonePhrase(
     if( pColsetOrig ){
       int nByte = sizeof(Fts5Colset) + (pColsetOrig->nCol-1) * sizeof(int);
       Fts5Colset *pColset = (Fts5Colset*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc, nByte);
-      if( pColset ){ 
+      if( pColset ){
         memcpy(pColset, pColsetOrig, nByte);
       }
       pNew->pRoot->pNear->pColset = pColset;
@@ -190365,7 +190365,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5ParseNear(Fts5Parse *pParse, Fts5Token *pTok){
 }
 
 static void sqlite3Fts5ParseSetDistance(
-  Fts5Parse *pParse, 
+  Fts5Parse *pParse,
   Fts5ExprNearset *pNear,
   Fts5Token *p
 ){
@@ -190394,7 +190394,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5ParseSetDistance(
 ** The second argument passed to this function may be NULL, or it may be
 ** an existing Fts5Colset object. This function returns a pointer to
 ** a new colset object containing the contents of (p) with new value column
-** number iCol appended. 
+** number iCol appended.
 **
 ** If an OOM error occurs, store an error code in pParse and return NULL.
 ** The old colset object (if any) is not freed in this case.
@@ -190444,7 +190444,7 @@ static Fts5Colset *sqlite3Fts5ParseColsetInvert(Fts5Parse *pParse, Fts5Colset *p
   Fts5Colset *pRet;
   int nCol = pParse->pConfig->nCol;
 
-  pRet = (Fts5Colset*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&pParse->rc, 
+  pRet = (Fts5Colset*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&pParse->rc,
       sizeof(Fts5Colset) + sizeof(int)*nCol
   );
   if( pRet ){
@@ -190497,7 +190497,7 @@ static Fts5Colset *sqlite3Fts5ParseColset(
 
 /*
 ** If argument pOrig is NULL, or if (*pRc) is set to anything other than
-** SQLITE_OK when this function is called, NULL is returned. 
+** SQLITE_OK when this function is called, NULL is returned.
 **
 ** Otherwise, a copy of (*pOrig) is made into memory obtained from
 ** sqlite3Fts5MallocZero() and a pointer to it returned. If the allocation
@@ -190508,7 +190508,7 @@ static Fts5Colset *fts5CloneColset(int *pRc, Fts5Colset *pOrig){
   if( pOrig ){
     int nByte = sizeof(Fts5Colset) + (pOrig->nCol-1) * sizeof(int);
     pRet = (Fts5Colset*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(pRc, nByte);
-    if( pRet ){ 
+    if( pRet ){
       memcpy(pRet, pOrig, nByte);
     }
   }else{
@@ -190547,13 +190547,13 @@ static void fts5MergeColset(Fts5Colset *pColset, Fts5Colset *pMerge){
 ** zero, or it may create copies of pColset using fts5CloneColset().
 */
 static void fts5ParseSetColset(
-  Fts5Parse *pParse, 
-  Fts5ExprNode *pNode, 
+  Fts5Parse *pParse,
+  Fts5ExprNode *pNode,
   Fts5Colset *pColset,
   Fts5Colset **ppFree
 ){
   if( pParse->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    assert( pNode->eType==FTS5_TERM || pNode->eType==FTS5_STRING 
+    assert( pNode->eType==FTS5_TERM || pNode->eType==FTS5_STRING
          || pNode->eType==FTS5_AND  || pNode->eType==FTS5_OR
          || pNode->eType==FTS5_NOT  || pNode->eType==FTS5_EOF
     );
@@ -190585,9 +190585,9 @@ static void fts5ParseSetColset(
 ** Apply colset pColset to expression node pExpr and all of its descendents.
 */
 static void sqlite3Fts5ParseSetColset(
-  Fts5Parse *pParse, 
-  Fts5ExprNode *pExpr, 
-  Fts5Colset *pColset 
+  Fts5Parse *pParse,
+  Fts5ExprNode *pExpr,
+  Fts5Colset *pColset
 ){
   Fts5Colset *pFree = pColset;
   if( pParse->pConfig->eDetail==FTS5_DETAIL_NONE ){
@@ -190605,7 +190605,7 @@ static void fts5ExprAssignXNext(Fts5ExprNode *pNode){
   switch( pNode->eType ){
     case FTS5_STRING: {
       Fts5ExprNearset *pNear = pNode->pNear;
-      if( pNear->nPhrase==1 && pNear->apPhrase[0]->nTerm==1 
+      if( pNear->nPhrase==1 && pNear->apPhrase[0]->nTerm==1
        && pNear->apPhrase[0]->aTerm[0].pSynonym==0
       ){
         pNode->eType = FTS5_TERM;
@@ -190660,7 +190660,7 @@ static Fts5ExprNode *sqlite3Fts5ParseNode(
   if( pParse->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     int nChild = 0;               /* Number of children of returned node */
     int nByte;                    /* Bytes of space to allocate for this node */
- 
+
     assert( (eType!=FTS5_STRING && !pNear)
          || (eType==FTS5_STRING && !pLeft && !pRight)
     );
@@ -190693,14 +190693,14 @@ static Fts5ExprNode *sqlite3Fts5ParseNode(
           }
         }
 
-        if( pParse->pConfig->eDetail!=FTS5_DETAIL_FULL 
+        if( pParse->pConfig->eDetail!=FTS5_DETAIL_FULL
          && (pNear->nPhrase!=1 || pNear->apPhrase[0]->nTerm>1)
         ){
           assert( pParse->rc==SQLITE_OK );
           pParse->rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
           assert( pParse->zErr==0 );
           pParse->zErr = sqlite3_mprintf(
-              "fts5: %s queries are not supported (detail!=full)", 
+              "fts5: %s queries are not supported (detail!=full)",
               pNear->nPhrase==1 ? "phrase": "NEAR"
           );
           sqlite3_free(pRet);
@@ -190736,14 +190736,14 @@ static Fts5ExprNode *sqlite3Fts5ParseImplicitAnd(
     sqlite3Fts5ParseNodeFree(pRight);
   }else{
 
-    assert( pLeft->eType==FTS5_STRING 
+    assert( pLeft->eType==FTS5_STRING
         || pLeft->eType==FTS5_TERM
         || pLeft->eType==FTS5_EOF
         || pLeft->eType==FTS5_AND
     );
-    assert( pRight->eType==FTS5_STRING 
-        || pRight->eType==FTS5_TERM 
-        || pRight->eType==FTS5_EOF 
+    assert( pRight->eType==FTS5_STRING
+        || pRight->eType==FTS5_TERM
+        || pRight->eType==FTS5_EOF
     );
 
     if( pLeft->eType==FTS5_AND ){
@@ -190751,9 +190751,9 @@ static Fts5ExprNode *sqlite3Fts5ParseImplicitAnd(
     }else{
       pPrev = pLeft;
     }
-    assert( pPrev->eType==FTS5_STRING 
-        || pPrev->eType==FTS5_TERM 
-        || pPrev->eType==FTS5_EOF 
+    assert( pPrev->eType==FTS5_STRING
+        || pPrev->eType==FTS5_TERM
+        || pPrev->eType==FTS5_EOF
         );
 
     if( pRight->eType==FTS5_EOF ){
@@ -190835,20 +190835,20 @@ static char *fts5PrintfAppend(char *zApp, const char *zFmt, ...){
 }
 
 /*
-** Compose a tcl-readable representation of expression pExpr. Return a 
-** pointer to a buffer containing that representation. It is the 
-** responsibility of the caller to at some point free the buffer using 
+** Compose a tcl-readable representation of expression pExpr. Return a
+** pointer to a buffer containing that representation. It is the
+** responsibility of the caller to at some point free the buffer using
 ** sqlite3_free().
 */
 static char *fts5ExprPrintTcl(
-  Fts5Config *pConfig, 
+  Fts5Config *pConfig,
   const char *zNearsetCmd,
   Fts5ExprNode *pExpr
 ){
   char *zRet = 0;
   if( pExpr->eType==FTS5_STRING || pExpr->eType==FTS5_TERM ){
     Fts5ExprNearset *pNear = pExpr->pNear;
-    int i; 
+    int i;
     int iTerm;
 
     zRet = fts5PrintfAppend(zRet, "%s ", zNearsetCmd);
@@ -190898,9 +190898,9 @@ static char *fts5ExprPrintTcl(
     switch( pExpr->eType ){
       case FTS5_AND: zOp = "AND"; break;
       case FTS5_NOT: zOp = "NOT"; break;
-      default: 
+      default:
         assert( pExpr->eType==FTS5_OR );
-        zOp = "OR"; 
+        zOp = "OR";
         break;
     }
 
@@ -190926,7 +190926,7 @@ static char *fts5ExprPrint(Fts5Config *pConfig, Fts5ExprNode *pExpr){
   }else
   if( pExpr->eType==FTS5_STRING || pExpr->eType==FTS5_TERM ){
     Fts5ExprNearset *pNear = pExpr->pNear;
-    int i; 
+    int i;
     int iTerm;
 
     if( pNear->pColset ){
@@ -190971,9 +190971,9 @@ static char *fts5ExprPrint(Fts5Config *pConfig, Fts5ExprNode *pExpr){
     switch( pExpr->eType ){
       case FTS5_AND: zOp = " AND "; break;
       case FTS5_NOT: zOp = " NOT "; break;
-      default:  
+      default:
         assert( pExpr->eType==FTS5_OR );
-        zOp = " OR "; 
+        zOp = " OR ";
         break;
     }
 
@@ -190985,7 +190985,7 @@ static char *fts5ExprPrint(Fts5Config *pConfig, Fts5ExprNode *pExpr){
       }else{
         int e = pExpr->apChild[i]->eType;
         int b = (e!=FTS5_STRING && e!=FTS5_TERM && e!=FTS5_EOF);
-        zRet = fts5PrintfAppend(zRet, "%s%s%z%s", 
+        zRet = fts5PrintfAppend(zRet, "%s%s%z%s",
             (i==0 ? "" : zOp),
             (b?"(":""), z, (b?")":"")
         );
@@ -191101,7 +191101,7 @@ static void fts5ExprFunctionTcl(
 
 /*
 ** The implementation of an SQLite user-defined-function that accepts a
-** single integer as an argument. If the integer is an alpha-numeric 
+** single integer as an argument. If the integer is an alpha-numeric
 ** unicode code point, 1 is returned. Otherwise 0.
 */
 static void fts5ExprIsAlnum(
@@ -191111,7 +191111,7 @@ static void fts5ExprIsAlnum(
 ){
   int iCode;
   if( nArg!=1 ){
-    sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, 
+    sqlite3_result_error(pCtx,
         "wrong number of arguments to function fts5_isalnum", -1
     );
     return;
@@ -191126,7 +191126,7 @@ static void fts5ExprFold(
   sqlite3_value **apVal           /* Function arguments */
 ){
   if( nArg!=1 && nArg!=2 ){
-    sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, 
+    sqlite3_result_error(pCtx,
         "wrong number of arguments to function fts5_fold", -1
     );
   }else{
@@ -191218,7 +191218,7 @@ static Fts5PoslistPopulator *sqlite3Fts5ExprClearPoslists(Fts5Expr *pExpr, int b
       Fts5Buffer *pBuf = &pExpr->apExprPhrase[i]->poslist;
       Fts5ExprNode *pNode = pExpr->apExprPhrase[i]->pNode;
       assert( pExpr->apExprPhrase[i]->nTerm==1 );
-      if( bLive && 
+      if( bLive &&
           (pBuf->n==0 || pNode->iRowid!=pExpr->pRoot->iRowid || pNode->bEof)
       ){
         pRet[i].bMiss = 1;
@@ -191285,9 +191285,9 @@ static int fts5ExprPopulatePoslistsCb(
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5ExprPopulatePoslists(
   Fts5Config *pConfig,
-  Fts5Expr *pExpr, 
+  Fts5Expr *pExpr,
   Fts5PoslistPopulator *aPopulator,
-  int iCol, 
+  int iCol,
   const char *z, int n
 ){
   int i;
@@ -191299,7 +191299,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ExprPopulatePoslists(
   for(i=0; i<pExpr->nPhrase; i++){
     Fts5ExprNode *pNode = pExpr->apExprPhrase[i]->pNode;
     Fts5Colset *pColset = pNode->pNear->pColset;
-    if( (pColset && 0==fts5ExprColsetTest(pColset, iCol)) 
+    if( (pColset && 0==fts5ExprColsetTest(pColset, iCol))
      || aPopulator[i].bMiss
     ){
       aPopulator[i].bOk = 0;
@@ -191308,7 +191308,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ExprPopulatePoslists(
     }
   }
 
-  return sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig, 
+  return sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig,
       FTS5_TOKENIZE_DOCUMENT, z, n, (void*)&sCtx, fts5ExprPopulatePoslistsCb
   );
 }
@@ -191373,12 +191373,12 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5ExprCheckPoslists(Fts5Expr *pExpr, i64 iRowid){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is only called for detail=columns tables. 
+** This function is only called for detail=columns tables.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5ExprPhraseCollist(
-  Fts5Expr *pExpr, 
-  int iPhrase, 
-  const u8 **ppCollist, 
+  Fts5Expr *pExpr,
+  int iPhrase,
+  const u8 **ppCollist,
   int *pnCollist
 ){
   Fts5ExprPhrase *pPhrase = pExpr->apExprPhrase[iPhrase];
@@ -191388,8 +191388,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5ExprPhraseCollist(
   assert( iPhrase>=0 && iPhrase<pExpr->nPhrase );
   assert( pExpr->pConfig->eDetail==FTS5_DETAIL_COLUMNS );
 
-  if( pNode->bEof==0 
-   && pNode->iRowid==pExpr->pRoot->iRowid 
+  if( pNode->bEof==0
+   && pNode->iRowid==pExpr->pRoot->iRowid
    && pPhrase->poslist.n>0
   ){
     Fts5ExprTerm *pTerm = &pPhrase->aTerm[0];
@@ -191448,9 +191448,9 @@ struct Fts5Hash {
 };
 
 /*
-** Each entry in the hash table is represented by an object of the 
-** following type. Each object, its key (a nul-terminated string) and 
-** its current data are stored in a single memory allocation. The 
+** Each entry in the hash table is represented by an object of the
+** following type. Each object, its key (a nul-terminated string) and
+** its current data are stored in a single memory allocation. The
 ** key immediately follows the object in memory. The position list
 ** data immediately follows the key data in memory.
 **
@@ -191472,7 +191472,7 @@ struct Fts5Hash {
 struct Fts5HashEntry {
   Fts5HashEntry *pHashNext;       /* Next hash entry with same hash-key */
   Fts5HashEntry *pScanNext;       /* Next entry in sorted order */
-  
+
   int nAlloc;                     /* Total size of allocation */
   int iSzPoslist;                 /* Offset of space for 4-byte poslist size */
   int nData;                      /* Total bytes of data (incl. structure) */
@@ -191653,16 +191653,16 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5HashWrite(
   u8 *pPtr;
   int nIncr = 0;                  /* Amount to increment (*pHash->pnByte) by */
   int bNew;                       /* If non-delete entry should be written */
-  
+
   bNew = (pHash->eDetail==FTS5_DETAIL_FULL);
 
   /* Attempt to locate an existing hash entry */
   iHash = fts5HashKey2(pHash->nSlot, (u8)bByte, (const u8*)pToken, nToken);
   for(p=pHash->aSlot[iHash]; p; p=p->pHashNext){
     char *zKey = fts5EntryKey(p);
-    if( zKey[0]==bByte 
+    if( zKey[0]==bByte
      && p->nKey==nToken
-     && memcmp(&zKey[1], pToken, nToken)==0 
+     && memcmp(&zKey[1], pToken, nToken)==0
     ){
       break;
     }
@@ -191711,8 +191711,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5HashWrite(
     nIncr += p->nData;
   }else{
 
-    /* Appending to an existing hash-entry. Check that there is enough 
-    ** space to append the largest possible new entry. Worst case scenario 
+    /* Appending to an existing hash-entry. Check that there is enough
+    ** space to append the largest possible new entry. Worst case scenario
     ** is:
     **
     **     + 9 bytes for a new rowid,
@@ -191840,7 +191840,7 @@ static Fts5HashEntry *fts5HashEntryMerge(
 ** list.
 */
 static int fts5HashEntrySort(
-  Fts5Hash *pHash, 
+  Fts5Hash *pHash,
   const char *pTerm, int nTerm,   /* Query prefix, if any */
   Fts5HashEntry **ppSorted
 ){
@@ -191961,7 +191961,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 **
 ******************************************************************************
 **
-** Low level access to the FTS index stored in the database file. The 
+** Low level access to the FTS index stored in the database file. The
 ** routines in this file file implement all read and write access to the
 ** %_data table. Other parts of the system access this functionality via
 ** the interface defined in fts5Int.h.
@@ -191977,10 +191977,10 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 ** As well as the main term index, there may be up to 31 prefix indexes.
 ** The format is similar to FTS3/4, except that:
 **
-**   * all segment b-tree leaf data is stored in fixed size page records 
-**     (e.g. 1000 bytes). A single doclist may span multiple pages. Care is 
-**     taken to ensure it is possible to iterate in either direction through 
-**     the entries in a doclist, or to seek to a specific entry within a 
+**   * all segment b-tree leaf data is stored in fixed size page records
+**     (e.g. 1000 bytes). A single doclist may span multiple pages. Care is
+**     taken to ensure it is possible to iterate in either direction through
+**     the entries in a doclist, or to seek to a specific entry within a
 **     doclist, without loading it into memory.
 **
 **   * large doclists that span many pages have associated "doclist index"
@@ -192013,14 +192013,14 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 **     CREATE TABLE %_data(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, block BLOB);
 **
 ** , contains the following 5 types of records. See the comments surrounding
-** the FTS5_*_ROWID macros below for a description of how %_data rowids are 
+** the FTS5_*_ROWID macros below for a description of how %_data rowids are
 ** assigned to each fo them.
 **
 ** 1. Structure Records:
 **
 **   The set of segments that make up an index - the index structure - are
 **   recorded in a single record within the %_data table. The record consists
-**   of a single 32-bit configuration cookie value followed by a list of 
+**   of a single 32-bit configuration cookie value followed by a list of
 **   SQLite varints. If the FTS table features more than one index (because
 **   there are one or more prefix indexes), it is guaranteed that all share
 **   the same cookie value.
@@ -192052,7 +192052,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 **
 **   TERM/DOCLIST FORMAT:
 **
-**     Most of each segment leaf is taken up by term/doclist data. The 
+**     Most of each segment leaf is taken up by term/doclist data. The
 **     general format of term/doclist, starting with the first term
 **     on the leaf page, is:
 **
@@ -192095,7 +192095,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 **
 **   PAGE FORMAT
 **
-**     Each leaf page begins with a 4-byte header containing 2 16-bit 
+**     Each leaf page begins with a 4-byte header containing 2 16-bit
 **     unsigned integer fields in big-endian format. They are:
 **
 **       * The byte offset of the first rowid on the page, if it exists
@@ -192130,7 +192130,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 ** 5. Segment doclist indexes:
 **
 **   Doclist indexes are themselves b-trees, however they usually consist of
-**   a single leaf record only. The format of each doclist index leaf page 
+**   a single leaf record only. The format of each doclist index leaf page
 **   is:
 **
 **     * Flags byte. Bits are:
@@ -192140,8 +192140,8 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 **
 **     * First rowid on page indicated by previous field. As a varint.
 **
-**     * A list of varints, one for each subsequent termless page. A 
-**       positive delta if the termless page contains at least one rowid, 
+**     * A list of varints, one for each subsequent termless page. A
+**       positive delta if the termless page contains at least one rowid,
 **       or an 0x00 byte otherwise.
 **
 **   Internal doclist index nodes are:
@@ -192154,7 +192154,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 **     * Copy of first rowid on page indicated by previous field. As a varint.
 **
 **     * A list of delta-encoded varints - the first rowid on each subsequent
-**       child page. 
+**       child page.
 **
 */
 
@@ -192171,7 +192171,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 **
 ** Each segment has a unique non-zero 16-bit id.
 **
-** The rowid for each segment leaf is found by passing the segment id and 
+** The rowid for each segment leaf is found by passing the segment id and
 ** the leaf page number to the FTS5_SEGMENT_ROWID macro. Leaves are numbered
 ** sequentially starting from 1.
 */
@@ -192191,7 +192191,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(
 #define FTS5_DLIDX_ROWID(segid, height, pgno) fts5_dri(segid, 1, height, pgno)
 
 /*
-** Maximum segments permitted in a single index 
+** Maximum segments permitted in a single index
 */
 #define FTS5_MAX_SEGMENT 2000
 
@@ -192273,7 +192273,7 @@ struct Fts5DoclistIter {
 
 /*
 ** The contents of the "structure" record for each index are represented
-** using an Fts5Structure record in memory. Which uses instances of the 
+** using an Fts5Structure record in memory. Which uses instances of the
 ** other Fts5StructureXXX types as components.
 */
 struct Fts5StructureSegment {
@@ -192346,10 +192346,10 @@ struct Fts5CResult {
 **   Current leaf page number within segment.
 **
 ** iLeafOffset:
-**   Byte offset within the current leaf that is the first byte of the 
+**   Byte offset within the current leaf that is the first byte of the
 **   position list data (one byte passed the position-list size field).
 **   rowid field of the current entry. Usually this is the size field of the
-**   position list data. The exception is if the rowid for the current entry 
+**   position list data. The exception is if the rowid for the current entry
 **   is the last thing on the leaf page.
 **
 ** pLeaf:
@@ -192363,7 +192363,7 @@ struct Fts5CResult {
 **   Mask of FTS5_SEGITER_XXX values. Interpreted as follows:
 **
 **   FTS5_SEGITER_ONETERM:
-**     If set, set the iterator to point to EOF after the current doclist 
+**     If set, set the iterator to point to EOF after the current doclist
 **     has been exhausted. Do not proceed to the next term in the segment.
 **
 **   FTS5_SEGITER_REVERSE:
@@ -192392,7 +192392,7 @@ struct Fts5SegIter {
   /* Next method */
   void (*xNext)(Fts5Index*, Fts5SegIter*, int*);
 
-  /* The page and offset from which the current term was read. The offset 
+  /* The page and offset from which the current term was read. The offset
   ** is the offset of the first rowid in the current doclist.  */
   int iTermLeafPgno;
   int iTermLeafOffset;
@@ -192415,7 +192415,7 @@ struct Fts5SegIter {
 };
 
 /*
-** Argument is a pointer to an Fts5Data structure that contains a 
+** Argument is a pointer to an Fts5Data structure that contains a
 ** leaf page.
 */
 #define ASSERT_SZLEAF_OK(x) assert( \
@@ -192425,7 +192425,7 @@ struct Fts5SegIter {
 #define FTS5_SEGITER_ONETERM 0x01
 #define FTS5_SEGITER_REVERSE 0x02
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Argument is a pointer to an Fts5Data structure that contains a leaf
 ** page. This macro evaluates to true if the leaf contains no terms, or
 ** false if it contains at least one term.
@@ -192447,13 +192447,13 @@ struct Fts5SegIter {
 ** on empty segments.
 **
 ** The results of comparing segments aSeg[N] and aSeg[N+1], where N is an
-** even number, is stored in aFirst[(nSeg+N)/2]. The "result" of the 
+** even number, is stored in aFirst[(nSeg+N)/2]. The "result" of the
 ** comparison in this context is the index of the iterator that currently
 ** points to the smaller term/rowid combination. Iterators at EOF are
 ** considered to be greater than all other iterators.
 **
 ** aFirst[1] contains the index in aSeg[] of the iterator that points to
-** the smallest key overall. aFirst[0] is unused. 
+** the smallest key overall. aFirst[0] is unused.
 **
 ** poslist:
 **   Used by sqlite3Fts5IterPoslist() when the poslist needs to be buffered.
@@ -192516,7 +192516,7 @@ static void fts5PutU16(u8 *aOut, u16 iVal){
 
 static u16 fts5GetU16(const u8 *aIn){
   return ((u16)aIn[0] << 8) + aIn[1];
-} 
+}
 
 /*
 ** Allocate and return a buffer at least nByte bytes in size.
@@ -192582,7 +192582,7 @@ static void fts5CloseReader(Fts5Index *p){
 /*
 ** Retrieve a record from the %_data table.
 **
-** If an error occurs, NULL is returned and an error left in the 
+** If an error occurs, NULL is returned and an error left in the
 ** Fts5Index object.
 */
 static Fts5Data *fts5DataRead(Fts5Index *p, i64 iRowid){
@@ -192605,11 +192605,11 @@ static Fts5Data *fts5DataRead(Fts5Index *p, i64 iRowid){
       if( rc==SQLITE_ABORT ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
     }
 
-    /* If the blob handle is not open at this point, open it and seek 
+    /* If the blob handle is not open at this point, open it and seek
     ** to the requested entry.  */
     if( p->pReader==0 && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       Fts5Config *pConfig = p->pConfig;
-      rc = sqlite3_blob_open(pConfig->db, 
+      rc = sqlite3_blob_open(pConfig->db,
           pConfig->zDb, p->zDataTbl, "block", iRowid, 0, &p->pReader
       );
     }
@@ -192617,7 +192617,7 @@ static Fts5Data *fts5DataRead(Fts5Index *p, i64 iRowid){
     /* If either of the sqlite3_blob_open() or sqlite3_blob_reopen() calls
     ** above returned SQLITE_ERROR, return SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB instead.
     ** All the reasons those functions might return SQLITE_ERROR - missing
-    ** table, missing row, non-blob/text in block column - indicate 
+    ** table, missing row, non-blob/text in block column - indicate
     ** backing store corruption.  */
     if( rc==SQLITE_ERROR ) rc = FTS5_CORRUPT;
 
@@ -192699,7 +192699,7 @@ static void fts5DataWrite(Fts5Index *p, i64 iRowid, const u8 *pData, int nData){
   if( p->pWriter==0 ){
     Fts5Config *pConfig = p->pConfig;
     fts5IndexPrepareStmt(p, &p->pWriter, sqlite3_mprintf(
-          "REPLACE INTO '%q'.'%q_data'(id, block) VALUES(?,?)", 
+          "REPLACE INTO '%q'.'%q_data'(id, block) VALUES(?,?)",
           pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName
     ));
     if( p->rc ) return;
@@ -192723,7 +192723,7 @@ static void fts5DataDelete(Fts5Index *p, i64 iFirst, i64 iLast){
     int rc;
     Fts5Config *pConfig = p->pConfig;
     char *zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(
-        "DELETE FROM '%q'.'%q_data' WHERE id>=? AND id<=?", 
+        "DELETE FROM '%q'.'%q_data' WHERE id>=? AND id<=?",
           pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName
     );
     if( zSql==0 ){
@@ -192767,7 +192767,7 @@ static void fts5DataRemoveSegment(Fts5Index *p, int iSegid){
 }
 
 /*
-** Release a reference to an Fts5Structure object returned by an earlier 
+** Release a reference to an Fts5Structure object returned by an earlier
 ** call to fts5StructureRead() or fts5StructureDecode().
 */
 static void fts5StructureRelease(Fts5Structure *pStruct){
@@ -192842,7 +192842,7 @@ static int fts5StructureDecode(
         i += fts5GetVarint32(&pData[i], pLvl->nMerge);
         i += fts5GetVarint32(&pData[i], nTotal);
         assert( nTotal>=pLvl->nMerge );
-        pLvl->aSeg = (Fts5StructureSegment*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc, 
+        pLvl->aSeg = (Fts5StructureSegment*)sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(&rc,
             nTotal * sizeof(Fts5StructureSegment)
         );
       }
@@ -192898,10 +192898,10 @@ static void fts5StructureAddLevel(int *pRc, Fts5Structure **ppStruct){
 ** segments.
 */
 static void fts5StructureExtendLevel(
-  int *pRc, 
-  Fts5Structure *pStruct, 
-  int iLvl, 
-  int nExtra, 
+  int *pRc,
+  Fts5Structure *pStruct,
+  int iLvl,
+  int nExtra,
   int bInsert
 ){
   if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -192955,7 +192955,7 @@ static i64 fts5IndexDataVersion(Fts5Index *p){
 
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     if( p->pDataVersion==0 ){
-      p->rc = fts5IndexPrepareStmt(p, &p->pDataVersion, 
+      p->rc = fts5IndexPrepareStmt(p, &p->pDataVersion,
           sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA %Q.data_version", p->pConfig->zDb)
           );
       if( p->rc ) return 0;
@@ -192974,7 +192974,7 @@ static i64 fts5IndexDataVersion(Fts5Index *p){
 ** Read, deserialize and return the structure record.
 **
 ** The Fts5Structure.aLevel[] and each Fts5StructureLevel.aSeg[] array
-** are over-allocated as described for function fts5StructureDecode() 
+** are over-allocated as described for function fts5StructureDecode()
 ** above.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, NULL is returned and an error code left in the
@@ -193123,8 +193123,8 @@ static int fts5SegmentSize(Fts5StructureSegment *pSeg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return a copy of index structure pStruct. Except, promote as many 
-** segments as possible to level iPromote. If an OOM occurs, NULL is 
+** Return a copy of index structure pStruct. Except, promote as many
+** segments as possible to level iPromote. If an OOM occurs, NULL is
 ** returned.
 */
 static void fts5StructurePromoteTo(
@@ -193164,8 +193164,8 @@ static void fts5StructurePromoteTo(
 **
 **   b) If the segment just written is larger than the newest segment on
 **      the next populated level, then that segment, and any other adjacent
-**      segments that are also smaller than the one just written, are 
-**      promoted. 
+**      segments that are also smaller than the one just written, are
+**      promoted.
 **
 ** If one or more segments are promoted, the structure object is updated
 ** to reflect this.
@@ -193199,7 +193199,7 @@ static void fts5StructurePromote(
         if( sz>szMax ) szMax = sz;
       }
       if( szMax>=szSeg ){
-        /* Condition (a) is true. Promote the newest segment on level 
+        /* Condition (a) is true. Promote the newest segment on level
         ** iLvl to level iTst.  */
         iPromote = iTst;
         szPromote = szMax;
@@ -193218,7 +193218,7 @@ static void fts5StructurePromote(
 
 
 /*
-** Advance the iterator passed as the only argument. If the end of the 
+** Advance the iterator passed as the only argument. If the end of the
 ** doclist-index page is reached, return non-zero.
 */
 static int fts5DlidxLvlNext(Fts5DlidxLvl *pLvl){
@@ -193233,7 +193233,7 @@ static int fts5DlidxLvlNext(Fts5DlidxLvl *pLvl){
   }else{
     int iOff;
     for(iOff=pLvl->iOff; iOff<pData->nn; iOff++){
-      if( pData->p[iOff] ) break; 
+      if( pData->p[iOff] ) break;
     }
 
     if( iOff<pData->nn ){
@@ -193263,7 +193263,7 @@ static int fts5DlidxIterNextR(Fts5Index *p, Fts5DlidxIter *pIter, int iLvl){
       if( pLvl[1].bEof==0 ){
         fts5DataRelease(pLvl->pData);
         memset(pLvl, 0, sizeof(Fts5DlidxLvl));
-        pLvl->pData = fts5DataRead(p, 
+        pLvl->pData = fts5DataRead(p,
             FTS5_DLIDX_ROWID(pIter->iSegid, iLvl, pLvl[1].iLeafPgno)
         );
         if( pLvl->pData ) fts5DlidxLvlNext(pLvl);
@@ -193283,7 +193283,7 @@ static int fts5DlidxIterNext(Fts5Index *p, Fts5DlidxIter *pIter){
 ** points to the first rowid in the doclist-index.
 **
 **   pData:
-**     pointer to doclist-index record, 
+**     pointer to doclist-index record,
 **
 ** When this function is called pIter->iLeafPgno is the page number the
 ** doclist is associated with (the one featuring the term).
@@ -193314,7 +193314,7 @@ static void fts5DlidxIterLast(Fts5Index *p, Fts5DlidxIter *pIter){
       Fts5DlidxLvl *pChild = &pLvl[-1];
       fts5DataRelease(pChild->pData);
       memset(pChild, 0, sizeof(Fts5DlidxLvl));
-      pChild->pData = fts5DataRead(p, 
+      pChild->pData = fts5DataRead(p,
           FTS5_DLIDX_ROWID(pIter->iSegid, i-1, pLvl->iLeafPgno)
       );
     }
@@ -193337,8 +193337,8 @@ static int fts5DlidxLvlPrev(Fts5DlidxLvl *pLvl){
     int ii;
     int nZero = 0;
 
-    /* Currently iOff points to the first byte of a varint. This block 
-    ** decrements iOff until it points to the first byte of the previous 
+    /* Currently iOff points to the first byte of a varint. This block
+    ** decrements iOff until it points to the first byte of the previous
     ** varint. Taking care not to read any memory locations that occur
     ** before the buffer in memory.  */
     iLimit = (iOff>9 ? iOff-9 : 0);
@@ -193383,7 +193383,7 @@ static int fts5DlidxIterPrevR(Fts5Index *p, Fts5DlidxIter *pIter, int iLvl){
       if( pLvl[1].bEof==0 ){
         fts5DataRelease(pLvl->pData);
         memset(pLvl, 0, sizeof(Fts5DlidxLvl));
-        pLvl->pData = fts5DataRead(p, 
+        pLvl->pData = fts5DataRead(p,
             FTS5_DLIDX_ROWID(pIter->iSegid, iLvl, pLvl[1].iLeafPgno)
         );
         if( pLvl->pData ){
@@ -193482,7 +193482,7 @@ static void fts5SegIterNextPage(
     pIter->pLeaf = pIter->pNextLeaf;
     pIter->pNextLeaf = 0;
   }else if( pIter->iLeafPgno<=pSeg->pgnoLast ){
-    pIter->pLeaf = fts5LeafRead(p, 
+    pIter->pLeaf = fts5LeafRead(p,
         FTS5_SEGMENT_ROWID(pSeg->iSegid, pIter->iLeafPgno)
     );
   }else{
@@ -193526,7 +193526,7 @@ static int fts5GetPoslistSize(const u8 *p, int *pnSz, int *pbDel){
 **   Fts5SegIter.nPos
 **   Fts5SegIter.bDel
 **
-** Leave Fts5SegIter.iLeafOffset pointing to the first byte of the 
+** Leave Fts5SegIter.iLeafOffset pointing to the first byte of the
 ** position list content (if any).
 */
 static void fts5SegIterLoadNPos(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter){
@@ -193577,7 +193577,7 @@ static void fts5SegIterLoadRowid(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter){
 }
 
 /*
-** Fts5SegIter.iLeafOffset currently points to the first byte of the 
+** Fts5SegIter.iLeafOffset currently points to the first byte of the
 ** "nSuffix" field of a term. Function parameter nKeep contains the value
 ** of the "nPrefix" field (if there was one - it is passed 0 if this is
 ** the first term in the segment).
@@ -193588,7 +193588,7 @@ static void fts5SegIterLoadRowid(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter){
 **   Fts5SegIter.rowid
 **
 ** accordingly and leaves (Fts5SegIter.iLeafOffset) set to the content of
-** the first position list. The position list belonging to document 
+** the first position list. The position list belonging to document
 ** (Fts5SegIter.iRowid).
 */
 static void fts5SegIterLoadTerm(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter, int nKeep){
@@ -193635,10 +193635,10 @@ static void fts5SegIterSetNext(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter){
 
 /*
 ** Initialize the iterator object pIter to iterate through the entries in
-** segment pSeg. The iterator is left pointing to the first entry when 
+** segment pSeg. The iterator is left pointing to the first entry when
 ** this function returns.
 **
-** If an error occurs, Fts5Index.rc is set to an appropriate error code. If 
+** If an error occurs, Fts5Index.rc is set to an appropriate error code. If
 ** an error has already occurred when this function is called, it is a no-op.
 */
 static void fts5SegIterInit(
@@ -193683,8 +193683,8 @@ static void fts5SegIterInit(
 ** the position-list size field for the first relevant rowid on the page.
 ** Fts5SegIter.rowid is set, but nPos and bDel are not.
 **
-** This function advances the iterator so that it points to the last 
-** relevant rowid on the page and, if necessary, initializes the 
+** This function advances the iterator so that it points to the last
+** relevant rowid on the page and, if necessary, initializes the
 ** aRowidOffset[] and iRowidOffset variables. At this point the iterator
 ** is in its regular state - Fts5SegIter.iLeafOffset points to the first
 ** byte of the position list content associated with said rowid.
@@ -193904,10 +193904,10 @@ static void fts5SegIterNext_None(
 
 
 /*
-** Advance iterator pIter to the next entry. 
+** Advance iterator pIter to the next entry.
 **
-** If an error occurs, Fts5Index.rc is set to an appropriate error code. It 
-** is not considered an error if the iterator reaches EOF. If an error has 
+** If an error occurs, Fts5Index.rc is set to an appropriate error code. It
+** is not considered an error if the iterator reaches EOF. If an error has
 ** already occurred when this function is called, it is a no-op.
 */
 static void fts5SegIterNext(
@@ -194018,7 +194018,7 @@ static void fts5SegIterNext(
     }else{
       /* The following could be done by calling fts5SegIterLoadNPos(). But
       ** this block is particularly performance critical, so equivalent
-      ** code is inlined. 
+      ** code is inlined.
       **
       ** Later: Switched back to fts5SegIterLoadNPos() because it supports
       ** detail=none mode. Not ideal.
@@ -194098,7 +194098,7 @@ static void fts5SegIterReverse(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter){
   }
 
   /* If pLast is NULL at this point, then the last rowid for this doclist
-  ** lies on the page currently indicated by the iterator. In this case 
+  ** lies on the page currently indicated by the iterator. In this case
   ** pIter->iLeafOffset is already set to point to the position-list size
   ** field associated with the first relevant rowid on the page.
   **
@@ -194128,8 +194128,8 @@ static void fts5SegIterReverse(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter){
 
 /*
 ** Iterator pIter currently points to the first rowid of a doclist.
-** There is a doclist-index associated with the final term on the current 
-** page. If the current term is the last term on the page, load the 
+** There is a doclist-index associated with the final term on the current
+** page. If the current term is the last term on the page, load the
 ** doclist-index from disk and initialize an iterator at (pIter->pDlidx).
 */
 static void fts5SegIterLoadDlidx(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter){
@@ -194143,8 +194143,8 @@ static void fts5SegIterLoadDlidx(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegIter *pIter){
   /* Check if the current doclist ends on this page. If it does, return
   ** early without loading the doclist-index (as it belongs to a different
   ** term. */
-  if( pIter->iTermLeafPgno==pIter->iLeafPgno 
-   && pIter->iEndofDoclist<pLeaf->szLeaf 
+  if( pIter->iTermLeafPgno==pIter->iLeafPgno
+   && pIter->iEndofDoclist<pLeaf->szLeaf
   ){
     return;
   }
@@ -194305,7 +194305,7 @@ static sqlite3_stmt *fts5IdxSelectStmt(Fts5Index *p){
 ** Initialize the object pIter to point to term pTerm/nTerm within segment
 ** pSeg. If there is no such term in the index, the iterator is set to EOF.
 **
-** If an error occurs, Fts5Index.rc is set to an appropriate error code. If 
+** If an error occurs, Fts5Index.rc is set to an appropriate error code. If
 ** an error has already occurred when this function is called, it is a no-op.
 */
 static void fts5SegIterSeekInit(
@@ -194384,10 +194384,10 @@ static void fts5SegIterSeekInit(
 
 /*
 ** Initialize the object pIter to point to term pTerm/nTerm within the
-** in-memory hash table. If there is no such term in the hash-table, the 
+** in-memory hash table. If there is no such term in the hash-table, the
 ** iterator is set to EOF.
 **
-** If an error occurs, Fts5Index.rc is set to an appropriate error code. If 
+** If an error occurs, Fts5Index.rc is set to an appropriate error code. If
 ** an error has already occurred when this function is called, it is a no-op.
 */
 static void fts5SegIterHashInit(
@@ -194458,7 +194458,7 @@ static void fts5SegIterClear(Fts5SegIter *pIter){
 ** two iterators.
 */
 static void fts5AssertComparisonResult(
-  Fts5Iter *pIter, 
+  Fts5Iter *pIter,
   Fts5SegIter *p1,
   Fts5SegIter *p2,
   Fts5CResult *pRes
@@ -194495,7 +194495,7 @@ static void fts5AssertComparisonResult(
 
 /*
 ** This function is a no-op unless SQLITE_DEBUG is defined when this module
-** is compiled. In that case, this function is essentially an assert() 
+** is compiled. In that case, this function is essentially an assert()
 ** statement used to verify that the contents of the pIter->aFirst[] array
 ** are correct.
 */
@@ -194509,9 +194509,9 @@ static void fts5AssertMultiIterSetup(Fts5Index *p, Fts5Iter *pIter){
     /* Check that pIter->iSwitchRowid is set correctly. */
     for(i=0; i<pIter->nSeg; i++){
       Fts5SegIter *p1 = &pIter->aSeg[i];
-      assert( p1==pFirst 
-           || p1->pLeaf==0 
-           || fts5BufferCompare(&pFirst->term, &p1->term) 
+      assert( p1==pFirst
+           || p1->pLeaf==0
+           || fts5BufferCompare(&pFirst->term, &p1->term)
            || p1->iRowid==pIter->iSwitchRowid
            || (p1->iRowid<pIter->iSwitchRowid)==pIter->bRev
       );
@@ -194541,7 +194541,7 @@ static void fts5AssertMultiIterSetup(Fts5Index *p, Fts5Iter *pIter){
 **
 ** If the returned value is non-zero, then it is the index of an entry
 ** in the pIter->aSeg[] array that is (a) not at EOF, and (b) pointing
-** to a key that is a duplicate of another, higher priority, 
+** to a key that is a duplicate of another, higher priority,
 ** segment-iterator in the pSeg->aSeg[] array.
 */
 static int fts5MultiIterDoCompare(Fts5Iter *pIter, int iOut){
@@ -194632,7 +194632,7 @@ static void fts5SegIterGotoPage(
 }
 
 /*
-** Advance the iterator passed as the second argument until it is at or 
+** Advance the iterator passed as the second argument until it is at or
 ** past rowid iFrom. Regardless of the value of iFrom, the iterator is
 ** always advanced at least once.
 */
@@ -194729,7 +194729,7 @@ static void fts5MultiIterAdvanced(
 ** If non-zero is returned, the caller should call fts5MultiIterAdvanced()
 ** on the iterator instead. That function does the same as this one, except
 ** that it deals with more complicated cases as well.
-*/ 
+*/
 static int fts5MultiIterAdvanceRowid(
   Fts5Iter *pIter,                /* Iterator to update aFirst[] array for */
   int iChanged,                   /* Index of sub-iterator just advanced */
@@ -194780,14 +194780,14 @@ static void fts5MultiIterSetEof(Fts5Iter *pIter){
 }
 
 /*
-** Move the iterator to the next entry. 
+** Move the iterator to the next entry.
 **
-** If an error occurs, an error code is left in Fts5Index.rc. It is not 
-** considered an error if the iterator reaches EOF, or if it is already at 
+** If an error occurs, an error code is left in Fts5Index.rc. It is not
+** considered an error if the iterator reaches EOF, or if it is already at
 ** EOF when this function is called.
 */
 static void fts5MultiIterNext(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   Fts5Iter *pIter,
   int bFrom,                      /* True if argument iFrom is valid */
   i64 iFrom                       /* Advance at least as far as this */
@@ -194805,7 +194805,7 @@ static void fts5MultiIterNext(
       pSeg->xNext(p, pSeg, &bNewTerm);
     }
 
-    if( pSeg->pLeaf==0 || bNewTerm 
+    if( pSeg->pLeaf==0 || bNewTerm
      || fts5MultiIterAdvanceRowid(pIter, iFirst, &pSeg)
     ){
       fts5MultiIterAdvanced(p, pIter, iFirst, 1);
@@ -194825,7 +194825,7 @@ static void fts5MultiIterNext(
 }
 
 static void fts5MultiIterNext2(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   Fts5Iter *pIter,
   int *pbNewTerm                  /* OUT: True if *might* be new term */
 ){
@@ -194839,7 +194839,7 @@ static void fts5MultiIterNext2(
 
       assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK );
       pSeg->xNext(p, pSeg, &bNewTerm);
-      if( pSeg->pLeaf==0 || bNewTerm 
+      if( pSeg->pLeaf==0 || bNewTerm
        || fts5MultiIterAdvanceRowid(pIter, iFirst, &pSeg)
       ){
         fts5MultiIterAdvanced(p, pIter, iFirst, 1);
@@ -194864,7 +194864,7 @@ static Fts5Iter *fts5MultiIterAlloc(
   int nSlot;                      /* Power of two >= nSeg */
 
   for(nSlot=2; nSlot<nSeg; nSlot=nSlot*2);
-  pNew = fts5IdxMalloc(p, 
+  pNew = fts5IdxMalloc(p,
       sizeof(Fts5Iter) +                  /* pNew */
       sizeof(Fts5SegIter) * (nSlot-1) +   /* pNew->aSeg[] */
       sizeof(Fts5CResult) * nSlot         /* pNew->aFirst[] */
@@ -194879,8 +194879,8 @@ static Fts5Iter *fts5MultiIterAlloc(
 }
 
 static void fts5PoslistCallback(
-  Fts5Index *pUnused, 
-  void *pContext, 
+  Fts5Index *pUnused,
+  void *pContext,
   const u8 *pChunk, int nChunk
 ){
   UNUSED_PARAM(pUnused);
@@ -194917,8 +194917,8 @@ static int fts5IndexColsetTest(Fts5Colset *pColset, int iCol){
 }
 
 static void fts5PoslistOffsetsCallback(
-  Fts5Index *pUnused, 
-  void *pContext, 
+  Fts5Index *pUnused,
+  void *pContext,
   const u8 *pChunk, int nChunk
 ){
   PoslistOffsetsCtx *pCtx = (PoslistOffsetsCtx*)pContext;
@@ -194941,7 +194941,7 @@ static void fts5PoslistOffsetsCallback(
 
 static void fts5PoslistFilterCallback(
   Fts5Index *pUnused,
-  void *pContext, 
+  void *pContext,
   const u8 *pChunk, int nChunk
 ){
   PoslistCallbackCtx *pCtx = (PoslistCallbackCtx*)pContext;
@@ -195085,7 +195085,7 @@ static int fts5IndexExtractCol(
   while( iCol>iCurrent ){
     /* Advance pointer p until it points to pEnd or an 0x01 byte that is
     ** not part of a varint. Note that it is not possible for a negative
-    ** or extremely large varint to occur within an uncorrupted position 
+    ** or extremely large varint to occur within an uncorrupted position
     ** list. So the last byte of each varint may be assumed to have a clear
     ** 0x80 bit.  */
     while( *p!=0x01 ){
@@ -195150,7 +195150,7 @@ static void fts5IterSetOutputs_Nocolset(Fts5Iter *pIter, Fts5SegIter *pSeg){
   assert( pIter->pColset==0 );
 
   if( pSeg->iLeafOffset+pSeg->nPos<=pSeg->pLeaf->szLeaf ){
-    /* All data is stored on the current page. Populate the output 
+    /* All data is stored on the current page. Populate the output
     ** variables to point into the body of the page object. */
     pIter->base.pData = &pSeg->pLeaf->p[pSeg->iLeafOffset];
   }else{
@@ -195186,13 +195186,13 @@ static void fts5IterSetOutputs_Col(Fts5Iter *pIter, Fts5SegIter *pSeg){
 }
 
 /*
-** xSetOutputs callback used when: 
+** xSetOutputs callback used when:
 **
 **   * detail=col,
 **   * there is a column filter, and
-**   * the table contains 100 or fewer columns. 
+**   * the table contains 100 or fewer columns.
 **
-** The last point is to ensure all column numbers are stored as 
+** The last point is to ensure all column numbers are stored as
 ** single-byte varints.
 */
 static void fts5IterSetOutputs_Col100(Fts5Iter *pIter, Fts5SegIter *pSeg){
@@ -195204,7 +195204,7 @@ static void fts5IterSetOutputs_Col100(Fts5Iter *pIter, Fts5SegIter *pSeg){
     fts5IterSetOutputs_Col(pIter, pSeg);
   }else{
     u8 *a = (u8*)&pSeg->pLeaf->p[pSeg->iLeafOffset];
-    u8 *pEnd = (u8*)&a[pSeg->nPos]; 
+    u8 *pEnd = (u8*)&a[pSeg->nPos];
     int iPrev = 0;
     int *aiCol = pIter->pColset->aiCol;
     int *aiColEnd = &aiCol[pIter->pColset->nCol];
@@ -195243,7 +195243,7 @@ static void fts5IterSetOutputs_Full(Fts5Iter *pIter, Fts5SegIter *pSeg){
   assert( pColset );
 
   if( pSeg->iLeafOffset+pSeg->nPos<=pSeg->pLeaf->szLeaf ){
-    /* All data is stored on the current page. Populate the output 
+    /* All data is stored on the current page. Populate the output
     ** variables to point into the body of the page object. */
     const u8 *a = &pSeg->pLeaf->p[pSeg->iLeafOffset];
     if( pColset->nCol==1 ){
@@ -195307,7 +195307,7 @@ static void fts5IterSetOutputCb(int *pRc, Fts5Iter *pIter){
 ** is zero or greater, data from the first nSegment segments on level iLevel
 ** is merged.
 **
-** The iterator initially points to the first term/rowid entry in the 
+** The iterator initially points to the first term/rowid entry in the
 ** iterated data.
 */
 static void fts5MultiIterNew(
@@ -195378,8 +195378,8 @@ static void fts5MultiIterNew(
     assert( iIter==nSeg );
   }
 
-  /* If the above was successful, each component iterators now points 
-  ** to the first entry in its segment. In this case initialize the 
+  /* If the above was successful, each component iterators now points
+  ** to the first entry in its segment. In this case initialize the
   ** aFirst[] array. Or, if an error has occurred, free the iterator
   ** object and set the output variable to NULL.  */
   if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -195448,12 +195448,12 @@ static void fts5MultiIterNew2(
 }
 
 /*
-** Return true if the iterator is at EOF or if an error has occurred. 
+** Return true if the iterator is at EOF or if an error has occurred.
 ** False otherwise.
 */
 static int fts5MultiIterEof(Fts5Index *p, Fts5Iter *pIter){
-  assert( p->rc 
-      || (pIter->aSeg[ pIter->aFirst[1].iFirst ].pLeaf==0)==pIter->base.bEof 
+  assert( p->rc
+      || (pIter->aSeg[ pIter->aFirst[1].iFirst ].pLeaf==0)==pIter->base.bEof
   );
   return (p->rc || pIter->base.bEof);
 }
@@ -195472,8 +195472,8 @@ static i64 fts5MultiIterRowid(Fts5Iter *pIter){
 ** Move the iterator to the next entry at or following iMatch.
 */
 static void fts5MultiIterNextFrom(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
-  Fts5Iter *pIter, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
+  Fts5Iter *pIter,
   i64 iMatch
 ){
   while( 1 ){
@@ -195487,7 +195487,7 @@ static void fts5MultiIterNextFrom(
 }
 
 /*
-** Return a pointer to a buffer containing the term associated with the 
+** Return a pointer to a buffer containing the term associated with the
 ** entry that the iterator currently points to.
 */
 static const u8 *fts5MultiIterTerm(Fts5Iter *pIter, int *pn){
@@ -195498,11 +195498,11 @@ static const u8 *fts5MultiIterTerm(Fts5Iter *pIter, int *pn){
 
 /*
 ** Allocate a new segment-id for the structure pStruct. The new segment
-** id must be between 1 and 65335 inclusive, and must not be used by 
+** id must be between 1 and 65335 inclusive, and must not be used by
 ** any currently existing segment. If a free segment id cannot be found,
 ** SQLITE_FULL is returned.
 **
-** If an error has already occurred, this function is a no-op. 0 is 
+** If an error has already occurred, this function is a no-op. 0 is
 ** returned in this case.
 */
 static int fts5AllocateSegid(Fts5Index *p, Fts5Structure *pStruct){
@@ -195570,10 +195570,10 @@ static void fts5IndexDiscardData(Fts5Index *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the size of the prefix, in bytes, that buffer 
+** Return the size of the prefix, in bytes, that buffer
 ** (pNew/<length-unknown>) shares with buffer (pOld/nOld).
 **
-** Buffer (pNew/<length-unknown>) is guaranteed to be greater 
+** Buffer (pNew/<length-unknown>) is guaranteed to be greater
 ** than buffer (pOld/nOld).
 */
 static int fts5PrefixCompress(int nOld, const u8 *pOld, const u8 *pNew){
@@ -195585,7 +195585,7 @@ static int fts5PrefixCompress(int nOld, const u8 *pOld, const u8 *pNew){
 }
 
 static void fts5WriteDlidxClear(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   Fts5SegWriter *pWriter,
   int bFlush                      /* If true, write dlidx to disk */
 ){
@@ -195596,7 +195596,7 @@ static void fts5WriteDlidxClear(
     if( pDlidx->buf.n==0 ) break;
     if( bFlush ){
       assert( pDlidx->pgno!=0 );
-      fts5DataWrite(p, 
+      fts5DataWrite(p,
           FTS5_DLIDX_ROWID(pWriter->iSegid, i, pDlidx->pgno),
           pDlidx->buf.p, pDlidx->buf.n
       );
@@ -195650,8 +195650,8 @@ static int fts5WriteFlushDlidx(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegWriter *pWriter){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called whenever processing of the doclist for the 
-** last term on leaf page (pWriter->iBtPage) is completed. 
+** This function is called whenever processing of the doclist for the
+** last term on leaf page (pWriter->iBtPage) is completed.
 **
 ** The doclist-index for that term is currently stored in-memory within the
 ** Fts5SegWriter.aDlidx[] array. If it is large enough, this function
@@ -195733,8 +195733,8 @@ static i64 fts5DlidxExtractFirstRowid(Fts5Buffer *pBuf){
 ** doclist-index.
 */
 static void fts5WriteDlidxAppend(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
-  Fts5SegWriter *pWriter, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
+  Fts5SegWriter *pWriter,
   i64 iRowid
 ){
   int i;
@@ -195747,11 +195747,11 @@ static void fts5WriteDlidxAppend(
     if( pDlidx->buf.n>=p->pConfig->pgsz ){
       /* The current doclist-index page is full. Write it to disk and push
       ** a copy of iRowid (which will become the first rowid on the next
-      ** doclist-index leaf page) up into the next level of the b-tree 
+      ** doclist-index leaf page) up into the next level of the b-tree
       ** hierarchy. If the node being flushed is currently the root node,
       ** also push its first rowid upwards. */
       pDlidx->buf.p[0] = 0x01;    /* Not the root node */
-      fts5DataWrite(p, 
+      fts5DataWrite(p,
           FTS5_DLIDX_ROWID(pWriter->iSegid, i, pDlidx->pgno),
           pDlidx->buf.p, pDlidx->buf.n
       );
@@ -195835,13 +195835,13 @@ static void fts5WriteFlushLeaf(Fts5Index *p, Fts5SegWriter *pWriter){
 ** Append term pTerm/nTerm to the segment being written by the writer passed
 ** as the second argument.
 **
-** If an error occurs, set the Fts5Index.rc error code. If an error has 
+** If an error occurs, set the Fts5Index.rc error code. If an error has
 ** already occurred, this function is a no-op.
 */
 static void fts5WriteAppendTerm(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   Fts5SegWriter *pWriter,
-  int nTerm, const u8 *pTerm 
+  int nTerm, const u8 *pTerm
 ){
   int nPrefix;                    /* Bytes of prefix compression for term */
   Fts5PageWriter *pPage = &pWriter->writer;
@@ -195858,7 +195858,7 @@ static void fts5WriteAppendTerm(
     }
     fts5BufferGrow(&p->rc, &pPage->buf, nTerm+FTS5_DATA_PADDING);
   }
-  
+
   /* TODO1: Updating pgidx here. */
   pPgidx->n += sqlite3Fts5PutVarint(
       &pPgidx->p[pPgidx->n], pPage->buf.n - pPage->iPrevPgidx
@@ -195874,11 +195874,11 @@ static void fts5WriteAppendTerm(
     if( pPage->pgno!=1 ){
       /* This is the first term on a leaf that is not the leftmost leaf in
       ** the segment b-tree. In this case it is necessary to add a term to
-      ** the b-tree hierarchy that is (a) larger than the largest term 
+      ** the b-tree hierarchy that is (a) larger than the largest term
       ** already written to the segment and (b) smaller than or equal to
       ** this term. In other words, a prefix of (pTerm/nTerm) that is one
       ** byte longer than the longest prefix (pTerm/nTerm) shares with the
-      ** previous term. 
+      ** previous term.
       **
       ** Usually, the previous term is available in pPage->term. The exception
       ** is if this is the first term written in an incremental-merge step.
@@ -195914,10 +195914,10 @@ static void fts5WriteAppendTerm(
 }
 
 /*
-** Append a rowid and position-list size field to the writers output. 
+** Append a rowid and position-list size field to the writers output.
 */
 static void fts5WriteAppendRowid(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   Fts5SegWriter *pWriter,
   i64 iRowid
 ){
@@ -195928,7 +195928,7 @@ static void fts5WriteAppendRowid(
       fts5WriteFlushLeaf(p, pWriter);
     }
 
-    /* If this is to be the first rowid written to the page, set the 
+    /* If this is to be the first rowid written to the page, set the
     ** rowid-pointer in the page-header. Also append a value to the dlidx
     ** buffer, in case a doclist-index is required.  */
     if( pWriter->bFirstRowidInPage ){
@@ -195950,18 +195950,18 @@ static void fts5WriteAppendRowid(
 }
 
 static void fts5WriteAppendPoslistData(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
-  Fts5SegWriter *pWriter, 
-  const u8 *aData, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
+  Fts5SegWriter *pWriter,
+  const u8 *aData,
   int nData
 ){
   Fts5PageWriter *pPage = &pWriter->writer;
   const u8 *a = aData;
   int n = nData;
-  
+
   assert( p->pConfig->pgsz>0 );
-  while( p->rc==SQLITE_OK 
-     && (pPage->buf.n + pPage->pgidx.n + n)>=p->pConfig->pgsz 
+  while( p->rc==SQLITE_OK
+     && (pPage->buf.n + pPage->pgidx.n + n)>=p->pConfig->pgsz
   ){
     int nReq = p->pConfig->pgsz - pPage->buf.n - pPage->pgidx.n;
     int nCopy = 0;
@@ -195984,7 +195984,7 @@ static void fts5WriteAppendPoslistData(
 ** allocations associated with the writer.
 */
 static void fts5WriteFinish(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   Fts5SegWriter *pWriter,         /* Writer object */
   int *pnLeaf                     /* OUT: Number of leaf pages in b-tree */
 ){
@@ -196012,8 +196012,8 @@ static void fts5WriteFinish(
 }
 
 static void fts5WriteInit(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
-  Fts5SegWriter *pWriter, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
+  Fts5SegWriter *pWriter,
   int iSegid
 ){
   const int nBuffer = p->pConfig->pgsz + FTS5_DATA_PADDING;
@@ -196036,7 +196036,7 @@ static void fts5WriteInit(
   if( p->pIdxWriter==0 ){
     Fts5Config *pConfig = p->pConfig;
     fts5IndexPrepareStmt(p, &p->pIdxWriter, sqlite3_mprintf(
-          "INSERT INTO '%q'.'%q_idx'(segid,term,pgno) VALUES(?,?,?)", 
+          "INSERT INTO '%q'.'%q_idx'(segid,term,pgno) VALUES(?,?,?)",
           pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName
     ));
   }
@@ -196095,12 +196095,12 @@ static void fts5TrimSegments(Fts5Index *p, Fts5Iter *pIter){
 
         /* Set up the new page-index array */
         fts5BufferAppendVarint(&p->rc, &buf, 4);
-        if( pSeg->iLeafPgno==pSeg->iTermLeafPgno 
-         && pSeg->iEndofDoclist<pData->szLeaf 
+        if( pSeg->iLeafPgno==pSeg->iTermLeafPgno
+         && pSeg->iEndofDoclist<pData->szLeaf
         ){
           int nDiff = pData->szLeaf - pSeg->iEndofDoclist;
           fts5BufferAppendVarint(&p->rc, &buf, buf.n - 1 - nDiff - 4);
-          fts5BufferAppendBlob(&p->rc, &buf, 
+          fts5BufferAppendBlob(&p->rc, &buf,
               pData->nn - pSeg->iPgidxOff, &pData->p[pSeg->iPgidxOff]
           );
         }
@@ -196116,8 +196116,8 @@ static void fts5TrimSegments(Fts5Index *p, Fts5Iter *pIter){
 }
 
 static void fts5MergeChunkCallback(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
-  void *pCtx, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
+  void *pCtx,
   const u8 *pChunk, int nChunk
 ){
   Fts5SegWriter *pWriter = (Fts5SegWriter*)pCtx;
@@ -196332,7 +196332,7 @@ static int fts5IndexMerge(
 ** segment. This function updates the write-counter accordingly and, if
 ** necessary, performs incremental merge work.
 **
-** If an error occurs, set the Fts5Index.rc error code. If an error has 
+** If an error occurs, set the Fts5Index.rc error code. If an error has
 ** already occurred, this function is a no-op.
 */
 static void fts5IndexAutomerge(
@@ -196383,12 +196383,12 @@ static int fts5IndexReturn(Fts5Index *p){
 typedef struct Fts5FlushCtx Fts5FlushCtx;
 struct Fts5FlushCtx {
   Fts5Index *pIdx;
-  Fts5SegWriter writer; 
+  Fts5SegWriter writer;
 };
 
 /*
 ** Buffer aBuf[] contains a list of varints, all small enough to fit
-** in a 32-bit integer. Return the size of the largest prefix of this 
+** in a 32-bit integer. Return the size of the largest prefix of this
 ** list nMax bytes or less in size.
 */
 static int fts5PoslistPrefix(const u8 *aBuf, int nMax){
@@ -196406,10 +196406,10 @@ static int fts5PoslistPrefix(const u8 *aBuf, int nMax){
 }
 
 /*
-** Flush the contents of in-memory hash table iHash to a new level-0 
+** Flush the contents of in-memory hash table iHash to a new level-0
 ** segment on disk. Also update the corresponding structure record.
 **
-** If an error occurs, set the Fts5Index.rc error code. If an error has 
+** If an error occurs, set the Fts5Index.rc error code. If an error has
 ** already occurred, this function is a no-op.
 */
 static void fts5FlushOneHash(Fts5Index *p){
@@ -196465,13 +196465,13 @@ static void fts5FlushOneHash(Fts5Index *p){
         i64 iDelta = 0;
         int iOff = 0;
 
-        /* The entire doclist will not fit on this leaf. The following 
-        ** loop iterates through the poslists that make up the current 
+        /* The entire doclist will not fit on this leaf. The following
+        ** loop iterates through the poslists that make up the current
         ** doclist.  */
         while( p->rc==SQLITE_OK && iOff<nDoclist ){
           iOff += fts5GetVarint(&pDoclist[iOff], (u64*)&iDelta);
           iRowid += iDelta;
-          
+
           if( writer.bFirstRowidInPage ){
             fts5PutU16(&pBuf->p[0], (u16)pBuf->n);   /* first rowid on page */
             pBuf->n += sqlite3Fts5PutVarint(&pBuf->p[pBuf->n], iRowid);
@@ -196574,7 +196574,7 @@ static void fts5IndexFlush(Fts5Index *p){
 }
 
 static Fts5Structure *fts5IndexOptimizeStruct(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   Fts5Structure *pStruct
 ){
   Fts5Structure *pNew = 0;
@@ -196585,7 +196585,7 @@ static Fts5Structure *fts5IndexOptimizeStruct(
   /* Figure out if this structure requires optimization. A structure does
   ** not require optimization if either:
   **
-  **  + it consists of fewer than two segments, or 
+  **  + it consists of fewer than two segments, or
   **  + all segments are on the same level, or
   **  + all segments except one are currently inputs to a merge operation.
   **
@@ -196662,7 +196662,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexOptimize(Fts5Index *p){
     fts5StructureRelease(pNew);
   }
 
-  return fts5IndexReturn(p); 
+  return fts5IndexReturn(p);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -196744,7 +196744,7 @@ static void fts5DoclistIterNext(Fts5DoclistIter *pIter){
 }
 
 static void fts5DoclistIterInit(
-  Fts5Buffer *pBuf, 
+  Fts5Buffer *pBuf,
   Fts5DoclistIter *pIter
 ){
   memset(pIter, 0, sizeof(*pIter));
@@ -196880,7 +196880,7 @@ static void fts5MergePrefixLists(
         if( i2.aPoslist==0 ) break;
       }
       else{
-        /* Merge the two position lists. */ 
+        /* Merge the two position lists. */
         i64 iPos1 = 0;
         i64 iPos2 = 0;
         int iOff1 = 0;
@@ -196987,8 +196987,8 @@ static void fts5SetupPrefixIter(
   pStruct = fts5StructureRead(p);
 
   if( aBuf && pStruct ){
-    const int flags = FTS5INDEX_QUERY_SCAN 
-                    | FTS5INDEX_QUERY_SKIPEMPTY 
+    const int flags = FTS5INDEX_QUERY_SCAN
+                    | FTS5INDEX_QUERY_SKIPEMPTY
                     | FTS5INDEX_QUERY_NOOUTPUT;
     int i;
     i64 iLastRowid = 0;
@@ -197070,9 +197070,9 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexBeginWrite(Fts5Index *p, int bDelete, i64 iRowid){
   }
 
   /* Flush the hash table to disk if required */
-  if( iRowid<p->iWriteRowid 
+  if( iRowid<p->iWriteRowid
    || (iRowid==p->iWriteRowid && p->bDelete==0)
-   || (p->nPendingData > p->pConfig->nHashSize) 
+   || (p->nPendingData > p->pConfig->nHashSize)
   ){
     fts5IndexFlush(p);
   }
@@ -197095,7 +197095,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexSync(Fts5Index *p){
 /*
 ** Discard any data stored in the in-memory hash tables. Do not write it
 ** to the database. Additionally, assume that the contents of the %_data
-** table may have changed on disk. So any in-memory caches of %_data 
+** table may have changed on disk. So any in-memory caches of %_data
 ** records must be invalidated.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexRollback(Fts5Index *p){
@@ -197128,8 +197128,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexReinit(Fts5Index *p){
 ** Otherwise, set *pp to NULL and return an SQLite error code.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexOpen(
-  Fts5Config *pConfig, 
-  int bCreate, 
+  Fts5Config *pConfig,
+  int bCreate,
   Fts5Index **pp,
   char **pzErr
 ){
@@ -197146,8 +197146,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexOpen(
           pConfig, "data", "id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, block BLOB", 0, pzErr
       );
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-        rc = sqlite3Fts5CreateTable(pConfig, "idx", 
-            "segid, term, pgno, PRIMARY KEY(segid, term)", 
+        rc = sqlite3Fts5CreateTable(pConfig, "idx",
+            "segid, term, pgno, PRIMARY KEY(segid, term)",
             1, pzErr
         );
       }
@@ -197187,13 +197187,13 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexClose(Fts5Index *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Argument p points to a buffer containing utf-8 text that is n bytes in 
+** Argument p points to a buffer containing utf-8 text that is n bytes in
 ** size. Return the number of bytes in the nChar character prefix of the
 ** buffer, or 0 if there are less than nChar characters in total.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexCharlenToBytelen(
-  const char *p, 
-  int nByte, 
+  const char *p,
+  int nByte,
   int nChar
 ){
   int n = 0;
@@ -197212,7 +197212,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexCharlenToBytelen(
 ** unicode characters in the string.
 */
 static int fts5IndexCharlen(const char *pIn, int nIn){
-  int nChar = 0;            
+  int nChar = 0;
   int i = 0;
   while( i<nIn ){
     if( (unsigned char)pIn[i++]>=0xc0 ){
@@ -197224,7 +197224,7 @@ static int fts5IndexCharlen(const char *pIn, int nIn){
 }
 
 /*
-** Insert or remove data to or from the index. Each time a document is 
+** Insert or remove data to or from the index. Each time a document is
 ** added to or removed from the index, this function is called one or more
 ** times.
 **
@@ -197255,7 +197255,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexWrite(
     const int nChar = pConfig->aPrefix[i];
     int nByte = sqlite3Fts5IndexCharlenToBytelen(pToken, nToken, nChar);
     if( nByte ){
-      rc = sqlite3Fts5HashWrite(p->pHash, 
+      rc = sqlite3Fts5HashWrite(p->pHash,
           p->iWriteRowid, iCol, iPos, (char)(FTS5_MAIN_PREFIX+i+1), pToken,
           nByte
       );
@@ -197266,7 +197266,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexWrite(
 }
 
 /*
-** Open a new iterator to iterate though all rowid that match the 
+** Open a new iterator to iterate though all rowid that match the
 ** specified token or token prefix.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexQuery(
@@ -197293,9 +197293,9 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexQuery(
     ** satisfied by scanning multiple terms in the main index.
     **
     ** If the QUERY_TEST_NOIDX flag was specified, then this must be a
-    ** prefix-query. Instead of using a prefix-index (if one exists), 
+    ** prefix-query. Instead of using a prefix-index (if one exists),
     ** evaluate the prefix query using the main FTS index. This is used
-    ** for internal sanity checking by the integrity-check in debug 
+    ** for internal sanity checking by the integrity-check in debug
     ** mode only.  */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
     if( pConfig->bPrefixIndex==0 || (flags & FTS5INDEX_QUERY_TEST_NOIDX) ){
@@ -197315,7 +197315,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexQuery(
       Fts5Structure *pStruct = fts5StructureRead(p);
       buf.p[0] = (u8)(FTS5_MAIN_PREFIX + iIdx);
       if( pStruct ){
-        fts5MultiIterNew(p, pStruct, flags | FTS5INDEX_QUERY_SKIPEMPTY, 
+        fts5MultiIterNew(p, pStruct, flags | FTS5INDEX_QUERY_SKIPEMPTY,
             pColset, buf.p, nToken+1, -1, 0, &pRet
         );
         fts5StructureRelease(pStruct);
@@ -197349,7 +197349,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexQuery(
 ** Return true if the iterator passed as the only argument is at EOF.
 */
 /*
-** Move to the next matching rowid. 
+** Move to the next matching rowid.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IterNext(Fts5IndexIter *pIndexIter){
   Fts5Iter *pIter = (Fts5Iter*)pIndexIter;
@@ -197414,7 +197414,7 @@ static void sqlite3Fts5IterClose(Fts5IndexIter *pIndexIter){
 }
 
 /*
-** Read and decode the "averages" record from the database. 
+** Read and decode the "averages" record from the database.
 **
 ** Parameter anSize must point to an array of size nCol, where nCol is
 ** the number of user defined columns in the FTS table.
@@ -197440,7 +197440,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexGetAverages(Fts5Index *p, i64 *pnRow, i64 *anSize){
 }
 
 /*
-** Replace the current "averages" record with the contents of the buffer 
+** Replace the current "averages" record with the contents of the buffer
 ** supplied as the second argument.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5IndexSetAverages(Fts5Index *p, const u8 *pData, int nData){
@@ -197458,7 +197458,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexReads(Fts5Index *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Set the 32-bit cookie value stored at the start of all structure 
+** Set the 32-bit cookie value stored at the start of all structure
 ** records to the value passed as the second argument.
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error
@@ -197473,7 +197473,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexSetCookie(Fts5Index *p, int iNew){
   assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK );
   sqlite3Fts5Put32(aCookie, iNew);
 
-  rc = sqlite3_blob_open(pConfig->db, pConfig->zDb, p->zDataTbl, 
+  rc = sqlite3_blob_open(pConfig->db, pConfig->zDb, p->zDataTbl,
       "block", FTS5_STRUCTURE_ROWID, 1, &pBlob
   );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -197494,7 +197494,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexLoadConfig(Fts5Index *p){
 
 /*************************************************************************
 **************************************************************************
-** Below this point is the implementation of the integrity-check 
+** Below this point is the implementation of the integrity-check
 ** functionality.
 */
 
@@ -197502,9 +197502,9 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexLoadConfig(Fts5Index *p){
 ** Return a simple checksum value based on the arguments.
 */
 static u64 sqlite3Fts5IndexEntryCksum(
-  i64 iRowid, 
-  int iCol, 
-  int iPos, 
+  i64 iRowid,
+  int iCol,
+  int iPos,
   int iIdx,
   const char *pTerm,
   int nTerm
@@ -197520,15 +197520,15 @@ static u64 sqlite3Fts5IndexEntryCksum(
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
 /*
-** This function is purely an internal test. It does not contribute to 
+** This function is purely an internal test. It does not contribute to
 ** FTS functionality, or even the integrity-check, in any way.
 **
-** Instead, it tests that the same set of pgno/rowid combinations are 
+** Instead, it tests that the same set of pgno/rowid combinations are
 ** visited regardless of whether the doclist-index identified by parameters
 ** iSegid/iLeaf is iterated in forwards or reverse order.
 */
 static void fts5TestDlidxReverse(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   int iSegid,                     /* Segment id to load from */
   int iLeaf                       /* Load doclist-index for this leaf */
 ){
@@ -197604,11 +197604,11 @@ static int fts5QueryCksum(
 
 
 /*
-** This function is also purely an internal test. It does not contribute to 
+** This function is also purely an internal test. It does not contribute to
 ** FTS functionality, or even the integrity-check, in any way.
 */
 static void fts5TestTerm(
-  Fts5Index *p, 
+  Fts5Index *p,
   Fts5Buffer *pPrev,              /* Previous term */
   const char *z, int n,           /* Possibly new term to test */
   u64 expected,
@@ -197637,7 +197637,7 @@ static void fts5TestTerm(
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && ck1!=ck2 ) rc = FTS5_CORRUPT;
 
     /* If this is a prefix query, check that the results returned if the
-    ** the index is disabled are the same. In both ASC and DESC order. 
+    ** the index is disabled are the same. In both ASC and DESC order.
     **
     ** This check may only be performed if the hash table is empty. This
     ** is because the hash table only supports a single scan query at
@@ -197668,7 +197668,7 @@ static void fts5TestTerm(
   }
   p->rc = rc;
 }
- 
+
 #else
 # define fts5TestDlidxReverse(x,y,z)
 # define fts5TestTerm(u,v,w,x,y,z)
@@ -197780,7 +197780,7 @@ static void fts5IndexIntegrityCheckSegment(
     int iIdxLeaf = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 2);
     int bIdxDlidx = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 3);
 
-    /* If the leaf in question has already been trimmed from the segment, 
+    /* If the leaf in question has already been trimmed from the segment,
     ** ignore this b-tree entry. Otherwise, load it into memory. */
     if( iIdxLeaf<pSeg->pgnoFirst ) continue;
     iRow = FTS5_SEGMENT_ROWID(pSeg->iSegid, iIdxLeaf);
@@ -197888,7 +197888,7 @@ static void fts5IndexIntegrityCheckSegment(
 
 
 /*
-** Run internal checks to ensure that the FTS index (a) is internally 
+** Run internal checks to ensure that the FTS index (a) is internally
 ** consistent and (b) contains entries for which the XOR of the checksums
 ** as calculated by sqlite3Fts5IndexEntryCksum() is cksum.
 **
@@ -197910,7 +197910,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexIntegrityCheck(Fts5Index *p, u64 cksum){
   Fts5Buffer term = {0,0,0};      /* Buffer used to hold most recent term */
 #endif
   const int flags = FTS5INDEX_QUERY_NOOUTPUT;
-  
+
   /* Load the FTS index structure */
   pStruct = fts5StructureRead(p);
 
@@ -197932,7 +197932,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexIntegrityCheck(Fts5Index *p, u64 cksum){
   **
   ** Two versions of the same checksum are calculated. The first (stack
   ** variable cksum2) based on entries extracted from the full-text index
-  ** while doing a linear scan of each individual index in turn. 
+  ** while doing a linear scan of each individual index in turn.
   **
   ** As each term visited by the linear scans, a separate query for the
   ** same term is performed. cksum3 is calculated based on the entries
@@ -198034,12 +198034,12 @@ static void fts5DebugStructure(
 
   for(iLvl=0; iLvl<p->nLevel; iLvl++){
     Fts5StructureLevel *pLvl = &p->aLevel[iLvl];
-    sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendPrintf(pRc, pBuf, 
+    sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendPrintf(pRc, pBuf,
         " {lvl=%d nMerge=%d nSeg=%d", iLvl, pLvl->nMerge, pLvl->nSeg
     );
     for(iSeg=0; iSeg<pLvl->nSeg; iSeg++){
       Fts5StructureSegment *pSeg = &pLvl->aSeg[iSeg];
-      sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendPrintf(pRc, pBuf, " {id=%d leaves=%d..%d}", 
+      sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendPrintf(pRc, pBuf, " {id=%d leaves=%d..%d}",
           pSeg->iSegid, pSeg->pgnoFirst, pSeg->pgnoLast
       );
     }
@@ -198052,7 +198052,7 @@ static void fts5DebugStructure(
 **
 ** Arguments pBlob/nBlob contain a serialized Fts5Structure object. This
 ** function appends a human-readable representation of the same object
-** to the buffer passed as the second argument. 
+** to the buffer passed as the second argument.
 */
 static void fts5DecodeStructure(
   int *pRc,                       /* IN/OUT: error code */
@@ -198075,9 +198075,9 @@ static void fts5DecodeStructure(
 /*
 ** This is part of the fts5_decode() debugging aid.
 **
-** Arguments pBlob/nBlob contain an "averages" record. This function 
-** appends a human-readable representation of record to the buffer passed 
-** as the second argument. 
+** Arguments pBlob/nBlob contain an "averages" record. This function
+** appends a human-readable representation of record to the buffer passed
+** as the second argument.
 */
 static void fts5DecodeAverages(
   int *pRc,                       /* IN/OUT: error code */
@@ -198116,7 +198116,7 @@ static int fts5DecodePoslist(int *pRc, Fts5Buffer *pBuf, const u8 *a, int n){
 ** The start of buffer (a/n) contains the start of a doclist. The doclist
 ** may or may not finish within the buffer. This function appends a text
 ** representation of the part of the doclist that is present to buffer
-** pBuf. 
+** pBuf.
 **
 ** The return value is the number of bytes read from the input buffer.
 */
@@ -198146,7 +198146,7 @@ static int fts5DecodeDoclist(int *pRc, Fts5Buffer *pBuf, const u8 *a, int n){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is part of the fts5_decode() debugging function. It is 
+** This function is part of the fts5_decode() debugging function. It is
 ** only ever used with detail=none tables.
 **
 ** Buffer (pData/nData) contains a doclist in the format used by detail=none
@@ -198234,7 +198234,7 @@ static void fts5DecodeFunction(
     lvl.iLeafPgno = iPgno;
 
     for(fts5DlidxLvlNext(&lvl); lvl.bEof==0; fts5DlidxLvlNext(&lvl)){
-      sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendPrintf(&rc, &s, 
+      sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendPrintf(&rc, &s,
           " %d(%lld)", lvl.iLeafPgno, lvl.iRowid
       );
     }
@@ -198334,7 +198334,7 @@ static void fts5DecodeFunction(
       int bFirst = (iPgidxOff==szLeaf);     /* True for first term on page */
       int nByte;                            /* Bytes of data */
       int iEnd;
-      
+
       iPgidxOff += fts5GetVarint32(&a[iPgidxOff], nByte);
       iPgidxPrev += nByte;
       iOff = iPgidxPrev;
@@ -198362,7 +198362,7 @@ static void fts5DecodeFunction(
 
     fts5BufferFree(&term);
   }
-  
+
  decode_out:
   sqlite3_free(a);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -198390,7 +198390,7 @@ static void fts5RowidFunction(
       i64 iRowid;
       int segid, pgno;
       if( nArg!=3 ){
-        sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, 
+        sqlite3_result_error(pCtx,
             "should be: fts5_rowid('segment', segid, pgno))", -1
         );
       }else{
@@ -198400,7 +198400,7 @@ static void fts5RowidFunction(
         sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, iRowid);
       }
     }else{
-      sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, 
+      sqlite3_result_error(pCtx,
         "first arg to fts5_rowid() must be 'segment'" , -1
       );
     }
@@ -198422,7 +198422,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5IndexInit(sqlite3 *db){
 
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     rc = sqlite3_create_function(
-        db, "fts5_decode_none", 2, 
+        db, "fts5_decode_none", 2,
         SQLITE_UTF8, (void*)db, fts5DecodeFunction, 0, 0
     );
   }
@@ -198479,9 +198479,9 @@ typedef struct Fts5Table Fts5Table;
 typedef struct Fts5TokenizerModule Fts5TokenizerModule;
 
 /*
-** NOTES ON TRANSACTIONS: 
+** NOTES ON TRANSACTIONS:
 **
-** SQLite invokes the following virtual table methods as transactions are 
+** SQLite invokes the following virtual table methods as transactions are
 ** opened and closed by the user:
 **
 **     xBegin():    Start of a new transaction.
@@ -198490,7 +198490,7 @@ typedef struct Fts5TokenizerModule Fts5TokenizerModule;
 **     xRollback(): Rollback the transaction.
 **
 ** Anything that is required as part of a commit that may fail is performed
-** in the xSync() callback. Current versions of SQLite ignore any errors 
+** in the xSync() callback. Current versions of SQLite ignore any errors
 ** returned by xCommit().
 **
 ** And as sub-transactions are opened/closed:
@@ -198499,9 +198499,9 @@ typedef struct Fts5TokenizerModule Fts5TokenizerModule;
 **     xRelease(int S):    Commit and close savepoint S.
 **     xRollbackTo(int S): Rollback to start of savepoint S.
 **
-** During a write-transaction the fts5_index.c module may cache some data 
+** During a write-transaction the fts5_index.c module may cache some data
 ** in-memory. It is flushed to disk whenever xSync(), xRelease() or
-** xSavepoint() is called. And discarded whenever xRollback() or xRollbackTo() 
+** xSavepoint() is called. And discarded whenever xRollback() or xRollbackTo()
 ** is called.
 **
 ** Additionally, if SQLITE_DEBUG is defined, an instance of the following
@@ -198515,13 +198515,13 @@ struct Fts5TransactionState {
 };
 
 /*
-** A single object of this type is allocated when the FTS5 module is 
+** A single object of this type is allocated when the FTS5 module is
 ** registered with a database handle. It is used to store pointers to
 ** all registered FTS5 extensions - tokenizers and auxiliary functions.
 */
 struct Fts5Global {
   fts5_api api;                   /* User visible part of object (see fts5.h) */
-  sqlite3 *db;                    /* Associated database connection */ 
+  sqlite3 *db;                    /* Associated database connection */
   i64 iNextId;                    /* Used to allocate unique cursor ids */
   Fts5Auxiliary *pAux;            /* First in list of all aux. functions */
   Fts5TokenizerModule *pTok;      /* First in list of all tokenizer modules */
@@ -198582,7 +198582,7 @@ struct Fts5MatchPhrase {
 **
 ** aIdx[]:
 **   There is one entry in the aIdx[] array for each phrase in the query,
-**   the value of which is the offset within aPoslist[] following the last 
+**   the value of which is the offset within aPoslist[] following the last
 **   byte of the position list for the corresponding phrase.
 */
 struct Fts5Sorter {
@@ -198598,8 +198598,8 @@ struct Fts5Sorter {
 ** Virtual-table cursor object.
 **
 ** iSpecial:
-**   If this is a 'special' query (refer to function fts5SpecialMatch()), 
-**   then this variable contains the result of the query. 
+**   If this is a 'special' query (refer to function fts5SpecialMatch()),
+**   then this variable contains the result of the query.
 **
 ** iFirstRowid, iLastRowid:
 **   These variables are only used for FTS5_PLAN_MATCH cursors. Assuming the
@@ -198650,7 +198650,7 @@ struct Fts5Cursor {
 };
 
 /*
-** Bits that make up the "idxNum" parameter passed indirectly by 
+** Bits that make up the "idxNum" parameter passed indirectly by
 ** xBestIndex() to xFilter().
 */
 #define FTS5_BI_MATCH        0x0001         /* <tbl> MATCH ? */
@@ -198729,7 +198729,7 @@ static void fts5CheckTransactionState(Fts5Table *p, int op, int iSavepoint){
       assert( iSavepoint>p->ts.iSavepoint );
       p->ts.iSavepoint = iSavepoint;
       break;
-      
+
     case FTS5_RELEASE:
       assert( p->ts.eState==1 );
       assert( iSavepoint>=0 );
@@ -198757,7 +198757,7 @@ static int fts5IsContentless(Fts5Table *pTab){
 }
 
 /*
-** Delete a virtual table handle allocated by fts5InitVtab(). 
+** Delete a virtual table handle allocated by fts5InitVtab().
 */
 static void fts5FreeVtab(Fts5Table *pTab){
   if( pTab ){
@@ -198913,7 +198913,7 @@ static void fts5SetUniqueFlag(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the xBestIndex method for FTS5 tables. Within the 
+** Implementation of the xBestIndex method for FTS5 tables. Within the
 ** WHERE constraint, it searches for the following:
 **
 **   1. A MATCH constraint against the special column.
@@ -198965,14 +198965,14 @@ static int fts5BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
     int omit;                     /* True to omit this if found */
     int iConsIndex;               /* Index in pInfo->aConstraint[] */
   } aConstraint[] = {
-    {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH|SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ, 
+    {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH|SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ,
                                     FTS5_BI_MATCH,    1, 1, -1},
-    {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH|SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ, 
+    {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH|SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ,
                                     FTS5_BI_RANK,     2, 1, -1},
     {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ,    FTS5_BI_ROWID_EQ, 0, 0, -1},
-    {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LT|SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LE, 
+    {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LT|SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LE,
                                     FTS5_BI_ROWID_LE, 0, 0, -1},
-    {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GT|SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GE, 
+    {SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GT|SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GE,
                                     FTS5_BI_ROWID_GE, 0, 0, -1},
   };
 
@@ -198994,7 +198994,7 @@ static int fts5BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
         idxFlags = (idxFlags & 0xFFFF) | FTS5_BI_MATCH | (iCol << 16);
         aConstraint[0].iConsIndex = i;
       }else{
-        /* As there exists an unusable MATCH constraint this is an 
+        /* As there exists an unusable MATCH constraint this is an
         ** unusable plan. Set a prohibitively high cost. */
         pInfo->estimatedCost = 1e50;
         return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -199100,15 +199100,15 @@ static int fts5StmtType(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called after the cursor passed as the only argument
-** is moved to point at a different row. It clears all cached data 
+** is moved to point at a different row. It clears all cached data
 ** specific to the previous row stored by the cursor object.
 */
 static void fts5CsrNewrow(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
-  CsrFlagSet(pCsr, 
-      FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_CONTENT 
-    | FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_DOCSIZE 
-    | FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_INST 
-    | FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_POSLIST 
+  CsrFlagSet(pCsr,
+      FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_CONTENT
+    | FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_DOCSIZE
+    | FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_INST
+    | FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_POSLIST
   );
 }
 
@@ -199211,14 +199211,14 @@ static int fts5SorterNext(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
 
 
 /*
-** Set the FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_RESEEK flag on all FTS5_PLAN_MATCH cursors 
+** Set the FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_RESEEK flag on all FTS5_PLAN_MATCH cursors
 ** open on table pTab.
 */
 static void fts5TripCursors(Fts5Table *pTab){
   Fts5Cursor *pCsr;
   for(pCsr=pTab->pGlobal->pCsr; pCsr; pCsr=pCsr->pNext){
     if( pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_MATCH
-     && pCsr->base.pVtab==(sqlite3_vtab*)pTab 
+     && pCsr->base.pVtab==(sqlite3_vtab*)pTab
     ){
       CsrFlagSet(pCsr, FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_RESEEK);
     }
@@ -199227,14 +199227,14 @@ static void fts5TripCursors(Fts5Table *pTab){
 
 /*
 ** If the REQUIRE_RESEEK flag is set on the cursor passed as the first
-** argument, close and reopen all Fts5IndexIter iterators that the cursor 
+** argument, close and reopen all Fts5IndexIter iterators that the cursor
 ** is using. Then attempt to move the cursor to a rowid equal to or laster
-** (in the cursors sort order - ASC or DESC) than the current rowid. 
+** (in the cursors sort order - ASC or DESC) than the current rowid.
 **
 ** If the new rowid is not equal to the old, set output parameter *pbSkip
 ** to 1 before returning. Otherwise, leave it unchanged.
 **
-** Return SQLITE_OK if successful or if no reseek was required, or an 
+** Return SQLITE_OK if successful or if no reseek was required, or an
 ** error code if an error occurred.
 */
 static int fts5CursorReseek(Fts5Cursor *pCsr, int *pbSkip){
@@ -199262,7 +199262,7 @@ static int fts5CursorReseek(Fts5Cursor *pCsr, int *pbSkip){
 
 
 /*
-** Advance the cursor to the next row in the table that matches the 
+** Advance the cursor to the next row in the table that matches the
 ** search criteria.
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK if nothing goes wrong.  SQLITE_OK is returned
@@ -199274,7 +199274,7 @@ static int fts5NextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
   int rc;
 
   assert( (pCsr->ePlan<3)==
-          (pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_MATCH || pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SOURCE) 
+          (pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_MATCH || pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SOURCE)
   );
   assert( !CsrFlagTest(pCsr, FTS5CSR_EOF) );
 
@@ -199291,12 +199291,12 @@ static int fts5NextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
         rc = SQLITE_OK;
         break;
       }
-  
+
       case FTS5_PLAN_SORTED_MATCH: {
         rc = fts5SorterNext(pCsr);
         break;
       }
-  
+
       default:
         rc = sqlite3_step(pCsr->pStmt);
         if( rc!=SQLITE_ROW ){
@@ -199308,14 +199308,14 @@ static int fts5NextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
         break;
     }
   }
-  
+
   return rc;
 }
 
 
 static int fts5PrepareStatement(
   sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt,
-  Fts5Config *pConfig, 
+  Fts5Config *pConfig,
   const char *zFmt,
   ...
 ){
@@ -199327,9 +199327,9 @@ static int fts5PrepareStatement(
   va_start(ap, zFmt);
   zSql = sqlite3_vmprintf(zFmt, ap);
   if( zSql==0 ){
-    rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; 
+    rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
   }else{
-    rc = sqlite3_prepare_v3(pConfig->db, zSql, -1, 
+    rc = sqlite3_prepare_v3(pConfig->db, zSql, -1,
                             SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT, &pRet, 0);
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
       *pConfig->pzErrmsg = sqlite3_mprintf("%s", sqlite3_errmsg(pConfig->db));
@@ -199340,7 +199340,7 @@ static int fts5PrepareStatement(
   va_end(ap);
   *ppStmt = pRet;
   return rc;
-} 
+}
 
 static int fts5CursorFirstSorted(Fts5Table *pTab, Fts5Cursor *pCsr, int bDesc){
   Fts5Config *pConfig = pTab->pConfig;
@@ -199350,7 +199350,7 @@ static int fts5CursorFirstSorted(Fts5Table *pTab, Fts5Cursor *pCsr, int bDesc){
   int rc;
   const char *zRank = pCsr->zRank;
   const char *zRankArgs = pCsr->zRankArgs;
-  
+
   nPhrase = sqlite3Fts5ExprPhraseCount(pCsr->pExpr);
   nByte = sizeof(Fts5Sorter) + sizeof(int) * (nPhrase-1);
   pSorter = (Fts5Sorter*)sqlite3_malloc(nByte);
@@ -199361,7 +199361,7 @@ static int fts5CursorFirstSorted(Fts5Table *pTab, Fts5Cursor *pCsr, int bDesc){
   /* TODO: It would be better to have some system for reusing statement
   ** handles here, rather than preparing a new one for each query. But that
   ** is not possible as SQLite reference counts the virtual table objects.
-  ** And since the statement required here reads from this very virtual 
+  ** And since the statement required here reads from this very virtual
   ** table, saving it creates a circular reference.
   **
   ** If SQLite a built-in statement cache, this wouldn't be a problem. */
@@ -199408,8 +199408,8 @@ static int fts5CursorFirst(Fts5Table *pTab, Fts5Cursor *pCsr, int bDesc){
 ** parameters.
 */
 static int fts5SpecialMatch(
-  Fts5Table *pTab, 
-  Fts5Cursor *pCsr, 
+  Fts5Table *pTab,
+  Fts5Cursor *pCsr,
   const char *zQuery
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;             /* Return code */
@@ -199507,7 +199507,7 @@ static int fts5FindRankFunction(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
 
 static int fts5CursorParseRank(
   Fts5Config *pConfig,
-  Fts5Cursor *pCsr, 
+  Fts5Cursor *pCsr,
   sqlite3_value *pRank
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -199556,7 +199556,7 @@ static i64 fts5GetRowidLimit(sqlite3_value *pVal, i64 iDefault){
 ** This is the xFilter interface for the virtual table.  See
 ** the virtual table xFilter method documentation for additional
 ** information.
-** 
+**
 ** There are three possible query strategies:
 **
 **   1. Full-text search using a MATCH operator.
@@ -199619,7 +199619,7 @@ static int fts5FilterMethod(
   bOrderByRank = ((idxNum & FTS5_BI_ORDER_RANK) ? 1 : 0);
   pCsr->bDesc = bDesc = ((idxNum & FTS5_BI_ORDER_DESC) ? 1 : 0);
 
-  /* Set the cursor upper and lower rowid limits. Only some strategies 
+  /* Set the cursor upper and lower rowid limits. Only some strategies
   ** actually use them. This is ok, as the xBestIndex() method leaves the
   ** sqlite3_index_constraint.omit flag clear for range constraints
   ** on the rowid field.  */
@@ -199635,11 +199635,11 @@ static int fts5FilterMethod(
   }
 
   if( pTab->pSortCsr ){
-    /* If pSortCsr is non-NULL, then this call is being made as part of 
+    /* If pSortCsr is non-NULL, then this call is being made as part of
     ** processing for a "... MATCH <expr> ORDER BY rank" query (ePlan is
     ** set to FTS5_PLAN_SORTED_MATCH). pSortCsr is the cursor that will
-    ** return results to the user for this query. The current cursor 
-    ** (pCursor) is used to execute the query issued by function 
+    ** return results to the user for this query. The current cursor
+    ** (pCursor) is used to execute the query issued by function
     ** fts5CursorFirstSorted() above.  */
     assert( pRowidEq==0 && pRowidLe==0 && pRowidGe==0 && pRank==0 );
     assert( nVal==0 && pMatch==0 && bOrderByRank==0 && bDesc==0 );
@@ -199700,8 +199700,8 @@ static int fts5FilterMethod(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
-** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this 
+/*
+** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this
 ** routine to find out if it has reached the end of a result set.
 */
 static int fts5EofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
@@ -199713,9 +199713,9 @@ static int fts5EofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
 ** Return the rowid that the cursor currently points to.
 */
 static i64 fts5CursorRowid(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
-  assert( pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_MATCH 
-       || pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SORTED_MATCH 
-       || pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SOURCE 
+  assert( pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_MATCH
+       || pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SORTED_MATCH
+       || pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SOURCE
   );
   if( pCsr->pSorter ){
     return pCsr->pSorter->iRowid;
@@ -199724,7 +199724,7 @@ static i64 fts5CursorRowid(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
   }
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This is the xRowid method. The SQLite core calls this routine to
 ** retrieve the rowid for the current row of the result set. fts5
 ** exposes %_content.rowid as the rowid for the virtual table. The
@@ -199733,7 +199733,7 @@ static i64 fts5CursorRowid(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
 static int fts5RowidMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
   Fts5Cursor *pCsr = (Fts5Cursor*)pCursor;
   int ePlan = pCsr->ePlan;
-  
+
   assert( CsrFlagTest(pCsr, FTS5CSR_EOF)==0 );
   switch( ePlan ){
     case FTS5_PLAN_SPECIAL:
@@ -199764,7 +199764,7 @@ static int fts5RowidMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
 static int fts5SeekCursor(Fts5Cursor *pCsr, int bErrormsg){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
-  /* If the cursor does not yet have a statement handle, obtain one now. */ 
+  /* If the cursor does not yet have a statement handle, obtain one now. */
   if( pCsr->pStmt==0 ){
     Fts5Table *pTab = (Fts5Table*)(pCsr->base.pVtab);
     int eStmt = fts5StmtType(pCsr);
@@ -199808,7 +199808,7 @@ static void fts5SetVtabError(Fts5Table *p, const char *zFormat, ...){
 **     INSERT INTO fts(fts) VALUES($pCmd)
 **     INSERT INTO fts(fts, rank) VALUES($pCmd, $pVal)
 **
-** Argument pVal is the value assigned to column "fts" by the INSERT 
+** Argument pVal is the value assigned to column "fts" by the INSERT
 ** statement. This function returns SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite
 ** error code if an error occurs.
 **
@@ -199827,7 +199827,7 @@ static int fts5SpecialInsert(
 
   if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp("delete-all", zCmd) ){
     if( pConfig->eContent==FTS5_CONTENT_NORMAL ){
-      fts5SetVtabError(pTab, 
+      fts5SetVtabError(pTab,
           "'delete-all' may only be used with a "
           "contentless or external content fts5 table"
       );
@@ -199837,7 +199837,7 @@ static int fts5SpecialInsert(
     }
   }else if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp("rebuild", zCmd) ){
     if( pConfig->eContent==FTS5_CONTENT_NONE ){
-      fts5SetVtabError(pTab, 
+      fts5SetVtabError(pTab,
           "'rebuild' may not be used with a contentless fts5 table"
       );
       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -199872,7 +199872,7 @@ static int fts5SpecialInsert(
 }
 
 static int fts5SpecialDelete(
-  Fts5Table *pTab, 
+  Fts5Table *pTab,
   sqlite3_value **apVal
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -199885,9 +199885,9 @@ static int fts5SpecialDelete(
 }
 
 static void fts5StorageInsert(
-  int *pRc, 
-  Fts5Table *pTab, 
-  sqlite3_value **apVal, 
+  int *pRc,
+  Fts5Table *pTab,
+  sqlite3_value **apVal,
   i64 *piRowid
 ){
   int rc = *pRc;
@@ -199900,13 +199900,13 @@ static void fts5StorageInsert(
   *pRc = rc;
 }
 
-/* 
-** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by 
+/*
+** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by
 ** FTS3 virtual tables. It is invoked by SQLite each time a row is to be
 ** inserted, updated or deleted.
 **
 ** A delete specifies a single argument - the rowid of the row to remove.
-** 
+**
 ** Update and insert operations pass:
 **
 **   1. The "old" rowid, or NULL.
@@ -199930,9 +199930,9 @@ static int fts5UpdateMethod(
 
   assert( pVtab->zErrMsg==0 );
   assert( nArg==1 || nArg==(2+pConfig->nCol+2) );
-  assert( nArg==1 
-      || sqlite3_value_type(apVal[1])==SQLITE_INTEGER 
-      || sqlite3_value_type(apVal[1])==SQLITE_NULL 
+  assert( nArg==1
+      || sqlite3_value_type(apVal[1])==SQLITE_INTEGER
+      || sqlite3_value_type(apVal[1])==SQLITE_NULL
   );
   assert( pTab->pConfig->pzErrmsg==0 );
   pTab->pConfig->pzErrmsg = &pTab->base.zErrMsg;
@@ -199941,13 +199941,13 @@ static int fts5UpdateMethod(
   fts5TripCursors(pTab);
 
   eType0 = sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0]);
-  if( eType0==SQLITE_NULL 
-   && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[2+pConfig->nCol])!=SQLITE_NULL 
+  if( eType0==SQLITE_NULL
+   && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[2+pConfig->nCol])!=SQLITE_NULL
   ){
     /* A "special" INSERT op. These are handled separately. */
     const char *z = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(apVal[2+pConfig->nCol]);
-    if( pConfig->eContent!=FTS5_CONTENT_NORMAL 
-      && 0==sqlite3_stricmp("delete", z) 
+    if( pConfig->eContent!=FTS5_CONTENT_NORMAL
+      && 0==sqlite3_stricmp("delete", z)
     ){
       rc = fts5SpecialDelete(pTab, apVal);
     }else{
@@ -199955,7 +199955,7 @@ static int fts5UpdateMethod(
     }
   }else{
     /* A regular INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement. The trick here is that
-    ** any conflict on the rowid value must be detected before any 
+    ** any conflict on the rowid value must be detected before any
     ** modifications are made to the database file. There are 4 cases:
     **
     **   1) DELETE
@@ -199977,7 +199977,7 @@ static int fts5UpdateMethod(
     ** This is not suported.  */
     if( eType0==SQLITE_INTEGER && fts5IsContentless(pTab) ){
       pTab->base.zErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf(
-          "cannot %s contentless fts5 table: %s", 
+          "cannot %s contentless fts5 table: %s",
           (nArg>1 ? "UPDATE" : "DELETE from"), pConfig->zName
       );
       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -199990,10 +199990,10 @@ static int fts5UpdateMethod(
     }
 
     /* INSERT */
-    else if( eType0!=SQLITE_INTEGER ){     
+    else if( eType0!=SQLITE_INTEGER ){
       /* If this is a REPLACE, first remove the current entry (if any) */
-      if( eConflict==SQLITE_REPLACE 
-       && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[1])==SQLITE_INTEGER 
+      if( eConflict==SQLITE_REPLACE
+       && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[1])==SQLITE_INTEGER
       ){
         i64 iNew = sqlite3_value_int64(apVal[1]);  /* Rowid to delete */
         rc = sqlite3Fts5StorageDelete(pTab->pStorage, iNew, 0);
@@ -200033,7 +200033,7 @@ static int fts5UpdateMethod(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of xSync() method. 
+** Implementation of xSync() method.
 */
 static int fts5SyncMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
   int rc;
@@ -200047,7 +200047,7 @@ static int fts5SyncMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of xBegin() method. 
+** Implementation of xBegin() method.
 */
 static int fts5BeginMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
   fts5CheckTransactionState((Fts5Table*)pVtab, FTS5_BEGIN, 0);
@@ -200091,8 +200091,8 @@ static int fts5ApiColumnCount(Fts5Context *pCtx){
 }
 
 static int fts5ApiColumnTotalSize(
-  Fts5Context *pCtx, 
-  int iCol, 
+  Fts5Context *pCtx,
+  int iCol,
   sqlite3_int64 *pnToken
 ){
   Fts5Cursor *pCsr = (Fts5Cursor*)pCtx;
@@ -200107,8 +200107,8 @@ static int fts5ApiRowCount(Fts5Context *pCtx, i64 *pnRow){
 }
 
 static int fts5ApiTokenize(
-  Fts5Context *pCtx, 
-  const char *pText, int nText, 
+  Fts5Context *pCtx,
+  const char *pText, int nText,
   void *pUserData,
   int (*xToken)(void*, int, const char*, int, int, int)
 ){
@@ -200130,9 +200130,9 @@ static int fts5ApiPhraseSize(Fts5Context *pCtx, int iPhrase){
 }
 
 static int fts5ApiColumnText(
-  Fts5Context *pCtx, 
-  int iCol, 
-  const char **pz, 
+  Fts5Context *pCtx,
+  int iCol,
+  const char **pz,
   int *pn
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -200151,8 +200151,8 @@ static int fts5ApiColumnText(
 }
 
 static int fts5CsrPoslist(
-  Fts5Cursor *pCsr, 
-  int iPhrase, 
+  Fts5Cursor *pCsr,
+  int iPhrase,
   const u8 **pa,
   int *pn
 ){
@@ -200206,7 +200206,7 @@ static int fts5CacheInstArray(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   Fts5PoslistReader *aIter;       /* One iterator for each phrase */
   int nIter;                      /* Number of iterators/phrases */
-  
+
   nIter = sqlite3Fts5ExprPhraseCount(pCsr->pExpr);
   if( pCsr->aInstIter==0 ){
     int nByte = sizeof(Fts5PoslistReader) * nIter;
@@ -200221,7 +200221,7 @@ static int fts5CacheInstArray(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
     /* Initialize all iterators */
     for(i=0; i<nIter && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){
       const u8 *a;
-      int n; 
+      int n;
       rc = fts5CsrPoslist(pCsr, i, &a, &n);
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         sqlite3Fts5PoslistReaderInit(a, n, &aIter[i]);
@@ -200233,8 +200233,8 @@ static int fts5CacheInstArray(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
         int *aInst;
         int iBest = -1;
         for(i=0; i<nIter; i++){
-          if( (aIter[i].bEof==0) 
-              && (iBest<0 || aIter[i].iPos<aIter[iBest].iPos) 
+          if( (aIter[i].bEof==0)
+              && (iBest<0 || aIter[i].iPos<aIter[iBest].iPos)
             ){
             iBest = i;
           }
@@ -200272,7 +200272,7 @@ static int fts5CacheInstArray(Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
 static int fts5ApiInstCount(Fts5Context *pCtx, int *pnInst){
   Fts5Cursor *pCsr = (Fts5Cursor*)pCtx;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  if( CsrFlagTest(pCsr, FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_INST)==0 
+  if( CsrFlagTest(pCsr, FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_INST)==0
    || SQLITE_OK==(rc = fts5CacheInstArray(pCsr)) ){
     *pnInst = pCsr->nInstCount;
   }
@@ -200280,16 +200280,16 @@ static int fts5ApiInstCount(Fts5Context *pCtx, int *pnInst){
 }
 
 static int fts5ApiInst(
-  Fts5Context *pCtx, 
-  int iIdx, 
-  int *piPhrase, 
-  int *piCol, 
+  Fts5Context *pCtx,
+  int iIdx,
+  int *piPhrase,
+  int *piCol,
   int *piOff
 ){
   Fts5Cursor *pCsr = (Fts5Cursor*)pCtx;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  if( CsrFlagTest(pCsr, FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_INST)==0 
-   || SQLITE_OK==(rc = fts5CacheInstArray(pCsr)) 
+  if( CsrFlagTest(pCsr, FTS5CSR_REQUIRE_INST)==0
+   || SQLITE_OK==(rc = fts5CacheInstArray(pCsr))
   ){
     if( iIdx<0 || iIdx>=pCsr->nInstCount ){
       rc = SQLITE_RANGE;
@@ -200438,8 +200438,8 @@ static void *fts5ApiGetAuxdata(Fts5Context *pCtx, int bClear){
 }
 
 static void fts5ApiPhraseNext(
-  Fts5Context *pUnused, 
-  Fts5PhraseIter *pIter, 
+  Fts5Context *pUnused,
+  Fts5PhraseIter *pIter,
   int *piCol, int *piOff
 ){
   UNUSED_PARAM(pUnused);
@@ -200460,9 +200460,9 @@ static void fts5ApiPhraseNext(
 }
 
 static int fts5ApiPhraseFirst(
-  Fts5Context *pCtx, 
-  int iPhrase, 
-  Fts5PhraseIter *pIter, 
+  Fts5Context *pCtx,
+  int iPhrase,
+  Fts5PhraseIter *pIter,
   int *piCol, int *piOff
 ){
   Fts5Cursor *pCsr = (Fts5Cursor*)pCtx;
@@ -200478,8 +200478,8 @@ static int fts5ApiPhraseFirst(
 }
 
 static void fts5ApiPhraseNextColumn(
-  Fts5Context *pCtx, 
-  Fts5PhraseIter *pIter, 
+  Fts5Context *pCtx,
+  Fts5PhraseIter *pIter,
   int *piCol
 ){
   Fts5Cursor *pCsr = (Fts5Cursor*)pCtx;
@@ -200508,9 +200508,9 @@ static void fts5ApiPhraseNextColumn(
 }
 
 static int fts5ApiPhraseFirstColumn(
-  Fts5Context *pCtx, 
-  int iPhrase, 
-  Fts5PhraseIter *pIter, 
+  Fts5Context *pCtx,
+  int iPhrase,
+  Fts5PhraseIter *pIter,
   int *piCol
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -200551,7 +200551,7 @@ static int fts5ApiPhraseFirstColumn(
 }
 
 
-static int fts5ApiQueryPhrase(Fts5Context*, int, void*, 
+static int fts5ApiQueryPhrase(Fts5Context*, int, void*,
     int(*)(const Fts5ExtensionApi*, Fts5Context*, void*)
 );
 
@@ -200582,8 +200582,8 @@ static const Fts5ExtensionApi sFts5Api = {
 ** Implementation of API function xQueryPhrase().
 */
 static int fts5ApiQueryPhrase(
-  Fts5Context *pCtx, 
-  int iPhrase, 
+  Fts5Context *pCtx,
+  int iPhrase,
   void *pUserData,
   int(*xCallback)(const Fts5ExtensionApi*, Fts5Context*, void*)
 ){
@@ -200665,10 +200665,10 @@ static void fts5ApiCallback(
 
 
 /*
-** Given cursor id iId, return a pointer to the corresponding Fts5Index 
+** Given cursor id iId, return a pointer to the corresponding Fts5Index
 ** object. Or NULL If the cursor id does not exist.
 **
-** If successful, set *ppConfig to point to the associated config object 
+** If successful, set *ppConfig to point to the associated config object
 ** before returning.
 */
 static Fts5Index *sqlite3Fts5IndexFromCsrid(
@@ -200754,7 +200754,7 @@ static int fts5PoslistBlob(sqlite3_context *pCtx, Fts5Cursor *pCsr){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This is the xColumn method, called by SQLite to request a value from
 ** the row that the supplied cursor currently points to.
 */
@@ -200767,7 +200767,7 @@ static int fts5ColumnMethod(
   Fts5Config *pConfig = pTab->pConfig;
   Fts5Cursor *pCsr = (Fts5Cursor*)pCursor;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  
+
   assert( CsrFlagTest(pCsr, FTS5CSR_EOF)==0 );
 
   if( pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SPECIAL ){
@@ -200787,7 +200787,7 @@ static int fts5ColumnMethod(
     /* The value of the "rank" column. */
     if( pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SOURCE ){
       fts5PoslistBlob(pCtx, pCsr);
-    }else if( 
+    }else if(
         pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_MATCH
      || pCsr->ePlan==FTS5_PLAN_SORTED_MATCH
     ){
@@ -200920,7 +200920,7 @@ static int fts5CreateAux(
 }
 
 /*
-** Register a new tokenizer. This is the implementation of the 
+** Register a new tokenizer. This is the implementation of the
 ** fts5_api.xCreateTokenizer() method.
 */
 static int fts5CreateTokenizer(
@@ -200959,7 +200959,7 @@ static int fts5CreateTokenizer(
 }
 
 static Fts5TokenizerModule *fts5LocateTokenizer(
-  Fts5Global *pGlobal, 
+  Fts5Global *pGlobal,
   const char *zName
 ){
   Fts5TokenizerModule *pMod = 0;
@@ -200976,7 +200976,7 @@ static Fts5TokenizerModule *fts5LocateTokenizer(
 }
 
 /*
-** Find a tokenizer. This is the implementation of the 
+** Find a tokenizer. This is the implementation of the
 ** fts5_api.xFindTokenizer() method.
 */
 static int fts5FindTokenizer(
@@ -201001,7 +201001,7 @@ static int fts5FindTokenizer(
 }
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5GetTokenizer(
-  Fts5Global *pGlobal, 
+  Fts5Global *pGlobal,
   const char **azArg,
   int nArg,
   Fts5Tokenizer **ppTok,
@@ -201155,7 +201155,7 @@ static int fts5Init(sqlite3 *db){
 ** this module is being built as part of the SQLite core (SQLITE_CORE is
 ** defined), then sqlite3_open() will call sqlite3Fts5Init() directly.
 **
-** Or, if this module is being built as a loadable extension, 
+** Or, if this module is being built as a loadable extension,
 ** sqlite3Fts5Init() is omitted and the two standard entry points
 ** sqlite3_fts_init() and sqlite3_fts5_init() defined instead.
 */
@@ -201214,19 +201214,19 @@ struct Fts5Storage {
   Fts5Index *pIndex;
   int bTotalsValid;               /* True if nTotalRow/aTotalSize[] are valid */
   i64 nTotalRow;                  /* Total number of rows in FTS table */
-  i64 *aTotalSize;                /* Total sizes of each column */ 
+  i64 *aTotalSize;                /* Total sizes of each column */
   sqlite3_stmt *aStmt[11];
 };
 
 
-#if FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC!=0 
-# error "FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC mismatch" 
+#if FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC!=0
+# error "FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC mismatch"
 #endif
-#if FTS5_STMT_SCAN_DESC!=1 
-# error "FTS5_STMT_SCAN_DESC mismatch" 
+#if FTS5_STMT_SCAN_DESC!=1
+# error "FTS5_STMT_SCAN_DESC mismatch"
 #endif
 #if FTS5_STMT_LOOKUP!=2
-# error "FTS5_STMT_LOOKUP mismatch" 
+# error "FTS5_STMT_LOOKUP mismatch"
 #endif
 
 #define FTS5_STMT_INSERT_CONTENT  3
@@ -201252,12 +201252,12 @@ static int fts5StorageGetStmt(
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
-  /* If there is no %_docsize table, there should be no requests for 
+  /* If there is no %_docsize table, there should be no requests for
   ** statements to operate on it.  */
   assert( p->pConfig->bColumnsize || (
-        eStmt!=FTS5_STMT_REPLACE_DOCSIZE 
-     && eStmt!=FTS5_STMT_DELETE_DOCSIZE 
-     && eStmt!=FTS5_STMT_LOOKUP_DOCSIZE 
+        eStmt!=FTS5_STMT_REPLACE_DOCSIZE
+     && eStmt!=FTS5_STMT_DELETE_DOCSIZE
+     && eStmt!=FTS5_STMT_LOOKUP_DOCSIZE
   ));
 
   assert( eStmt>=0 && eStmt<ArraySize(p->aStmt) );
@@ -201283,26 +201283,26 @@ static int fts5StorageGetStmt(
 
     switch( eStmt ){
       case FTS5_STMT_SCAN:
-        zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azStmt[eStmt], 
+        zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azStmt[eStmt],
             pC->zContentExprlist, pC->zContent
         );
         break;
 
       case FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC:
       case FTS5_STMT_SCAN_DESC:
-        zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azStmt[eStmt], pC->zContentExprlist, 
+        zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azStmt[eStmt], pC->zContentExprlist,
             pC->zContent, pC->zContentRowid, pC->zContentRowid,
             pC->zContentRowid
         );
         break;
 
       case FTS5_STMT_LOOKUP:
-        zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azStmt[eStmt], 
+        zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azStmt[eStmt],
             pC->zContentExprlist, pC->zContent, pC->zContentRowid
         );
         break;
 
-      case FTS5_STMT_INSERT_CONTENT: 
+      case FTS5_STMT_INSERT_CONTENT:
       case FTS5_STMT_REPLACE_CONTENT: {
         int nCol = pC->nCol + 1;
         char *zBind;
@@ -201373,7 +201373,7 @@ static int fts5ExecPrintf(
 ** code otherwise.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5DropAll(Fts5Config *pConfig){
-  int rc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0, 
+  int rc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0,
       "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS %Q.'%q_data';"
       "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS %Q.'%q_idx';"
       "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS %Q.'%q_config';",
@@ -201382,13 +201382,13 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5DropAll(Fts5Config *pConfig){
       pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName
   );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pConfig->bColumnsize ){
-    rc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0, 
+    rc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0,
         "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS %Q.'%q_docsize';",
         pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName
     );
   }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pConfig->eContent==FTS5_CONTENT_NORMAL ){
-    rc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0, 
+    rc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0,
         "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS %Q.'%q_content';",
         pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName
     );
@@ -201403,7 +201403,7 @@ static void fts5StorageRenameOne(
   const char *zName               /* New name of FTS5 table */
 ){
   if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    *pRc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0, 
+    *pRc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0,
         "ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_%s' RENAME TO '%q_%s';",
         pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName, zTail, zName, zTail
     );
@@ -201441,7 +201441,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5CreateTable(
   char *zErr = 0;
 
   rc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, &zErr, "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_%q'(%s)%s",
-      pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName, zPost, zDefn, 
+      pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName, zPost, zDefn,
 #ifndef SQLITE_FTS5_NO_WITHOUT_ROWID
       bWithout?" WITHOUT ROWID":
 #endif
@@ -201449,7 +201449,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5CreateTable(
   );
   if( zErr ){
     *pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf(
-        "fts5: error creating shadow table %q_%s: %s", 
+        "fts5: error creating shadow table %q_%s: %s",
         pConfig->zName, zPost, zErr
     );
     sqlite3_free(zErr);
@@ -201460,15 +201460,15 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5CreateTable(
 
 /*
 ** Open a new Fts5Index handle. If the bCreate argument is true, create
-** and initialize the underlying tables 
+** and initialize the underlying tables
 **
 ** If successful, set *pp to point to the new object and return SQLITE_OK.
 ** Otherwise, set *pp to NULL and return an SQLite error code.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5StorageOpen(
-  Fts5Config *pConfig, 
-  Fts5Index *pIndex, 
-  int bCreate, 
+  Fts5Config *pConfig,
+  Fts5Index *pIndex,
+  int bCreate,
   Fts5Storage **pp,
   char **pzErr                    /* OUT: Error message */
 ){
@@ -201580,8 +201580,8 @@ static int fts5StorageInsertCallback(
 ** remove the %_content row at this time though.
 */
 static int fts5StorageDeleteFromIndex(
-  Fts5Storage *p, 
-  i64 iDel, 
+  Fts5Storage *p,
+  i64 iDel,
   sqlite3_value **apVal
 ){
   Fts5Config *pConfig = p->pConfig;
@@ -201615,7 +201615,7 @@ static int fts5StorageDeleteFromIndex(
         nText = sqlite3_value_bytes(apVal[iCol-1]);
       }
       ctx.szCol = 0;
-      rc = sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig, FTS5_TOKENIZE_DOCUMENT, 
+      rc = sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig, FTS5_TOKENIZE_DOCUMENT,
           zText, nText, (void*)&ctx, fts5StorageInsertCallback
       );
       p->aTotalSize[iCol-1] -= (i64)ctx.szCol;
@@ -201657,7 +201657,7 @@ static int fts5StorageInsertDocsize(
 }
 
 /*
-** Load the contents of the "averages" record from disk into the 
+** Load the contents of the "averages" record from disk into the
 ** p->nTotalRow and p->aTotalSize[] variables. If successful, and if
 ** argument bCache is true, set the p->bTotalsValid flag to indicate
 ** that the contents of aTotalSize[] and nTotalRow are valid until
@@ -201676,7 +201676,7 @@ static int fts5StorageLoadTotals(Fts5Storage *p, int bCache){
 }
 
 /*
-** Store the current contents of the p->nTotalRow and p->aTotalSize[] 
+** Store the current contents of the p->nTotalRow and p->aTotalSize[]
 ** variables in the "averages" record on disk.
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error
@@ -201751,7 +201751,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageDeleteAll(Fts5Storage *p){
 
   /* Delete the contents of the %_data and %_docsize tables. */
   rc = fts5ExecPrintf(pConfig->db, 0,
-      "DELETE FROM %Q.'%q_data';" 
+      "DELETE FROM %Q.'%q_data';"
       "DELETE FROM %Q.'%q_idx';",
       pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName,
       pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName
@@ -201800,7 +201800,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageRebuild(Fts5Storage *p){
     for(ctx.iCol=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && ctx.iCol<pConfig->nCol; ctx.iCol++){
       ctx.szCol = 0;
       if( pConfig->abUnindexed[ctx.iCol]==0 ){
-        rc = sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig, 
+        rc = sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig,
             FTS5_TOKENIZE_DOCUMENT,
             (const char*)sqlite3_column_text(pScan, ctx.iCol+1),
             sqlite3_column_bytes(pScan, ctx.iCol+1),
@@ -201869,8 +201869,8 @@ static int fts5StorageNewRowid(Fts5Storage *p, i64 *piRowid){
 ** Insert a new row into the FTS content table.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5StorageContentInsert(
-  Fts5Storage *p, 
-  sqlite3_value **apVal, 
+  Fts5Storage *p,
+  sqlite3_value **apVal,
   i64 *piRowid
 ){
   Fts5Config *pConfig = p->pConfig;
@@ -201904,8 +201904,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageContentInsert(
 ** Insert new entries into the FTS index and %_docsize table.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5StorageIndexInsert(
-  Fts5Storage *p, 
-  sqlite3_value **apVal, 
+  Fts5Storage *p,
+  sqlite3_value **apVal,
   i64 iRowid
 ){
   Fts5Config *pConfig = p->pConfig;
@@ -201923,7 +201923,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageIndexInsert(
   for(ctx.iCol=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && ctx.iCol<pConfig->nCol; ctx.iCol++){
     ctx.szCol = 0;
     if( pConfig->abUnindexed[ctx.iCol]==0 ){
-      rc = sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig, 
+      rc = sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig,
           FTS5_TOKENIZE_DOCUMENT,
           (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(apVal[ctx.iCol+2]),
           sqlite3_value_bytes(apVal[ctx.iCol+2]),
@@ -201950,7 +201950,7 @@ static int fts5StorageCount(Fts5Storage *p, const char *zSuffix, i64 *pnRow){
   char *zSql;
   int rc;
 
-  zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT count(*) FROM %Q.'%q_%s'", 
+  zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT count(*) FROM %Q.'%q_%s'",
       pConfig->zDb, pConfig->zName, zSuffix
   );
   if( zSql==0 ){
@@ -202095,7 +202095,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageIntegrity(Fts5Storage *p){
           rc = sqlite3Fts5TermsetNew(&ctx.pTermset);
         }
         if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-          rc = sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig, 
+          rc = sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(pConfig,
               FTS5_TOKENIZE_DOCUMENT,
               (const char*)sqlite3_column_text(pScan, i+1),
               sqlite3_column_bytes(pScan, i+1),
@@ -202159,13 +202159,13 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageIntegrity(Fts5Storage *p){
 ** %_content table.
 */
 static int sqlite3Fts5StorageStmt(
-  Fts5Storage *p, 
-  int eStmt, 
-  sqlite3_stmt **pp, 
+  Fts5Storage *p,
+  int eStmt,
+  sqlite3_stmt **pp,
   char **pzErrMsg
 ){
   int rc;
-  assert( eStmt==FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC 
+  assert( eStmt==FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC
        || eStmt==FTS5_STMT_SCAN_DESC
        || eStmt==FTS5_STMT_LOOKUP
   );
@@ -202183,8 +202183,8 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageStmt(
 ** must match that passed to the sqlite3Fts5StorageStmt() call.
 */
 static void sqlite3Fts5StorageStmtRelease(
-  Fts5Storage *p, 
-  int eStmt, 
+  Fts5Storage *p,
+  int eStmt,
   sqlite3_stmt *pStmt
 ){
   assert( eStmt==FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC
@@ -202295,7 +202295,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageRollback(Fts5Storage *p){
 }
 
 static int sqlite3Fts5StorageConfigValue(
-  Fts5Storage *p, 
+  Fts5Storage *p,
   const char *z,
   sqlite3_value *pVal,
   int iVal
@@ -202344,7 +202344,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5StorageConfigValue(
 
 /*
 ** For tokenizers with no "unicode" modifier, the set of token characters
-** is the same as the set of ASCII range alphanumeric characters. 
+** is the same as the set of ASCII range alphanumeric characters.
 */
 static unsigned char aAsciiTokenChar[128] = {
   0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,   0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,   /* 0x00..0x0F */
@@ -202363,8 +202363,8 @@ struct AsciiTokenizer {
 };
 
 static void fts5AsciiAddExceptions(
-  AsciiTokenizer *p, 
-  const char *zArg, 
+  AsciiTokenizer *p,
+  const char *zArg,
   int bTokenChars
 ){
   int i;
@@ -202386,7 +202386,7 @@ static void fts5AsciiDelete(Fts5Tokenizer *p){
 ** Create an "ascii" tokenizer.
 */
 static int fts5AsciiCreate(
-  void *pUnused, 
+  void *pUnused,
   const char **azArg, int nArg,
   Fts5Tokenizer **ppOut
 ){
@@ -202489,7 +202489,7 @@ static int fts5AsciiTokenize(
     rc = xToken(pCtx, 0, pFold, nByte, is, ie);
     is = ie+1;
   }
-  
+
   if( pFold!=aFold ) sqlite3_free(pFold);
   if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
   return rc;
@@ -202586,7 +202586,7 @@ static int fts5UnicodeAddExceptions(
           p->aTokenChar[iCode] = (unsigned char)bTokenChars;
         }else{
           bToken = sqlite3Fts5UnicodeIsalnum(iCode);
-          assert( (bToken==0 || bToken==1) ); 
+          assert( (bToken==0 || bToken==1) );
           assert( (bTokenChars==0 || bTokenChars==1) );
           if( bToken!=bTokenChars && sqlite3Fts5UnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode)==0 ){
             int i;
@@ -202650,12 +202650,12 @@ static void fts5UnicodeDelete(Fts5Tokenizer *pTok){
 ** Create a "unicode61" tokenizer.
 */
 static int fts5UnicodeCreate(
-  void *pUnused, 
+  void *pUnused,
   const char **azArg, int nArg,
   Fts5Tokenizer **ppOut
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;             /* Return code */
-  Unicode61Tokenizer *p = 0;      /* New tokenizer object */ 
+  Unicode61Tokenizer *p = 0;      /* New tokenizer object */
 
   UNUSED_PARAM(pUnused);
 
@@ -202704,7 +202704,7 @@ static int fts5UnicodeCreate(
 
 /*
 ** Return true if, for the purposes of tokenizing with the tokenizer
-** passed as the first argument, codepoint iCode is considered a token 
+** passed as the first argument, codepoint iCode is considered a token
 ** character (not a separator).
 */
 static int fts5UnicodeIsAlnum(Unicode61Tokenizer *p, int iCode){
@@ -202794,7 +202794,7 @@ static int fts5UnicodeTokenize(
         }
       }else if( a[*zCsr]==0 ){
         /* An ascii-range separator character. End of token. */
-        break; 
+        break;
       }else{
  ascii_tokenchar:
         if( *zCsr>='A' && *zCsr<='Z' ){
@@ -202808,9 +202808,9 @@ static int fts5UnicodeTokenize(
     }
 
     /* Invoke the token callback */
-    rc = xToken(pCtx, 0, aFold, zOut-aFold, is, ie); 
+    rc = xToken(pCtx, 0, aFold, zOut-aFold, is, ie);
   }
-  
+
  tokenize_done:
   if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
   return rc;
@@ -202848,7 +202848,7 @@ static void fts5PorterDelete(Fts5Tokenizer *pTok){
 ** Create a "porter" tokenizer.
 */
 static int fts5PorterCreate(
-  void *pCtx, 
+  void *pCtx,
   const char **azArg, int nArg,
   Fts5Tokenizer **ppOut
 ){
@@ -202992,7 +202992,7 @@ static int fts5Porter_Ostar(char *zStem, int nStem){
 /* porter rule condition: (m > 1 and (*S or *T)) */
 static int fts5Porter_MGt1_and_S_or_T(char *zStem, int nStem){
   assert( nStem>0 );
-  return (zStem[nStem-1]=='s' || zStem[nStem-1]=='t') 
+  return (zStem[nStem-1]=='s' || zStem[nStem-1]=='t')
       && fts5Porter_MGt1(zStem, nStem);
 }
 
@@ -203017,16 +203017,16 @@ static int fts5PorterStep4(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
   int ret = 0;
   int nBuf = *pnBuf;
   switch( aBuf[nBuf-2] ){
-    
-    case 'a': 
+
+    case 'a':
       if( nBuf>2 && 0==memcmp("al", &aBuf[nBuf-2], 2) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-2) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 2;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'c': 
+
+    case 'c':
       if( nBuf>4 && 0==memcmp("ance", &aBuf[nBuf-4], 4) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-4) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 4;
@@ -203037,24 +203037,24 @@ static int fts5PorterStep4(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'e': 
+
+    case 'e':
       if( nBuf>2 && 0==memcmp("er", &aBuf[nBuf-2], 2) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-2) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 2;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'i': 
+
+    case 'i':
       if( nBuf>2 && 0==memcmp("ic", &aBuf[nBuf-2], 2) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-2) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 2;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'l': 
+
+    case 'l':
       if( nBuf>4 && 0==memcmp("able", &aBuf[nBuf-4], 4) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-4) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 4;
@@ -203065,8 +203065,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep4(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'n': 
+
+    case 'n':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ant", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
@@ -203085,8 +203085,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep4(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'o': 
+
+    case 'o':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ion", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1_and_S_or_T(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
@@ -203097,16 +203097,16 @@ static int fts5PorterStep4(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 's': 
+
+    case 's':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ism", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 't': 
+
+    case 't':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ate", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
@@ -203117,76 +203117,76 @@ static int fts5PorterStep4(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'u': 
+
+    case 'u':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ous", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'v': 
+
+    case 'v':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ive", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'z': 
+
+    case 'z':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ize", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
+
   }
   return ret;
 }
-  
+
 
 static int fts5PorterStep1B2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
   int ret = 0;
   int nBuf = *pnBuf;
   switch( aBuf[nBuf-2] ){
-    
-    case 'a': 
+
+    case 'a':
       if( nBuf>2 && 0==memcmp("at", &aBuf[nBuf-2], 2) ){
         memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-2], "ate", 3);
         *pnBuf = nBuf - 2 + 3;
         ret = 1;
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'b': 
+
+    case 'b':
       if( nBuf>2 && 0==memcmp("bl", &aBuf[nBuf-2], 2) ){
         memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-2], "ble", 3);
         *pnBuf = nBuf - 2 + 3;
         ret = 1;
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'i': 
+
+    case 'i':
       if( nBuf>2 && 0==memcmp("iz", &aBuf[nBuf-2], 2) ){
         memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-2], "ize", 3);
         *pnBuf = nBuf - 2 + 3;
         ret = 1;
       }
       break;
-  
+
   }
   return ret;
 }
-  
+
 
 static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
   int ret = 0;
   int nBuf = *pnBuf;
   switch( aBuf[nBuf-2] ){
-    
-    case 'a': 
+
+    case 'a':
       if( nBuf>7 && 0==memcmp("ational", &aBuf[nBuf-7], 7) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-7) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-7], "ate", 3);
@@ -203199,8 +203199,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'c': 
+
+    case 'c':
       if( nBuf>4 && 0==memcmp("enci", &aBuf[nBuf-4], 4) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-4) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-4], "ence", 4);
@@ -203213,8 +203213,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'e': 
+
+    case 'e':
       if( nBuf>4 && 0==memcmp("izer", &aBuf[nBuf-4], 4) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-4) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-4], "ize", 3);
@@ -203222,8 +203222,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'g': 
+
+    case 'g':
       if( nBuf>4 && 0==memcmp("logi", &aBuf[nBuf-4], 4) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-4) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-4], "log", 3);
@@ -203231,8 +203231,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'l': 
+
+    case 'l':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("bli", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-3], "ble", 3);
@@ -203260,8 +203260,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'o': 
+
+    case 'o':
       if( nBuf>7 && 0==memcmp("ization", &aBuf[nBuf-7], 7) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-7) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-7], "ize", 3);
@@ -203279,8 +203279,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 's': 
+
+    case 's':
       if( nBuf>5 && 0==memcmp("alism", &aBuf[nBuf-5], 5) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-5) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-5], "al", 2);
@@ -203303,8 +203303,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 't': 
+
+    case 't':
       if( nBuf>5 && 0==memcmp("aliti", &aBuf[nBuf-5], 5) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-5) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-5], "al", 2);
@@ -203322,18 +203322,18 @@ static int fts5PorterStep2(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
+
   }
   return ret;
 }
-  
+
 
 static int fts5PorterStep3(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
   int ret = 0;
   int nBuf = *pnBuf;
   switch( aBuf[nBuf-2] ){
-    
-    case 'a': 
+
+    case 'a':
       if( nBuf>4 && 0==memcmp("ical", &aBuf[nBuf-4], 4) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-4) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-4], "ic", 2);
@@ -203341,16 +203341,16 @@ static int fts5PorterStep3(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 's': 
+
+    case 's':
       if( nBuf>4 && 0==memcmp("ness", &aBuf[nBuf-4], 4) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-4) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 4;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 't': 
+
+    case 't':
       if( nBuf>5 && 0==memcmp("icate", &aBuf[nBuf-5], 5) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-5) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-5], "ic", 2);
@@ -203363,24 +203363,24 @@ static int fts5PorterStep3(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'u': 
+
+    case 'u':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ful", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'v': 
+
+    case 'v':
       if( nBuf>5 && 0==memcmp("ative", &aBuf[nBuf-5], 5) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-5) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 5;
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'z': 
+
+    case 'z':
       if( nBuf>5 && 0==memcmp("alize", &aBuf[nBuf-5], 5) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-5) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-5], "al", 2);
@@ -203388,18 +203388,18 @@ static int fts5PorterStep3(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
+
   }
   return ret;
 }
-  
+
 
 static int fts5PorterStep1B(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
   int ret = 0;
   int nBuf = *pnBuf;
   switch( aBuf[nBuf-2] ){
-    
-    case 'e': 
+
+    case 'e':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("eed", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_MGt0(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           memcpy(&aBuf[nBuf-3], "ee", 2);
@@ -203412,8 +203412,8 @@ static int fts5PorterStep1B(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
-    case 'n': 
+
+    case 'n':
       if( nBuf>3 && 0==memcmp("ing", &aBuf[nBuf-3], 3) ){
         if( fts5Porter_Vowel(aBuf, nBuf-3) ){
           *pnBuf = nBuf - 3;
@@ -203421,12 +203421,12 @@ static int fts5PorterStep1B(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
         }
       }
       break;
-  
+
   }
   return ret;
 }
-  
-/* 
+
+/*
 ** GENERATED CODE ENDS HERE (mkportersteps.tcl)
 ***************************************************************************
 **************************************************************************/
@@ -203435,7 +203435,7 @@ static void fts5PorterStep1A(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
   int nBuf = *pnBuf;
   if( aBuf[nBuf-1]=='s' ){
     if( aBuf[nBuf-2]=='e' ){
-      if( (nBuf>4 && aBuf[nBuf-4]=='s' && aBuf[nBuf-3]=='s') 
+      if( (nBuf>4 && aBuf[nBuf-4]=='s' && aBuf[nBuf-3]=='s')
        || (nBuf>3 && aBuf[nBuf-3]=='i' )
       ){
         *pnBuf = nBuf-2;
@@ -203450,11 +203450,11 @@ static void fts5PorterStep1A(char *aBuf, int *pnBuf){
 }
 
 static int fts5PorterCb(
-  void *pCtx, 
+  void *pCtx,
   int tflags,
-  const char *pToken, 
-  int nToken, 
-  int iStart, 
+  const char *pToken,
+  int nToken,
+  int iStart,
   int iEnd
 ){
   PorterContext *p = (PorterContext*)pCtx;
@@ -203472,8 +203472,8 @@ static int fts5PorterCb(
   if( fts5PorterStep1B(aBuf, &nBuf) ){
     if( fts5PorterStep1B2(aBuf, &nBuf)==0 ){
       char c = aBuf[nBuf-1];
-      if( fts5PorterIsVowel(c, 0)==0 
-       && c!='l' && c!='s' && c!='z' && c==aBuf[nBuf-2] 
+      if( fts5PorterIsVowel(c, 0)==0
+       && c!='l' && c!='s' && c!='z' && c==aBuf[nBuf-2]
       ){
         nBuf--;
       }else if( fts5Porter_MEq1(aBuf, nBuf) && fts5Porter_Ostar(aBuf, nBuf) ){
@@ -203495,7 +203495,7 @@ static int fts5PorterCb(
   /* Step 5a. */
   assert( nBuf>0 );
   if( aBuf[nBuf-1]=='e' ){
-    if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-1) 
+    if( fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-1)
      || (fts5Porter_MEq1(aBuf, nBuf-1) && !fts5Porter_Ostar(aBuf, nBuf-1))
     ){
       nBuf--;
@@ -203503,8 +203503,8 @@ static int fts5PorterCb(
   }
 
   /* Step 5b. */
-  if( nBuf>1 && aBuf[nBuf-1]=='l' 
-   && aBuf[nBuf-2]=='l' && fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-1) 
+  if( nBuf>1 && aBuf[nBuf-1]=='l'
+   && aBuf[nBuf-2]=='l' && fts5Porter_MGt1(aBuf, nBuf-1)
   ){
     nBuf--;
   }
@@ -203547,7 +203547,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5TokenizerInit(fts5_api *pApi){
     { "ascii",     {fts5AsciiCreate, fts5AsciiDelete, fts5AsciiTokenize }},
     { "porter",    {fts5PorterCreate, fts5PorterDelete, fts5PorterTokenize }},
   };
-  
+
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;             /* Return code */
   int i;                          /* To iterate through builtin functions */
 
@@ -203597,11 +203597,11 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeIsalnum(int c){
   ** range of unicode codepoints that are not either letters or numbers (i.e.
   ** codepoints for which this function should return 0).
   **
-  ** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first 
+  ** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first
   ** codepoint in the range. The least significant 10 bits are used to store
-  ** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value 
-  ** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint 
-  ** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints 
+  ** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value
+  ** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint
+  ** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints
   ** using this format.
   */
   static const unsigned int aEntry[] = {
@@ -203726,30 +203726,30 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeIsalnum(int c){
 */
 static int fts5_remove_diacritic(int c){
   unsigned short aDia[] = {
-        0,  1797,  1848,  1859,  1891,  1928,  1940,  1995, 
-     2024,  2040,  2060,  2110,  2168,  2206,  2264,  2286, 
-     2344,  2383,  2472,  2488,  2516,  2596,  2668,  2732, 
-     2782,  2842,  2894,  2954,  2984,  3000,  3028,  3336, 
-     3456,  3696,  3712,  3728,  3744,  3896,  3912,  3928, 
-     3968,  4008,  4040,  4106,  4138,  4170,  4202,  4234, 
-     4266,  4296,  4312,  4344,  4408,  4424,  4472,  4504, 
-     6148,  6198,  6264,  6280,  6360,  6429,  6505,  6529, 
-    61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726, 
-    61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122, 
-    62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536, 
-    62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730, 
-    62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390, 
+        0,  1797,  1848,  1859,  1891,  1928,  1940,  1995,
+     2024,  2040,  2060,  2110,  2168,  2206,  2264,  2286,
+     2344,  2383,  2472,  2488,  2516,  2596,  2668,  2732,
+     2782,  2842,  2894,  2954,  2984,  3000,  3028,  3336,
+     3456,  3696,  3712,  3728,  3744,  3896,  3912,  3928,
+     3968,  4008,  4040,  4106,  4138,  4170,  4202,  4234,
+     4266,  4296,  4312,  4344,  4408,  4424,  4472,  4504,
+     6148,  6198,  6264,  6280,  6360,  6429,  6505,  6529,
+    61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726,
+    61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122,
+    62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536,
+    62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730,
+    62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390,
   };
   char aChar[] = {
-    '\0', 'a',  'c',  'e',  'i',  'n',  'o',  'u',  'y',  'y',  'a',  'c',  
-    'd',  'e',  'e',  'g',  'h',  'i',  'j',  'k',  'l',  'n',  'o',  'r',  
-    's',  't',  'u',  'u',  'w',  'y',  'z',  'o',  'u',  'a',  'i',  'o',  
-    'u',  'g',  'k',  'o',  'j',  'g',  'n',  'a',  'e',  'i',  'o',  'r',  
-    'u',  's',  't',  'h',  'a',  'e',  'o',  'y',  '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 
-    '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a',  'b',  'd',  'd',  'e',  'f',  'g',  'h',  
-    'h',  'i',  'k',  'l',  'l',  'm',  'n',  'p',  'r',  'r',  's',  't',  
-    'u',  'v',  'w',  'w',  'x',  'y',  'z',  'h',  't',  'w',  'y',  'a',  
-    'e',  'i',  'o',  'u',  'y',  
+    '\0', 'a',  'c',  'e',  'i',  'n',  'o',  'u',  'y',  'y',  'a',  'c',
+    'd',  'e',  'e',  'g',  'h',  'i',  'j',  'k',  'l',  'n',  'o',  'r',
+    's',  't',  'u',  'u',  'w',  'y',  'z',  'o',  'u',  'a',  'i',  'o',
+    'u',  'g',  'k',  'o',  'j',  'g',  'n',  'a',  'e',  'i',  'o',  'r',
+    'u',  's',  't',  'h',  'a',  'e',  'o',  'y',  '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0',
+    '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a',  'b',  'd',  'd',  'e',  'f',  'g',  'h',
+    'h',  'i',  'k',  'l',  'l',  'm',  'n',  'p',  'r',  'r',  's',  't',
+    'u',  'v',  'w',  'w',  'x',  'y',  'z',  'h',  't',  'w',  'y',  'a',
+    'e',  'i',  'o',  'u',  'y',
   };
 
   unsigned int key = (((unsigned int)c)<<3) | 0x00000007;
@@ -203870,19 +203870,19 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
     {42802, 1, 62},        {42873, 1, 4},         {42877, 76, 1},
     {42878, 1, 10},        {42891, 0, 1},         {42893, 74, 1},
     {42896, 1, 4},         {42912, 1, 10},        {42922, 72, 1},
-    {65313, 14, 26},       
+    {65313, 14, 26},
   };
   static const unsigned short aiOff[] = {
-   1,     2,     8,     15,    16,    26,    28,    32,    
-   37,    38,    40,    48,    63,    64,    69,    71,    
-   79,    80,    116,   202,   203,   205,   206,   207,   
-   209,   210,   211,   213,   214,   217,   218,   219,   
-   775,   7264,  10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721, 
-   54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274, 
-   57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406, 
-   65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462, 
-   65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511, 
-   65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529, 
+   1,     2,     8,     15,    16,    26,    28,    32,
+   37,    38,    40,    48,    63,    64,    69,    71,
+   79,    80,    116,   202,   203,   205,   206,   207,
+   209,   210,   211,   213,   214,   217,   218,   219,
+   775,   7264,  10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721,
+   54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274,
+   57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406,
+   65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462,
+   65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511,
+   65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529,
   };
 
   int ret = c;
@@ -203918,7 +203918,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
 
     if( bRemoveDiacritic ) ret = fts5_remove_diacritic(ret);
   }
-  
+
   else if( c>=66560 && c<66600 ){
     ret = c + 40;
   }
@@ -204232,7 +204232,7 @@ static int FTS5_NOINLINE fts5PutVarint64(unsigned char *p, u64 v){
       v >>= 7;
     }
     return 9;
-  }    
+  }
   n = 0;
   do{
     buf[n++] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80);
@@ -204285,7 +204285,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5GetVarintLen(u32 iVal){
 ******************************************************************************
 **
 ** This is an SQLite virtual table module implementing direct access to an
-** existing FTS5 index. The module may create several different types of 
+** existing FTS5 index. The module may create several different types of
 ** tables:
 **
 ** col:
@@ -204293,21 +204293,21 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5GetVarintLen(u32 iVal){
 **
 **   One row for each term/column combination. The value of $doc is set to
 **   the number of fts5 rows that contain at least one instance of term
-**   $term within column $col. Field $cnt is set to the total number of 
-**   instances of term $term in column $col (in any row of the fts5 table). 
+**   $term within column $col. Field $cnt is set to the total number of
+**   instances of term $term in column $col (in any row of the fts5 table).
 **
 ** row:
 **     CREATE TABLE vocab(term, doc, cnt, PRIMARY KEY(term));
 **
 **   One row for each term in the database. The value of $doc is set to
 **   the number of fts5 rows that contain at least one instance of term
-**   $term. Field $cnt is set to the total number of instances of term 
+**   $term. Field $cnt is set to the total number of instances of term
 **   $term in the database.
 **
 ** instance:
 **     CREATE TABLE vocab(term, doc, col, offset, PRIMARY KEY(<all-fields>));
 **
-**   One row for each term instance in the database. 
+**   One row for each term instance in the database.
 */
 
 
@@ -204369,7 +204369,7 @@ struct Fts5VocabCursor {
 
 
 /*
-** Translate a string containing an fts5vocab table type to an 
+** Translate a string containing an fts5vocab table type to an
 ** FTS5_VOCAB_XXX constant. If successful, set *peType to the output
 ** value and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, set *pzErr to an error message
 ** and return SQLITE_ERROR.
@@ -204447,8 +204447,8 @@ static int fts5VocabInitVtab(
   sqlite3_vtab **ppVTab,          /* Write the resulting vtab structure here */
   char **pzErr                    /* Write any error message here */
 ){
-  const char *azSchema[] = { 
-    "CREATE TABlE vocab(" FTS5_VOCAB_COL_SCHEMA  ")", 
+  const char *azSchema[] = {
+    "CREATE TABlE vocab(" FTS5_VOCAB_COL_SCHEMA  ")",
     "CREATE TABlE vocab(" FTS5_VOCAB_ROW_SCHEMA  ")",
     "CREATE TABlE vocab(" FTS5_VOCAB_INST_SCHEMA ")"
   };
@@ -204467,10 +204467,10 @@ static int fts5VocabInitVtab(
     const char *zDb = bDb ? argv[3] : argv[1];
     const char *zTab = bDb ? argv[4] : argv[3];
     const char *zType = bDb ? argv[5] : argv[4];
-    int nDb = (int)strlen(zDb)+1; 
+    int nDb = (int)strlen(zDb)+1;
     int nTab = (int)strlen(zTab)+1;
     int eType = 0;
-    
+
     rc = fts5VocabTableType(zType, pzErr, &eType);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       assert( eType>=0 && eType<ArraySize(azSchema) );
@@ -204522,7 +204522,7 @@ static int fts5VocabCreateMethod(
   return fts5VocabInitVtab(db, pAux, argc, argv, ppVtab, pzErr);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Implementation of the xBestIndex method.
 **
 ** Only constraints of the form:
@@ -204531,7 +204531,7 @@ static int fts5VocabCreateMethod(
 **     term == ?
 **     term >= ?
 **
-** are interpreted. Less-than and less-than-or-equal are treated 
+** are interpreted. Less-than and less-than-or-equal are treated
 ** identically, as are greater-than and greater-than-or-equal.
 */
 static int fts5VocabBestIndexMethod(
@@ -204582,8 +204582,8 @@ static int fts5VocabBestIndexMethod(
   ** specifically - "ORDER BY term" or "ORDER BY term ASC" - set the
   ** sqlite3_index_info.orderByConsumed flag to tell the core the results
   ** are already in sorted order.  */
-  if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1 
-   && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0 
+  if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1
+   && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0
    && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].desc==0
   ){
     pInfo->orderByConsumed = 1;
@@ -204597,7 +204597,7 @@ static int fts5VocabBestIndexMethod(
 ** Implementation of xOpen method.
 */
 static int fts5VocabOpenMethod(
-  sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, 
+  sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
   sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCsr
 ){
   Fts5VocabTable *pTab = (Fts5VocabTable*)pVTab;
@@ -204678,7 +204678,7 @@ static int fts5VocabCloseMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
 
 static int fts5VocabInstanceNewTerm(Fts5VocabCursor *pCsr){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  
+
   if( sqlite3Fts5IterEof(pCsr->pIter) ){
     pCsr->bEof = 1;
   }else{
@@ -204704,9 +204704,9 @@ static int fts5VocabInstanceNext(Fts5VocabCursor *pCsr){
   Fts5IndexIter *pIter = pCsr->pIter;
   i64 *pp = &pCsr->iInstPos;
   int *po = &pCsr->iInstOff;
-  
+
   while( eDetail==FTS5_DETAIL_NONE
-      || sqlite3Fts5PoslistNext64(pIter->pData, pIter->nData, po, pp) 
+      || sqlite3Fts5PoslistNext64(pIter->pData, pIter->nData, po, pp)
   ){
     pCsr->iInstPos = 0;
     pCsr->iInstOff = 0;
@@ -204904,8 +204904,8 @@ static int fts5VocabFilterMethod(
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && eType==FTS5_VOCAB_INSTANCE ){
     rc = fts5VocabInstanceNewTerm(pCsr);
   }
-  if( rc==SQLITE_OK 
-   && !pCsr->bEof 
+  if( rc==SQLITE_OK
+   && !pCsr->bEof
    && (eType!=FTS5_VOCAB_INSTANCE || pCsr->pConfig->eDetail!=FTS5_DETAIL_NONE)
   ){
     rc = fts5VocabNextMethod(pCursor);
@@ -204914,8 +204914,8 @@ static int fts5VocabFilterMethod(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
-** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this 
+/*
+** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this
 ** routine to find out if it has reached the end of a result set.
 */
 static int fts5VocabEofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
@@ -204990,13 +204990,13 @@ static int fts5VocabColumnMethod(
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This is the xRowid method. The SQLite core calls this routine to
 ** retrieve the rowid for the current row of the result set. The
 ** rowid should be written to *pRowid.
 */
 static int fts5VocabRowidMethod(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor,
   sqlite_int64 *pRowid
 ){
   Fts5VocabCursor *pCsr = (Fts5VocabCursor*)pCursor;
@@ -205038,7 +205038,7 @@ static int sqlite3Fts5VocabInit(Fts5Global *pGlobal, sqlite3 *db){
 
 
 
-    
+
 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS5) */
 
 /************** End of fts5.c ************************************************/
@@ -205214,7 +205214,7 @@ static int stmtColumn(
       break;
     }
     case STMT_COLUMN_MEM: {
-      i = SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_MEMUSED + 
+      i = SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_MEMUSED +
             STMT_COLUMN_NSCAN - SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP;
       /* Fall thru */
     }
@@ -205254,11 +205254,11 @@ static int stmtEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
 /*
 ** This method is called to "rewind" the stmt_cursor object back
 ** to the first row of output.  This method is always called at least
-** once prior to any call to stmtColumn() or stmtRowid() or 
+** once prior to any call to stmtColumn() or stmtRowid() or
 ** stmtEof().
 */
 static int stmtFilter(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
   int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
   int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
@@ -205284,7 +205284,7 @@ static int stmtBestIndex(
 }
 
 /*
-** This following structure defines all the methods for the 
+** This following structure defines all the methods for the
 ** stmt virtual table.
 */
 static sqlite3_module stmtModule = {
@@ -205328,8 +205328,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3StmtVtabInit(sqlite3 *db){
 __declspec(dllexport)
 #endif
 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_init(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  char **pzErrMsg, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  char **pzErrMsg,
   const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;